24B-048 (5) NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
27. Fixture "U" Exterior HID wall pack with one piece polycarbonate housing, white
reflector, gasketed polycarbonate refractor lens and one 50 watt metal
halide lamp. To be Hubbell Cat. No. NRG-308-50MH, or equal.
28. Fixture W" Enclosed and gasketed HID downlight with tempered prismatic lens, 70
watt metal halide lamp. to be Prescolite Cat. No. 90M7-70/75MHFE-
M8, or equal
29. Fixture "W" Surface cylinder HID downlight with tempered glass lens, 100 watt
metal halide lamp, seamless aluminum housing, baked white enamel
finish and integral ballast. To be Prescolite Cat. No. HD l OC 13-W-
120V, or equal.
30. Fixture "X" 23" diameter shatter resistant white acrylic globe with post fitter base
and one (1) 100 watt red A19 lamp mounted to architectural designed
base. See Architectural Details. To be Progress Cat. No. P5470-60,
or equal.
31. Exit Light Die cast 120 volt LED stencil face exit light with white frame, white
face, red letters, number of faces and mounting as shown on Drawings.
To be Prescolite Cat. No. LED-R-1-W (single face) and Cat. No.
LED-R-2-W (double face), or equal.
32. Emergency Battery Unit Surface mounted self contained unit complete with Nicad batteries,
solid state charger, test switch, twin adjustable "hit" lamp heads and
beige finish. To be Prescolite Cat. No. EDS4-NB, or equal.
33. Fixture "SL I" Twenty-five foot round tapered steel pole (double luminaire) with two
250 watt metal halide luminaires, wide square distribution including,
anchor bolts, templates, all mounting hardware and dark bronze finish.
To be Kim Cat. No. DM/VLP25W3/250MH120/DB-P/PTRS256812-
ODM/DB-P.
34. Red Lamp Sleeves to be provided shall be:
Fixture "K1" - ALP Cat. No. PAL24T8R or equal (24" long).
Fixture"L 1"and "S 1"-ALP Cat. No.PAL 48T8R or equal(48" long).
Provide two end caps per sleeve for all units.
ELECTRICAL 16100-27
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
13. Fixture "J" Wall sconce with chrome brackets and front plate,perforated aluminum
front plate on acrylic back plate and one 1F38 quartz lamp. To be
Visa Cat. No. CB5100-1F38-CB-CB-SPD-BA. No substitutions.
14. Fixture "K" Two foot by two foot 2-U lamp fluorescent troffer with acrylic
prismatic lens, flush aluminum door, electronic ballast and T8 lamps.
To be Columbia Cat. No. 4PS22-232U6G-FAAI2-EB8120,or equal.
15. Fixture "K1" Two foot by two foot 4 lamp fluorescent troffer with acrylic prismatic
lens,flush aluminum door, electronic ballast and T8 lamps with red
lamp sleeves. To be Columbia Cat. No. 4PS22-417G-FAA12-
4EB8120, or equal.
16. Fixture "L" Four foot long, two lamp fluorescent strip with electronic ballast, T8
lamps, Columbia Cat. No. CS-240, or equal. Provide wire guard
"WG" where indicated on Plans.
17. Fixture "Ll" Same as Fixture "L" except provide lamps with red sleeves (for red
"alarm lights").
B. Fixture "M" Exterior recessed step light with die cast face plate, cast aluminum
housing alzak reflector, cast lens guard, black powder coat finish and
one (1) 50 watt metal halide lamp. To be McPhilben Cat. No. 946-C-
50MH-120-BLP-CG, or equal.
19. Fixture "N" Four foot long, two lamp wall bracket with polycarbonate lens, T8
lamps and electronic ballast. To be Vista Cat. No. 3134-2Z-T8, or
equal.
20. Fixture "O" Unused.
21. Fixture "P" Recessed compact fluorescent shower light with fresuel lens, gasketing
with wet label and two 26 watt PL lamps. To be Lightolier Cat. No.
8096FCLW-7226TI20, or equal.
22. Fixture "Q" 42" long surface miniature fluorescent undercabinet light, acrylic
prismatic lens, white enamel finish housing and T5 lamps. To be
Alkco Cat. No. HP213, or equal.
23. Fixture "R" Same as Fixture "Q" except 32" long with T5 lamps. To be Alkco
Cat. No. HP138, or equal.
24. Fixture "S" Four foot long, two lamp surface mounted fluorescent with acrylic
prismatic wraparound lens, electronic ballast, T8 lamps and baked
white enamel fixture housing. To be Columbia Cat. No. WC240A-
120, or equal.
25. Fixture "Sl" Same as Fixture "S" except provide lamps with red sleeves (for red
"alarm lights").
26. Fixture "T" Compact fluorescent wall pack with high impact polycarbonate wrap-
around lens, gasketed, corrosion resistant white polymer finish base
plate and one (1) 13 watt PL lamp. To be Kenall Cat. No. 3813, or
equal.
ELECTRICAL 16100-26
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE
1. Fixture "A" Two foot by four foot, 3 lamp fluorescent static troffer with parabolic
semi-specular non-iridescent aluminum baffles, electronic ballast, T8
lamps. To be Columbia Cat. No. P424-332G-LD36-S-3EB81230, or
equal.
2. Fixture "Al" Same as Fixture "A", except provide with two (2) electronic ballasts
for dual level switching to be Columbia Cat. No. P424-332G-LD36-S-
(2)EB8120. See Diagram on Drawing E6.
3. Fixture "A2" Same as Fixture "Al", except with 78 cell low glare parabolic louver.
To be Columbia Cat. No.P424-332G-LD613-S-(2)EB8120with two(2)
electronic ballasts for dual level switching.
4. Fixture "B" Two foot by two foot, 2 - U lamp fluorescent static troffer with
parabolic semi-specular non-iridescent aluminum baffles, electronic
ballast, T8 lamps. To be Columbia Cat. No. P422-232U6G-LD33-S-
EB8120, or equal.
5. Fixture "C" Two foot by four foot 2 lamp fluorescent troffer with acrylic prismatic
lens, flush aluminum door, electronic ballast, and T8 lamps. To be
Columbia Cat. No. 4PS24-232G-FA-AI2-EB8120, or equal.
6. Fixture "D" Eight foot long industrial fluorescent with uplight,spring loaded turret-
type sockets, baked white enamel finish, channel and reflector
connectors, full end plates at end of rows, shatter proof lamp sleeves,
electronic ballast, and high output lamps. To be Columbia Cat. No.
KL8-296HO-EB 12120, or equal.
7. Fixture "E" Surface compact fluorescent 13" diameter drum with baked white
enamel housing, clear alzak cone and two (2) 26 watt PL lamps. To
be Kurt Versen Cat. No. P602, or equal.
8. Fixture "F" Adjustable wall bracket with perforated
(uplight) housing, pebbled anodized aluminum reflector, die cast aluminum end
caps, swivel yoke, remote ballast, and 70 watt metal halide lamp.
Color by Architect. To be SPI Lighting Cat. No. ECR3606, or equal.
9. Fixture "F1" Same as Type "F" except used as wall
(downlight) bracket downlight.
10. Fixture "G" Two (2) lamp compact fluorescent downlight with electronic factor
ballasts and 26 watt quad tube lamps. To be Kurt Versen Cat. No.
P634, or equal.
11. Fixture "H" Same as Fixture "G", except one (1) 26 watt PL lamp. To be Kurt
Versen Cat. No. P632, or equal.
12. Fixture "I" Unused
ELECTRICAL 16100-25
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
D. Alternate No. 2 shall be the lump sum price for all labor and materials necessary for and
reasonably incidental to the extra work as described below:
1. Pumps P-3 through P-10 (inclusive) shall be eliminated. Circuit breakers in respective
panels shall become spares. All disconnects, homeruns, etc. shall be eliminated.
2. Seven UH-3's shall become 1/4 HP, 1 phase, 120V. Each will be wired to a dedicated
20 amp, 1 pole circuit breaker in Panel "LRB".
3. Three UH-2's and one UH-5 shall be wired to a 20 amp, 1 pole circuit breaker in Panel
"LRB".
ELECTRICAL 16100-24
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
D. All outlet boxes installed in masonry shall be so set that their outer edges are 1/4" back of finished
surface.
E. Outlet boxes shall not be supported by the conduit. Suitable means shall be provided to support
the outlet box to take the weight of the fixture.
F. Fixture outlet boxes used as junction boxes or outlets not used, shall be provided with covers.
3.06 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's
printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and
materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Electrical Subcontractor and be
included in his bid.
3.07 TIME, MANNER, AND REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTING SUB-BIDS
A. Sub-bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provision of the General Laws (Ter. Ed.)
Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44L, as amended. The time and place for submission of sub-bids
shall be as set forth under INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS.
B. Each sub-bid filed with the Awarding Authority must be accompanied by BID BOND, CASH, OR
CERTIFIED CHECK, OR A TREASURER'S CHECK OR CASHIER'S CHECK issued by a
responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City of Northampton in the amount stipulated
in the INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS. A sub-bid accompanied by any other form of bid deposit
than those specified will be rejected
C. Each sub-bid submitted for the work under this Section shall be on a form furnished by the
Awarding Authority, as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as
amended.
D. The following describes by class of work, each class of work requiring labor and materials which,
in the opinion of die Awarding Authority, based upon an investigation of the work involved, is
customarily performed in that sub-trade under subcontract with a sub-bidder for the sub-trade, and
which is estimated by the awarding authority to cost in excess of Ten Thousand Dollars, and only
each class of work described shall be a class of work for which a sub-bidder for that sub-trade
must list the information required in the "Form for sub-bid":
E. The work to be done under this Section is shown on Drawings numbered: T1, L1 through L5
inclusive, S1 through S8 inclusive, Al through A15 inclusive, FP1 through FP4 inclusive, P1
through P4 inclusive, H1 through H6 inclusive, SE I, E1 through E6 inclusive.
3.08 ALTERNATE BIDS
A. See Section 01030 for a general description of the Base and Alternate Bids. Work of the
Electrical Subcontractor is more specifically described below.
B. Alternates Nos. 1 and 3 do not affect the work of this Section.
C. The Base Bid shall be the lump sum price for all labor and materials necessary for and reasonably
incidental to providing all electrical work specified and shown on the Drawings, less the cost of
all extra work described in the Alternates.
ELECTRICAL 16100-23
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
C. Ends of all conduits shall be reamed and all joints made waterproof. Connections to junction
boxes shall be double locknut and bushing, using insulated bushings on conduit 1-1/4" or larger.
Grounding bushings shall be provided at all panel connections.
D. Conduit connections to motor frames shall have minimum of 18" of flexible steel conduit to
eliminate vibrations and noise being transferred to other parts of the building, with cable jumper
across greenfield and fittings. This flexible conduit shall also be installed at ceiling mounted
lighting fixtures to facilitate alignment of fixtures.
3.04 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Installation of all lighting fixtures shall be done by experienced mechanics. Lighting fixtures shall
not be installed where finished coat of paint has been applied to ceiling and walls until paint is
thoroughly dry.
B. Lighting fixtures in equipment rooms shall not be installed until after all piping and ductwork is
in place. Lighting fixtures layout shown on the Drawings is typical layout, but may be modified
to provide adequate lighting of the equipment space according to final construction conditions.
Any relocation of fixtures due to duct or piping interference shall be as directed by the Architect,
at no expense to the Owner.
C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for proper co-ordination of all lighting fixture
locations. Provide support for all fixtures mounted on or recessed in hung ceiling. He shall
confer with Ceiling Subcontractor and Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor to co-ordinate
lighting system with other trades.
D. Provide and install suitable cover plate or canopy for each fixture outlet box where the fixture
does not provide a suitable cover.
E. Fixtures located on exterior of building shall be installed with cadmium-plated brass screws and
gasketed.
F. All pendant type fixtures in the same room shall be installed at a uniform height from the floor
and shall hang plumb.
G. Upon completion of the installation of the lighting fixtures and lighting equipment, they must be
in first-class operating order and in perfect condition as to finish,etc. Check for proper operation
and appearance, alignment of fixtures and proper placement of lenses, louvers, lamps and other
light controlling or modifying appurtenances.
3.05 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Receptacle boxes,unless otherwise noted,shall be approximately 18"above finished floor,aligned
above or below closest block course, except at locations where wall mounted equipment precludes
this mounting height. At such locations, receptacle height shall be as directed by the Architect.
Switch outlets shall be 48" above finished floor, unless aligned above or below closest block
course. The Electrical Subcontractor shall check with the Architectural and Structural Plans for
interferences.
B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to the weather and wet locations, shall be of the
threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket.
C. Pull boxes shall be adequate size to accommodate the conductors installed therein without exces-
sive bending of the conductors, which would damage the conductor insulation.
ELECTRICAL 16100-22
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall endeavor to layout and perform his work in such a manner as
to cause no delay in the construction by other trades.
B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall verify all measurements and shall be responsible for the
correctness of same. No allowance will be made for differences between actual measurements and
those shown on plans.
C. If, in laying out his work, the Electrical Subcontractor finds that the work of other trades might
interfere with his, the Architect shall be notified.
D. The locations of outlets, apparatus, and equipment are approximate only and the runs of feeders,
mains, and branches are not necessarily to be made exactly as shown on the plans. The exact
locations of such work shall be determined after full consideration has been given to work of other
trades and without changes in the design of the systems. The entire installation shall conform to
the latest issue of the National Electrical Code and local inspection authorities.
E. Electrical equipment, such as junction and pull boxes, control, and apparatus, shall be made
accessible.
F. All wiring shall be concealed in finished spaces, except as otherwise specified.
3.02 GROUNDING
A. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed non-current carrying metallic parts of
electrical equipment,metallic raceway systems,grounding conductor in non-metallic raceways and
neutral conductor of the wiring system shall be grounded. The ground connection shall be made
at the main service equipment.
B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install all material required for the grounding and/or
bonding in the building of all equipment,power and lighting systems installed under this Contract.
C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall make tight and proper all metallic components and equipment
to one another and to ground, using a positive foolproof system of connections. Provide and
install bonding and grounding conductors with approved termination where required, conforming
with the latest National Electrical Code and other applicable specification standards.
D. A #12 AWG insulated equipment ground conductor shall be installed in each length of flexible
metallic conduit connection to motors, recessed lighting fixtures and other equipment components
for continuity. Positive ground connections with the ground wire shall be made at each outlet box,
lighting fixture, motor and other equipment components by means of positively secured ground
clamp in each.
3.03 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. All conduit shall be installed so as to provide the straightest possible run with not more than the
equivalent of three 900 bends in a single run. Where more bends are necessary, the Electrical
Subcontractor shall provide suitable pull boxes.
B. Conduit shall be fished and cleaned and dry before pulling wires and shall be suitably protected
against entrance of dirt and moisture during construction.
ELECTRICAL 16100-21
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
F. Data outlets shall be furnished with plates having 1, 2 or 3 eight position modular jacks (Hubbell
5110 Series, Category 5) mounted in 1, 2 or 3 position wall plate (Hubbell FP11, FP12, and
FP13); Electrical Subcontractor to make up terminations.
2.17 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
A. Lightning protection system shall be a UL 96A master labeled system protecting the entire
building,consisting of air terminals on roofs, chimneys and stacks;bonding of structure and other
metal objects; grounding electrodes; and interconnecting conductors.
B. Manufacturer shall be a company specializing in lightning protection equipment with minimum of
five(5)years documented experience and a member of the Lightning Protection Institute. Installer
shall be an authorized installer of manufacturer with minimum of five (5) years documented
experience and a member of the Lightning Protection Institute.
C. Components shall be in accordance with ANSI/UL 96, as follows:
1. Air Terminals: Copper
2. Air Terminal for Chimney: Lead-coated copper.
3. Grounding Rods: Solid copper.
4. Ground Plate: Copper.
5. Conductors: Copper.
6. Connectors and Splicers: Bronze.
D. Protect elements surrounding work of this Section from damage or disfigurement.
E. Install system in accordance with UL 96A. Obtain the services of Underwriters Laboratories,Inc.
to provide inspection and certification of the lightning protection system under provisions of UL
96A. Obtain UL Master Label and attach to building at location directed by Architect.
F. Submit shop drawings showing layout of air terminals, grounding electrodes, and bonding
connections to structure and other metal objects. Include terminal, electrode, conductor and
conduit sizes, and connection and termination details including sealing of penetrations through
roof. Ensure all interconnecting drops and runs in finished areas t be concealed.
2.18 CORD REELS
A. Cord reels shall have automatic spring retraction, racket lock, lifetime lubrication,external spring
tension adjustment, adjustable ball stop on cord, cord and plug(NEMA 5-20P)connection at reel,
and NEMA 5-20R weatherproof connector on cord.
B. Cord shall be 3 conductor, 14 gauge, SJO, 40 foot length.
C. Units shall be Daniel Woodhead Cat. No. 943 with No. 15W33 "Watertite" connector with
stainless steel cord grip, or equal.
ELECTRICAL 16100-20
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
ROW B. Arrange for service from Massachusetts Electric Company and pay all charges and fees in connec-
tion therewith.
C. Massachusetts Electric Company will furnish and install the meter, current transformers, C.T.
wiring, padmount transformer, and will make transformer primary and secondary connections.
D. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install the current transformer compartment,pulling
section, meter socket, conduit between the meter socket and C.T. compartment, service lateral
conduit and wire from pulling section to padmount transformer, transformer primary and
secondary cable terminations, and primary cable, transformer base, and shall furnish and install
any additional material and labor required for a complete installation.
E. The system shall be properly grounded as required by the Massachusetts Electric Code. Ground
cable shall be secured to the water service with an approved clamp; bond water pipe sections as
required by Section 250-81 MEC. Also install a concrete encased electrode as required by that
section.
2.14 DAMPER CONNECTIONS
A. At all exhaust fans, furnish wiring between fan motor and motor operated damper. Damper to
open when fan runs.
2.15 CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM
A. Arrange for and co-ordinate the installation of cable television service to the building. Interior
distribution will be arranged for by the Owner at a later date.
B. The local cable TV company shall furnish and install cable from street to entrance board and shall
terminate the cable there.
C. All costs of the local cable TV company for labor and materials furnished by them shall be
included in the Electrical Subcontractor's bid price.
D. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide the conduit with pull cord, backboard, power outlets,
and all other required components not provided by the cable company.
2.16 DATA CABLE SYSTEM
A. The building's internal data cable system will be wired by the Electrical Subcontractor.
B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install conduit, cable, terminators, backboards, and
sleeves as shown on the Drawings.
C. Each data outlet shown on the Drawings shall consist of a 4" x 4" box with single gang plaster
ring with blank plate, 1" conduit extended up in wall and out into space above corridor ceiling
terminating in a bushing within 2" of the wall line.
D. Cable from satellite hubs (IDFs) to main hub (MDF) shall be fiber optic, Anixter No. 370-947-
FTDI-12, or equal, run in corrugated plastic "inner duct". Leave 10 feet of extra cable at each
end.
E. Cable from outlets to satellite hubs(IDFs)or outlets to main hub (MDF)shall be 4 pair 24 gauge
solid copper conductor, Level 5, non-shielded PVC jacket. Multiple runs from the same location
may be combined in a cable with overall PVC jacket.
ELECTRICAL 16100-19
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
d. No welding of contacts. Transfer switch must be operable to alternate source
after the withstand current tests.
e. Dielectric tests at 1960 volts, rms, minimum after the withstand current test.
8. All production units shall be subjected to the following factory tests:
a. The complete automatic transfer switch shall be tested to ensure proper operation
of the individual components and correct overall sequence of operation and to
ensure that the operating transfer time, voltage, frequency, and time delay
settings are in compliance with the Specification requirements.
b. The complete automatic transfer switch shall be subjected shall be subjected to
a dielectric strength test per NEMA Standard ICS 1-109.05.
9. The control panel shall meet or exceed the voltage surge withstand capability in
accordance with IEEE Standard 472-1974(ANSI C37.90A-1974)and the impulse with-
stand voltage test in accordance with the proposed NEMA Standard ICS 1-109.
10. The automatic transfer switch control panel shall utilize solid state sensing for automatic,
positive operation. The following shall be provided:
a. For three phase switches, all phases of the normal shall be monitored line-to-
line. Close differential voltage sensing shall be provided. The pickup voltage
shall be adjustable from 72% to 100% of nominal, and the dropout voltage shall
be adjustable from 70% to 98% of the pickup value. The transfer to emergency
will be initiated upon reduction of normal source to 85% of nominal voltage,
and retransfer to normal shall occur when normal source restores to 95% of
nominal.
11. Accessories
a. Switches shall include a time delay to ignore momentary outages, It shall delay
closing of the engine start contracts for a fixed time of 3 seconds.
b. Switches shall include a time delay on transfer from normal to emergency, field
adjustable from 0 to 60 seconds.
C. Switches shall include a time delay on retransfer from emergency to normal,
field adjustable from 1 to 30 minutes. The time delay shall be automatically
bypassed if the emergency source fails and the normal source is available.
d. The switches shall include voltage and frequency sensing of the emergency
source and shall be factory set to allow transfer to emergency when that source
is at approximately rated voltage and frequency.
e. Gold plated contacts rated 10 amps, 32 volts DC which close when the normal
source fails
shall be provided to initiate engine starting.
2.13 ELECTRIC SERVICE
A. Electric service shall be size as shown on the Drawings, 208Y/120 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz, ^'
underground.
ELECTRICAL 16100-18
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
manufacturer's standard color. Side panels shall be lockable and easily removed for
servicing. Top mounted exhaust silencer with rain shield over the exhaust opening. A
battery box heater shall be included.
J. The automatic transfer switch shall consist of a power transfer module and a control module,
interconnected to provide complete automatic operation. The automatic transfer switch shall be
mechanically held and electrically operated by a single-solenoid mechanism energized from the
source to which the load is to be transferred. The switch shall be rated for continuous duty and
be inherently double-throw. The switch shall be mechanically interlocked to ensure only one of
two possible positions-normal or emergency. The automatic transfer switch shall be suitable for
use with emergency sources, such as an engine or turbine generator source, or another utility
source.
1. All main contacts shall be of silver composition. The operating transfer time in either
direction shall not exceed one-sixth (1/6) of a second.
2. All contacts, coils, springs, and control elements shall be conveniently removable from
the front of the transfer switch without major disassembly or disconnection of power
conductors.
3. The control module shall be supplied with a protective cover and be mounted separately
from the transfer switch for ease of maintenance. Sensing and control logic shall be
solid-state and mounted on plug-in printed circuit boards. Printed circuit boards shall be
keyed to prevent incorrect installation. Interfacing relays shall be industrial control
grade, plug-in type with dust covers and locking clips.
4. The automatic transfer switch shall conform to the requirements of NEMA Standard
ICS 2-447 and Underwriters' Laboratories UL-1008 and shall be UL listed as follows:
a. For use in emergency systems in accordance with Articles 517 and 700 of the
National Electrical Code.
b. Rated in amperes for total system transfer including control of motors, electric-
discharge lamps, electric-heating and tungsten-filament lamp load.
5. The automatic transfer switch shall be rated to withstand the 3,375 rms symmetrical short
circuit current available at the automatic transfer switch terminals, with the type of over
current protection, voltage and X/R ratio as shown on the plans.
6. The automatic transfer switch shall be mounted in a Type 1 enclosure. Switch and
accessory- devices shall be Kohler Company, Cat. No. K168341-600 with No. 14C and
14D auxiliary contacts.
7. Certified laboratory test data on a switch of the same design and rating shall be provided
to confirm the following switching abilities:
a. Overload and endurance per Tables 21.2 and 23.2 of UL-1008.
b. Temperature rise tests after the overload and endurance tests to confirm the
ability of the transfer switches to carry their rated current within the allowable
temperature limits of the insulation in contact with current carrying parts.
C. Withstand current tests per Paragraph 25 of UL-1008 for 35,000 amperes mis
•ymrnetrical, at 480 volts and X/R radio of 6.6.
ELECTRICAL 16100-17
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
3. Voltmeter-ammeter phase selector switch.
4. Lights to indicate high or low meter scale.
5. Direct reading pointer-type frequency meter 3-1/2", .5% accuracy, 45 to 65 Hz scale.
6. Panel illuminating lights.
7. Battery charging voltmeter.
8. Coolant temperature gauge.
9. Oil pressure gauge.
10. Running time meter.
11. Voltage adjust rheostat.
I. Accessories
1. Block heater, 1,550 watt, 120 volt AC. Thermostatically controlled to maintain engine
coolant at proper temperature to meet the start-up requirement of NFPA-99 regulation.
2. Over voltage protection will shut down the unit after one second of 15% or more over
voltage.
3. Line circuit breaker of 600 amperes, 3 poles.
4. Battery rack, battery cables, 12 volt battery capable of delivering the manufacturer's
recommended minimum cold-cranking amps required at 0°F shall be supplied dry, along
with separate electrolyte which will be added just prior to start up.
5. 10 ampere automatic float battery charger with constant voltage regulation, current
limiting capability, cranking disconnect relay, temperature compensated for ambients
from -20°F, voltmeter and ammeter, equipped for conduit installation.
6. Gas proof, seamless, stainless steel, flexible exhaust connection, and engine exhaust
silencer rated for residential application. Exhaust noise shall be limited to 85 dba as
measured at 10' in a free field environment.
7. Two flexible fuel lines.
8. Generator strip heater, 200 watt, 120 volt, single phase, for high humidity application.
9. Remote annunciator shall monitor all controller functions described in Paragraph "j." of
the Controller Section, plus line power and generator power monitoring. An integral
lamp test and horn silence switch shall be included, as required to meet NFPA-110.
10. Two hundred seventy five(275)gallon dual wall base mounted day tank with a 120 volt,
1 phase motor driving a positive displacement pump. Tank shall be equipped with float
switch, sight glass or level gauge, low fuel level alarm contacts, and electric shut-off
solenoid.
11. Weather housings shall be constructed of rugged steel, cleaned, phosphated, and
electrocoat painted inside and out with rust inhibiting primer and an exterior coat of the
ELECTRICAL 16100-16
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
C. Speed sensing and a second independent starter motor disengagement systems
shall protect against engagement with a moving flywheel. Battery charging
alternator voltage will not be acceptable for this purpose.
d. The starting system shall be designed for restarting in the event of a false engine
start, by permitting the engine to completely stop and then re-engage the starter.
e. Cranking cycler with ten second "ON" and "OFF" cranking periods.
f. Over crank protection designed to open the cranking circuit after 60 seconds if
the engine fails to start.
g. Circuitry to shut down the engine when signal for high coolant temperature, low
oil pressure, or over speed are received.
h. Engine cool down timer factory set at five minutes to permit unloaded running
of the standby set after transfer of the load to normal.
i. Three-position (AUTOMATIC-OFF-TEST) selector switch. In the "TEST"
position, the engine shall start and run regardless of the position of the remote
starting contacts. In the "AUTOMATIC" position, the engine shall start when
contacts in the remote control circuit close and stop five minutes after those con-
tacts open. In the "OFF" position, the engine shall not start even though the
remote start contacts close. This position shall also provide for immediate
shutdown in case of an emergency. Reset of any fault shall also be accom-
plished by putting the switch to the "OFF" position.
j. Indicating lights to signal:
Switch "OFF" Flashing Red
Over Crank Red
Emergency Stop Red
High Water Temperature Red
Over Speed Red
Low Oil Pressure Red
High Battery Voltage Red
Low Battery Voltage Red
Low Fuel Red
System Ready Green
k. Test button for indicating lights.
1. Alarm horn with silencer switch.
m. Dry contacts to indicate "Generator Running". "Low Oil Pressure", "Over
Temperature", "Over Speed", and "Over Crank" for connection by Energy
Management System Contractor.
H. Instrument Panel Gages
1. Dual range voltmeter 3-1/2" 2% accuracy.
2. Dual range ammeter 3-1/2" 2% accuracy.
ELECTRICAL 16100-15
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
4. Positive displacement, full pressure lubrication oil pump, cartridge oil filters, dipstick ...,R
and oil drain.
5. Dry type replaceable air cleaner elements.
6. The turbocharged engine shall be fueled with No. 2 Diesel, 6 cylinder, 4 cycle, liquid
cooled by a unit mounted radiator, blower fan, water pump, thermostat,and radiator duct
flange which shall properly cool the engine with up to 0.5" H2O static pressure on the
fan.
F. Generator
1. The alternator shall be salient-pole, brushless, 12 lead reconnectable, self-ventilated of
drip-proof construction with amortisseur rotor windings and skewed stator for smooth
voltage waveform. The insulation shall meet the NEMA standard (MGI-22.40 and
16.40) for Class F and be insulated with epoxy varnish to be fungus resistant per
MILE-4970A. The excitation system shall be of brushless construction controlled by s
solid-state voltage regulator capable of maintaining voltage within +/-2% at any constant
load from 0 to 100% of rating. The regulator must be protected from the enviromnent
by conformal coating.
2. Upon one-step application of any load up to 90% of the rated load at 0.8 power factor,
the voltage dip shall not exceed 20% and shall recover to 2% of rated voltage within one
second.
3. The generator shall be capable of sustaining at least 300% of rated current for at least
10 seconds under a 3 phase symmetrical short by inherent design or by the addition of
an optional current boost system.
4. A resetable line current sensing circuit breaker with inverse time versus current response
shall be furnished which protects the generator from damage due to its own high current
capability. This breaker shall not trip within the 10 seconds specified above to allow
selective tripping of downstream fuses or circuit breakers under a fault condition. This
breaker shall not automatically reset preventing restoration of voltage if maintenance is
being performed. Field current sensing breaker will not be acceptable.
5. The generator, having a single maintenance-free bearing, shall be directly connected to
the flywheel housing with a semi-flexible coupling between the rotor and the flywheel.
G. Controller
1. Set-mounted controller capable of facing right, left, or rear shall be vibration isolated on
the generator enclosure. The controller shall be capable of being remote-mounted. The
microprocessor control board shall be conformal coated. Relays will only be acceptable
in high-current circuits. Circuitry shall be of plug-in design for quick replacement.
Controller shall be equipped to accept a plug-in device capable of allowing maintenance
personnel to test controller performance without operating the engine. The controller
shall include:
a. Fused DC circuits.
b. Complete two-wire start/stop control which shall operate on closure of a remote
contact.
ELECTRICAL
16100-14
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
N. Final connections between control equipment and wiring system shall be made under direct super-
vision of a representative of the manufacturer.
O. The manufacturer's representative shall demonstrate the operation of the alarm system to the
Architect and Owner.
P. The Electrical Subcontractor shall co-ordinate the system installation with the Northampton Fire
Chief.
Q. In addition to Shop Drawing requirements listed under Section 1.07 of this Specification, the fire
alarm system submittals shall also include emergency battery calculations.**********
2.14 EMERGENCY GENERATOR
A. Furnish a generator system that has been prototype tested, factory built, production tested, site
tested, of the latest commercial design, together with all accessories necessary for a complete
installation as shown on the plans and Drawings, and specified herein. The equipment supplied
and installed shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code, along with all applicable
local codes and regulations. All equipment shall be new, of current production of a national firm
which manufactures the generator and controls, transfer switch, and assembles the stand-by
generator sets as a matched unit, so that there is one source responsibility for warranty, parts, and
service through a local representative with factory-trained servicemen.
B. Submittal shall include prototype test certification and specification sheets showing all standard and
optional accessories to be supplied, schematic wiring diagrams, dimension drawings, and inter-
connection diagrams identifying by terminal number, each required interconnection between the
generator set, the transfer switch, and the remote annunciator panel if it is included elsewhere in
these Specifications.
C. An installation check, start-up, and building load test shall be performed by the manufacturer's
local representative. The engineer, regular operators, and the maintenance staff shall be notified
of the time and date of the site test.
D. The stand-by generator set shall be rated continuous standby duty at 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase, 4
wire, 0.8 power factor, 135 KW, 169 KVA, 468 amperes at 600' altitude, 77°F. The unit shall
be Kohler, or equal, Model 135ROZJ radiator cooled, "fast response" type, Diesel engine driven,
with all Kohler standard features and components.
1. The generator set shall be capable of starting motor loads of 510 KVA inrush, with a
maximum voltage dip of 35%.
2. Vibration isolators shall be provided between the engine generator and the welded struc-
tural steel base.
E. Engine: The 496 cubic inch displacement turbocharged engine shall deliver a minimum of 211
hp at a governed speed of 1,800 rpm. The engine shall be equipped with the following:
1. Engine-driven or electric fuel transfer pump capable of lifting fuel 6', fuel filters,electric
solenoid fuel shut-off valve, and a fuel distribution system with an isochronous governor
capable of +/- .33% steady-state frequency regulation.
2. 12 volt positive engagement solenoid shift-starting motor.
3. 78 ampere minimum automatic battery charging alternator with solid-state voltage regula-
tion.
ELECTRICAL 16100-13
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 19%
3• Whenever the acknowledge (signal silence) switch is operated, an amber LED willigla
indicating the signals have been silenced. Automatic ground detection circuitry sw be
capable of sensing and reporting either positive or negative ground conditions. A
separate ground detection LED shall be provided on the control unit.
4. Battery charging unit shall be a variable rate type, having both a high and trickle cbaW
capability. A high charge LED shall be illuminated whenever the battery is being
charged at a high rate. Meters shall be included to display both system voltage and
current. Batteries shall be lead calcium type, sized to provide 60 hours of standby under
AC power loss and sufficient power to operate alarm signals for 10 minutes at the end
of 60 hours.
5. A drill switch shall be provided to test alarm signalling circuits without activating thecity
or common alarm circuits.
6. The signal circuits shall operate supervised 24 volts DC polarized horns and lamps. The
circuits shall be supervised so as to report open or shorted lines by way of the sr m
trouble signal as well as illuminating its own amber LED. Provide sufficient modes
and circuits to power all equipment as shown.
E. Manual stations shall be Gamewell Model M46-28. Stations must be metal. Plastic stations will
not be acceptable.
F. Provide Gamewell Model R7 photoelectric detectors. The detector source shall be a pulsed
infrared LED for low power consumption under standby conditions at 24 VDC. Internal detector
circuits shall be shielded against electrical interference. It shall be resistant to transients, "noise*
and RF interference. The detector shall be capable of operating on a two-wire loop initiating
circuit.
G. Provide duct type smoke detectors Gamewell Model 70958 complete with auxiliary contacts,
sampling tubes, and remote indicator/test station. Install in discharge duct of each of the three
(3) air handling units.
H. Alarm horn and light shall be comprised of a flush modular 24 VDC vibrating horn and xenon
flasher, tamper resistant lamp assembly with red "FIRE" lettering and mounted together on a
molded red, Lexan frame. Unit shall be Gamewell Model MT-24-LSM-VFR.
I. The remote annunciator shall be flush mounted. Zone designations shall be as required.
Annunciator shall be Gamewell Model M7006-2, 12 zone type.
J. Heat detectors shall be Gamewell Series 50410 low profile type units and shall be fixed
temperature or rate of rise as suitable.
K. Digital communicator shall be provided to transmit alarm over telephone lines.
L. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions all additional wiring, conduit and outlet boxes required for the erection of a complete
system as described herein.
M. All new wiring shall be in conduit and of the same approved type as used for electric light and
power wiring, and shall meet the requirements of all national,state and local electrical codes. The
sizes of the different wires shall be as specified by the manufacturer. Color code shall be used
throughout. All wires shall be tagged at all junction points and shall be free from grounds or
crosses between the conductors. All junction boxes shall have nameplates identifying, "Fire
Alarm".
ELECTRICAL
16100-12
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
3. Latest edition of UL 864, including brownout protection.
All equipment shall be as manufactured by the Gamewell Corporation or equal by Simplex, Fire
Lite, or equal. Gamewell part numbers have been used to establish the desired type, quality, and
operating characteristics.
C. Operation
1. The actuation of any manual fire alarm station or the automatic actuation of any thermal
or smoke detector shall:
a. Notify the City of Northampton Fire Department through a digital communicator
and telephone lines.
b. Indicate the zone in alarm on the control panel annunciator by lighting the red
LED zone alarm indicator.
C. Indicate the zone on all remote annunciators.
d. Flash the alarm lights and sound the alarm signals in the building.
2. Failure of normal power, low battery voltage,grounded, open, or shorted line conditions
on the horn and alarm light circuits, ground and open condition on the alarm initiating
circuits as well as the master box trip circuit shall cause individual amber trouble LED's
to illuminate on the control panel as well as cause trouble signal to sound. The audible
trouble signal may be silenced with the trouble signal silencing switch, but amber trouble
indicators shall remain on until the trouble condition has been remedied. Restoration of
the circuits to normal shall automatically extinguish the trouble indicators without having
to operate additional controls.
3. In the event of a commercial power interruption, the system shall automatically transfer
to a lead calcium standby battery source of sufficient capacity to be in accordance with
NFPA 72B.
4. Panel shall provide common Form C alarm and trouble contacts, a green power on LED,
common alarm and trouble LED's, low battery, cable fault, bell loop, and earth ground
LED's. A lamp test switch shall be provided to test all LED's.
D. Control Panel
1. The control panel shall be a Gamewell Zans 400 control unit providing up to 12 zones.
Fire alarm controls shall be housed together in a surface mount enclosure. All switches,
visual indicators, meters, and other controls shall be mounted on modular pluggable
inserts and be visible, but protected behind a tempered glass door panel so that only
authorized personnel shall have keyed access. Provide as many initiating and signal
circuits as required.
2. The alarm initiating circuits shall be Class "B" two wire. The alarm indicating circuits
shall be Class "B" two wire. The panel shall provide a minimum of 5 amperes for signal
circuit power. Each alarm initiating circuit shall have its own red alarm and amber
trouble LED. In addition, each alarm initiating switch shall have its own "test" and
"disconnect" switch. The control shall have the ability to silence an alarm originating
from one alarm initiating zone, yet allow subsequent alarms to sound which originate
from other zones. Provide sufficient modules and circuits to power all equipment shown.
ELECTRICAL 16100-11
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16.E
H. The ATS, elevator, and air conditioning units shall be individually fed from the main distrllitim
panelboard "MDP". Provide space for two (2) additional 225A, 3 phase and two (2) llk.3
phase distribution breakers.
I. All panelboards and 100 amp feed for the future UPS, by others, and mechanical equipmem "
be individually fed from the emergency distribution panel "EP I". Provide space for future
breakers as called for on the "Panelboard Schedule".
2.12 PANELBOARDS
A. Furnish and install circuit breaker lighting and receptacle panelboards as indicated a the
panelboard schedule and where shown on the plans. Panelboards shall be equipped with d mul-
magnetic molded case circuit breakers with frame and trip ratings as shown on the sched*.
B. Circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic, trip indicating, an$have
common trip on all multi-pole breakers. Trip indication shall be clearly shown by the bcakcr
handle taking position between "ON" and "OFF" when the breaker is tripped. Connectiomw the
bus shall be bolt-on.
C. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breaker shall be the "distributed phase" or 'haat
sequence" type. All current-carrying parts of the bus assembly shall be plated. Main ratirpshaf
be as shown on the panelboard schedule.
D. Terminals for feeder conductors to the panelboard mains and neutral shall be UL listed as%*abk
for the type of conductor specified. Terminals for branch circuit wiring,both breaker and amtral,
shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified.
E. Panelboard circuit numbering shall be such that starting at the top, odd numbers shall be used is
sequence down the left-hand side and even numbers shall be used in sequence down the rigk hand
side.
F. A circuit directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the insw+t'Ie of
the door. The directory card shall provide a space at least 1/4" high by 3" long or equivakat for
each circuit. The directory shall be typed to identify the load fed by each circuit.
G. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater
than the rating shown on the panelboard schedule on the plans.
H. Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories and bear the UL label. PaneWar s
shall be Square D, Type NQOD for 120/208 volts, or equal by General Electric, Westinghouse,
or ITE.
2.13 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
A. Furnish and install an automatic and manual closed circuit, local energy, supervised auxiliary fire
alarm system complete with battery back-up. The system shall be furnished and installed in
accordance with the Plans and following Specifications.
B. All equipment shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall meet with the approval
of the Northampton Fire Department. The complete installation shall be made in accordance with:
1. Latest editions of Fire Protection Association Codes.
2. Massachusetts Electrical Code.
ELECTRICAL
16100-10
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
b. All single phase magnetic starters shall be single pole magnetic contactor without
overload protection, with "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switch in cover of general
purpose enclosure, Square D, Class 8502.
C. A control transformer shall be furnished and installed in each starter, fused, with
24 volt secondary. Starter coils shall be 24 volt.
d. Furnish a minimum of one auxiliary contact in each starter for use by others for
interlocking purposes.
4. Starters for two speed motors shall be for single winding or two winding as required for
the service.
E. Equivalent equipment by Cutler-Hamner, General Electric, or Westinghouse will be considered.
2.10 SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT
A. Service entrance equipment shall consist of main circuit breaker and current transformer compart-
ment. To be for 208Y/120 volt, 3 phase, 800 A service, cold sequence for metering.
B. Unit shall have an interrupting rating of 42,000 amperes RMS symmetrical, and shall be General
Electric, Cat. No. SE46M8 with TKM8 800 amp circuit breaker, or equal.
2.11 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD
A. Furnish and install distribution/power panelboards where shown on the Plans. Panelboard shall
be equipped with thenual-magnetic, molded case circuit breakers of frame and trip ratings as
required.
B. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs shall have current ratings as required. Such ratings shall
be established by heat rise tests with maximum hot spot temperature on any connector or bus bar
not to exceed 50°C above ambient. Heat rise tests shall be conducted in accordance with Under-
writers Laboratories Standard UL 67. The use of conductor dimensions will not be accepted in
lieu of actual heat tests.
C. Circuit breakers shall be equipped with individually insulated, braced and protected connectors.
The front faces of all circuit breakers shall be flush with each other. Large permanent, individual
circuit numbers shall be affixed to each breaker in a uniform position. Tripped indication shall
be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position between "ON" and "OFF". Provisions
for additional breakers shall be such that no additional connectors will be required to add breakers.
D. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit rating equal to 42,000 amps.
E. Panelboard assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of steel to be
as specified in UL Standard 50 for cabinets. The size of wiring gutters shall be in accordance
with UL Standard 67. Cabinets to be equipped with latch and tumbler lock on door of trim.
Doors over 48" long shall be equipped with three-point latch and vault lock. All locks shall be
keyed alike. End walls shall be removable.
F. The panelboard interior assembly shall be dead front with panelboard front removed. Main lugs
shall be barriered on five sides. The barrier in front of the main lugs shall be hinged to be fixed
part of the interior. The end of the bus structure opposite the mains shall be barriered.
G. Panelboard shall be listed by UL and shall bear the UL label. Panelboard shall be Square D I-
LINE, or equal by General Electric or Siemens-ITE.
ELECTRICAL 16100-9
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
E. Fixtures are identified by letter on the fixture schedule and by corresponding letter on Drawings.
Manufacturers' names and catalogue numbers are listed to show type and standard of quality.
Complete schedule of lighting fixtures shall be submitted to and approved by the Architect.
2.09 MOTOR STARTERS AND SWITCHES
A. Furnish and install motor starting,protecting, and controlling devices for motors where shown on
the Drawings.
B. Furnish and install heavy duty fused safety switches as indicated on plans and specifications.
1. All switches shall have switch blades which are fully visible in the OFF position with the
door open. All current-carrying parts shall be plated to resist corrosion and promote cool
operation.
2. Switches shall be quick-made and quick-break such that, during normal operation of the
switch, the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being restrained by the
operating handle after the closing or opening action of the contacts has started. The
handle and mechanism shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover, with positive
pad-locking provisions in the "OFF" position.
3. Switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless NEMA 3R
(rainproof) is specified on the plans. Enclosures shall have gray enamel, electro-
deposited on cleaned phosphatized steel, except as specified in Paragraph 6.
4. Switches shall be horsepower rated for 240 or 600 volts AC, as shown.
5. Fuses shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
6. Switches shall be Square D Heavy Duty type in NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R enclosures, or
equal.
C. Disconnect switches for 120 volt, single phase motors shall be single or double pole toggle
switches as specified, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings.
D. Motor starters shall be across-the-line magnetic type rated in accordance with NEMA Standards,
sizes and horsepower ratings. Starters shall be mounted in general purpose enclosures unless
otherwise indicated on the plans.
1. Across-the-line magnetic starters shall be equipped with double break silver alloy con-
tacts. All contacts shall be replaceable without removing power wiring or removing
starter from panel.
2. Coils shall be of molded construction, replaceable from the front without removing the
starter from the panel.
3. Overload relays shall be the melting alloy type with a replaceable control circuit module.
Thermal units shall be of one-piece construction and interchangeable. The starter shall
be inoperative if the thermal unit is removed.
a. All three phase magnetic starters shall have "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switch,
Square D, Class 8536, Form C, three-pole, three-phase of NEMA size *�*+
applicable, with three melting alloy overload relays and three-position H-O-A
switch in cover of general purpose enclosure.
ELECTRICAL 16100-8
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
8. Light Switches, 4 Way - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No.
1224-2, or equal.
9. Switch and Pilot Light-20 amp, 120 volt,side and back wired, red handle, Leviton Cat.
No. 1221-PLR, or equal.
10. Double pole switch - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No.
1222-2, or equal.
11. Key operated switches shall be of the same grade and rating as specified for toggle
switches.
12. Occupancy sensors shall consist of ceiling mounted passive infrared and ultrasonic
sensors, single pole or 3-way manual-off wall switches, and power/slave packs as
required. To be Watt Stopper No. CI-200 and W-500 sensors with No. A120-E power
pack, and No. S-120/277-E slave pack, or equal.
13. Power receptacles shall be flush type, of NEMA configuration shown, with matching
cord and cap, Leviton, or equal, as follows:
a. Type "R" - 50 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, Leviton Cat. No. 279.
b. Type "D" - 30 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, Leviton Cat. No. 278.
14. Wall plates shall be smooth Type 302 satin finish stainless steel with matching screws.
15. All switches and receptacles shall be ivory unless otherwise noted.
2.07 MULTI-OUTLET ASSEMBLY
A. Multi-outlet assembly shall be Wiremold Series G-4000, or equal, complete with wire clips,
couplings, barrier, cover, duplex isolated ground receptacles 18" o.c., or as shown on drawings,
and all other accessories required to complete the installation.
B. Provide, where shown on drawings, Wiremold Series G-3000, or equal, complete with wire clips,
couplings, cover, duplex isolated ground receptacles as shown, and all other accessories required
to complete the installation.
2.08 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Furnish and install lighting fixtures on all light outlets shown on plans. All lighting fixtures to
have label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Fixtures to be complete in all respects with all
required glassware and lamps. All lamps to be new. Furnish and install all required hardware
to fit in all type ceilings. Fixtures are to be cleaned after lamps and diffusers are installed. Any
chipped, cracked or otherwise defective material shall be replaced.
B. Fluorescent ballasts shall be solid state electronic type, approvable for use on their system by
Massachusetts Electric Co. Fixture/lamp combinations for which electronic ballasts are not
available shall be high power factor, energy efficient magnetic type,complete with automatic reset
thermal protector, and shall be CBM certified.
_ C. All fixtures shall be installed complete with lamps of the stated type and size; T-8 lamps shall be
3500 K.
D. All fixtures to be independently supported from building structure.
ELECTRICAL 16100-7
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
B. Conductors #10 AWG and smaller, Type THWN, solid.
C. Conductors#4 AWG through#8 AWG, Type THWN, stranded.
D. Conductors #3 AWG and larger, Type THW, stranded.
E. Branch circuit wiring located above lay in tile ceilings may be Type MC cable; single and multi-
circuit home runs shall be raceway and wire as specified.
F. Wire and cable for special systems shall be as specified in those specification sections.
G. Wire and Cable to be by Rome, Carol, American, AFC, or equal.
2.04 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to weather and wet locations shall be of the cast
aluminum, threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket.
B. Other outlet boxes and covers shall be galvanized or sheradized pressed steel as manufactured by
Steel City Electrical Co., General Electric Co., Raco, or approved equal.
2.05 NAMEPLATES
A. Furnish and install nameplates identifying all apparatus, controls, panels and safety switches. The
nameplates shall be Seton style 2060 engraved plastic, or equal, screw attached. Submit schedule
of nameplate lettering for approval.
2.06 WIRING DEVICES
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall install devices where shown on the plans. Where two or more
devices occur at one location, they shall be provided with a gang plate. All unused boxes to be
furnished with blank plates.
1. Duplex Receptacles -20 amp, 125 volt with grounding screw, side and back wired. To
be Leviton Cat. No. 53524, or equal.
2. Ground fault interrupting receptacles shall be Leviton Cat. No. 6898-HGI, or equal.
3. Weatherproof cover for receptacles shall be lockable, vertical, UL Listed, with Lexan
base and lid, 4 screw attachment, Tay Mac Cat. No. 20-3-5-0, or equal.
4. Duplex receptacles, isolated ground - 20 A, 125 V, side and back wired, Leviton Cat.
No. 5362-IG, or equal.
5. Duplex receptacles, surge protected, 20 amp, 125 volt, with replaceable surge
suppression module and audible alarm, ivory color. To be Eagle Cat. No. IG-1210V,
or equal.
6. Light Switches, Single Pole - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat.
No. 1221-2, or equal.
7. Light Switches, 3 Way - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No.
1223-2, or equal.
ELECTRICAL 16100-6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts Dc 1996
B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall instruct and fully demonstrate to such person c as the
Architect and/or Owner may designate, regarding the care and use of all systems a )aratus
pertaining thereto.
1.16 GUARANTEE
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his wort ; parts
for a period of one (1) year after date of substantial completion, and shall agree to C ptly
repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this p. A.
B. The Electrical Subcontractor Ehall! Pay fur repair of ddaiage to the building caused by &,fects in
ss work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by repacement
or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be
considered as being defective.
1.17 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Section 01700.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 RACEWAYS
A. Rigid galvanized steel or intermediate steel conduit shall be used for all raceway runs concealed
vertically in concrete, run under slabs, run in trenches or pits, exposed below 6' above floor, and
for service entrance conductor sweeps. Conduit shall comply with the latest applicable Federal
Specifications.
B. Electrical metallic tubing may be used for all raceways run in walls or partitions, run exposed
inside the building, or run concealed in or above furred spaces unless otherwise specified above.
Electrical metallic tubing shall comply with the latest applicable requirements of the National
Electrical Manufacturers Association. Couplings, connectors, and fittings for electrical metallic
tubing may be of the set screw type.
C. Raceways for site communications and site power and light shall be Schedule 40 PVC with solvent
welded fittings,or Type EB where shown to be encased in concrete. Use steel sweeps on conduit
3" and larger.
D. Flexible Steel Conduit shall be used for final connections to motors or other removable equipment
to facilitate removal and connections.
2.02 WIREWAYS
A. Wireways shall be made to accommodate conductors as required in accordance with applicable
rules of the National Electrical Code. To be of code gauge steel and supported as required by
Code.
2.03 CONDUCTORS
A. Conductors shall be 98% conductivity copper, with 600 volt insulation, and shall be of types
indicated below unless otherwise shown on the plans. Aluminum conductors shall not be used.
ELECTRICAL 16100-5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
General Contractor. Service shall be metered, 120/240 volt, single phase, sized as required.
Branch circuit wiring and duplex receptacles shall be as directed by the General Contractor. '
1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans,
elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to
supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work
indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements.
B. The Plans and Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied,
in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or
reasonably implied in both.
C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall assume all responsibility in scaling measurements from the
Drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all-offsets, fittings and
accessories that may be required. The Electrical Subcontractor shall carefully investigate the
structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly,
furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such
conditions, at no additional cost.
1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the
building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work
and that of other trades.
1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools,machinery, scaffolding,and transportation for completion of his Contract shall
be provided by the Electrical Subcontractor.
B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt,
60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light
his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc.
C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by
the individual Subcontractor.
1.14 WORK CONCEALED
A. All cable and raceway (except surface metal raceway) shall be installed concealed in all areas
except storage rooms, closets,and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms, except that in rooms
without ceilings, horizontal runs only may be exposed at ceilings.
B. Exposed runs shall be run straight and level, parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building.
1.15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. Prior to final acceptance, Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish three (3) sets of complete
instructions for the repair, maintenance, and operation of all systems installed under his Contract.
These instructions shall be typed or printed, and each set bound separately with durable covers.
ELECTRICAL 16100-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be
determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements.
B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified
testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General
Requirements.
1.06 PRODUCTS
A. All materials used shall be U.S. made, with the exception of items specifically noted otherwise,
new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function
properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of
manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of
types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings,or labels shall
conform to their requirements and be so labeled.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Electrical Subcontractor shall submit to the
Architect eight(8) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, and Shop Drawings,giving
all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished.
B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the
Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all
changes which may be required.
C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Electrical Subcontractor from
any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and
Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the Contractor.
D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings
or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications,
the Electrical Subcontractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved
materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect.
1.08 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He
shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the
proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance
of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work.
B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work.
1.09 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or
sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Section 01500.
1.10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install temporary light and power as specified in
Section 01500. The cost of the service and the cost of power consumed shall be borne by the
ELECTRICAL 16100-3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials'instructions .r
at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.04 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular
schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and super-
vision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work.
B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who
shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Electrical
Subcontractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or
replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins.
C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the
building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors' work resulting from the
execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to
the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Electrical Subcontractor, it is agreed between
the Owner and the Electrical Subcontractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally
determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the
Contract for the work in question.
D. The Electrical Subcontractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to
expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as
to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The
Electrical Subcontractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc.,
hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure
on the part of the Electrical Subcontractor to give proper information as above, he will be required
to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure.
E. The arrangement of all conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only,
and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine
the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Electrical Subcontractor shall lay out all
his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the
determining factor for all measurements.
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching.
Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be
performed by the Electrical Subcontractor installing such items.
G. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and
materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his
own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at
all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means.
H. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under
this Section until substantial completion of the project by the Owner.
1. The Electrical Subcontractor shall check the Architectural Plans and Specifications before ordering
any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of
the Architect before proceeding with the work.
ELECTRICAL 16100-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
SECTION 16100 - ELECTRICAL
(FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 INTENT
A. The Subcontractor under this Section shall furnish all labor, materials, appliances and equipment
necessary for completion of the electrical system, in accordance with this Section of the
Specifications and applicable Drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant,equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental
to the complete installation of all electrical work specified herein and/or indicated on the drawings,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. New Electric Service and Service Entrance Equipment.
2. Branch Circuit Wiring and Conduit.
3. Feeders.
4. Panelboards.
5. Lighting Fixtures and Lamps.
6. Fire Alarm System.
7. Communic=ation System.
8. Cable Television Service Entrance.
9. Data cable system.
10. Emergency generator.
11. Wiring devices and plates.
12. Power wiring to motors and equipment furnished by other trades or Owner including final
connections to equipment.
13. Arrange for inspections and perform tests.
14. Guarantee and instructions.
1.03 CODES, ORDINANCES A_ND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts
State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regula-
tions, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with
any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in
excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the
Architect rules otherwise.
ELECTRICAL 16100-1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
D. The following describes by class of work, each class of work requiring labor and materials which, 100%
in the opinion of the awarding authority, based upon an investigation of the work involved, is
customarily performed in that sub-trade under subcontract with a sub-bidder for the sub-trade, and
which is estimated by the Awarding Authority to cost in excess of Ten Thousand Dollars,and only
each class of work described shall be a class of work for which a sub-bidder for that sub-trade
must list the information required in the "form for sub-bid":
1. Sheet Metal Work
2. Insulation
3. Automatic Temperature Controls
4. Vehicular Exhaust Systems
5. Balancing
E. The work to be done under this Section is shown on Drawings numbered: T1, Ll through L5
inclusive, S1 through S8 inclusive, Al through A15 inclusive, FPl through FP4 inclusive, P1
through P4 inclusive, H1 through H6 inclusive, SE1, E1 through E6 inclusive.
3.13 ALTERNATE BIDS
A. See Section 01030 for a general description of the Base and Alternate Bids. Work of the HVAC
Subcontractor is more specifically described below.
B. The Base Bid shall be the lump sum price for all labor and materials necessary for and reasonably
incidental to providing all heating, ventilating and air conditioning work specified and shown on
the Drawings, less the cost of all extra work described in the Alternates.
C. Alternates Nos. 1 and 3 do not affect the work of this Section.
D. Alternate No. 2 shall be the lump sum price for all labor and materials necessary for and
reasonably incidental to the deduction in work required to delete the radiant heating system and
increase the unit heater sizes to units marked (ALT).
HVAC 15600-82
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
D. Any metal or especially covered areas that have been deformed shall be replaced with new
material and repainted to match the adjacent areas.
3.10 IDENTIFICATION
A. All piping, valves, controls and equipment on the project shall be identified as specified herein.
All marks of identification shall be easily visible from the floor or usual point of vision.
B. All piping shall be identified as to the service of the pipe and the normal direction of flow. The
letters shall be I" high and the flow arrows shall be at least 6" long. The letters and flow arrows
shall be made by precut stencils and black oil base paint with aerosol can or snap-on, pre-printed
plastic labels. Install identification in each room and additionally so that markers are not over 50
feet on center.
C. Each valve, except run-out valves, but including control valves, shall be tagged with a brass disc
1-1/2" in diameter. The disc shall contain a number, and a valve list shall be provided under
glass in the Boiler Room showing the location of the valve, the service and the valve and any
pertinent remarks regarding the operation of the valve. Securely fasten the discs to the valves
with brass "S" hooks or chains.
D. All panel mounted controls and instruments, and all equipment shall be identified by engraved
nameplates mounted just under the control or instrument. The engraved nameplates shall be
engraved on "Lamacoid", or approved equal plastic which will be black and show white letters
when engraved. Letters shall be 1/2" high.
E. No identification shall be done until all painting required under the Architectural section of these
Specifications has been accomplished.
3.11 SPARE PARTS
A. Filters: Each air handling unit and cabinet type unit heaters shall be provided with three (3)extra
sets of filters for each unit. One (1) set shall be installed by this Contractor after substantial
completion is issued and the two (2) remaining sets shall be delivered to the Owner.
B. Furnish a typewritten certificate confirming the above and stating the Owner designated location
to which the spare parts have been delivered. Delivery of parts shall be confirmed by the
Owner's representative, who shall countersign the Certificate.
3.12 TIME, MANNER, AND REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTING SUB-BIDS
A. Sub-bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provision of the General Laws (Ter. Ed.)
Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44L, as amended. The time and place for submission of sub-bids
shall be as set forth under INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS.
B. Each sub-bid filed with the Awarding Authority must be accompanied by BID BOND, CASH, OR
CERTIFIED CHECK, OR A TREASURER'S CHECK OR CASHIER'S CHECK issued by a
responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City of Northampton in the amount stipulated
in the INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS. A sub-bid accompanied by any other form of bid deposit
than those specified will be rejected.
C. Each sub-bid submitted for the work under this Section shall be on a form furnished by the
Awarding Authority, as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as
amended.
HVAC 15600-81
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
D. Total air quantities both supply and exhaust/return, shall be obtained by adjustment of fan speeds
and outdoor air/return air dampers, including building static pressure. Branch duct air quantities
shall be adjusted by volume or splitter dampers, and by adjustment of flow controls on VAV
boxes (set maximum and minimum positions). Dampers shall be permanently marked after air
balance is complete so that they can be restored to their correct position if disturbed at any time.
E. Volume adjusters may be used to balance air quantities at outlets and inlets providing final
adjustments do not produce objectionable sound levels or objectional drafts.
F. The HVAC Subcontractor shall record and submit to the Architect for evaluation and approval six
(6) copies of the complete air balance report. Replacement of adjustable pulleys, addition of
balancing dampers or pressure taps required to effect proper air balance shall be furnished and
installed by the HVAC Subcontractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.07 INSULATION
A. All pipe and duct insulation shall be installed by an independent insulation contractor regularly
engaged in that business.
B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls nor on branches running through radiator covers.
Longitudinal seams on jackets shall be located so that they are not visible from the floor. Remove
all stickers from covering.
C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed with
butt strips. Insulation shall run through all hangers and sleeves and have an 18 gauge sheet metal
saddle equal to three times the pipe diameter in length. All pipes over 2" in diameter shall be
supported through insulation by fitting a protection saddle to the thickness of the insulation inside
the vapor barrier jacket.
D. All fittings, valves, etc. shall be insulated with the proper factory pre-cut insulation. The ends
of the insulation shall be tucked snugly into the throat of the fitting and the edge adjacent to the
pipe covering tufted and tucked into fully insulated pipe fitting. The one piece PVC fitting cover
shall then be secured by taping the ends of the adjacent pipe covering.
3.08 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's
printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the drawings or not, and all labor and
materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the HVAC Subcontractor and be
included in his bid.
3.09 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN-UP
A. The entire Heating and Ventilating system shall be tested at completion of the building,and it shall
be established that all controls are calibrated accurately and performing satisfactorily and that all
units are heating and ventilating satisfactorily. The systems shall be checked for vibration and
excessive noise and all such conditions corrected.
B. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked and thoroughly
cleaned including coils, plenums, under equipment and any and all other areas around or in
equipment provided under this Section. Any filters used during construction shall be replaced with
new filters during final clean-up. ,
C. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked for painting damage,
and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas.
HVAC 15600-80
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
D. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping,joints,
and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components
as appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
E. After system has been determined to be leak-free, the Architect shall be notified and the test shall
be repeated in his or his representative's presence.
F. When delicate control mechanisms are installed in the piping system, they shall be removed during
the tests to prevent shock damage. This does not apply to control valves.
G. Leaks developing subsequent to these tests shall not be repaired by mastic or other temporary
means. All leaks shall be repaired by removal of the valve, fitting,joint, or section that is leaking
and reinstalling new material with joints as specified herein before.
3.05 CLEANING AND FLUSHING
A. All water circulating systems for the project shall be thoroughly cleaned before placing in
operation to rid the system of dirt, piping compound, mill scale, oil, and any and all other
material foreign to the water being circulated. Clean all strainers.
B. Extreme care shall be exercised during construction to prevent all dirt and other foreign matter
from entering the pipe or other parts of the system. Pipe stored on the project shall have the open
ends capped and equipment shall have all openings fully protected. Before erection, each piece
of pipe, fitting, or valve shall be visually examined and all dirt removed.
C. After system is complete, the Heating& Ventilating Subcontractor shall add trisodium phosphate
in an aqueous solution to the system at the proportion of one pound per fifty gallons of water in
the system. After the system is filled with this solution, the system shall be brought up to
temperature and allowed to circulate for two hours. The system shall then be drained completely
and refilled with fresh water. The Architect shall be given notice of this cleaning operation and
he or his representative shall be present to observe the cleaning operation, and, if he deems it
necessary, the cleaning operation shall be repeated.
D. After the system has been completely cleaned as specified herein, it shall be tested by litmus paper
or other dependable method and shall be left on the slightly alkaline side (ph = 7.5 plus or
minus). If the system is found to be still on the acid side, the cleaning by the use of trisodium
phosphate shall be repeated.
E. The HVAC Subcontractor shall not add any water treatment chemicals, or at any time "stop-leak"
compounds to the system.
3.06 WATER AND AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TESTS
A. After completion of the installation of the heating, ventilating, and exhaust systems, and prior to
acceptance by the Owner, all systems and appurtenances applicable to the above systems shall be
adjusted and balanced to deliver the water and air quantities as specified, indicated on the
drawings, or as directed.
B. Balancing shall be performed by an independent contractor affiliated with a national testing and
balancing agency, using methods recommended by the national agency.
C. Pump capacities shall be determined by differential pressure measurements. Water circuits shall
be adjusted by balancing cocks previously specified and not be temperature drop. All balancing
cocks shall be permanently marked after balance is complete so that they may be restored to their
correct position if disturbed.
HVAC 15600-79
a
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
C. As the work nears completion, all pipe cutting and threading, etc. shall be done in a location
approved by the Architect. "'
D. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to
remain as finished or be painted later. Should use of such an area be necessary, the HVAC
Subcontractor shall cover the working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner.
3.03 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. All piping shall be run true and straight at proper pitch without strain and shall be firmly
supported throughout. Provision for expansion and contraction shall be made with offsets or
expansion loops. All pipe shall be cut off clean and threaded with sharp dies, reamed and burrs
removed.
B. Where screwed fittings are used, bushings shall not be used from branch connections or reducers.
Connections to equipment shall be full size of tappings. Reductions in the run of pipe shall be
made with eccentric or concentric reducers as required for draining and venting.
C. All piping shall be run concealed throughout finished spaces either in furred spaces, shafts, chases,
or above hung ceilings.
D. Special care must be taken throughout the equipment rooms, vertical pipe shafts, above hung
ceilings, and elsewhere throughout all floors to maintain maximum headroom and clearances for
access to other equipment and to avoid conflict with electrical conduits, lighting fixtures, other
piping, ducts, and equipment of other trades.
E. Connections to equipment shall be made with unions or flanges to permit future replacement,
removal and servicing of equipment. Flexible connections where required to isolate movement
of equipment from piping system or of piping system from equipment, shall be as specified.
F. Before any part of the various piping systems is placed in operation, blow out piping with
compressed air and/or water to remove all chips and scale and flush and drain until all traces of
dirt, scale and other foreign matter have disappeared. Refer to other sections for additional
requirements.
G. Vent all high points and drain all low points throughout the system.
3.04 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS
A. All piping installed on the project, unless specifically shown otherwise, shall be hydraulically
tested as specified herein. The HVAC Subcontractor shall provide all equipment required to make
the tests specified herein. Piping may be tested a section at a time in order to facilitate the
construction.
B. The HVAC Subcontractor shall fill the section of pipe to be tested with water and bring the section
up to pressure with a test pump. These tests shall be conducted before any insulation is installed
and any insulation installed prior to these tests shall be removed. Gauges used in the tests shall
have been recently calibrated with a dead weight tester.
C. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the system is not less
than 1.5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not exceed the maximum pressure for
any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in the system under test. Make a check to verify
that the stress due to pressure at the bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90% of
specified minimum yield strength, or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9,
Code for Pressure Piping, Building Services Piping.
HVAC 15600-78
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts 16, 1996
4. All blades shall be constructed of cast aluminum housing and wh, Ion shaft
seal. Tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 210.
F. Hose Reel
1. Hose Reel supplied with 5 inch diameter x 32 feet long hose and diameter
g :inn r?^mrwr nozzIc.
2. The hose reel function shall be a latch and lock type with a spring housing
containing a high carbon steel drive spring to retract the hose. The neces:, )se length
is pulled from the reel and is latched and locked into position. To retract hose, the
hose is extended slightly and automatically retracted.
3. The hose reel shall be constructed of 1 i gauge steel sitie mo"ting plates supported by
steel channels. The hose reel drum shall be 16 gauge steel rolled into an 18 inch
diameter with an inner 6 inch tube that connects the hose to the 6 inch diameter side
discharge fitting. The drum shall be supported by bearings that will allow easy rotation
of the drum. The hose reel drum shall be supplied with a hose tracking bar to guide the
hose during the recoiling function. The hose reel shall be protected with a polyester
powder coating finish to resist corrosion.
4. The hose shall be series 4000 double ply constructed with an inner liner ply of woven
fiberglass coated with silicone and an exterior ply of woven Nomex coated with silicone
rubber. A spring steel helical wound spring is imbedded between the inner and outer
ply. The hose is then double wound with a treated Nomex cord and heat vulcanized to
provide grater strength and serviceability. The hose temperature shall be rated at 600
degree (F).
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3.01 CLEANING AIR SYSTEM
A. No air handling units shall be run for temporary heating, ventilating,testing,or otherwise without
filters in place.
B. Upon completion of construction and before testing, the interior of all air handling units and
plenums shall be vacuum cleaned to remove all construction dirt, dust, etc. before the units are
turned on, and clean filters shall be installed.
3.02 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DRILLING
A. Drilling of all holes 2"diameter and smaller required for the installation of heating and ventilating
piping and equipment shall be performed by the HVAC Subcontractor. Cutting and patching shall
be performed by the General Contractor in accordance with the General Conditions. All work and
materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a
minimum. Location for chases, openings, etc. shall be checked by the HVAC Subcontractor, and
error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other Divisions shall be the responsibility of the
HVAC Subcontractor, who shall make the corrections as his own expense.
B. Work shall include furnishing and locating inserts required before the floors and walls are built,
or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves and inserts
were not installed, or where incorrectly located. The HVAC Subcontractor shall do all drilling
required for the installation of hangers. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or
equipment shall be performed by the General Contractor.
HVAC 15600-77
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
11. Regulator assembly shall be provided to operate with an input pressure of 125 P.S.I. and
output pressure preset at 15 P.S.I. Regulator shall be provided with needle type gauge
to clearly show proper operating range of system and which can be visibly read from
floor level.
12. Release valve shall be attached to mounting bracket which can be easily positioned along
full length of track profile. Release valve shall be set for maximum speed of vehicle and
release of pneumatic nozzle at the threshold of exit door.
13. Telescopic support legs shall be zinc plated steel and be designed to fit into upper slot of
track profile. Outer square tube to be 1.75" and adjustable from 6 inches to 13 feet.
14. System must be designed to expand the track system to accommodate tandem vehicle
arrangement in the future by adding to proposed system. Systems which requires
replacement or major alteration of proposed system to meet tandem arrangement are not
acceptable.
D. Automatic Start Control Panel
1. The panel shall be manufactured and delivered as an operating System one series
controller.
2. The control panel shall contain the motor starter overload relay electronic timer 24 volt
transformer indicator light and push to test button in a NEMA 12 rated key lock electrical
enclosure with both pressure and heat sensors.
3. The 24 volt pressure sensors shall signal the start of the exhaust blower. The three
minute timer shall keep the connectors energized. After the time has expired, the
exhaust blower will shut off unless the 24 volt heat sensors indicate that the vehicle's
engine is still running and connected to the system. In such case the heat sensors will
over ride and keep the exhaust blower running until exhaust temperature returns to
normal condition.
4. The automatic control panel shall be UL listed and manufactured in accordance with
Underwriters Laboratories standard UL-508. Panel must for listed by and bear the UL
label.
5. Control panel must not utilize or produce electrical frequency transmission because it may
interfere with communication equipment.
E. Exhaust Blowers
1. For bay 1, 2, 3 and 4, exhaust blower shall be radial flat wheel type with 10 HP, 208
volt/3 phase, totally enclosed fan cooled 3500 RPM direct drive motor, rated 3000 cfm
@ 8" S.P.
2. For maintenance bay source capture track system, exhaust blower shall be radial flat
wheel type with 1 HP, 208 volt/ 3 phase, totally enclosed fan cooled 3,500 RPM direct
drive motor, rated 500 cfm @ 8" S.P.
3. For maintenance bay hose reel system, exhaust blower is radial flat wheel type with 5
HP, 208 volt/ 3 phase, totally enclosed fan cooled 3500 RPM direct drive motor, rated
1500 COM @ 8" S.P.
HVAC 15600-76
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
equipped with a pneumatically controlled nozzle shall be attached to vehicles exhaust tail
pipe and inflated manually by an operator standing vertically at the entrance door. At
such time that the vehicle exhaust tailpipe is attached to the ventilation system, the
exhaust fan must automatically and instantaneously energized to assure total collection of
exhaust gases prior to vehicle entering the building. The vehicle can now be positioned
in its designated parking position.
2. As the vehicle leaves the apparatus floor, the flexible hose with pneumatic nozzle shall
move toward the exit door with traveling trolley which supports the ventilation hose with
the use of a spring coiled balancer. The balancer must keep exhaust ventilation hose
away from the exiting apparatus. Mounted to the sliding balancer track shall be an
uncoupling release valve which shall automatically release compressed air from the
pneumatic nozzle allowing a smooth uncoupling of the exhaust system regardless of the
speed the vehicle may exit the building.
3. The track shall be extruded aluminum alloy type AA-6063 and accept ball bearing rollers
of the traveling trolley on bottom side and vertical telescopic mounting legs on top side.
A track splice constructed of zinc plated steel is required to join track lengths which are
greater than 20 feet. Rubber impact end stops are to be mounted on each end of the
track with secondary 1/4" bolts and nuts.
4. The traveling trolley shall be galvanized steel assembly with four upper ball bearing
wheels to fit inside track profile and two lower ball bearing wheels to fit on outside of
track profile to prevent rocking or shifting of the trolley as it moves along full length of
track.
5. The 4" diameter hose shall be high temperature synthetic rubber impregnated into a high
temperature laminated fabric with a minimum overlap of 2". Wire helix must be bound
and protected in lamination. Wear strip shall be safety yellow in color, .5" wide to
further protect hose. Hose shall be rated for 400 degree (F) continuous, 500 degree (F)
intermittent temperature.
6. Hose assembly shall not touch or rub the body of the vehicle. No attachments to the
body of the vehicle is permitted.
7. A disconnect coupling shall completely separate the lower nozzle section from the upper
hose assembly by use of two spun aluminum collars connected by a reusable molded
rubber device. The release tension of this device shall be no greater than 88 Pounds.
8. The spring balancer must be enclosed type with stainless steel cable and safety link for
attachment to traveling trolley. Spring balancer is to the support hose assembly during
travel along the track.
9. Manual inflation/deflation valve shall be sliding type with push button for manual
inflation of pneumatic nozzle. The valve is to incorporate a handle which the operator
can easily operate from a standing position to connect pneumatic nozzle to tail pipe.
When track mounted pneumatic release valve is activated, valve shall deflate pneumatic
nozzle. If safety disconnect coupling separates, valve shall have safety release to deflate
pneumatic nozzle automatically.
10. Nozzle shall be constructed of high temperature synthetic rubber, vulcanized to high
temperature synthetic fabric. A NOMEX inner liner shall be provided as a primary
temperature barrier. Nozzle pressure requirements shall not exceed 15 P.S.I. and shall
accept tail pipe diameters from I" through 6" diameters.
HVAC 15600-75
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
2. Provide and install two source capture hose reels for vehicle exhaust in maintenance bay.
3. Provide and install two automatic start control panels listed by UL in accordance with
underwriters laboratories standard UL-508.
4. Provide and install three non-sparking radial exhaust blower.
B. General
1. Upon emergency dispatch of the vehicle, the exhaust ventilation fan shall be automatically
energized by the output pressure generated by any internal combustion engine and
evacuate the toxic exhaust fume.
2. The nozzle shall release and disconnect near the threshold of the exit door regardless of
the speed the vehicle may exit the door. Systems which limit the exiting speed to five
miles per hour (5 MPH) are not acceptable.
3. The pneumatic nozzle must inflate to provide a positive airtight seal around the exhaust
tail pipe when connected, to prevent exhaust gases from escaping when the vehicle's
engine is accelerated.
4. Provide all material for tailpipe termination of the vehicle to a 90 degree angle
(perpendicular) to vehicle body to prevent toxic exhaust fumes from being discharged
rearward into station after the exhaust system nozzle releases at the door.
5. The manual connection of the nozzle to the tailpipe must be done from a standing position
to reduce personnel exposure of the toxic diesel exhaust fume.
6. The hose must be rated for 400° (F) continuous, 500° (F) intermittent temperature to
insure the exhaust fume does not deteriorate the hose and leak. Hoses which have a
metal sleeve liner are not acceptable.
7. A safety disconnect coupling shall completely separate the lower nozzle section from the
upper hose assembly to prevent excessive mechanical tension and strain on the track and
mounting supports in the unlikely event of the exhaust nozzle becomes entangled in the
wheels or the under carriage of the vehicle. Safety disconnect coupling must be reusable.
External release cables or other devices which may catch or snag on the fire fighters
turn-out gear are not acceptable.
8. The automatic control panel shall be UL listed and manufactured in accordance with
Underwriters Laboratories standard UL-508. Panel must for listed by Underwriters
Laboratories and bear the UL label.
9. Copy of Underwriters Laboratories Authorization Page must be attached. This is a
mandatory requirement.
C. Source Capture Emergency Vehicle Exhaust Equipment shall be delivered and installed as a
Sliding Balancer Track Type System manufactured by Plymovent as specified. The Fire Station
Building Committee has voted to accept the Plymovent Diesel Exhaust Removal System as a
proprietary item in order to provide a system which is currently in use in other City locations and
which the Fire Department personnel are familiar with. The Committee considers it to be in the
best interest of the City of Northampton to maintain a standard system.
1. The operating logic of this system must complete the following cycle. Upon the vehicles
return to the apparatus floor of the fire station, a 4" diameter exhaust ventilation hose
HVAC 15600-74
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
setting shall be adjustable from 50°F to 65°F. For valve applications,this will also select
the temperature when the zone circulation pump is started.
3. Reset Ratios: The control shall provide infinitely adjustable reset ratios from 8:1
(Outdoor Temperature:Water Temperature) to 1:4.
4. Offset: The control shall provide an integral offset adjustment to parallel shift the
selected reset curve. The range of settings shall be -40°F to 40°F.
5. Maximum Water Temperature: The control shall provide a maximum water temperature
set point to limit the computed water temperature. The range of settings shall be 90OF
to 140°F.
6. Plug-In Module: The control shall be field capable of accepting a plug-in module to the
building's control system requiring no additional wiring or relays.
7. On/Auto/Off Switch: An On/Auto/Off switch shall be integrated into the control to select
the required operating mode. In the "On" position, the heating system will be activated
(Bypass). In the "Off" position, the heating system will be turned off. In the "Auto"
position, the control automatically will have outdoor cut-off and reset the heating water
temperature.
8. Indication Lights: Three (3) indicator lights shall show the operating status of the
control. the green light on will indicate the control is in setback. the yellow light on will
indicate the control is in boost. The red light will indicate the number of boiler stages
turned on, or when the control is outputting to the valve. The control shall have self-
diagnostic capabilities such that flashing green and yellow lights will indicate problems
with the two (2) sensors.
9. External Shutdown: The control shall be capable of being turned off from an external
location. This will allow the control to be turned on and off through a thermostat or zone
valve end switches.
10. Bypass: the control shall be capable of being activated from an external location. When
the control is in "Bypass", the heating system will be activated and will hold a constant
140°F water temperature (or the maximum water temperature, whichever is less).
11. Relay Outputs: The control shall have three (3) NO, relay outputs. The relays shall be
capable of switching 3 A resistive 1/6 HP.
12. System Power: The control shall be powered by 24 VAC, 60 Hz.
13. Motorized Valve: A motorized, 4 way valve shall control the temperature in each zone
through its zone control panel. The 4-way valve shall be equal to Heat-Timer
Corporation 92840 series, sized as required per the zone schedule on the drawings. The
valve shall have a "double" mixing function and have a rotary design for ease of field
installation.
2.29 VEHICULAR EXHAUST SYSTEMS (CARBON MONOXIDE)
A. Scope of Work
'* 1. Provide and install a sliding balancer track tandem arrangement type source capture
emergency vehicle exhaust system in each of four bays.
HVAC 15600-73
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
C. tube cutting ,
d. tube bending
e. tube repairing
f. tube connections
g. tube solvent sensitivity
h. tube UV light sensitivity
i. tube capacity and pressure drop
j. tube loop layout patterns
k. tube fastening procedures
1. manifold assembly instructions
m. manifold location
n. fitting assembly instructions
o. insulation practices
p. installation method by construction type
q. control applications
r. system start-up procedures
2. Drawings: All drawings or design plans of the radiant tubing system shall be in
accordance with manufacturer recommended procedures for the products utilized.
3. Components: All product components of the radiant tubing system shall be supplied by
one company, including: PEX tubing, fittings, manifolds, and other recommended and
required hardware to assure a compatible and a complete radiant tubing system.
E. Zone Control Panel
1. The control panel shall be as manufactured by Heat-Timer Corporation, Model ZCP, or
equal. The pre-wired panel may be powered with either 110V or 24 VAC. The zone
thermostats receive constant 24 VAC power. When a zone thermostat calls for heat, a
4-way zone valve is powered with 24 VAC, and a relay contact energizes a 100 V zone
PUMP
2. The following accessories and/or conditions shall apply:
a. LED indicator lights showing each thermostat calling for heat.
b. Zone pumps activated with N.O. relays. Relays shall be rated for 120V, 1/3
HP.
C. Zone valve outputs shall be automatically energized with 24 VAC where the
zone thermostat calls for heat.
d. All zone control panels shall have the ability to be cascaded together to
accommodate as many zones as are in the heating system.
F. Accessories
1. Sensors: Two (2) solid state (thermistor type) sensors which are interchangeable. The
sensors measure from -30°F to 250°F, maintain +/- 1°F accuracy, and can be located up
to 500 feet from the control. The sensors shall bit in a 3/8" ID well, can be strapped to
a pipe, or mounted outdoors with a clip.
2. Outdoor Cut-off. The control shall provide a integral outdoor cutoff temperature. The
temperature selected is the one below which the heating system will be activated. The
HVAC 15600-72
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
2. Manifolds: Manifolds used in PEX tubing installation shall consist of individual loop
control and adaptation utilizing modular Polyacrylamide thermoplastic components ready
for assembly. The manifold should also include the following features:
a. Modular Design: This eliminates the need for multiple manifold configurations
and allows for future expansion.
b. Venting: Each supply and return vent/temperature module shall have an
automatic integrated air vent.
C. Temperature Measurements: Each supply and return manifold shall have a
thermometer integrated to indicate supply and return water temperatures.
Temperature readouts will assist in the diagnostics and set up of a radiant
heating system.
d. Flow Measurements: Each loop return block shall have incremental adjustment
and flow rate indication. Temperature and flow readouts will assist in the
diagnostics and set up of a radiant heating system.
e. Balancing Valves: Each return block will provide a balancing valve and a visual
flow meter for proper balancing of the radiant heating system allowing different
loop lengths and tube sizes to be connected to the same manifold. Each valve
shall be able to fully close to allow complete loop isolation.
f. Supply/Return Indication: Each loop supply module shall be red to indicate
incoming hot water, and each return loop module shall be blue to indicate cooler
return water.
g. Loop Isolation: Each loop supply and return module shall have a means of fully
isolating the loop from the rest of the system.
h. Piping Inlet/Outlet Size: All manifold inlets/outlets shall be 1-1/4"NPT female,
to fit maximum size plumbing and greater system adaptability.
3. Fittings
a. Fitting Composition: Brass compression fittings consisting of nut, ferrule and
insert with a ring for connecting PEX or copper tubing to manifold.
b. Fitting Types: Manifold to PEX tubing sizes 3/8", 1/2", 5/8" 3/4"
Manifold to 1/2" copper tubing
Hose Bib
Manifold Cap
C. Required Features: Well fitting, easily installed. Copper tubing should not
require soldering.
D. System Requirements
1. Installations: Radiant tubing systems shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. All relevant information shall be
included relating to the following:
a. tube handling
b. tube measuring
HVAC 15600-71
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
i. Burst Pressure: The minimum burst pressure for PEX plastic tubing shall be as
given.
Nominal Tube Minimum Burst Pressure Minimum Burst Pressure
Size psi cQ 180°F psi ® 180°F
3/8" 275 235
1/2" 215 185
5/8" 210 180
3/4" 210 180
j. Environmental Stress Cracking: "There shall be no loss of pressure in the
tubing when tested in accordance with 7.9" (paragraph of ASTM F876).
k. Degree of Crosslinking: "When tested in accordance with 7.9, (paragraph of
ASTM F876),the degree of crosslinking for PEX tubing material shall be within
the range of 65% to 89% inclusive."
1. Stabilizer Migration Resistance: "When tested in accordance with 7.10
(paragraph of ASTM F876), the time t (t = time to failure of boiled sample)
shall be at least 50% of the time, t," (t, = time to failure of unboiled sam-
ple).
m. Bend Radius: The minimum bend radius for cold bending of the tube shall not
be more than six (6)times the outside diameter for up to a 90 degree bend. For
180 degree bends, the minimum bend radius shall be as follows:
3/8" tubing 3.0" radius
1/2" tubing 3.75" radius
5/8" tubing 4.5" radius
3/4" tubing 5.75" radius
n. Marling: All PEX tubing shall be marked at intervals of not more than five
(5) feet in accordance with ASTM F876 as follows:
i. Nominal tubing size.
ii. Type of plastic tubing material.
iii. Standard dimension Ratio, SDR9.
iv. Pressure rating for water and temperature for which the pressure rating
is valid.
V. ASTM designation, ASTM F876.
vi. Manufacturer's name and production code.
Additional Marking
i. Date of manufacturing.
ii. Oxygen diffusion protection to DIN4726.
iii. Length indications in five (5) foot intervals, for ease of measuring the
tubing.
HVAC 15600-70
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
C. Materials
L Tube
a. Tube Composition: Crosslinked Polyethylene(PEX)in accordance with ASTM
F876.
b. Manufacturing Method: All PEX tubing shall be manufactured using the
"electron beam method of crosslinking, performed at ambient temperature and
pressure.
C. Working Pressure/Temperature: The minimum continuous working pressure
rating of the PEX tubing shall be 100 psi @ 180 F working temperature and 80
psi @ 200 F working temperature.
d. Physical Properties: As supplied by Embassy Industries, Inc., all PEX tubing
shall conform to ASTM F876 "American Society of Testing and materials,
Standard Specification F876 entitled, "Crosslinked Polyethylene(PEX)Tubing",
and German Standard DIN 4726 for "Oxygen Permeation" as related to the
following paragraphs:
e. Tubing: The tubing shall be homogeneous throughout and essentially uniform
in color, opacity, density, and other properties. The inside and outside surfaces
shall be matte or glossy in appearance. the tubing walls shall be free of cracks,
holes, blisters, voids, foreign inclusion, or other defects that are visible to the
naked eye and that may affect the wall integrity.
f. Dimensions and Tolerances
Nominal Average Outside Minimum
Tubing Size Diameter Wall Thickness
3/8" 0.500" 0.070"
0.625" 0.070"
5/8" 0.750" 0.083"
3/4" 0.875" 0.097"
g. Density: The crosslinked polyethylene tubing material shall have a density in
the range from 0.926 to 0.949 Mg/m3.
h. Sustained Pressure:
Nominal Tube Minimum Burst Pressure Minimum Burst Pressure
Size psi @ 180°F psi @ 180°F
3/8" 250 210
1/2" 195 165
518" 190 165
3/4" 190 165
HVAC 15600-69
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
charges for additional work which may have to be performed by other trades as a result
of any substitution.
2.27 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Provide packless expansion joints where indicated for piping systems, with materials and
pressure/temperature ratings selected by Installer to suit intended service. Select packless
expansion joints to provide 200% absorption capacity of piping expansion between anchors.
B. Expansion Compensators: Pressure rated for 60 psi for low pressure systems, 2-ply phosphor
bronze bellows, brass shrouds and end fittings for copper piping systems, or 2-ply stainless steel
bellows, carbon steel shrouds and end fittings for steel piping systems. Provide internal guides
and anti-torque devices, and removable end clip for proper positioning.
C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide expansion compensators of one
of the following:
Flexonics Div.; UOP, Inc.
Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
Keflex, Inc.
Metraflex Co.
Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc.
D. Provide pipe alignment guides on both sides of expansion joints, and elsewhere as indicated.
Construct with 4-finger spider traveling inside guiding sleeve, with provision for anchoring to
building substrate.
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe alignment guides
of the following:
Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
Metraflex Co.
2.28 RADIANT HEATING (BASE BID)
A. Scope of Work
1. This Specification is to provide relevant product data for a radiant tubing system
consisting of PEX tubing with oxygen permeation protection, distribution manifolds and
associated fittings.
B. References
1. American Society of Testing and Materials, Standard Specification F876, entitled
"Crosslinked Polyethylene(PEX) Tubing".
2. American Society of Testing and Materials, Standard Specification F877 entitled,
"Crosslinked Polyethylene(PEX) Plastic Hot and Cold Water Distribution Systems".
3. German Standard DIN 4726, "Pipelines of plastic materials used in warm water floor
heating systems".
HVAC 15600-68
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
*Oak G. References:
1. American National Standard Institute- ANSI Z223.1-1992(NFPA No. 54)and National
Electrical Code NFPA No. 70.
2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Section IV of the Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, Rules for the Construction of Heating Boilers.
3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Section VI of the Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, Recommended Rules for the Care and Operation of Heating
Boilers.
4. Hydronics Institute (HI) - Testing and rating Standard for Cast Iron and Steel Heating
Boilers and the (Minimum Efficiency Standards of) National Appliance Energy
Conservation Act of 1992, effective 1 January, 1994.
5. UL-296 Oil Burners and UL-795 Gas Burners, as applicable. Code of Massachusetts 248
CMR 7.00 Gas Utilization Equipment in Large Boilers; 522 CMR 4.00 Rules for Steam
and Hot Water Boilers; 522 CMR 5.00 Heating Boilers; 522 CMR 16.00 Controls and
Safety Devices for Automatically Fired Boilers; 527 CMR 4.00 Oil Burning Equipment.
H. Submittals
1. Submit product data, wiring diagrams and near Boiler piping schematics for manufactured
heating units. Whenever the words "or approved equal" or words of like import are
used, it shall be understood that this means approved as equal in the opinion of the
Consulting Engineer or their designated representative. No material shall be used in
substitution to that specifically designated by name in the Contract Specifications unless
it has been approved in writing or an addendum has been issued to all other bidders
covering such approval.
2. The Model and type data indicated under each item of equipment or material heading in
these Contract Documents relates to the Brand Name indicated and is used as the
Standard of Quality, Performance and total suitability required.
3. All bidders desiring to furnish equipment other than those which have been specified,
must submit a complete Verification Specification for the substituted equipment along
with literature, wiring diagrams, fuel piping schematic, and a list of a minimum of six
(6) similar sized installations where similar units of the proposed equipment has/have
been previously installed and been in operation for a Minimum of 5 years. Request for
Substitutions and complete pre-submittals must be presented to the Consulting Engineer
at least seven (7) working days prior to the bid opening for review. Substitutions will
not be permitted after the Contract has been awarded and signed.
4. A Statement on Company letterhead, indicating the actual dollar amount of change to be
Credited to the Contract Price, and reimbursement to the Awarding Authority for the
proposed substitution. Said Credit shall be placed against the Contract agreed upon and
all savings will accrue to the Awarding Authority for having taken a substitute. After
review of the proposed substitution,the Consulting Engineer shall inform the prospective
Bidders of their decision in writing.
5. Substitution of equipment by the Installing Contractor which is to be wired, piped or
welded shall detail and include any additional change(s)involved for work or wiring over
and above that required for the equipment specified. The apprnyal of substitution of
equipment does not relieve the Installing Contractor from th esponsibility for any valid
HVAC 15600-67
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
5. Combustion efficiency testing shall include no less than the following:
a. Clock and adjust burner input at the meter to establish correct rate of fire and
set each burner to rated input at high fire. Proper selection of oil nozzles,
adjust drawer assemblies, oil pump and bypass oil pressures. Set main gas
regulator and provide all adjustments to both primary and secondary air as
necessary to ensure proper flame shape at 100% input with no direct impinge-
ment upon heating surfaces and with good quality at high and low rates of input
with not more than 0.04% CO (gas firing)and not more than a trace of smoke
(oil firing) in the flue gas analysis.
b. CO. in the flue gas at low and high rates of fire with recorded gross and net
stack temperatures to establish stack loss value. Each Burner shall be set to
operate at the overall best performance and combustion efficiency for which the
equipment is designed and capable of.
C. Adjustment and checkout of all aquastat controls, limits, switches, operating
controls, low water cutoff devices, low voltage step control relays, gas valves,
pressure regulators, combustion controls, high and low gas pressure switches
and all lockout conditions.
d. He shall supervise purging of the boiler(s) and shall conduct pilot turndown
tests. All required tests for proper venting which shall include setting and
adjusting the boiler outlet damper to the boiler manufacturers specifications.
e. Provide instruction to the Owner's operating personnel in the procedures to
resolve a "Lockout" condition. Operating personnel shall also be instructed in
the operation and routine daily maintenance of the burner, combustion controls,
multiple boiler reset control system and controls during the light-off process.
The Owner shall arrange to have the personnel who require training to be
present at the light-off.
6. Factory Authorized Service representative shall provide the initial burner light-off and
one (1)year of warranty burner service. This requirement shall not be waived, nor shall
the responsibility for the service contract be assumed by any other party unless previously
approved by the Consulting Engineer in writing.
7. Authorized manufacturers service representative shall furnish one (1) year of warranty
burner service on the burner(s) and control(s) which shall commence from the date of
original light-off and shall continue warranty burner service coverage up to and including
the first anniversary of burner light-off.
8. Warranty burner service shall include labor and materials to replace any parts or controls
which might fail in service as the result of a defect in materials or manufacture. Normal
wear and tear on parts as the result of daily operation will not be included as "no charge"
items(nozzles, ignitors, etc.)and other such devices, which may require replacement as
the result of operation during the warranty service contract shall not be included.
Preventative maintenance, in the form of yearly tune-up and bi-yearly cleanings and
adjustments shall be the responsibility of the Installing Contractor throughout the duration
of the Warranty Contract while the equipment is under his control. Preventative
maintenance, cleaning and routine adjustments shall not be performed by the warranty
service Contractor but by the Owner's obligated service company.
HVAC 15600-66
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
Awk labor, staging, fittings, valves, hoses and other materials and shall pay all required
permits for inspection as may be required to perform such tests as may be directed by
these Contract Documents and as required by the Consulting Engineer.
9. An initial hydrostatic pressure test of 120 PSI shall be conducted on each boiler for a
period of not less than 5 hours. Tests shall be of such duration as necessary and as
directed by the Consulting Engineer to ensure that the boilers have been shipped,installed
and piped correctly with no leaks or other improper operating conditions.
10. Installing Contractor shall contact and notify the State Boiler Inspector when the
installation of the boiler(s), burner(s) and controls is substantially complete. Installing
Contractor shall request an inspection of the boilers to be conducted by the State Boiler
Inspector and to have a Certificate of Inspection issued upon satisfactory inspection.
11. After receipt of Certificate of Inspection, Installing Contractor shall furnish a suitable
glass front frame in which to place said certificate. Frame, with Inspection certificate
inserted therein, shall then be placed on or posted in a suitable location within the Boiler
Room in which the new boilers have been installed.
12. Installing Contractor shall maintain all apparatus in satisfactory operating condition.
Perform periodic burner tune-up and cleaning of the boiler fireside surfaces when dirty,
provide preventative maintenance, perform turndown tests, conduct tests for flame
safeguard, combustion efficiency, draft tests, limit control tests and safety valve tests,
check the ignition system and adjust,repair or replace any as necessary while the heating
system is under his ownership and control a and until such time as the Owner accepts the
equipment, issues the final certificate of payment and assumes the full obligation of
Ownership.
13. Installing Contractor shall note that any Warranty Service (hereinafter specified) as may
be absorbed by the authorized service representative shall in no way absolve the Installing
Contractor from any and all responsibility for the care, service and preventative
maintenance for materials furnished to this contract, while the beating system is under
his control, and until final acceptance by the Owner.
14. Installing Contractor shall guarantee the entire installation for a period of one (1) year
from the date of Owner acceptance and beneficial usage by the Owner and date of final
payment.
F. Commissioning
1. An authorized representative of the boiler or burner manufacturer shall perform the initial
start-up, final adjusting and testing of the burners and controls in the presence of the Gas
Inspector and the gas company representative and the Owner's operating personnel.
2. The process of start-up and commissioning shall include purging of the boiler(s); burner
operation tests, including CO sampling, stack temperature(s); CO2 sampling; tests for
venting; ignition tests; oil pump vacuum tests;manifold pressure tests; instruction to the
Owner and all other such procedures as may be directed by the Consulting Engineer.
3. The final results of a combustion efficiency test with all pertinent combustion data shall
be logged onto a check sheet which shall be submitted to the Consulting Engineer to
prove compliance with this section of the Specifications and for record purposes.
4. Light-off Burner Technician shall certify, in writing, that the bumer(s) have been
properly tuned and set-up with no flame impingement on the cast iron surfaces.
HVAC 15600-65
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
E. Boiler Construction/Installation
1. Rig each boiler into position in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and
recommendations. Boiler manufacturer shall provide the services of a Representative to
supervise the installing contractor with the installation of each boiler. Upon site insertion
of the packaged boiler assemblies, the boiler manufacturers representative shall certify
the proper connection of each boiler prior to start-up.
2. Boiler drain valves shall be connected to the lowest water space available and shall be
installed with pipe and fittings to connect the bottom blow-off full size to drain. Furnish
and install 3" inch by 1" eccentric reducer in the lower left or right hand tappings of the
front section of each Boiler complete with a short nipple and blow-off valve installed.
Each blow-off valve shall be Brass, ball type, not less than 1" minimum and rated equal
to the pressure stamped on the Boiler and to a temperature rating of not less than 250°F.
and all blow down discharges shall be arranged so as to allow the Operator to view the
water that is discharged to drain. Ends of blow down piping shall be cut at a 451 angle
to prevent a cap or plug from being installed.
3. All Boiler discharges shall be piped to floor drains or as indicated by the Consulting
Engineer. Furnish and install all necessary pipe and fittings to connect the pressure relief
valve discharge full size (Minimum Acceptable) to floor drain. Discharge shall be
arranged so that there will be no danger of scalding Boiler room personnel in the event
of a pressure relief situation. Size and arrangement of discharge piping shall be such that
any pressure that may exist or develop will not reduce the relieving capacity of the relief
valve below that required to protect the Boiler. All such discharge piping shall be
supported by hangar or standoff to prevent the valve body from undue stress or strain.
4. Installing Contractor shall utilize capped tees at all turns in the return piping to the back
section of each Boiler for cleaning of the return piping at or near each Boiler. Feed
water, makeup water and/or water treatment shall be introduced into the Boiler water
through the return piping only. Provisions shall be made for the expansion and contrac-
tion of all hot water mains connected to each Boiler by providing substantial anchorage
at suitable points and by providing swing joints so there will be no stress or strain
transmitted to either Boiler. Stop valves shall be provided in the supply and return pipe
connections to each Boiler permitting draining either Boiler without emptying the entire
system.
5. After final connection, each boiler shall be thoroughly cleaned internally following the
manner described within the boiler manufacturers installation instructions, or by ASME
Section VI, either method acceptable by the Engineer.
6. The process of cleaning the boiler(s) shall include the use of a boil-out compound of
caustic soda or tri-sodium phosphate at the rate of one (1) pound of either chemical per
50 gallons of total water in the system being cleaned. This cleaning shall include boiler
cleanout, surface blow-off,blow down and a wash as directed and detailed in referenced
instructions.
7. The process of cleaning the boiler(s) shall be repeated as often as necessary and as
directed by the Consulting Engineer to ensure that all mill scale, core sand, rust, din and
debris, cutting oils and thread sealers or any other contaminants have sufficiently been
eliminated from the boiler(s)and to produce a condition of the boiler water that is clean
and finally considered acceptable to the Consulting Engineer.
8. All field tests after the boiler(s)have been installed and connected to the system shall be
limited to not more than 80 psi. Installing Contractor shall furnish all equipment, piping,
HVAC 15600-64
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
a. The multiple burner and boiler sequence controller shall be capable of either
maintaining a constant supply water temperature or of reset of Supply water
temperature based on outside air temperature compensation. Control system
shall provide:
(1) NEMA 250 Type 1 enclosure with cover. Micro-processor based
control shall sense supply water temperature, outside air temperature
and control the low fire to high fire staging of each burner to maintain
setpoint water temperature. Burners shall be automatically
de-energized in warm weather at shutdown setpoint. System pump
shall be turned on whenever there is a set-point demand and the out-
door air temperature is cool enough to require heat in the system.
(2) Adjustable setpoint(s)for minimum and setpoint water supply tempera-
ture(s);boiler differential;heating curve(reset ratio)and warm weather
shutdown. Control shall have a minimum supply water temperature
setting to help prevent flue gas condensation. During warm weather
shutdown,the system pump shall be cycled for 20 seconds every 3 days
to prevent seizure during long idle periods. Provide
Occupied/Unoccupied mode; Programmable 7-day digital clock.
(3) Rotate/no rotate switch. Control shall calculate time delay between
burner cycles and stages to prevent short cycling. Options for rotating
the bumer firing sequence shall be based upon run times with automatic
rotation of burner operation to even out wear on Burners, under which
mode no boiler shall accumulate more than 48 hours of run time more
than any other bumer during rotate mode. With manual switch-over
(no-rotate) for fixed lead, regardless of run hours accumulated.
Display of accumulated run-hours per Bumer shall be accessed through
the LED display.
(4) Control shall discriminate between low fire and high fire stages to
ensure that either burner is energized only at the low fire position.
(�) LED indication for:
(1) "Power On"
(2) "Heat Demand"
(3) "Warm Weather Shutdown"
(4) "Minimum Supply Water Temperature"
(5) Stages energized "On"
(6) Digital display of "Setpoint" and "Actual" supply water
temperature as well as "Target" supply water temperature.
(6) Pre-wired terminal strip; 24 Volt Transformer; Outdoor Air tempera-
ture Sensor; Heat Starter for Warm Weather shutdown, and System
supply water temperature sensor.
(7) In the event of outside air temperature sensor failure, control system
shall automatically calculate the outdoor air temperature at minus 8°F.
Control system shall be programmed to shut down the boilers before
the supply water temperature can reach a Maximum allowable supply
water temperature of 248°F.
HVAC 15600-63
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
j. All Main gas and Pilot gas pressure regulators and high and low gas pressure
switches are to be independently vented to a safe outdoor location in with 248
CMR 7.02(11)(C). Vent lines shall be of steel or wrought iron pipe, 3/4" inch
IPS minimum and with a maximum length as directed by 248 CMR
7.02(11)(TABLE 2), which shall discharge to outside atmosphere. Pilot gas
pressure regulators shall also be vented in accordance with 248 CMR
7.02(11)(C), unless constructed or equipped to limit the escape of gas from the
vent opening in the event of diaphragm failure to not more than 2.5 cubic feet
per hour. Vent lines from regulators shall not be connected into a common line
with the bleed line from gas operated diaphragm valves or from pressure relief
valves.
k. Oil burner shall be equipped with a fuel unit driven off the blower motor shaft.
The high pressure nozzle supply oil pump shall be a 3450 RPM, 2-stage gear
type fuel unit capable of producing 300 psig discharge pressure and 15" Ins. of
vacuum. Oil firing shall employ a bypass nozzle arrangement with bypass
regulator and return oil valve to control oil firing rate and a 3-way oil valve and
spring loaded pressure actuated damper cylinder to control combustion air. Two
(2) approved safety shutoff oil valves shall be provided integral to the burner.
1. Two oil pressure gauges(0 to 300 psi range) shall be furnished per Burner, each
shall be equipped with a 1/4" IPS short nipple, snubber and gauge cock. One
gauge shall be installed in the oil pump pressure gauge port and the second
gauge to be installed in the checking tee in the nozzle return line upstream of the
low fire valve.
M. Furnish and install an approved quality fuel oil filter for each burner, garber
screw-in type, Model 11 BV-MK with a flow handling capacity of not less than
90 gph of oil filtering rate. Furnish and install a vacuum gauge at each oil filter
complete with short nipple and gauge cock.
n. Fuel oil lines shall be manufactured from 5/8" OD continuous copper tubing and
flared fittings shall be utilized for all fuel oil line connections, both supply and
return. Compression fittings or any other type not specifically recommended by
the burner manufacturer shall not be considered acceptable. All new oil supply
lines in direct contact with concrete or earth shall be enclosed with a continuous
non-metallic sleeve that extends out of the concrete or earth a minimum of four
(4") inches on each end.
o. Furnish and install Webster OSV at pump suction as required by 527 CMR 4.00
and in accordance with the valve manufacturers recommendations and
instructions. Furnish and install all new fusible link oil valves, swing check
valves, thermal cutoff switches and emergency burner shutoff switches as
required by previously specified state and local codes.
p. If double acting barometric dampers are installed, thermal spill switches shall
be integrated into the burner circuit, wired to shut the bumer down in the event
of flue gas spillage from the barometric damper exceeding 60 seconds duration.
D. Boiler Control System
1. Operating control for step firing the burners in sequence shall be purchased and installed
by the Contractor in accordance with the boiler and control manufacturers and
recommendations and with these Contract Documents.
HVAC 15600-62
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
APW e. Open damper purge to provide pre-ignition purging of the combustion chamber,
boiler passes and breeching. The airflow shall be supervised during the entire
purge period. Purging shall be accomplished by airflow's of at least 60% of
maximum airflow and shall continue to assure minimum of four (4)air changes
of this volume within a 90 second period.
f. Burner shall always return to the low fire position for ignition and a combustion
air proving switch shall be mounted on the burner interlocked to close the main
fuel valve in the event of a loss of combustion air.
g. Each burner shall be furnished with a gas pilot of the pre-mix type with
interruptible ignition when firing on gas and direct spark ignition from a 12,000
volt ignition transformer when firing on oil.
h. Gas valve train shall be furnished in accordance with UL-795 requirements for
automatic gas fired boilers as previously specified and shall comply fully with
the Massachusetts Fuel Gas Code for Gas Utilization Equipment in Large
Boilers including not less than the following:
(1) Separate pilot and separate main gas pressure regulators. Each
regulator shall be designed for operation with up to a Maximum of 28"
inches W.C. inlet gas pressure. Vent as required by 248 CMR
7.02(11)(C).
(2) Pilot and main manual shutoff gas cocks. Manual shutoff gas cock
larger than 2" inches shall be of the lubricated plug or ball type with
stops.
(3) Dual safety shutoff gas valves piped in series. An approved motor
driven reset safety shutoff gas valve complete with actuator shall be
provided in the main gas line to the burner. An approved auxiliary
solenoid gas valve shall be provided upstream from the motor driven
reset valve. Combination gas valve/pressure regulator similar to V4843
shall not be considered acceptable.
(4) Leakage test cock and pilot gas solenoid valve.
(5) One quarter inch (1/4") plugged tappings shall be provided, one of
which shall be located upstream of the main gas pressure regulator and
another to be located near the burner head to permit gas pressure
readings with a manometer.
(6) Gas pressure supervision shall be provided by listed pressure switches
interlocked to accomplish a non-recycling safety shutdown in the event
of High or Low gas pressure. Vent as required by 248 CMR 7.02(11)
(Table 2) Gas Code.
i. Gas valve train components shall be furnished as specified above with the pilot
gas train, and combustion air dampers and linkage installed and wired at the
factory. All other components shall be furnished loose for field assembly. Gas
valve train assembly shall be sized for minimum acceptable pressure drop with
a minimum gas pressure of 4.70" inches W.C. at the inlet to the main gas
pressure regulator.
HVAC 15600-61
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
70. All field installed romex, conduit,junction boxes and the like shall be installed so
as not to interfere with the Boiler manufacturers recommended cleaning and maintenance
procedures.
C. Fuel Burning Equipment
1. Each boiler shall be furnished with a combustion system listed by the Boiler Manufac-
turer, tested to I=B=R Standards and capacities. Burners shall listed by the Gas
Regulatory Board.
2. Each burner shall incorporate all the necessary devices and controls to provide a complete
dual-fuel burning system which shall bear Underwriters Laboratories seal of approval.
Burner shall be as manufactured by Powerflame, Model CI-GO-12; Webster, Model
JB1C; Gordon-Piatt, Model R8.9-GO.
3. Each Boiler shall be furnished with a flame retention type pressure atomizing, nozzle mix
multi-port,forced draft burner arranged for Low/High/Low step firing and equipped with
Proven Low Fire start interlock. Two stage air with 2 stage fuel shall be required to
produce good quality combustion at either High or Low fire rate.
4. All Controls, motor starters, relays, switches and Pilot lights shall be installed within a
Burner mounted control panel built to meet or exceed NEMA-1 standards.
5. External lights, switches and components shall all be wired to a numbered terminal strip
without splices and the panel shall be complete with the following controls and devices:
a. E 110/EP 160/ED510/EUV 1 or RM7800L Primary Control equipped with
sequence status lights. Provide a 15 second trial for pilot; 15 second trial for
main Flame with 4 second flame failure response time with non-recycling safety
shutdown upon loss of main flame at point of supervision.
b. 4PDT fuel changeover switch with center "OFF" position and low fire "Hold"
switch. Provide the following factory installed isolating relays:
(1) Low Fire and high fire stage load relays; Two (2) relays per burner.
(2) Combustion air damper relay to energize a combustion air damper to
"OPEN" on a call for heat; one (1) relay per burner.
(3) Alarm relay to initiate a remote alarm on control lockout; one (1)
relay per burner.
C. Pilot Lights to indicate:
(1) "POWER ON"
(2) "MAIN FUEL"
(3) "FLAME FAILURE"
(4) "LOW GAS PRESSURE"
(5) "HIGH GAS PRESSURE"
d. 4" dia. alarm bell with silencing switch and relays, wired to alarm each and all
of the three (3) specified conditions above that create a Lockout condition. **�+
Alarm shall also energize auxiliary relay in the control panel to initiate
"BOILER OFF" alarm/light elsewhere in the building and specified under
another portion of this Contract.
HVAC 15600-60
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
securely fastened and sealed to the canopy and shall utilize a fixed baffle in the flue collar
and shall be equipped with a pressure test tapping.
10. Boiler shall have individual cleanout openings between sections covered with insulated
steel covers designed to ensure a gas tight seal.
11. The su-el boiler jacket shall be provided with foil backed, 1" inch thick 1-1/2 lb. density
fiberglass insulation and have a rust resistant baked enamel finish. Jacket shall have
remoN-able side panels on the left side so that the jacket can be removed for cleaning
without removing screws or disturbing system piping.
12. Hydronic trim shall include:
a. Combination Pressure-temperature gauge.
b. L4006E High limit aquastat equipped with manual reset.
C. L4006A Operating aquastat and Low Fire aquastat.
d. ASME approved water relief valve sized to exceed the gross output of the boiler
which shall be factory set to relieve pressure at 80 psi water working pressure.
e. One (1) low water cutoff device with manual reset. Boiler shall be fitted with
either a float type or a probe type LWCO located above the lowest safe
permissible water level established by the boiler manufacturer. LWCO shall be
UL listed and FM approved, suitable for commercial hydronic heating service
at 80 psi. If a float type LWCO is installed, it shall be vented at a high point
and equipped with a pair of McDonnell & Miller Test-N-Check Model TC-4
valves. Simple time delay shall not be considered acceptable to this installation.
B. Electrical Supply
1. All Boiler Room wiring from the main disconnect switch panel to Multiple Boiler
Control System, burner control panels, Primary Controls, Limits, Operating controls,
Gas Valves, switches and additional control devices shall be furnished and
installed under this section of the work.
2. Bumer blower motor shall be a maximum of 1/2 Hp. furnished for operation on 3
Phase 208 Volts/60 Hz. Control circuit shall be taken from a two-wire branch circuit,
one side grounded, not exceeding 150 volts, line-to-line. All safety control switching
shall be accomplished in the hot ungrounded conductor and through the 24V low voltage
wiring provided by the boiler manufacturer and in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions and recommendations.
3. An electrical thermal switch fused to break the ungrounded conductor in the main circuit
at 165'F. Shall be installed in the main power line within six (6') feet over the top of
each burner. Fuse protection for the control circuit shall be provided. A manually
operated remote heating plant shutdown switch shall be furnished and installed just out-
side the Boiler Room door and shall be marked for easy identification. If there is more
than one (1) Boiler Room door, there shall be a switch located at each door. Shutdown
switch(es) must be wired to disconnect all power to the boiler controls.
4. All wiring for Boilers and Burners shall be rated for the maximum operating temperature
to which it may be exposed. AJI wiring between components shall have copper
conductors not less than 18 AWG and constructed in accordance with the NEC/NFPA
HVAC 15600-59
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
21. Note: Grooved piping will NOT be allowed.
2.26 BOILER/BURNER UNITS
A. General Description
1. Furnish and install, where shown on the Contract Drawings, two(2) wet base, pressure
fired boiler/burner units for forced hot water heating service and arranged for automatic
operation firing natural gas and No. 2 fuel oil in combination. Each boiler/burner unit
shall produce an I=B=R approved gross output of not less than 667,000 BTU/Hr. when
fired at a burner input of 837 CFH of natural gas having 1,000 BTU/Cu. Ft. and 0.6
specific gravity; or 5.80 gph of No. 2 fuel oil having 140,000 BTU/Gallon.
Boiler/burner units shall be equal to Burnham Corp. V-1104-WGO; Crown F7-WGO;
Peerless, Model 706FDA.
2. Each boiler shall be rigged into place as a factory assembled and packaged unit having
been hydrostatically tested at the factory to 120 psi before shipment. Each packaged
boiler shall be shipped upon a structural steel skid, extending beyond the boiler for
protection,with the burner and controls mounted and wired. Steel skid shall be equipped
with lifting holes and the entire package shall be shipped in shrink-wrap for protection.
3. Boiler shall be equipped with a flange mounted flame retention type, forced draft burner
designed and tested to meet ASHRAE 90.1 and the National Energy Policy Act of 1992
requirement of 80% for natural gas and 83% for No. 2 fuel oil.
4. The burner mounting plate shall be lined with lightweight refractory insulation and shall
have a built-in observation port with cover. Boiler manufacturer shall provide a spring
loaded pressure relief door in the back section designed to relieve in the event of a
delayed ignition. Furnish and install pipe and pedestal for each burner to provide
additional floor support.
5. Boiler shall be constructed of cast iron sections utilizing wet base design and not require
a refractory combustion chamber. Sections shall have pin like projections evenly spaced
on the vertical flue surfaces to extract maximum heat from the hot flue gases.
Blowoff/skimmer tapping shall be provided in the back section.
6. Boiler shall be constructed for 80 psi water working pressure in accordance with the
ASME Section IV Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers. Individual sections shall
have been subjected to a hydrostatic pressure test of 200 psig at the factory before
shipment and they shall be marked, stamped or cast with the national Board Standard.
7. Boiler sections shall be surface ground to ensure smooth positive mating surfaces with
no high spots and machined cast iron nipples must be utilized to assemble the Boiler. As
the boilers are to be factory packaged and assembled, the use of "time saving"
Carbon/Graphite composition"O-rings"or rubber/neoprene compound gaskets,which are
susceptible to damage from over compression, water side oil based cleaners, pipe thread
compounds, chemical water treatments, anti-freeze and flue gas corruption, to seal
waterways between the sections shall be prohibited.
8. A gas-tight seal, which is imperative for forced draft Boilers, shall be achieved with the
application of a high temperature silastic sealant in a finished ground groove between
sections eliminating the need for glue and braided rope wicking.
9. Boiler flue canopy shall be constructed of aluminized steel and shall be concealed under
the insulated metal jacket. Flue connector shall be 8" inch dia. Top vertical outlet,
HVAC 15600-58
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
3. Yoloy Steel Pipe: ASTM A714; Class 4; Grade IV.
4. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolting and gasketing of the following
material group, end connection and facing except as otherwise indicated, Class 150 for
Schedule 40 piping, Class 300 for Schedule 80.
a. Material Group: Group 1.1
b. End Connections: Buttwelding
C. Facings: Raised-face
5. Wrought-Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ANSI B16.9, except ANSI B16.28 for short-radius
elbo,ws and returns; rated to match connected pipe.
6. Yoloy Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ASTM A714.
7. Forged Branch Connection Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide type as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements, Bonney "Weldolets"or
"Threadolets", or equal.
8. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not use
less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1-1/2" and
where pipe size is less than 1-1/2", and do not thread nipples full length (no close-
nipples).
9. Copper Tube: ASTM B88; Type as indicated for each service; hard-drawn temper for
water piping; soft temper for oil piping.
10. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B306.
11. ACR Copper Tube: ASTM B280.
12. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22.
13. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.23.
14. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.29.
15. Red Brass Pipe: ASTM B43.
16. Cast-Bronze Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.15.
17. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with Section
II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials.
18. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide soldering materials as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.
19. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with SFA-5.8,
Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler metal materials.
Alk-
20. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised-face
for steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated.
HVAC 15600-57
INN
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
4. Equipment: ,..,
a. Air separator: 3/4 in. armaflex.
H. Steel smoke hood of boilers shall be covered with 2" thick magnesia block insulation cut, fitted
and wired on with a 1-1/4" galvanized wire mesh. Point up joints in block covering with
insulating cement and allow to dry. Over the wired on block insulation,apply a 1/4" thick scratch
coat of insulating cement and allow to set. Finally, a 1/4" thick coat of insulating cement shall
be trowelled on to a smooth finish. Access covers shall be left exposed, flanges shall be left
uncovered and care shall be exercised so as to not allow the insulating material to interfere with
the operation of the barometric damper.
I. Elevator vent duct shall be insulated with a 2" thick layer of Pabco "Super Firetemp" or equal,
applied according to the manufacturer's printed recommendations, giving full duct coverage.
System shall provide a two (2) hour fire rating.
2.25 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. General
1. Reference is made to specifications of recognized authorities to establish quality. Latest
editions of their publications at time of bidding shall be in force.
2. All piping shall have manufacturer's name or trademark rolled into each and every length
of pipe.
3. All threads for screwed joints shall be National Taper Pipe Thread conforming to ANSI
B2.1-1968.
4. Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASME B31.1,or
ASME B31.9, as applicable, for shop and project site welding of piping work.
B. Application
1. Hot Water Supply and Return: Black steel pipe, Schedule 40, size 2" and smaller
threaded, 2-1/2" and larger welded, or Type "L" copper.
2. Boiler Trim: Brass Pipe, Schedule 40, threaded, cast bronze fittings.
3. Refrigerant: Type ACR copper, wrought copper fittings,AWS class BAgl silver solder.
4. Condensate Drain (from cooling coils): Type M or DWV copper tube with cast or
wrought drainage fittings.
5. Generator Fuel Lines: Type "K" soft copper, with flare fittings. No joints allowed
underground.
C. Materials
1. Black Steel Pipe : ASTM A53, A106 or A120; except comply with ASTM A53 or A106
where close coiling or bending is required.
2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B 16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated. Class
150 for Schedule 40 piping, Class 300 for Schedule 80.
HVAC 15600-56
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
A 4. A vapor barrier shall be installed on all hot water piping. It shall be applied in accor-
dance with the manufacturer's instructions to maintain the integrity of the vapor barrier.
5. Attention is called for to the fact that on all hot water, refrigerant, and condensate drain
piping, oversized pipe hangers shall be furnished and pipe insulation shall be applied
continuous along the pipe passing inside the hanger.
6. Pipe insulation shall be rigid performed glass fiber insulation as manufactured by
Baldwin-Hill-Bhret, Gustin-Bacon, Manville, PPG, Owens-Corning, or other approved
equal.
7. All hot water, condensate drains, refrigerant piping,steam condensater return, and make
up water piping shall be insulated with Manville FLAMESAFE fiberglass pipe insulation,
Owens-Corning fiberglass 25, or approved equal. The insulation shall have an average
thermal conductivity not to exceed .25 BTU in. per sq. ft. per F. per hour at a mean
temperature of 75 degrees F. Thickness of the insulation shall be as scheduled below.
Jacket shall be FLAMESAFE AP. The insulation shall be applied over clean dry pipe
with all joints firmly together. Longitudinal jacket laps and the butt strips shall be
smoothly secured with Benjamin Foster 85-20 adhesive. Note: All refrigerant piping run
outdoors shall be covered with an aluminum jacket and secured with stainless steel bands.
G. Insulation thickness shall be as follows:
Minimum Pipe Insulation Required:
1. Hot Water. Supply and Return:
a. Runouts up to 2 in.: 1-1/2 in.
b. Mains and Branches 1 in. and less: 1-1/2 in.
c. Mains and Branches 1-1/4 in. to 2 in.: 2 in.
d. Mains and Branches 2-1/2 in. to 4 in.: 2 in.
e. Mains and Branches 5 in. to 6 in.: 3 in.
2. Refrigerant Piping:
a. Runouts up to 2 in.: 1 in.
b. Mains and Branches 1 in. and less: 1 in.
c. Mains and Branches 1-1/4 in. to 2 in.: 1-1/2 in.
3. Condensate Drains:
a. Runouts up to 2 in.: 3/4 in.
b. Runouts 1 in. and less: 3/4 in.
c. Runouts 1-1/4 in. to 2 in.: 1 in.
d. Runouts 2-1/2 in. to 4 in.: l in.
HVAC 15600-55
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
E. Hangers or supports shall be placed within 1' of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs of pipe not
over 5' in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 12" from the elbow on the
connecting horizontal run.
F. Install Figure 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation on all piping; hangers to be
installed outside pipe insulation.
G. Vertical risers shall be supported with Grinnell Figure CT-121C plastic coated riser clamp; to be
installed immediately below a coupling.
2.24 INSULATION
A. Insulate boiler and water heater flues in Boiler Room with two 1" thick layers of calcium silicate
securely wired on and finished with two coats of reinforced insulating cement, with finish coat
troweled smooth and hard.
B. All air supply, return, and fresh air ducts shall be insulated. Insulation for concealed ducts shall
be 1-1/2 in. thick, 1 pound density glass fiber (flexible) duct insulation with factory applied
reinforced aluminum foil jacket equal to Manville Type FSK. Secure to duct with Benjamin
Foster No. 85-20 adhesive. Lap jacket 2 in. at all seams and secure flaps with staples and
adhesive to provide complete vapor barrier. In addition, this concealed duct insulation shall be
tied 18 in. o.c. with 18 gauge aluminum or copper wire where ducts exceed 24 in. in width.
C. All concealed air ducts from the fresh air intakes to the air handling units shall be insulated in the
same manner as for the ductwork for concealed supply ducts.
D. All exposed fresh air ducts from the fresh air intakes to the air handling units and all exposed ,,,w
supply and return air ducts, or where so noted, shall be insulated with 1 in. thick, 6 pound
density, rigid glass fiberboard with Manville Type EAF vaporseal facing. Attach board to ducts
with double prong stick clips. Seal at joints to maintain vapor barrier. All edges and angles shall
be reinforced with corner beads. Finish shall consist of tackboard of Benjamin Foster No. 30-36
Sealfas, embedded Manville Duramesh 205,and a heavy finish coat of Benjamin Foster No. 30-35
Sealfas, all applied according to manufacturer's recommendations. Note: Omit ductwork
insulation on supply ducts located in the Natatorium and Gymnasium.
E. Acoustical Insulation: Duct lining acoustical insulation shall be shop installed by the Sheet Metal
Subcontractor. Liner shall be 1 in. thick, 3 pound density, non-combustible glass fiber with U.L.
approved neoprene coating on air side. Acoustical lining shall be installed where shown on
Drawings. All lined ductwork shall be insulated as listed above unless otherwise noted.
F. Pipe Insulation
1. All insulation including covering shall be fire resistant and fire retardant and shall have
a flame spread rating not exceeding 25, smoke developed rating not exceeding 50, all
complying with NFPA 225 and/or U.L. 723. Adhesives used for applying and sealing
jackets shall also conform to these same fire retardant and smoke ratings.
2. On exposed insulation, all longitudinal seams shall be kept at the top of the pipe and
circumferential joints shall be kept to a minimum. Raw ends of insulation shall be
concealed by neatly folding in the ends of the jackets. Fittings,valve bodies, and flanges
shall be furnished with the same jacket materials used on adjoining insulation.
3. Covering shall not be applied until all parts of the work have been tested by the
Contractor and approved by the Architect.
HVAC 15600-54
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
vents for radiation shall be installed in the return side of each loop of radiation before piping drops
down to return main. These vents to be key or screw type equal to Dole or Taco.
G. Automatic Make-Up Water Valve: Provide with three valve bypass for water system shall be Bell
& Gossett, Cash, Taco, or Watts equal to Bell & Gossett No. B-3 Reducing Valve set for
approximately 60 psig inlet and 21 psig outlet, field adjustable. Install backflow preventer piped
to drain in inlet to automatic valve. Bypass to be 1 in. size with globe valve and one check valve
in series. Strainers shall be as specified in other paragraphs of this Section of the Specifications.
H. Furnish and install all temperature - pressure relief valves for all hot water heater systems. All
to be ASME rated and similar to that manufactured by WATTS.
I. Pump Suction Diffusers
1. Furnish and install at each pump a suction diffuser of the size and type required. Suction
diffusers shall be Bell & Gossett, Armstrong, Taco, or approved equal.
2. Units shall consist of angle type body with inlet valves combination
diffuser-strainer-orifice cylinder with 3/16 in. diameter openings for pump protection.
A permanent magnet shall be located within the flow stream and shall be removable for
cleaning. The orifice cylinder shall be equipped with a disposable fine mesh strainer
which shall be removed after system start-up. The orifice cylinder shall be designed to
withstand a pressure differential equal to pump shut-off head and shall have a free area
equal to five times the cross section area of the pump suction opening. Valve length shall
be no less than 2-1/2 times the pump connection diameter. The units shall be provided
with adjustable support foot to carry the weight of the suction piping.
J. Triple Duty Valves
1. Furnish and install as shown on Drawings a triple duty valve of the size and type
required. The triple duty valve shall be Bell & Gossett, Armstrong, Taco, or approved
equal.
2. Valves shall be a non-slam check valve with a spring-loaded weighted contoured disc and
a calibrated adjustment feature permitting regulation of pump discharge flow and positive
shut-off. Valves shall be designed to permit repacking under full line pressure. Units
shall be installed on the discharge side of the pump in a horizontal or vertical position
with steam up. This unit shall be cast iron body construction suitable for maximum
working pressure of 175 psig and maximum operating temperature of 300 degrees F.
2.23 HANGERS
A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & Paterson, Fee & Mason,
or equal.
B. For all pipe 2-1/2" and larger - Grinnell Figure No. 20, at 10' intervals.
C. For all other suspended piping- Grinnell Figure 70 at 6' intervals for tubing 1-1/4" or less, 10'
intervals for piping at 1-1/2" and larger.
D. All hangers directly in contact with non-ferrous pipe or tubing shall be copper plated or plastic
AOW coated.
HVAC 15600-53
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
2.19 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Gauges shall be Ashcroft, Marsh, U.S. Gauge Company or Trerice equal to Ashcroft "Quality"
line gauges, Grade A, 1% accuracy. Each gauge shall be installed with a pulsation damper
(Ashcroft#1106B) and a brass lever handle gauge cock (Ashcroft#1095).
B. Model number, size and range to be as follows:
1. Ashcroft - #1018, 3-1/2" dial, red tipped pointer with scale range such that normal
operating pressure is approximately at mid-scale.
2.20 UNIONS
A. Unions shall be of the same class and material as the pipe and fittings of the system in which they
are installed. In black steel piping systems, they shall be 200 lb. black malleable iron with brass
ground joint equal to Dart Figures 0832, 0834, 0835, 0836 or 0838. In copper and brass piping,
they shall be 125 lb. bronze or brass with ground joint.
B. Flanged unions for welded pipe shall be weld neck, 150 lb. raised face. Flanged joints shall be
packed with impregnated asbestos gaskets placed inside the bolt circle with graphite applied to
both faces.
C. Dielectric unions shall be provided between ferrous and non-ferrous piping to prevent galvanic
corrosion. The dielectric unions shall meet the requirements for tensile strength of pipe fittings
in accordance with Federal Specification WW-U-531 and shall be suitable for temperatures and
pressures encountered. The ends shall be threaded, flanged,brazed, or soldered to match adjacent
piping. The metal parts of the union shall be separated so that the electrical current is below 1
percent of the galvanic current which would exist with metal to metal contact.
2.21 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Standard IPS steel or wrought iron sleeves shall be provided wherever exposed pipes pass through
masonry walls or partitions. Pipe sleeves are to be two pipe sizes larger than line size. Insulated
piping sleeves shall be sized to allow insulation to pass through the sleeve without gouging.
2.22 HOT WATER SPECIALTIES AND VALVES
A. Expansion tank fitting shall be Taco "Taco-Trot" No.438.
B. Tank drainer shall have drain body with air vent tube, Taco No. 440, with hose end drain valve.
Pipe with auxiliary drain to within 6 ft. 0 in. of finish floor.
C. Air removal fitting shall be in-line type, welded steel, with internal circuiting causing entrained
air to be separated from the water. To be Taco "Air Separator" Series ACF, line size, with drain
valve and strainer.
D. Expansion tank shall be size as noted on Drawings, all steel, A.S.M.E. construction
E. Equivalent products for items A through D as manufactured by Bell & Gossett, Amtrol, or equal
will be approved.
F. Air Vents: Air vents shall be provided where shown and at all other high points, where shown
or not. Vents shall be of the manual type and shall be full line size, but in no case shall they be
less than 2" steel pipe. Chambers shall be a minimum of 12 in. high. Drain tubing shall be
extended in such a manner that the globe valve and end of drainline are readily accessible. Air
HVAC 15600-52
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
D. Screw end and flanged valves shall be as follows:
1. Gate: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-120; 3 in. and larger - Stockham
Figure G-620 or G-623.
2. Globe: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-120 or 752; 3 in. and larger -
Stockham Figure G-609 or G-613.
3. Check: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-319; 3 in. and larger - Stockham
Figure G-931.
4. Ball Valves: Watts Series 6000.
E. In lieu of either of above valves and only for shut-off duty, the HVAC Subcontractor may use the
following butterfly valves for 2-1/2 in. and larger sizes. Butterfly valves shall be Center Line,
Rockwell, DeZurik, Posi-Seal, or Lunkenheimer equal to Center Line Series A or AA 175 psig
working pressure, Mechanite or ductile iron body, 316, steel disc and shaft, Nordel EPT seat,
designed for bubbletight shutoff. Valves to be fitted with lever operator for two position
operation.
F. Gate and/or globe valves shall not be used as substitutes for the following valves when used as
balance valves.
G. Balance and/or shut-off valves 4 in. and larger -Tour & Anderson Series STAF, neoprene seat,
semi-steel body, with stainless steel or bronze top and bottom bushings, 150 psig working
pressure, 125 pound ANSI flanges, Figure 101F or 118F, G6-HI2. Provide open position stop
on all valves. Provide hand operators for all valves which are 6 ft. or more above the floor.
H. Balance and/or shut-off valves 2-1/2 in. and 3 in. sizes - Tour & Anderson Series STAF, lever
operated, faced plug, neoprene seat, semi-steel body with stainless steel or bronze top and bottom
bushings, 150 prig working pressure, Figure 118. Provide open position stops for all valves.
1. For 2 in. and smaller - Balancing valves shall be Tour & Anderson Figure STAD or STA-D,
semi-steel body, bronze plug with neoprene or Teflon resilient face, bronze top and bottom
bushings,complete with lever. Provide open position stop and plastic cap on all valves which are
labeled "Balance Valves" on the Drawings. All valves at fan coil unit shall be furnished with
drain kit.
J. Pump discharge check valves shall be Muessco, Williams & Hager, or Smolensky equal to
Muessco 105-DT silent type, steel body, stainless steel trim and spring, renewable seat, 150 psig
ASME rated.
2.18 THERMOMETERS
A. Thermometers shall be Moeller, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice or Weiss, equal to Taylor 30EJ31009
with aluminum case, industrial glass, red reading mercury, 9" scale length, 2°F subdivisions.
Stem length shall be sufficient to assure accurate and fast response but in no case less than 3-1/2"
nor less than one-third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each thermometer shall be provided
with a brass, monel, or stainless steel separable socket of matching length, and with lagging
extension when installed in insulated pipe. Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type, posi-
tioned as required to be easily seen and read from normal operator's position.
B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following:
1. Hot water heating system: 25-240°F
HVAC 15600-51
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
construction phase. Immediately following substantial completion and/or beneficial occupancy,
the HVAC Subcontractor shall install the second, clean set and deliver the two(2) remaining sets
to the Owner.
G. Provide units with fresh air capability, including damper with seals and wall box, as scheduled.
H. Units shall be American Air Filter, Trane, Modine, or equal, and shall be complete with motor
starters, tamperproof access doors and front panels, recessing flanges, and extended motor oilers.
2.16 UNIT HEATERS
A. Unit heaters shall be of the vertical and horizontal blow-through propeller fan type with hot water
heating coil. Capacity shall be as shown on the Drawings.
B. Casing shall be constructed of heavy gauge furniture steel. It shall be phosphatized and
completely dip painted with a heavy duty baked enamel.
C. Coil shall be constructed on a single serpentine copper tube. Aluminum fins shall be mechanically
attached to the coil by expansion. All connections and U-bends shall be electrically induction-
brazed to the tube. The coil shall be tested for 100 psi.
D. Fan shall be selected for quiet operation and shall be factory balanced.
E. Motor shall have electrical characteristics as shown on Drawings. Motor shall be equipped with
permanent lubricated bearings.
F. Horizontal units shall be equipped with horizontal and vertical adjustable discharge louvers.
G. Unit heaters shall be Modine, Trane, AAF, or equal, as shown on Drawings.
H. Vertical unit shall be equipped with Anemostat (4) cone diffusers.
2.17 VALVES
A. All valves shall be of the same make except as noted below for special valves and shall be Crane,
Fairbanks, Walworth, or Tour&Anderson manufacture based on the following Stockham valves.
B. All water valves installed in copper tube piping shall be, in general, solder end pattern, all bronze
with iron hand wheel, rated for not less than 200 pounds non-shock water pressure. In general,
all line service valves are to be gate valves, manual vents are to be globe type.
C. Solder end valves are as follows:
1. Gate Valves - Stockham Figure B-109.
2. Globe Valves - Stockham B-14T.
3. Check Valves - Stockham B-309.
4. Drain Valves - Watts No. B-6000 ball valve with hose adapter, cap and chain.
5. Ball Valves - Watts Series B-6001.
HVAC 15600-50
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 1.6, 1996
D. Base shall be of a size suitable for the pump, motor, and shaft, and shall be constructed of cast
iron or welded steel. A concrete base 6" higher than the surrounding floor shall be provided.
Construct base and install as shown by the detail on the Drawings.
E. After completion of the system and before start-up of the pump, the pump shall be lubricated in
strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. A metal instruction plate shall be attached
to the pump in a location where it is clearly visible. These instructions shall indicate the
recommended lubricant, the points of lubrication,and the recommended frequency of lubrication.
F. The HVAC Subcontractor shall check, test, and start each base mounted pump and shall align the
pump with a dial indicator within 0.002". Discharge and suction readings shall be recorded and
forwarded for record purposes.
G. Pumps shall be Bell & Gossett Series 1510 Universal, or equal by Taco, Armstrong, Wein-
mann.
2.14 CIRCULATING PUMPS (In Line Type)
A. The pumps shall be of the centrifugal in-line coupled type, especially designed and constructed
for quiet operation. Capacity shall be as shown on the Drawings. Pumps shall be cast iron,
bronze fitted.
B. Pumps shall be of the vertically split case type making possible complete servicing without
breaking piping connections. The pump shall use a mechanical rotating type carbon seal and shall
face against a ceramic seat.
C. Motor shall be drip proof, 1,750 rpm and shall be especially selected for quiet operation. The
horsepower of the motor shall be of such a size as to insure non-overloading of the motor
throughout the pump curve without the use of motor service factor. Pump motors shall be
premium efficiency.
D. Pumps shall be Bell & Gossett Series 60, or equal by Armstrong or Taco.
2.15 CABINET TYPE UNIT HEATER
A. The unit heater shall be of the blow-through cabinet type with hot water heating coil. The
capacity of the unit heater shall be as shown on the Drawings.
B. The cabinet shall be constructed of 16 gage furniture grade steel. All exposed corners and edges
shall be rounded. The front panel shall be fastened by quick-acting allen head cam locks for easy
access. Metal surfaces shall be cleaned, phosphatized, prime coated, and all exposed surfaces
shall be finished in a baked enamel, color to be selected by the Architect. Units shall be floor,
ceiling, or wall mounted, as scheduled.
C. Fan shall be all steel, multi-blade, forward curved, centrifugal type fan which has been statically
and dynamically balanced to eliminate vibration. Fans shall be assembled to a fan board and
mounted below the coil in the unit casing.
D. The motor shall be of the PSC open type, sleeve bearing with resilient mount in the unit. The
motor shall be suitable for electrical characteristics as shown on Drawings.
E. The heating coil shall be serpentine connected and shall be of the finned copper tubing type and
shall be hydrostatically tested to twice the working pressure.
F. Provide four(4) sets of throw-away filters located in a frame in the return air stream. The filters
shall be easily removable by removing the front access panel. One(1)set shall be installed during
HVAC 15600-49
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
E. The convectors shall be finished with factory baked enamel finish in color to be selected by the
Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
F. Convector A-Type SW-A: Type SW-A cabinets shall be constructed from not less than 14 gauge
CRS front and top and No. 16 gauge CRS back and sides. The front shall wrap around the sides
of the cabinet and shall fasten at sides with vandalproof screws. Air outlet louvers of venetian
type shall be in slope top. Type SW-A air inlet shall be through open bottom. Back shall be
provided with holes for mounting on wall.
G. Convector B - Type PWG-A: Type PWG-A convectors shall be constructed from not less than
No. 14 gauge CRS wrap around fronts and No. 16 gauge CRS recessed liner. Depth of cabinets
front from wall shall be 2 in. Front shall be well rounded on all edges and shall extend back to
wall and fasten to flanges on liner with vandalproof screws. Front shall be provided with venetian
type air outlet grille and integral inlet air grille. Type PWG-A convectors shall be four-side
overlap for mounting above floor.
H. Dampers: Provide factory installed Allen Head operated dampers for all convectors. The damper
operator shall have two free wheeling clutches for automatic engagement at the beginning(closing
or opening) position and shall position the damper blade at any intermediate point between full
closed and full open; at the full open and full closed position, the clutch shall disengage allowing
the die-formed, unbreakage nylon damper knob to be turned beyond the full closed or open
position without jamming or distorting the damper assembly. When the ribbed knob is reversed,
the clutch shall again engage and close or open the damper bald. The operator is to be 5/8 in.
machined aluminum screw and zinc die-cast trunnion and escutcheon plate. The escutcheon plate
shall be fastened through the enclosure to a 3/32 in. back-up plate with countersunk sheet metal
screws.
100%
1. Access Doors: Convectors shall be provided with two access doors. Access doors shall be 5-1/8
in. by 4-1/8 in. and shall be located in the inlet louver area. Access doors shall be hinged on side
with straight shaft type hinge and shall fasten with cam-type locking device with Allen Head
operator.
J. End Pockets: Where noted, convectors shall be provided with 4 in. end pockets, both ends. End
pocket shall consist of the cabinet extended in length as noted with No. 20 gauge CRS baffle spot
welded to back of cabinet extruding from heating element to air outlet louvers.
2.13 CIRCULATING PUMPS (Base Mounted Type)
A. The pumps shall be of the centrifugal base mounted type, especially designed and constructed for
quiet operation. Capacity shall be as shown on the Drawings. Pumps shall be cast iron, bronze
fitted.
B. Pump shall be of the vertically split case, end suction design, making possible complete servicing
without breaking piping or motor connections. Motor to pump connection shall be of the flexible
coupler type. The pump shall use a mechanical rotating type carbon seal and shall face against
a Tungsten Carbide insert. The pump shall be equipped with oil lubricated bronze sleeve bearings
for smooth and quiet operation.
C. Motor shall be drip proof, 1,750 rpm and shall be especially selected for quiet operation. All
pump motors shall be premium efficiency. The electrical characteristics of the motor shall be as
shown on the Drawings. The horsepower of the motor shall be of such a size as to insure non-
overloading of the motor throughout the pump curve without the use of motor service factor.
HVAC 15600-48
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
OW Q. Service and Guarantee:
1. The complete installation, including all equipment, shall be guaranteed free from defects
in workmanship and material for a period of 24 months from date of acceptance in
writing by the Owner. Provide at no cost to the Owner, all necessary service, adjusting,
and checking during the 24 month guarantee period.
2. During warranty period, the ATC Subcontractor shall update and implement all latest
revisions of software offered by the Contractor that applies to this Project.
2.11 FINNED RADIATION
A. Furnish and install finned tube radiators as shown on Drawings. Radiator assemblies shall be
I=B=R rated, Ted Reed Thermal, Sterling, Vulcan, or equal.
B. Type "A" shall be Sterling "Versa-Line" JVA-FT 14 with 3-1/4" square steel fins, .024 thick,
32 per foot, 1-1/4" iron pipe element, single tier element, 14" high flat top cover, full backplate,
rated at 560 Btuh per foot at 170°F A.W.T., with ball bearing hanger bracket with cradle. Covers
in lobbies, corridors, toilet rooms, etc. shall be 14 gauge.
C. Type "B" shall be Sterling Versa-Line" JVB-SS-19 with 4-1/4" square steel fins, .032" thick, 32
fins per foot, 1-1/4" iron pipe element, single tier element, 19" high double slope cover, full back
plate, rated at 740 Btub per foot at 170°F A.W.T., with ball bearing hanger bracket with cradle.
Covers in lobbies, corridors, toilet rooms, etc. shall be 14 gauge.
D. Enclosures shall be manufactured of 16 gauge cold rolled steel enamel finish, with color selected
by the Architect.
E. Support brackets shall be die formed for rigidity and must be designed to support both the element
and enclosure. Ball bearing cradles shall be provided for movement of element during expansion
and contraction. Brackets to be furnished at a maximum of 3'-0" on centers, with a minimum of
two support brackets for each radiator. Roller bearing pipe hangers shall be used to support
supply or return piping under covers.
2.12 CONVECTORS
A. Convectors shall be of the floor mounted or semi-recessed type as shown on Drawings for heating
with hot water. Unit shall have a capacity as shown on the drawings and shall be rated in
accordance with Code CS140-47 of the National Bureau of Standards.
B. Convector elements shall be of suitable type for use with hot water and shall consist of round
seamless copper tubes, non-ferrous fins, cast iron headers, steel element end supports and fin tube
supports all suitably protected against corrosion. All tubes shall be mechanically expanded into
fin collars. Tubes shall be expanded and rolled into headers with contact strengthened by tapered
brass bushings so inserted as to prevent tubes from loosening or pulling out by continued
expansion. No soldered or welded joints or compression couplings shall be permitted.
C. All cabinets shall be reinforced where necessary to provide stiffness. Cabinets shall be
constructed of 16 gage quality steel. Fronts shall be secured in place by quick opening fasteners
with vandalproof heads. Cabinets and fronts shall be phosphatized and painted inside and outside
with one coat of grey primer. Complete cabinets and convector elements are to be manufactured
by the same company. A horizontal channel stiffener shall be installed on the inside of the front
panel of all units 36" or longer.
D. The convectors shall be securely attached to the building structure and shall be set dead level in
both directions.
HVAC 15600-47
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
3. Displays:
a. An operator can command a graphic representation of each and any HVAC
system which can be displayed on CRT with all connected temperatures and
other associated points displayed dynamically. This shall include all water
systems and classroom VAV boxes which can be addressed by room number for
display.
b. While graphic is being displayed, adjustments can be made to that individual
system and stored for future reference.
4. Computer shall have storage capacity to keep any mechanical events or alarms that occur
during unoccupied and unmanned periods when peripherals are shut off or unattended.
A message will be displayed or printed on operator return to activate a report of past
events.
P. Adjustment and Calibration:
1. On completion of the job, the ATC Subcontractor shall completely calibrate, test, and
adjust, ready for use, all electronic controls, thermostats, valves, damper motors, and
relays provided under his contract and be present for functional tests on systems. The
Building Management System shall be completely checked, test run, and adjusted.
2. Before the Architect is asked to witness the functional tests, the entire control and
management system must be complete, controls calibrated. The controlled devices will
be physically inspected and checked to assure that these terminal devices are, in fact,
under proper control and working smoothly over their entire range of operation.
3. The adjustment procedure shall include the following steps:
a. Preliminary set up and calibration per Specifications and shop drawings.
b. Physical checkout of all components for completeness and accuracy, simul-
taneously with mechanical system balancing.
C. Review of system with Architect.
d. Functional test for Owner's benefit, instruction, and acceptance.
e. Not less than 30 or more than 60 days after systems have been in full operation,
review problems with Owner, recheck all adjustments, and recalibrate as
required.
4. The Control Manufacturer shall provide a complete instructional manual covering the
function and operation of all control and management system components on the job,
which shall include a trouble-shooting and operating procedure. This manual shall be
furnished to the Owner's operating personnel and shall show the total integrated control
system. Competent technicians shall be provided for instruction purposes. The Control
Manufacturer shall furnish schematic systems control diagrams to be located in the
Mechanical Room adjacent to the Temperature Control Console.
5. Control and management systems shall neither be considered complete nor acceptable
until all conditions of the Sequence of Operation have been attained, all temperatures are
maintained within specified limits of all operating conditions, and all systems damper
leakage of controlled within specified limits.
HV AC 15600-46
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
0. Reports and Displays:
1. The following reports shall be generated on demand or automatically as setup.
a. Boiler Fuel Usage:
(1) Totalize the cubic feet of gas used, or gallon of oil consumed, for
monthly period, and totalize cubic feet used for the heating season to
date.
b. Electrical consumption totalize the KWH used for monthly period and totalize
KWH for fiscal period to date.
C. Boiler Water Usage:
(1) Totalize daily boiler make up water usage.
(2) Alarm excessive usage during any day.
d. Report costs on the above monitored utilities for monthly period and year to date
by operator input of actual unit costs. (Computer to perform calculation and
storage). For electrical rates allow for up to six step rates to be entered.
e. Equipment Maintenance:
(1) Totalize run time of all major HVAC equipment such as air handling
unit pumps, condensing units, and boilers.
(2) Tag manufacturers recommended maintenance procedures to the proper
number of hours of run time on each piece of equipment above and
print out the instructions in a timely manner.
(3) As a minimum, the following maintenance functions shall be reported:
(a) AHU filter change schedule.
(b) AHU bearing lube schedule.
(c) AHU motor lube schedule.
(d) Pump bearing lube schedule.
(e) Condenser start-up/shutdown procedure.
(f) Boiler start-up/shutdown procedure.
(g) All HVAC temperatures.
(h) All DDC control loops.
(i) Any status on alarm.
2. All reports shall be either displayed on the CRT or printed out on hard copy as requested
by the operator.
HVAC 15600-45
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
11. Guards:
a. Furnish and install heavy duty guards on all sensors located in the following
areas:
(1) Toilets, Halls, Corridors, Lobbies, Entries, Lockers, Turn-out and
Decon.
12. Domestic Hot Water Recirculating Pumps:
a. Recirculating pumps shall be off during unoccupied cycle and restart for the
occupancy subject to an optimized start-up.
N. Energy Management:
1. Start/Stop Time Optimization:
a. Console computer shall include a software program to perform optimized
start-up and shut-down of all selected equipment. The SSTO program shall
preliminarily start HVAC equipment at the earliest possible time before the end
of the occupancy period and still maintain desired comfort conditions. The
SSTO program shall meet the local code requirements for minimum outside air
while the building is occupied. The program shall perform optimized start/stop
as a function of both outside and inside conditions.
b. The SSTO program shall include a purge cycle which takes advantage of the
possible free cooling available at night, during summer cooling periods. The
purge cycle shall, prior to occupancy, open any controllable outside air damper,
exhaust inside air and bring in outside air, only if the enthalpy of the outside air
is sufficiently less than that of the return air, such that a net savings of energy
is realized.
C. The operator shall be able to, for each air handling unit and zone under control
of the SSTO program, establish and modify the following parameters:
(1) The occupancy period for one year ahead including all vacation
periods.
(2) The empirical factor for relating the difference between outside and
desired inside temperature and the amount of start-time advance for
heating or cooling.
(3) The empirical fixed lead time for starting equipment for heating or
cooling.
(4) The empirical parameter that defines the heat characteristics of the
building.
d. Include domestic hot water circulator as a separate zone of control.
HVAC 15600-44
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
50 degrees = 140 degrees HWS
System shall not go below 140°F H.W.
b. Occupied Pump Control:
(1) In the occupied mode, both pumps shall run continuously unless the
outdoor temperature is above 65 degrees F.
(2) Both pumps shall run unless the energy management system decides
only one pump is sufficient to maintain temperature.
C. Unoccupied Pump Control:
(1) The hot water pumps shall remain off (both pumps) when outside
temperature is above 58 degrees. When outside temperature falls
below 58 degrees, one pump shall cycle on/off subject to the night
sensor. When outside temperature falls below 40 degrees, one pump
shall run continuously and the second pump shall cycle subject to the
night sensor.
8. Sequence for Storage Unit Heating and Entry Cabinet Heaters (Hot Water):
a. Room sensor through microprocessor controller shall cycle fan to satisfy space
demands for heat. On lower demand, the fan shall be de-activated.
b. All unit heaters and cabinet heaters shall be locked off through the micro-
processor the cooling cycle thus eliminating surface mounted aquastats to
prevent cold running.
C. During unoccupied periods, set point of sensor shall be lowered to match
corresponding and respective zone setback temperatures.
9. Sequence for Radiation(Hot Water):
a. Furnish DDC control valves for radiation and a room sensor which shall
modulate control valve serving radiation to satisfy space demand on a demand
for lower heating requirement, the N.O. valve shall close.
b. During unoccupied periods, set point of sensor shall be lowered to match
corresponding and respective zone setback temperature.
10. Toilet and Miscellaneous Exhaust Fans:
a. Generally these fans are the minimum exhaust which handle the minimum
outdoor air brought in by the respective air handling units or and shall run only
during occupied periods. Interlock all exhaust fans so that when respective
outdoor air unit is closed, all exhaust fans will be off, and when air handling
unit or unit ventilator starts, the exhaust fan shall run.
HVAC 15600-43
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
5. VAV Terminal Box Control
VAV Terminal Box(es) will be activated either by operator defined schedules or by a
zone local override switch mounted on the enhanced zone sensor. When it is scheduled
to be on, it will check the Air Handling Unit control loop to see if there is "GO"
authorization, i.e., there is positive air flow in the AHU and heat/cool loops are active.
If there is "GO" authorization, the VAV Terminal Box(es) will be abled ON. In case
absence of "GO" , the controller will send request "Run when I run" to AHU . Upon
satisfying the proper AHU operation, the AHU controller will broadcast "GO".
The zone sensor will monitor the temperature within the controlled space, and will
control the operation of damper(s),recirculation fan, reheat coil where applicable. Below
the heating setpoint temperature, air flow will be set to the heating minimum set and the
fan will be powered ON. The heating coil will either modulate or stage per PID loop.
Above the cooling setpoint temperature, damper will modulate between the cooling
minimum set and cooling maximum set. Between two setpoint temperature, the air flow
will be set to the cooling minimum set.
During Morning Warm Up, the air flow will be set to the warm up minimum set and the
heating coil will modulate (or stage) per PID loop.
The controller will generate alarms in the following cases:
-Zone Temperature
-No power to VAV box
-Discharge Air Temperature; High and Low
6. Occupied - Unoccupied Control:
a. The building shall be divided into 13 separate occupied/unoccupied control zones
as follows:
6 Apparatus Bay
1 Garage
4 Office
2 Spare
b. Entries, lobbies, and corridors shall be included with the respective zone. If
more than one zone requires the use of the above areas two or more zones may
activate these areas.
7. Reset Control
a. The temperature control system shall optimize the hot water reset in the
following manner:
(1) Sensors located in the hot water supply and hot water return of each
system shall have its set point automatically and inversely reset from
outdoor temperature by resetting the boiler control aquastat in the
following schedule:
Hot Water System:
0 degrees = 180 degrees HWS
HVAC 15600-42
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
The fan is interlocked with the heating sequence. When the fan is turned on, the fan
status determines if there is air movement in the duct. After an operator definable
feedback time delay, if there is no air movement, an alarm shall be generated.
Packaged AHU Control
A PID control loop,comparing the actual space temperature to its setpoint,shall
modulate the cooling or cooling stages (and heating coil valve or heating stages
in sequence) to achieve the setpoint target. (Required: Digital Control Module)
4. Boiler Optimization(BO)
a. Circulation Pumps
In response to a request for heating, the hw pumps shall be turned on. (DO:
Pump Command)
When the pump is turned on, the pump status determines if there is water flow
in the pipe. After an operator definable feedback time delay, if there is no
water flow, an alarm shall be generated. Conversely, if status is detected while
the pump is turned off, a separate alarm shall be generated. (DI: Pump Status)
After an operator defined time delay, the system will turn the boiler on.
Additionally, as the building approaches unoccupied time, the boiler run point
can be turned off an operator definable period of time before the hw pump in
order to utilize the of the remaining heating capacity left in the water loop. (DO:
Boiler Control Command)
When the boiler and its associated circulation pump is turned on, the boiler
status determines if the boiler is on. After an operator definable feedback time
delay, if there is no positive status, an alarm shall be generated. Conversely,
if status is detected while the boiler is turned off, a separate alarm shall be
�enerated. (DI: Boiler Control Status) A digital input monitors the boiler
safeties circuit and shall generate an alarm when on. (DI: Boiler Safeties Status)
b. Boiler
A PID control loop, comparing the actual water temp. setpoint(as reset by the
ambient outside temperature), shall sequence additional boiler stages in order to
achieve the setpoint target. Minimum ON/OFF tunes prevent short-cycling of
the boiler stages. (Al: Water temperature, DO: Boiler staged control)
The water temperature setpoint can be confined to operate within maximum and
n.mmum values by the operator. The operator shall be able to select any of the
following three methods of determining the setpoint:
1) Fixed but manually changeable by the operator,
2) Reset based on the requirements of the outside temperature.
�) Reset by an operator changeable schedule based on outside air tempera-
A0%1 ture. (Al: OA Temp)
HVAC 15600-41
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
One of seven colors shall be generated to represent the comfort conditions in the space, _11"WN
and shall be displayed graphically at the operator station.
If the actual space temperature is in the dead band between the heating setpoint and the
cooling setpoint, the color displayed shall be green for the occupied mode, representing
ideal comfort conditions. If in the unoccupied mode, the color displayed shall be gray
representing "after-hours" conditions.
If the space temperature rises above the cooling setpoint, the color shall change to
yellow. Upon further rise beyond the cooling setpoint plus an offset, the color shall
change to orange. Upon further rise beyond the cooling setpoint plus the yellow band
offset plus the orange band offset, the color shall change to red indicating unacceptable
high temperature conditions. At this point an alarm shall be generated to notify the
operator.
When space temperature falls below the heating setpoint, the color shall change to light
blue. Upon further temperature decrease below the heating setpoint minus an offset, the
color shall change to dark blue. Upon further space temperature decrease below the
heating setpoint minus the light blue band offset minus the dark blue band offset the color
shall change to red indicating unacceptable low temperature conditions. At this point an
alarm shall be generated to notify the operator.
All setpoints and offsets shall be operator definable. When in the occupied mode,
start-up mode, or when heating or cooling during the night setback unoccupied mode, a
request shall be sent over the network to other equipment in the HVAC chain, such as
to an AHU fan that serves the space, to run for ventilation. The operator shall be able
to disable this request function if desired.
When comfort conditions are warmer than ideal, indicated by the colors yellow, orange,
and high temperature red, a request for additional cooling shall be sent over the network
to other cooling equipment in the HVAC chain, such as a condenser. This information
is to be used for optimization of equipment in the HVAC chain. The operator shall be
able to disable this function if desired.
When comfort conditions are cooler than ideal; indicated by the colors light blue, dark
blue, and low temperature red; a request for additional heating shall be sent over the
network to other heating equipment in the HVAC chain, such as a boiler. This
information is to be used for optimization of equipment in the HVAC chain. The
operator shall be able to disable this function if desired.
The cooling (and heating)setpoints may be increased (decreased) under demand control
conditions to reduce the cooling(heating)load on the building during the demand control
period. Up to three levels of demand control strategy shall be provided. The operator
may predefine the amount of setpoint increase (decrease) for each of the three levels.
Each space temperature sensor in the building may be programmed independently.
An optimum start-up program transitions from the unoccupied setpoints to the occupied
setpoints. The optimum start-up algorithm considers the rate of space temperature rise
for heating and the rate of space temperature fall for cooling under nominal outside
temperature conditions; it also considers the outside temperature; and the heat loss and
gain coefficients of the space envelope. (Al: Space Temperature)
A PID control loop, comparing the actual space temperature to its setpoint, shall
modulate the dampers (and heating coil valve or heating stages in sequence) to achieve
the setpoint target.
HVAC 15600-40
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
the operator to force the outside air dampers to a definable minimum position. (AI: OA
& SA Temp, AO: OA Damper control)
If the outside air dampers are modulating open, their position will be limited by an
operator definable mixed air temperature low limit. (AI: MA Temp)
If cooling is required, but the return air temperature is lower than the OA temperature,
the outside air dampers will go to their minimum position. (AI: RA Temp)
If the return air temperature is below an operator definable limit, then a warm-up cycle
shall be initiated forcing the outside air dampers to their closed position. (See
WARM-UP CYCLE.) When return air temperature increases above the limit, plus a
definable differential, then the warm-up cycle shall be terminated. (AI: RA Temp)
When cooling is required, a high OA enthalpy limit may be defined to force the OA
dampers to their minimum position. (AI: OA RH)
When cooling is required, but the OA enthalpy is higher than the return air enthalpy, the
OA dampers are forced to their minimum position. (AI: RA RH)
Warm-Up Cycle Control
If the return air temperature is below an operator definable limit, then a
"warm-up cycle" shall initiate. The warm-up cycle shall position OA dampers
:losed, position heating valves to maximum open, and broadcast a message over
the network to all of the terminal boxes served by that AHU that a warm-up
-ycle is in progress. This message may be used by those terminal boxes where,
during the warm-up cycle only, full terminal box reheat and fully open damper
position is advantageous.
When return air temperature increases above the limit, plus a definable
differential, the warm-up cycle shall be terminated. (AI: RA Temp)
The digital out relay shall close during warm-up which may be used to turn-on
:lectric heat, shall close a separate minimum OA damper, or to operate other
miscellaneous functions that may be appropriate. (A0: Heating Coil Control)
3. Space Temperature Control
a. Space Temperature Measurement
There shall be two space temperature setpoints, one for cooling and one for heating,
separated by a dead band. Only one of the two setpoints shall be operative at any time.
The cooling setpoint is operative if the actual space temperature has more recently been
equal to or greater than the cooling setpoint. The heating setpoint is operative if the
actual space temperature has more recently been equal to or less than the heating setpoint.
There are two modes of operation for the setpoints,one for the occupied mode(example:
heating = 72°F, cooling = 76°F) and one for the unoccupied mode (example: heating
= 55°F, cooling = 90°F).
The occupied/unoccupied modes may be scheduled by time, date, or day of week.
HVAC 15600-39
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
A PID control loop, comparing the actual cold (hot) deck temperature to its
setpoint, shall modulate the cooling(heating) coil valve to achieve the setpoint
target.
The operator shall be able to select any of the following three methods of
determining the cold (hot) deck temperature setpoints:
1) Fixed but manually changeable by the operator. (AI: Hot(Cold)Deck
DAT, AO: Hot (Cold) Valve Control)
2) Reset based on the requirements of the individual room sensor served
by the air handler.
These reset functions are based on four operator definable variables for
heating and four for cooling, and they are:
a) The length of time between reset adjustments,
b) The decrease (increase) in temperature setpoint that is desired
when a terminal box reaches its maximum cooling (heating)
position,
C) The increase (decrease) in temperature setpoint that is desired
when none of the terminal boxes is in a maximum cooling
(heating) position,
d) A high limit on the rate of temperature setpoint change.
3) Reset by an operator changeable schedule based on outside air tempera-
ture. Both setpoints can be confined to operate within maximum and
minimum values by the operator. (Al: OA Temperature)
C. Pre-heat Control
When the preheat coil discharge air temperature falls below a definable low
limit, the preheat valve shall modulate open on a proportional basis.
Additionally, the PID control loop, comparing the actual hot deck temperature
to its setpoint,modulates the preheating coil valve after the primary heating coil
valve has been fully opened, when additional heating is required. (Al: PH Coil
DAT, A0: PH Coil Control)
d. Pre-Cool Control
The PID loop, comparing the actual cold deck temperature to its setpoint, shall
modulate the pre-cooling valve after the primary cooling valve has been fully
opened, when additional cooling is required. (AI: PC Coil DAT, AO: PC Coil
Control)
2. OA Economizer Control
Application shall be based on dry bulb outside air temperature, with both high and low
limits, or on outside enthalpy where humidity sensors are also utilized.
A PID loop, comparing actual supply air temperature to its setpoint, shall modulate the
outside air dampers, prior to sequencing mechanical cooling, to achieve the supply air
temperature setpoint target. High and low outside air temperature limits may be set by
HVAC 15600-38
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
7. Direct Digital Zone Control
The Zone Control Module and Terminal Control Module shall provide the application
software described above; Time of Day Scheduling, Temperature Compensated Duty
Cycling, Time of Day Peak Demand Limiting with Temperature Compensation, Trend
Logging, Start/Stop Optimization, Reports and Archiving, Source Optimization,
Setpoints, Graphic Structure, and Event initiated Programs.
The Zone Control Module and Terminal Control Module shall provide all necessary
control strategies (user definable and down loadable from the head-end) and necessary
hardware to control and monitor the VAV Terminal Box, Fan Coil Unit, and Packaged
AC Unit.
The Zone Control Module and Terminal Control Module for the VAV box shall have an
on-board differential pressure transducer for monitoring air flow rate.
The Zone Control Module and Terminal Control Module shall interface with one of two
types of space temperature sensors; basic and enhanced model. The basic space
temperature sensor shall be a surface mounted thermistor. The enhanced space
temperature sensor shall be surface mounted and shall have, in addition to thermistor, a
zone local override switch,setpoint adjustment switch,LED indicator for occupied mode.
M. Sequences of Operation
Following are the typical sequences of operation for HVAC equipment provided by Automated
Logic's System 20120. Within each section, each paragraph describes a specific control sequence
for a component of the equipment; start/stop, status, etc. Each specific control sequence will
require appropriate I/O points, which are listed at the end of each sequence in parenthesis.
1. Air Handling Unit Control
a. Start/Stop
In response to a request for heating, cooling, and/or ventilation, the supply fan
shall be turned on. (DO: SA Fan command)
An associated exhaust air fan shall be interlocked with the supply air fan. (DO:
RA Fan Command)
When a fan is turned on, the fan status shall be determined by means of
monitoring the air movement in the duct. After an operator definable feedback
time delay, if there is no air movement, an alarm shall be generated. Con-
versely, if air movement is detected while a fan is turned off, a separate alarm
shall be generated. (DI: SA & RA Fan Status)
A digital input shall monitor the AHU safeties circuit and alarms when on. (DI:
AHU Safety)
A digital input shall monitor for excessive pressure drop across the filter. If
present, a dirty filter alarm shall be generated. (DI: Filter Status)
b. Supply Air Temperature Control
HVAC 15600-37
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
The operator shall have the capability to reset the individual equipment temperature
setpoints for each demand level. Equipment shall not be shed if these reset setpoints are
not satisfied.
The system shall have failed meter protection, such that when a KW pulse is not received
from the utility within an operator adjustable time period, an alarm will be generated.
The system software will automatically default to a predetermined fail safe shed level.
The system shall display a graphic trend of the last 60 samples of user defined demand
periods. Intervals shall be defined by the owner in multiples of one minute. The system
shall have the ability to archive demand and usage information for use at a later time.
System shall permit the operator access to this information on a current day,
month-to-date and a year-to-date basis.
5. Day/Night Setback (DNS)
The system shall allow the space temperature to drift down (up) within a preset
(adjustable)unoccupied temperature range. The heating(cooling)shall be activated upon
reaching either end of the DNS range and shall remain activated until the space tempera-
ture returns to the DNS range.
The system shall be capable of closing all outside air and exhaust air dampers during the
unoccupied period, except for 100% OSA units.
Unoccupied space temperature shall be monitored by the DDC temperature sensors
located in the individual zones being controlled or within a representative room in the " +
building if full DDC control is not being effected.
User shall be able to define, modify or delete the following parameters.
a. DNS setpoint temperature(s)
b. Temperature band for night heating operation
c. Period when the DNS is to be activated
6. Timed Local Override (TLO)
The system shall have TLO input points which permit the occupants to request an
override of equipment which has been scheduled OFF. The system shall turn the
equipment ON upon receiving a request from the local input device. Local input devices
shall be push-button (momentary contact), wind-up timer, or ON/OFF switches as
detailed in the I/O summary.
If a push-button is used the system operator shall be able to define the duration of
equipment ON time per input pulse and the total maximum ON time permitted. Override
time already entered shall be cancelable by the occupant at the input point. If a wind up
timer is used the equipment will stay in override mode until the timer expires.
Year-to-date, month-to-date and current day override history shall be maintained for each
TLO input point. History data shall be accessible by the operator at any time and shall
be capable of being automatically stored on hard disk and/or printed on a daily basis.
HVAC 15600-36
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
The operator shall have the ability to edit all schedules off line and then
download any or all schedule changes to the control modules with a single
operator command through the mouse interface.
The operator shall have the ability to upload any or all schedules from a control
module in the event the schedule in the module is different from the data base
in the CS being used.
The operator shall be able to view a color coded, five-day graphic forecast of
schedules for instant overview of facilities schedules. Graphic forecast shall
include colored coded indication of all types of schedules, i.e. normal, holiday
and override. The graphic forecast shall show inconsistencies between head-end
schedules and those located within field control modules.
2. Optimum Start/Stop (OSS)/Optimum Enable/Disable (OED)
Provide software to start and stop equipment on a sliding schedule based on the individual
zone temperature and the heating/cooling capacity in'F/hr. of the equipment serving that
zone. The heating/cooling capacity value shall be operator adjustable.
Temperature compensated peak demand limiting shall remain in effect during morning
start up to avoid setting a demand peak.
3. Source Temperature Optimization(STO)
The system shall be capable of automatically optimizing all air handling units, chillers
and boilers in response to the needs of other downstream pieces of equipment, by
increasing or decreasing supply temperature setpoints, i.e. chilled water, discharge air,
etc. using owner defined parameters.
The STO program will allow setpoints for various equipment in the heating/cooling chain
to float between an owner defined maximum and a minimum setpoint based on the actual
requirements of the building zones. The actual setpoint shall be calculated based on the
number of heating or cooling requests which are currently being received from the
equipment or zones served. Once every update period, the STO program surveys the
network to see if any piece of equipment requires any additional heating or cooling from
its source.
4. Demand Limiting (DL)
Application shall be programmable for a minimum of six separate time of day KW
demand billing rate periods.
The system shall be capable of measuring electrical usage from multiple meters serving
one building and each piece of equipment being controlled on the LAN shall be
programmable to respond to the peak demand information from its respective meter.
The demand control function shall utilize a sliding window method with the operator
being able to establish the kilowatt threshold for a minimum of three adjustable demand
levels. Sliding window interval shall be operator selectable in increments of one minute,
up to 60 minutes. Systems that incorporate rotating shed tables will not be acceptable.
HVAC 15600-35
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
K. Direct Digital Control Software
The system shall continuously perform DDC functions at the local Control Module in a
stand-alone mode. The operator shall be able to design and modify the control loops to meet the
requirements of the system being operated. The operators shall use system provided displays for
tuning of PID loops. These displays shall include the past three input variable values, the setpoint
for the loop as well as the sample interval and the results of the proportional, integral and
derivative effects on the final output.
Each Control module shall perform the following functions:
1. Identify and report alarm conditions
2. Execute DDC algorithms
3. Execute all application programs indicated on the I/O Summary Table
4. Trend and store data
In the event of a Control module failure, all points under its control shall be commanded to the
failure mode as indicated on the I/O Summary Table.
All DDC software shall reside in the respective Control module.
L. Applications Software
The following applications software shall be provided for the purpose of optimizing energy
consumption while maintaining occupant comfort:
1. Scheduled Start/Stop (SSS)
The system shall be capable of the following scheduling features:
a. Schedule up to 32 schedules per building, area, zone, groups of zones,
individually controlled equipment and groups of individually controlled
equipment. Each schedule shall provide beginning and ending dates and times
(hrs: minutes). A weekly repeating schedule, i.e. between 8:00 AM and 5:00
PM, Monday through Friday shall constitute one schedule, not five.
b. Allow dated schedules to be entered up to (five) 5 years in advance.
C. Schedules shall be self deleting when effective dates have passed.
d. Automatically adjust for leap years.
For maximum speed in the communication of schedules, the operator shall have
the ability to communicate schedules at the most efficient level with one
scheduling command through the mouse interface. This ranges from
system-wide to individual zones, groups or pieces of equipment.
The system shall allow the operator to designate any combination of equipment
to form a group that can be scheduled with a single operator command through
the mouse interface at the head-end. Any designated group shall have the
capability to be a member of another group.
The operator shall be able to make all schedule additions, modifications and
deletions using the mouse and "pop-up" menus.
HVAC 15600-34
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
AOW The head-end shall be capable of transferring all alarms to hard disk for storage.
5. Reports and Archiving
The field modules shall be capable of calling the head-end during off peak phone rate
hours to automatically upload all current and accumulated data. This shall be delivered
to the head-end for printing and/or permanent storage on hard disk. The system shall
further be capable of transferring hard disk information onto a floppy disk or magnetic
tape for remote site storage.
The system shall be capable of reporting and archiving the following information as a
minimum:
a. Outside air temperature history and degree day history
b. Electric demand and usage history
C. All trended points
d. All alarms and messages
e. Equipment runtime information
The system shall also provide the following additional reports for which archiving is not
applicable:
f. All points summary
g. Building operating schedules
h. Printout of any graphic screen
�Omk The system shall be capable of providing all points summaries on a hierarchical basis.
e.g., Only the points associated with a particular graphic shall be selectable and printed.
For example, if the operator is viewing an air handling unit (AHU), he may request an
all points summary at this level and receive only the points associated with the AHU.
If the building is being viewed and an all points summary selected, all building points
will be listed. Similarly, the system shall print building operating schedules pertinent to
the graphic level being viewed. e.g., If a zone or tenant zone group is being viewed on
the graphic display, then the system shall be capable of printing the building operating
schedules for the zone or tenant zone group. If the entire building graphic is being
viewed, the system shall be capable of printing schedules at the building level.
All system reports shall be capable of being viewed at the operators terminal and printed
at the operator's discretion.
6. Custom Reports and Logs
The operator shall be able to create custom report and logging formats using the DOS
based text editor program provided as part of the requirement for this project.
The operator shall be able to have the system report desired point data from the field,
insert the data in the custom report format, store the report on disk as well as have it
print out on the system and/or remote printers.
Custom report generation can be initiated either manually, based on a field occurrence
or based on time, or any combination.
7. Dynamic Live Graphical Software Displays
HVAC 15600-33
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
2. Trend Historian (TH)
The system operator shall have the ability to set up a continuous trend of any point, as
described above, for a limitless period of time.
Any point assigned to the TH will automatically upload to the head-end hard disk the
trend information in groups of the most recent 288 samples. This will continue as long
as the point is assigned to the TH.
The system operator will be able to simultaneously graphically display any four(4)values
being trended by the TH.
The operator will be able to move back in time by clicking with the mouse on an arrow
pointing to the left, or forward in time by clicking on the right arrow. The operator will
also have the option of typing in a date in the approximate location which will
automatically display the trend information for that time period.
3. Run Time
The system shall provide run time information for all digital output and input points for
all modules on command from the operator. Maximum run time limits shall be operator
definable and shall be capable of automatically issuing a printed message when the run
time maximum is exceeded. The operator shall be able to reset the run time accumula-
tor.
Run time hours and start time date shall be retained in non-volatile module memory.
Each module shall be capable of automatically uploading all accumulated data to the
head-end for permanent storage on hard disk.
4. Alarm Conditions and Maintenance Messages
The head-end shall allow receipt of alarms and messages while in a functional mode other
than energy management; i.e., incoming alarms shall be displayed while the operator is
utilizing another mode such as word processing and allow the operator to automatically
return to word processing after the alarm is received.
The system shall distinguish between alarms and messages with alarms having a higher
priority.
The system shall be capable of calling up to three different remote locations to deliver
an alarm or message. The operator shall determine if alarms or messages are to be based
on temperature limit, status or off-normal reporting.
The system shall be capable of printing maintenance messages when run time accumula-
tion maximum limits are exceeded.
The text for operator alarm and messages shall be operator definable. The system shall
be capable of storing at least 2,000 alarm messages and 2,000 maintenance messages each
of any length. Generic messages used for multiple points throughout the system shall
only count as one message.
In the event the head-end is powered down, the alarms shall be stored in the modules
until the head-end is restored. System should have the optional capability to deliver
simultaneous alarms to multiple head-ends.
HVAC 15600-32
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
2. The system shall permit the operator to perform as a minimum the following:
a. Add and delete points
b. Modify point parameters
c. Create and modify control sequences and programs
d. Reconfigure application programs
e. Add and/or modify graphics
3. All data points within the database shall be completely accessible as independent or
dependent variables for custom programming, calculation,interlocking,or manipulation.
4. Graphics Software.
The graphics software shall permit the easy construction of infinitely variable shapes and
sizes through the use of the mouse pointing device.
A selection of 256 colors and various fill textures, line types and text styles shall all be
accessible through the use of the mouse interface. The software shall resemble many of
the computer aided design programs currently available and allow graphics to be easily
moved, edited, added or deleted.
Graphics software shall be fully implemented and operational to accomplish the
following:
a. Create a new graphic picture
b. Modify a portion of a graphic picture
C. Delete a graphic picture, or any portion thereof
d. Call up a graphic picture
e. Cancel the display of a graphic picture
f. Assign conditions which automatically initiate the display
g. Overlay alphanumeric and graphics
h. Save the graphic picture
i. Display latest process data fully integrated with the graphic display
j. Display Live Graphical Software Programs
5. The head-end must be able to generate standard ASCII file formats to allow use with
third-party software (Lotus 123, etc.) to generate and store owner-designed reports.
J. Facility Management Functions
1. Trend Logging
The system shall be able to trend and display either numerically or graphically any analog
or digital physical point or calculated point or any output from any of the microblocks
in the Graphics Programs.
The system shall be able to simultaneously graphically display any four(4)values within
a function block of programming showing the most recent two hundred and eighty eight
(288) samples. Sample intervals shall be as small as one (1)second. Each trended point
will have the ability to be trended at a different trend interval. When multiple points are
selected for display which have different trend intervals, the system will automatically
scale the axis.
Each module shall be capable of automatically uploading on a daily basis all accumulated
trend data to th-, head-end for permanent storage on hard disk.
HVAC 15600-31
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
4) Each schedule.
5) Each trend.
6) Each report.
7) Each Graphical Software Program.
f. "Passwords"
User Access Restriction. Operator sign-on shall require an assignable password.
System shall have up to 32 passwords, each of which may be one of six types
of system access:
1) Type 1 - Trainee
This level shall allow readout of data only. The system shall display
all operation data base.
2) Type 2 - Maintenance 1
This level shall allow a performance of Type 1 functions plus the
changing of all schedules.
3) Type 3 - Maintenance 2
This level shall allow performance of Type 2 functions plus the
changing of all setpoints.
4) Type 4 - Supervisor
This level shall allow performance of Type 3 functions plus the
changing of all system parameters.
5) Type 5 - System Programmer
This level shall allow performance of Type 4 functions plus the
modifying the system configuration.
6) Type 6 - System Manager
This level shall allow performance of Type 5 functions plus the
changing of passwords.
g. Power Failure/Automatic Restart at the Control module
1) Power failures shall cause the Control module to go into an orderly
shutdown with no loss of program memory.
2) Upon resumption of power, the Control module shall automatically
restart and printout the time and date of the power failure and resto-
ration at the respective Head-end system.
3) The restart program shall automatically restart affected field equipment.
The operator shall be able to define an automatic power up time delay
for each piece of equipment under control.
1. User Control Over System Configuration
1. Database Creation and Modification. All changes shall be done utilizing standard
procedures and be capable of being done while the system is on-line and operational.
The system shall allow changes to be made at the local site through a portable computer
and the head-end.
HVAC 15600-30
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
Awk 2) All output displays or logs of a point or group of points shall contain.
as a minimum, the following information:
a) Graphic presentation of the System
b) User name of point
C) Point descriptor
d) Current value/status
e) Associated engineering units
f) Alarm description
3) User names, point descriptors, and engineering units shall be operator
definable on a per point basis.
d. Setpoints
The system shall utilize a contiguous band of colors each corresponding to actual
zone temperatures relative to the desired heating and cooling setpoints. The
ideal temperature shall be shown as a green color band. This color band corre-
sponds to the dead band between the onset of mechanical heating or cooling_
Temperatures slightly warmer than ideal shall be shown in yellow, and eves
warmer temperature band shall be shown in orange.
Temperatures slightly cooler than ideal shall be light blue, and even cooler
temperatures shall be shown as dark blue. All alarm colors shall be in red.
The system shall be capable of utilizing the mouse operator interface device to
change individual zone temperature bar and by pressing a button,and by moving
the mouse cursor to an increased or decreased temperature setpoint within that
zone. The system shall also be capable of utilizing the mouse interface device
or a conventional keyboard to change a numeric temperature setpoint value
instead of utilizing the graphic temperature bar. The floor plan graphic shall,
then be able to change colors on a zone by zone basis to reflect the actual
temperature in each zone relative to the changed desired heating or cooling
setpoint.
The system shall be capable of globally changing all setpoints. The global
change capability shall be accessed via a "pop up menu" called by depressing
a button on the mouse.
e. Graphic Structure
The intent of the graphics is to ensure the operator is always aware of his
position within the system as well as how to logically progress through the
graphical hierarchy to select any desired graphic or other source of information.
The system software shall provide the operator with the capability of returning
to any previous graphic by pointing to a graphic tab then pushing a single buttoo
on the mouse operator interface.
The system software must be programmed to provide a separate color graphic
for:
1) Each piece of equipment monitored or controlled including eaCA
terminal unit:
2) Each building.
3) Each floor and zone controlled .
HVAC 15600-219
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
3. The head-end shall allow receipt of alarms and messages while in a functional mode other
than energy management, i.e., incoming alarms shall be displayed while the operator is
in a word processing, spreadsheet, or other operating mode. The system must
automatically switch from a non-energy management mode, respond to an alarm, and
return to the exact position left in the previous functional mode.
4. The building operator shall be able to communicate and direct all control functions
through the use of a 2-button "mouse" operator interface to monitor and control all
functions and sequences within the system.
The following information shall be selectable from a button menu bar available on the
bottom of the various graphics.
Exit Trends Help files
Reports Setpoints Download
Schedules Module Status
Upload Schedule Graphs Parameters
Print Utilities Minimize
Blocks Groups Function
Graphic Live Manual Commands
Return to last view
Programming, scheduling and setpoint changes shall be accessible for modification on
each menu for the associated equipment.Operator shall be able to automatically download
changes from the head-end to the appropriate program for the equipment being
controlled. Operator shall be able to upload parameters setpoint information and
schedules from the field modules to the head-end.
a. Input Format: operators shall be able to control system functions based on their
password level. The primary operator interface shall be via a two button
mouse.
b. Operator Commands: All operator commands shall be in the graphics data base
and menu driven. After the operator selects the desired object item or menu,
the system shall display either the status of selected object item or the allowable
options available. Upon entry of a command to the point or points desired as
described above, the system shall, before performing any command, respond
with an echo of the request. This echo feedback shall include the command
requested and any entered data. System shall include error monitoring software
for user's input error.
C. Output Format: The system shall operate on a System Format basis, regardless
of the manner or hardware configuration in which the data is acquired. A
"system" shall consist of a logical grouping of data points, related to a piece of
mechanical equipment, an energy distribution system, or an architectural area.
For example, in some cases, it may be desired to display, as a single system,
a space temperature with its associated air handling unit, and in other cases to
display all space temperatures on a floor or in a building. The system shall
allow such determinations to be made without regard to the physical hardware
locations of a point or group of points. Likewise, the system shall accommodate
future changes of system grouping and operations without field hardware
changes.
1) All displays and logs shall contain a header line indicating date.
day-of-week, and time.
HVAC 15600-28
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
on a drawing are logically connected even though there is no wire
between them.
6) Parameter - A parameter shall be a value which may be tied to the
input of a microblock. Each parameter will then be displayed on the
resulting FB parameter page and can be modified to varying degrees
based upon the appropriate password level being used by the operator.
Different parameter microblocks shall be used depending on whether
the parameter is digital or analog.
7) Constant - A constant shall be similar to a parameter except that it is
displayed only in the graphic FB file itself and will not be displayed on
any parameter page. Certain coefficients which are used in various
calculations always remain constant and therefore should be constants
which are embedded in the program and not parameters. Different
constant microblocks shall be used depending on whether the constant
is digital or analog.
8) Pop-ups - Pop-ups shall appear after a microblock has been inserted
which has default parameters associated with it. Default parameter
pop-ups shall contain various editable and non-editable fields and shall
contain "push buttons" for the purpose of selecting default parameter
settings.
9) Icon - An icon shall be graphic representation of a software program.
Each graphic microblock has an icon associated with it which graphi-
AOW describes its function.
10) Menu-bar Icon - Shall be an icon which is displayed on the menu bar
on the Eikon screen which represents its associated graphic microblock.
H. Systems Software
1. The head-end shall display graphically, in up to 256 different colors, the following
system information:
General area maps shall show locations of controlled buildings in relation to local
landmarks.
Floor plan maps shall show heating and cooling zones throughout the buildings in a range
of colors which provide a visual display of temperature relative to their respective
setpoints. The colors shall be updated dynamically as zones' comfort condition change.
Locations of space sensors shall also be shown for each zone. Setpoint adjustment and
color band displays shall be provided as specified in specification section 3.02 D 4
"Setpoints" below.
Mechanical system graphics shall show the type of mechanical system components
serving any zone through the use of a pictorial representation of components. It shall
also provide a current status of all 1/0 points being controlled and applicable to each
piece of equipment including analog readouts in appropriate engineering units at
appropriate locations on the graphic representation.
2. Each category of software shall consist of interactive software modules. Each module
shall have an associated priority level and shall execute as determined by the program
controller as defined in the real time operating system.
HVAC 15600-27
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16. 1996
3. The system shall be Graphically Programmed.
a. The system shall include the ability for an operator to create his own Graphic
Programming. This is a method by which a system programmer is allowed to
create a sequence of operation by assembling graphic microblocks that represent
each of the commands necessary to complete a sequence. Microblocks represent
common logical control devices used in conventional control systems, such as
relays, switches, high signal selectors, etc., in addition to the more complex
DDC and energy management strategies such as PID loops and optimum start.
Each microblock shall be interactive and contain the programming necessary to
execute the function of the device it represents.
b. Graphic Programming shall be performed while on screen and using a mouse;
each microblock shall be selected from a microblock library and assembled with
other microblocks necessary to complete the specified sequence. Microblocks
are then interconnected on screen using graphical "wires", each forming a
logical connection. Once assembled, each logical grouping of microblocks and
interconnecting wires then forms a graphic function block which may be used
to control any piece of equipment with a similar point configuration and
sequence of operation.
C. The clarity of the graphic sequence must be such that the user has the ability to
verify that system programming meets the specifications, without having to learn
or interpret a manufacturer's unique programming language. The graphic
programming must be self-documenting and provide the user with an understand-
able and exact representation of each sequence of operation.
d. Full simulation capability shall also be provided with the graphic programming.
User shall be able to fully simulate the constructed sequence on screen before
the sequences are downloaded into the controllers. System should also include
the ability to simulate multiple graphic programs communicating with each other
on a simulated network. The following is a minimum definition of the
capabilities of the Graphic Programming software.
1) Function Block(FB)- Shall be a collection of points, microblocks and
wires which have been connected together for the specific purpose of
controlling a piece of HVAC equipment or a single mechanical system.
2) Logical 1/0(LIO's)-Input/Output points which shall interface with the
control modules in order to read various signals and /or values or to
transmit signal or values to controlled devices.
3) Microblocks - Shall be software devices which are represented
graphically and may be connected together to perform a specified se-
quence.
4) Wires - Shall be Graphical elements which are used to form logical
connections between microblocks and between microblocks and L10s.
Different wires types shall be used depending on whether the signal
they conduct is analog or digital.
5) Labels - Labels shall be similar to wires in that they are used to form
logical connections between two points. Labels shall form a connection
by reference instead of a visual connection. i.e., two points labeled "A"
HVAC 15600-26
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
ambient temperature range of SSRs shall be 20°F-140°F. Input impedance shall
be greater than 500 ohms. Relays shall be rated for the application. Operating
and release time shall be 10 milliseconds or less. Transient suppression shall
be provided as an integral part of the relays.
9. Local Site Communication Network
a. The modules shall communicate within their respective network with a token
passing technique. This network shall be consistent with the IEEE RS-485
standard, including a minimum baud rate of 9,600 BPS maintained at a
minimum of 10,000 feet. The Contractor shall provide all wiring required for
the local site network.
10. Field Testing and Programming Equipment
a. A portable laptop computer shall be provided and shall interface via standard
push-in connection at an asynchronous serial port located at the Control modules
and at selected ZCM zone temperature sensors (enhanced version) as indicated
on project plans. This portable unit shall be capable of full global communica-
tions with all Control modules connected within the respective network and shall
provide functionally identical user interface to the Head-end, in non-graphic
format. Units shall be able to interrogate all points and alter all programming.
The unit shall have 80 x 25 character liquid crystal display panel.
G. Software
1. The Contractor shall provide all software required for efficient operation of all the
functions required by this specification. Software shall be modular in design for
flexibility in expansion or revision of the system. The software shall, as a minimum,
include:
a. Complete database entry
b. Configuration of all application programs to provide the sequence of operation
indicated
C. Graphics of each system as shown on the I/O Summary Tables
d. Alarm limits and alarm messages for all critical and non-critical alarms
e. Configuration of all reports and point summaries indicated
2. The software shall be provided in these five categories:
a. System executive software
b. Software for user control over system configuration
C. Facility monitoring functions
d. Direct digital control
e. Application software
HVAC 15600-25
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
3) Enhanced Zone Sensor Input: The input shall provide one thermistor
input, one local setpoint adjustment, one timed local override switch '
and an occupancy LED indicator.
8. Instrumentation and Control
a. Temperature Sensors: Sensors shall be of the type and have accuracy ratings
as indicated and/or required for the application and shall permit accuracy rating
of within 1% of the temperature range of their intended use.
1) Sensors used for mixed air application shall be the averaging type and
have an accuracy of +1°F.
2) OA temperature sensors shall have a minimum range of -52°F to
152°F and an accuracy of within +1°F in this temperature range.
3) Room temperature sensors shall have an accuracy, of + 0.25°F in the
range of 45°F to 96°F.
4) Hot water temperature sensors shall have an accuracy of + 0.75'F
over the range of their application.
b. Flow Switches: Flow switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of+ 1% of their
operating range. Switch actuation shall be adjustable over the operating flow
range. Switches shall have snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the specific
electrical application. Amw
C. Watt-hour Transducers: Watt-hour transducers shall have an accuracy of
+0.25% for kW and kWh outputs from full lag to full lead power factor. Input
ranges for kW and kWh transducers shall be selectable without requiring the
changing of current or potential transformers, and shall have dry contact pulse
accumulation.
d. Voltage-to-Digital Alarm Relays: Relays shall monitor status of boiler or chiller
safeties and overloads and shall be sized and connected so as not to impede the
function of the monitored contacts. Switch shall have self-wiping, snap-acting
Form C contacts rated for the application.
e. Humidity Sensors: Sensors shall have an accuracy of +5% over a range of
20% to 95% RH.
f. Current Sensing Relays: Relays shall monitor status of motor loads. Switch
shall have self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the application.
The setpoint of the contact operation shall be field adjustable.
g. Control Relays: Control relay contacts shall be rated for 150% of the loading
application, with self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts, enclosed in
dustproof enclosure. Relays shall have silver cadmium contacts with a minimum
life span rating of one million operations. Relays shall be equipped with coil
transient suppression devices.
h. Solid State Relays (SSR): Input/output isolation shall be greater than 10 billion
ohms with a breakdown voltage of 15 V root mean square, or greater, at 60 Hz.
The contact operating life shall be 10 million operations or greater. The
H V AC 1 5600-24
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
APW 3) Analog output electronics, voltage mode, 0-I0VDC current mode
(4-20mA).
4) Analog output pneumatic, 0-20psi. Each pneumatic output shall have
a feedback valve to be used in the system for any software program-
ming needs. The feedback value shall be the actual psi output value
and not a calculated value. Each output shall have a manual override
switch which will allow each output to be configured in one of three
ways: open, closed or automatic operation. An LED shall indicate the
state of each output.
b. Air Handling Unit Controller - R-Line
1) Digital outputs. These outputs shall be 24VAC or VDC maximum, 3
amp maximum current. Each configurable as normally open or
normally closed, and either dry contact or bussed. Each output shall
have a manual hand off or auto switch to allow for override and an
LED to indicate the operating mode of the output.
2) Universal inputs: Thermistor - 10K Ohm at 77OF (Precon type 2),
0-5VDC - IOK Ohm maximum source impedance, 0-20mA - 24VDC
loop power 250 Ohm input impedance, Dry Contact-0.5mA maximum
current.
3) Analog output electronics, voltage mode, 0-10VDC current mode
(4-20mA).
4) Enhanced Zone Sensor Input: The input shall provide one thermistor
input, one local setpoint adjustment, one timed local override switch
and an occupancy LED indicator.
C. Zone Control Module - Z-Line
1) Digital outputs: These outputs shall be 24VAC or VDC maximum, 3
amp maximum current. Each configurable as normally open or
normally closed, and either dry contact or bussed.
2) Universal inputs: Thermistor, dry contacts or 0-5VDC with 0-100K
Ohm input impedance.
3) Enhanced Zone Sensor Input: The input shall provide one thermistor
input, one local setpoint adjustment, one timed local override switch
and an occupancy LED indicator.
d. Terminal Control Module - T-Line
1) Digital outputs: These outputs shall be 24VAC or VDC maximum, 3
amp maximum current. Each configurable as normally open or
normally closed, and either dry contact or bussed.
2) Universal inputs: Thermistor, dry contacts or 0-5VDC with 0-100K
Ohm input impedance.
HVAC 15600-23
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
h. Each ZCM shall be software programmable for communicating at 9600 baud to
38.4 Kbps. Circuits shall be optically isolated.
6. Terminal Control Modules - T-Line
a. Terminal Control Modules shall be capable of providing the Direct Digital
Control of single zone terminal HVAC units; Variable Air Volume Terminal
Box, Fan Coil Units, Pump Units, etc.
b. Each T-Line controller shall communicate with the Cmnet through the Tnet
Interface Module (TNI). The TNI shall provide one RS485 port for a CMnet
connection and one RS485 port for the Tnet connection. In addition, a direct
connect RS485 port shall also be provided for connection of a laptop computer.
C. In the event of a loss of communication with the TNI, each T-Line controller
shall store a default algorithm which maintains the space temperature until
communication with the TNI is restored.
d. Each TNI shall execute application programs, calculations, and commands via
a microcomputer resident in the TNI. The database and all application programs
for each T-Line shall be stored in read/writable non-volatile memory within the
TNI. All non-volatile memory shall have a battery backup of at least five years.
e. The TNI shall contain both software and hardware to perform full DDC/PID
control loops. T-Line shall be able to provide normal binary type output.
f. Each T-Line shall be able to support various type of zone temperature sensors,
such as: temperature sensor only, temperature sensor with built-in local
override switch, with setpoint adjustment switch.
g. Each T-Line for VAV application shall have a built-in air flow transducer for
accurate air flow measurement in order to provide the Pressure Independent
VAV operation.
h. Each T-Line and TNI shall have LED indication for visual status of communica-
tion, power, and all outputs.
i. Each TNI shall be software programmable for communicating at 9600 baud to
38.4 Kbps. Circuits shall be optically isolated.
7. Input/output Processing
a. General Purpose Control Module - GX-Line
1) Digital outputs: These outputs shall be 24 VAC or VDC maximum, 3
amp maximum current. Each configurable as normally open or
normally closed, and either dry contact or bussed. Each output shall
have a manual hand off or auto switch to allow for override and an
LED to indicate the operating mode of the output.
2) Universal inputs: Thermistor - 10K Ohm at 77OF (Precon type 2),
0-5VDC - IOK Ohm maximum source impedance, 0-20mA - 24VDC
loop power 250 Ohm input impedance, Dry Contact-0.5mA maximum
current.
HVAC 15600-22
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
b. All point data, algorithms and application software within a local network shall
be modifiable from the Head-end. It shall not be necessary to enter parameters
at the local Control modules for control and programs to operate.
C. Each Control Module shall execute application programs, calculations, and
commands via a microcomputer resident in the Control module. The database
and all application programs for each Control Module shall be stored in
read/writable non-volatile memory within the Control Module and will be able
to upload/download to/from the Head-end.
d. Each Control Module shall be connected to a local site network communicating
to/from other Control Modules and LANgate. Each Control module shall
include self-test diagnostics which allow the Control module to automatically
relay to the LANgate any malfunctions or alarm conditions that exceed desired
parameters as determined by programming input.
e. Each Control module shall contain both software and hardware to perform full
DDC/PID control loops.
f. An asynchronous serial port shall be provided for the interface of maintenance
personnel's portable computer. All network interrogation shall be possible
through this port.
g. The R-Line AHU Controller shall be capable of proper operation in an ambient
F.:mperature environment of-20OF to +150OF.
5. Zone Control Module - Z-Line
a. Zone Control Modules shall be capable of providing the Direct Digital Control
of Single Zone Terminal HVAC Units;Variable Air Volume Terminal Box, Fan
Coil Unit, and Packaged AC Unit, etc.
b. Each ZCM shall be connected to the Cmuet and communicate with equal
authority on a "peer-to-peer" basis.
C. Each ZCM shall execute application programs, calculations, and commands via
a microcomputer resident in the ZCM. The database and all application
programs for each ZCM shall be stored in read/writable non-volatile memory
within the ZCM. All non-volatile memory shall have a battery backup of at
least five years.
d. Each ZCM shall contain both software and hardware to perform full DDC/PID
..ontrol loops. ZCM shall be able to provide normal binary type output.
e. Each ZCM shall be able to support various type of zone temperature sensors,
such as: temperature sensor only, temperature sensor with built-in local
override switch, with setpoint adjustment switch.
f. Each ZCM for VAV application shall have a built-in air flow transducer for
accurate air flow measurement in order to provide the Pressure Independent
VAV operation.
g. Each ZCM shall have LED indication for visual status of communication,
power, and all outputs.
H V AC 15600-21
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
connection. The GCM2 also has a modem reset relay which is activated when
the modem fails to respond to the GCM2's command.
d. Each RS232 port is switch selectable for up to 19.2 Kbps.
e. The GCM2 communicates with the Cmnet through an RS485 port. This Cornet
is a peer-to-peer local area network which uses a "token-passing" protocol to
allow up to 100 Control Modules to communicate with one another with equal
authority.
3. General Purpose Control Modules - GX-Line.
a. Each control module must be capable of stand-alone direct digital operation
utilizing its own processor, non-volatile memory, input/output, A to D
conversion,clock/calendar and voltage transient and lightning protection devices.
All non-volatile memory shall have a battery backup of at least five years.
b. The General Purpose Control Modules(G-Line)shall consist of several modules
which provides different 1/0 point combinations. Additionally each G-Line
Control Module shall be able to connect though its expansion bus to up to five
1/0 Expander Boards(X-Line). These X-Line boards can expand the total point
capacity of each G-Line Control Module up to 120 points.
C. All point data, algorithms and application software within a local network shall
be modifiable from the Head-end. It shall not be necessary to enter parameters
at the local Control modules for control and programs to operate.
d. Each Control Module shall execute application programs, calculations, and
commands via a microcomputer resident in the Control module. The database
and all application programs for each Control Module shall be stored in
read/writable non-volatile memory within the Control Module and will be able
to upload/download to/from the Head-end.
e. Each Control Module shall be connected to a local site network communicating
to/from other Control Modules and LANgate. Each Control module shall
include self-test diagnostics which allow the Control module to automatically
relay to the LANgate any malfunctions or alarm conditions that exceed desired
parameters as determined by programming input.
f. Each Control module shall contain both software and hardware to perform full
DDC/PID control loops.
g. An asynchronous serial port shall be provided for the interface of maintenance
personnel's portable computer. All network interrogation shall be possible
through this port.
4. Air Handling Unit Control Module - R-Line
a. Each control module must be capable of stand-alone direct digital operation
utilizing its own processor, non-volatile memory, input/output, A to D
conversion,clock/calendar and voltage transient and lightning protection devices.
All non-volatile memory shall have a battery backup of at least five years.
HVAC 15600-20
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
6. Telephone Modem: Provide a Hayes (up to 9600 baud) "Smart Modem", or approved
Hayes compatible equivalent, with RS-232C connection and automatic answer/originate
capability.
7. Portable Terminal: Provisions shall be made by means of a portable computer for a site
interface with the modules to allow repair and maintenance personnel to perform
diagnostics, interrogate any point, and reprogram in the field. All reprogramming shall
be dependent upon a minimum of six levels of security accessing.
F. Field Hardware: Field hardware must be of a modular design to ensure reliability and system
performance.
1. Global Network Controller- LANgate
a. The LANgate shall be a microprocessor-based communications device which
acts as a gateway between the System Control Module Network(CMuet)and the
Global Network (LGnet).
b. Both the CMnet and the LGnet shall be "peer-to-peer" networks which allow all
control modules to communicate with equal authority.
C. Each LANgate shall support a CMnet on which may reside any combination of
up to 100 zone controllers, rooftop unit controllers, and/or Control Modules.
d. The LANgate shall be responsible for routing global information from the
various CMnets which may be installed throughout a building.
e. The LGnet may configure as RS485 (38.4 Kbps), ARCnet (2.5 Mbps), or
Ethernet(10 Mbps), or Token Ring(16Mbps)all of which may be implemented
over fiber optic, twisted pair, or coaxial cable.
f. Each Cmnet shall support up to 100 controllers.
g. Multiple LANgates can be added to the Lgnet if the projects require more than
100 controllers.
h. Up to a total of 60 LANgates can be added to the Lgnet, each supporting up to
100 controllers (total capacity exceeds 500,000 points per Lgnet).
i. The LANgate shall provide two RS232 ports which can be connected to Head-
end Workstations, portable computers, or modems.
j. LANgate shall provide full arbitration between multiple users, whether they are
communicating through the same LANgate or different ones.
2. Gateway Communication Module - GCM2
a. The GCM2 is a microprocessor-based module which provides communication
between the Head-end and the entire Control Module Network(CMnet).
b. The GCM2 communicates with the Head-end using an RS232-C serial
communication port.
C. A second RS232 port allows the GCM2 to communicate with another Head-end
or a portable field computer either through a modem or through a direct RS232
HVAC 15600-19
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
b. When the system performance is deemed satisfactory, the system parts will be
accepted for beneficial use and placed under warranty. At this time, a "notice
of completion" shall be issued by and the warranty period shall start.
5. Owner's Instructions
a. The Contractor shall provide full instructions to designated personnel in the
operation, maintenance, and programming of the system. The training shall be
specifically oriented to the system and interfacing equipment installed.
E. Head-end Hardware: The Contractor shall provide a Head-end configuration that includes, as a
minimum, the following components:
1. Computer. IBM compatible Pentium-90 with 1.2 gigabyte hard drive, 16 MB of RAM.
The computer shall have a battery powered uninterruptable real time clock. The real
time clock shall provide the following information: time-of-day, month, year, and
day-of-week. Two parallel and two asynchronous serial ports shall be provided for
connection of peripherals. One 1.44M-3 1/2" floppy drive and one 1.2M 5 1/4" floppy
drive.
2. Colorgraphics Monitor and Controller. Provide a high resolution, Color VGA monitor
to display real time graphic data, execute operator commands, and report system activity.
Display unit shall consist of at least a 15" color monitor with a dark edged screen to
reduce glare. The unit shall be configured for a minimum 640 x 480 Pixel resolution.
The head-end shall display graphically, in up to 256 different colors, the following
system information: ►
General area maps shall show locations of controlled buildings in relation to local
landmarks.
Floor plan maps shall show heating and cooling zones throughout the buildings in a range
of colors which provide a visual display of temperature relative to their respective
setpoints. The colors shall be updated dynamically as zones' comfort condition change.
Locations of space sensors shall also be shown for each zone. Setpoint adjustment and
color band displays shall be provided as specified in specification section 3.02, D. 5.
"Setpoints" below.
Mechanical system graphics shall show the type of mechanical system components
serving any zone through the use of a pictorial representation of components. It shall also
provide a current status of all I/O points being controlled and applicable to each piece of
equipment including analog readouts in appropriate engineering units at appropriate loca-
tions on the graphic representation.
3. Mouse: The primary operator interface device shall consist of a 2-button mouse.
4. Keyboard: The enhanced keyboard with 101-key layout shall contain a full ASCII
complement and shall include a dedicated numeric keypad with separate ENTER key for
rapid entry of data.
5. Alarm and Report Printers: The Contractor shall provide an OKIDATA Microline 184
Turbo(or approved equivalent)alarm and report printer as a part of each head-end. This _*NWA�
printer shall be capable of graphics and at least 132 characters per second for data print,
and able to provide near letter quality print. Printer shall use parallel ports, have
80-character page width, and use standard ASCII or IBM Character Set as a minimum.
HVAC 15600-18
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATIOI`
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
8) Report generation
9) Backing up software and data files
10) Using the head-end wits•?third party" software
2. Engineering Manual
a. It shall include detailed information on:
I) Hardware - cutsheets and product descriptions
') Engineering - design requirements for initial installations and/or
additions to existing systems
7) Installation - mounting and connection details for field hardware,
accessories and head-end equipment
4) Field hardware set-up, checkout and tuning techniques
.5) Head-end set-up, software loading and checkout techniques
5) A listing of basic terminology, standard alarms and messages, error
messages and frequently used commands
3. Software Doc=entation
a. Shall contain as a minimum descriptions of the control software programs used
n the system. Descriptions shall include:
:) Diagrams and listings showing maximum input/output point configura-
tions for controlled equipment
�) A description of the control elements and sequences available for the
equipment
:) A listing of the infimmation which is displayed to the operator for each
piece of controlled equipment
4) A listing of[he alam and message conditions which may be detected
for each piece of controlled equipment and the standard alarm and
message texts which can be displayed when those conditions exist
�) A graphic flow diagram for each software application program provided
as parr of dis project.
4. Acceptant a Test and Acceptance
a. Upon completion of the installation,the Contractor shall start up the system and
:+erform all necessary calibration, testing, and debugging operations. An accep-
_ance test shall be paformed by the Contractor in the presence of the Owner's
representative.
HVAC 15600-17
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
2. Shop Drawings shall be approved before any equipment is installed. Therefore, shop
drawings must be submitted in time for review so that all installations can be completed
per the project's completion schedule.
3. All drawings shall be reviewed after the final system checkout and updated or corrected
to provide "as-built" Drawings to show exact installation. The system will not be
considered complete until the"as-built"Drawings have received their final approval. The
Contractor shall deliver three (3) sets of "as-built" Drawings.
4. Before final configuration,the Contractor shall provide 1/0 Summary forms that include:
a. Description of all points.
b. Listing of binary and analog hardware required to interface to the equipment for
each function.
C. Listing of all application programs associated with each piece of equipment.
d. Failure modes for control functions to be performed in case of failure
5. Provide an accurate graphic flow diagram for each software program proposed to be used
on the project as part of the submittal process. Revisions made as a result of the
submittal process, during the installation, start-up or acceptance portion of the project,
shall be accurately reflected in the "as-built" graphic software flow diagrams herein
required by this specification.
6. The Contractor shall be able to simulate the operation of all software application
programs to ensure they are free from design errors and that they accurately accomplish
the application sequence of operations. The simulation must show each output value and
how it varies in relation to an artificial time clock. The time clock may run at normal
time increments, increased increments (fast motion) or decreased increments (slow
motion).
D. Project Specific Manuals
1. Users Manual
a. System reference material shall contain as a minimum, an overview of the
system,its organization,the concepts of networking and head-end/field hardware
relationships as well as the following:
1) Activating the head-end
2) Using the mouse
3) Head-end screen menus and their definitions
4) Establishing setpoints and schedule
5) Uploading and downloading software, setpoints, schedules, operating
parameters and status between the head-end and field hardware
6) Collecting trend data and generating trend plots
7) Enabling alarms and messages
HVAC 15600-16
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
components, except site specific software, shall have previously been thoroughly tested
and proven in actual use prior to installation on this project.
3. The system architecture shall be fully modular permitting expansion of application
software, system peripherals, and field hardware.
4. The system, upon completion of the installation and prior to acceptance of the project,
shall perform all operating functions as detailed in this Specification.
5. Provide the following system hardware:
a. Program Software and Control Modules
b. All sensing devices and necessary transducers to perform the functions listed in
1/0 Summary Tables.
C. All relays, switches, indicating devices, and transducers required to perform the
functions listed in 1/0 Summary Tables.
d. All monitoring and control wiring and air tubing.
e. All modems and accessories.
6. Provide all software identified in Part 3 of this Specification. The database required for
implementation of these specification shall be provided by the Contractor, including:
point description, alarm limits, calibration variables, graphics, reports and point
summaries.
7. The system as specified shall monitor,control, and calculate all of the points and perform
all the function as listed in 1/0 Summary Tables attached to the end of this specification.
8. Codes and Regulations. All electrical equipment and material and its installation shall
conform to the current requirements of the following authorities:
a. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)
b. National Electric Code (NEC)
C. National Fire Code
d. Uniform Building Code
e. Uniform Mechanical Code
f. Uniform Plumbing Code
g. UL916
h. Note: Where two or more codes conflict, the most restrictive shall apply.
Nothing in these plans and specifications shall be construed to permit work not
conforming to applicable codes.
C. Submittals, Documentation and Acceptance
1. Shop Drawings. A minimum of eight (8) copies of Shop Drawings shall be submitted
and shall consist of a complete list of equipment and materials, including manufacturer's
descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts, and installation instructions. Shop
drawings shall also contain complete wiring, routing, schematic diagrams, tag number
of devices, software descriptions, calculations, and any other details required to
demonstrate that the system will function properly. Drawings shall show proposed layout
and installation of all equipment and the relationship to other parts of the work.
HVAC 15600-15
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
heaters. The compressors shall have also spring loaded valve heads for protection against liquid
"slugging" and automatic oil pressure actuated internal cylinder unloaders. Unloaders shall be
arranged for unloaded start and shall allow unloading down to 33% capacity. Compressors shall
be enclosed in a sound attenuating compartment.
F. Controls shall be factory wired and mounted in a control panel in exterior of the casing. Control
panel shall be wired complete with magnetic contactor for both compressor and condenser fan.
For 480 volt application, provide an across-the-line starter.
G. Condensing units shall be Trane Model TTA and BTA Series, or equal, with capacities as
scheduled.
H. Furnish and install a refrigerant piping system sized as recommended by the manufacturer.
2.10 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
A. General Requirements
1. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Automated Logic.
2. All components of the direct digital controllers shall be manufactured by Automated
Logic, or equal, with peripheral electric/electronic devices manufactured by Johnson
Service Company, Honeywell, Landis & Gyr, Powers, Barber Colman, or equal.
3. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Automated Logic, i.e.
Yankee Technology, Inc., of Ludlow, MA, Direct Digital Control Co. of Norton, MA,
or R. C. Marra Systems of Wallingford, CT. The system shall be a properly integrated
system installed by competent mechanics regularly employed in the profession of
temperature control. Unless specified to the contrary, all equipment shall be fully
proportioning. The control system shall be complete in all respects, including room
thermostats, immersion thermostats, switches, relays, valves, cabinets and other
accessory equipment, and a complete system of air piping and control wiring for
integration into existing remaining reused controls where specified, all connected and
properly integrated to the control system.
4. The temperature control system shall be DDC and shall utilize electric/electronic power
for the control dampers and valves.
5. All wiring, conduit,junction boxes, fittings, etc., necessary for the temperature control
system shall be furnished and installed by the ATC Subcontractor and shall conform to
all standards and codes as described under Section 16000-Electrical Work. Wiring shall
be in metal raceways where required by prevailing codes. All wiring for pool area shall
be in PVC conduit and sealed water and vapor tight.
6. Provide nameplates for all control devices. Devices on panels to have "Lamicoid"
nameplates, isolated control valves, relays, etc. to be marked with stamped tape.
B. Scope of Work
1. The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary hardware, wiring, computing
equipment and software as defined in this specification.
2. All material and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured
and available and not custom designed especially for this project. All systems and
HVAC 15600-14
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
All cabinet surfaces shall be factory phosphatized prior to the application of the baked enamel
primer and all units shall be factory finished with an exterior grade lacquer after final assembly.
C. Fans shall be centrifugal type, double inlet, double width. They shall be of the forward curved,
low speed type on all sizes. Fan housing shall be equipped with adjustable cut-off. All fans shall
be statically and dynamically balanced and tested at rated speed after being installed in factory
assembled units. Bearings shall be self-aligning, grease lubricated ball bearings sized to provide
minimum average bearing life of 200,000 hours. Lubrication fittings shall be extended to the
exterior cabinet. Fan shafts shall be solid, cold finish steel, turned, grout ground, and polished
to insure trouble-free operation and tolerances within the recommendations of bearing
manufacturers. Fan motors shall be mounted to an adjustable pivot base in optional positions
external to the unit. Fan V-belt drive shall be of the variable pitch type. Fan belt guard shall be
furnished by the unit manufacturer, easily removable, and made of solid steel with tachometer
openings. Inlet vanes shall be furnished where so called for on the schedule.
D. Coil sections shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel with removable panels and shall be
arranged for the removal of the coil from either end of the unit. Hot water coils shall consist of
5/8 in. o.d. copper tubing on 1-1/2 centers arranged in a staggered pattern with respect to
circulation of air flow. They shall be bonded to the tubes by hydraulic expansion of tubes and the
coils tested with 300 lbs. pneumatic pressure under water.
E. All units not furnished with cooling coils shall be provided for future cooling coils and shall have
drain pans pitched for even flow of condensate with side drain connections on both sides of unit.
Provide copper tube "P" trap with cleanout in condensate drain piping, "P" traps shall be equal
to unit pressure.
F. Provide Vortex dampers on the inlet of the supply fan where so noted on the Drawings. Furnish
fan curves reflecting Vortex operation.
G. Medium capacity combination filter mixing section shall be furnished with properly located access
doors equipped v ith handles. Internal slides shall be provided for filter racks. Filters shall be
removable from either end of Section.
2.09 CONDENSING UNITS
A. The air cooled condensing units shall have all operating components assembled on one common
base. These shall include:compressor, condenser coil,condenser fan and motor,charging valves,
moisture indicating sight glass, back seating refrigerant valves, hot gas muffler, all controls, and
a holding charge of R-22. The units shall be designed for outdoor installation. The unit as a
whole shall be listed with an EER of not less than 10.0.
B. Casing shall be of 14 gage zinc coated steel with all exterior surfaces painted with enamel for
weather protection. Drain holes shall be provided for elimination of rain. Provide removable
panels for access to components.
C. Condenser Fanls i shall have permanently lubricated ball bearings, direct drive and driven by
permanently lubricated ball bearing heavy-duty motors with built-in thermal overload protection.
D. Condenser Coil shall have copper tubing with heavy-duty aluminum fins. The coil shall be factory
tested at 425 psi and dehydrated. A factory or field installed sub-cooling circuit shall be provided
to sub-cool refriozerant a minimum of 20OF below saturation temperatures.
E. Compressors shall be a single serviceable hermetic on units over 10 tons, full hermetic on smaller
sizes, designed for R-22 operation. Compressors shall be mounted on vibration isolators and have
forced feed lubrication, hot gas muffler in the discharge line, and immersion type crankcase
HVAC 15600-13
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
B. Controls will be field installed by the Automatic Temperature Control Subcontractor.
C. The unit casing shall be 22 gauge galvanized steel, internally lined with 1", 1-1/2 pound density
fiberglass insulation which complies with UL 181 and NFPA 90A. All exposed insulation edges
shall be coated with NFPA 90A approved sealant to prevent erosion.
D. Damper shall be heavy gauge metal, with shaft rotating in Delrin self-lubricating bearings. Shaft
shall be marked on the end to indicate the damper blade position. Unit shall be designed for field
conversion from normally open to normally closed, or vice versa, without relocating the actuator,
changing parts or adding relays.
E. The damper shall have a built-in stop to prevent overstroking and shall seal against a closed-cell
foam gasket to limit close-off leakage to 5% at 3.0 inches s.p.
2.06 REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS
A. Registers and diffusers shall be sizes as shown on Plans. Volume dampers shall be allen key
operated. Wall mounted registers shall have sponge rubber gasket at perimeter of frame.
B. Ceiling Diffuser(CD) - Louver face adjustable modular type, Titus Model TMSA-24 x 24-3-26-
AG-75 (steel), off-white finish, throw pattern as shown on Drawings, with throw reducing vanes
where called for on Drawings. In Turn-Out,Locker/Shower areas, use Model TMSA-AA(alumi-
num).
C. Return and Exhaust Register (ER, RR) T or B - Titus Model 350FL/AG-15 all aluminum
deflected blade register, off-white finish. ("T" or "B" indicates top or bottom)
D. Light-Tight Transfer Grille(TG)-A.J. Manufacturing Model 77WX with auxiliary frame, double
chevron type, steel construction.
E. Equivalent products by Barber-Colman, Anemostat, or equivalent will be approved.
2.07 LOUVERS
A. All wall louvers shall be extruded aluminum construction,equal to the following Ruskin Mfg. Co.
model.
1. All louvers shall be No. ELF375D with box frame, extended sill, 1/2" aluminum mesh
bird screen, and Kynar 500 finish.
2.08 AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU)
A. Furnish and install,where shown on the Drawings,central station draw-through units of the types,
sizes, and capacities as scheduled on the Drawings. All units shall be factory-assembled and
tested and shall be those as manufactured by American Air Filter Co., Inc., Buffalo Forge Co.,
Carrier, McQuay, or the Trane Company. (Note: Equipment design was based on McQuay and
Envirotec.
B. Units shall consist of fan and coil sections, filter section, adjustable motor bases for high
efficiency NEMA frame motors, and OSHA approved belt guards. Casing shall be of complete
frame with removable panels, modular, flush mounted into the unit framework with properly
located access panels. Casing shall be double wall insulated with a 1 in. minimum thickness ,00k
fiberglass insulation with a density of not less than 1-1/21bs. accordance with NFPA Bulletin No.
90A. Insulation shall be secured to casing with waterproof adhesive and permanent fasteners.
HVAC 15600-12
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
B. The fan shall be mounted and supported as shown by the detail on the Drawings. The mounting
shall be complete with vibration isolators as recommended by the manufacturer. The unit shall
be provided with weather protection.
C. Fan housing shall be constructed of steel sheet and all parts shall be bonderized and then coated
with baked primer-finisher especially formulated to meet stringent corrosion resistance standards.
The fan scroll shall be attached to the side plates by means of continuous lock seam or welded
seam construction. Intermittent spot welded type construction will not be acceptable. Provide
access door and drain connection on unit KE-11A.
D. The fan wheels shall be of the backwardly inclined non-overloading type.
E. The shaft shall be constructed of C1040 ground and polished steel.
F. The bearings shall be of the ball bearing type and shall be especially constructed for quiet
operation. Bearings shall be of the self-aligning grease pack, pillow block type, selected for a
minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours.
G. Motor and drive shall be belt drive with adjustable motor sheave. Motor nameplate horsepower
shall exceed brake horsepower by a minimum of 5%. Belts shall be of the oil resistant type.
Motor shall be especially designed for quiet operation.
H. A factory wired non-fused disconnect switch shall be located under the housing of the unit.
I. Fan shall be Greenheck Model SWB with UL762 listing, or equal.
'AIM& 2.04 WALL VENTILATORS
A. Wall ventilators shall be of the belt and direct driven centrifugal type as shown on the Drawings,
with spun aluminum housing for wall mounting, and shall be completely weatherized.
B. Fan shall be the backwardly inclined type with centrifugal wheel statically and dynamically bal-
anced at the factory.
C. The motor shall be installed in a totally enclosed weather proof housing outside of the air stream.
The electrical characteristics for the motor shall be as shown on the schedule. A factory wired
non-fused single or 3 pole disconnect switch shall be located under the hood of the unit. Provide
raceway from motor compartment to wall mounting plate. A solid state speed controller shall also
be furnished for field mounting by the Electrical Subcontractor, where called for in the schedule.
D. Motor operated low leakage backdraft dampers with edge and end seals shall be furnished for wall
installation, with a wiring pigtail.
E. The entire air outlet of the fan shall be protected by 1/2" x 1/2" aluminum mesh securely installed
in place.
F. Wall ventilators shall be Greenheck Model GWB and GW or equal by Penn or Jean Air.
2.05 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME (VAV) TERMINALS
A. Variable air volume units shall be Titus Model DESV-3010, or equal, single duct units. Units
shall be furnished and installed as indicated on the Drawings, and shall have the capacity as
indicated. Unit performance shall be rated in accordance with the applicable ARI industry test
methods and standards.
HVAC 15600-11
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
T. Factory-Fabricated High Pressure Ductwork:
1. Round ductwork shall be constructed of aluminum alloy 3003-H14 for the Natatorium by
the following methods and in minimum gages listed.
Minimum Gage Method of
Diameter Aluminum Manufacture
3" to 14" .032" Spiral Lockseam
15" to 26" .040" Spiral Lockseam
27" to 36" .050" Spiral Lockseam
37" to 53" .063" Spiral Lockseam
a. Fittings and couplings shall be constructed of minimum gages listed. Provide
continuous welds along seams.
Minimum Gage
Diameter Aluminum
3" to 50" .063"
2. All branch take-offs from trunk ducts shall be made with 45° angle take-offs.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide factory-fabricated ductwork of one of
the following:
Semco Mfg., Inc.
United Sheet Metal Div., United McGill Corp.
2.02 IN-LINE EXHAUST FANS
A. Exhaust fans shall be of the belt and direct drive centrifugal type, as shown on the Drawings, with
galvanized housing for in-line mounting, and shall be completely weatherized. Capacity shall be
AMCA certified.
B. Fan shall be the backwardly inclined type with centrifugal wheel that has been statically and
dynamically balanced at the factory.
C. The motor shall be isolated from the air stream. Motor shall be heavy duty TEFC type.
D. Furnish back draft damper and vibration isolators with each exhaust fan.
E. Fans shall be Greenheck Model BSQ, or equal.
2.03 UTILITY FAN
A. The utility vent set shall be of the centrifugal fan type completely assembled with fan, fan scroll,
motor, belt drive, motor mount and motor housing. The capacity shall be as shown on the
Drawings and certified performance tests by AMCA shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings.
HVAC 15600-10
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts D i, 1996
L. Wherever sound insulation lining is called for, the sheet metal duct size shown -awings
OOW must be increased to provide the clear inside dimensions or cross sectional 'U on the
Drawings.
M. Duct joint sealing, reinforcing, flanges, etc. for rectangular sheet metal ducts ased on
maintaining airtight ducts at 2" WG Maximum static pressure with maximum F 5% of
total fan capacity; 1/2 of 1% for round and oval ducts. All joints in ductwork sha�_, iled with
U.L. classified United Duct Sealer, or equal.
N. Duct systems shall have sufficient volume dampers, whether or not shown, to contwl: id adjust
the t:;tal vol,,me'of f—h- Item, each zone, in each branch and at each diffuser or grille. Volume
dampers shall be of the butterfly type with 18 gauge galvanized iron blade. All dampers shall be
equipped with Duro-Dyne Type UNXLD locking quadrant. All dampers shall be provided with
damper bearings on each end of shaft mounted on a 2" x 3" x 1/8" plate held to duct with sheet
metal screws. Maximum width of single blades shall be 14". Splitter dampers shall not be used.
O. Provide where shown or indicated on the Drawings fire and/or smoke dampers with a UL label
for not less than 1-1/2 hour fire protection rating in accordance with UL-555 continuing inspection
service. Blades and frame shall be galvanized steel construction with blades of an interlocking
design, having two folded guides which serve as stops. Fusible links shall be equal to Grinnell
Fig. 1351, 20 pounds, issue A. Dampers shall be installed according to latest edition of NFPA-
90A, mounted with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" returning angles on both sides of partition, wall, or
floor, and sleeves as per the UL test under which the damper fire rating was obtained. Angles
shall completely close the wall opening and provide anchorage to the dampers. Damper blade
stack shall not reduce duct free area.
Mw"* P. Apply duct liner thermal-acoustic insulation in low velocity duct systems as shown on the
Drawings.
1. Duct lining shall be shop installed by the Sheet Metal Subcontractor. Material shall be
1" nominal thickness, 3 pound density, non-combustible glass fiber with UL approved
neoprene coating on air side.
2. Insulation shall be applied with 100% adhesive coverage, plus stick clips on all sides of
duct, 24" on center in direction of air flow, 12" to 18" on center at right angles to air
flow. Coat leading edge of each insulation section with adhesive.
3. Lining shall be Certainteed No. 300 "Ultralite", or equal.
Q. Boiler flues and water heater flue in boiler room shall be 16 gage continuous welded black steel,
extending from boilers to pre-fabricated chimney.
R. Where called for on Drawings, final connections to diffusers and registers shall be made with
flexible ductwork, L1, listed, Class 1. To be Thermaflex S-LP-10 for exhaust/return, M-KA for
supply, or equal. Joints shall be sealed with duct tape and Thermaflex duct straps. Connection
to rigid ductwork shall be made with spun conical taps.
S. Install duct-type smoke detectors furnished by the Electrical Subcontractor.
HVAC 15600-9
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
constructed and hung to provide a neat,smooth, finished appearance. Cadmium plated sheet metal
screws shall be used on all exposed ductwork. Ducts shall be free from thumping or rattling when
fans are turned on or off.
D. Duct sizes shall be strictly followed and no changes in shape or dimensions shall be made by the
HVAC Subcontractor without first obtaining approval from the Architect, except that duct shall
be offset as required to clear structural members and to co-ordinate with other trades and any duct
changes must meet the latest ASHRAE and SMACNA standards.
E. The center line radius of all duct elbows where shown on the Drawings shall be at least one and
one-half times the width of the duct. Where building conditions do not allow for this radius or
where square turns are shown, manufactured double walled duct turns equal to Aero-Dyne or
Tuttle & Bailey shall be used in the supply or exhaust air ducts and "Sonotru" acoustical
attenuating turns as manufactured by South Control Products Co. shall be used in any air ducts
where acoustical insulation is included.
F. Duct sections V-6" wide or less shall be butted together and jointed with flat drive cleats 2-1/8"
wide. Top and bottom cleats shall be cut flush with duct and side cleats bent over to make a tight
joint. Standing bar slips as specified for ducts over 18" may be used at the HVAC Subcontrac-
tor's option.
G. Ducts from 18" to 30" wide shall be jointed with 1/2" standing bar slips made of metal the same
as or heavier than duct sheets. Joints in ducts with either dimension over 30" shall have 1"
standing bar slips on those sides over 30". Where sides are over 42", the standing bar slips will
be reinforced with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" angles. Additional angle stiffeners not over 60" apart
shall be provided between joints. Ducts over 60" in width shall be jointed with 1-1/2" x 1/8"
angle irons riveted to ductwork on all sides with 1/8" rivets at not more than 4-1/2" on centers,
sections bolted with 3/16" stove bolts at not over 6" centers, sheets turned over angles into joint
at least 1/4".
H. Sheet metal screws 3/4" #10 may be used to attach stiffener angles to ductwork to secure seams,
spaced not over 12" on centers and not less than two per side of 12" or more, except where
specified otherwise. Button punching shall not be used except for pre-erection attachment of
fittings.
1. Provide hinged galvanized steel access and inspection doors opposite each manual damper, at each
fire damper, and at every duct mounted control device. Doors shall be equal to Buensod-Stacey
Type S-2 of rigid construction with cast type rotary latches. Where space limitations do not allow
for full swing of the access door, two rotary type latches shall be used. Doors located in insulated
ducts shall be furnished with extended frames to serve as a stop for insulation. Insulate doors
located in insulated ductwork. All doors shall be gasketed. Door shall be 10" by 12" minimum
except where limited by duct width and shall be larger where necessary for access to fire damper
fusible links or other devices.
J. Hangers for all rectangular ducts 4 sq. ft. in area or above shall be round bar type fastened to
1-1/4" x 1-1/4" x 1/8" angles under the ducts. Ducts less than 4 sq. ft. in area shall be hung with
black 1" x 1/16" strap iron bent 1" under bottom side of the duct and fastened to the duct with
sheet metal screws, using not less than two screws per side and as many more so that they are not
greater than 6" centers.
K. Hangers are to be placed on not greater than 8'-0" centers or closer where required so that the
ductwork can support the weight of a man at any point.
HVAC 15600-8
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
AOW 2. Structural, partition/room layout, ceiling grid, and other information needed for
coordination including bottom of steel elevations.
3. All fire walls and smoke partitions.
4. Equipment layouts and egress routes for equipment removal.
5. Sheet metal work layout including bottom of duct elevations.
6. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning, Plumbing, and Fire Protection pipe routing
including center line of pipe elevations.
7. Valves including valve tag numbers.
8. Access panels.
9. Electrical light fixtures, cable trays, panelboards, etc.
Each trade shall show his work on the background Drawings with appropriate elevations and grid
dimensions. Drawing shall indicate horizontal and vertical dimensions to avoid interference with
structural framing, ceilings, partitions, and other services.
D. Fabrication shall not begin until the final mylar transparencies of all coordination Drawings have
been reviewed and approved by the Architect. Review of coordination Drawings shall not
diminish the responsibility under this Contract for final coordination of installation and
maintenance clearances of all systems and equipment with the Architectural, Structural,
Mechanical, Electrical, and other work.
E. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of
operating equipment devices. If equipment is disapproved, Drawings shall be revised to show
acceptable equipment and be resubmitted.
F. The approval of equipment does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of shop drawing
errors in details, sizes, quantities, wiring diagram, arrangement, and dimensions which deviate
from the Specifications, Contract Drawings, and/or job conditions as they exist. Unless the
Contractor specifically requests in writing,changes, substitutions,or deletions of specific Contract
Document requirements with respect to any submissions, approval of the shop drawing by the
Architect does not constitute acceptance. Approval of shop drawings containing errors does not
relieve the Contractor from making corrections at his expense.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 SHEET METAL WORK
A. All duct runs shall be checked for clearances before installation of any ductwork. Above hung
ceilings, duct locations and elevations must be co-ordinated with work of other trades to avoid
conflicts with structure, piping, conduit and light fixtures.
B. All sheet metal ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheet of bend forming quality,except
that all supply, return, and exhaust ducts serving locker and/or shower areas and Turn-Out Room
shall be aluminum.
C. Duct construction shall be in accordance with best practices and latest ASHRAE or SMACNA
requirements for metal gauges,joints, reinforcing and supports. All exposed ductwork shall be
HVAC 15600-7
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
D. See the "Automatic Temperature Control"paragraphs of this Section for additional requirements.
1.18 PROTECTION
A. Work under each Section shall include protecting the work and material of all other Sections from
damage by work or workmen, and shall include making good all damage thus caused.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and
accepted; protect work against theft,injury,or damage; and carefully store material and equipment
received on site which is not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary
covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of obstructing or foreign material.
C. Work under each Section includes receiving, unloading,uncrating, storing, protecting, setting in
place, and connecting-up completely any equipment supplied under each Section. Work under
each Section shall also include exercising special care in handling and protecting equipment and
fixtures, and shall include the cost of replacing any of the equipment and fixtures which are
missing or damaged by reason of mishandling or failure to protect on the part of the HVAC
Subcontractor.
D. Equipment and material stored on the job site shall be protected from the weather, vehicles, dirt,
and/or damage by workmen or machinery. Insure that all electrical or absorbent equipment or
material is protected from moisture during storage.
1.19 CLEANING
A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and flush all piping, ducts, and equipment of all foreign
substances inside and out before being placed in operation. Thoroughly flush all piping of any
oils, burrs, solder, and flux. Replace strainers and filters at completion of cleaning.
B. If any part of a system should be stopped or damaged by any foreign matter after being placed
in operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned, and reconnected at no additional cost to
the Owner.
C. During the course of construction,all ducts and pipes shall be capped to insure adequate protection
against the entrance of foreign matter.
D. Keep the job site free from the accumulation of waste material and rubbish. Upon completion of
all work under the Contract, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all rubbish, debris,
and excess materials left over from his work. Any oil or grease stains on floor areas caused by
the Contractor shall be removed and floor areas left clean.
1.20 CO-ORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. This Contractor shall prepare a complete set of mylar background Drawings at minimum 1/4 in.
equals 1 ft. 0 in. showing architectural and structural features and other information as needed for
coordination layout. Background Drawings shall be prepared under this Section.
B. Circulate mylars among trades as necessary to show all information outlined below. Each trade
shall sign and date each coordination Drawing. Coordinate all conflicts between trades prior to
submitting drawing to the Architect.
C. The information to be contained on the Drawings shall include, but not be limited to, the
following:
1. Insert and sleeve locations.
HVAC 15600-6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts Ili; 1996
1.15 GUARANTEE
A. The HVAC Subcontractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work .rts for
a period of one (1) year after date of substantial completion, and shall agree to I repair
or replace any items of his work which are foaffi te»lne't4cfective during this peri
B. The HVAC Subcontractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused b., in his
work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other uratcrtal�of equipment caused by rei Went or
repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shat be con-
sidered as being defective.
1.16 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1.
B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change order
or by field conditions. Principal dimensions of concealed work, fire dampers, volume dampers,
control dampers and control valves, and for piping installation, valve numbers shall be added to
these drawings prior to submittal to the Architect. In addition to the above all revised areas shall
be clearly marked with a revision bubble.
1.17 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's
representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to
operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly
qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Contractor shall video tape the
instruction procedures and deliver three(3)copies of the tape with the Operation and Maintenance
Manuals.
B. Furnish the Architect, for approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words OPERATION AND MAINTE-
NANCE MANUAL, the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the
Contractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a table of contents with tab sheets
placed before each section. The instructions shalt be legible and easily read, with large sheets of
Drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent.
C. The manual shall include the following informaden:
1. Description of systems.
2. Description of start up,operation,and Autdown procedures for each item of equipment.
3. Winter,'summer changeover procedures.
4. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment.
5. Lubrication chart.
6. Wiring and control diagrams widi datav expWa detailed operation and control of each
item of equipment.
7. Valve chart.
8. List of recommended spare pans..
9. Copies of all service contracts.
10. Performance curves for pumps.fans, etc.
11. List of all nam--s, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well as the local
representative for each item of squipnwnt.
HVAC 15600-5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The HVAC Subcontractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans,
elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to
supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work
indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Subcontract requirements.
B. The Plans and Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied,
in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or
reasonably implied in both.
C. The HVAC Subcontractor shall assume all responsibility in scaling measurements from the
Drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and
accessories that may be required. The HVAC Subcontractor shall carefully investigate the
structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly,
furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such
conditions, at no additional cost.
1.11 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. The HVAC Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the
building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work
and that of other trades.
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Subcontract
shall be provided by the HVAC Subcontractor.
B. The HVAC Subcontractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60
cycle, single phase electric power from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his
work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc.
C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by
the HVAC Subcontractor.
1.13 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping and ductwork shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets,
and mechanical equipment rooms, unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings.
B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above
grade.
1.14 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. Prior to final acceptance, the HVAC Subcontractor shall furnish three(3)sets of complete instruc-
tions for the repair, maintenance, and operation of all systems installed under his Subcontract.
These instructions shall be typed or printed, and each set bound separately with durable covers.
B. The HVAC Subcontractor shall instruct and fully demonstrate to such person or persons as the
Architect and/or Owner may designate, regarding the care and use of all systems and all apparatus
pertaining thereto.
HVAC 15600-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
J. Before submitting his bid, the HVAC Subcontractor shall visit the site with the Drawings and
Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work since
T the HVAC Subcontractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in regard
thereto.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be deter-
mined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements.
B. The HVAC Subcontractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified
testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General
Requirements.
1.06 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials shall be U.S. made, new,
full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in
that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturer
for each class or category of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types
for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall
conform to their requirements and be so labeled.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the HVAC Subcontractor shall submit to the
Architect eight (8) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving
all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished on the project.
B. The HVAC Subcontractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the
Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all
changes which may be required.
C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation
to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The
responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the HVAC Subcontractor.
D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings
or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications,
the Subcontractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at
his own expense and as directed by the Architect.
1.08 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. The HVAC Subcontractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall
be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper
carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the
rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work.
B. The HVAC Subcontractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work.
1.09 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or
sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1.
HVAC 15600-3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are
in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the '
Architect rules otherwise.
B. The HVAC Subcontractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions
at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.04 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The HVAC Subcontractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular
schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and
supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work.
B. The HVAC Subcontractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who
shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the HVAC
Subcontractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or
replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins.
C. The HVAC Subcontractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the
building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the execution
of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent
or share of responsibility incurred by the HVAC Subcontractor, it is agreed between the Owner
and the HVAC Subcontractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined
by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the
work in question.
D. The HVAC Subcontractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to
expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as
to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The
HVAC Subcontractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc.,
hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure
on the part of the HVAC Subcontractor to give proper information as above, he will be required
to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is
diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the
building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The HVAC
Subcontractor shall lay out all his work at the site and be responsible for the accuracy thereof.
Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements.
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching.
Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be per-
formed by the Subcontractor installing such items.
G. The HVAC Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials
from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own
expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all
times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means.
H. The HVAC Subcontractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this
Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
1. The HVAC Subcontractor shall check the Architectural Plans and Specifications before ordering
any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of
the Architect before proceeding with the work.
HVAC 15600-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
SECTION 15600 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
(FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of Division 1,
and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this
Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section.
Co-operate %%ith such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials,plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental
to the complete installation of all HVAC work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings,
includingn but not limited to, the following;
1. Gas oil fired boiler-burner units, including piping, controls, flue and chimney.
2. Radiant floor slab heating, convectors, cabinet heaters, unit heaters, radiators, air
handling units, and condensing units.
3. Piping systems for hot water and condensate drainage, including pumps,valves, and spe-
cialties.
4. Duct systems for supply, return, and exhaust, including fire dampers, registers, louvers,
and terminal boxes.
5. Exhaust fans.
6. Insulation for piping, ductwork, boiler flues, and equipment.
7. Energy management (building automation)system.
8. Installation of and connection to equipment furnished by others.
9. -\ir and water balance, tests, start-up.
10. Guarantee.
11. Instructions.
12. Record Drawings.
1.03 CODES, ORDLN.--:LACES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts
State BuildinL- Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules,
regulations. and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict
HVAC 15600-1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
3.03 ALTERNATE BIDS
A. See Section 01030 for a general description of the Base and Alternate Bids. Work of the Plumbing
Subcontractor is more specifically described below.
B. The Base Bid shall be the lump sum price for all labor and materials necessary for and reasonably
incidental to providing all plumbing work specified and shown on the Drawings, less the cost of all
extra work described in the Alternates.
C. Alternates Nos. 1, 2, and 3 do not affect the work of this Section.
PLUMBING 15400-25
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
3.11 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Backflow preventers shall be installed as per regulation 310 CMR 22.22, with pressure gauges on
inlet and outlet of backflow preventer. Furnish Watts TK-9 Model A test kit and one (1)repair kit
for each type of device. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall act as the Owner's Agent in seeking
approval from the Department of Environmental Protection. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall
submit all Plans, Specifications and permits required for approval and pay all fees. Approvals shall
be secured prior to purchase and installation.
3.12 STERILIZATION
A. Each unit of domestic water service line and distribution system shall be sterilized with chlorine
before acceptance of domestic operation. The amount of chlorine applied shall be such as to
provide a dosage of not less than 50 parts per million. The chlorinating material shall be introduced
to the water lines and distributing systems in a manner approved by the Water Department. If
possible to do so, the lines shall be thoroughly flushed before introduction of the chlorinating
material. After a contact period of not less than eight (8) hours, the system shall be flushed with
clean water until the residual chlorine content is not greater than 1.0 parts per million. All valves
in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period.
3.13 ISOLATION VALVES
A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall furnish and install isolation valves on the entire domestic water
distribution system, on mains, branches, and at each fixture.
3.14 TIME, MANNER, AND REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTING SUB-BIDS
A. Sub-bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provision of the General Laws (Ter. Ed.) look
Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44L, as amended. The time and place for submission of sub-bids shall
be as set forth under INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS.
B. Each sub-bid filed with the Awarding Authority must be accompanied by BID BOND, CASH, OR
CERTIFIED CHECK, OR A TREASURER'S CHECK OR CASHIER'S CHECK issued by a
responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City of Northampton in the amount stipulated in
the INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS. A sub-bid accompanied by any other form of bid deposit than
those specified will be rejected.
C. Each sub-bid submitted for the work under this Section shall be on a form furnished by the Award-
ing Authority, as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended.
D. The following describes by class of work, each class of work requiring labor and materials which,
in the opinion of the Awarding Authority, based upon an investigation of the work involved, is
customarily performed in that sub-trade under subcontract with a sub-bidder for the sub-trade, and
which is estimated by the Awarding Authority to cost in excess of Ten Thousand Dollars, and only
each class of work described shall be a class of work for which a Sub-bidder for that sub-trade must
list the information required in the "Form For Sub-bid":
1. Insulation
E. The work to be done under this Section is shown on Drawings numbered: TI, L 1 through L5
inclusive, Sl through S8 inclusive, Al through A15 inclusive, FPl through FP4 inclusive, PI
through P4 inclusive, H1 through H6 inclusive, SEI, E1 through E6 inclusive.
PLUMBING 15400-24
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Drilling of all holes 2" diameter and smaller required for the installation of plumbing shall be
performed by the Plumbing Subcontractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a
manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum.
B. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General
Contractor.
3.05 INSULATION
A. Insulation shall be applied by an independent insulation contractor regularly engaged in that
business.
B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls. Covering shall be applied before masonry
proceeds.
C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed.
3.06 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS
A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall furnish and set all sleeves required. All water piping passing
through masonry walls shall be provided with standard weight steel pipe, or Schedule 40 PVC pipe
sleeves, inside diameter to be slightly larger than pipe and insulation passing through same. Center
pipe in sleeve.
B. Provide chromium plated escutcheons where uninsulated pipes pass through walls.
3.07 INSPECTION AND TESTS
A. Tests for Plumbing Systems: Soil, waste, vent and water piping shall be tested by the Plumbing
Subcontractor and approved before acceptance. Underground piping shall be tested prior to
backfilling. Equipment required for tests shall be furnished by the Subcontractor at no additional
cost to the Owner. All tests shall be witnessed and approved by the Local Plumbing Inspector, and
shall be performed as required by the Plumbing Code.
3.08 CLEANING UP
A. After all the fixtures have been set and ready for use, and before leaving the job, thoroughly clean
all fixtures installed under this Contract, removing all plaster, stickers, rust stains, and any foreign
matter or discoloration of fixtures, leaving every part in perfect condition and ready for use.
3.09 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's
printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the drawings or not, and all labor and
materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Plumbing Subcontractor and be
included in his bid.
3.10 ACCESS PANELS
#01k A. Furnish access panels for access to valves, shock arrestors, trap primers, etc., Panels shall be
installed by the General Contractor.
PLUMBING 15400-23
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
B. Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid, snap-on, color-coded pipe markers,
complying with ANSI A13.1.
1. For external diameters less than 6", provide full-band pipe markers, extending 3600 around
pipe at each location, fastened as follows:
a. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned, semi-rigid plastic pipe marker.
2. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature which best describes piping
system in each instance, as selected by Architect in cases of variance with name as shown
or specified.
3. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows:
a. Near each valve and control device.
b. Near each branch in mains.
C. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter non-
accessible enclosures.
d. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of con-
cealed piping.
e. Spaced intermittently at maximum spacing of 20' along each piping run, except
reduce spacing to 20' in congested areas of piping and equipment.
C. Provide manufacturer's standard brass valve tags with printed enamel lettering, with piping system
abbreviation in approximately 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve numbers approximately 1/2"
high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener. Provide tags on all valves and control devices.
1. Provide 1-1/2" round by 19 gage tags with lettering as selected by Architect.
2. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain(wire link or beaded type),or solid brass
S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured
specifically for that purpose.
3. Submit valve schedule for piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8-1/2" x 11"bond
paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag),
location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification(if any). Mark valves
which are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special "flags", in
margin of schedule. In addition to mounted copies, furnish extra copies for Maintenance
Manuals as specified in Division 1.
4. For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws for removable
mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum,
with SSB-grade sheet glass.
5. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in Machine Rooms where indicated or, if not
otherwise indicated, where directed by Architect.
PLUMBING 15400-22
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3.01 SOIL, WASTE, DRAIN AND VENT PIPING
A. Installation:
1. Drainage and Vent Pipes: Horizontal soil and waste pipes shall have a minimum grade of
1/4" per foot for piping 3" and less and 1/8" per foot for piping larger than 3". All
openings of the system shall be protected by a 2" (min.) water seal and vent piping
installed to allow a maximum internal pressure fluctuation of +/- 1" of water column.
2. Fittings: Changes in pipe size on soil, waste, and drain lines shall be made with reducing
fittings. Changes in direction shall be made by the appropriate use of 450 wyes, long or
short sweep 1/4 bends, 1/6, 1/8, or 1/16 bends, or by a combination of those or equivalent
fittings. Single and double sanitary tees and 1/4 bends may be used in drainage lines only
where the direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical.
3. Union Connections: Slip joints will be permitted only in trap seals or on the inlet side of
the traps. Use of bushings will not be permitted.
B. Joints: Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recom-
mendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be
permitted. Threaded joints shall have American National taper pipe threads conforming to National
Bureau of Standards Handbook H28, with graphite or inert filler and oil, with an approved graphite
compound, or with polytetrafluorethylene tape applied to the male threads.
3.02 WATER PIPE, FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS
A. Mains, Branches and Runoffs: Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be cut accurately
to measurements established at the building by the Plumbing Subcontractor and shall be worked into
place without springing or forcing. Care shall be taken not to weaken structural portions of the
building. Above ground piping shall be run parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise
indicated. Branch pipes from service lines may be taken from top, bottom or side of main, using
such crossover fittings as may be required by structural or installation conditions. Supply pipes,
valves and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other services to permit
not less than 1/2" between finished covering on the different services.
B. Expansion and Contraction of Pipe: Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and
contraction of pipe.
3.03 BASIC IDENTIFICATION
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical identification materials of one of the
following:
Allen Systems, Inc.
Brady (W. H. ) Co.: Sigmark Div.
Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc.
Seton Name Plate Corp.
Emed Co., Inc.
PLUMBING 15400-21
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
I. The tank system shall include a white epoxy exterior coating on the top and sides to resist weather
and to reflect sunlight. „
J. Tank system shall include a 2" standard vent and emergency venting in accordance with NFPA
30.
K. Provide the following accessories:
1. PKGACCDOS Suction package
2. PACLOCKGA Morrison direct reading clock gage.
3. PKGLC 1002 Pneumercator high/leak control and probes.
4. SAP3RISER Steel stairs.
5. PKGACC6 Standard vent package.
6. PUMP9823D Tank mounted suction pump with lock.
7. PKGFLIM2 Fill restrictor with lock.
8. PKGLC 1002 Electronic high and leak detection system with remote alarm.
9. SLAB2000 Pre-cast concrete slab.
10. GAGE Fuel management system.
L. The tank system, including accessories, shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufac-
turer's recommendations and applicable fire and environmental codes. State and local permit shall
be obtained by the Subcontractor prior to installation.
M. Tanks shall be installed on a reinforced concrete base slab designed to support the fully loaded tank.
Protective bollards shall be installed where required by State and local codes.
N. Tanks shall be marked on all sides with warning signs: "FLAMMABLE", "NO SMOKING",
product identification, and other signs as required by applicable codes.
0. Electrical work shall be in accordance with applicable codes and shall be rated for hazardous area
as required. Tanks shall be electrically grounded in accordance with NFPA 78.
P. Furnish and install fuel oil delivery pump set complete with mounting base, 3/4 H.P., 120 V, 1
phase, 60 Hz, 1,725 rpm oil pump motors, pressure relief valve, drive couplings with coupling
guards, check valves, pressure gauges, motor starters, control cabinet. Pump set to be Gasboy No.
9123 with a capacity of 21 gph, or equal by Preferred Utilities or Webster.
PLUMBING 15400-20
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
3. Provide one of each filter on air compressor discharge piping.
2.22 FUEL STORAGE AND DELIVERY SYSTEM
A. Furnish and install 1,000 gallon above ground tank system with secondary containment and
minimum two (2) fire hour rating. The tank and its enclosure shall be a completed unit at the
factory (shop fabricated) and listed as an assembly by UL Standard 2085. The tank system shall
be approved for storage of Diesel fuel by the Commonwealth of Massachusetts.
B. The primary tank shall be rectangular in shape, constructed with a minimum of 1/4" thick carbon
steel, listed per UL Standard 142, and meet the requirements of NFPA 30. Welds shall be
continuous on all sides, inside as well as outside conforming with the American Welding Society
standard for continuous weld. Tank shall be warranted for thirty (30) years by the manufacturer.
C. The exterior shall be a 6" thick concrete encasement with a minimum design strength of 5,000 psi.
The concrete design shall include the following for long term durability: less than 3% air
entrainment, water-reducing admixture, fiber mesh reinforcement, and rebar reinforcement.
Concrete shell shall be visibly monolithic (without seams) and placement methods shall ensure the
absence of voids on all sides and beneath the steel tank (an exterior steel jacket covering the
concrete vault will not be permitted). The steel tank shall be pressurized at factory by air pressure
at 5 psi during concrete encasement to provide long term crack resistance. Vault enclosure shall
have concrete support legs of unitized monolithic construction raising the vault a minimum of 6"
above the ground to meet visual inspection requirements. Cold joint or other joint construction
which could compromise the liquid tightness of the vault is not permitted.
D. The tank system shall be designed and tested to provide two(2)hour fire protection for the primary tank. No steel members shall penetrate the walls or floor or the concrete encasement to assure
isolation from pool fire heat. The tanks shall be tested in accordance with UL Subject 2085 and
be shown to have met the standards under UL supervision at a certified fire testing facility.
E. The tank construction shall include thermal insulation equivalent to .25" of polystyrene to protect
against temperature extremes, and to protect against corrosion by isolating the steel tank from the
concrete.
F. The tank system shall include an impervious barrier of 30 mil high density polyethylene to contain
leaks from the primary tank. A leak detection access tube shall be located between the inner tank
and secondary barrier. Provide positive drainage space to allow oil to flow to leak detection tube.
G. The tank system shall include a UL listed seven (7) gallon spill/overfill container manufactured as
an integral part of the primary tank, surrounding the fill pipe, and protected by the two(2)hour fire
rating of the vault. The fill pipe shall be recessed into the container so that it is the lowest opening
on the tank. The spill/overfill container shall include a normally closed valve to release spilled
product into the main tank. The tank shall be factory assembled complete with a Diesel fuel pump
and delivery system, leak detection and alarm system, vent package and steel stair.
H. Overfill protection shall be provided by all of the following methods:
1. direct reading level gauge at tank visible from fill pipe access.
2. valve rated for pressurized delivery located within fill pipe to close automatically at 95%
full level.
3. remote mounted audible/visual high level alarm.
PLUMBING 15400-19
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
4. Compressor and motor assemblies shall be mounted on a 28" x 64", 120 gallon ASME
code air receiver suitable for a maximum working pressure of 200 psig and with ASME
tank fittings.
5. The unit shall be assembled for intermittent (stop-start) operation with an automatic
pressure switch which shall be set to cut in at 80 psig and cut out at 100 prig (adjustable).
The supplier of the compressor unit shall provide an across-the-line magnetic type motor
starter in a NEMA 1 enclosure complete with fused disconnect and alternating control
relay, for unit mounting. The magnetic starter will have thermal overload protection on
all three legs.
6. Unit shall be provided with pressure switches,pressure reducing valves,pressure regulating
valves, pressure relief valves, pressure gauge, drain valve, service (air line) valve, 12"
high Massachusetts approved pedestals mounted on rubber vibration eliminator pads. Unit
to be complete with a factory installed block heater, pre-wired to unit mounted control
panel for single point power wiring.
7. All wiring shall be accomplished under Section 16100-Electrical, in accordance to wiring
diagrams provided by the unit manufacturer. Automatic alternator, magnetic starts shall
be provided under this Section and installed under Section 16100 - Electrical.
B. Air Dryer
1. Unit shall be a refrigerant type compressed air dryer, Ingersoll-Rand Model No. 5, or
approved equal by Air Compressor Products, Inc., LeRoi, or Quincy, rated for 50 scfm
at 100 psig and 100°F entering air, 35°F to 39°F dewpoint range, with a 5 psi pressure
drop.
2. Dryer shall be complete with non-fouling, smooth surface, tube-in tube heat
exchanger/chiller;non-cycling,hermetically sealed refrigeration system;self-regulating hot
gas bypass valve to maintain constant dewpoint from no load to full load; mechanical
condensate separator; integral 40 micron porous bronze after filter;and pilot operated auto-
matic condensate drain trap.
3. Unit shall be complete with 1-1/8" O.D. tube air line connections, 1/2 HP, 115 volt, 1
phase, 60 Hz, refrigeration compressor.
C. Combination Filter Regulator
1. Where indicated on the drawings,furnish and install Balston, Inc. Model No. FR-920-130,
or equal by Norgren Co., or Wilkerson Corp. filter-regulator combination, 1/4" NPT inlet,
outlet and gauge ports; 15-psig maximum inlet pressure; polycarbonate filter bowl; 10-130
psig control range; 22 scfm maximum flow at 100 psig inlet.
D. Quick Connect Hose Couplers
1. Furnish and install,where indicated on the drawings, Schraeder 1/4" NPT automatic push-
type male or female couplers.
E. Filter
1. Oil coalescing filter: Filter shall be I" screwed steel container with a capacity of 88 cfm
at 100 psi per ASME Code, Quincy 8531.
2. Unit shall be provided with 1" manual drain filter, Quincy 8766.
PLUMBING 15400-18
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
B. All labor and materials required for a complete installation which are not furnished by the utility
company shall be furnished by the Plumbing Subcontractor at no extra cost to the Owner.
C. The natural gas service will be furnished by Bay State Gas Company.
2.20 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Furnish and install the following backflow preventers, as manufactured by Watts Regulator:
1. On cold water feed to heating boilers: No. 909-SQT-3/4" complete with bronze strainer;
full port, bronze ball valve shut-offs, and No. 909-AG-C, 1" air gap and drain piping.
2. On domestic water entrance piping for building fixtures: No. 909SQT, 3", complete with
bronze strainer; full port, bronze ball valve shut-offs and No. 909-AG-F, 2" air gap and
drain piping.
B. This Subcontractor shall provide a spare parts repair kit for each 909 reduced pressure backflow
preventer, to consist of a repair kit for the first check, second check, and relief valve.
C. All backflow preventers shall be approved by the Massachusetts State Plumbing Examiners and shall
be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions, and in
accordance with Regulation 310CMR 22.22.
D. Units shall be Watts Regulator Co., Febco, Division of CMB, Ind., Hersey Products, Inc., or
equal.
E. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall file and prepare all applications for backflow preventer approval
with the Department of Environmental Protection and City of Northampton, and pay all fees and
charges.
F. All certificates of approval and test results shall be sent to the Architect.
2.21 AIR COMPRESSOR AND ACCESSORIES
A. Air Compressor
1. Air compressor shall be Champion Model HR513-12, or equal by Ingersoll-Rand Co. or
Air Compressor Products, Inc., horizontal tank mounted duplex, two-stage air compressor
having a piston displacement of 45 cfin when operating at a rotative speed of not more than
710 rpm. Compressor will have an actual free air delivery of 38.2 scfm when operating
between a discharge pressure of 80 to 100 psig. Unit shall be complete with two 5 HP,
208 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hz motors.
2. The compressor shall be a duplex, two-stage air cooled type with full pressure lubrication
by means of a vane type oil pump. Compressor shall have hydraulically operated loadless
starting feature that will also provide for automatic unloading of the machine should unit
lose oil or oil pressure for any reason. Compressor shall incorporate individual valve
assemblies.
3. A combination air intake-filter-silencer shall be provided for the air intake into the
compressor. The entire V-belt drive shall be enclosed with a fabricated steel belt guard.
The V-belt drive shall be provided with an adjustable slide rail to permit proper
maintenance of the belt tension.
PLUMBING 15400-17
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
114 RECIRCULATING PUMPS
A. Hot water recirculating pumps shall be all bronze construction, in-line type, maximum working
temperature of 225°F, maximum working pressure of 125 psi, Bell and Gossett, or Taco series, or
equal. The pump sizes shall be as follows:
1. Entire Bldg. CP-1: 10 gpm @ 30' head, B & G, Series HV, 1/6 hp, 115 V, single
phase motor, 1" flanges, 1,750.
B. Pump shall be controlled by an immersion aquastat installed in 1-1/4" oversize tee, aquastat
provided by the Plumbing Subcontractor, wired by the Electrical Subcontractor.
C. Circulating pumps shall be ITT Bell&Gossett Co., Taco, Inc., Grundfos, Inc., or approved equal.
15 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE ASSEMBLY
A. Furnish and install, where indicated on the drawings, one (1)Leonard Valve Co.s Model TM-186-
5015 - PRV-RF-O assembly, provided with large Type M Thermostatic Water Mixing Valve, inlet
checkstops, outlet volume/ball-type shut-off valve, pressure regulating valve with pressure gauges,
small Type M Thermostatic Water Mixing Valve, integral checkstops, outlet volume/ball-type shut-
off valve, dial thermometer(range: 0 to 200 degrees F.), rough bronze finish,complete with unions
and interconnected copper piping, solid bi-metal corrosion-resistant thermostat element.
B. Unit shall be factory assembled and tested.
C. Valves shall be Leonard Valve Company, ITT Lawler Model 66-50, Holby Valve Co., or equal.
116 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Make final hot water, cold water, waste, compressed air, and gas connections to all equipment.
Install solenoid gas valve on gas line feeding cooking equipment where noted.
L17 TRAP PRIMER
A. Furnish and install all brass automatic trap primers where required by Code. Primer shall include
automatic pressure activated brass valve with vacuum breaker, and copper duplex manifold
distribution reservoir as indicated on the drawings. Valve shall conform with A.S.S.E. Standard
1018.
B. Valve shall be Precision Plumbing Products, Inc., or equal.
2.18 VACUUM BREAKERS
A. Furnish and install vacuum breakers as manufactured by Watts or approved equal.
B. Type "A" - pressure type to be used for can wash supply piping, Watts Model 800 QT with test
cocks and ball valves.
C. Type "B" - atmospheric type, Model 288A chrome plated, when supply is not under constant
pressure.
219 GAS SERVICE
A. Apply for, pay all fees and charges in connection with, and co-ordinate the installation of the new
gas service.
PLUMBING 15400-16
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
D. The "Supertank" shall be insulated with a heavy density fiberglass insulation and will be jacketed
with segmented panels of 22 gauge steel with a factory baked enamel finish. Each panel shall be
interlocked and shall be easily removable for field replacement should damage occur. The heat loss
of the insulated tank shall not exceed 14 BTU/hr. per sq. ft. of tank surface area with not less than
an ambient temperature of 65 degrees F. The minimum jacket heat loss acceptable must not exceed
those of ASHRAE 90 Standards. The entire water heater shall rest on heavy-duty skids for ease
of movement.
E. The "Nickelshield Supertank" shall be completely lined, inside and out, with 97% pure nickel. The
method of applying the nickel shall be the electroless chemical deposition method, creating a
holiday-free, nonferrous layer of pure 97% nickel over the A.S.M.E. Code steel. The
"Nickelshield Supertank" shall have an additional overcoat of an elastomeric, polymerized,
hydrophobic cross-linked plastic to prevent any electrolysis that may develop within the plumbing
system. Cement lining or glass lining(porcelain enamel) with magnesium rods will not be accepted
as an equal.
F. The "Nickelshield Supertank" shall be covered under the manufacturer's ten (10) year warranty,
service policy, and long life service policy.
G. The energy package shall consist of a turbopower gas fired module guaranteed to produce a
fuel-to-water operating efficiency of 83 percent minimum. Start up shall be performed by a factory
authorized craftsman. Start up performance data, verifying the 83%, shall be supplied to the
Owner. With 140 degrees F. stored water, a minimum nomograph reading of 9-112% CO2 on gas
with a maximum net stack temperature of 300 degrees F. will be required. The complete
combustion chamber shall be 100% submerged in water and shall be completely lined with copper.
All fire tubes shall be pure copper.
H. The energy module shall have a three (3) year warranty against defects in material and workman-
ship, corrosion, and erosion. All material, labor, and freight must be completely paid for by the
manufacturer should failure occur. The energy module warranty must be supplied with submittals.
Less than the above described warranty will not be accepted.
I. The "Firepower" burner shall be a forced draft power type with high fan curves that enable the
burner to create an overfire pressure in the Turbopower module and heating surfaces. The burner
shall have a heavy gauge steel housing and be certified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Burner
and controls shall have a one (1) year cost free service policy where all material, labor, and freight
is paid for by the manufacturer on defective parts.
J. The entire water heater shall carry an ASME stamp, shall meet UL requirements, shall be
Massachusetts approved, shall fit properly in the space provided, and shall conform to the drawings
and Specifications. The complete installation shall be in accordance with all applicable federal,
state, and local codes and installation drawings.
2.13 WATER METER
A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall furnish and install turbine water meter with remote meter
readouts, Hersey Products,Inc., Model 4MVR, rotor drive, size 2", where shown on the drawings.
B. Meter to read in cubic feet and shall be Neptune, Hersey Products, Inc., Badger Meter Company,
Trident Meter or equal and are to be approved by the Northampton Water Department's
Superintendent.
Ask
PLUMBING 15400-15
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
U. Service Sink (P-13)
1. Basin-Kohler "Bannon" No. K-6718 acid-resistant enameled cast iron inside surface, with
wall hanger, rim guard, plain back.
2. Supply Fitting- Kohler No. K-8904 faucet with top brace, vacuum breaker, bucket hook
on spout and loose key stops on inlet shanks.
2.10 SHOCK ABSORBERS
A. Shock absorbers shall be installed on each branch feeding fixtures with flush valves and at top of
risers shall be Precision Plumbing Products Model PPP,line size, or equal, by Zurn,Josam, Smith,
or Wade.
2.11 ACCESS PANELS
A. Furnish access panels for all locations where cleanouts, valves, shock absorbers, or other items
requiring operation or maintenance are located in finish walls. Access panels will be furnished by
this Subcontractor and installed by the General Contractor. This Subcontractor shall co-ordinate
location.
B. Access panels shall be Boico Style C, or equal, size 12" x 12" or larger.
2.12 HOT WATER STORAGE HEATERS
A. Furnish and install one (1) "Nickelshield Supertank" water heaters as manufactured by PVI
Industries, Inc., Fort Worth, Texas, 50ON-250A-TP. Heater shall have firing rate of 500,000 ,,
BTU/Hr. of natural gas, with a recovery of 500 GPH at 100°F temperature rise, 250 gallon storage,
with 1/3 HP bumer motor, 120 volt, 1-phase.
1. Provide additional contacts and terminal strip on each burner to be interlocked with
combustion air dampers.
2. Each PVI-heater shall be equipped with factory installed and wired digital timeclock with
battery back-up and programmable for holiday skip.
B. The "Supertank" shall be constructed in accordance with ASME Code Section IV, stamped with the
appropriate symbol,and hydrostatically tested at 190 psi minimum. The tank shall be equipped with
a removable modular energy package mounted on a flange with a minimum diameter of 23". The
tank shall contain a strata-baffle to divert the incoming cold water to allow 80 % of the total
"Supertank" storage to be effective at a useable temperature of plus or minus 5 degrees F. from the
setpoint of the operating thermostats. All fittings will be of Type K Heavy Copper. No tank
connections of other than nonferrous alloys will be accepted.
C. There shall be a minimum of two (2)operating thermostats. These operating controls should be set
at 120 degrees F. for the lower and 140 degrees F. for the upper with a maximum circulating water
temperature in the plumbing system not to exceed 140 degrees F. There shall be one (1)
temperature limiting device designed to prevent temperatures from exceeding a maximum of 200
degrees F. There shall also be an ASME temperature and pressure relief valve set at not more than
125 psi and 210 degrees F. There shall also be installed, in the cold section of the tank as factory
standard equipment, a thermal expansion control valve set to relieve pressure exceeding 100 psi.
Equipment submitted without these redundant controls, temperature limiting device, and thermal 1-oft�
expansion control valve will not be accepted.
PLUMBING 15400-14
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
2. Faucet - Single lever swing spout faucet with 8" centers and heavy chrome plating, Delta
Oak No. 100.
3. Accessories to be same as for P-5.
M. Standard Shower (P-6)
1. Valve and head shall be Symmons "Temptrol" No. 96-1-295 pressure balancing mixing
valve with lever handle, volume control and integral stops. Head shall be heavy duty rigid
mount, adjustable spray pattern and 2.5 gpm flow restrictor, with mounting bracket and
fasteners. Provide Type P-11 floor drain with each P-6.
N. Drinking Fountain(P-7)
1. Double bubbler wall hung barrier free drinking fountain with front activation bars and two
oval shaped receptors, equal to Halsey Taylor Model OVLSEBP, or equal. Unit to be all
stainless steel.
O. Drinking Fountain(P-7A)
1. Single wall mounted barrier free drinking fountain with oval shape receptor, all stainless
steel housing and receptor semi-circular push bar. Unit shall be equal to Halsey Taylor
Model No. OVLEBP.
P. Washing Machine Unit(P-8)
1. Symmons Laundry-Mate Model No. W-602-X , or equal, supply and drain unit with 1/2"
supplies and 2" drain with integral stops and recessed wall box with wall plate.
Q. Hose Bibb (P-9)
1. Chicago Faucet Company No. 952 polished chrome plated faucet with No. E-97 hose end
vacuum breaker, with No. 293-6 removable tee handle, or equal, by Wade or Woodford.
R. Wall Hydrant (P-10) Freezeproof, Cold Water
1. Zurn Z-1310 - 3/4" anti-siphon, non-freeze wall hydrant with bronze casing, polished
bronze face, and loose key handle, or equal by Wade or Woodford.
S. Floor Drain (P-11)
1. Cast iron drain with invertible membrane clamping flange, adjustable 6" round Type "B"
polished nickel bronze strainer. Zurn ZNB-415 or equal by J. R. Smith or Wade. Provide
flashing clamp for drains in slabs above ground floor level. Use for toilet rooms and other
finished areas. Size to drawings.
T. Floor Drain (P-12)
1. Heavy duty cast iron deep sump body with seepage pan, combination membrane flashing
clamp, suspended sediment bucket and heavy duty cast iron grate, Zurn No. Z-541 or
equal.
PLUMBING 15400-13
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
2. Supply Fitting - S-60-G-H Symmons Scot metering faucet, 4" center, self-closing with
temperature adjustment, temperature limit stops, time limit stop with flow, blade handle,
and grid strainer, Brass Craft No. CS400A stops and risers.
3. Drain - Kohler No. K-13885 tailpiece offset 4-1/2" for wheelchair, chrome plated.
4. Trap - Sanitary Dash No. R370-17 polished chrome plated with cleanout plug.
5. Support-Zurn ZR-1231 dura coated cast iron"Rigid System" carrier with rectangular steel
uprights, concealed arms and sleeves mounted on adjustable headers, 2" cast bronze
chrome plated escutcheons. Complete with cast iron feet, alignment truss and mounting
fasteners. Complete with cast iron feet, alignment truss and mounting fasteners.
H. Urinal (P-3) Standard Mounting
1. Urinal - Kohler "Bardon" No. K-4960-T, vitreous china, wall hung fixture with washout
flushing action.
2. Flush Valve - Sloan "Royal" No. 195-1 with angle stop, vacuum breaker.
3. Carrier - Zurn ZR-1222, plate type system with lower bearing plate.
1. Urinal (P-3A) Handicapped Mounted
Same as P-3 except mounted 15" from floor to lip to meet ADA Code.
J. Mop Receptor (P-4)
1. Basin - Fiat No. 2424 molded stone, 24" x 24" x 10" high mop basin.
2. Faucet - Fiat No. 830 AA supply fitting with vacuum breaker, pail hook, hose end and
wall bracket.
3. Trim - Fiat No. 87A drain, No. 889CC mop hanger, No. 832AA hose and bracket, and
No. 1239BB bumperguard.
K. Single Bowl Sink (P-5)
1. Sink - 22" x 33" self-rimming double bowl 18 ga. stainless steel with sound deadening
undercoat, punched for four (4) holes on ledge, Just DL-2233-A-GR.
2. Faucet-Double lever swing spout faucet with 10" centers and heavy chrome plating,Delta
No. 2476-SHP
3. Stainless steel cup strainer, 1-1/2" tailpiece and P-trap with cleanout nipple. Chrome
plated supplies with wheel handle stops and chrome plated escutcheon plates.
4. Garbage Disposal - In-Sink-Erator Classic Series, 1 H.P., 120 volts, 60 phase, 9.0 amps
with stainless steel shredder and grind chamber. Unit shall be complete with manual
overload switch, clamping ring and sound absorbing shell.
L. Single Bowl Sink (P-5A) -WI►,
1. Sink - 16" x 22" self-rimming single bowl 18 ga. stainless steel with sound deadening
undercoat, punched for three (3) holes on ledge, Just SBW-2125-A-GR.
PLUMBING 15400-12
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
2.09 PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. General Requirements: References made herein are to establish type and quality of materials. Ex-
posed traps and supply pipes for all fixtures shall be chrome plated and connected to the rough
piping systems at the wall. Wall escutcheons shall be chromium plated on nickel plated brass with
polished, bright surfaces. Vitreous china and acid-resisting enameled cast iron fixtures shall be
American Standard, Kohler, or Eljer; toilet seats to be Church, Olsonite or equal; stainless steel
sinks shall be Just, Elkay or equal.
B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall furnish all supports, brackets, bolts, etc. for proper installation
of all fixtures requiring supports. They shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and, if necessary, shall be built into place as the building progresses. The Plumb-
ing Subcontractor shall be held responsible for the stability and proper support of all plumbing fix-
tures.
C. Water Closet (P-1) Standard Mounting
1. Closet - Kohler "Kingston Lite" No. K-4330, vitreous china wall hung, rear outlet, 1.5
gpf., elongated bowl, siphon jet toilet with 1-1/2" top spud.
2. Flush Valve - Sloan "Royal" 111-YO with 1" angle stop, vacuum breaker.
3. Seat - Olsonite#95-SS white solid plastic, extra heavy, open front seat, less cover, with
self-sustaining hinge.
4. Mounting - Standard roughing, Zurn "Monolithic" chair carver Z-1203, No. 1204,
No. 1209 or No. 1212 series as required.
D. Water Closet (P-IA) Handicapped Mounting
1. Same as P-1 except mounted to meet ADA and Massachusetts Architectural Barrier Codes.
E. Water Closet (P-1B) Floor Mounted
1. Closet-Kohler "Wellcomme Lite"No. K-4350,vitreous china floor mounted,floor outlet,
1.5 gpf., elongated bowl, siphon jet toilet with 1-1/2" top spud.
2. Flush Valve - Sloan "Royal" 111-YO with 1" angle stop, vacuum breaker.
3. Seat - Olsonite#95-SS white solid plastic, extra heavy, open front seat, less cover, with
self-sustaining hinge.
F. Lavatory (P-2) Vann, Mounted
1. Basin - Kohler "Pennington" No. K-2295, vitreous china lavatory self-rimming, punched
for center set fitting, with overflow.
2. Supply Fitting - S-60-G Symmons, Scot metering faucet, 4" center, self-closing with
temperature adjustment,temperature limit stop,time limit stop with 0.5 gpm flow,and grid
strainer, Brass Craft No. CS400A stops and risers.
G. Lavatory (P-2A) Wall Hung, Handicapped Access
1. Basin-Kohler "Morningside",No. K-12636, 27" x 20" elongated flat slab, vitreous china
front, overflow lavatory punched for spread fitting and concealed arm support.
PLUMBING 15400-11
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
E. Cleanouts shall be Zurn Industries, Inc., Wade Division, Josam Mfg. Co., Jay R. Smith Co., or
equal.
F. Access panels shall be Karp Associates, Inc., Inryco, Inc., Milcor Division, Birmingham
Ornamental Iron, or equal.
2.06 INSULATION
A. All new water piping shall be insulated with heavy density fiberglass pipe insulation with self-sealing
lap, 1" thick for hot water and return hot water up to 1-1/2" and 1-1/2" thick insulation on piping
2" and larger, 1/2" thick for cold water. Insulation shall be one piece snap-on type, Certainteed
"500° Snap-On" or equal by Knauf, Manville, or Owens-Corning.
B. Fittings shall be insulated with PVC jackets applied over fiberglass blanket with joints taped. Cold
water piping shall also have mastic applied to all overlapping surfaces to form a vapor barrier.
Jackets shall be Certainteed "Snap-On" or equal.
C. Insulation and fitting jackets shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
Any gaps or fishmouths shall be remade.
D. Install an 18" length of rigid(load bearing)insulation at each hanger; insulation shall run continuous
through the hanger. To be calcium silicate, or equal.
E. All exposed drain and water piping at handicapped lavatories shall be insulated with Truebro "Handi
Lav-Guard" insulation system, Model 102 w/105 offset, or equal.
F. Insulate all vertical and horizontal rain conductor piping and fittings the same as for cold water
piping.
2.07 THERMOMETERS
A. Thermometers shall be Jay, Moeller,Palmer, Taylor, Trerice, or Weiss, equal to Taylor 30EJ31009
with aluminum case, industrial glass, red reading mercury, 9" scale length, 2°F subdivisions. Stem
length shall be sufficient to assure accurate and fast response, but in no case less than 3-1/2" nor
less than one-third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each thermometer shall be provided with
a brass, monel, or stainless steel separable socket of matching length, and with lagging extensions
when installed in insulated pipe. Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type, positioned as
required to be easily seen and read from normal operator's position.
B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following:
1. Hot water: 25°F - 240°F.
2. Cold water: 0°F - 100°F
2.08 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. 4-1/2" dial, double-spring with soft copper tubing loop and pet cock. Operating range shall be in
the center of the scale. To be U. S. Gage Co., or approved equal.
PLUMBING 15400-10
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
D. For hot, hot water circulating, and cold water piping - Grinnell Company's figure No. CT-99
heavily copper plated at 6 ft. intervals for copper tubing 1-1/4" or less, 10 ft. intervals for piping
1-1/2" and larger. Provision shall be made to allow for expansion and contraction of all piping.
E. Hangers or supports shall be placed within 1 ft. of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs of pipe not
over 5 ft. in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 12" from the elbow on the
connecting horizontal run.
F. All vertical piping shall be supported at each story height, with a support at the base of vertical cast
iron pipe.
G. Perforated strap iron hanger or Milford type copper plated steel hangers are not acceptable.
H. Where piping is supported from ceiling beams, support parallel pipes from different beams.
I. Support pipes sufficiently clear of all part of structure to allow for full thickness of insulation.
J. Hangers to be adequate size to include insulation. Furnish and install galvanized steel insulation
protection shields outside of insulation on pipe sizes 2" and larger to prevent crushing or indenting
of insulation of hangers.
K. Provide plastic coated steel hangers to support acid waste and vent piping at 6 ft. intervals.
2.04 TRAPS
A. Traps at fixtures shall be as listed in the Fixture Schedule. Exposed traps shall be chrome plated.
B. Traps and running traps shall be extra heavy cast iron where buried in floors or serving floor drains.
Where traps are not connected directly under the drain they serve in the floor, they shall be fitted
with top cleanouts and extensions to the floor with access covers and plates.
C. Furnish and install traps as required for all items of equipment furnished under other Sections of
these Specifications, and/or by the Owner.
2.05 CLEANOUTS AND ACCESS PANELS
A. Floor cleanout shall be Zurn 1400 Series Level-trol Supreme cleanouts and Type ZN-1400-Z in
terrazzo floors, Type ZN-1400-X in tiled floors, Type ZN-1400-CM in carpeted floors, and Type
ZN-1400-2 in all other locations. Cleanouts shall be set flush and level with top of finished floor
surface except in carpeted areas where they shall be flush with concrete.
B. Wall cleanouts shall be brass, recessed head plugs with Zurn ZN-1440-1 access frame and cover.
C. Access covers shall be flush with finished floors and walls. Where floor cleanouts occur above
finish floors above grade, they shall be provided with flange, clamping collar and 24" x 24", 16 oz.
copper flashing. Copper flashing shall be furnished and installed by the Plumbing Subcontractor.
D. Access panel doors for all concealed inaccessible valves, balancing fittings, cleanouts, shock
absorbers, and trap primers in masonry walls, plastered walls, plastered or gypsum wallboard
ceilings. Access panels shall be furnished by the Plumbing Subcontractor and installed by tradesmen
of wall or ceiling finish. Access panels in plaster shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PL (12" x 12"
min.); in walls shall be Karp Type DSC-214M "Universal" (12" x 12"). For drywall ceilings shall
be Karp Sesame Slim Trim Access Hatches, Type KSTDW/CAD (12" x 12" min.).
PLUMBING 15400-9
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
C. Balancing Valves or Fittings
1. Where indicated on the drawings, furnish and install circuit setter bronze body, calibrated
with differential pressure connection locks.
2. Balancing valves shall be Bell & Gossett or approved equal.
D. Check Valves
1. Check valves shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the drawings. Valves up
to 3" shall be Class 125, solder ends, bronze body, swing type disc, Stockham Figure
B-309.
2. Check valves 4" and larger shall be iron body, bronze mounted with body and cap
conforming to ASTM A 126 Class B cast-iron, flanged, swing type disc, Stockham Figure
G-931.
3. Check valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, Jenkins, Lunkenheimer, or equal.
E. Pressure Reducing Valves
1. Pressure reducing valves shall be as manufactured by Watts Regulator Co., A.W. Cash
Valve Mfg. Co., Mueller Co., or equal.
2. Furnish and install on water service entrance Watts Series 2300 pressure reducing valve.
The valve body shall be cast iron with FDA approved fused epoxy coating, internal and
external. Provide with factory inlet strainer.
a. Valve shall be rated to reduce the 100 psi inlet pressure to 70 psi outlet pressure,
with a maximum flow of 95 gpm. Valve size is to be 2-1/2", manufacturer shall
determine proper valve size prior to ordering. Valve shall be rated for minimum
working pressure of 200 psi.
b. Install in parallel with the main valve a small Watts pressure reducing valve,
Model U5-3/4" with inlet and outlet ball valves. Pressure reducing valve shall be
rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psi. Flow rate shall be 10 gpm or
less.
F. Plug Valves: Furnish and install cast iron plug valves on all gas piping 2" and larger, with flanged
ends, Model 133 as manufactured by Serek Audco, with 100% free
area, rated at 125 psi working pressure, or approved equal.
G. Gas Fire Valve: Furnish and install gas fire valve as manufactured by Inner-rite or approved equal.
Valve shall be flanged cast iron with bronze disc and seat, stainless steel fuse assembly.
2.03 HANGERS
A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & Paterson, or Fee &Mason.
B. For cast iron and galvanized steel piping- Grinnell Company's Figure No. 260, one to each length
of cast iron pipe, at 12 ft. intervals for threaded piping; for copper tubing - Grinnell Co.'s figure
CT-65 at 8 ft. intervals for tubing up to 2"; 10 ft. intervals for tubing 2-1/2" and above.
C. Gas and compressed air piping shall be supported by steel clevis pipe hangers, one to each 8'-0"
of pipe.
PLUMBING 15400-8
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
3. All gas piping, including gas valve and final connections to kitchen equipment, shall be the
responsibility of the Plumbing Subcontractor.
4. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall apply for the new gas entrance and the Owner shall pay
for all fees and charges required for the new gas entrance to the building. On site service
piping and meter shall be by the Bay State Gas Company.
F. All pressure-rated pumped discharge piping on site shall be equal to John-Manville Blue-Brute Class
150 pipe, ring-tite with mechanical joints.
G. Air Piping
1. Galvanized Steel: Use ASTM A53 standard weight(Schedule 40)with Class 150 threaded
malleable iron fittings, ANSI B16.3.
2. Reels: Use heavy duty Graco 400 Series Model 218-480 with 1/2" x 24" connecting inlet
hose, 60 feet of 1/2" 300 psi hose, and tire chuck with quick coupler. Mounting
assemblies and brackets shall be provided as indicated on the drawings and necessary for
overhead mounting. Provide "Y" hose for tire service (Graco Model 206-709) at all reel
locations. For each reel, provide service label kit for "Air", Graco 218-675.
2.02 VALVES
A. Valves shall be manufactured by Fairbanks, Jenkins, Lunkenheimer, Hammond, Crane, Powell,or
Stockham. (Federal Specifications: WW-V-54c, Class A, Type 1).
1. Gate: 125 lb. WSP, all bronze, non-rising stem, screwed bonnet, one piece wedge, de-
signed to permit repacking under pressure, Lunkenheimer Cat. No. 2133, or equal.
2. Check: 125 lb. WSP, all bronze horizontal swing type, screwed caps, bronze disc
designed to permit regrinding of seat without removal of body, Lunkenheimer Cat. No.
2145, or equal.
B. In lieu of gate valves on water lines, the Plumbing Subcontractor has the option of installing
"Apollo" or equal brass or bronze solder end ball valves, with teflon seats and full line size ports,
unless specifically noted otherwise.
1. On water lines inside building; ball valves 3" and smaller shall be as manufactured by
Conbraco Industries, Inc.'s "Apollo", Series 95-200 stop and drain, with 1-1/4" extended
stems for piping 1/2" to 1" size; Series 70-100/200 with 1-1/4" extended stems for piping
1-1/4" to 3" size. Valves shall be provided with stainless steel ball, reinforced Teflon
seats and seals, bronze body, 400 psi WOG, positive 100% shutoff.
2. Drain valves at all low points shall be "Apollo" 78-100 or 78-200 Series, 1/2" or 3/4"
solder by 3/4" hose end with attached cap and chain.
3. Valves on gas lines 2" and smaller shall be UL listed, 250 psi LP gas rated, "Apollo"
80-100-YRPV Series with tee handle, as approved by the Massachusetts Fuel Gas Code.
Where indicated on the drawings, for classroom zone shut-offs, ball valves shall be
enclosed in a recessed valve box, as hereinafter specified.
4. Ball valves shall be of one manufacturer, Conbraco Industries, Inc., "Apollo," Watts
Regulator, NibcoScott, or approved equal.
PLUMBING 15400-7
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
1.16 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 PIPING MATERIALS
A. All soil, waste, vent, and storm drain lines in accessible areas 2" and larger shall be cast iron
"no-hub," ASA group 022 pipe and fittings joined with cast iron clamps as manufactured by "MG"
coupling or "Clamp-All". All buried soil,waste, vent, and storm lines shall be service weight cast
iron pipe with all fittings carefully fitted and caulked together with oakum and lead, sealed gas and
water tight. Minimum size of piping below ground shall be 2". Where it is impractical to install
cast iron pipe, as in tight partition work or where the sizes of lines are smaller than 2", Type "L"
copper tubing shall be used conforming to ASTM Specification with sweat type fitting using lead
free solder and non-corrosive flux, "Non-Korrode", or approved equal conforming to ASTM
Specification B 32 alloy 50A. In lieu of oakum and lead joints, "push-on type" resilient gasket
fittings may be used on buried pipe only. Provide extra heavy cast iron for urinal connections. All
condensate pump discharge piping shall be Type "L" copper pipe and fittings.
B. All vent lines 2" and smaller shall be Type "L" copper, or DWV, except minimum size below
ground shall be 2". Minimum vent terminal through roof shall be 4" except otherwise noted. Vent
flashing at the roof shall be by the Roofing Subcontractor.
C. All hot,cold water, and hot water recirculating piping within the building shall be hard copper Type
"L" seamless drawn tubing assembled with sweat fittings. All solder used shall be lead free,
cadmium free, "Silverbrite - 100" or equal, complying with the latest issue of ANSI A-5.8
publication. All exposed runs to all toilet fixtures and sinks shall be chrome plated, including all
exposed piping in kitchen. All below slab trap primer feed piping shall be Type "K" soft rolled
with silver solder joints.
D. All water service and fire protection piping on site and fittings into the building, and where noted
otherwise, shall be Class 51 cement lined Ductile-Iron pipe and fittings, with mechanical joints up
to the backflow preventer.
E. All gas piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe with malleable pattern fittings,installed in strict
compliance with the Massachusetts Fuel Gas Code, (248 CMR 5.00). All piping 2"and below shall
be assembled with screwed malleable iron fittings; 2-1/2" and above shall be welded. Provide
necessary ball type gas shut-off valves or square head cocks on piping 2" and smaller and drips as
required. Piping 2" and larger shall have plug valves. All high pressure gas piping shall be
Schedule 40, all welded with flanged plug valves. All gas valves shall be rated for 125 psi working
pressure.
1. All welding shall be done in accordance with the welding procedures of the National
Certified Pipe Welding Bureau, or any other approved procedure, conforming to the
requirements of the ASA Code for Pressure Piping. No welder shall be employed on the
work who has not been fully qualified under the above specified procedure and so certified
as a member of the local chapter of the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau or similar
locally recognized testing authority.
2. Gas piping to gas-fired boilers shall be the responsibility of the Plumbing Subcontractor.
Gas train vents from boiler header shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Subcontractor.
Gas vents from water heater gas train shall be by the Plumbing Subcontractor. All high
pressure side gas mains on regulator vents shall be all welded.
PLUMBING 15400-6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
1.13 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping,ductwork, cable, and raceway shall be installed concealed in all areas except mechanical
or electrical equipment rooms, except that horizontal runs at the ceiling in rooms that have exposed
structure may be exposed.
B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above
grade, except where installed on the room side of continuous wall insulation.
1.14 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's
representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to
operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly
qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Subcontractor shall video tape
the instruction procedures and deliver two(2)copies of the tape with the Operation and Maintenance
Manuals.
B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual",
the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Subcontractor, and the
Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each
section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in.
The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent.
C. The Manual shall include the following information:
1. Description of systems.
2. Description of start-up, operation, and shutdown.
3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment.
4. Lubrication chart.
5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each
item of equipment.
6. Valve chart.
7. List of recommended spare pans.
8. Copies of all service contracts.
9. Performance curves for pumps, etc.
10. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well as the local
representative for each item of equipment.
1.15 GUARANTEE
A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts
for a period of one (1) year after date of substantial completion, and shall agree to promptly
repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be detective during this period.
B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in
his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replace-
ment or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Any part of the work installed under this contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be
considered as being defective.
PLUMBING 15400-5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
1.08 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He
shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the
proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of
the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work.
B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work.
1.09 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water
or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1.
1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans,
elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supple-
ment the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or
implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Subcontract requirements.
B. The Plans and Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in
the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably
implied in both.
C. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall assume all responsibility in scaling measurements from the
drawings. ,
D. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and
accessories that may be required. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall carefully investigate the
structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly,
furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such
conditions, at no additional cost.
1.11 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the
building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work
and that of other trades.
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Subcontract
shall be provided by the Plumbing Subcontractor.
B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60
cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his
work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc.
C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the
Plumbing Subcontractor.
PLUMBING 15400-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching.
Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit,and cable runs shall be performed
by the Subcontractor installing such items.
G. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials
from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own
expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all
times. All fixtures and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means.
H. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this
Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
I. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall check the Architectural Plans and Specifications before ordering
any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the
Architect before proceeding with the work.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be deter-
mined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements.
B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified
testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General
Requirements.
1.06 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be U.S. made,
new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly
in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturers
for each class of ma.:rial or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there
are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their
requirements and be so labeled.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Plumbing Subcontractor shall submit to the Archi-
tect eight(8) clean and legible sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or shop drawings,
giving all specific d--tails, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished.
B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall check the shop drawings thoroughly for compliance with the
Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all
changes which may be required.
C. The review of shop drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Plumbing Subcontractor from
any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifica-
tions. The responsibility for errors in shop drawings shall remain with the Plumbing Subcontractor.
D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which shop drawings
or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the
Plumbing Subcontractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials
AVOK at his own expense and as directed by the Architect.
PLUMBING 15400-3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
12. Fuel storage and delivery system including all piping, pumps, controls and a 1,000 gallon
above ground storage tank.
13. Arrange for inspections and perform cleaning and testing.
14. Guarantee and instructions.
1.03 CODES, ORDINANCES, AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials, and the installation thereof, shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts
State Building Code, Electrical Code, Massachusetts Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws,
rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents
conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract require-
ments are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern
unless the Architect rules otherwise.
B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions
at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.04 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular
schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and
supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work.
B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who
shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Plumbing Sub-
contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced
without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins.
C. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the build-
ing premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors' work resulting from the execution
of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or
share of responsibility incurred by the Plumbing Subcontractor, it is agreed between the Owner and
the Plumbing Subcontractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by
the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work
in question.
D. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to
expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as
to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The
Plumbing Subcontractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports,inserts, etc., herein-
after specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part
of the Plumbing Subcontractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear the
extra expense involved due to such failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the drawings is dia-
grammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building
shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Plumbing Subcontractor
shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building
shall be the determining factor for all measurements. In no case shall piping be installed laterally
in thickness of floor slab.
PLUMBING 15400-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING
(FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Include General Conditions,Supplementary General Conditions,applicable parts of Division 1, and
conditions of the Contract as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this
Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section.
Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, appurtenances and services necessary for, and reasonably incidental to,
the complete installation of all plumbing work specified herein and/or indicated on the drawings,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. All sanitary, drain, waste and vent systems and storm drain conductor piping inside the
building and connection to site sanitary sewer and storm drain systems 10' outside of the
foundation wall, or as specifically called out on the drawings.
2. All hot and cold water distribution and hot water recirculation systems, water heater, and
hot water generator. Furnish piping, fittings, insulation, supports, valves, and pumps, as
well as gas fired water heater, heat exchanger, and storage tank.
3. All natural gas piping system per Massachusetts Fuel Gas Code, including connections to
kitchen equipment, water heater and boilers(both primary combustion and secondary lines
to gas burner pilots), laboratory equipment, and cooking equipment.
4. Plumbing fixtures, trim and supports.
5. Connections to fixtures and equipment furnished and installed by others requiring water,
gas, air, drains, and waste.
6. Provide and install water meter, and pressure reducing valve station at domestic water
service entry.
7. Gas and oil waste and vent system including gas and oil trap.
8. Furnish and install sediment, grease, and/or plaster traps or interceptors as required.
9. Provide back water preventers (point-of-use types) where shown on drawings, specified,
or required.
10. Furnish access panels.
11. Compressed air piping system connecting each and every device requiring compressed air.
This contractor shall furnish and install all compressed air fittings, hose reels, air
compressor, dryer and all filter, fittings and controls.
PLUMBING 15400-1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CLEANING AND TESTING
A. Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush water feed mains, lead-in connections and
control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire sprinkler piping installation has been completed and
before piping is placed in service, flush entire sprinkler system, as required to remove foreign
substances, under pressure as specified in ANSI/NFPA 13. Continue flushing until water is clear,
and check to ensure that debris has not clogged sprinklers.
B. After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, for period of 2 hours, at not less
than 200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum static pressure when maximum static pressure is
in excess of 150 psi. Check system for leakage of joints. Measure hydrostatic pressure at low point
of each system of zone being tested. Test dry-pipe hydrostatically except, in freezing conditions,
test with air at pressures not less than 50 psi, for period of 2 hours. Check system for leakage.
Leave differential dry-valve clappers open during test, to prevent damage.
C. Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in accordance with ANSI/NFPA
standards for "little or no leakage", and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance. Do not use
chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods.
3.02 TIME, MANNER, AND REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTING SUB-BIDS
A. Sub-bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provision of the General Laws (Ter. Ed.)
Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44L, as amended. The time and place for submissions of sub-bids
shall be as set forth under INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS.
B. Each sub-bid filed with the Awarding Authority must be accompanied by BID BOND, CASH, OR
CERTIFIED CHECK, OR A TREASURER'S CHECK OR CASHIER'S CHECK issued by a
responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City of Northampton in the amount stipulated in
the INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS. A sub-bid accompanied by any other form of bid deposit than
those specified will be reiected.
C. Each sub-bid submitted for the work under this Section shall be on a form furnished by the
Awarding Authority, as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended.
D. The work to be done under this Section is shown on Drawings numbered: T1, L1 through L5
inclusive, S1 through S8 inclusive, Al through A15 inclusive, FP1 through FP4 inclusive, P1
through P4 inclusive, H1 through H6 inclusive, SEl, E1 through E6 inclusive.
3.03 ALTERNATE BIDS
A. See Section 01030 for a general description of the Base and Alternate Bids. Work of the Fire
Protection Subcontractor is more specifically described below.
B. The Base Bid shall be the lump sum price for all labor and materials necessary for and reasonably
incidental to providing all fire protection work specified and shown on the Drawings, less the cost
of all extra work described in the Alternates.
C. Alternates Nos. 1, 2, and 3 do not affect the work of this Section.
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-17
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
M2700-13. Shall include S-1, S-2, S-3 switches, excess pressure pump, and supervisory .•
panel, Model M2011-14.
14. Hose valves shall be equal to Potter-Roemer Co. Fig. 4065 size 2-1/2" with red iron
handle and cast brass body, Fig. 2810 female to male pin lug reducer size 2-1/2" female
x 1-1/2" male, and Fig. 4615 cap with chain size 1-1/2". All threads shall conform with
the local Fire Department.
15. Hose valves on concealed standpipe shall be mounted in a recessed cabinet, Allenco Cat.
No. 280A cabinet with style "L" trim and "G" door, or equal.
16. Spare sprinklers shall be provided in one 12-head cabinet equal to Reliable, Model A-1
cabinet. Each cabinet shall have an assortment of heads as used on the job and also an
approved type sprinkler head wrench; mount cabinet in alarm check valve area. Provide
one cabinet at each alarm valve riser.
17. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide fire protection specialties of the following
Grinnell Fire Protection Systems, Co., Inc., Viking Corporation, or equal.
18. Hose Valves: Where noted on the drawings, furnish and install 2-1/2"polished brass Fire
Department angle hose valves with 1-1/2" outlets, cap, and chain. Hose threads to be per
City of Northampton Fire Department's requirements.
19. Alarm Test Modules: Furnish and install AGF Manufacturing, Inc.'s UL listed and FM
approved "Test and Drain" for the alarm test loops, where indicated on the drawings,
complete with combination sight glass/orifice.
20. Valves with Built-in Tamper Switches: Furnish and install, and each flow control station,
Milwaukee Valve Co.'s Model BB-VSCSO2 grooved ends, 175 psi., slow closing
"Butterball" butterfly valves, complete with built-in tamper switch for 2-1/2" pipe size;
Model BB-SCSO2 for threaded pipe 2" and smaller. Valves shall be FM approved and UL
listed.
21. Head guards shall be equal to Central Model 1 for upright sprinklers in areas specified on
drawings.
22. Alarm check valve shall be equal to Viking Model H-2 complete with variable pressure
trim, retarding chamber, water pressure gauges, water motor alarm, and electric pressure
type flow.
23. Drain and test connections shall be equal to AGF Model 1000 with sight glass, and test
orifice.
24. Main water flow initiating device shall be equal to Potter Model PS 10-2A attached to alarm
check valve in non-interruptible position.
25. Water flow switches shall be equal to Potter VSF-F with two sets of SPDT contacts.
26. Dry pipe alarm check valve shall be equal to Viking Model E-1 complete with conventional
trim kit, Model E accelerator, Model B-1 anti-flood device, air pressure maintenance
device and Model E-1 maintenance air compressor.
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-16
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
D. Install valves where required for proper operation"of piping and equipment, including valves in
branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and
so that separate support can be provided when necessary.
E. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems
pointed downward from horizontal plane unless unavoidable.
2.06 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
A. Provide fire protection specialties,UL listed,in accordance with the following listing. Provide sizes
and types which mate and match piping and equipment connections.
1. Upright sprinkler heads shall be Star Sprinkler Corp., Model "LD-2" standard upright
sprinkler head, rough brass. Temperature rating 165°F or as required by the insurance
underwriter. Boiler Room heads to have 212°F rating.
2. Pendent -sprinkler heads shall be recessed with white cover plate, Central Model "A"
"Royal Flush" rated at 165°F unless noted otherwise.
3. Horizontal sidewall sprinkler heads shall be Star Model "E" with white finish, temperature
165°F unl--ss noted otherwise.
4. Extended Coverage light hazard pendent sprinkler shall be Central Model ESLO recessed
with whit`cover, quick response,very extra large orifice sprinkler, 3/4" NPT, temperature
155°F unless noted otherwise.
5. Extended coverage ordinary hazard pendent sprinkler shall be Central Model ESLOOH
recessed with white cover, very extra large orifice sprinkler, 3/4" NPT, temperature 155°F
unless noted otherwise.
6. Dry horizontal sidewall shall be equal to Central Model H-1, 1" NPT, 165°F.
7. Dry pendL-nt sprinkler shall be equal to Central Model A-1 recessed type with white cover,
extended dry pendent, 1" NPT, 165°F.
8. Tamper s%A itches shall be equal to Potter Electrical Signal Company, Model OSYS-B, small
case, and shall be installed on all control valves for the sprinkler system.
9. Flush mounted Fire Department pumper connection shall be wall mounted siamese type,
cast brass body, dual drop clappers, brass plugs with chains, all with rough chrome-plated
finish and lettering on escutcheon reading, "Automatic Sprinkler",equal to Potter-Roemer.
Hose connection sizes and threads shall match Northampton Fire Department standards.
10. Automatic ball drips, as manufactured by Potter-Roemer shall be Fig. 5982, size 3/4", of
straight design in case brass. Install in horizontal position only.
11. Swing Check valve shall be equal to Central, Model "80" with tapping for automatic ball
drip, size as required.
12. Double check valve assembly w/metered bypass as noted on plans, to be furnished and
installed by the Sprinkler Subcontractor, DEP approved for backflow prevention, Watts
Ow Model 709DDC. Provide test kits Model TK-7-BFP, and two repair kits.
13. Gamewell excess pressure pump kit shall include all necessary equipment as shown in
Gamewell Bulletin 6010, typical piping diagram for wet pipe watchman's kit, Model
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-15
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom
of movement between pipe anchors and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, '
expansion bends and similar units.
I. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide pipe slopes and so that maximum pipe
deflections allowed to ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are not exceeded.
J. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments.
2.05 VALVES
A. Provide factory-fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated.
Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; provide proper selection as determined by
Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide end connections which properly mate
with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is
Installer's option.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size.
2. Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter-turn.
B. Gate Valves
1. Threaded End, 2" and Smaller: FM, UL-listed, 175 psi, bronze body, solid wedge,
outside screw and yoke, rising stem.
Crane: 459
Fairbanks: 0222
Hammond: IB681
Jenkins: 275U
Stockham: B-133
Walworth: 904
2. Flanged End, 2-1/2" and Larger: FM, UL listed, 175 psi, iron body bronze mounted,
solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem.
Crane: 467
Fairbanks: 0412
Hammond: IR1154
Jenkins: 825-A
Stockham: G-634
Walworth: 8713-F
C. Check Valves
1. 2-1/2" and Larger: FM, 175 psi, iron body bronze mounted, renewable composition disc
and bronze seat ring, bolted cover, flanged ends.
Fairbanks: 0711
Jenkins: 729
Stockham: G-940
Walworth: 8883-LT
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-14
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
B. Provide factory-fabricated hanger-rod attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the
following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal piping hangers and building
attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use
only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger-rod attachments
to suit hanger rods.
1. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13.
2. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15.
3. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16.
4. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17.
C. Provide factory-fabricated building attachments complying with MSS SP-58,of one of the following
types listed, selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS
SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building attachments to suit
hanger rods.
1. Top Beam C-Clamps: MSS Type 19.
2. Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20.
3. C-Clamps: MSS Type 23.
4. Side Beam Clamps: MSS Type 27.
5. Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30.
D. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hangers and supports of one of the following:
B-Line Systems Inc.
Carpenter and Patterson, Inc.
Comer & Lada Co., Inc.
Elcen Metal Products Co.
Fee & Mason Mfg. Co.
ITT Grinnell Corp.
E. Install building attachments at required locations on structural steel for proper piping support. Space
attachments within maximum piping span length indicated on MSS SP-69. Install additional building
attachments where support is required for additional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges,
guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping.
F. Install hangers, supports,clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure;
comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported
together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings
complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of vatious sizes is to be supported together by trapeze
hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter
pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping,and do not support piping from other
piping.
G. Support sprinkler piping independently of other piping.
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-13
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
M. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:
1. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs.
2. Plastic Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe; remove burrs.
3. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation walls below grade, or
in exterior walls, caulked between sleeve and pipe.
4. Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through walls, floors, ceilings
and roofs. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work, except as detailed
on drawings, or as reviewed by Architect. Install sleeves so that piping will have free
movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than 2 pipe
sizes larger than piping run. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of surface; except
floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves 1/4" above level floor finish, and 3/4" above floor
finish sloped to drain. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of concrete
and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent concrete and
other materials from entering sleeves.
5. Sleeve Seals: Install in accordance with the following:
Fill and pack annular space between sleeve and
pipe with oakum, calk with lead, on both sides.
N. Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely fitting pipe outside
diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of
escutcheon to completely cover pipe sleeve extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel
or chrome finish for occupied areas; prime paint finish for unoccupied areas.
1. Pipe Escutcheons for Dry Areas: Provide chrome plated sheet steel escutcheons, solid or
split hinged.
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe escutcheons of one of the following:
Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co.
Producers Specialty & Mfg. Co.
Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co.
3. Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through floors, walls, partitions, and
ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building. Secure
escutcheon to pipe so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flush with adjoining
surface.
2.04 SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, AND SEALS
A. Provide factory-fabricated piping hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the
following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit piping systems, in accordance with MSS
SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer
for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size.
1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1, for piping larger than 4".
2. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7, for piping 4" and less.
3. Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8.
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-12
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts L 16, 1996
5. All exposed sprinkler piping, 1-1/2"and smaller,outside of Mechanical E. t Rooms,
Shops, and Boiler Room shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe with scree :ngs.
6. Schedule 40 seamless red 'brass pipe with brass screwed fittings suita 175 psi.
working water pressure.
7. Type "L" seamless drawn hard copper tubing with solder joint pressure fi „s, where
noted on the drawings.
D. Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve
permanently leakproof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated service wit:%out piping
failure. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible
unions for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes(where
indicated) by use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16"
misalignment tolerance. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping.
E. Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally(pitched to drain) and
avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines.
Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated,
run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing
building and its equipment. Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction,columns and other
structural and permanent-enclosure elements of building. Wherever possible in finished and
occupied spaces, conceal piping from view, by locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall
construction or above suspended ceilings; do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except
as indicated.
F. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults, Elevator Machine
Room, and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures unless unavoidable.
Install drip pan under piping that must be run through electrical spaces. Any piping intended to be
run through electrical spaces shall be reviewed by the Architect prior to installation.
G. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream
threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compound,or pipe
joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at each joint
and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed.
H. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and equipment.
Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of gaskets.
I. Grooved Pipe Joints: Comply with fitting manufacturer's instructions for making grooves in pipe
ends. Remove burrs and ream pipe ends. Assemble joints in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
J. Install ductile cast-iron water mains and appurtenances in accordance with AWWA C600.
K. Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and prepare for
application of specified coatings (if any).
L. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. Test each natural section of
each piping system independently,but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test
pressures exceed valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for indicated
pressure and time.
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-11
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
outside diameter around hole, and lower housing with positioning lugs, secured
together during assembly with nuts and bolts. !
g. Fittings: Grooved or shouldered end design to accept grooved mechanical
couplings.
Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47.
Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536.
h. Flanges: Conform to Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel bolt hole alignment.
Malleable Iron: ASTM 47.
Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536.
i. Grooves: Conform to the following:
Standard Steel: Square cut.
Lightweight Steel: Roll grooved.
j. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grooved piping
products of the following:
ITT Grinnell Corp.
Victaulic Co.
B. Exterior Piping and Piping up to the Backflow Preventer
1. Ductile-Iron Pipe: ANSI A21.51; AWWA C141; thickness class 50, mechanical joint.
2. Cement-Mortar Lining for ductile-iron pipe and fittings: ANSI A21.4; AWWA C104.
3. Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ANSI A21.10, mechanical joint.
4. Valves: Clow Cat. No. F-5707 with No. F-2452 valve box and No. F-2493 cover.
C. Piping above ground and within the building shall conform to all requirements of NFPA 13 and
shall be as follows:
1. Piping and fittings from water entrance to inlet of backflow preventer shall be Class 52
ductile iron, cement lined with mechanical joints.
2. All concealed standpipes for stair valve cabinets and all exposed sprinkler piping, subject
to vandalism(stair halls and similar areas), shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe, welded,
suitable for 175 psi. working water pressure.
3. All concealed sprinkler piping (above acoustical ceiling tiles and plaster ceilings; in pipe
chases) and exposed sprinkle piping in Mechanical Equipment Rooms, Shops, and Boiler
Room, downstream of alarm check valves, shall be Schedule 10 seamless light wall, steel
pipe with rolled grooved ends, for piping 2" and larger, complete with suitable couplings
and fittings for rolled grooved end steel pipe.
4. All concealed piping and all exposed sprinkler piping in Mechanical Equipment Rooms,
Shops, and Boiler Room, 1-1/2" and smaller, shall be at the option of the Fire Protection
Subcontractor, either Schedule 40 black steel pipe with screwed fittings or standard weight
roll grooved pipe with grooved fittings.
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-10
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
5. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in rooms where indicated or, if not otherwise
indicated, where directed by Architect.
6. Furnish complete chart and flow diagram of entire system listing the valve number, fluid
controlled, and zone reference location for all valves corresponding to the tag numbers.
The chart shall be framed under glass and hung in the Mechanical Equipment Room where
directed. Furnish two (2) extra copies of the chart to the Architect.
7. Furnish and install a laminated red phenolic plate with engraved white lettering for each
zone control flow switch and isolation valve. Nameplates shall be located adjacent to all
exposed and concealed valves, approximately 12" below finished ceiling.
2.03 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Interior Piping
1. Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, A 106 or A 120: except comply with ASTM A 53 or A
106 where close coiling or bending is required.
a. Pipe Weight: Schedule 40.
b. Fittings: Class 125, cast-iron threaded, ANSI B16.4, or flanged, ANSI B16.1.
C. Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; cut-groove type for
piping 2-1/2" and larger only.
"*— 2. Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135.
a. Pipe Weight: Schedule 10 for 5" and smaller; 0.134" wall thickness for 6".
b. Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; roll-groove or
mechanical locking type.
3. Grooved Piping Products (for use on pipes 2-1/2" and larger)
a. Coupling Housings: Malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47.
b. Coupling Housing: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536.
C. Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type, which engages
grooved or shouldered pipe ends, encasing an elastomeric gasket which bridges
pipe ends to create seal. Cast in two or more parts, secure together during
assembly with nuts and bolts. Permit degree of contraction and expansion as
specified in manufacturer's latest published literature.
d. Gaskets: Mechanical grooved coupling design, pressure responsive so that
internal pressure serves to increase seal's tightness, constructed of elastomers
having properties as designated by ASTM D 2000.
e. Bolts and Nuts: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A 183, minimum tensile
110,000 psi.
f. Branch Stub-Ins: Upper housing with full locating collar for rigid positioning
engaging machine-cut hole in pipe,encasing elastomeric gasket conforming to pipe
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-9
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
fire protection piping systems. Where more than one type of material or product is indicated,
selection is Installer's option.
2.02 BASIC IDENTIFICATION
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical identification materials of one of the
following:
Allen Systems, Inc.
Brady (W. H.) Co., ; Signmark Div.
Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc.
Seton Name Plate Corp.
B. Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid, snap-on, color-coded pipe markers,
complying with ANSI A13.1.
1. For external diameters less than 6",provide full-band pipe markers, extending 3600 around
pipe at each location, fastened as follows:
Snap-on application of pre-tensioned, semi-rigid plastic pipe marker.
2. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature which best describes piping
system in each instance, as selected by Architect.
3. Locate pipe markers as follows:
a. Near each valve and control device.
b. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except
reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment.
C. Branch piping need not be marked.
C. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass valve tags with printed enamel lettering, with piping
system abbreviation in approximately 3/16"high letters and sequenced valve numbers approximately
3/8" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener. Provide tags on all valves and control devices.
1. Provide 1-1/8" sq. brass tags with black lettering.
2. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain(wire link or beaded type),or solid brass
S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured
specifically for that purpose.
3. Submit valve schedule for piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8-1/2"x 11"bond
paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag),
location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification(if any). Mark valves
which are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special "flags", in
margin of schedule. In addition to mounted copies, furnish extra copies for Maintenance
Manuals as specified in Division 1.
4. For each page of valve schedule,provide glazed display frame, with screws for removable
mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum,
with SSB-grade sheet glass. ""#^
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-8
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
1.17 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Refer to Division 1 for Record Drawings.
B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change order or
by field conditions. Principal dimensions shall be indicated of concealed work, fire protection lines,
valves, and zone flow switches. All changes must be clearly marked with a bubble drawn around
the area of work effected by the change.
1.18 CO-ORDINATION OF TRADES
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall give full co-operation to the Subcontractors of other trades,
and shall furnish any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed
satisfactorily and with least possible interference or delay.
B. In areas where conflicts may occur, if so directed by the Architect, this Subcontractor shall prepare
composite sketches at a suitable scale, not less than 1/4" = l'-0", clearly showing how his work
is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades.
C. Piping and other equipment shall not be installed in congested and possible problem areas by this
Subcontractor without first co-ordinating the installation of same with other trades and the Architect.
This Subcontractor, at his own expense, shall relocate all unco-ordinated piping and other equipment
installed should they interfere with the proper installation and mounting of electrical equipment,
ductwork, piping, hung ceilings, and other structural finishes installed by other trades.
D. This Subcontractor shall co-ordinate the elevations of all piping and equipment in hung ceilings for
the installation of recessed lighting fixtures, duct boxes, etc. Conflicts shall be brought to the
attention of the Architect for a decision before the piping and/or equipment of other trades is
installed.
E. In areas where. due to construction conditions, more than one trade is required to use common
openings in chases, shafts and sleeves for the passage of conduits,raceways, piping,ductwork and
other materials, this Subcontractor must plan and locate the positions of equipment to be furnished
under this Section so that all items including piping and/or equipment of other trades may be
accommodated within the space available. Location and positioning shall be done prior to
installation of same and to the satisfaction of the Architect.
F. This Subcontractor, before installing his work, shall see that it does not interfere with the clearances
required for finished columns, pilasters,partitions or walls, as shown on the Contract Architectural
or Structural Drawings showing foundations, floor plans, roof plans, and details.
G. Piping work that is installed under this Contract which interferes with the architectural design or
building structure, shall be changed as directed by the Architect, and all costs incidental to such
changes shall be paid by this Subcontractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
A. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings,
temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes and types matching
piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-7
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
1.14 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical
or electrical equipment rooms, except that in rooms without ceilings, horizontal runs only may be
exposed.
B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above
grade.
1.15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's
representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to
operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly
qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Subcontractor shall video tape
the instruction procedures and deliver two(2)copies of the tape with the Operation and Maintenance
Manuals.
B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three(3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual",
the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Subcontractor, and the
Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each
section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in.
The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent.
C. The Manual shall include the following information:
1. Description of systems.
2. Description of start-up, operation, and shutdown.
3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment.
4. Lubrication chart.
5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each
item of equipment.
6. Valve chart.
7. List of recommended spare parts.
8. Copies of all service contracts.
9. Performance curves for pumps, etc.
10. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well as the local
representative for each item of equipment.
1.16 GUARANTEE
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts
for a period of one (1) year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair
or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects
in his work and for repair to plaster, wood,and other materials or equipment caused by replacement
or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be
considered as being defective.
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
1.09 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work.
He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the
proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of
the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work.
1.10 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or
sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1.
1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details,plans,
elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to
supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated
or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements.
B. The Specifications and Plans are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in
the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably
implied in both.
C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall not scale the drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and
accessories that may be required. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall carefully investigate the
structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly,
furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such
conditions, at no additional cost.
1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to
the building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his
work and that of other trades.
1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall
be provided by the Fire Protection Subcontractor.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120
volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and
light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc.
C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the
individual Subcontractor.
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
G. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and
materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his
own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all
times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means.
H. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed
under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and Specifications and
shall field verify all existing conditions before ordering any materials and the installation of work.
Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work.
1.07 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be U.S. made,
new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly
in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturers
for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there
are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their
requirements and be so labeled.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Fire Protection Subcontractor shall submit to the
Architect eight (8) sets of catalogue cuts or manufacturers' data sheets, giving all details,
dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished.
B. Submit hydraulic calculations and scaled layout drawings for fire protection pipe and fittings includ-
ing, but not necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, locations,elevations and slopes of horizontal
runs, wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatial relationship between
piping and proximate equipment.
1. Shop drawings are subject to review and will require approval by Owner's insurer's rating
organization and the Northampton Fire Department prior to submitting to the Architect for
approval.
C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check the shop drawings thoroughly for compliance with
the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all
changes which may be required.
D. The review of shop drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Fire Protection Subcontractor
from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and
Specifications. The responsibility for errors in shop drawings shall remain with the individual
Subcontractor.
E. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which shop drawings
or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the
Fire Protection Subcontractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved
materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect.
F. Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work which indicates that work has been
tested in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13, and also that system is operational, complete, and has
no defects.
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts Dec -), 1996
I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tes A by a
qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in acco vith the
General Requirements.
1.05 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the chusetts
State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Node and local rules,
regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Docun, conflict
with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requi cents are
in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall gover, :nless the
Architect rules otherwise.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall comply with the i.ocai Code Enforcement Officials'
instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. Review proposed system with said officials prior
to commencing work.
1.06 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a
regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and
supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project
who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Fire Protection
Subcontractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or
replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins.
C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the
building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors' work resulting from the
execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the
extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Fire Protection Subcontractor, it is agreed between
the Owner and the Fire Protection Subcontractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be
finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the
Contract for the work in question.
D. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order
to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials
as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The
Fire Protection Subcontractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc.,
hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on
the part of the Fire Protection Subcontractor to give proper information as above, be will be
required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the drawings is
diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the
building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Fire Protection
Subcontractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at
the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. In no case shall piping be
installed laterally in thickness of slab or deck.
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching.
Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit,and cable runs shall be performed
by the Subcontractor installing such items. All piping shall be installed concealed in finished
spaces.
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
2. Cutting and patching.
1.03 SYSTEM DESIGN
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform a water flow test, and with this information, shall
calculate pipe sizes and sprinkler head configuration and orifice sizes in accordance with NFPA 13.
B. Sprinkler head and pipe run locations, as shown on the drawings, are to be interpreted as
diagrammatic only. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall produce a design based on actual
available water pressure and submit it to the Architect for approval before beginning fabrication and
installation.
C. Design Criteria: Pipe sizing and sprinkler head layout shown on the drawings is provided to
indicate a suggested pipe routing, zoning, and sprinkler head location, and shall not be used for
estimating purposes. Location of piping and heads shall be co-ordinated with all other trades.
Actual pipe sizing, types of heads, and layout shall be based on a hydraulically designed system in
accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13, the Northampton Fire Department, and the
Insurance Underwriter. Location of sprinkler heads, in relation to the ceilings and walls and
spacing of the heads, shall not exceed that permitted by NFPA 13 of the light hazard occupancy
(ordinary hazard occupancies in Boiler Room, Apparatus Room, etc.) The Fire Protection
Subcontractor shall prepare working drawings and hydraulic calculations per NFPA 13 and shall
obtain Northampton Fire Department and Insurance Underwriter approval prior to start of work.
The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform water flow tests or obtain water flow data in
writing from local authority. Co-ordinate work of this Section with all trades to avoid interference
with ductwork, HVAC and plumbing, piping, electrical work, structure, etc. Final sprinkler head
locations shall be subject to Architect's approval. The number of heads and pipe sizes may be
increased or reduced due to hydraulic calculations or the installation of revised heads, provided the
revised heads are UL listed and F.M. approved and meet NFPA 13, Northampton Fire Department,
and Insurance Underwriter's criteria. Additionally,all heads shall be in accordance with NFPA 13
recommendations.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fire protection piping systems products,
of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than five (5) years.
B. NFPA Code: Comply with ANSI/NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler System".
C. FM Compliance: Comply with Factory Mutual "Approval Guide".
D. FM Labels: Provide sprinkler products bearing FM approval labels.
E. UL Labels: Provide fire sprinkler piping products which have been approved and labeled by
Underwriters Laboratories.
F. Local Fire Department/Marshall Regulations: Comply with governing regulations pertaining to fire
sprinkler piping. Review proposed system with said officials prior to commencing work.
G. Final installation of system is subject to approval by Owner's insurer's rating organization and local
Fire Department.
H. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be
determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that substitutions
will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in the product specification.
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts De, 1996
SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION
(FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,applicable parts of Diva; n 1, and
conditions of the Contract as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work u,,der this
Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section.
Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, appurtenances and services necessary for, and reasonably incidental to,
the complete installation of all fire protection work specified herein and/or indicated on the
drawings, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Fire protection service piping from site piping to building entrance.
2. Provide and install double check valve backflow preventer assembly per DEP requirements.
3. Wet pipe alarm check valve stations complete with, but not necessarily limited to, line size
valve, retarding chamber, electric and hydraulic alarms, full indicating,control,drain trim,
and excess pressure pump.
4. Complete wet pipe automatic sprinkler system. System shall be installed in all spaces,
unless otherwise noted, with Fire Department connection and system test and drain
connections.
5. Complete dry pipe automatic sprinkler system. System shall be installed in all spaces,
unless otherwise noted, complete with alarm check valve, electric and hydraulic alarms,
bull indicating controls, accelerator, maintenance compressor and all required supervisor
switches.
6. Sprinkler heads shall be centered in ceiling tiles. Main, cross main, and branch piping
shall be installed above ceiling, and all pendant heads shall be concealed type.
7. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall furnish all labor and materials required for his own
hoisting, rigging, and scaffolding during the entire course of the project.
B. Refer to appropriate Division 2 Sections for trenching and backfill required in conjunction with fire
protection piping; not work of this Section.
C. Related work, to be performed under other sections of this Specification shall include the following:
1. Wiring of flow switches, tamper switches, electric bell, etc. back to the panel shall be by
the Electrical Subcontractor, co-ordinated and as directed by the Fire Protection
Subcontractor.
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Temporary Use: Do not use elevators for construction purposes unless cars are provided with
temporary enclosures, either within finished cars or in place of finished cars, to protect finishes from
damage.
1. Provide full maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of the elevator Installer for
elevators used for construction purposes. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement
of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper
elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Use parts and supplies as used in the
manufacture and installation of original equipment.
2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect elevators.
If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore
damaged work so that no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be
refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new
units as required.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to elevator manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure elevators are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial
Completion.
3.6 HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATOR SCHEDULE
1. Type: Holeless single-acting, beside-the-car, single cylinder.
2. Rated Load: 3500 lb.
3. Rated Speed: 150 ft./min.
4. Car Enclosures: As follows:
a. Inside Dimensions: As follows:
1) Width: 80 inches.
2) Depth: 65 inches.
3) Height: Manufacturers standard
END OF SECTION 14240
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240- 8
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 1,,
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Align plunger cylinders and fill space between casings with fine sand.
C. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work bolted
connocti ns are not requited for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustmen. -ection,
maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for workman. and for
qualifications of welding operators.
D. Coordination: Coordinate elevator work with work of other trades for proper time and s: {uence to
avoid construction delays: Use established bench_n,arIks, liu,es, and levels to ensure d..nensional
coordination of the Work.
E. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts designed to
effectively prevent transmission of vibrations to siracrure and thereby, elimi arP s.,ueees o:structure-
borne noise from elevator system.
F. Install piping above the floor, where possible. Where not possible, cover underground piping with
permanent protective wrapping before backfilling.
G. Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, if any, as recommended by manufacturers.
H. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for
accurate alignment of entrances with cars. Where possible, delay installation of sills and frames until
car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each landing.
I. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch, up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel.
J. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landings. Fill space under sills solidly with nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Acceptance Testing: Upon nominal completion of elevator installation, and before permitting use
(either temporary or permanent) of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by
the "Code" and by governing regulations and agencies.
B. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times tests are to
be performed on elevators.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper use, operations, and daily maintenance of elevators. Review
emergency provisions, including emergency access and procedures to be followed at time of failure in
operation and other building emergencies. Train Owner's personnel in procedures to follow in
identifying sources of operational failures or malfunctions. Confer with Owner on requirements for a j
complete elevator maintenance program.
B. Make a final check of each elevator operation with Owner's personnel present and just prior to date of
Substantial Completion. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly.
3.5 PROTECTION
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 -7
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Enameled Steel Panels: Flush hollow-metal construction, fabricated from ASTM A 366 cold-
rolled steel, commercial quality, Class 1, matte finish, stretcher leveled. Provide with factory- "'
applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect.
2. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of car.
3. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment.
4. Luminous Ceiling: Fluorescent light fixtures and ceiling panels of translucent acrylic or other
permanent rigid plastic complying with flammability requirements.
5. Handrails: Provide manufacturer's standard stainless-steel handrails on side walls and back
wall, unless otherwise indicated.
2.8 PASSENGER HOISTWAY ENTRANCES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hollow-metal, sliding, door-and-frame hoistway entrances
complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Match car doors for size, number of
panels, and door movement. Provide frame size and profile to coordinate with boistway wall
construction.
B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide selections indicated; provide manufacturer's standards, but not less
than the following:
1. Enameled Frames: Formed steel with manufacturer's standard synthetic-enamel finish, colors as
selected by Architect.
2. Enameled Steel Panels: Flush construction, fabricated from ASTM A 366 cold-rolled steel,
commercial quality, Class 1, matte finish, stretcher leveled. Provide with factory-applied
enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect.
3. Aluminum Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thickness, mill
finish.
4. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous
grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer
for grouting door sills and similar applications.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements, installation
tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of elevator work. Examine hoistways, hoistway
openings, pits, and machine rooms, as constructed; verify critical dimensions; and examine supporting
structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
B. Install plunger cylinders in protective cylinder casings (second casings) installed within well casings.
Fill void spaces between cylinder casings and cylinders with corrosion protective filler. A"k
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Mount controls as shown or scheduled and at heights complying with ADA Accessibility
Guidelines.
C. Telephone: Provide rough-in for telephone handset in each car, contained in flush-mounted cabinet and
complete with identification and instructions for use.
D. Car Position Indicator: For passenger elevator cars, provide either illuminated-signal type, digital-
display type, or segmented type, located above the car door or above the car control station. Also
provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each of the
floors served.
1. Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car control station.
E. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide 1 hall push-button station at each landing for each elevator.
1. Provide units with flat faceplate designed for mounting on wall with body of units recessed in
wall: 2-button stations at intermediate landings; 1-button stations with direction indication at
terminal landings.
F. Hall Lanterns: Provide units with illuminated arrows, but provide single arrow at terminal landings.
Match materials, finishes, and mounting method of hall push-button stations.
1. Provide units projecting from faceplates for ease of angular viewing.
2. Place lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance, unless otherwise shown. Mount at
minimum of 72 inches above finished floor.
3. With each lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of travel. Signals
sound once for up and twice for down.
2.6 DOOR SAFETY DEVICES
A. Door Edge Device: Provide retractable edge shoes on elevator entrance doors that cause doors to stop
and reopen upon contacting an obstruction.
B. Photo-Eye Device: Provide electronic photo-eye device with timed cutout, projecting dual-light beams
across car entrance at 5-inch and 29-inch heights, that when interrupted cause doors to stop and reopen.
2.7 PASSENGER ELEVATOR CAR ENCLOSURES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard car enclosures of the selections indicated. Include
ventilation, lighting, access doors, doors, power door operators, sills (thresholds), trim, accessories,
and wall and ceiling finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard flush-panel horizontal-sliding doors of
type indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard protective edge trim system for door and wall panels,
except as otherwise indicated.
1. Floor finish is specified in another Section.
B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide selections indicated for each car enclosure surface; provide
manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for installing
guide rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work where installation of devices is specified
in another Specification Section.
F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785.
1. Fittings for PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2466.
2. Solvent Cement for PVC Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2564.
G. Car Frame and Platform: Welded steel units.
2.3 OPERATION SYSTEMS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system for each elevator or group
of elevators of the type of operation indicated.
B. Single Elevator--Passenger: Provide "Selective-Collective Automatic Operation" as defined in
ASME A17.1.
2.4 AUXILIARY OPERATIONS
A. General: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the following operational features
for passenger elevators, except where otherwise indicated.
B. Security Features: In addition to above operational features, provide the following security features for
passenger elevators, except where otherwise indicated. Security features shall not affect emergency
firefighters' service.
1. Keyswitch operation feature with car and hall push buttons activated and deactivated by security
keyswitches. Key is removable only in the deactivated position.
2.5 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide signal equipment for each elevator complying with requirements indicated below.
1. Illuminated hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has
been fulfilled. Fabricate of acrylic or other permanent translucent plastic.
2. Except for buttons and illuminated elements, fabricate signal equipment with exposed surfaces as
follows:
a. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel.
b. Hall Fixtures: Satin stainless steel.
B. Car Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard semirecessed car control station in each car.
Include call buttons for each landing served and other buttons, switches, and controls required for
specified car operation. Provide operating device symbols as required by the "Code." Mark other
buttons and switches with manufacturer's standard identification for required use or function. Mount
in return panel adjacent to car door, if not otherwise indicated.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Standard Elevator Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by manufacturer ag :o repair,
restore, or replace defective elevator work within the specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 12 months from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 s x aths' full
maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of the elevator Installer. Incline monthly
preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication,cleaning,
and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Use parts and
supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.
1. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hydraulic elevators by one of the
following:
1. Dover Elevator Corp. - Seville-HLS-35.
2. Montgomery Elevator Co. MX, Series 3500#Capacity
3. Otis Elevator Co. LRV Hudraulic, 3500#Capacity
4. Schindler Elevator Corp. Expression, 3500#Capacity.
2.2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Where components are not otherwise
indicated, provide standard components, published by manufacturer as included in standard
preengineered elevator systems and as required for a complete system.
B. Hydraulic Machines and Elevator Equipment: Provide hydraulic plunger-cylinder units of type
indicated below,with electric pump-tank-control system equipment in machine room as indicated.
1. Hydraulic Machines: Holeless single-acting, beside-the-car, hydraulic plunger-cylinder units.
2. Pump Unit: Positive displacement pump with a maximum of 10 percent variation between no
load and full load and fan-cooled squirrel cage induction motor.
a. Provide motor with wye-delta starting.
C. Power Supply: 208 V, 60 Hz, 3 phase.
D. Piping: Provide size, type, and weight piping recommended by manufacturer, and provide isolation
couplings to prevent sound/vibration transmissions from power unit.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240- 3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Defective Elevator Work: Ope ration or controls stem failures;
y performances below specified ratings;
excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; the need for
excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and
unsatisfactory conditions.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each elevator including capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features,
controls, finishes, and similar information.
C. Shop Drawings for each elevator showing plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating
service at each landing, coordination with building structure, and relationships with other construction.
Indicate variations from specified requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on
building structure at points of support, and locations of signals. Include maximum and average power
demands.
D. Samples of exposed finishes for car, hoistway doors, and signal equipment; 3-inch square samples of
sheet materials; and 4-inch lengths of running trim members.
E. Maintenance manuals for each different hydraulic elevator, including operation and maintenance
instructions, parts listing with sources indicated, recommended parts inventory listing, emergency
instructions, and similar information. Include all diagnostic and repair information available to
manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance personnel. Submit for Owner's information at project
closeout as specified in Division 1.
F. Inspection and acceptance certificates and operating permits as required by governing authorities for
normal, unrestricted elevator use.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage the elevator manufacturer or an experienced Installer approved by the
elevator manufacturer who has completed elevator installations similar in material, design, and extent
to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Regulatory Requirements: In addition to local governing regulations, comply with the applicable
provisions of the following:
1. ASME A17.1, "Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators," referred to as the "Code."
a. Seismic Zone: Comply with code requirements for seismic risk zone 2.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The elevator warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other
rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition „,*Ak
to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 14240-HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
(FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Hydraulic Elevators is stipulated as a Filed Sub-Bid under Paragraph D, Item 2 of the Form For
General Bid.
B. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the Form For Sub-Bid furnished by the Awarding Authority, as
required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. The time and place for
submission of Filed Sub-Bids are set forth in the Invitation To Bid.
C. The work to be done under this section is shown on Drawings numbered : T1, L1-L5, S1-S8, A1-A16,
FP1-FP4, P1-P4, H1-116, SE1, E1-E6
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Hydraulic passenger elevators.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices
in concrete.
2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in
masonry.
3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for hot-rolled steel subsills.
4. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for pit ladders.
5. Division 9 Sections for finish flooring in elevator cars.
6. Division 15 Sections for ventilating hoistways and machine rooms.
7. Division 16 Sections for electrical service to elevators, including fused disconnect switches,
standby power source, and transfer switch.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Hydraulic Elevators: Elevators in which cars are hoisted either directly or indirectly by action of a
hydraulic plunger and cylinder (jack); with other compmeaU of tha.Work, including fluid storage tank,
pump, piping, valves, car enclosures, hoistway entrances, operation systems, signal equipment, guide
rails, electrical wiring, roping (roped hydraulic applications), buffers, and devices for operations,
safety, security, required performance at rated speed and capacity, and for complete elevator
installation.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240- 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify that materials are those specified before installing.
B. Install accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
C. Wall-Mounted Accessory Units: Install accessories complying with manufacturer's printed instruction,
using fasteners as recommended by manufacturer as appropriate to substrate.
D. Adjust accessory items for proper operation. Clean and polish exposed surfaces, using materials and
methods recommended by the manufacturer.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect accessories against damage during remainder of construction period, complying with
manufacturer's directions.
END OF SECTION 12900
BUILDING ACCESSORIES 12900-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December
Northampton, Massachusetts
unacceptable. Provide products with smooth welds, consistent finish with no evide akling,
chipping, uneven coloration, dents, or other imperfections.
2.4 HOSE TOWER HOIST
A. Furnish and install one free standing power operated fire hose drying assembly as m_ ufi,tured by
Tiger Hose Towers(proprietary)
1. Model B-Medium: fifty hose capacity rack trolley, with 16 inch diameter stanchion 30 feet high
and 6 inch I beam track on front of stanchion for hose rack trolley. Unit to include twenty-five
foot chain hoist with all components, and model EC 4016 Coffmg 2 hp 3 phase 208/220 volt
moter.
2. A-36 Structural shapes and miscellaneous steel, A500 grade C FY 50KSI tubualr sued members,
A307 bolts or equivalent.
3. Factory Finish: one coat red oxide primer, one coat machine enamel 2 mil thick. Color as
selected by architect.
4. Installation: Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's instruction. Manufacturer's
representative to be present during installation to assure proper assembly and operation
B. The Fire Station Building Committee has voted to accept the tiger hose tower as a sole source item
(proprietary) since it offers the safest and most convenient method known for loading hose drying at
floor level and the committee considers it to be in the best interest of the city to do so.
2.5 AUTOMATIC BRASS FIRE POLE
A. Provide complete system as manufactured by McIntyre Brass Works, (or an approved equal)
including:
1. Chrome plated brass guard rail cage and and quick opening gate.
2. Brass floor ring with stainless steel cylinder.
3. Aluminum shutters.
4. 2-inch-thick sponge rubber floor mat 32-inch diameter.
5. 2 1/2-inch diameter poliched brass pole.
6. Wall brace for top bracing
2.6 OUTDOOR WALL-MOUNT BASKETBALL SYSTEM
A. Provide completed system including:
1. Heavy duty galvanized pipe support system, desired to support backboard 4' 0" from wall.
2. Official size direct-mount aluminum blackbomd, white powder coat finish with orange
markings.
3. Heavy-duty playground goal and net.
2.7 FINISHES
A. Provide materials in colors and finishes as seceded by A=hitert `rom manufacturer's standard colors
and finishes.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
BUILDING ACCESSORIES 12900 -3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Sequence accessory installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during
remainder of construction period.
1.7 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's printed instructions for maintenance of installed
work, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition under
anticipated use conditions. Include precautions against materials and method which may be detrimental
to finishes and performance.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Hose Tower Hoist: Tiger Hose Towers, PO Box 60213, Bakersfield, CA 93386, telephone
800-542-3481 (a proprietary item).
2. Fire Pole: McIntyre Brass Works 5888 (or an approved equal)
3. Basketball System: Porter Equipment Co., Nisson Corporation, AALCO Manufacturing Co.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, minimum 22 gage, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Brass: Solid, polished, flat products, FS QQ-B-613; rods, shapes, and forgings, FS QQ-B-626.
C. Aluminum: Alloy and temper as recommended by aluminum fabricator, ASTM B 209 for plate and
sheet, ASTM B 26 for castings.
D. Sheet Steel: Cold rolled, commercial quality, ASTM A 366, minimum 20 gage unless otherwise
indicated. Surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish.
E. Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A 527 G60.
F. Galvanized iron and Steep Shapes: ASTM A 123-89a.
G. Chrome Plating: Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on base metal, ASTM B 456, Type SC 2.
H. Painted Finish: Baked acrylic enamel coating.
I. Fasteners: Screws, bolts or other exposed devices of same material as accessory unit, or of galvanized
steel where concealed.
2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Provide accessory items, equipped with functions as specified. Fabricate units with tight seams and
joints, exposed metal edges rolled. Manufacturer or product identification on exposed surfaces is
BUILDING ACCESSORIES 12900-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 12900-BUILDING ACCESSORIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following:
1. Hose tower hoist
2. Fire pole
3. Outdoor wall-mount basketball system
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for each type of accessory specified, with installation instructions for each unit built-in or
connected to other construction. Include methods of installation for each type of substrate.
B. Shop drawings showing installation details of accessories permanently affixed to construction,
including full scale installation details of special conditions.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm (material producer) with not less than 3 years of production
experience, whose published literature clearly indicates general compliance of products with
requirements of this section.
B. Single Source Responsibility: Provide material produced by a single manufacturer for each accessory
type.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers, clearly labeled with
identification of manufacturer, brand name, and lot number. Store materials in original undamaged
packages and containers, inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme
temperatures, humidity; laid flat, blocked off ground to prevent sagging and warping.
B. Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer for special delivery, storage, and
handling requirements.
1.6 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING
BUILDING ACCESSORIES 12900 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install blinds level, plumb, and located so exterior louver edges in any position are not closer than 1
inch to interior face of glass lites.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust components and accessories for proper operation.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean blind surfaces, according to manufacturer's instructions, after installation.
B. Remove surplus materials, packaging, rubbish, and debris resulting from installation. Leave
installation areas neat, clean, and ready for use.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer
that ensure that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION 12511
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12511 -4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Cord-Lock Operation: Cord lock; locks pull cord to stop blind at any position ing or
descending travel.
1. Position of Cord Lock: Right side, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Cord Equalizers: Self-aligninng to maintain horizontal louver blind position.
E. Valance: Match color of louvers.
F. Mounting: End.
G. Colors and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are :y:1icated, provide horizontai louvers
complying with the following requirements:
1. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns for
horizontal louver blinds of type indicated.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Product Standard and Description: Comply with AWCMA Document 1029 for each horizontal louver
blind unit consisting of louvers, rails, cord locks, tilting mechanisms, tapes, and installation hardware.
B. Lifting and Tilting Mechanisms: Noncorrosive, self-lubricating materials.
C. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at
74 deg F:
1. Blind Units Installed Between (Inside) Jambs: Width equal to 1/4 inch per side or 1/2 inch
total, plus or minus 1/8 inch, less than jamb to jamb dimension of opening in which each blind
is installed. Length equal to 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch, less than head to sill dimension
of opening in which each blind is installed.
2. Blind Units Installed Outside Jambs: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between
blinds of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations
between openings.
D. Installation Fasteners: Not less than 2 fasteners with lead sleeves for mounting into CMU above per
bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to blind hardware and adjoining construction; support
blind units under conditions of normal use.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of horizontal louver blinds. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12511 -3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Test Method: NFPA 701.
2. Rating: Pass. •sR
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of horizontal louver blind from one source and by a
single manufacturer.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual horizontal louver blind dimensions by accurate field measurements
before fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
B. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until space is
enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is
complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at
values near those indicated for final occupancy.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Horizontal Louver Blinds:
a. Eastern Standard Corp.
b. Faber.
C. Hunter Douglas, Inc.
d. Joanna Western Mills Co.
e. Kirsch.
f. Levolor Corp.
g. Louverdrape, Inc.
h. Nanik.
i. Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc.; (Bali-Graber).
j. Verosol USA, Inc.
2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
A. Louvers: Manufacturer's standard as follows:
1. Aluminum.
2. Nominal Louver Width: 1 inch(miniblinds).
B. Tilt Operation: Manual with wand.
1. Length of Tilt Control: Full length of blind.
2. Position of Tilt Control: Left side, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Tilt: Full.
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12511 -2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 12511 -HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes venetian blinds. (Note: Provide blinds on doors where indicated)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of horizontal louver blind specified. Include printed data on physical
characteristics.
Ao ,, C. Shop drawings showing location and extent of blinds. Show installation details at and relationship to
adjoining work. Include elevations indicating blind units. Indicate location of blind controls.
D. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors,
textures, and patterns available for each type of horizontal louver blind indicated.
E. Samples for verification of the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes, showing the full
range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare samples from the same material to be
used for the Work.
1. Louver: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, not less than 12 inches long.
F. Schedule of horizontal louver blinds using same room designations indicated on Drawings.
G. Maintenance data for horizontal louver blinds to include in the operation and maintenance manual
specified in Division 1. Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining horizontal louver blinds and finishes.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and
performance.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide horizontal louver blinds identical to those tested for the
following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by UL or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12511 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
a! !" F. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front style, cove, and backsplash style:
1. Front Style: Self-edge.
2. Cove: Applied.
3. Backsplash and Endsplash Style: Square edge with scribe.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install casework with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces using concealed shims. Where
casework abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips,
and moldings in finish to match casework face.
B. Install casework without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are aligned.
Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation.
Complete the installation of hardware and accessories as indicated.
C. Install casework and countertop level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet.
D. Fasten unit of casework to adjacent unit and into structural support members of wall construction with
#10 sheet metal or wood screws with washer head or washer.
E. Fasten plastic laminate countertops by screwing through comer blocks in base units into underside of
countertop. Spline and glue joints in countertops and provide concealed mechanical clamping of joint.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and lubricate to provide unencumbered
operation.
B. Clean casework on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore
damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 12372
KITCHEN CASEWORK 12372 -5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Sides, Dividers, Tops, Bottoms, Shelves, and Stretchers: Plastic laminate GP 28 on 1/2-inch-thick
particleboard. Provide stretchers for top of base cabinet.
E. Back Panels: 1/8-inch-thick hardboard with thermoset decorative panels on interior surfaces fastened to
rear edge of end panels and to top and bottom rails.
F. Exposed Edge Treatment: Edge doors and drawer fronts with plastic laminate of same material as
exposed faces.
G. Semi-Exposed Edge Treatment: Edge top of drawer body with high-impact plastic tee edging. Edge
remaining casework surfaces with plastic laminate GP 28 matching adjoining plastic laminate in color,
pattern, and finish.
H. Doors, Drawer Fronts, Fixed Panels, Toeboards, and Ends: Plastic laminate GP 28 on 5/8-inch thick
particleboard.
I. Drawers: Fabricate with front, bottom, and back rabbeted in sides and secured with glue and
mechanical fasteners as follows:
1. Subfronts, Sides, and Backs: 3/8-inch-thick particleboard.
2. Bottoms: Not less than 1/4-inch-thick particleboard.
3. Drawer Suspension: Provide for a minimum capacity of 50 lbf, with twin-track, full extension,
side-mounted, drawer-glide suspension with nylon rollers. Provide self-closing feature and
positive stop.
J. Joinery: Rabbet backs flush into end panels and secure with concealed mechanical fasteners. Connect
tops and bottoms of wall cabinets and bottoms and stretchers of base cabinets to ends and dividers with
mechanical fasteners. Rabbet tops, bottoms, and backs into end panels.
K. Door and drawer pulls: 3 1/2-inch wire pulls, US26D finish.
2.4 CASEWORK HARDWARE
A. General: Manufacturer's standard units complying with ANSI A156.9, of type, material, size, and
finish as selected from manufacturer's standard choices.
2.5 COUNTERTOPS, PLASTIC LAMINATE
A. General: Comply with ANSI A161.2.
B. Plastic Laminate Substrate: Comply with ASTM D 1037.
1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: Comply with ANSI A208.2, not less than 3/4 inch thick.
C. Plastic Laminate Substrate for Countertop with Sink: Exterior grade plywood or phenolic resin
particleboard complying with ASTM D 1037.
D. Backer Sheet: Provide BK 20 backer sheet.
E. Countertop, Backsplash, and Endsplash Plastic Laminate: GP 50.
KITCHEN CASEWORK 12372 -4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Kitchen Casework:
a. Imperial Cabinet Co., Inc.
b. Merillat Ind., Inc.
C. Triangle Pacific Corp.
d. Yorktowne Cabinets.
2. Plastic Laminate for Countertops:
a. Abet Lamnnat Inc.
b. Formica Corp.
C. Laminart.
d. Nevamar Corp.
e. Pioneer Plastics Corp., Pionite.
f. Westinghouse Electric Corp., Micarta Div.
g. Wilson Plastics Co., Wilsonart.
2.2 CABINET MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Sizes, dimensions, and thicknesses given are minimum dimensions.
B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, mat-formed particleboard, Grade 1-M-2 with minimum density of 40
pcf, internal bond of 60 psi, and minimum screw-holding capacity of 225 lbs. on faces and 200 lbs. on
edges.
C. Hardwood Plywood: ANSI/HPMA HP hardwood and decorative plywood, Good Grade(1) or better.
D. Particleboard Core Plywood: ANSI/HPMA HP hardwood and decorative plywood, Good Grade (1) or
better.
E. Solid Wood: Clear, dry, sound, and free of defects selected from First Grade lumber as defined by
NHLA.
F. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, Class 1, tempered.
G. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3.
H. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Comply with ALA-1988 and NEMA LD 3 for GP 20; melamine or
polyester.
2.3 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACE CASEWORK
A. Face Style: Flush overlay.
B. Face Frame: Frameless.
C. Concealed Surfaces: Sound and dry solid wood, plywood, or particleboard without defects affecting
strength, utility, or stability.
KITCHEN CASEWORK 12372 -3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
F. Samples for initial selection purposes of manufacturer's color charts in the form of unit sections
showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated or
exposed to view.
G. Samples for verification purposes in full-size units of each type of material indicated; in sets for each
color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these
characteristics.
1. 12-inch-square samples of plastic laminate for countertops.
2. 12-inch-square samples of plastic laminate for casework finish.
3. One unit of each type of exposed hardware.
H. Product certificates signed by the manufacturer certifying that materials furnished comply with
specified requirements.
I. Maintenance data for kitchen casework to include in the "Operating and Maintenance Manual" specified
in Division 1.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Kitchen Casework: Comply with ANSI/KCMA A161.1 and HUD "Minimum Property Standards,"
Housing 4910.1, paragraph 611-1.1.
1. KCMA Certification: Provide kitchen casework with Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers
Association (KCMA) "Certified Cabinet" seal affixed in a semiexposed location of each unit,
showing compliance with above standard.
B. Plastic Laminate Countertops: Comply with ANSI A161.2.
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain kitchen casework from one source of a single manufacturer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver casework as factory-assembled units, packaged individually.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Comply with casework manufacturer's written requirements for
temperature and humidity conditions during storage and installation. Do not install casework until
these conditions have been attained and stabilized.
B. Field Measurements: Verify casework dimensions by field measurements. Verify kitchen casework
can be installed in compliance with the original design and referenced standards.
C. Field Measurements: Verify countertop size and shape prior to fabrication by field measurements taken
after base units are installed.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
KITCHEN CASEWORK 12372-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 12372-KITCHEN CASEWORK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes plastic-laminate-faced kitchen cabinets and countertops.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 11 Section "Residential Appliances" for appliances mounted in kitchen casework.
2. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for sink units mounted in countertops.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Surfaces: Surfaces visible when drawers and opaque doors are closed; behind clear glass
doors; bottoms of casework 43 inches or more above finished floor.
B. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Surfaces which become visible when opaque doors are open or drawers are
extended; bottoms of casework are more than 30 inches and less than 42 inches above finished floor.
C. Concealed Surfaces: Surfaces considered concealed when surfaces not visible after installation; bottoms
of casework less than 30 inches above finished floor; tops of casework over 78 inches above finished
floor and not visible from an upper level; stretchers, blocking, and components concealed by drawers.
D. Flush Overlay: Door and drawer faces cover cabinet frame with space between faces sufficient for
operating clearance.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each casework type specified.
C. Product data for each hardware type specified.
D. Shop drawings for casework showing location and size, accessories, materials, finishes, and filler
panels. Include fully dimensioned plans, elevations, and anchorage details to countertop and walls.
E. Shop drawings for countertops showing sizes, shapes, edge and backsplash profiles, cutouts for
plumbing fixtures, and methods of joining.
KITCHEN CASEWORK 12372 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Gas Clothes Dryer: Provide freestanding, front-loading clothes dryer. 20,000 Btu/hr heat input, 16 lb
minimum capacity; automatic electric ignition; timed cycle selection, fabric selector switch, cycle-end
signal, and safety starting control; removable lint filter.
1. Finish: Porcelain enamel on steel.
2. Manufacturer: Equal to G.E. DPSQ495GT.
2.8 FINISHES
A. General: Provide the manufacturer's standard white porcelain enamel finish.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
B. Built-In Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed
fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are
completely concealed.
C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area.
Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.
D. Utilities: Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for plumbing and electrical requirements.
3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Testing: Test each item of residential equipment to verify proper operation. Make necessary
adjustments.
B. Accessories: Verify that accessory items required have been furnished and installed.
C. Cleaning: Remove packing material from residential equipment items and leave units in clean
condition, ready for operation.
END OF SECTION 11452
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11452 -6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
insulation blanket around tub and back to reduce noise. Include soft food disposer and self-cleaning
food filter system.
1. Tub and Door Liner: Provide dishwasher with porcelain enamel tub and molded plastic door
liner.
a. Detergent Dispenser: Provide sealed detergent dispenser and automatic rinsing-aid
dispenser in the door liner.
2. Wash Cycles: Provide dishwasher unit with normal wash, light (low-energy) wash, and rinse-
and-hold wash cycles.
3. Dry Cycles: Provide dishwasher unit with hot-air dry and energy-saving, heat-off, drying
cycles.
4. Control Type: Solid-state electronic, press-to-start type.
5. Finish: Provide the manufacturer's standard, reversible panels, with choice of colors for door
front and lower access panel.
6. Manufacturer: Equal to G.E. GSD4430XWW
2.6 CLOTHES WASHERS
A. Clothes Washers: Provide freestanding, automatic, top-loading clothes washer, operable at water
pressures from 30 to 120 psi. Provide multi-vane agitator with minimum 200 deg arc sweep. Include
automatic bleach and fabric dispensers, self-cleaning lint filter, and unbalanced load compensator.
Provide minimum 60 inches inlet hose and 48 inches drain hose lengths. Provide washer with self-
leveling rear legs.
1. Tub: Provide perforated porcelain enamel tub with not less than 2.3 cu. ft. capacity.
2. Controls: Provide clothes washer controls for adjustable, metered water fill levels, wash/rinse
water temperatures, and variable-speed cycle/fabric selectors.
a. Wash Cycles: Provide clothes washer unit with regular, delicate, and permanent press
wash cycles. Total wash cycles- 16.
b. Wash Temperature: Provide five wash/rinse water temperature control settings.
C. Control Type: Solid-state electronic, press-to-start type.
3. Options: Provide clothes washers with the following optional accessories:
a. Removable lint filter.
b. Bleach and fabric softener dispensers.
C. Spin cycle safety switch.
4. Motor: Provide minimum 1/3 hp, permanently lubricated, single-speed, reversible motor with
built-in thermal overload protector.
5. Finish: Porcelain enamel finish on washer top and lid. Baked enamel finish on washer front
and sides.
6. Manufacturer: Equal to G.E. WPSQ4160T
2.7 CLOTHES DRYERS
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11452-5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Ventilating Exhaust Hood: Provide 30 inch hood for mounting below wall cabinets, with two-speed
fan rated at 160 cfm minimum, permanent washable filter, and built-in lighting. Include exhaust duct
and wall or roof cap and shutter.
1. Duct Type: 3-1/4 x 10 inch rectangular.
2. Fan Exhaust: Vertical exhaust only.
3. Fan Control: Electronic touch control.
4. Finish: Baked Enamel.
5. Oven Cavity: 1.1 cu. ft.
6. Oven Rating: 850 watts.
7. Oven Controls: Electronic Tough Control
8. Power Levels: 10.
B. Manufacturer: Equal to G.E. JVM260WV
2.4 REFRIGERATOR/FREEZERS
A. Side-By-Side Refrigerator/Freezer: Provide a freestanding, frost-free, two-door, side-by-side model
refrigerator/freezer on adjustable rollers, with five shelves minimum in each door.
1. Capacity: Provide the following minimum values, measured according to ANSI/AHAM HRF-1
and certified by AHAM:
a. Total volume: 26.6 cu. ft.
b. Refrigerator volume: 16.9 cu. ft.
C. Total shelf area: 28.4 sq. ft.
2. Energy Consumption: Measured and certified at not more than 3.0 kWh/day under average
conditions.
3. Temperature Controls: Include separate temperature controls for each compartment and a switch
for condensation-control heating element at the freezer opening.
4. Storage Features: Provide the following standard storage features:
a. Adjustable glass interior cabinet shelves.
b. Vegetable crisper.
C. Butter conditioning compartment.
d. Removable egg trays.
e. Two ice cube trays.
5. Optional Accessories: Provide refrigerator/freezers with the following additional features:
a. Porcelain enamel interior lining.
6. Manufacturer: Equal to G.E. TFX 27PFX
2.5 DISHWASHERS
A. Built-In Dishwasher: Provide under-the-counter automatic dishwasher sized to replace 24 inch base
cabinet. Dishwasher shall be operable at water pressures from 15 to 120 psi and shall not require more
than 12.0 gal of water for normal wash cycle. Provide two wash levels. Include full-extension, vinyl-
coated upper and lower dish racks and removable silverware basket. Provide sound-absorbing exterior
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11452 -4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. General Electric Company.
3. Hotpoint.
4. Kitchen Aid, Inc.
5. Maytag Company.
6. Whirlpool Corporation.
2.2 GAS RANGES
A. Built-In Gas Range: Provide 30 inch wide, slide-in, gas range with four-burner cooktop, ovwr. broiler,
and combination surface burner and oven control panel monnt°a ab^-P the oven door in front of the
eookiLg slurf€ae- P*^virlr foil, adjustable leveling legs.
B. Built-In Gas Range: Provide 30 inch wide, drop-in, gas range with four-burner cooktop, oxen, and
combination surface burner and oven control panel mounted above the oven door in front of the
cooking surface.
1. Cooktop Type: Provide recessed cooktop with surface burners sealed into the cooktop sarface.
a. Cooktop Surface: Tempered white ceramic glass.
1) Clock Type: Digital.
b. Burner Type: Provide two 9500 Btu/hr burners one 12,000 Btu/hr, One 5,000 Btu/hr
with removable porcelainized steel grates and pilotless ignition system.
2. Oven: Provide oven with 16,000 Btu/hr oven burner and 16,000 Btu/hr broiler burner. Include
porcelain enamel interior; interior oven light; four rack levels; two removable, tilt-proof,
chrome-plated, self-locking racks; and a two-piece, porcelain enamel broiler pan. Provide
counterbalanced, gasketed, removable oven door with a towel-bar handle.
a. Oven Type: Self-cleaning.
b. Oven Door Type: White glass with observation window.
C. Broiler Type: Waist-level broiler in the oven.
3. Control Panel: Provide combined, surface burner and oven control panel.
a. Control Panel Material: Porcelain enamel.
b. Controls: Push-to-turn type with removable knobs.
C. Controls: Solid-state electronic, touch type for oven.
4. Storage Drawer: Provide removable, full-width storage drawer below oven.
a. Storage Drawer Front Panel: Porcelain enamel.
5. Trim: Provide the manufacturer's standard, optional, trim kit, including the following:
6. Manufacturer: Equal to G.E. JGP33WEV.
2.3 COMBINATION EXHAUST HOOD MICROWAVE OVEN
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11452 -3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. ARAM Standards: Provide appliances that conform to the following standards of the Association of
Home Appliance Manufacturers:
1. Refrigerators and Freezers: Total volume and shelf area ratings certified according to
ANSI/AHAM HRF-1.
E. Single-Source Responsibility:
1. Provide appliances by a single manufacturer for entire Project.
F. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of residential
appliances and are based on the specific types and models indicated. _ Appliances by other
manufacturers may be considered, provided deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not
change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the
proposer.
1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver appliances to the Project site in the manufacturer's undamaged protective packaging.
B. Delay delivery of appliances until utility rough-in is complete and construction in the spaces to receive
appliances is substantially complete and ready for installation.
1.6 WARRANTIES
A. Warranty: Submit written warranties executed by the manufacturer of each appliance specified agreeing
to repair or replace units or components that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified
warranty period.
1. All appliances not listed below: 1-year limited warranty
2. Electric Range: 4-year limited warranty on surface burner elements.
3. Microwave Oven: 9-year limited warranty on defects in the magnetron tube.
4. Refrigerator/Freezer: 5-year warranty on the sealed refrigeration system.
5. Dishwasher: 5-year warranty on the dishwasher motor and pump and 10-year warranty against
rust on stainless steel components.
6. Clothes Washer: 2-year warranty on the clothes washer and 10-year warranty on the inner wash
basket and washer transmission.
B. Warranties specified above shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other
provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other
warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide appliances by manufactured by one
of the following:
1. Frigidaire Appliance Company.
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11452-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 11452-RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of residential appliances:
1. Cooking equipment, including ranges and ovens.
2. Combination Range hood and microwave oven.
3. Refrigerator/freezers.
4. Dishwashers.
5. Clothes washers and dryers.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Kitchen sinks, are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures."
Iw 2. Plumbing connections for appliances are specified in Division 15.
3. Electrical services and connections for appliances are specified in Division 16.
4. Division 12 Section "Kitchen Casework"
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for each appliance type required indicating compliance with requirements, including
installation instructions. Provide complete operating and maintenance instructions for each appliance.
C. Schedule: Submit schedule of appliances, using the same room designations as shown on drawings.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Energy Ratings: Provide residential appliances that carry labels indicating energy cost analysis
(estimated annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by Federal Trade
Commission.
B. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part of residential appliances
that are listed and labeled by UL and comply with applicable NEMA standards.
C. AGA and ANSI Standards: Provide gas-burning appliances that carry the design certification seal of
the American Gas Association (AGA) and comply with ANSI Z21-Series standards.
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11452 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Framed Minor Units, General: Fabricate frames for glass mirror units to accommodate wood, felt,
plastic, or other glass edge protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system that will
permit rigid, tamperproof glass installation and prevent moisture accumulation, as follows:
1. Provide galvanized-steel backing sheet, not less than 0.034 inchand full mirror size, with
nonabsorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable filler material.
E. Minor Unit Hangers: Provide system for mounting mirror units that will permit rigid, tamperproof,
and theftproof installation, as follows:
1. One-piece, galvanized-steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism to hold
minor unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.
F. Keys: Provide universal keys for access to toilet accessory units requiring internal access for servicing,
resupply, etc. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install toilet accessory units according to manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners appropriate to
substrate as recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in
locations and at heights indicated.
B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws.
Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's instructions for
type of substrate involved.
C. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf(1100 N), complying with ASTM F
446.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace
damaged or defective items.
B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces strictly according to manufacturer's recommendations after
removing temporary labels and protective coatings.
END OF SECTION 10800
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Provide unit designed for mounting on vanity deck.
2. Equip unit with valve for dispensing soap in liquid form.
B. Liquid Soap Dispenser, Horizontal-Tank Type: Fabricate for surface mounting, sized for 40 fluid
ounce minimum capacity. Provide stainless steel piston, springs, and internal parts designed to
dispense soap in measured quantity by pump action. Provide cover of type 304 stainless steel in No. 4
finish, with unbreakable window-type refill indicator.
1. Equip unit with push-type valve for dispensing soap in liquid form.
2.8 SHOWER AND BATH ACCESSORIES
A. Shower Curtain Rod, Heavy-Duty: 1-1/4 inch o.d., 0.05 inch stainless steel, satin finish; furnish with
3 inch o.d., minimum 0.04 inch stainless steel flanges with satin finish, designed for exposed fasteners.
B. Soap Dish: Heavy-duty satin finish stainless steel surface mounted soap dish with drain holes;
rectangular wall bracket with backplate for concealed mounting.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
A. Mop and Broom Holder/Utility Shelf: Combination unit with 0.05 inch, Type 304, stainless steel shelf
with 1/2 inch returns, 0.062 inch support brackets for wall mounting. Provide 0.062 inch stainless
steel hooks for wiping rags on front of shelf, together with spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam-type
mop/broom holders; 1/4 inch diameter stainless steel drying rod suspended beneath shelf. Provide unit
length as shown. ,.,"
B. Double-Prong Robe Hook: Heavy-duty satin finished stainless steel double-prong robe hook;
rectangular wall bracket with backplate for concealed mounting.
2.10 MIRROR UNITS
A. Stainless Steel Framed Minor Units: Fabricate frame with angle shapes not less than 0.05 inch, with
square corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. Provide in No. 4 satin polished finish.
2.11 FABRICATION
A. General: Only a maximum 1-1/2 inch diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo, as approved
by Architect, is permitted on exposed face of toilet or bath accessory units. On either interior surface
not exposed to view or back surface, provide additional identification by either a printed, waterproof
label or a stamped nameplate, indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.
B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units with
tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous stainless
steel piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible.
C. Recessed Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all-welded
construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors or access panels with full-length, stainless steel
piano hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed. �.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
H. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, or of galvanized steel
where concealed.
2.3 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERS
A. Double-Roll Dispenser: Size to accommodate two separate rolls of core type tissue to 5 inchdiameter
roll.
1. Fabrication: Spindleless, chrome-plated, zinc alloy construction with non-controlled delivery
and theft resistent spindle.
2. Mounting: Surface mounted, concealed anchorage.
3. Mounting: Recessed
2.4 WASTE RECEPTACLES
A. Surface-Mounted Waste Receptacle: Fabricate of stainless steel with seamless exposed walls and
continuously welded bottom pan and hinged cover. Fumish removable, heavy-duty vinyl liner, secured
to receptacle at not less than 4 points by grommets, stainless steel hooks; minimum 6.5 gallon
capacity.
2.5 GRAB BARS
A. Stainless Steel Type: ProN-ide grab bars with wall thickness not less than 0.05 inch and as follows:
1. Mounting: Exposed, manufacturer's standard flanges and anchorages.
2. Clearance: 1-1/2 inch clearance between wall surface and inside face of bar.
3. Gripping Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard nonslip texture.
4. Medium-Duty Size: Outside diameter of 1-1/4 inches.
2.6 SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL UNITS
A. Semi-Recessed Type: Fabricate of stainless steel for nominal 4 inch wall depth. Provide self-closing
door and removable stainless steel receptacle of all-welded construction.
B. Partition-Mounted, Dual-Access Type: Fabricate of stainless steel equipped with adjustable flanges to
permit partition mounting to service two toilet compartments. Provide self-closing door and all-
welded, stainless steel receptacle removable from one side.
C. Surface-Mounted Partition-Mounted Type: Fabricate of stainless steel with seamless exposed walls,
tightly self-closing top cover and locking bottom panel with continuous, stainless steel piano hinge.
2.7 SOAP DISPENSERS
A. Liquid Soap Dispenser, Deck-Mounted: Deck-mounted piston and spout-type unit with a minimum 16
fluid ounce capacity, polyethylene reservoir concealed below deck. Piston and 4 inch long spout of
stainless steel with brightiv polished finish with chrome-plated deck escutcheon.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800- 3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid
interference with and ensure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of toilet
accessory items.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by mirror manufacturer, agreeing to replace any mirrors
that develop visible silver spoilage defects within warranty period.
B. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of
the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by
the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide toilet accessories by one of the
following:
1. A&J Washroom Accessories.
2. American Specialties, Inc.
3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
4. Bradley Corporation.*
5. General Accessory Manufacturing Co.
6. McKinney/Parker.
*Manufacturer indicated in toilet accessory schedule on drawings
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish, 0.034 inch minimum thickness.
B. Brass: Leaded and unleaded, flat products, ASTM B 19; rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with
finished edges, ASTM B 16; Castings, ASTM B 30.
C. Sheet Steel: Cold-rolled, commercial quality ASTM A 366, 0.04 inch minimum. Surface preparation
and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish.
D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 527 G60 .
E. Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on base metal, ASTM B 456, Type SC 2.
F. Mirror Glass: Nominal 6.0 mm thick, conforming to ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, and
with silvering, electro-plated copper coating, and protective organic coating.
G. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 10800-TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes toilet and bath accessory items and training room mirrors as scheduled.
B. The Installation of paper towel dispenser, furnished by owner, is part of the work of this section.
C. Toilet compartments and related accessories are specified in Division 10.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications
Sections.
B. Product data for each toilet accessory item specified, including construction details relative to materials,
dimensions, gages, profiles, mounting method, specified options, and finishes.
C. Samples of each toilet accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements. Acceptable
full-size samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.
D. Schedule indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations (by room) for each toilet
accessory item to be provided for project.
E. Setting drawings where cutouts are required in other work, including templates, substrate preparation
instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchorage devices.
F. Maintenance instructions including replaceable parts and service recommendations.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish accessory manufacturers' standard inserts and anchoring devices that
must be set in concrete or built into masonry. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit
and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800- 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
H. Door Style: Manufacturer's standard design.
1. Duo Panel: Float glass, 1/8 inch thick.
I. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet
type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide either lever handle with cam-action
latch, or exposed or concealed door pull and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous-type hinge
permitting door to open 180 deg.
2.4 FINISHES FOR CABINETS, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and
designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying temporary strippable
protective covering prior to shipping.
2.5 ALUMINUM CABINET FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association
for designating aluminum finishes.
B. Class II Clear Anodized Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, nonspecular;
Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Class II Architectural, clear film thicker
than 0.4 mil).
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine rough-in for cabinets to verify locations of piping connections prior to cabinet installation.
B. Examine walls and partitions for thickness and framing for cabinets to verify cabinet depth and
mounting prior to cabinet installation.
C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for installation.
B. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights to comply with
applicable regulations of governing authorities.
1. Prepare recesses in walls for cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and style of trim
and to comply with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Fasten mounting brackets and cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
END OF SECTION 10522
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10522-3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. J.L. Industries.
2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co.
3. Modem Metal Products by Muckle.
4. Potter-Roemer, Inc.
5. Samson Metal Products, Inc.
2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. General: Provide fire extinguishers for each cabinet and other locations indicated, in colors and
finishes selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard, that comply with authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 2-A:10:B:C, 5-lb nominal capacity, in enameled steel
container.
2.3 CABINETS
A. Construction: Manufacturer's standard box, with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type,
trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door
frames.
B. Fire-Rated Cabinets: UL listed with UL listing mark with fire-resistance rating of wall where it is
installed.
C. Cabinet Type: Suitable for containing the following:
1. Fire extinguisher.
D. Cabinet Mounting: Suitable for the following mounting conditions:
1. Semirecessed: Cabinet box (tub)partially recessed in walls of shallow depth.
E. Trim Style: Fabricate trim in one piece with comers mitered, welded, and ground smooth.
1. Exposed Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding
wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge(backbend).
a. Rolled-edge trim with 2-1/2-inch backbend depth.
b. Trim Metal: Aluminum.
F. Door Material and Construction: Manufacturer's standard door construction, of material indicated,
coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
1. Aluminum: Manufacturer's standard flush, hollow aluminum door construction.
2. Door Glazing: Fully tempered float glass complying with ASTM C 1048, Condition A, Type I,
Quality q3, Kind FT, Class as follows:
a. Class 1 (clear).
G. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with FIRE EXTINGUISHER lettering applied to door. Provide
lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, color, size, spacing, and
location.
1. Application Process: Silk screen.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10522-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 10522-FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Fire extinguishers.
2. Fire extinguisher cabinets.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
"` B. Product data for cabinets include rough-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods,
relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials,
trim style, door construction, panel style, and materials.
C. Samples for initial selection purposes in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual
units or sections of units showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of
cabinet finish indicated or exposed to view.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain extinguishers and cabinets from one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Coordination: Verify that cabinets are sized to accommodate type and capacity of extinguishers
indicated and provided by Owner under separate Contract.
C. UL-Listed Products: Fire extinguishers shall be UL listed with UL listing mark for type, rating, and
classification of extinguisher.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10522- 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.8 STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces complying with SSPC-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease, and
other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated
steel complying with SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC-SP 8 (Pickling), and
phosphatize surfaces.
B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard
baked-enamel finish consisting of a thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's
instructions for application and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 1.1 on doors,
frames, and legs, and 0.7 mil elsewhere.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of choices for color
and gloss.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install metal lockers complete with accessories according to manufacturer's recommendations. Install
plumb, level, rigid, and flush.
B. Assemble knock-down lockers with standard fasteners according to manufacturer's recommendations
with no exposed fasteners on door faces and face frames.
C. Connect together welded locker groups with standard fasteners according to manufacturer's
recommendations, with no exposed fasteners on face frames.
D. Anchor lockers to floors and walls at intervals recommended by manufacturer but no greater than 36
inches. Install anchors through back-up reinforcing plates where necessary to avoid metal distortion,
using concealed fasteners.
E. Install recess trim to recessed lockers using concealed fasteners. Provide hairline joints and concealed
splice plates.
3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices are
operating properly.
B. Clean interior and exposed exterior surfaces and polish stainless-steel and nonferrous metal surfaces.
C. Protect lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit locker use during
construction.
D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace locker units that cannot be restored to factory-finished
appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by locker manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 10505
METAL LOCKERS 10505 -5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
F. Provide perforated sides, intermediate partitions, and doors in manufacturer's standard configuration of
the following shape:
1. Perforation Shape: Diamond.
G. Recessed Handle and Latch: Manufacturer's standard housing to form a recess for latch lifter and
locking devices; nonprotruding latch lifter containing strike and eye for padlock; and automatic,
prelocking, pry-resistant latch with latching action as follows:
1. Single-Tier Lockers: Not less than 3-point latching.
H. Single Locker Latching: Manufacturer's standard 3-point latch engaging frame at top, bottom, and
jamb, with projecting turn handle having provisions for padlock.
2.5 LOCKER ACCESSORIES
A. Equipment: Furnish each locker with the following items, unless otherwise shown:
1. Single-Tier Units: Not fewer than 2 single-prong wall hooks.
2. Lockers 18 Inches Deep or Greater: Provide coat rod.
B. Recess Trim: Manufacturer's standard 0.0478-inch minimum steel sheet trim with concealed fastening
clips.
C. Filler Panels: 0.0478-inch minimum steel sheet, factory fabricated.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate lockers square, rigid, and without warp, with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion.
Make exposed metal edges free of sharp edges and burrs, and safe to touch. Weld frame members
together to form a rigid, 1-piece structure.
1. Form locker body panels, doors, shelves and accessories from 1-piece steel sheet unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Preassemble lockers by welding all joints, seams, and connections. Grind exposed welds flush.
2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and
designating finishes.
B. Finish all steel surfaces and accessories, except prefinished stainless-steel and chrome-plated surfaces.
C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary
protective covering prior to shipment.
D. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if
they are within 1/2 of the range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not
acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved samples and they are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
METAL LOCKERS 10505 -4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Frames: Form channel frames of 0.0598-inch minimum steel sheet. Form continuous integral strike
on vertical frame members or weld 0.0897-inch minimum latch hooks to latch strike frame.
C. Shelf. Form 0.0239-inch minimum steel sheet hat shelf in single-tier units.
D. Door: One-piece steel sheet, flanged at all edges, constructed to prevent springing when opening or
closing. Fabricate to swing 190 degrees.
1. Thickness: 0.0598 inch minimum.
E. Reinforcing: Brace or reinforce inner face of doors over 15 inches wide.
F. Acoustical Treatment: Fabricate lockers for quiet operation with manufacturer's standard rattle-free
latching mechanism and moving components isolated to prevent metal-to-metal contact.
1. Reinforce inner face of door with a steel sheet panel filled with sound-deadening insulation.
G. Louvered Vents: Stamped, louvered vents in door face, as follows:
1. Single-Tier Lockers: No fewer than 6 louver openings top and bottom.
H. Hinges: Steel, full-loop, 5- or 7-knuckle tight pin, 2 inches high minimum. Weld to inside of frame
and secure to door with not fewer than 2 factory-installed fasteners that are completely concealed and
tamperproof when door is closed.
1. Provide at least 3 hinges for each door over 42 inches high.
I. Projecting Handle and Latch: Positive automatic, prelocking, pry-resistant latch and pull with rubber
silencers; chromium-plated, heavy-duty, vandalproof lift-up handle, containing strike and eye for
padlock; and with latching action as follows:
1. Single-Tier Lockers: Not less than 3-point latching.
2.4 TURN-OUT ROOM LOCKERS
A. Body: Form tops and bottoms of 0.0598-inch minimum steel sheet.
1. Form backs of 0.0478-inch minimum steel sheet.
2. Form sides and intermediate partitions of 0.0598-inch minimum perforated steel sheet.
B. Frames: Form welded frames of 0.0598-inch minimum steel sheet channels or 0.1046-inch minimum
steel angles with adjustable legs.
C. Shelf: Form shelf for single-tier lockers of 0.0598-inch minimum perforated steel sheet.
D. Door: Form door of perforated steel sheet with flanged edges, 0.0747 inch minimum.
E. Hinges: Heavy-duty, 0.050-inch-thick minimum steel, full-loop, 5- or 7-knuckle, tight pin, 2 inches
high minimum. Weld to inside of frame and secure to door with not less than 2 factory-installed
fasteners that are completely concealed and tamperproof when door is closed.
1. Provide at least 3 hinges for each door.
METAL LOCKERS 10505 -3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AN
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain locker units and accessories from one manufacturer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver lockers until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for locker installation.
B. Protect lockers from damage during delivery, handling, storage, and installation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. American Locker Security Systems, Inc.
2. Art Metal Products, Div. of Fort Knox Storage Co.
3. De Bourgh Manufacturing Co.
4. Hadrian Inc.
5. The Interior Steel Equipment Co. amok
6. List Industries Inc.
7. Lyon Metal Products Inc.
8. Medart, Inc.
9. Penco Products.
10. Republic Storage Systems Co., Inc.
11. Steiner Company, Inc.
12. Tiffin Metal Products Co.
13. P&R Products Co. for turn-out room lockers
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366, commercial-quality, stretcher-leveled, cold-rolled carbon steel sheet,
stretcher leveled, free of buckling, scale, and surface imperfections.
B. Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel; slotless-type exposed bolt heads; self-locking nuts or lock
washers for nuts on moving parts.
C. Equipment: Manufacturer's standard plated steel hooks or coat rods.
2.3 WARDROBE LOCKERS
A. Body: Form backs, tops, bottoms, sides, and intermediate partitions of flanged 0.0239-inch minimum
steel sheet.
1. Form exposed ends of nonrecessed lockers of 0.0598-inch minimum steel sheet.
METAL LOCKERS 10505 -2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
Aw SECTION 10505 -METAL LOCKERS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wardrobe lockers, including the following:
a. Single-tier.
2. Turn-out room lockers, including the following:
a. Single-tier.
3. Locker room benches.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for base of wardrobe lockers.
2. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood furring and grounds.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed data including materials, accessories, construction, finishes,
assembly, and installation instructions for lockers and benches.
C. Shop Drawings: Layout and dimensions of metal lockers and benches. Indicate relationship to
adjoining surfaces. Show locker elevations and details, fillers, trim, base, sloping tops, and
accessories. Include locker numbering sequence. Indicate installation and anchorage requirements.
D. Samples for Initial Color Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing a full range of available
colors.
E. Samples for Color Verification: Samples showing actual colors prepared on same material to be used
for the Work.
F. Maintenance Instructions: Instructions for cleaning lockers and for adjusting, repairing, and replacing
locker doors and latching mechanisms.
METAL LOCKERS 10505 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.2 FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION '
A. General: Install flagpoles where shown and according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Foundation-Tube Installation: Install flagpole in foundation tube, seated on bottom plate between steel
centering wedges. Plumb flagpole and install hardwood wedges to secure flagpole in place. Place and
compact sand in foundation tube and remove hardwood wedges. Seal top of foundation tube with a 2-
inch layer of elastomeric sealant and cover with flashing collar.
C. Baseplate Installation: Install baseplate on washers placed over leveling nuts on anchor bolts and adjust
until flagpole is plumb. After flagpole is plumb, tighten retaining nuts and fill space under baseplate
solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. Finish exposed grout surfaces smooth and slope 45 degrees
away from edges of baseplate.
END OF SECTION 10350
FLAGPOLES 10350-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Finial Ball: Manufacturer's standard flush-seam ball, sized as indicated or, if not indicated, to match
pole-butt diameter.
1. 0.063-inch spun aluminum, finished to match flagpole.
B. Internal Halyard, Cam Cleat System: 5/16-inch-diameter, braided polypropylene halyard; cam cleat;
and concealed revolving truck assembly with plastic-coated counterweight and sling. Provide flush
access door secured with cylinder lock. Finish truck assembly to match flagpole.
C. Halyard Flag Snaps: Provide 2 swivel snap hooks per halyard, as follows:
1. Chromium-plated bronze.
2. Provide with neoprene or vinyl covers.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Comply with requirements of Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107.
C. Sand: ASTM C 33, fine aggregate.
D. Elastomeric Sealant: Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
2.5 FINISHES
A. Fiberglass: Hard, high-gloss gel coat or high-gloss, high-build, polyurethane or polyester coating.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Excavation: For foundation, excavate to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Remove loose soil and
foreign matter from excavation and moisten earth before placing concrete.
B. Provide forms where required due to unstable soil conditions and for perimeter of flagpole base at
grade. Secure forms, foundation tube, fiberglass sleeve, or anchor bolts in position, braced to prevent
displacement during concreting.
C. Place concrete immediately after mixing. Compact concrete in place by using vibrators. Moist-cure
exposed concrete for not less than 7 days or use a nonstaining curing compound.
D. Trowel exposed concrete surfaces to a smooth, dense finish, free of trowel marks, and uniform in
texture and appearance. Provide positive slope for water runoff to base perimeter.
FLAGPOLES 10350-3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each flagpole as a complete unit from a single manufacturer, including
fittings, accessories, bases, and anchorage devices.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy kraft paper or other weathertight wrapping and enclose in a
hard fiber tube or other protective container.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Baartol Co., Inc.
2. Concord Industries, Inc.
3. Eder Flag Manufacturing Co., Inc.
4. Ewing: John Ewing&Co. Inc.
5. ICC Manufacturing Co.; Morgan-Francis Div.; AABEC Pole Div.
6. Kearney-National Inc.; American Flagpole Div.
7. Lingo, Inc.; Acme Flagpole Co. Div.
8. Michigan Flagpole Inc.
9. Olympus Flag &Banner; EMC Div. ,,,k
10. PLP Composite Technologies, Inc.
11. Pole-Tech Co., Inc.
2.2 FLAGPOLES
A. Pole Construction, General: Construct poles and ship to Project site in one piece, if possible. If more
than one piece is necessary, provide snug-fitting precision joints with self-aligning, internal splicing
sleeve arrangement for weathertight, hairline field joints.
B. Fiberglass Flagpoles: Fabricate from polyester-resin reinforced with woven glass-fiber roving with 75
percent of glass fibers parallel to the length of the flagpole.
1. Provide entasis-tapered fiberglass flagpoles.
C. Fiberglass Sleeve: Fiberglass foundation sleeve, made to fit flagpole and sized for installation, for
casting into concrete foundation.
1. Provide flashing collar of same material and finish as flagpole.
2.3 FITTINGS
AMOt
FLAGPOLES 10350-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 10350-FLAGPOLES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Coo&tions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Fiberglass flagpoles.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 3 Section 'Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete footings for flagpoles.
2. Division 7 Section 'Joint Sealants" for elastomeric sealant filling the top of the foundation tube,
if any.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide flagpoles capable of withstanding the effects of wind loads as
determined according to the building code in effect for this Project or NAAMM FP 1001, "Guide
Specifications for Design Loads of Metal Flagpoles," whichever is more stringent.
1. Base flagpole design on maximum standard-size flag suitable for use with pole or flag size
indicated, whichever is more stringent.
2. Basic Wind Speed: For Project location, 80 mph(36 m/s).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of flagpole required. Include installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Show general layout, jointing, grounding method, and anchoring and supporting
systems.
1. Include details of foundation system for ground-set poles.
C. Structural Calculations: For flagpoles indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include
structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
D. Finish Samples for Verification: For each finished metal used for flagpoles and accessories.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
FLAGPOLES 10350 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Replace access flooring panels that are stained, scratched, otherwise damaged, or not complying with
specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 10270
ACCESS FLOORING 10270-8
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Locate each pedestal, complete any necessary subfloor preparation, and vacuum clean the subfloor to
remove dust, dirt, and construction debris before beginning installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install access flooring system and accessories under supervision of the access flooring manufacturer's
authorized representative to produce a rigid, firm installation that complies with performance
requirements and is free of vibration, rocking, rattles, and squeaks.
B. Set pedestals in adhesive as recommended by the access flooring manufacturer to provide full bearing of
the pedestal base on the subfloor.
C. Lay out floor panel installation to keep the number of cut panels at the floor perimeter to a minimum.
Scribe perimeter panels to provide a close fit with adjoining construction with no voids greater than 1/8
inch where panels abut vertical surfaces.
1. To prevent dusting, seal cut edges of the following panel type with sealer recommended by
panel manufacturer:
"* a. Steel-covered wood-core panels.
2. Connect grounding strips embedded in static-conductive floor covering to connector clips
attached to pedestals at the intervals needed to comply with performance requirements for
electrical resistance of floor covering.
D. Secure stringers to pedestal heads according to the access flooring manufacturer's instructions.
E. Scribe vertical closures to closely fit against subfloor and adjacent finish floor surfaces. Set in mastic
and seal to maintain plenum effect within underfloor cavity.
F. Clean dust, dirt, and construction debris caused by floor installation, including vacuuming the subfloor
area, as installation of floor panels proceeds.
G. Cut and trim access flooring and perform other dirt-or-debris-producing operations as remotely as
possible from installation area and to prevent contamination of subfloor under access flooring already
installed.
H. Level installed access flooring to within 0.10 inch of true level over the entire access flooring area and
within 0.062 inch in any 10-foot distance.
3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. After completing installation, vacuum clean access flooring and cover with continuous sheets of
reinforced paper or plastic. Maintain protective covering until the time of Substantial Completion.
ACCESS FLOORING 10270-7
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Stringer Systems: Modular steel stringer systems made to interlock with pedestal heads and form a grid
pattern placing stringers under each edge of each floor panel and a pedestal under each comer of each
floor panel. Protect steel components with manufacturer's standard galvanized or corrosion-resistant
paint finish.
1. Bolted Stringers: System of main and cross stringers connected to pedestals with threaded
fasteners accessible from above.
a. Provide continuous gasket at contact surfaces between panel and stringers to deaden
sound, to seal off underfloor cavity from above, and to maintain panel alignment and
position.
b. Provide stringers that support each edge of each panel where required to meet design-load
criteria.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Colors and Finishes: For exposed accessories available in more than one standard color or finish,
provide color or finish complying with the following requirements:
1. Provide Architect's selections made from manufacturer's full range of available colors and
finishes.
B. Cutouts: Provide cutouts in floor panels for cable penetrations and service outlets. Comply with
requirements indicated for size, shape, number, and location. Provide reinforcement or additional
support, if needed, to make panels with cutouts comply with standard performance requirements.
Amok
1. Fit cutouts with manufacturer's standard grommets in sizes indicated or, where size of cutouts
exceed maximum grommet size available, trim edge of cutouts with manufacturer's standard
plastic molding having tapered top flange.
a. Furnish removable covers for grommets.
C. Service Outlets: Standard UL-listed and -labeled assemblies, for recessed mounting flush with top of
floor panels, for power, communication, and signal services, and complying with the following
requirements:
1. Structural Performance: Cover capable of supporting a 1000-lbf concentrated load.
2. Cover and Box Type: Hinged polycarbonate cover with opening for passage of cables when
cover is closed and including frame and steel box or formed-steel plate for mounting electrical
receptacles.
3. Location: Locate outlets in center of panel quadrant.
4. Receptacles and Wiring: Electrical receptacles and wiring for service outlets are specified in
Division 16 Sections.
D. Panel Lifting Device: Manufacturer's standard portable lifting device of type and number required for
lifting panels with floor covering provided.
1. Provide 4 lifting devices of each type required.
E. Perimeter Support: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard method for supporting panel
edge and form transition between access flooring and adjoining floor covering at same level as access
flooring.
Aawk
ACCESS FLOORING 10270-6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Nominal Panel Size: 24 by 24 inches.
2. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate panels to the following tolerances with squar prances
expressed as the difference between diagonal measurements from comer to come
a. Size and Squareness: Plus or minus 0.015 inch of required size, w; .areness
tolerance of plus or minus 0.015 inch, unless tolerances are otherwise d for a
specific panel type.
b. Flatness: Plus or minus 0.020 inc; , measured on a diagonal on top of pan
3. Panel Attachment to Understructure: By gravity.
B. Steel-Covered Wood-Core Panels: Panels with 1-inch-thick high-density particleboard core, <,minated
to top and bottom face sheets of zinc-coated steel sheet, and with a flame spread of 25 o less per
ASTM E 84. Provide core edges enclosed with upturned, die-formed edge of bottom shee or with
perimeter steel channel welded to top sheet and welded or bonded to bottom sheet.
2.3 FLOOR PANEL COVERING
A. General: Provide factory-applied floor coverings of type indicated that are laminated by the access
flooring manufacturer to tops of floor panels.
B. Colors and Patterns: Provide floor covering materials in colors and patterns as indicated below:
1. Provide Architect's selections made from manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns.
C. Standard Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, High-Wear Type, of grade indicated below; fabricated in
one piece to cover each panel face within perimeter plastic edging or with integral trim serving as
edging.
1. Grade: HW 62.
D. Edging: Manufacturer's standard form of edge trim. For applied edge trim, use method standard with
manufacturer to attach edge trim to perimeter of each panel. Provide size and profile of applied edge
trim that fits floor covering selected.
2.4 UNDERSTRUCTURE
A. Pedestals: Assembly consisting of base, column with provisions for height adjustment, and head(cap);
made of steel or aluminum or a combination of both.
1. Base: Square or circular base with not less than 16 sq. in. of bearing area.
2. Provide vibration-proof leveling mechanism for making and holding fine adjustments in height
over a range of not less than 2 inches. Include means of locking leveling mechanism at a
selected height that requires deliberate action to change height setting and prevents vibratory
displacement.
3. Provide units of sufficient height to achieve underfloor clearance indicated.
4. Head: Designed for direct, nonbolted support of panels.
a. Provide sound-deadening pads or gaskets at contact points between heads and panels.
ACCESS FLOORING 10270-5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of access flooring until installation area is
enclosed and has an ambient temperature of between 40 and 90 deg F and a relative humidity of not
more than 70 percent.
B. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which access flooring
must fit by accurate field measurements before preparing Shop Drawings; show recorded measurements
on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
1.8 COORDINATING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordination of Work: Coordinate location of mechanical and electrical work in underfloor cavity to
prevent interference with access flooring pedestals.
B. Mark pedestal locations with a grid of size indicated below on concrete subfloor so that mechanical and
electrical work can proceed without interfering with pedestals.
1. 120 by 120 inches.
C. Do not proceed with installation of access flooring until after Substantial Completion of other
construction within affected spaces.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective
covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents.
1. Field Panels and Understructure: Furnish quantity of standard field panels and understructure
components equal to 2 percent of amount installed.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide access flooring by one of the
following:
1. Systems with Steel-Covered Wood-Core Panels:
a. C-TEC, Inc.
b. GHInternational, Inc.
C. Mult-A-Frame Corporation.
d. USG Interiors, Inc.; Access Floor Systems.
2.2 FLOOR PANELS
A. General: Provide modular field panels complying with the following requirements that one person,
using a portable lifting device, can interchange with other field panels without disturbing adjacent laft►
panels or understructure and that are free of exposed-metal edges with floor covering in place.
ACCESS FLOORING 10270-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Shop Drawings showing complete layout of access flooring based on field-verified dimensions; include
dimensional relationships to adjoining work and installation tolerances. Include details, with
descriptive notes indicating materials, finishes, fasteners, typical and special edge conditions,
accessories, understructure, and other data to permit a full evaluation of entire access flooring system.
D. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of floor
covering and exposed finish indicated.
E. Samples for verification in full-size units of each type of floor covering and exposed finish indicated.
1. In addition, submit one complete full-size floor panel, pedestal, and understructure unit for each
type of access flooring system required.
F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,
names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
G. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance of access
flooring with system performance requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products
performed either by the qualified independent testing agency or by the access flooring manufacturer and
witnessed by the qualified independent testing agency.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is approved by the access flooring
manufacturer for installing the types of access flooring indicated for this Project.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for approval, an independent testing agency must
demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria conforming to
ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated
without delaying the Work.
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain access flooring from one source and by a single manufacturer.
D. NFPA Standard: Provide access flooring complying with NFPA 75 requirements for raised flooring.
E. Provide floor panels that are clearly and permanently marked on their underside with the panel type and
concentrated-load rating.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver access flooring components in original, unopened packages, clearly labeled with manufacturer's
name and item description.
B. Handle and store packages containing access flooring in a manner which avoids overloading building
structure.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
ACCESS FLOORING 10270 -3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
Section II. Failure is defined as the point at which the access flooring system will not take any
additional load.
a. Factor: 2.8 or higher.
3. Rolling-Load Performance: Capability of access flooring system to withstand rolling loads of
the following magnitude applied to panels, with a combination of local and overall deformation
not to exceed 0.040 inch after exposure to rolling load over CISCA A/F path A or B, whichever
path produces the greatest top-surface deformation, according to CISCA AIF Section III.
a. CISCA A/F Wheel 1 rolling load indicated below:
1) 1000 lbf
b. CISCA A/F Wheel 2 rolling load indicated below:
1) 800 lbf
4. Stringer Concentrated-Load Performance: Capability of stringers, without panels in place, to
support a concentrated load of 200 lbf at center of span with a permanent set not to exceed 0.010
inch, as determined per CISCA A/F Section IV.
5. Pedestal Axial-Load Performance: Capability of pedestal assemblies, without panels or other
supports in place, to withstand the following axial load per pedestal, according to CISCA A/F
Section V.
a. 5000 lbf.
A
6. Pedestal Overturning-Moment Performance: Capability of pedestal assemblies, without panels
or other supports in place, to withstand the following overturning moment per pedestal,
according to CISCA A/F Section VI.
a. 1000 lbf x inches.
C. Floor Panel Impact-Load Performance: Capability of access flooring system to withstand the following
impact load when dropped from 36 inches onto a 1-sq. in. area located anywhere on panel, without
failing. Failure is defined as the point at which the access flooring system will not take any additional
load.
1. 120 lbf.
D. Static-Dissipative Floor Covering Resistance: Not less than 150,000 ohms, nor more than 20,000
megohms, as determined by testing identical products according to the method for conductive flooring
specified in Chapter 12 of NFPA 99 but modified to place 1 electrode on floor surface and to attach the
other electrode to understructure.
E. Panel to Understructure Resistance: Not more than 10 ohms.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of access flooring specified.
ACCESS FLOORING 10270-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 10270-ACCESS FLOORING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Gravity-held panels on bolted stringer understructure.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 3 Section 'Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete floor sealer.
2. Division 9 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring" for base applied at access flooring panels.
3. Division 16 Section "Grounding" for connection to ground of access flooring understructure.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Performance Requirements, General: Provide access flooring systems that comply with the following
requirements:
1. Access flooring systems are proprietary portable systems composed of modular floor panels on
elevated supports (understructures) forming accessible underfloor cavities (air spaces) to
accommodate electrical services.
2. Access flooring systems comply with performance requirements specified as determined by
testing manufacturers' current standard products representing those indicated for this Project.
B. Structural Performance per CISCA A/F: Provide access flooring systems capable of supporting the
following loads, within limits and under conditions indicated, as demonstrated by testing according to
the referenced procedures in Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association's (CISCA)
"Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors." This publication and its procedures are referenced
elsewhere in this Section as CISCA A/F.
1. Concentrated-Load Performance: Capability of floor panels, including those with cutouts, to
support concentrated design loads of the following magnitude, with a top-surface deflection
under load and a permanent set not to exceed, respectively, 0.10 and 0.010 inch, according to
CISCA A/F Section I.
a. 10001bf
2. Ultimate-Load Performance: Capability of access flooring systems to support a minimum
ultimate concentrated load equal to the value obtained by multiplying the specified concentrated
floor panel design load by the factor indicated below, without failing, according to CISCA A/F
ACCESS FLOORING 10270- 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 3 -EXECUTION -
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight,
plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2 inch between pilasters and panels and not
more than 1 inch between panels and walls. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended
anchoring devices.
1. Secure panels to walls and panels with not less than 2 stirrup brackets attached near top and
bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.
Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
B. Overhead-Braced-and-Floor-Anchored Compartments: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and
tighten. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than 2 fasteners. Hang doors and
adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.
C. Screens: Attach with anchoring devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and to suit
supporting structure. Set units level and plumb and to resist lateral impact.
D. Benches: Attach to dressing compartment panels with manufacturer's standard aluminum "L" brackets
and plastic angle supports in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions
for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from
closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors and swing doors in entrance screens
to return to fully closed position.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure toilet compartments and screens are
without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 10155
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 -4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Material: Chrome-plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clear-anodized aluminum.
G. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip
profile in manufacturer's standard finish at dressing compartments, provide headrail with integral
shower curtain trace fitted with manufacturers standard curtain hooks.
H. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum strip in manufacturer's
standard finish.
I. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome-
plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type
bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or other rust-
resistant, protective-coated steel.
J. Dressing Compartment Benches: Minimum 1" thick by 9 1/2" deep high-density polyethylene(HDPE)
with edges uniformly machined to a 1/4" radius.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment system.
Provide units with cutouts and drilled holes to receive compartment-mounted hardware, accessories,
and grab bars, as indicated.
B. Solid-Plastic, Polymer-Resin Compartments and Screens: Provide aluminum heat-sink strips at
exposed bottom edges of HDPE units to prevent burning.
C. Overhead-Braced-and-Floor-Anchored Compartments: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-
resistant supports, leveling mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions.
Make provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide shoes at
pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.
D. Floor-Anchored Screens: Provide pilasters and panels of same construction and finish as toilet
compartments. Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies complete
with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to
floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage.
E. Doors: Provide 24-inch-wide in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch-wide in-
swinging doors for compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible.
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold door open at any
angle up to 90 degrees.
2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit with combination
rubber-faced door strike and keeper designed for emergency access. Provide units that comply
with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be
handicapped accessible.
3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to
prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.
4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumpers at out-swinging doors.
5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit that complies with accessibility requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to handicapped accessible. Provide
units on both sides of doors at compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 -3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work,
establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating units without field measurements. Coordinate
supports, adjacent construction, and fixture locations to ensure actual dimensions correspond to
established dimensions.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Accurate Partitions Corporation.
2. Capitol Partitions, Inc.
3. Compression Polymers Group; Comtec Industries.
4. Crane Plumbing; Sanymetal.
5. Global Steel Products Corp.
6. Santana Products, Inc.
7. Weis/Robart Partitions, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed -d=k
surfaces that exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core
material, or other imperfections on finished units are unacceptable.
B. Solid-Plastic, Polymer Resin: High-density polyethylene (HDPE) with homogenous color throughout.
Provide material not less than 1 inchthick with seamless construction and eased edges in color and
pattern as follows:
1. Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns.
C. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves(Caps): ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304 stainless steel, not less than 0.0312
inch thick and 3 incheshigh, finished to match hardware.
D. Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturer's standard ear or U-brackets for attaching panels and screens to walls
and pilasters of the following material:
1. Material: Chrome-plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac)or clear-anodized aluminum.
E. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Manufacturer's standard design for attaching panels and screens to
walls and pilasters of the following material:
1. Material: Clear-anodized aluminum.
F. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and
accessories of the following material:
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 -2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
look SECTION 10155 -TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes toilet compartments, dressing compartments and screens as follows:
1. Type: Solid-plastic, polymer resin.
2. Compartment Style: Overhead braced and floor anchored.
3. Screen Style: Floor anchored.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for supports that attach units to overhead structural
system.
2. Division 9 "Ceramic Tile" for terrazo shower bases.
3. Division 10 "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for toilet paper holders, grab bars, and similar
accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and style of toilet compartment and screen specified. Include details of
construction relative to materials, fabrication, and installation. Include details of anchors, hardware,
and fastenings.
B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation of toilet compartment and screen assemblies. Include
plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Show locations of reinforcement and cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of sections of actual units showing
the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of compartment or screen
indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: Of each compartment or screen color and finish required, prepared on 6-
inch-square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
oo, A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Examine wall surfaces, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions
affecting installation of visual display boards.
1. Surfaces to receive markerboards shall be free of dirt, scaling paint, and projections or
depressions that would affect smooth, finished surfaces of chalkboards or markerboards.
2. Surfaces to receive tackboards shall be dry and free of substances that would impair the bond
between tackboards and substrate.
3. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Deliver factory-built visual display boards completely assembled in one piece without joints, where
possible. If dimensions exceed panel size, provide 2 or more pieces of equal length as acceptable to
Architect. When overall dimensions require delivery in separate units, prefit components at the
factory, disassemble for delivery, and make final joints at the site. Use splines at joints to maintain
surface alignment.
B. Install units in locations and at mounting heights indicated and according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Keep perimeter lines straight, plumb, and level. Provide grounds, clips, backing
materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.
C. Coordinate Project-site-assembled units with grounds, trim, and accessories. Join parts with a neat,
precision fit.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Verify that accessories required for each unit have been properly installed and that operating units
function properly.
B. Clean units according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 10100
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100-5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Back panel and floor panel: plastic impregnated cork
3. Adjustable shelves: Provide 2 glass shelves on rear mounted standards and matching brackets.
4. Hardware: Manufacturers standard bottom shoe for sliding doors with built-in lock.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Metal Trim and Accessories: Fabricate frames and trim of not less than 0.062-inch-thick, extruded-
aluminum alloy, size and shape as indicated, to suit type of installation. Provide straight, single-length
units. Keep joints to a minimum. Miter comers to a neat, hairline closure.
1. Where size of visual display boards or other conditions require support in addition to normal
trim, provide structural supports or modify trim as indicated or as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's standard structural support accessories to suit conditions indicated.
2. Field-Applied Trim: Manufacturer's standard snap-on trim with no visible screws or exposed
joints.
3. Chalktray: Manufacturer's standard, continuous, box-type, aluminum chalktray with slanted
front and cast-aluminum end closures for each chalkboard.
4. Map Rail: Furnish map rail at top of each unit, complete with the following accessories:
a. Display Rail: Provide continuous cork display rail approximately 1 or 2 inches wide.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Porcelain Enamel Markerboards: Laminate facing sheet and backing sheet to core material under
pressure with manufacturer's recommended flexible, waterproof adhesive. -00*k
B. Assembly: Provide factory-assembled markerboard and tackboard units, unless field-assembled units
are required.
1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate with
minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board, as acceptable to Architect.
2. Provide manufacturer's standard vertical joint system between abutting sections of
markerboards.
2.5 FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association
for designating aluminum finishes.
C. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated;
Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010
mm or thicker)complying with AAMA 607.1.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION Aok
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 -4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
d. Ghent Manufacturing, Inc.
" e. Greensteel, Inc.
f. Lemco, Inc.
g. Marsh Chalkboard Company.
h. Nelson Adams Company.
2. Tackboards:
a. Best-Rite Chalkboard Co.
b. Carolina Chalkboard Co.
C. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
d. Ghent Manufacturing, Inc.
e. Greensteel, Inc.
f. Lemco, Inc.
g. Marsh Chalkboard Company.
h. Nelson Adams Company.
3. Recessed Display Case::
a. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
b. Ghent Manufacturing, Inc.
C. Greensteel, Inc.
d. Lemco, Inc.
e. Marsh Chalkboard Company.
f. Nelson Adams Company.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Porcelain Enamel Markerboards: Balanced, high-pressure-laminated, porcelain enamel chalkboards of
3-ply construction consisting of face sheet, core material, and backing.
1. Face Sheet: 0.024-inch enameling grade steel especially processed for temperatures used in
coating porcelain on steel. Coat exposed face and edges with a 3-coat process consisting of
primer, ground coat, and color cover coat. Coat concealed face with a 2-coat process consisting
of primer and ground coat. Fuse cover and ground coats to steel at manufacturer's standard
firing temperatures, but not less than 1200 deg F.
a. Cover Coat: Provide manufacturer's standard, light-colored, special writing surface with
gloss finish intended for use with erasable dry markers.
2. Core: 3/8-inch-thick, particleboard core material complying with requirements of
ANSI A208.1, Grade 1-M-1.
3. Backing Sheet: 0.015-inch-thick, aluminum-sheet backing.
4. Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, moisture-resistant, thermoplastic-type
adhesive.
B. Plastic-Impregnated Cork Tackboards: Seamless sheet, 1/4-inch-thick, ground natural cork compressed
with a resinous binder with washable vinyl finish and integral color throughout, laminated to burlap
backing. Provide color and texture as scheduled or as selected from manufacturer's standards.
C. Display Case: Fabricate from aluminum extrusions.
1. Glass: Glazing quality 1/4" sliding glass doors.
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 -3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is an authorized representative of
chalkboard manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of the type of sliding chalkboard units
required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain visual display boards through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of visual display
boards and are based on the products indicated. Other manufacturers' products with equal performance
characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's
approval and only to the extent needed to comply with performance requirements. Where
modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify field measurements before preparation of Shop Drawings and before
fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
avoid delaying the Work.
1. Allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might delay
the Work.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special porcelain enamel markerboard warranty specified in this Article shall
not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the
Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Porcelain Enamel Markerboard Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by manufacturer
agreeing to replace porcelain enamel chalkboards that do not retain their original writing and erasing
qualities, become slick and shiny, or exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking within the specified warranty
period, provided the manufacturer's written instructions for handling, installation, protection, and
maintenance have been followed.
1. Warranty Period: 50 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Porcelain Enamel Markerboards:
a. Best-Rite Chalkboard Co.
b. Carolina Chalkboard Co.
C. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 1010 0-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 10100 -VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS AND CASE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Porcelain enamel markerboards.
2. Plastic-impregnated cork tackboards.
3. Display Case
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of visual display board indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of visual display board required.
1. Include dimensioned elevations. Show location of joints between individual panels where unit
dimensions exceed maximum panel length.
2. Include sections of typical trim members.
3. Show anchors, grounds, reinforcement, accessories, layout, and installation details.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors and textures
available for the following:
1. Markerboards: Actual sections of porcelain enamel finish for each type of markerboard
required.
2. Plastic-impregnated Cork Tackboards: For each type of cork tackboard indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: Of the following products, showing color and texture or finish selected.
Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range
of variations expected. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for the Work.
1. Visual Display Boards: Sample panels not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches, mounted on the
substrate indicated for the final Work. Include a panel for each type, color, and texture
required.
2. Aluminum Trim and Accessories: Samples of each finish type and color, on 6-inch-long
sections of extrusions and not less than 4-inch squares of sheet or plate. Include Sample sets
showing the full range of color variations expected.
E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of tackboards certifying that vinyl-fabric-faced cork
tackboard materials furnished comply with requirements specified for flame-spread ratings.
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
"^
C. Finish Coat: Odorless, semigloss, alkyd, interior enamel applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than
1.4 mils.
1) Moore: Satin Impervo 11235.
2) PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Low Odor Interior Enamel Wall and
Trim Semi-Gloss Oil.
3) P &L: S/D 5700 Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel.
H. Aluminum: Provide the following finish on interior aluminum on sectional overhead doors:
1. Provide same finish as exterior aluminum on sectional overhead doors.
END OF SECTION 09900
PAINTING 09900- 15
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than
1.5 mils.
1) Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint#163.
2) PPG: 6-208 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Rust Inhibitive
Steel Primer.
3) P&L: S 4551 Tech-Gard High Performance Rust Inhibitor
Primer.
b. Undercoat: Alkyd, interior enamel undercoat or semigloss, interior, alkyd-enamel finish
coat, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than
1.2 mils.
1) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody#217.
2) PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Interior Quick-Drying Enamel
Undercoater.
3) P&L: S/D 1011 Suprime "11" Interior Alkyd Wood Primer.
C. Finish Coat: Odorless, semigloss, alkyd, interior enamel applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than
1.4 mils.
1) Moore: Satin Impervo #235.
2) PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Low Odor Interior Enamel Wall and
Trim Semi-Gloss Oil.
3) P&L: S/D 5700 Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel.
G. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over zinc-coated metal:
1. Semigloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: One finish coat over an undercoat and a primer.
a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.
1) Moore: IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer#155.
2) PPG: 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior
Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel.
3) P&L: Z/F 1003 Suprime "3" Interior/Exterior Latex Metal
Primer.
b. Undercoat: Alkyd, interior enamel undercoat or semigloss, interior, alkyd-enamel finish
coat, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than
1.2 mils.
1) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody#217.
2) PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Interior Quick-Drying Enamel
Undercoater.
3) P&L: S/D 1011 Suprime "11" Interior Alkyd Wood Primer.
PAINTING 09900- 14
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
a. Primer: Alkyd or latex-based, interior enamel undercoater applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than
1.2 mils.
1) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody#217.
2) PPG: 17-255 Quick-Drying Enamel Undercoater.
3) P&L: S/D 1011 Suprime "11" Interior Alkyd Wood Primer.
b. First and Second Coats: Odorless, semigloss, alkyd, interior enamel applied at spreading
rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 2.4 mils.
1) Moore: Satin Impervo#235.
2) PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Low Odor Interior Enamel Wall and
Trim Semi-Gloss Oil.
3) P&L: S/D 5700 Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel.
E. Natural-Finish Woodwork: Provide the following natural finishes over new, interior woodwork:
1. Alkyd-Based, Satin-Varnish Finish: 2 finish coats of an alkyd-based, clear-satin varnish over a
sanding sealer. Provide wood filler on open-grain wood before applying first varnish coat.
a. Filler Coat: Paste-wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer.
1) Moore: Benwood Paste Wood Filler#238.
2) PPG: None required.
3) P &L: None required.
b. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer.
1) Moore: Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick-Dry Sanding
Sealer#413.
2) PPG: 77-30 Rez Interior Quick-Drying Sealer and Finish.
3) P &L: H-40 Sanding Sealer.
C. First and Second Finish Coats: Alkyd-based or polyurethane varnish, as recommended
by the manufacturer, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer.
1) Moore: Benwood Satin Finish Varnish#404.
2) PPG: 77-7 Rez Varnish, Interior Satin Oil Clear.
3) P &L: H24 38 Clear Finish Gloss.
F. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:
1. Semigloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: One finish coat over an enamel undercoater and a primer.
a. Primer: Quick-drying, rust-inhibitive, alkyd-based or epoxy-metal primer, as
recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate
PAINTING 09900- 13
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Finish Coat: Odorless, semigloss, alkyd, interior enamel applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than
1.5 mils.
1) Moore: Satin Impervo#235.
2) PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Low Odor Interior Enamel Wall and
Trim Semi-Gloss Oil.
3) P&L: S/D 5700 Series Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel.
2. High gloss, epoxy, enamel finish: Two coats over filled surface with total dry film thickness
not less than 6.0 mils. excluding filler coat:
a. Block Filler: High-performance block filler.
1) Moore: Moorcraft Interior&Exterior Block Filler#174
2) PPG: Pitt-Glaze High Performance Block Filler
3) P&L Primafil 200
b. Undercoat and Finish Coat: Interior Epoxy Enamel. 2 coats required.
1) Moore: Iron-clad tile-like enamel.
2) PPG: Pitt-Glaze Polyester-Epoxy
3) P&L Palguard Epoxy coating, gloss
C. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces:
1. Semigloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Latex-based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.
1) Moore: Regal First Coat Interior Latex Primer&Underbody
#216.
2) PPG: 17-10 Quick-Dry Interior Latex Primer-Sealer.
3) P&L: Z/F 1001 Suprime "1" 100 Percent Acrylic Multi-
Purpose Primer.
b. First and Second Coats: Odorless, semigloss, alkyd, interior enamel applied at spreading
rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 2.6 mils.
1) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Dulamel#207.
2) PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Low Odor Interior Enamel Wall and
Trim Semi-Gloss Oil.
3) P&L: S/D 5700 Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel.
D. Woodwork: Provide the following paint finish systems over new, interior wood surfaces:
1. Semigloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.
PAINTING 09900- 12
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. Aluminum: Provide the following finish systems over exterior aluminum surfaces including sectional
overhead doors(windows and curtain wall are factory finished):
1. Full-Gloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Rust-inhibitive, acrylic-or alkyd-based, metal primer, as recommended by the
manufacturer for use over aluminum, applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils.
1) Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint#163.
2) PPG: 90-709 Pitt-Tech Primer.
3) P&L: Z/F 1003 Suprime "3" Interior/Exterior Latex Metal
Primer.
b. First and Second Coats: Full-gloss, alkyd enamel applied at spreading rate recommended
by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils.
1) Moore: Impervo Enamel #133.
2) PPG: 6-282 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Gloss Oil Enamel.
3) P&L: S 4500 Series Tech-Gard Maintenance Gloss Enamel.
3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Floors: Provide the following paint systems over interior concrete floors: (See Alternate No.
3 -Section 01030)
1. One coat: Low Sheen.
1) Moore: Silicone Acrylic Concrete Stain
B. Concrete Masonry Units: Provide the following finish systems over interior concrete masonry block
units:
1. Semigloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over an undercoat and a filled surface.
a. Block Filler: High-performance, latex-based, block filler applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than
5.0 mils.
1) Moore: Moorcraft Interior&Exterior Block Filler#173.
2) PPG: 6-7 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Masonry Latex Block
Filler.
3) P&L: Z 98 Pro-Hide Plus Latex Block Filler.
b. Undercoat: Interior, alkyd-or latex-based, enamel undercoater, as recommended by the
manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.
1) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody#217.
2) PPG: 6-855 Speedhide Interior Latex Enamel Undercoater.
3) P& L: S/D 1012 Suprime "12" Interior Alkyd Wall Primer.
PAINTING 09900 - 11
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: One-coat, waterbome, semitransparent, penetrating wood stain.
a. First and Second Coat: Semitransparent, exterior, acrylic-latex, wood stain applied at
spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer.
1) Moore: Moorwood Acrylic Semi-Transparent Stain#93
2) PPG: Rez 77-460 Exterior Semi-Transparent Latex Stain.
3) P&L: Z 87 STAINShield Penetrating Latex Rustic Stain.
C. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not
required on shop-primed items.
1. Full-Gloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer.
a. Primer: Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils.
1) Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint#163.
2) PPG: 6-208 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Rust Inhibitive
Steel Primer.
3) P&L: S 4551 Tech-Gard High Performance Rust-Inhibitor
Primer.
b. First and Second Coats: Full-gloss, exterior, alkyd enamel applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than
3.0 mils.
1) Moore: Impervo Enamel#133.
2) PPG: 6-282 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Gloss-Oil Enamel.
3) P&L: S 4500 Series Tech-Gard Maintenance Gloss Enamel.
D. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated (galvanized) metal
surfaces:
1. Full-Gloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a galvanized metal primer.
a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.
1) Moore: IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer#155.
2) PPG: 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior
Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel.
3) P&L: Z/F 1003 Suprime "3" Interior/Exterior Latex Metal
Primer.
b. First and Second Coats: Full-gloss, exterior, alkyd enamel applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than
2.6 mils.
1) Moore: Impervo Enamel #133.
2) PPG: 6-282 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Gloss-Oil Enamel
3) P &L: S 4500 Series Tech-Gard Maintenance Gloss Enamel.
PAINTING 09900- 10
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Provide satin finish for final coats.
L. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of
rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections.
M. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or
repaint work not complying with requirements.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint
materials from the site.
1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by
washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct
damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings
provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.
1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Plywood: Provide the following finish systems over exterior plywood including MDO plywood:
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Exterior, acrylic-latex, wood primer applied at spreading rate recommended by
the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils.
1) Moore: Moorwhite Primer#100.
2) PPG: 72-1 Sun-Proof Exterior House&Trim Wood Primer
Flat--Latex.
3) P &L: S/D 1002 Suprime "2" Exterior Latex Wood Primer.
b. First and Second Coats: Flat, exterior, acrylic-emulsion paint applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than
2.2 mils.
1) Moore: MoorLife Latex House Paint#105.
2) PPG: 72 Line Sun-Proof Exterior Flat Latex House Paint.
3) P &L: Z/F 1900 Series Vapex Latex Flat House Paint.
B. Stained Wood: Provide the following stain finish systems over exterior wood:
PAINTING 09900-9
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
edges, comers, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to
that of flat surfaces.
4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces
until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb
pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or
lose adhesion.
C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size
for the surface or item being painted.
2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the
manufacturer for the material and texture required.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended
spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the
manufacturer.
E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items
exposed in equipment rooms and in area exposed to view.
F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports.
2. Heat exchangers.
3. Tanks. Amok
4. Ductwork.
5. Insulation.
6. Motors and mechanical equipment.
7. Accessory items.
G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Conduit and fittings.
2. Switchgear.
3. Panelboards.
H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with
pores filled.
I. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the
manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated
by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first
coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no bum through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
J. Pigmented(Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque
surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
K. Transparent (Clear)Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster.
Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes,
or other surface imperfections. - wk
PAINTING 09900-8
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is
free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal
fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.
D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during
application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain
material before using.
3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats
of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide
sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques
best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
1. Paint, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules.
2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental
to formation of a durable paint film.
3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,
convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place.
Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired
protection.
5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or
furniture with prime coat only.
6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through
registers or grilles.
7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.
8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.
9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match exterior.
10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise
prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface
deterioration.
1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application
method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by
the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to
manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.
2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats
until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure
PAINTING 09900-7
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that
could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. ,
1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will
not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written
instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and
mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk,
dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners
or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.
a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.
b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If
surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this
condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other
etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with
ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting.
3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits,
and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.
a. Scrape and clean small dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or
other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and
imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when
dried.
b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends,
faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and
paneling.
C. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.
d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall
construction occurs on backside.
e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or
sealer immediately on delivery.
f. Backprime exterior trim.
4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated;
remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or
mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's(SSPC)
recommendations.
a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to
requirements of SSPC-SP 10.
b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before
priming.
C. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush,
clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same
primer as the shop coat.
PAINTING 09900-6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Benjamin Moore&Co. (Moore).
2. PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG).
3. Pratt&Lambert, Inc. (P&L).
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that are
compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types
specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be
acceptable. Professional grade paints are not acceptable.
1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or
materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion
of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and
certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.
C. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be
performed for compliance with paint application requirements.
1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces
receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions
within a particular area.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of
the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish
materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates
primed by others.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and
similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible
because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation
and painting.
1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using
Awsk workers skilled in the trades involved.
PAINTING 09900 -5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system
from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:
1. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description(generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
8. VOC content.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient
temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.
Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and
health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F.
B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F.
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at
temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed
and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying
periods.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products in the paint schedules.
B. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint schedules by use of
shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parentheses:
PAINTING 09900-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
4. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured
at a 60-degree meter.
5. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60-
degree meter.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers.
1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and
cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by
manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label
analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for
use.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for
each type of finish-coat material indicated.
1. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated.
C. Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual
conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate.
1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use
representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color,
and texture are achieved.
2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each sample for
location and application.
3. Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only:
a. Concrete: Provide two 4-inch-square samples for each color and finish.
b. Concrete Masonry: Provide two 4-by-8-inch samples of masonry, with mortar joint in
the center, for each finish and color.
C. Painted Wood: Provide two 12-inch-square samples of each color and material on
hardboard.
d. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4-by-8-inch samples of natural-or stained-wood
finish on actual wood surfaces.
e. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4-inch-square samples of flat metal and two 8-inch-long
samples of solid metal for each color and finish.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,
names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system
applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful
in-service performance.
PAINTING 09900 -3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
f. Distribution cabinets.
2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces:
a. Foundation spaces.
b. Furred areas.
C. Ceiling plenums.
d. Pipe spaces.
e. Duct shafts.
f. Elevator shafts.
3. Finished metal surfaces include the following:
a. Anodized aluminum.
b. Stainless steel.
C. Chromium plate.
d. Copper.
e. Bronze and brass.
4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
a. Valve and damper operators.
b. Linkages.
C. Sensing devices.
d. Motor and fan shafts.
5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other
code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature
plates.
D. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Bituminous Concrete Paving" for traffic-marking paint.
2. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop priming structural steel.
3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal.
4. Division 6 Section "Finished Carpentry " for shop priming interior finished carpentry.
5. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for shop priming steel doors and frames.
6. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation for gypsum board.
E. Alternates: Refer to Division 1 Section "Alternates" for description of Work in this Section affected by
alternates.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-
degree meter.
2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60-
degree meter.
3. Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60-
degree meter.
PAINTING 09900-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 09900 -PAINTING
PART 1 -GENERAL
(FELED SUB-BID)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Painting is stipulated as a Filed Sub-Bid under Paragraph D, Item 2 of the Form for General Bid.
B. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the Form For Sub-Bid fumished by the Awarding Authority, as
required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. The time and place for
submission of Filed Sub-Bids are set forth in the Invitation to Bid.
C. The work to be done under this section is shown on Drawings numbered: T1, 1-1-1-5, S1-S8, Al-A16,
FP1-FP4, P1-P4, H1-H6, SE1, E1-E6
1.2 RELATED DOCUMEN-TS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. See Section 01030 -Altemates
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following:
1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces including sectional overhead doors.
2. Exposed interior items and surfaces including sectional overhead doors.
3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop
priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
B. Paint exposed surfaces. except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be
painted or is to remain unfinished . If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a
surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not
schedules indicate paint or finishes. If the schedules do not indicate paint or finish, the Architect will
select from standard paints and finishes available.
1. Painting include field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts, hangers, exposed
steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment.
C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels.
1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:
a. Solid plasxic toilet enclosures.
b. Metal lockers.
c' Elevator equipment.
d. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
e. Light fixtures.
PAINTING 09900 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton,Massachusetts
,,,, uninterrupted except at divider strips, sawn joints or other types of joints (if any), indicated or
requried.
B. Grout: Apply grout where required at cracks, etc, according to manufacturer's instructions as required
for proper installation where required.
C. Primer: Apply base coat at rate and by method recommended by manufacturer.
D. Non-Slip Grit: Broadcast grit into wet base coat in manner to achieve uniform coverage by method
recommended by manufacturer at a rate of 115 lbs. per 100 square feet.
E. Finish Coats: After base coat has cured sufficiently to produce a firm, hard and dry surface, apply
finish coats after vacuuming of loose particles and dust. Allow each coat to dry before subsequent
applications.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove surface blemishes from installed surfaces using neutral cleaners and procedures as
recommended by manufacturer of fluid-applied resilient flooring materials. Protect installed flooring
from damage by use of heavy Kraft paper or other covering.
B. Finishing: After completion of project and just prior to final inspection of work, thoroughly clean
floors and apply a final finish coat, over scuffed or worn areas in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
END OF SECTION 09670 (ALTERNATE NO. 3 - SEE SECTION 01030)
FLUID-APPLIED RESILIENT FLOORING 09670 -3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton,Massachusetts
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. General Polymers 1/4 inch "TPM 115" heavy duty troweled flooring system designed for fire house
flooring
B. Dex-o-Tex "Cheminert K" 1/4 inch chemical resistant system with high-solids, non-ambering, chemical
resistant final urethane sealer/topcoat
C. Stonhard's 1/4 inch. "STONCLAD HT" with high-solids, non-ambering, chemical resistant final
urethane sealer/topcoat.
2.2 FLUID-APPLIED RESILIENT FLOORING MATERIALS
A. Grout Coat: Manufacturer's recommended standard grout coat as required.
B. Epoxy Base Coat: Manufacturer's standard urethane resin formulation designed for base coat use for
application and color indicated.
C. Urethane Base Coat: Manufacturer's standard urethane resin formulation designed for base coat use
with embedded grit and for application and color indicated.
D. Non-Slip Grit: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum oxide, quartz grit or slip inhibitor.
E. Urethane Finish Coats: Manufacturer's standard urethane resin formulation designed for finish coat use
over type of base coat and for application indicated.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 SUBSTRATION PREPARATION
A. General: Perform preparations and cleaning procedures in compliance with flooring manufacturer's
instructions for particular substrate conditions indicated, and as herein specifed.
B. Concrete Surfaces: After removal of dust, debris and dirt perform acid etch test to assure concrete is
free of curing compounds, grime, grease and foreign substances. Use manufacturer's recommended
cleaner to stripping deposits. Do not proceed with finishing operations until concrete has fully cured
28 days.
C. Protect other surfaces not to be coated by masking off as required to protect areas from spatter, foot
tracking and spills. Protect floor grates and coverplates.
3.2 MATERIALS PREPAPATION
A. Carefully mix and prepare materials used in fluid-applied resilient flooring to comply with
manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply each component of fluid-applied resilient flooring system in compliance with A
manufacturer's directions to produce a uniform monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated,
FLUID-APPLIED RESILIENT FLOORING 09670-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton,Massachusetts
SECTION 09670 -FLUID-APPLIED RESILIENT FLOORING (Alternate No. 3)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of fluid-applied resilient flooring is indicated on drawings and in schedules.
B. Resilient tile flooring, resilient sheet flooring, and resilient flooring accessories are specified in
Division-9 section "Resilient Flooring".
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain fluid-applied resilient flooring materials including grout primers,
base coat, anti-slip grit, and finish coates from a single manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer who has successfully completed, within the last 10 years at
least 50 fluid-applied resilient flooring applications similar in type and size to that of this project and
who will assign mechanics from these earlier applications to this project, of which one will serve as
lead mechanic.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of fluid-applied resilient flooring
required.
B. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Submit manufacturer's standard color charts showing full range
of colors available.
C. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's written instructions for recommended maintenance
practices.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain substrate temperature and room temperature before, during and after installatin in compliance
with flooring manufacturer's instructions. Provide adequate ventilation during application and curing
periods.
1.6 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in new, unopened containers with intact factory-applied labels.
B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's directions to prevent deterioration from moisture, heat,
A"W cold, direct sunlight, or other causes.
FLUID-APPLIED RESILIENT FLOORING 09670 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1) 1-1/2 inches
d. Thickness: 3/16-inch tapering to 1/8 inch at back edge.
e. Size: Lengths and depths to fit each stair tread in one piece.
3. Rubber Risers: Smooth, flat, toeless risers, 1/8 inch thick by height and length to cover risers.
E. Rubber Accessory Molding: Provide rubber accessory molding complying with the following:
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors produced for rubber
accessory molding complying with requirements indicated.
2. Product Description: Carpet edge for glue-down applications. Carpet nosing. Nosing for rubber
tile. Reducer strip for resilient flooring. Tile and carpet joiner.
END OF SECTION 09651
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 - 8
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and
patterns produced for tile complying with requirements indicated.
3. Class: Class I-A (homogenous rubber tile, solid color
4. Overall Thickness: 0.130 inches
5. Size: 18.125 by 18.125 inches or 39.37 by 39.37 inches.
6. Molded-Pattem Figure and Dimensions: Raised discs.
7. Provide wax-embibed composition.
B. Vinyl Composition Tile: Provide vinyl composition floor tile complying with the following:
1. As follows:
a. Armstrong World Industries: Excelon Stonex
b. Azrok Industries: 800 Series
C. Kentile Floors, Inc.: Architectural Criterion.
d. Tarkett, Inc.: Basics.
2. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and
patterns produced for tile complying with requirements indicated.
3. Class: Class 2 (through-pattem tile).
4. Wearing Surface: Smooth.
5. Thickness: 1/8 inch
6. Size: 12 by 12 inches
C. Rubber Wall Base: Provide rubber wall base complying with the following:
1. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and
patterns produced for rubber wall base complying with requirements indicated except match
specified rubber tile at rubber tile areas. Rubber base in areas other than rubber tile areas:
Manufacturer:
a. Mercer Products Co.
b. Johnsonite Div. of Duramax Inc.
C. Roppe Corp.
2. Style: Cove with top-set toe.
3. Minimum Thickness: 1/8 inch
4. Height: 4 inches
5. Lengths: Coils in lengths standard with manufacturer, but not less than 96 feet
6. Outside Corners: Premolded.
7. Inside Comers: Job formed.
D. Rubber Stair Treads and Accessories: Provide rubber stair treads and accessories complying with the
following:
1. Color and Pattern: Match color and pattern of rubber tile
2. Rubber Stair Treads: Type 2 design (designed) products complying with the following
requirements:
a. Type 2 Design: As specified by product designation indicated above. Raised-disc pattern.
b. Nosing Style: Square.
C. Nosing Height: As follows, measured from top of tread to bottom edge of nosing:
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 -7
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Place resilient accessories so they are butted to adjacent materials and bond to substrates with adhesive.
Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed.
D. Apply resilient products to stairs as indicated and according to manufacturer's written installation
instructions.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing resilient products:
1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by resilient product
manufacturers.
2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly.
3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by flooring manufacturer.
4. Damp-mop floor to remove marks and soil.
B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and
placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection
methods indicated or recommended in writing by flooring manufacturer.
1. Apply protective floor polish to floor surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and
surface blemishes, if recommended in writing by manufacturer.
a. Use commercially available product acceptable to flooring manufacturer.
2. Cover products installed on floor surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection
for Substantial Completion.
3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor surfaces. Place plywood or hardboard
panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over
panels without moving panels.
C. Clean floor surfaces not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish
date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean products according to manufacturer's
written recommendations.
1. Before cleaning, strip protective floor polish that was applied after completing installation only
if required to restore polish finish and if recommended by flooring manufacturer.
2. After cleaning, reapply polish to floor surfaces to restore protective floor finish according to
flooring manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate with Owner's maintenance
program.
3.6 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING SCHEDULE
A. Molded-Rubber Floor Tife:-provide molded-rubber floor tile complying with the following:
1. As follows:
a. Norament No. 354- Article 378.
b. Endura Series .130 round.
C. Estrie Products International.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 -6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured
and packaged, if so numbered. Cut tiles neatly around all fixtures. Discard broken, cracked, chipped,
or deformed tiles.
1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction.
D. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and pipes, outlets, edgings, door
frames, thresholds, and nosings. Extend tile under built-in furniture, cabinets and fixtures.
E. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining
marking device.
G. Install tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar items in finished floor areas.
Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed on covers. Tightly
adhere edges to perimeter of floor around covers and to covers.
H. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to comply with
tile manufacturer's written instructions, including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and
adhesive open and working times.
1. Provide completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
I. Hand roll tiles according to tile manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install resilient accessories according to manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
1. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent
pieces aligned.
2. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous
contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
3. Do not stretch base during installation.
4. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient
wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
5. Install premolded outside comers before installing straight pieces.
6. Form outside corners on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, without
whitening at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips
perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without
removing more than half the wall base thickness.
7. Form inside comers on job, from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, by cutting an
inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where comer is formed. Shave back of
base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 -5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate
conditions indicated. '`
C. Resilient Edge Strips: Of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of tiles, and in
maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of resilient products will occur, with
Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements. Verify that substrates and
conditions are satisfactory for resilient product installation and comply with requirements specified.
B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials
that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by
performing bond and moisture tests recommended by flooring manufacturer.
2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete" for slabs receiving resilient flooring.
3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with resilient product manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing
substrates indicated to receive resilient products.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to
fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended
by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation. After
cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 TILE INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at
opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal
less than one-half of a the at perimeter.
1. Lay tiles square with room axis, unless otherwise indicated.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 -4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
F. Do not install flooring over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with
adhesive, as determined by flooring manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective
covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. Furnish not less than one box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern,
class, wearing surface, and size of resilient tile flooring installed.
2. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for each 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type,
color, pattern, and size of resilient accessory installed.
3. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for each
designation in the Resilient Tile Flooring Schedule at the end of Part 3.
2.2 RESILIENT TILE
A. Rubber Floor Tile: Products complying with ASTM F 1344 and with requirements specified in the
Resilient Tile Flooring Schedule.
B. Vinyl Composition Floor Tile: Products complying with ASTM F 1066 and with requirements
specified in the Resilient Tile Flooring Schedule.
2.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES
A. Rubber Wall Base: Products complying with FS SS-W-40, Type I and with requirements specified in
the Resilient Tile Flooring Schedule.
B. Rubber Stair Treads: Products of style suitable for use indicated and complying with FS RR-T-650,
Composition A and with requirements specified in the Resilient Tile Flooring Schedule.
C. Risers: Products of same manufacturer as stair treads and complying with requirements specified in the
Resilient Tile Flooring Schedule.
D. Rubber Accessory Moldings: Products complying with requirements specified in the Resilient Tile
Flooring Schedule.
2.4 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based formulation
provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for applications indicated.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 -3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has
specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this Project and with a record of
successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of product specified from one source with
resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without
delaying the Work.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire-test-response
characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by a testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 W/sq. cm or greater when tested per ASTM E 648.
2. Smoke Density: Maximum specific optical density of 450 or less when tested per ASTM E 662.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons and containers, each
bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling
instructions.
B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained between
50 and 90 deg F.
C. Store tiles on flat surfaces.
D. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours before installation, unless
longer conditioning period is recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F in spaces to receive products
for at least 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for at least 48 hours after installation,
unless manufacturer's written recommendations specify longer time periods. After postinstallation
period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be
installed.
C. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation and for time period after installation recommended in
writing by manufacturer.
D. Install tiles and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
E. Where demountable partitions and other items are indicated for installation on top of resilient tile
flooring, install tile before these items are installed.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 -2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 09651 -RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
(FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Resilient Tile Flooring is stipulated as a Filed Sub-Bid under Paragraph D, Item 2 of the Form For
General Bid.
B. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the Form For Sub-Bid furnished by the Awarding Authority, as
required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. The time and place for
submission of Filed Sub-Bids are set forth in the Invitation To Bid.
C. The work to be done under this section is shown on Drawings numbered: T1, L1-L5, S1-S8, Al-A16,
FP1-FP4, Pl-P4, H1-H6, SE1, E1-E6
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
""` 1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Rubber floor tile.
2. Vinyl composition floor tile.
3. Rubber floor tile in elevator cab.
4. Resilient wall base and accessories.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units
showing the full range of colors and patterns available for each type of product indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: Full-size tiles of each different color and pattern of resilient floor tile
specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics.
1. For resilient accessories, manufacturer's standard-size samples, but not less than 12 inches
long, of each resilient accessory color and pattern specified.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of resilient products certifying that each product
furnished complies with requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: For resilient floor tile to include in the maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension
system members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish
damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to
permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 09511
A4%,
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 8
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of the supporting structure or of the ceiling suspension system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by
bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings
that interfere with the location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension
system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes
or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling
loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of 3
tight turns. Connect hangers either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other
devices that are secure, that are appropriate for substrate, and that will not deteriorate or
otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing
members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate
for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install
hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or
elevated temperatures.
6. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of 4 tight
turns. Fasten bracing wires to concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.
7. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers,
unless otherwise shown: and provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member.
C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where
necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings
before they are installed.
2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3
inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1!8 inch in 12 feet.
Miter comers accuratel-• and connect securely.
3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.
Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system runners and
edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide neat, precise fit.
1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:
a. Install panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to short axis of space.
2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in
firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.
3. Paint the cut panel edges remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel
surfaces using coating recommended for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.
4. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated and in areas required by governing regulations, or for
fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated
or required.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -7
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening,
nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior
concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound.
C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, acoustical sealants that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp.
b. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Company.
2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a. BA-98; Pecora Corp.
b. Tremco Acoustical Sealant; Tremco, Inc.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect
ceiling installation and anchorage. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish the layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and conform to the
layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per
manufacturer's instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C 636.
2. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with
ASTM E 580.
3. CISCA Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA "Recommendations for
Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings."
4. CISCA Guidelines for Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with CISCA "Guidelines
for Seismic Restraint of Direct-Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies."
5. U.B.C. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems: U.B.C. Standard No. 47-18.
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Size: Select wire diameter so that its stress. at 3 times the hanger design load C 635,
Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than the yield stress of wire, but provide not le 1 0.106-
inch-diameter wire.
E. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated, or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
F. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide, formed with 0.0396 Bch-thick
galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 446, G 90 Coating Designation, witn bolted
connections and 5/16-inch-diameter bolts.
G. Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated, or if not indicated, manufscturer's
standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension
systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material and finish as that used for exposed flanges
of suspension system runners.
1. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped-edge molding that forms reveal of
same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension
member.
2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit
penetration exactly.
2.5 NON-FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED, DIRECT-HUNG SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Wide-Face, Single-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from
prepainted or electrolytic zinc-coated, cold-rolled steel sheet, with prepainted 15/16-inch-wide flanges;
• other characteristics as follows:
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.
2. Finish: Painted white.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, suspension systems that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Wide-Face, Single-Web, Steel Suspension Systems:
a. 511 Snap-Grid System; Chicago Metallic Corporation.
b. 500 Snap-Grid System; Chicago Metallic Corporation.
C. Prelude ML 15/16" Exposed Tee System (w/7300 m.r.); Armstrong World Industries,
Inc.
d. DX 24 System; USG Interiors, Inc.
e. Prelude ML 15/16" Exposed Tee System (w/7301 m.r.); Armstrong World Industries,
Inc.
2.6 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable,
nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following requirements:
1. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and
openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per
ASTM E 90.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.3 CEILINGS OF NODULAR, CAST, OR MOLDED, MINERAL-BASE ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A. Panel Characteristics: Type III, Form 1 acoustical panels per ASTM E 1264, with painted finish,
complying with pattern and other requirements indicated below:
1. Pattern: Panels matching pattern indicated by reference to manufacturer's standard product
designations in 'Manufacturers" Article.
a. Designation CD (perforated with small holes and fissured).
b. Designation CDK(perforated with small holes, fissured, and surface scored).
C. Designation CE (perforated with small holes and lightly textured).
d. Designation CEI(perforated with small holes, lightly textured, and embossed).
e. Designation CEK(perforated with small holes, lightly textured, and surface scored).
f. Designation D (fissured).
g. Designation E (lightly textured).
h. Designation EI(lightly textured and embossed).
i. Designation EJ(lightly textured and embossed-in-register).
j. Designation F (heavily textured).
k. Designation FK(heavily textured and surface scored).
1. Designation G (smooth).
m. Designation J (embossed-in-register).
n. Designation JK(embossed-in-register and surface scored).
2. Color/Light Reflectance Coefficient: White/LR 0.80.
3. Color: Color
4. Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC 0.70.
5. Ceiling Sound Transmission Class: CSTC 40.
6. Edge Detail: Reveal sized-to-fit flange of exposed suspension system members.
7. Thickness: 3/4 inch.
8. Size: 24 by 24 inches
9. Size: 24 by 48 inches.
B. Suspension System Type: As described below and specified in Part 2 "Non-Fire-Resistance-Rated,
Direct-Hung Suspension Systems" Article:
1. Wide-face, single-web, steel suspension system.
2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of
types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable ASTM C 635
requirements.
B. Finishes and Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system
indicated.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung
unless otherwise indicated.
D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1. Zinc-Coated Carbon Steel Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system components with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system components(if any), and partition assemblies(if any).
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective
covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of amount
installed.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following for each panel type
indicated:
1. Non-Fire-Resistance-Rated, Nodular, cast or molded, Water-Felted, Mineral-Base Panels:
a. Cirrus Angles Tegular White; Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Softone Cashmere; The Celotex Corporation.
C. Acoustic Frost; USG Interiors, Inc.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that
comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light
reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mounting Method for Measuring Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Type E-400 [plenum
mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from the test surface] per
ASTM E 795.
2. Test Method for Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): Where acoustical panel ceilings are specified
to have a CAC, provide units identical to those tested per ASTM E 1414 by a qualified testing
agency.
B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product
type.
1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by reference to
ASTM E 1264 pattern designations and not to manufacturers' proprietary product designations,
provide products selected by Architect fi-om each manufacturer's full range of products that
comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical
performance, edge detail, and size.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Set of 12-inch-long samples of exposed suspension system members, including moldings, for
each color and system type required.
F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,
names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
G. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency that are based on its testing of current
products for compliance of acoustical panel ceilings and components with requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed acoustical panel ceilings
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful
in-service performance.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following
requirements:
1. Fire-response tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. Qualified testing
and inspecting agencies include Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Warnock Hersey, or another
agency that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that performs testing and follow-
up services.
2. Surface-burning characteristics of acoustical panels comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A
materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84.
C. Single-Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel from a ++
single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties without delaying the Work.
D. Single-Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of suspension system from a
single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties without delaying the Work.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to Project site in original, unopened
packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from
moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture
content.
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces
are enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in spaces is completed and dry, work above ceilings is
complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained at the levels indicated
for Project when occupied for its intended use. Amok
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 09511 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
(KLED SUB-BID REQUIRED)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Acousitcal Panel Ceilings is stipulated as a Filed Sub-Bid under Paragraph D, Item 2 of the Form For
General Bid.
B. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the Form For Sub-Bid furnished by the Awarding Authority, as
required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. The time and place for
submission of Filed Sub-Bids are set forth in the Invitation To Bid.
C. The work to be done under this section is shown on Drawings numbered: T1, Ll-L5, S1-S8, Al-A16,
FP1-FP4, P1-P4, H1-H6, SE1, E1-E6
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Se.-tion.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceilings composed of acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
C. Coordination drawings for reflected ceiling plans drawn accurately to scale and coordinating
penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
1. Ceiling suspension system members.
2. Method of attaching suspension system hangers to building structure.
3. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures; air outlets and inlets; speakers; sprinklers; and
special moldings at walls, column penetrations, and other junctures of acoustical ceilings with
adjoining construction.
4. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot.
D. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual acoustical
panels or sections of panels and sections of suspension system members showing the full range of
colors, textures, and patterns available for each ceiling assembly indicated.
E. Samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples of size indicated
below. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the
full range of variations expected.
1. 6-inch-square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern, and color.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.6 WALL TILE INSTALLATION
A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Ceramic Tile
Wall Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI setting-bed
standards.
B. Joint Widths: Install tile on walls with the following joint widths:
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch.
2. Wall Tile: 1/16 inch.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of
foreign matter.
1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
2. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout
manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Protect metal
surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface
with clean water before and after cleaning.
3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer that is
acceptable to brick and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from
Amok clogging drains.
B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded,
and otherwise defective tile work.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer,
that ensure tile is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to
completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy
covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.
2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed.
D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.
END OF SECTION 09310
CERAMIC TILE 09310-9
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA
installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering
without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and
comers without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible
surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned
joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or
covers overlap tile.
E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles
on floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both
directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint
widths, unless otherwise indicated.
1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets the same width as joints within tile
sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.
F. Lay out the wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
G. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following tile installation standards:
I. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement, dry-set, commercial portland cement, and latex-
portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10.
Amok
3.4 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION
A. Install waterproofing to comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to produce a
waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.
B. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it
is watertight.
3.5 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Ceramic Tile Floor Installation Schedule,
including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 series of tile installation
standards.
B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch.
C. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed as
abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would otherwise
be exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish.
CERAMIC TILE 09310- 8
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
installed tile.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free from oil, waxy films, and curing
compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 series of tile
installation standards for installations indicated.
2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of
work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile.
3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not
coordinated, adjust latter in consultation with Architect.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or
silicone and are incompatible with tile-setting materials by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum
sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush.
B. Provide concrete substrates for the floors installed with dry-set or latex-portland cement mortars that
comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards
for installations indicated.
1. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile-setting material manufacturer's written
instructions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions.
2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample submittals,
verify that tile has been blended in the factory and packaged so tile units taken from one package show
the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not
factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent
adhesion or staining of exposed tile surfaces by grout, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence
of mortar and grout by precoating them with a continuous film of temporary protective coating
indicated below, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces:
1. Petroleum paraffin wax or grout release.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards
in "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials
and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
CERAMIC TILE 09310-7
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. For wall applications, provide nonsagging, latex-portland cement mortar complying with
ANSI At 18.4 for mortar of this type defined in Section F-2.1.2.
C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI At 18.4, composed as follows:
1. Prepackaged Dry-Mortar Mix: Factory-prepared mixture of Portland cement; dry, redispersible,
ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients to which only water needs to be added at
Project site.
a. For wall applications, provide nonsagging, latex-portland cement mortar complying with
ANSI At 18.4 for mortar of this type defined in Section F-2.1.2.
b. Mortar for mortar bed installation: ANSI A108.1
2.7 GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Commercial Portland Cement Grout (Sanded Grout): ANSI A118.6, color as indicated, for joints 1/8
inch or wider.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based
formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.
B. Temporary Protective Coating: Provide product indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed
surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; is compatible with tile, mortar, and grout
products; and is easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile.
1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with a
melting point of 120 to 140 deg F per ASTM D 87.
2. Terrazzo Shower Basins: Precast basins size as shown, conform with NTMA Specifications,
Manufacturers standard full range of colors.
3. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially
formulated and recommended for use as a temporary protective coating for tile.
C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout
surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.
2.9 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers'
written instructions.
B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other
procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics
for installations indicated.
CERAMIC TILE 09310-6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION 6, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
J C. Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and with the
following requirements:
1. Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile wi iicable.
2. Shapes: As follows, selected from manu;facturer's standard shapes:
a. Base for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Coved.
b. Base for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Straight.
C. Wainscot Cap for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose.
d. External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose.
e. Internal Comers: Field-butted square corners, except with coved base anL cap angle
pieces designed to member with stretcher shapes.
2.4 STONE THRESHOLDS
A. General: Provide stone thresholds that are uniform in color and finish, fabricated to sizes and profiles
indicated to provide transition between tile surfaces and adjoining finished floor surfaces.
1. Fabricate thresholds to heights indicated, but not more than 1/2 inch above adjoining finished
floor surfaces, with transition edges beveled on a slope of no greater than 1:2.
B. Marble Thresholds: Provide marble thresholds complying with ASTM C 503 requirements for exterior
use and with a minimum abrasive-hardness value of 10 per ASTM C 241.
1. Provide white, honed marble complying with the Marble Institute of America's Group A
requirements for soundness.
2.5 WATERPROOFING FOR THIN-SET TILE INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Provide products that comply with ANSI A118.10 and the descriptions in this Article.
B. Latex-Rubber Waterproofing: Manufacturer's standard factory-packaged, job-mixed, proprietary, 2-
part formulation consisting of liquid-latex rubber and powder for trowel application and glass-fiber-
fabric reinforcing.
1. Latex-Rubber Waterproofing:
a. Trowel & Seal Waterproof Membrane; Custom Building Products.
b. Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane; Laticrete International, Inc.
C. S-9000; Summitville Tiles, Inc.
2.6 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement Mortar Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.1A and
as specified below:
B. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.1.
CERAMIC TILE 09310-5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL 1404,,,
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for
Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
1. Provide tile complying with Standard Grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated.
2. For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified in Part 1
"Definitions" Article.
B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards
referenced in "Setting Materials" and "Grouting Materials" articles.
C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout,
and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance
characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements:
1. Match Architect's samples.
2. Match colors, textures, and patterns indicated by referencing manufacturer's standard
designations for these characteristics.
3. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors, textures, and patterns
for products of type indicated.
4. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining flat tile.
D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample
submittals, blend tile in the factory and package so tile units taken from one package show the same
range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.
E. Mounting: Where factory-mounted tile is required, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as
standard with manufacturer, unless another mounting method is indicated.
1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile
assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for
these kinds of installations and has a record of successful in-service performance.
F. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under the type, protect exposed
surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating them with a continuous film of
petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.
2.3 TILE PRODUCTS
A. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Provide factory-mounted flat tile complying with the following
requirements:
1. Composition: Porcelain.
2. Module Size: 2 by 2 inches .
3. Nominal Thickness: 1/4 inch(6.35 mm).
4. Face: Plain with cushion edges.
B. Glazed Wall Tile: Provide flat tile complying with the following requirements:
1. Module Size: 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches.
2. Thickness: 5/16 inch.
3. Face: Plain with modified square edges or cushion edges.
4. Mounting: Factory back-mounted.
CERAMIC TILE 09310-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION 1 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and l s itact until
time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packagt
B. Prevent damage or contamination to maiana;s by water, freezing, foreign matter, and o; -cases.
C. Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from
contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove
coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is completed and ambient
temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained to comply with referenced standards and
manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to c-ompliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
000k 1. Tile Products:
a. American Olean Tile Company.
b. Buchtal Corporation USA.
C. Dal-Tile Corporation.
d. Mannington Ceramic Tile.
2. Tile-Setting and-Grouting Materials:
a. American Olean Tile Company.
b. Atlas Minerals&Chemicals, Inc.
C. Boiardi Products Corporation.
d. Bonsal: W.R. Bonsal Company.
e. Bostik.
f. C-Cure Corporation.
g. Custom Building Products.
h. Dal-Tile Corporation.
i. DAP, Inc.
j. Laticrete International, Inc.
k. Mapei Corporation.
1. Southern Grouts&Mortars, Inc.
m. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
n. TEC Incorporated.
CERAMIC TILE 09310- 3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Shop Drawings: For the following:
1. Tile patterns and locations.
2. Widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in the
substrates and finished tile surfaces.
C. Tile Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of
tiles showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type and composition of
tile indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.
D. Grout Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual sections of grout
showing the full range of colors available for each type of grout indicated.
E. Samples for Verification: Of each item listed below, prepared on Samples of size and construction
indicated. Where products involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing
the full range of variations expected.
1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and texture required, at least 12 inches
square, mounted on braced cementitious backer units, and with grouted joints using product
complying with specified requirements and approved for completed work in color or colors
selected by Architect.
2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color required.
3. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths.
F. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the products furnished comply with
requirements.
G. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,
names of architects and owners, and other information specified.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed tile installations similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance.
B. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of tile
from one source with resources to provide products from the same production run for each contiguous
area of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work.
C. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for
each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one
source or producer.
D. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section
from one source and by a single manufacturer for each product:
1. Stone thresholds.
2. Waterproofing.
CERAMIC TILE 09310-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 09310-CERAMIC TILE
(FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Ceramic Tile Flooring is stipulated as a Filed Sub-Bid under Paragraph D, Item 2 of the Form For
General Bid.
B. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the Form For Sub-Bid furnished by the Awarding Authority, as
required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. The time and place for
submission of Filed Sub-Bids are set forth in the Invitation To Bid.
C. The work to be done under this section is shown on Drawings numbered : T1, L1-L5, S1-S8, Al-A16,
FP1-FP4, Pl-P4, H1-H6, SE1, E1-E6
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract., including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Ceramic mosaic tile floor and base for mortar bed installation. T.C.A. Spec. F112-95
2. Ceramic tile floor and base for thin set installation, T.C.A. Spec. F122-95
3. Glazed wall tile. T.C. A. Spec. W202-95
4. Waterproof membrane for thin-set tile installations.
5. Stone thresholds installed as part of tile installations.
6. Terrazzo shower basins
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for monolithic slab finishes specified for tile
substrates.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus joint width
indicated.
B. Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined v3 ANSI A137.1.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of tile, mortar, grout, and other products specified.
CERAMIC TILE 09310- 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure
gypsum board assemblies are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09255
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 -9
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. General: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to
fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufacturer's
directions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners.
B. Install comerbead at external corners.
C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed. Provide edge trim type
with face flange formed to receive joint compound, except where other types are indicated.
1. Install LC-bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back flange
can be attached to framing or supporting substrate.
2. Install L-bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed.
3.7 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, flanges of comerbead, edge trim, control joints,
penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board
surfaces for decoration.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting-type joint compound.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim accessories having flanges not
requiring tape.
D. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints and to flanges of trim accessories as recommended by trim
accessory manufacturer.
E. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish per GA-214.
1. Level 1 for ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of
finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies.
2. Level 5 at all gypsum board surfaces unless indicated otherwise.
F. Use one of the following joint compound combinations as applicable to the finish levels specified:
G. Use the following joint compound combination as applicable to the finish levels specified:
1. Embedding and First Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or taping compound. Fill
(Second) Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or topping compound. Finish (Third)
Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or topping compound.
H. At Level 5 gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound and apply first, fill (second), and finish
(third) coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories; and apply a thin,
uniform skim coat of joint compound over entire surface. For skim coat, use joint compound specified
for third coat, or a product specially formulated for this purpose and acceptable to gypsum board
manufacturer. Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free
of visual defects, tool marks, and ridges and ready for decoration.
I. Where Level 1 gypsum board finish is indicated, embed tape in joint compound.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 8
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not
less than one framing member.
D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels. Butt
panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open
space between panels. Do not force into place.
E. Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports
or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut
edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints other than control
joints at comers of framed openings where possible.
F. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.
G. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and
headers. Instead, float gypsum panels over these members using resilient channels or provide control
joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
H. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid-core wood doors, hollow metal doors, and doors over 32
inches wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip and immediately insert gypsum panels into
frames.
I. Form control and expansion joints at locations indicated and as detailed, with space between edges of
adjoining gypsum panels, as well as supporting fr<<ming behind gypsum panels.
1. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
2. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and
decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers,joists, and other structural members;
allow 1/4-to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant.
J. Where STC-rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind
control and expansion joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant
including a bead at both faces of the partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's
recommendations for location of edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through
gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
K. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing
standard and manufacturer's recommendations.
3.5 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS
A. Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard panels as follows:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent
possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise
indicated, and provide panel lengths that will minimize end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of
board.
3.6 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 -7
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead
structural assemblies to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure -" N'
have been installed to receive ceiling hangers that will develop their full strength and at spacing
required to support ceilings.
3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS
A. Screw furring members to wood framing.
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers
only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing,
countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings
that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system
members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or
equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads
within performance limits established by referenced standards.
3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,
eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a
manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
4. Secure flat, angle, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by
attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for
structure as well as for type of hanger involved, and in a manner that will not cause them to AOW*
deteriorate or otherwise fail.
5. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
6. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
C. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so that cross-furring or
grid suspension members are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet as measured both lengthwise on each
member and transversely between parallel members.
D. Wire-tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as indicated.
E. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets
vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut
to fit into wall track.
3.4 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with
ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
B. Install sound-attenuation blankets, where indicated, prior to installing gypsum panels unless blankets
are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 -6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
"• C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, acoustical sealants that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not linvted to, the following:
1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a. PL Acoustical Sealant; ChemRex, Inc.; Contech Brands.
b. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp.
C. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Co.
2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a. BA-98; Pecora Corp.
b. Tremco Acoustical Sealant; Tremco, Inc.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced
standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer.
B. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting-type joint compound recommended for spot-grouting hollow metal
door frames.
C. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for the following applications:
1. Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.033 inch thick.
2. Fastening gypsum board to wood members.
D. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
E. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket insulation produced by combining mineral
fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I
(blankets without membrane facing).
1. Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow metal frames,
cast-in-anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this
Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 -5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
6. Thickness: 5/8 inch on walls.
2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Comerbead, edge trim, and control joints complying with
ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below:
1. Material: Formed metal complying with the following requirement:
a. Steel sheet zinc coated by hot-dip process or rolled zinc.
2. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C 1047:
a. Comerbead on outside comers, unless otherwise indicated.
b. LC-bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to receive joint compound.
Use LC-beads for edge trim, unless otherwise indicated.
C. L-bead with face flange only; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use L-bead
where indicated.
d. Do not use U-bead.
e. One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering slot
opening.
2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the recommendations of
both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for each application indicated.
B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Drying-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged vinyl-based products complying
with the following requirements for formulation and intended use.
1. Ready-Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product.
a. All-purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds.
2.6 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable,
nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following requirements:
1. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and
openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according
to ASTM E 90.
B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening,
nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior
concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 -4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Grid Suspension Assemblies:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Chicago Metallic Corp.
C. USG Interiors, Inc.
d. Worthington Steel Company(formerly National Rolling Mills).
2. Gypsum Board and Related Products:
a. Domtar Gypsum.
b. Georgia-Pacific Corp.
C. National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division.
d. United States Gypsum Co.
2.2 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS
A. General: Provide components complying with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
B. Wire Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062 inch thick.
C. Flat Hangers: Mild steel and zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
D. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, manufacturer's standard direct-hung grid
suspension system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock to form a
modular supporting network.
E. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding
power, and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates
involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications
indicated.
2.3 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS
A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available that will minimize
end-to-end butt joints in each area indicated to receive gypsum board application.
1. Widths: Provide gypsum board in widths of 48 inches(1219 mm).
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and as follows:
1. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type: Type X where required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies.
#O"*, 3. Type: Sag-resistant type for ceiling surfaces.
4. Edges: Tapered.
5. Thickness: 1/2 inch , unless otherwise indicated.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 -3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: Obtain steel framing members for gypsum board
assemblies from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Single-Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other panel
products from a single manufacturer.
C. Single-Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the same
manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to
gypsum board manufacturer.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-resistance-rated gypsum board assemblies are
indicated, provide gypsum board assemblies that comply with the following requirements:
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As indicated by GA File Numbers in GA-600 "Fire Resistance Design
Manual" or design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listing of another
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Gypsum board assemblies indicated are identical to assemblies tested for fire resistance
according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of
manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather,
direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack
gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and
finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's
recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than
40 deg F. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F for
48 hours before application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 deg F when using
temporary heat sources.
C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during
hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 -2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 09255 -GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Gypsum board assemblies attached to steel framing.
2. Gypsum board assemblies attached to wood framing.
3. Gypsum board shaftwall assembly at eleval.or vent and top of chases.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring, and gypsum sheathing
applied over wood framing.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA-505 for definitions of terms
for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.
1.4 ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials
and construction identical to those of assemblies whose STC ratings were determined according to
ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E.413 by a qualified independent testing agency.
B. Fire Resistance: Provide gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings indicated.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of product specified.
C. Shop Drawings showing locations, fabrication, and installation of control and expansion joints
including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work.
D. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of gypsum board assembly components certifying that
their products comply with specified requirements.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or to recommended b manufacturer for
P 8 P Y Pe Y
this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels,
condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to the
exterior.
D. Install framing members plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
E. Anchorage: After system components are positioned, fix connections to building structure as indicated
on Shop Drawings.
1. Provide separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to
prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
F. Install glazing according to Shop Drawings. Comply with requirements of Division 8 Section
"Glazing," unless otherwise indicated.
G. Install sealant according to Shop Drawings. Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants," unless otherwise indicated.
H. Erection Tolerances: Install glazed aluminum curtain wall system to comply with the following
maximum tolerances:
1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.
2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.
3. Alignment: Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch; where a
reveal or protruding element separates aligned surfaces by less than 2 inches, limit offset to 1/2
inch.
4. Location: Limit variation from plane or location shown on Shop Drawings to 1/8 inch in 12
feet; 1/2 inch over total length.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer,
that ensure glazed aluminum curtain wall system is without damage or deterioration at the time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 08920
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920 - 8
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
mow,, 4. Weather-stripping shall be wool pile and shall be installed in one-stile of pairs of doors and in
jamb stiles of center pivoted doors.
J. Door stops shall include wool pile weather stripping.
K. Prepare and install specified door hardware
1. Door hardware: Sae Section 08710 Door Hardware
2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if
they are within one-half of the range of approved.Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are
not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the
range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
C. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association
for designating aluminum finishes.
D. High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: AA-1C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited
chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating:
as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
" coating and resin manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system
composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing
not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2.
a. Color and Gloss: Match color selected for windows.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of glazed aluminum curtain wall system. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have: been corrected or accommodations acceptable to
Architect have been made.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting, handling, and installing
glazed aluminum curtain wall system. Do not install damaged components. Fit joints to produce
hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight,
unless otherwise indicated. Provide means to drain water to the exterior to produce a permanently
weatherproof system.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920-7
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. Anchors: 3-way adjustable anchors that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material
and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer.
1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts
complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153 requirements.
F. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing,
compatible with adjacent materials, and of type recommended by manufacturer.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate glazed aluminum curtain wall system according to Shop Drawings. Fabricate
components that, when assembled, will have accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to
produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. After fabrication, clearly mark components to
identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.
B. Forming: Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or deformations, before
finishing.
C. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices.
D. Fabricate components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels,
condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to the
exterior.
E. Glazing Pockets: Provide minimum clearances for thickness and type of glass indicated according to ,rte
FGMA's "Glazing Manual."
F. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for
this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
G. Frame Units: Factory assemble frame units according to Shop Drawings to greatest extent possible.
Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated. Assemble
components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, condensation
occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to the exterior.
1. Install glazing according to Shop Drawings. Comply with requirements of Division 8 Section
"Glazing," unless otherwise indicated.
H. General Medium Stile Entrance Door:
1. Major portions of the door sections hsall have .125" wall thickness. Glazing stop sections shall
have .050 wall thickness.
1. Entrance Doors:
1. Door stiles shall be no less as indicated on drawings(not including glass stops.)
2. Door stiles and rails shall have hairline joints at corners. Heavy concealed reinforcement
brackets shall be secured with screws and shall be deep penetration and fillet welded.
3. All doors shall have an adjusting mechanism in the top rail to provide for minor clearance
adjustments.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920-6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Kawneer Company, Inc.
3. Vistawall
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended) by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated,
complying with the requirements of standards indicated below.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
B. Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A 36 for structural shapes, plates, and bars; ASTM A 611 for cold-rolled
sheet and strip; or ASTM A 570 for hot-rolled sheet and strip.
C. Glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
D. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient
elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers; in hardness recommended by
manufacturer.
E. Glazing sealants and fillers as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
F. Framing system gaskets and joint fillers as recommended by manufacturer for joint type.
G. Sealants and joint fillers for joints within glazed aluminum curtain wall system as specified in
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
H. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements,
except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Insulated Spandrel Panels: See Glazing Section 08800.
B. Exterior Trim: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 666, Type 302, 304, or 316 requirements;
with No. 4 finish; and in profiles indicated.
C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum brackets and
reinforcements. Provide nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
D. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding
fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. Finish exposed portions to match glazed
aluminum curtain wall.
1. At movement joints, use slip joint linings, spacers, and sleeves of material and type
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Where fasteners anchor into aluminum less than 0.125 inch thick, provide reinforcement to
receive fastener threads.
3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads finished to match framing
members, unless otherwise indicated.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920-5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing,
or in-service performance. "
E. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of glazed aluminum
curtain wall system and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers' systems with
equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's
approval and only to the extent needed to comply with performance requirements. Where
modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and show recorded
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid
delaying the Work.
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions
and proceed with fabrication without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that
actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other
rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition
to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer agreeing to repair or
replace components of a glazed aluminum curtain wall system that fail in materials or workmanship
within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
2. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.
3. Failure of system to meet performance requirements.
4. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
5. Failure of operating components to function normally.
6. Water leakage.
7. Glazing breakage.
C. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. EFCO Corporation.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Product Data for each product specified, including details of construction relative to materials,
dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
C. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of glazed aluminum curtain wall system including
plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include structural
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
D. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for components with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required in manufacturer's standard sizes.
Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range
of variations expected.
F. Cutaway Sample of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of system, made from 12-inch lengths of
full-size components and showing details of the following:
1. Joinery.
2. Anchorage.
3. Expansion provisions.
4. Glazing.
5. Flashing and drainage.
G. Installer certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with requirements in
"Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Preconstruction test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results relative to compliance with performance requirements of glazed aluminum curtain wall system.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for approval, an independent testing agency must
demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria conforming to
ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated
without delaying the Work.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to assume engineering responsibility and
perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing glazed aluminum curtain wall systems
similar to those required for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer.
1. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for glazed aluminum curtain wall systems, including
drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in
assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of glazed alluminum curtain wall system and aluminum windows
from one source and by a single manufacturer.
D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's
aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions,
arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sight lines and
relationships to one another and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920- 3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Test Performance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system that does not evidence material
failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2
percent of clear span when tested according to ASTM E 330.
a. Test Pressure: 150 percent of inward and outward wind-load design pressures.
b. Duration: As required by design wind velocity; fastest 1 mile of wind for relevant
exposure category.
G. Dead Loads: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system members that do not deflect an amount
which will reduce glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension when carrying full dead load.
Provide a minimum 1/8-inch clearance between members and top of fixed panels, glazing, or other
fixed part immediately below. Provide a minimum 1/16-inch clearance between members and operable
windows and doors.
H. Live Loads: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system, including anchorage, that accommodates
supporting structure's deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads indicated
without failure of materials or permanent deformation.
I. Air Infiltration: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system with permanent resistance to air leakage
through system of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to
ASTM E 283 at a static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.
J. Water Penetration: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system that does not evidence water leakage
when tested according to ASTM E 331 at minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward acting
wind-load design pressure as defined by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures," but not less than 12 lbf/sq. ft.
K. Thermal Movements: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system, including anchorage, that
accommodates thermal movements of system and supporting elements resulting from the following
maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures without buckling, damaging stresses on
glazing, failure of joint sealants, damaging loads on fasteners, noise or vibration, and other detrimental
effects.
1. Temperature Change(Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
L. Structural Support Movement: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system that accommodates
structural movements including, but not limited to, sway, twist, column shortening, long-term creep,
and deflection.
M. Condensation Resistance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system with condensation-resistance
factor(CRF) of not less than 59 when tested according to AAMA 1503.1.
N. Average Thermal Conductance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system with an average U-value
of not more than 0.66 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F when tested according to AAMA 1503.1.
O. Dimensional Tolerances: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system, including anchorage, that
accommodates dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 08920-GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Glazed aluminum curtain wall, stick system installation including aluminum entrance door.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
I. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants installed as part of glazed aluminum curtain
wall system.
2. Division 8 Section "Glazing."
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system that has the following capabilities based on
testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project:
B. General: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system that has the following capabilities based on
preconstruction testing:
1. Withstands loads and thermal and structural movement requirements indicated without failure.
Failure includes the following:
a. Air infiltration and water penetration exceeding specified limits.
b. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural
movement, to glazing units.
C. Glazing is physically and thermally isolated from framing members.
D. System is reglazable from the interior.
E. System is reglazable from the exterior.
F. Wind Loads: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system, including anchorage, capable of
withstanding wind-load design pressures calculated according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction or the American Society of Civil Engineers' ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for
Buildings and Other Structures," 6.4.2, "Analytical Procedure," whichever are more stringent.
1. Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to wall plane is limited to 1/175 of clear
span or 3/4 inches, whichever is smaller, unless otherwise indicated.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920- 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
Heading 16
3 Butts CB 1900
1 Priv. Lock MOR-8702FL
1 Kick Plate 8"
1 Wall Bumper 406
3 Door Silencers 608
Heading 17
3 Butts CB 1900
1 Lockset MOR-8728FL
1 Door Closer PA440OBF
1 Kick Plate 8"
1 Wall Bumper 406
3 Door Silencers 608
Heading 18
2 cylinders as req.
END
DOOR HARDWARE 08710- 19
t
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
Amok
Heading 13
3 Spring Hinges 206OR
1 Lockset MOR-8705
1 Wall Bumper 406
3 Door Silencers 608
Heading 14
3 Butts CB 1900
1 Push Plate 70
1 Door Pull 132 x 70B
1 Door Closer 440OBF
1 Kick Plate 8"
1 Wall Bumper 406
3 Door Silencers 608
Heading 15
6 Butts CB 1900
1 Lockset MOR-8707FL
2 Flush Bolts 555-12"
2 Wall Bumpers 406
2 Door Silencers 608
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 18
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
Heading 10
3 Butts CB 1900
1 Exit Device 7100F
1 Door Closer 440OBF
1 Kick Plate 8"
1 Wall Bumper 406
3 Door Silencers 608
Heading 1 I
3 Butts CB 1900
1 Lockset MOR-8707FL
I Wall Bumper 406
3 Door Silencers 608
Heading 12
3 Butts CB 1900
1 Latchset MOR-8701 FL
1 Wall Bumper 406
3 Door Silencers 608
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 17
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
DOOR HARDWARE 08710- 16
4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
Heading 7
3 Butts CB 1900
1 Lockset MOR-8708FL
1 Door Closer 440OBF
1 Kick Plate 81f
1 Wall Bumper 406
3 Door Silencers 608
Heading 8
3 Butts CB 1900
1 Comb. Lock MO-T8791 FL
I Door Closer 440OBF
1 Kick Plates 81,
1 Wall Bumper 406
3 Door Silencers 608
Heading 9
Butts CB 1900
1 Latchset MOR-8701 FL
1 Door Closer 440OBF
1 Kick Plate 8#f
1 Wall Bumper 406
3 Door Silencers 608
DOOR HARDWARE 08710- 15
i
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
Heading 4
6 Butts CB 1961
1 Lockset MOR-8705FL
2 Flush Bolts 555-12"
2 Door Closers 4421T
2 Kick Plates 8"
2 Door Bottoms 20ON
1 Threshold 425
1 Weatherstripping 5050
1 Astragal 139SP
Heading 5
3 Butts CB 1961
1 Lockset MO-T8791 FL
2 Flush Bolts 555-12"
2 Door Closers 4421T
2 Kick Plates 8"
2 Door Bottoms 20ON
1 Threshold 425
1 Weatherstripping 5050
1 Astragal 1 39S
Heading 6
3 Butts CB 1900
1 Lockset MO-T8791 FL
1 Door Closer 440OBF
1 Kick Plate 8"
1 Wall Bumper 406
3 Door Silencers 608
DOOR HARDWARE 08710- 14
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
HARDWARE SCHEDULE
Heading 1
6 Butts CB 1961
2 Exit Devices 7110 x M0526F
2 Door Closers 4420T
2 Kick Plates 8"
2 Door Bottoms 20ON
1 Threshold 425
1 Weatherstripping 127NS
I Set Astragals 140P
Heading 2
3 Butts CB 1961
1 Exit Device 7100
1 Comb. Lock Trim LP 1020
I Door Closer 4421T
1 Kick Plate 8"
Row 1 Door Bottom 20ON
1 Threshold 425
1 Weatherstripping 5050
Heading 3
3 Butts CB 1961
1 Exit Device 7100
1 Door Closer 4421T
1 Kick Plate 8"
1 Door Bottom 20ON
1 Threshold 425
1 Weatherstripping 5050
DOOR HARDWARE 08710- 13
Ila
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
C. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware
finishes.
3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. General: Provide, hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section "Door Hardware,"
hardware set numbers indicated in door schedule, and in the following schedule of hardware sets.
1. Hardware sets indicate quantity, item, manufacturer and product designation, size, and finish or
color, as applicable.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710- 12
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and
001h, other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by
referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.
C. The finish of all hardware fenerally shall be dull chrome, US26D
D. Push/Pulls/Kickplates shall be dull stainless steel, US32D
E. Door closers shall be enamel paint, to match finish of hardware
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except as specifically
indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by
Architect.
1. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the
Door and Hardware Institute.
2. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, "Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors."
B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted
or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface
protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted
items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved.
C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as
necessary for proper installation and operation.
D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and
anchors in accordance with industry standards.
E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant
complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."
F. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the
extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated.
3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function
of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for
the application made.
1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a
space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and
make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating
items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door
control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 11
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Provide grey resilient parts for exposed bumpers.
2.10 DOOR TRIM UNITS
A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of either
machine screws or self-tapping screws.
B. Fabricate edge trim of stainless steel to fit door thickness in standard lengths or to match height of
protection plates.
C. Fabricate protection plates not more than 1-1/2 inches less than door width on hinge side and not more
than 1/2 inch less than door width on pull side by height indicated.
1. Metal Plates: Stainless steel, 0.050 inch(U.S. 18 gage).
2.11 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS
A. General: Provide continuous weatherstripping on exterior doors and smoke, light, or sound seals on
interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications
and elsewhere as indicated.
B. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily
replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
C. Weatherstripping at Jambs and Heads: Provide bumper-type resilient insert and metal retainer strips,
surface applied unless shown as mortised or semimortised, and of following metal, finish, and resilient
bumper material:
1. Brush pile insert of polypropylene or nylon woven pile and aluminum strip backing complying
with AAMA 701.2.
D. Weatherstripping at Door Bottoms: Provide threshold consisting of contact-type resilient insert and
metal housing of design and size shown and of following metal, finish, and resilient seal strip:
1. Extruded aluminum with natural anodized finish, 0.062-inch minimum thickness of main walls
and flanges.
2. Solid neoprene wiper or sweep seal complying with MIL R 6855, Class II, Grade 40.
2.12 THRESHOLDS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size, and profile
as shown or scheduled.
2.13 HARDWARE FINISHES
A. Provide finishes that match those established by BHMA or, if none established, match the Architect's
sample.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710- 10
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved
lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide flat lip strikes for locks with 3-piece, antifriction latchbolts as recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Provide extra long strike lips for locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
3. Provide recess type top strikes for bolts locking into head frames, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Provide dust-proof strikes for foot bolts, except where special threshold construction provides
nonrecessed strike for bolt.
5. Provide roller type strikes where recommended by manufacturer of the latch and lock units.
B. Lock Throw: Provide 5/8-inch minimum throw of latch on pairs of doors. Comply with UL
requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings.
1. Provide 1/2-inch minimum throw of latch for other bored and preassembled types of locks and
3/4-inch minimum throw of latch for mortise locks. Provide 1-inch minimum throw for all dead
bolts.
C. Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 1/2-inch-diameter rods of brass, bronze, or stainless steel with
minimum 12-inch-long rod for doors up to 84 inches in height. Provide longer rods as necessary for
doors exceeding 84 inches in height.
D. Exit Device Dogging: Except on fire-rated doors where closers are provided on doors equipped with
exit devices, equip the units with keyed dogging device to keep the latch bolt retracted, when engaged.
E. Rabbeted Doors: Where rabbeted door stiles are indicated, provide special rabbeted front on lock and
+ latch units and bolts.
2.8 PUSH/PULL UNITS
A. Exposed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for installation, thru-bolted for
matched pairs but not for single units.
2.9 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES
A. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer's
recommendations for size of door control unit depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and
anticipated frequency of use.
1. Provide parallel arms for all overhead closers, except as otherwise indicated.
B. Access-Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to
the physically handicapped, provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1 provisions for door
opening force and delayed action closing.
C. Combination Door Closers and Holders: Provide units designed to hold door in open position under
normal usage and to release and close door automatically under fire conditions. Incorporate an integral
electromagnetic holder mechanism designed for use with UL listed fire detectors, provided with
normally closed switching contacts.
1. Provide integral smoke detector device in combination door closers and holders complying with
UL 228.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-9
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
4. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots.
C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:
1. Out-Swing Exterior Doors: Nonremovable pins.
2. Out-Swing Corridor Doors with Locks: Nonremovable pins.
3. Interior Doors: Nonrising pins.
4. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves, except where hospital tip (HT)
indicated.
D. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for
doors 90 inches or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height.
1. Fire-Rated Doors: Not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 86 inches or less in height
with same rule for additional hinges.
2.5 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. Standard System: Except as otherwise indicated, provide new masterkey system for Project.
B. Equip locks with manufacturer's standard 6-pin tumbler cylinders.
C. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.
D. Comply with Owner's instructions for masterkeying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide
individual change key for each lock that is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related ,w
locks.
E. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only.
F. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock, 5 master keys for each master system, and 5
grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system.
1. Furnish one extra blank for each lock.
2. Deliver keys to key control system manufacturer.
3. Deliver keys to Owner.
2.6 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, tags with self-locking key clips, receipt
forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet,
all as recommended by system manufacturer, with capacity for 150 percent of the number of locks
required for the Project.
1. Provide complete cross index system set up by key control manufacturer, and place keys on
markers and hooks in the cabinet as determined by the final key schedule.
2. Provide hinged-panel type cabinet for wall mounting.
2.7 LOCKS, LATCHES, AND BOLTS
DOOR HARDWARE 08710- 8
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
a. Butts and Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1.
b. Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.2.
C. Exit Devices: ANSI/BHMA A156.3.
d. Door Controls- Closers: ANSI/BEIMA A156.4.
e. Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products: ANSI/BHMA A156.5.
f. Architectural Door Trim: ANSI/BHMA A156.6.
g. Template Hinge Dimensions: ANSI/BHMA A156.7.
h. Door Controls- Overhead Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.8.
i. Interconnected Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.12.
j. Mortise Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.13.
k. Sliding and Folding Door Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.14.
1. Closer Holder Release Devices: ANSI/BHMA A156.15.
M. Auxiliary Hardware: ANSI/BHMA.A156.16.
n. Self-Closing Hinges and Pivots: ANSI/BHMA A156.17.
o. Materials and Finishes: ANSI/BHMMA A156.18.
2.3 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using
manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser
(commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable
ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSI/BHMA A156.18
for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those
indicated, except as otherwise specified.
B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated using
manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser
(commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units for finish designations
indicated.
C. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for
machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet
metal screws, except as specifically indicated.
D. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as
otherwise indicated. Finish exposed(exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or,
if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including
"prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish.
2.4 HINGES, BUTTS, AND PIVOTS
A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and
frames, provide only template-produced units.
B. Screws: Provide Phillips flat-head screws complying with the following requirements:
Awl* 1. For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes.
2. For wood doors and frames install wood screws.
3. For fire-rated wood doors install #12 x 1-1/4-inch, threaded-to-the-head steel wood screws.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-7
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
b. National Guard Products, Inc.
C. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
e. Sealeze Corp.
f. Ultra Industries.
g. Zero International, Inc.
13. Thresholds:
a. Hager Hinge Co.
b. National Guard Products, Inc.
C. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
e. Sealeze Corp.
f. Zero International, Inc.
14. Automatic Drop Seals:
a. Hager Hinge Co.
b. National Guard Products, Inc.
C. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
e. Zero International, Inc.
15. Sound Stripping:
a. National Guard Products, Inc. M.
b. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.
C. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
d. Zero International, Inc.
16. Astragals:
a. Hager Hinge Co.
b. National Guard Products, Inc.
C. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
e. Zero International, Inc.
2.2 SCHEDULED HARDWARE
A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of
finish hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of this Section. Products are
identified by using hardware designation numbers of the following:
1. Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name of one manufacturer
are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum
requirements. Provide either the product designated or, where more than one manufacturer is
specified under the Article "Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware type, the comparable
product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with requirements.
2. ANSI/BHMA designations used elsewhere in this Section or in schedules to describe hardware
items or to define quality or function are derived from the following standards. Provide `'
products complying with these standards and requirements specified elsewhere in this Section.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION Decembe
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Dorma Door Controls International.
d. International Door Closers, Inc.
e. LCN, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group.
f. Monarch Hardware&Mfg. Co., Div Newman Tonks, Inc.
g. Norton Door Controls, Div. Yale Security Inc.
h. Rixson-Firemark, Div. Yale Security Inc.
i. Sargent Manufacturing Company.
j. Yale Security Inc.
9. Smoke-Activated Closers:
a. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black&Dec er Co;p.
b. Dor-O-Matic.
C. Dorma Door Controls International.
d. Norton Door Controls, Div. Yale Security Inc.
e. Rixson-Firemark, Div. Yale Security Inc.
f. Yale Security Inc.
9. Door Control Devices:
a. Baldwin Hardware Corp.
b. Brookline Industries, Div. Yale Security Inc.
C. Builders Brass Works Corp.
d. Corbin&Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black&Decker Corp.
e. Glynn-Johnson Corp.
f. Hager Hinge Co.
g. H. B. Ives, A Harrow Company.
h. Quality Hardware Mfg. Co., Inc.; Div. Newman Tonks, Inc.
i. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company(Trimco).
10. Door Trim Units:
a. Baldwin Hardware Corp.
b. Brookline Industries, Div. Yale Security Inc.
C. Builders Brass Works Corp.
d. Hager Hinge Co.
e. H. B. Ives, A Harrow Company.
f. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco).
g. Rockwood Mfg. Co.
11. Kick, Mop, and Armor Plates:
a. Baldwin Hardware Corp.
b. Brookline Industries, Div. Yale Security Inc.
C. Corbin&Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black&Decker Corp.
d. Hager Hinge Co.
e. Hiawatha, Inc.
f. H. B. Ives, A Harrow Company.
g. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco).
h. Rockwood Mfg. Co.
12. Door Stripping and Seals:
a. Hager Hinge Co.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
d. Stanley Hardware, Div. Stanley Works.
2. Key Control System:
a. Key Control Systems, Inc.
b. Telkee Inc.
3. Cylinders and Locks:
a. Arrow Lock Manufacturing Co.
b. Best Lock Corp.
c. Corbin&Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black&Decker Corp.
d. Falcon Lock Co.
e. Sargent Manufacturing Company.
f. Schlage Lock, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group.
g. Yale Security Inc.
4. Bolts:
a. Builders Brass Works Corp.
b. Glynn-Johnson Corp.
C. Hager Hinge Co.
d. H. B. Ives, A Harrow Company.
e. Quality Hardware Mfg. Co., Inc.; Div. Newman Tonks, Inc.
f. Stanley Hardware, Div. Stanley Works.
5. Exit/Panic Devices:
a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.
b. Arrow Lock Manufacturing Co.
C. Corbin&Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black&Decker Corp.
d. Dor-O-Matic.
e. Monarch Hardware&Mfg. Co., Div Newman Tonks, Inc.
f. Precision Hardware, Inc.
g. Reed Exit Hardware, Div. Yale Security Inc.
h. Sargent Manufacturing Company.
i. Von Duprin, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group.
j. Yale Security Inc.
6. Push/Pull Units:
a. Baldwin Hardware Corp.
b. Brookline Industries, Div. Yale Security Inc.
C. Corbin&Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black&Decker Corp.
d. Hager Hinge Co.
e. Hiawatha, Inc.
f. H. B. Ives, A Harrow Company.
g. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco).
7. Overhead Closers:
a. Arrow Lock Manufacturing Co.
b. Corbin&Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black&Decker Corp.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final
instructions in writing.
C. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA
Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door
hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey, FM, or other
testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and
sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels.
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include
basic installation instructions with each item or package.
B. Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by hardware supplier
from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware
set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be
packed in same container.
C. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until
each is satisfied that count is correct.
D. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation (shop or Project
site).
E. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control
handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of
the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.
1.6 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a. complete set of specialized tools and maintenance
instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of
door hardware.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Butts and Hinges:
* a. Hager Hinge Co.
b. Lawrence Brothers, Inc.
C. McKinney Products Co.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
sections. Aow
B. Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door hardware,
installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to
show compliance with requirements.
C. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size,
thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into
"hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or
opening. Include the following information:
a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item.
b. Name and manufacturer of each item.
C. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor
plans and in door and frame schedule.
e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
f. Mounting locations for hardware.
g. Door and frame sizes and materials.
h. Keying information.
2. Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date particularly where
acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the
Project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings
of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated
review of schedule.
3. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final
instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.
D. Samples of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated and tagged with full description for
coordination with schedule. Submit samples prior to submission of final hardware schedule.
1. Samples will be returned to the supplier. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged
through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation, be
incorporated in the Work, within limitations of keying coordination requirements.
E. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of
door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for
locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.)
from a single manufacturer.
B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities
in the Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door
hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that employs an
experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and -00%'
Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 08710-DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing,
sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the
doors and door frames on which they are installed.
B. This Section includes the following:
1. Hinges.
2. Spring hinges.
3. Lock cylinders and keys.
4. Lock and latch sets.
5. Bolts.
O,, 6. Exit devices.
7. Push/pull units.
8. Closers.
9. Protection plates.
10. Weatherstripping for exterior doors.
11. Sound stripping for interior doors.
12. Automatic drop seals (door bottoms).
13. Astragals or meeting seals on pairs of doors.
14. Thresholds.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 8 Section "Standard Steel Doors and Frames".
2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for factory prefitting and factory premachining of
doors for door hardware.
3. Division 8 Section "Aluminum Glazed Curtain Walls" for aluminum entrance door hardware,
except cylinders.
D. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include:
1. Cylinders for locks on entrance doors.
2. Final replacement cores and keys to be installed by Owner.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
AVON
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
compounds, fillers, and gaskets to be installed concurrently with window units. Coordinate installation
with wall flashings and other components of the Work. -*4%k
1. Sealants,joint fillers, and gaskets to be installed after installation of window units are specified
in another Division 7 Section.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and at weatherstripping for
smooth operation and a weathertight closure.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installing windows. Exercise care to avoid damage to
protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other
substances. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.
B. Clean glass of preglazed units promptly after installing windows. Comply with requirements of
Division 8 Section "Glazing" for cleaning and maintenance.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to aluminum window
manufacturer, that ensure window units are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION 08520
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520- 8
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Preglazed Fabrication: Preglaze window units at the factory where possible and practical for
applications indicated. Comply with glass and glazing requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing" of
these Specifications and AAMA 101.
2.7 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and
designating finishes.
B. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association
for designating aluminum finishes.
C. High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited
chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating:
as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
coating and resin manufacturer's instructions.
1. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system
composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing
not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2.
2. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of choices for color
and gloss.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Inspect openings before installation. Verify that rough or masonry opening is correct and sill plate is
level.
1. Masonry surfaces shall be visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction
debris.
2. Metal surfaces shall be dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust and corrosion, and welding slag;
without sharp edges or offsets at joints.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for installing window units,
hardware, operators, and other components of the Work.
B. Set window units plumb. level, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash. Provide
proper support and anchor securely in place.
1. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action
at points of contact with other materials by complying with requirements specified under
"Dissimilar Materials" Paragraph in appendix to AAMA 101.
C. Set sill members and other members in a bed of sealant or with joint fillers or gaskets, as shown on
Shop Drawings, to provide weathertight construction. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -7
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.5 DOUBLE-HUNG WINDOWS
A. Window Grade and Class: Comply with requirements of AAMA Grade and Performance Class DH-
HC40. Window units shall successfully pass operating force test performance requirements specified in
AAMA 101.
B. Window Grade and Class: Comply with requirements of AAMA Grade and Performance Class DH-
AW40. Window units shall successfully pass operating force test performance requirements specified
in AAMA 101 and life-cycle test requirements specified in AAMA 910.
1. Provide window units with tilt-in feature permitting both sides of sash to be cleaned from
interior.
C. Hardware: Provide the following equipment and operating hardware:
1. Sash Balances: Manufacturer's standard type(2 per sash).
2. Sash Operating Force: 301b. either direction
3. Sash Lock: Cam-action white bronze sweep lock and keeper on meeting rail.
4. Tilt Lock: Tamperproof, key-operated tilt mechanism to permit sash to tilt inward for cleaning.
5. Lift Handle: Continuous, integral, sash lift bar on bottom rail of lower sash.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate aluminum window units to comply with indicated standards. Include a complete
system for assembly of components and anchorage of window units.
1. Provide units that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing.
2. Provide units that are preglazed at the factory.
B. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate window units with an integral, concealed, low-
conductance, thermal barrier, located between exterior materials and window members exposed on
interior, in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact.
1. Provide thermal-break construction that has been in use for not less than 3 years, has been tested
to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance and condensation, and has been tested to show
adequate strength and security of glass retention.
2. Provide hardware with low conductivity or nonmetallic material for hardware bridging thermal
breaks at frame or vent sash.
3. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior.
4. Provide water-shed members above side-hinged ventilators and similar lines of natural water
penetration.
5. Mullions and sill extensions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window
units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow
for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and
building deflections, as indicated.
6. Glazing Stops: Provide screw-applied glazing stops, coordinated with glass selection and
glazing system indicated. Finish to match window units. AW"%
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Anchors, Clips, and Window Accessories: Fabricate anchors, clips, and window accessories of
aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or hot-dip zinc-coated steel or iron complying with
requirements of ASTM B 633; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.
D. Sliding-Type Weatherstripping: Provide woven-pile weatherstripping of wool, polypropylene, or
nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric. Comply with AAMA 701.2.
1. Provide stripping with integral centerline barrier fm of semirigid plastic sheet of polypropylene.
E. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated window units, provide type recommended by
manufacturer for joint size and movement. Sealant shall remain permanently elastic, nonshrinking, and
nonmigrating. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" of these Specifications for selection
and installation of sealants.
F. Wire-Fabric Insect Screen: 18-by-18, 18-by-16, or 18-by-14 mesh of 0.013-inch-diameter, coated
aluminum wire, complying with FS RR-W-365, Type VII.
G. Glazing: Provide insulated units of clear glass, total thickness of V with Low E coating as specified in
Glazing Section 08800.
2.3 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, or other
corrosion-resistant material compatible with aluminum and of sufficient strength to perform the
"* function for which it is intended.
B. Counterbalancing Mechanism: Comply with AAMA 902.2.
1. Sash-Balance Ty-pe: Concealed block-and-tackle type of size and capacity to hold sash stationary
at any open position.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessories that comply with indicated standards.
B. Insect Screens: Provide insect screens for each operable exterior sash or ventilator. Locate screens on
inside or outside of window sash or ventilator, depending on window type. Design windows and
hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, removable arrangement, with a minimum of
exposed fasteners and latches.
1. Screen Frames: Fabricate frames of tubular-shaped, extruded-or formed-aluminum members of
0.040-inch-minimum wall thickness, with mitered or coped joints and concealed mechanical
fasteners. Finish frames to match window units.
a. Provide removable PVC spline-anchor concealing edge of screen frame.
C. Weatherstripping: Provide sliding-type weatherstripping where sash rails slide horizontally or
vertically along unit frame. Provide compression-type weatherstripping at perimeter of each operating
#00,, sash where sliding type is inappropriate.
1. Provide weatherstripping locked into extruded grooves in sash.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.8 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other
rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition
to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by aluminum window manufacturer agreeing to
repair or replace window components that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified
warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or
condensation.
2. Faulty operation of sash and hardware.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
C. Warranty Period: 3 years after date of Substantial Completion.
D. Warranty Period for Metal Finishes and Glass: 5 years after date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Double-Hung Windows:
a. EFCO Corporation.
b. Kawneer Corp.
C. Wausau/Milco
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for strength,
corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 22,000-psi ultimate tensile
strength and not less than 0.062 inch thick at any location for main frame and sash members.
B. Fasteners: Provide aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials
warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum window members, trim,
hardware, anchors, and other components of window units.
1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw anchor into aluminum less than 0.125 inch thick,
reinforce interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads or
provide standard, noncorrosive, pressed-in, splined grommet nuts.
2. Exposed Fasteners: Except where unavoidable for application of hardware, do not use exposed
fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware •'" +
being fastened, as appropriate.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of each type of window required including
information not fully detailed in manufacturer's standard Product Data and the following:
1. Layout and installation details, including anchors.
2. Elevations at 1/4 inch = 1 foot scale and typical window unit elevations at 3/4 inch = 1 foot
scale.
3. Full-size section details of typical composite members, including reinforcement and stiffeners.
4. Location of weep holes.
5. Panning details.
6. Hardware, including operators.
7. Window cleaning provisions.
8. Glazing details.
9. Accessories.
D. Samples for initial color selection on 12-inch-long sections of window members. Where finishes
involve normal color variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.
E. Samples for Verification: The Architect reserves the right to require additional samples that show
fabrication techniques, workmanship, and design of hardware and accessories.
F. Test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating that each type, grade, and size of
window unit complies with performance requirements indicated based on comprehensive testing of
current window units within the last 5 years. Test results based on use of down-sized test units will not
be accepted.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed installation of aluminum
windows similar in material, design, and extent to those required for this Project and with a record of
successful in-service performance.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain aluminum windows and curtain wall from one source and by a
single manufacturer.
C. Product Options: The Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, dimensional requirements, and aesthetic
effects of aluminum windows and are based on the specific window types and models indicated. Other
aluminum window manufacturers whose products have equal performance characteristics may be
considered provided deviations in size, profile, and dimensions are minor and do not alter the aesthetic
effect.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check window openings by field measurements before fabrication and show
recorded measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee opening
dimensions and proceed with fabricating aluminum windows without field measurements.
Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to guaranteed
dimensions.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520- 3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
manufacturer's standard window assemblies representing types, grades, classes, and sizes required for
Project according to test methods indicated.
B. Test Criteria: Testing shall be performed by a qualified independent testing agency based on the
following criteria:
1. Design wind velocity at Project site is 70 mi./h.
2. Heights of window units above grade at window centerline are indicated on or can be
determined from the Drawings. Consult with the Architect, if necessary, to confirm required
loading and test pressures.
3. Test Procedures: Test window units according to ASTM E 283 for air infiltration, both
ASTM E 331 and ASTM E 547 for water penetration, and ASTM E 330 for structural
performance.
C. Performance Requirements: Testing shall demonstrate compliance with requirements indicated in
AAMA 101 for air infiltration, water penetration, and structural performance for type, grade, and
performance class of window units required. Where required design pressure exceeds the minimum for
the specified window grade, comply with requirements of AAMA 101, Section 3, "Optional
Performance Classes," for higher than minimum performance class.
1. Air-Infiltration Rate for Operating Units: Not more than 0.10 cfm/ft. of operable sash joint for
an air pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.
2. Water Penetration: No water penetration as defined in the test method at an inward test pressure
of 15 percent of the design pressure.
3. Uniform Load Deflection: No deflection in excess of 1/175 of any member's span during the
imposed load, for a positive(inward) and negative(outward) test pressure of 60 lbf/sq. ft.
4. Structural Performance: No failure or permanent deflection in excess of 0.4 percent of any
member's span after removing the imposed load, for a positive (inward) and negative (outward) '
test pressure of 97.50 lbf/sq. ft.
5. Condensation Resistance: Where window units are indicated to be "thermally improved,"
provide units tested for thermal performance according to AAMA 1503.1 showing a
condensation resistance factor(CRF) of 50.
6. Thermal Transmittance: Provide window units with a U-value maximum of 0.63 Btu/sq. ft. x h
x deg F at 15-mi./h exterior wind velocity, when tested according to AAMA 1503.1.
7. Thermal Movements: Provide window units that allow thermal movement resulting from the
following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature when engineering, fabricating, and
installing aluminum windows to prevent buckling, opening of joints, and overstressing of
components, connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on actual
surface temperatures of materials due to solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.
a. Temperature Change(Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of window required, including the following:
1. Construction details and fabrication methods.
2. Profiles and dimensions of individual components.
3. Data on hardware, accessories, and finishes.
4. Recommendations for maintaining and cleaning exterior surfaces.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 08520-ALUMINUM WINDOWS
(FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Aluminum Windows is stipulated as a Filed Sub-Bid under Paragraph D, Item 2 of the Form For
General Bid.
B. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the Form For Sub-Bid furnished by the Awarding Authority, as
required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. The time and place for
submission of Filed Sub-Bids are set forth in the Invitation To Bid.
C. The work to be done under this section is shown on Drawings numbered : T1, Ll-L5, S1-S8, Al-A16,
FP1-FP4, P1-P4, H1-H6, SE1, E1-E6
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes Heavy-Commercial Grade aluminum windows of the performance class indicated.
Window types required include the following:
1. Double-hung windows (factory glazed).
2. Fixed windows, tomatch double hung and to receive security glazing.
B. Related Sections: The following Sectins contain requirements that relate to this Section
1. Division 8 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" contains requirements that relate to this
Section.
2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" contains requirements that relate to this Section
C. Performance class number, included as part of the window designation system, is the actual design
pressure in pounds force per square foot used to determine structural test pressure and water test
pressure.
1. Structural test pressure, wind load test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the design pressure.
2. Water-leakage-resistance test pressure is equivalent to 15 percent of the design pressure with
2.86 lbf/sq. ft. as a minimum for Heavy-Commercial Grade windows.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide aluminum windows engineered, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal thermal
movement, wind loading, and impact loading without failure, as demonstrated by testing
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520- 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install door, track, and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and
head mold stops, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports according to shop drawings,
manufacturer's instructions, and as specified.
B. Fasten vertical track assembly to framing at not less than 24 inches o.c. Hang horizontal track from
structural overhead framing with angle or channel hangers, welded and bolt-fastened in place. Provide
sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcing as required for rigid installation of track and door-
operating equipment.
C. After completing installation, including work by other trades, lubricate, test, and adjust doors to
operate easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion and fitting weathertight for entire perimeter.
END OF SECTION 08360
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08360-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
00'11 B. Hinges: Provide heavy steel hinges at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, per manufacturer's
recommendations for size of door. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails with bolts
and lock nuts or lock washers and nuts. Use rivets or self-tapping fasteners where access to nuts is not
possible. Provide double-end hinges, where required, for doors exceeding 16 feet in width, unless
otherwise recommended by door manufacturer.
C. Rollers: Provide heavy-duty rollers, with steel ball bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with
varying projections to suit slope of track. Extend roller shaft through both hinges where double hinges
are required. Provide roller tires to suit size of track [3-inch diameter for 3-inch track; 2-inch diameter
for 2-inch track] and as follows:
1. Case-hardened steel tires for normal installations.
2.5 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS
A. General: Furnish electric door-operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by
door manufacturer; complete with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, gear-reduction
unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations and control devices.
B. Provide hand-operated disconnect or mechanism for automatically engaging sprocket-chain operator and
releasing brake for emergency manual operation. Include interlock device to automatically prevent
motor from operating when emergency sprocket is engaged.
C. Design operator so that motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without
affecting emergency auxiliary operator.
D. Door Operator Type: Provide the following:
1. Trolley or drawbar type, V-belt and roller chain-and-sprocket primary drive, and chain-and-
sprocket secondary drive.
E. Electric Motors: Provide high-starting torque, reversible, constant-duty, Class A-insulated electric
motors with overload protection, sized to move door in either direction, from any position, at not less
than 2/3 foot per second or more than 1 foot per second.
1. Coordinate wiring requirements and current characteristics of motors with building electrical
system.
2. Provide open-drip-proof type motor, and controller with NEMA Type 1 enclosure.
F. Remote Control Station: Provide momentary-contact, three-button control station with push button
controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop."
1. Provide interior units, full-geared, surface-mounted, heavy-duty, with general purpose NEMA
Type 1 enclosure.
G. Automatic Reversing Control: Furnish each door with automatic safety switch, extending full width of
door bottom, and located within neoprene or rubber astragal mounted to bottom door rail. Contact
with switch will immediately reverse downward door travel. Furnish manufacturer's standard take-up
reel or self-coiling cable.
1. Provide electrically actuated automatic bottom bar.
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08360 -3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: "d
1. Wayne/Dalton Corp.
2. Overhead Door Corp.
3. Raynor Garage Door Co.
2.2 ALUMINUM SECTIONS
A. Construct door sections with extruded aluminum shapes of 6063-T6 alloy, with wall thickness not less
than 0.065 inch for door section 1-3/4 inch deep. Join stiles and rails together with concealed 1/4-inch
minimum diameter aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel through-bolts, full height of section.
Fabricate panels of insulation aluminum sheets set in continuous vinyl channels and retained with rigid
snap-in extruded moldings.
1. Finish doors with manufacturer's standard mill finish for painting by painting sub.
2.3 TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES
A. Tracks: Provide manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steel track system, sized for door size and
weight, and designed for clearances shown. Provide complete track assembly including brackets,
bracing and reinforcing for rigid support of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type and size.
Slot vertical sections of track at 2 inches o.c. for door-drop safety device. Slope tracks at proper angle
from vertical, or otherwise design to ensure tight closure at jambs when door unit is closed. Weld or
bolt to track supports.
B. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Provide galvanized-steel track reinforcement and support
members. Secure, reinforce and support tracks as required for size and weight of door to provide
strength and rigidity without sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors.
C. Support and attach tracks to opening jambs with continuous angle welded to tracks and attached to wall.
Support horizontal (ceiling tracks) with continuous angle welded to track and supported by laterally
braced attachments to overhead structural members at curve and end of tracks.
D. Weather Seals: Provide continuous rubber, neoprene, or flexible vinyl adjustable weatherstrip gasket at
tops and compressible astragal on bottoms of each overhead door.
1. In addition, provide continuous flexible seals at door jamb edges for a fully weathertight
installation.
E. Vision Panels: Provide 1/2" insulated panels, Low E coated clear float-glass in arrangement shown.
Set glass in rubber or neoprene channel glazing strips for metal-framed doors as required. Provide
removable stops of same material at door section frames.
1. Lock cylinder is specified in another Division 8 Section.
2.4 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide heavy-duty, rust-resistant hardware, with galvanized or cadmium-plated or stainless
steel fasteners, to suit type of door.
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08360-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 08360-SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sectional overhead doors, as follows:
1. Aluminum frame and glass panels.
2. Electric motor-operated doors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
,fir%, B. Product data, roughing-in diagrams, and installation instructions for each type and size of overhead
door. Include manufacturer's operating instructions and maintenance data.
C. Shop drawings for special components and installations which are not fully dimensioned or detailed in
manufacturer's data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide each sectional overhead door as a complete unit produced by a
single manufacturer, including frames, sections, brackets, guides, tracks, counterbalance mechanisms,
hardware, operators, and installation accessories.
B. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices that must be set in concrete or built into
masonry for unit installation. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of
anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
C. See concrete and masonry Sections for instruction on installing inserts and anchorage devices.
D. Wind Loading: Design and reinforce sectional overhead doors to withstand a 20-psf wind-loading
pressure.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08360- 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
H. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard heavy-duty, manually operated metal pulls and latches as follows:
1. Finish: Clear-anodized aluminum.
2. Latch: Operable from both sides of closed partition.
1. Jamb Molding: Manufacturer's standard wood or metal molding at closing jamb as required for light-
tight jamb closure.
1. Finish wood molding to match species and finish or panel facing.
J. Wood Track Molding: Manufacturer's standard wood molding on each side of surface-mounted track
to match panel facings. Install with tight, hairline joints with all fasteners concealed.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. Install track in one piece.
B. Standard Floor Clearances: 1/4 to 3/4 inch maximum(above floor finish).
3.2 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Adjust units as necessary to ensure smooth, quiet operation without warping or binding. Check and
readjust operating hardware so that latches engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.
END OF SECTION 08351
FOLDING DOORS 08351 -3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Warranty Period: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Panel Folding Doors:
a. American Door Company, Inc.
b. Custom Fold Doors, Inc.
C. Holcomb&Hoke Mfg. Co., Inc. (FolDoor)
d. Modernfold, Inc.
e. Panelfold, Inc.
f. Rolscreen Co. (Pella)
g. Woodfold-Marco Mfg. Inc.
2.2 PANEL FOLDING DOORS
A. General Description: Top-supported, horizontal-sliding, manually operated panel folding doors with
continuous hinges on alternate sides of panels.
B. Core Material and Thickness: Provide the following:
1. Laminated wood, 3/8-inch minimum nominal thickness.
C. Panel Width: 6 inches nominal.
D. Facing: High-pressure plastic laminate, not less than 1/32 inch thick; colors and patterns selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full range of laminates; complying with NEMA LD 3; adhesive applied
under pressure to core.
E. Carriers: 4-wheel carriers at lead post and 2-wheel carriers at intermediate spacing, as necessary for
size and weight of partition, to ensure secure, easy, and quiet operation.
1. Panels over 4 inches wide: Ball-bearing wheels with nylon tread and steel shafts.
F. Tracks: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum or steel track with factory-applied, corrosion-
resistant finish. Track deflection, independent of structural supporting system, of no more than 80
percent of bottom clearance. Size track to support operation without damage to track, folding unit, or
adjacent surfaces; and to comply with the following requirements:
1. Surface-mounted channel track.
G. Hinge Connectors: Manufacturer's standard system of extruded-vinyl, concealed horizontal spring; or
continuous metal pin-type hinges combined with vinyl seals between panels. Color as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's standards.
FOLDING DOORS 08351 -2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 08351 -FOLDING DOORS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Panel folding doors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of door and installation accessory specified.
C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of folding doors including plans, elevations, details
of components, attachments to other units of work, and accessory items. Include location template
drawings for items supported or anchored to permanent construction.
D. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's actual outer covering material showing the
full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of outer covering material indicated.
E. Samples for verification of each type of outer covering material indicated in sets for each color, texture,
and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics.
F. Product certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that their products comply with specified
requirements.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other
rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition
to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer agreeing to repair or
replace components of folding doors that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty
period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Faulty operation of door, support system, or hardware.
2. Deterioration of finishes or finish materials beyond normal wear.
FOLDING DOORS 08351 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer that complies with ANSI A224.1
acceptance criteria, is compatible with finish paint systems indicated, and has capability to provide a '"
sound foundation for field-applied topcoats. Apply primer immediately after surface preparation and
pretreatment.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data,
and as specified.
B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames
accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After
wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and
undamaged.
1. Except for frames located in existing concrete, masonry, or gypsum board assembly
construction, place frames before constructing enclosing walls and ceilings.
2. In masonry construction, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on
hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry
wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors.
3. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
C. Door Installation: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in
ANSI/SDI 100.
1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install with clearances specified in NFPA 80.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime
coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.
B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and
frames.
END OF SECTION 08110
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
I. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-
applied hardware may be done at Project site.
J. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to the Door and
Hardware Institute's (DHI) 'Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel
Doors and Frames."
K. Glazing Stops: Minimum 0.0359-inch-thick steel or 0.040-inch-thick aluminum.
1. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for
glass, louvers, and other panels in doors.
2. Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing beads on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in
doors.
` 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and
designating finishes.
B. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for steel sheet finishes.
C. Apply primers and organic finishes to doors and frames after fabrication.
2.7 GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so that surfaces are free of oil or other
contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating of the type suited to the organic coating
applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair
paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.
1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized
steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with
DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint 20.
B. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated, apply
air-dried primer specified below immediately after cleaning and pretreatment.
1. Shop Primer: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer paint complying with performance requirements of
FS TT-P-641, Type U.
2.8 STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease, and
other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated
steel to comply with SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC-SP 8 (Pickling).
B. Pretreatment: Immediately after surface preparation, apply a conversion coating of type suited to
organic coating applied over it.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or
buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that
cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site.
Comply with ANSI/SDI 100 requirements.
1. Internal Construction: One of the following manufacturer's standard core materials according to
SDI standards:
a. Resin-impregnated paper honeycomb. Interior doors only.
b. Rigid polyurethane conforming to ASTM C 591.
C. Rigid polystyrene conforming to ASTM C 578.
d. Unitized steel grid. Interior doors only.
e. Vertical steel stiffeners. Interior doors only.
f. Rigid mineral fiber with internal sound deadener on inside of face sheets.
2. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch between
non-fire-rated pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom.
a. Fire Doors: Provide clearances according to NFPA 80.
B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from only
cold-rolled steel sheet.
C. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames." �►
D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold-
or hot-rolled steel sheet.
E. Galvanized Steel Doors, Panels, and Frames: For the following locations, fabricate doors, panels, and
frames from galvanized steel sheet according to SDI 112. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as
an integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 0.0635-inch-thick galvanized steel
channels, with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. Seal joints in top edges of doors
against water penetration.
1. At exterior locations and where indicated.
F. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed
screws and bolts.
G. Thermal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled,
provide doors fabricated as thermal-insulating door and frame assemblies and tested according to
ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal-rated assemblies with U-value rating of 0.41
Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F or better.
H. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware
according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with
applicable requirements of SDI 107 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame
preparation for hardware.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
m. Republic Builders Products.
n. Steelcraft.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial-quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with
ASTM A 569.
B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Carbon steel complying with ASTM A 366, commercial quality, or
ASTM A 620, drawing quality, special killed.
C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel complying with ASTM A 526, commercial quality,
or ASTM A 642, drawing quality, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 525, with A 60 or G 60
coating designation, mill phosphatized.
D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.0478-inch-thick steel sheet; 0.0516-inch-thick
galvanized steel where used with galvanized steel frames.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built into exterior
walls, hot-dip galvanize complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable.
2.3 DOORS
A. Steel Doors: Provide 1-3/4-inch-thick doors of materials and ANSI/SDI 100 grades and models
specified below, or as indicated on Drawings or schedules:
1. Interior Doors: Grade H, heavy-duty, Model 1, full flush design, minimum 0.0478-inch-thick
cold-rolled steel sheet faces.
2. Exterior Doors: Grade III, extra heavy-duty, Model 1, full flush design, minimum 0.0635-inch-
thick galvanized steel sheet faces.
2.4 FRAMES
A. Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, according
to ANSI/SDI 100, and of types and styles as shown on Drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings,
unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate frames of minimum 0.0478-inch-thick cold-rolled steel sheet.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded comers and reinforced heads..
2. Fabricate frames for interior openings over 48 inches wide from 0.0598-inch-thick steel sheet.
3. Fabricate exterior frames for openings over 48 inches wide from 0.0635-inch-thick galvanized
steel sheet.
B. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of
single-door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double-door frames.
C. Plaster Guards: Provide minimum 0.0179-inch- thick steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of
hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off
interior of openings.
D. Grout: When required in masonry construction, as specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry."
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110- 3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide doors and frames complying with ANSI/SDI 100 "Recommended Specifications for Standard
Steel Doors and Frames" and as specified.
B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame
assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per ASTM E 152, and are labeled and listed by
UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide
certification by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that doors conform
to all standard construction requirements of tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except
for size.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job
storage.
B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished
items match new work and are acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as
directed.
C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch-high wood
blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If ...s,,,
cardboard wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch
spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Steel Doors and Frames and Hollow Metal Frames for glazing:
a. Amweld Building Products, Inc.
b. Benchmark Commercial Doors.
C. Ceco Door Products.
d. Copco Door Co.
e. Curries Co.
f. Deansteel Manufacturing Co.
g. E.H. Fredrick&Co.
h. Fenestra Corp.
i. Kewanee Corp.
j. Mesker Door, Inc.
k. The Phillip Manufacturing Co. ,
1. Pioneer Industries.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 08110- STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes steel doors and frames and hollow metal frames to receive glazing.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for building anchors into and grouting frames in masonry
construction.
2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware and weatherstripping.
3. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass in steel doors and sidelights.
4. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting primed doors and frames.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction, materials,
dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound ratings, profiles, and finishes.
C. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details of each
frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location
and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
D. Door Schedule: Submit schedule of doors and frames and hollow metal frames to receive glazing using
same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Contract Drawings.
1. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.
E. Samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples not less than 3 by
5 inches and of same thickness and material indicated for final unit of Work. Where finishes involve
normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.
F. Oversize Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding
limitations of labeled assemblies, submit certification of a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction that each door and frame assembly has been constructed to conform to design,
materials, and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110- 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or
from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or
deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that and
installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 -ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANT
A. Vertical Joints
1. Base Polymer: Neutral-curing silicone. (Use mildew resistent in wet locations)
2. Type: Multicomponent.
3. Grade: NS (nonsag).
4. Manufacturer:
a. Pecora: 895 Silicone
b. Tremco: Spectrem II
C. Dow: 795/995
d. General Electric: Siliglaze II.
e. Schnee Morehead 5732.
B. Horizontal Joints
1. Base Polymer: Urethane.
2. Type: Single component.
3. Grade: P(pourable)
4. Manufacturer:
a. Mameco: Vulkem 45
b. Pecora: NR-201 Urexpan.
C. Sonneborn: Sonolastic SL 1.
END OF SECTION 07901
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 -7
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to
products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants
as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for use of
joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions
indicated.
D. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements:
1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at
position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to
joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers.
b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers.
C. Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application and
replace with dry material.
2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants where backer rods are not used between sealants and
joint fillers or back of joints.
E. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting
and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and
providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant
movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing
begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air
pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from
surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are
not approved by sealant manufacturer.
1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Provide flush joint configuration, per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193, where indicated.
a. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints.
3. Provide recessed joint configuration, per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193, of recess depth and at
locations indicated.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. °o""
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 -6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
rrn.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to
joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests and field
tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and
sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming in
any way joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion
of sealants with joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant
performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with
recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealant, including dust, paints(except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for
sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease,
waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and similar porous joint substrate
surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these
methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint
sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or
blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other nonporous
surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave
residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealant
manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer
to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant
bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces
that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods
required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint
seal.
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 -5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of,joint sealants until contaminants
capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants,joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with
one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by
sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following:
1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for
products of type indicated.
2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing elastomeric sealants
that comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated on each Elastomeric Joint Sealant Data
Sheet at end of this Section, including those requirements referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for
Type, Grade, Class, and Uses.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, elastomeric sealants that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in each Elastomeric
Sealant Data Sheet.
2.3 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by
sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonwaxing, nonextruding
strips of flexible plastic foam of material indicated below and of size, shape, and density to control
sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:
1. Closed-cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, nonoutgassing in
unruptured state.
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer
for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surfaces at back of
joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 -4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mock-ups will be erected.
4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint sealant manufacturer's technical representative present.
S. Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand pull method described below:
a. Install joint sealants in 60 inches joint lengths using same materials and methods for joint
preparation and joint sealant installation required for completed Work. Allow sealants to
cure fully before testing.
b. Make knife cuts horizontally from one side of joint to the other followed by 2 vertical
cuts approximately 2 inches long at side of joint and meeting horizontal cut at top of 2-
inch cuts. Place a mark 1 inch from top of 2-inch piece.
C. Use forgers to grasp 2-inch piece of sealant just above 1-inch mark; pull firmly down at
a 90-degree angle or more while holding a ruler along side of sealant. Pull sealant out of
joint to the distance recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesive
capability, but not less than that equaling specified maximum movement capability in
extension; hold this position for 10 seconds.
6. Report whether or not sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and
joint substrate.
7. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in
absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered
satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.
D. Field-Constructed Mock-Ups: Prior to installation of joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants as
follows to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as
qualities of materials and execution:
1. Joints in field-constructed mock-ups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated
to receive elastomeric joint sealants specified in this Section.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating
manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and
mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following
conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint
sealant manufacturer.
2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint
sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.
3. When joint substrates are wet.
B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less
than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated.
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 -3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that have been produced and installed to establish and
maintain airtight continuous seals that are water resistant and cause no staining or deterioration of joint
substrates.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required.
1. Certification by joint sealant manufacturer that sealants plus the primers and cleaners required
for sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic
compounds.
C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples, consisting of
strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view.
D. Samples for verification purposes of each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint sealant
samples in 1/2-inch wide joints formed between two 6-inch long strips of material matching the
appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
E. Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealants attesting that their products comply with specification
requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.
F. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from elastomeric sealant manufacturer indicating that materials
forming joint substrates and joint sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with
joint sealants. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to sealant
performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed joint sealant applications
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that have resulted in construction
with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant materials from a single
manufacturer for each different product required.
C. Preconstruction Field Testing: Prior to installation of joint sealants, field-test their adhesion to joint
substrates as follows:
1. Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:
a. Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
b. Each type of non-elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 -2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 07901 -JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations:
1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces as indicated below:
a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete.
b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
C. Joints between different materials listed above.
d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows.
e. Control and expansion joints in ceiling and overhead surfaces.
f. Other joints as indicated.
2. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below:
a. Control, expansion, and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
b. Other joints as indicated.
3. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces as indicated below:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
C. Tile control and expansion joints.
d. Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete walls
and partitions.
e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows,
and elevator entrances.
f. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures.
g. Other joints as indicated.
4. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below:
a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
b. Other joints as indicated.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and to maintain
watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates.
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
J. Layout snow guards in pattern shown on drawings. Tin back of each guard. Clean area, flux and tin
spot. Solder in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. (This procedure may be followed
on ground before installation of panels)
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that would interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.
B. Provide final protection in a manner acceptable to installer that ensures that metal roofing is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 07610
COPPER ROOFING 07610-5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION September 15, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.1 PREPARATION .
A. Coordinate metal roofing with rain drainage work, flashing, trim and construction of decks, walls, and
other adjoining work to provide a permanently leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise shown or specified, comply with
recommendations and instructions of manufacturer of sheet metal being fabricated and installed.
B. Separate dissimilar metals by painting each metal surface in area of contact with a bituminous coating,
by applying rubberized asphalt underlayment to each metal surface, or by other permanent separation as
recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
C. Install underlayment and paper slip sheet on substrate under metal roofing to greatest extent possible
unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer of sheet metal. Use adhesive for temporary anchorage,
where possible, to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under metal roofing. Lap joints 2 inches
minimum.
D. Form and fabricate sheets, seams, strips, cleats, valleys, ridges, edge treatments, integral flashings, and
other components of metal roofing to profiles, patterns, and drainage arrangements shown and as
required for permanently leakproof construction. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction of the
work. Seal joints as shown and as required for leakproof construction. Shop-fabricate materials to
greatest extent possible.
1. Height of standing seam: 1 inch.
E. Sealant-Type Joints: Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not
less that 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to conceal sealant completely. when ambient temperature is
moderate at time of installation (40 deg to 70 deg F or 4 deg to 21 deg C), set joint members for 50
percent movement either way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient
temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg Q. Comply
with requirements of Division 7 "Sealant" Sections for handling and installing sealants.
F. Fabricate and install work with lines and comers of exposed units true and accurate. Form exposed
faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves, and avoidable tool marks considering temper and
reflectivity of metal. provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and
sealant. Except as otherwise shown, fold back sheet metal to form a hem on concealed side of exposed
edges.
G. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work, and locate so as to
minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight
installation.
H. Tin uncoated copper surfaces at edges of sheets to be soldered, for a width of 1-1/2 inches, using solder
recommended for copper work.
1. Construct standing seams using Butyl Sealing Tape on top flange of shorter leg. Close and finish seam
as recommended by manufacturer of base metal.
COPPER ROOFING 07610-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
seam covers, flashings, louvers, sealants, gaskets, and closure strips. Match materials and finishes of
roof.
1. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive 100 percent solids polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with
release paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, non-sag, nontoxic, non-staining tape.
2. Joint Sealant: One-part elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone rubber sealant as
recommended by the building manufacturer.
G. Snow Guards for solder application:
1. Type#30, Vermont Slate&Copper Services Inc., Stowe, VT
2. Model No. 7, Zaleski Snow-Guards, Inc. New Britain, CT
3. Type#100M, M. J. Mullane Co., Hudson, MA
H. Rubberized Asphalt Perimeter Underlayment: 4-mil polyethylene sheet with 40-mil rubberized asphalt
adhesive coating, similar to "Bituthene Ice & Water Shield" (W.R. Grace & Co.) or "Polyken 640
Underlayment Membrane" (Polyken Technologies). Furnish type as recommended by manufacturer for
use at anticipated temperature at time of application. Provide primer over insulation as recommended
by underlayment manufacturer.
I. Fasteners: Nails of copper or hardware bronze of stronghold type. Minimum size No. 12 of sufficient
length to penetrate board 3/4".
2.3 SHOP-FABRICATED UNITS
A. General Metal Fabrication: Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with details
shown and with applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual", "Copper
and Common Sense" and other recognized industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather-
resistant performance with expansion provisions for running work and built-in gutters and downspouts,
sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage, or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit
substrate. Comply with material manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for forming
material. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool marks,
true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
B. Seams: Fabricate non-moving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed,
form seams, and solder.
C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in work cannot be used, or
would not be sufficiently water/weatherproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges,
not less that 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant(concealed with joints). Expansion joints with caps
as shown in "Copper and Common Sense" for built-in gutter systems.
D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non-expansion-type joints are indicated or required for proper
performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in
compliance with SMACNA standards.
E. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from non-compatible metal or corrosive substrate by
coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or other permanent
separation as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
COPPER ROOFING 07610-3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION September 15, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: A firm with 3 years of successful experience with installation of metal roofing of type and
scope equivalent to Work of this Section.
B. Industry Standard: Except as otherwise shown or specified, comply with applicable recommendations
and details of "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" by SMACNA and "Copper and Common Sense".
Conform to dimensions and profiles shown.
C. Wind Uplift: Provide roof assemblies meeting requirements of UL 580 for Class 90 wind uplift
resistance.
D. Design roof assembly to conform to the requirements of ANSI A 58.1.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide materials by one of the following:
1. Revere Copper Products, Inc.
2. Modem Metal Systems
3. Overly Manufacturing Co.
4. Architectural Roofing&Siding
5. Vincent Metals
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Copper Roofing Sheets, Built-in Gutters and Downspouts and All Fully Exposed Copper Flashing:
Cold-rolled copper sheet complying with ASTM B 370 temper designation, H00, unless otherwise
indicated, and as follows:
1. Weight: 16 oz. per sq. ft. unless otherwise indicated.
2. Weight: 20 oz. per sq. ft. for valleys and ridge caps.
B. Miscellaneous Materials: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective
coatings, separators, sealants and accessory items as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and
fabricator for metal roofing work, except as otherwise indicated.
C. Expansion Joint Sealant: For hooked-type expansion joints, which must be free to move, provide non-
setting, non-hardening, non-migrating, heavy-bodied polyisobutylene mastic sealant.
D. Paper Slip Sheet: Minimum 5-lb. rosin-sized building paper.
E. Felts: Provide asphalt-saturated organic felts conforming to the requirements of ASTM D 226, Type I
(No. 15).
F. Accessories: Except as indicated as work of another specification Section, provide components
required for a complete roof system, including trim, copings, fascias, ridge closures, ridge caps, clips,
COPPER ROOFING 07610-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 07610-COPPER ROOFING
(FILED SUB-BID)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Copper Roofing is stipulated as a Filed Sub-Bid under Paragraph D, Item 2 of the Form For General
Bid.
B. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the Form For Sub-Bid furnished by the Awarding Authority, as
required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. The time and place for
submission of Filed Sub-Bids are set forth in the Invitation To Bid.
C. The work to be done under this section is shown on Drawings numbered
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. See Division 1 Section "Alternates".
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Standing-seam metal roofing, flashing and built-in copper gutters and downspouts.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Wood framing and decking are specified in a Division 6 Section.
2. Gutter heat trace wiring and lightning protection is specified in Division 16.
3. Concealed and partially concealed copper flashing built into masonry is specified in Division 4
Section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data including metal manufacturer's and fabricator's specifications, installation instructions,
and general recommendations for roofing applications. Include certification or other data substantiating
that materials comply with requirements.
C. Samples consisting of 12-inch-square specimens of specified metal roofing material, built-in gutters and
snow guards with specified finishes applied.
Avok D. Shop drawings showing manner of forming,joining, and securing metal roofing, and pattern of seams.
Show expansion joint details and waterproof connections to adjoining work and at obstructions and
penetrations.
COPPER ROOFING 07610- 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Replace any damaged materials installed under this Section with new materials that meet specified
requirements.
END OF SECTION 07311
k
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. Cover knotholes or other
minor voids in substrate with sheet metal flashing secured with noncorrosive roofing nails.
B. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining work to ensure proper sequencing. Do not
install roofing materials until all vent stacks and other penetrations through roof sheathing have been
installed and are securely fastened against movement.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations but not less than those
recommended by ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual" or "The NRCA Steep Roofing
Manual."
1. Fasten asphalt shingles to roof sheathing with nails.
B. Felt Underlayment: Apply 1 layer of felt underlayment horizontally over entire surface to receive
asphalt shingles, lapping succeeding courses a minimum of 2 inches, end laps a minimum of 4 inches,
and hips and valleys a minimum of 6 inches. Fasten felt with sufficient number of roofing nails or
noncorrosive staples to hold underlayment in place until asphalt shingle installation.
1. Omit felt underlayment at areas of waterproof underlayment. Lap felt underlayment over
waterproof underlayment as recommended by manufacturer but not less than 2 inches.
C. Waterproof Underlayment: Apply waterproof underlayment at eaves. Cover deck from eaves to at
least 36 inches inside exterior wall line.
1. In addition to eaves, apply waterproof underlayment in place of felt underlayment at valleys.
D. Underlayment at Woven Valleys: Center a 36-inch-wide felt underlayment in valley and secure with
only enough nails to hold in place until asphalt shingles are installed. Lap roof underlayment over
valley underlayment at least 6 inches.
E. Woven Valleys: Comply with ARMA and NRCA recommendations.
F. Flashing: Install metal flashing and trim as indicated and according to details and recommendations of
the "Asphalt Roofing" section of "The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual" and ARMA's "Residential
Asphalt Roofing Manual.'
G. Install asphalt shingles, beginning at roof's lower edge, with a starter strip of roll roofing or inverted
asphalt shingles with tabs removed. Fasten asphalt shingles in the desired weather exposure pattern;
use number of fasteners per shingle as recommended by manufacturer. Use vertical and horizontal
chalk lines to ensure straight coursing.
1. Cut and fit asphalt shingles at valleys, ridges, and edges to provide maximum weather
protection. Provide same weather exposure at ridges as specified for roof. Lap asphalt shingles
at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing wind.
2. Use fasteners at ridges of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing as specified.
3. Pattern: 1/2 shingle spacing offset at succeeding courses.
H. Ridge Vents: Install ridge vents according to manufacturer's instructions.
3.4 ADJUSTING
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Sheet Metal Materials: Furnish the following sheet metal materials:
1. Copper: ASTM B 370, temper H00 or 060, 16 oz./sq. ft., all exposed flashing unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Metal Drip Edge: Brake-formed sheet metal with at least a 2-inch roof deck flange and a 1-1/2-inch
fascia flange with a 3/8-inch drip at lower edge. Furnish the following material in lengths of 8 or 10
feet .
1. Material: Copper.
C. Metal Flashing: Job-cut to sizes and configurations required.
1. Material: Copper.
D. Vent Pipe Flashing: Lead conforming to ASTM B 749, Type 151121, at least 1/16 inch thick, unless
otherwise indicated. Provide lead sleeve sized to slip over and turn down into pipe, soldered to skirt at
slope of roof extending at least 4 inches from pipe onto roof.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Felt Underlayment: Type I, 36-inch-wide, asphalt-saturated organic felt, complying with
ASTM D 226 (No. 15) or ASTM D 4869.
B. Felt Underlayment: Type II, 36-inch-wide, asphalt-saturated organic felt, complying with
ASTM D 226 (No. 30) or ASTM D 4869.
C. Waterproof Underlayment: Minimum 40-mil-thick, self-adhering, polymer-modified, bituminous sheet
membrane, complying with ASTM D 1970. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment
manufacturer.
D. Ridge Vent: High-density polypropylene, nonwoven modified polyester, or other UV-stabilized plastic
designed to be installed under asphalt shingles at ridge.
E. Asphalt Plastic Cement: Nonasbestos fibrated asphalt cement, complying with ASTM D 4586.
F. Nails: Aluminum or hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.120-inch-diameter barbed shank, sharp-pointed,
conventional roofing nails with a minimum 3/8-inch-diameter head and of sufficient length to penetrate
3/4 inch into solid decking or at least 1/8 inch through plywood sheathing. Staples are not permitted
1. Where nails are in contact with flashing, prevent galvanic action by providing nails made from
the same metal as that of the flashing.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrate for compliance with requirements for substrates, installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting performance of asphalt shingles. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide asphalt shingles produced by one of
the following:
1. Atlas Roofing Corp.
2. Bird, Inc.
3. CertainTeed Corporation.
4. IKO Manufacturing, Inc.
5. Tamko Asphalt Products, Inc.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Ridge Vents:
a. Ridge Master Plus; Mid-America Building Products.
b. Ridge Filter Shinglevent; Air Vent, Inc.
C. Cobra Ridge Vent; GAF Building Materials Corporation.
d. Trimline; Trimline Roof Ventilation Systems.
2. Waterproof Underlayment:
a. WinterGuard; CertainTeed Corporation.
b. Bituthene Ice and Water Shield; Grace: W.R. Grace&Co.
C. Nordshield Ice and WaterGard; Nord Bitumi US, Inc.
d. F210; Northern Elastomeric, Inc.
e. Polyguard Deck Guard; Polyguard Products, Inc.
f. Polyken 640 Underlayment Membrane; Polyken Technologies; Kendall Co. Division.
g. QSC-707; Quaker Construction Products, Inc.
h. Moisture Guard; Tamko Asphalt Products, Inc.
i. Weather Watch; GAF Building Materials Corporation.
j. Jiffy Seal Ice and Water Guard; Protecto Wrap Co.
k. Ice Guard Membrane No. 108-AG; Royston Laboratories, Inc.
2.2 ASPHALT SHINGLES
A. Colors, Blends, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated, provide asphalt
shingles with the following requirements:
1. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors, textures, and patterns
for asphalt shingles of type indicated.
B. Square-Tab, Fiberglass Strip Shingles: Mineral-surfaced, self-sealing, 3-tab, fiberglass-based, strip
asphalt shingles, complying with both ASTM D 3018, Type I, and ASTM D 3462. Provide shingles
with a Class A fire-test-response classification that pass the wind-resistance-test requirements of
ASTM D 3161.
2.3 METAL TRIM,FLASHING AND BUILT-IN GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Mockup: Prior to installing shingles, construct mockups to verify selections made under sample Awk
submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as quality of materials and execution. Build
mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final Work.
1. Locate mockups on site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed
by Architect.
2. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
3. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before start of final unit of Work.
a. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's unopened bundles or containers with labels intact.
B. Handle and store materials at Project site to prevent water damage, staining, or other physical damage.
Store roll goods on end. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for job-site storage, handling,
and protection.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installing asphalt shingles only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions will permit work to be performed according to manufacturers' recommendations and
warranty requirements, and when substrate is completely dry.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other
rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition
to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace
asphalt shingles that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures
include, but are not limited to, deformation or deterioration of asphalt shingles beyond normal
weathering. Warranty shall include labor.
1. Warranty Period: Not less than 30 years after date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective
covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents.
1. Furnish 1 square coverage of asphalt shingles, identical to those to be installed, in unbroken
bundles.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton,Massachusetts
SECTION 07311 -ASPHALT SHINGLES AND FLASHING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes asphalt shingles and flashing for steep roofs, and built-in copper gutters and
downspouts. See Section 01030-Alternates.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for partly concealed copper flashing built into masonry.
2. Division 6 Section 'Rough Carpentry" for wood sheathing and framing.
3. Division 16 Section "Electrical" for gutter heat trace wiring and lightning protection.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified, including details of construction relative to materials,
dimensions of individual components, profiles, textures, and colors.
C. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's sample finishes showing the full range of
colors and profiles available for each type of asphalt shingle indicated.
D. Samples for verification in the form of 2 full-size units of each type of asphalt shingle indicated
showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics.
E. Samples for verifaction of each cold rolled copper component.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Classification: Where products with a fire-test-response classification are specified,
provide asphalt shingles identical to those tested according to ASTM E 108 or UL 790 and listed by
UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify each
bundle of asphalt shingles with appropriate markings indicating fire-test-response classification of
applicable testing and inspecting agency.
B. Wind-Resistance-Test Characteristics: Where wind-resistant asphalt shingles are indicated, provide
products identical to those tested according to ASTM D 3161 or UL 997 and passed. Identify each
bundle of asphalt shingles with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive according to
anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application indicated.
2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between concrete
substrate and insulation.
3. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over
spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not to
compress insulation below indicated thickness.
4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers to tips
of spindles.
D. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact
to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5
lb/cu. ft.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure
in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover
miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.
B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than 2 wall studs. Fasten vapor
retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints.
look Space fasteners 16 inches o.c.
C. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or vapor-retarder tape according to vapor
retarder manufacturer's instructions. Seal butt joints and fastener penetrations with vapor-retarder tape.
Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.
D. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as recommended by
vapor retarder manufacturer.
E. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders
with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder.
F. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover
with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather
exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where
insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction
immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION 07210-5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing projections
capable of puncturing vapor retarders or that interfere with insulation attachment.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application
indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and has not been exposed at any time to ice and
snow.
C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly
around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise
shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION
A. On vertical surfaces, set Type IV units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer.
B. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying
protection board. Set in adhesive according to written instructions of insulation manufacturer.
C. Protect top surface of Type IV horizontal insulation from damage during concrete work by applying
protection board.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical
anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to
surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
B. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following
requirements:
1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill cavities formed by framing members. Where more than
one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.
2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of
insulation and adjoining framing members.
C. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation anchors as
follows:
BUILDING INSULATION 07210-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths.
B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular polystyrene thermal insulation formed from
polystyrene base resin by an extrusion process using hydrochlorofluorocarbons as blowing agent to
comply with ASTM C 578 for type and with other requirements indicated below:
1. Type IV, 1.8-lb/cu.ft. minimum density compressive strength 40psi under slabs
2. Type IV, 1.60-lb/cu. ft. minimum density, unless otherwise indicated at vertical surfaces
3. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 75
and 450, respectively.
C. Unfaced, Flexible Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: Thermal insulation combining glass fibers with
thermosetting resin binders to comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA; or with ASTM C 553, Types I, II,
and III; and with other requirements indicated below:
1. Nominal Density: Not less than 1.5 lb/cu. ft. nor more than 1.65 lb/cu. ft..
2. Thermal Resistivity: 4.13 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F.
3. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively.
2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13
perm.
B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer for
sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
2.4 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS
A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to
substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.
B. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit
between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and
vented eaves.
C. Insulation Supporting Mesh: Galvanized Poultry Mesh.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections
in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions affecting
performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
BUILDING INSULATION 07210- 3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response
characteristics indicated on Drawings or specified elsewhere in this Section as determined by testing
identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable
testing and inspecting agency.
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and
other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for
handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B. Protect plastic insulation as follows:
1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site
before installation time.
3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering insulation
products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation:
a. Amoco Foam Products Company.
b. DiversiFoam Products.
C. Dow Chemical Co.
d. UC Industries, Inc.; Owens-Coming Co.
2. Glass-Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.
C. Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corporation.
d. Schuller International, Inc.
2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards.
BUILDING INSULATION 07210-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 07210 -BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Insulation under slabs-on-grade.
2. Foundation wall insulation(supporting backfill).
3. Concealed building insulation.
4. Loose-fill building insulation.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 4 Section 'Unit Masonry" for insulation installed in cavity walls and masonry cells.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of insulation product specified.
C. Samples of exposed insulation for initial selection in the form of actual units or sections of units
showing the full range of colors available for each type of exposed insulation indicated.
D. Samples for verification in full-size units of each type of exposed insulation indicated for each color
specified.
E. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by a qualified independent testing agency
evidencing compliance of insulation products with specified requirements including those for thermal
resistance, fire-test-response characteristics, water-vapor transmission, water absorption, and other
properties, based on comprehensive testing of current products.
F. Research or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction that evidence compliance of foam-plastic insulations with building code in effect for
Project.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation from a
single source with resources to provide products complying with requirements indicated without
delaying the Work.
BUILDING INSULATION 07210- 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. Reinforcement: At changes in plane or where otherwise shown as "reinforced," install lapped course of A
glass fabric in first coat of dampproofing compound before it thickens.
F. Bituminous Cant Strips: Install 2-by-2-inch cant strip of bituminous grout at base of vertical
dampproofing where it meets horizontal surface.
G. Apply vertical dampproofing down walls from finished-grade line to top of footing, extend over top of
footing, and down a minimum of 6 inches over outside face of footing. Extend 12 inches onto
intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces exposed to view when the Project is
completed.
3.3 COLD-APPLIED, ASPHALT EMULSION DAMPPROOFING
A. Semimastic Grade: Brush or spray apply a coat of asphalt emulsion dampproofing at a rate of 5
gal./100 sq. ft., to produce a uniform, dry-film thickness of not less than 30 mils.
3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect exterior, below-grade dampproofing membrane from damage until backfill is completed.
Remove overspray and spilled materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION COURSE
A. General: Where indicated, install protection course of type indicated over completed-and-cured
dampproofing treatment. Comply with dampproofing materials manufacturer's recommendations for
method of support or attaching of protection materials. Support with spot application of trowel-grade
mastic where not otherwise indicated.
END OF SECTION 07160
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07160-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Protection Course II; ChemRex, Inc.; Sonneborn Building Products Div.
b. Bituthene Asphaltic Hardboard; Grace: W.R. Grace&Co.
C. PC-2 Protection Course; Meadows: W.R. Meadows, Inc.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of projections and substances detrimental to work; comply with recommendations of
prime materials manufacturer.
B. Install cant strips and similar accessories as shown and as recommended by prime materials
manufacturer even though not shown.
C. Fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond breakers, if any, as recommended by prime materials
manufacturer, with particular attention at construction joints.
D. Install separate flashings and comer protection stripping, as recommended by prime materials
manufacturer, where indicated to precede application of dampproofing. Comply with details shown
and with manufacturer's recommendations. Pay particular attention to requirements at building
expansion joints, if any.
E. Prime substrate as recommended by prime materials manufacturer.
F. Protection of Other Work: Do not allow liquid and mastic compounds to enter and clog drains and
conductors. Prevent spillage and migration onto other surfaces of work by masking or otherwise
protecting adjoining work.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations except where more stringent requirements are indicated
and where Project conditions require extra precautions to ensure satisfactory performance of work.
B. Application: Apply dampproofing to the following surfaces.
1. Exterior, below-grade surfaces of exterior concrete or masonry walls in contact with earth or
other backfill and where space is enclosed on opposite side.
2. Back side of concrete or masonry retaining walls and stone facing to prevent percolating of
water through the wall or facing.
3. Exterior surface of inside wythe of double-wythe, exterior masonry walls above grade, to
prevent water-vapor penetration through the wall.
4. Where indicated on the Drawings.
C. Hot-Applied Asphalt Dampproofing: Apply on exterior surfaces only.
D. Cold-Applied Asphalt Dampproofing: For exterior surfaces, provide emulsified asphalt dampproofing
materials, at Contractor's option. For interior surfaces, provide only emulsified asphalt materials.
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07160- 3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with dampproofing only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions will permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's recommendations and
warranty requirements.
C. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing in enclosed spaces.
Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has thoroughly cured.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Cold-Applied, Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofing:
a. ChemRex, Inc.; Sonneborn Building Products Div.
b. Euclid Chemical Co.
C. Karnak Chemical Corporation.
d. Koppers Industries, Inc.
e. Meadows: W.R. Meadows, Inc.
2.2 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
A. General: Provide products recommended by manufacturer for designated application.
1. Odor Elimination: For interior and concealed-in-wall uses, provide type of bituminous
dampproofing material warranted by manufacturer to be substantially odor free after drying for
24 hours under normal conditions.
B. Cold-Applied, Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofimg: Asphalt-based emulsions recommended by the
manufacturer for dampproofing use when applied according to the manufacturer's instructions.
1. Semimastic Grade: Emulsified asphalt semimastic, prepared with mineral-colloid emulsifying
agents and containing fibers other than asbestos, complying with ASTM D 1227, Type III or
IV.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Asphalt primer complying with ASTM D 41, for asphalt-based dampproofing.
B. Glass Fabric: Woven glass fabric, treated with asphalt, complying with ASTM D 1668, Type I.
C. Protection Course, Board Type: Premolded, 1/8-inch-thick, multi-ply, semirigid board, consisting of a
mineral-stabilized asphalt core sandwiched between layers of asphalt-saturated felt, and faced on one
side with polyethylene film.
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07160-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 07160-BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Sectic=.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Cold-applied, asphalt emulsion dampproofing.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry"
2. Division 7 Section "Composite Sheet Waterproofing".
1.3 SUBMITTALS
look A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified, including data substantiating that materials comply
with requirements for each dampproofing material specified. Include recommended method of
application, recommended primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and recommended
protection course.
1. Certification by dampproofing manufacturer that products supplied comply with local
regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed bituminous dampproofing
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful
in-service performance.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers from one source
and by a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of
primary materials.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
40%, A. Substrate: Proceed with dampproofing only after substrate construction and penetrating work have
been completed.
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07160 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.4 PROTECTION COURSE INSTALLATION
A. Install protection course over waterproofing membrane using tape or adhesive according to
manufacturer's written instructions and before commencing subsequent construction operations.
Minimize exposure of membrane.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements, repair
substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.
1. After flood tests, repair leaks and make further repairs until waterproofing installation is
watertight.
B. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected
Work with requirements.
3.6 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during application and remainder of construction period,
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Protect installed insulation from damage due to ultraviolet light exposure, physical abuse, and other
causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed
and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.
C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 07111
40%k
COMPOSITE SHEET WATERPROOFING 07111 -6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
a. At footing-to-wall intersections, extend liquid membrane each direction from comer or
install membrane strip centered over comer.
b. At deck-to-wall intersections, extend liquid membrane or sheet membrane flashing onto
deck waterproofing and to finished height of sheet flashing.
G. Outside Corners: Prepare and treat outside comers according to waterproofing manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Install strip of membrane 12 inches wide, centered over comer.
H. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through
waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to waterproofing manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. At expansion joints and discontinuous deck-to-wall or deck-to-deck joints, bridge and cover with
sheet membrane strips.
3.3 SELF-ADHERING COMPOSITE SHEET APPLICATION
A. Install self-adhering composite sheet according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply primer to substrate at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered
by waterproofing membrane in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.
C. Apply and firmly adhere sheet membrane over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets
and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch-minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams and
stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation.
1. When ambient and substrate temperatures exceed 40 deg F, install manufacturer's standard
rubberized-asphalt composite sheet.
2. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F, install manufacturer's
standard, low-temperature, rubberized-asphalt composite sheet.
3. On substrates to receive hot-mixed asphalt paving, install heavy-duty, rubberized-asphalt
composite sheet.
D. Two-Ply Application: Install sheet membrane with a lap width not less than 50 percent of sheet width
to provide a minimum 2 thicknesses of sheet membrane over area to receive waterproofing.
E. Apply sheet membrane from low point to high point of deck to ensure side laps shed water.
F. Apply continuous sheet membrane over membrane strips bridging each type of joint to dimensions
indicated or required by manufacturer.
G. Seal exposed edges of membrane terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in
reglets with mastic or sealant.
H. Install sheet membrane and auxiliary materials to tie in adjacent waterproofing.
1. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not meeting requirements. Slit and flatten
fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet membrane extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all
directions.
COMPOSITE SHEET WATERPROOFING 07111 -5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
H. Joint Tape: 62.5-mil-thick felt-reinforced self-adhesive tape, 6 inches wide, with a release film on Awl%,
adhesive side.
I. Protection Course: As follows:
1. Semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforced asphaltic core, pressure laminated between 2
asphalt-saturated fibrous liners and as follows:
a. Thickness: 1/4 inch, nominal.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which waterproofing systems will be applied, with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Do not proceed with installation until after minimum concrete curing period recommended by
waterproofing manufacturer.
2. Verify substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet
method according to ASTM D 4263.
3. Notify Architect in writing of anticipated problems using waterproofing over substrate.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean,
dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage affecting other
construction.
C. Remove grease, oil, form release agents, paints, and other penetrating contaminants from concrete.
D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and
other voids.
E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrate. Remove dust and dirt from joints and
cracks according to ASTM D 4258.
1. Install membrane strip and center over construction and control joints and cracks exceeding a
width of 1/16 inch.
F. Inside Comers: Prepare, prime, and treat inside comers according to waterproofing manufacturer's
written instructions.
1. Install membrane strip centered over vertical inside comers. Install 3/4-inch fillets of liquid
membrane on horizontal inside comers and as follows: -00^
COMPOSITE SHEET WATERPROOFING 07111 -4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Rubberized-Asphalt Composite Sheet:
a. PQ 7100; American Permaquik Inc.
b. QSC 701; Carlisle Corporation, Carlisle Coatings&Waterproofing Inc.
C. Bituthene; Grace: W.R. Grace&Co.
d. Elasto-Ply; Karnak Corporation.
e. Mel-rol; Meadows: W.R. Meadows, Inc.
f. Miradri; Nicolon/Mirafi Inc.
g. Nordtene; Nord Bitumi U.S. Inc.
h. Duramem 700-SM; Pecora Corporation.
i. Polyguard 650; Polyguard Products, Inc.
j. Plastiwrap 60; Progress Unlimited, Inc.
2.2 SELF-ADHERING COMPOSITE SHEET
A. Rubberized-Asphalt Composite Sheet: 60-mil-thick self-adhering sheet consisting of 56 mils of
rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil-thick polyethylene film with release liner on adhesive side.
1. Sheet Type: Manufacturer's standard composite sheet for use when ambient and substrate
temperatures exceed 40 deg F.
2. Physical Properties: Provide waterproofing complying with the following:
a. Tensile Strength: 250 psi minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified.
b. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified.
C. Pliability: No cracks when bent 180 degrees over a 1-inch mandrel at minus 25 deg F;
*4 ASTM D 146.
d. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch movement; ASTM C 836.
e. Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf minimum; ASTM E 154.
f. Hvdrostatic-Head Resistance: 150 feet minimum; ASTM D 5385.
g. Water Absorption: 0.15 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour immersion at 70
deu F; ASTM D 570.
2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use
and compatible with waterproofing sheet membrane.
B. Primer: Liquid primer recommended by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material for substrate.
C. Sheet Flashing: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt composite sheet of same material, construction, and
thickness as waterproofing sheet membrane.
D. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, 2-component, liquid, cold fluid-applied, trowel grade or low viscosity
as recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for application.
E. Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, 2-component, asphalt-modified coating.
F. Mastic, Adhesives. and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended by
waterproofing manufacturer.
40ftk G. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick, predrilled at 9-inch
centers.
COMPOSITE SHEET WATERPROOFING 07111 -3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer who has completed waterproofing similar to that indicated
for this Project and who is acceptable to waterproofing manufacturer.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain waterproofing materials from a single manufacturer regularly
engaged in manufacturing waterproofing.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's
name, product, date of manufacture, and directions for storage.
B. Store materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location and within
temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct
sunlight.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Apply waterproofing within range of ambient and substrate temperatures
recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate.
1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist.
B. Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of waterproofing materials.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other
rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition
to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by waterproofing manufacturer and Installer
agreeing to repair or replace waterproofing that does not meet requirements or that does not remain
watertight during the specified warranty period. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing
due to failure of substrate prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints
and cracks in substrate exceeding 1/16 inch in width.
1. Warranty Period: 5 years after date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: -On
COMPOSITE SHEET WATERPROOFING 07111 -2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 07111 - COMPOSITE SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Below-grade wall waterproofing where indicated
2. Waterproofing under elevator floor and at elevator pits walls.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete placement, curing, and finishing.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealant materials and installation.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide waterproofing that prevents the passage of liquid water under hydrostatic pressure
and complies with requirements as demonstrated by testing performed by an independent testing agency
of manufacturer's current sheet membrane.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of waterproofing specified, including manufacturer's printed instructions for
evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance
properties.
C. Shop Drawings showing locations and extent of waterproofing, including details for substrate joints and
cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, tie-ins with adjoining construction, and other termination
conditions.
D. Samples, 3-by-6-inch minimum size, of each waterproofing material required for Project.
E. Installer certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that Installers comply with requirements under
the "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance of
waterproofing with requirements and other physical properties reported by manufacturer based on
comprehensive testing of products according to current standard test methods within previous 5 years.
COMPOSITE SHEET WATERPROOFING 07111 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.8 SOFFIT INSTALLATION
A. Plywood Soffit: Install panels with edges over framing or blocking. Nail at 6-inch intervals at panel
perimeter and 12-inch intervals at intermediate supports, unless manufacturer recommends other
intervals. Leave 1/16-inch gap between adjacent panels, unless otherwise recommended by panel
manufacturer. Leave 1/8-inch gap at perimeter and openings, unless otherwise recommended by panel
manufacturer.
1. Seal butt joints at inside and outside corners and at trim locations.
2. Install aluminum soffit screening.
3. Conceal fasteners to greatest practical extent by countersinking and filling.
3.9 ADJUSTING
A. Repair damaged or defective finish carpentry where possible to eliminate functional or visual defects.
Where not possible to repair, replace finish carpentry. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure finish carpentry is without damage or
deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 06200
Awk
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200- 8
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton,Massachusetts
A. Do not use finish carpentry materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished,
inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.
1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
B. Install finish carpentry plumb, level, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims
where required for alignn3ent.
1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Countersink nails. fill surface flush, and sand where face nailing is unavoidable.
3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for plumb and level. Install adjoining finish
carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset
for reveal installation.
4. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to standing and running
trim and rails. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exposed
surfaces of trim and rails.
C. Finish according to specified requirements.
D. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of finish carpentry.
3.4 STANDING AND RUN- ING TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of
lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long, except where necessary. Stagger joints
in adjacent and related szanding and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce
tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end
joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints, if required.
1. AWI: Section 300. Premium
2. Match color and _-rain pattern across joints.
3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement
or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
4. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Apply flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather.
3.5 PANELING INSTALLATION
A. Plywood Paneling: Selact and arrange panels on each wall for best match of adjacent panels where
grain character or color v-ariations are noticeable. Install with uniform tight joints between panels.
1. AWI: Section 500, Premium
2. Conceal fasteners to greatest practical extent.
3.6 HARDBOARD COUNTERTOPS
A. Install according to manufacturer's recommendations. Butt adjacent panels with moderate contact.
Install with panel adhesive.
3.7 PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS
A. AWI Section 400, Premium
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-7
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.8 PLASTIC LAMINATE: High pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LO3 grade, GP-50
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails of the following materials, in sufficient length
to penetrate minimum of 1-1/2 inches into substrate, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer.
1. Stainless steel.
2. Noncorroding aluminum.
B. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size,
material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where
possible.
C. Paneling Adhesives: Comply with paneling manufacturer's recommendations for adhesives.
2.10 FABRICATION
A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and
manufacturer's recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry on relative humidity
conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas.
B. Fabricate finish carpentry to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
1. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except members with ends exposed in finished
work:
a. Exterior standing and running trim wider than 5 inches.
b. Interior standing and running trim, except shoe mold and crown mold.
2. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting installation and performance of finish carpentry. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B. Condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before
installation, for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer.
C. Prime and backprime lumber for painted finish exposed on the exterior. Comply with requirements for
surface preparation and application in Division 9 Section "Painting."
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Shelving and Clothes Rods: Provide the following:
1. Shelving: 3/4-inch plywood shelving with hardwood front edge.
2. Shelving: 3/4-inch boards of same species and grade indicated above for interior softwood trim.
3. Clothes Rods: 1-3/8-inch-diameter clear, kiln-dried hardwood rods.
4. Shelf support: Stanley #7046 or equal.
2.6 PANELING
A. Hardwood Veneer Plywood Paneling: Manufacturer's stock hardwood plywood panels complying with
applicable requirements of HPVA HP-1.
1. Face Veneer Species: Plain sliced red oak.
2. Backing Veneer Species: Any hardwood compatible with face species.
3. Construction: Veneer core.
4. Thickness: 7/16 inch(11 mm).
5. Panel Size: 48 by 96 inches (1219 by 2438 mm).
6. Glue Bond: Type II(interior).
B. Hardboard Countertop: Interior factory-finished hardboard paneling complying with
ANSI/AHA 135.5.
1. Thickness: 1/4 inch(6.4 mm).
2. Finish: Class I.
Oak 3. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84:
a. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
4. Colors, Textures, and Patterns:
C. Plywood Soffits: Exterior-type, APA 303 series siding, in panel sizes indicated.
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch
2. Type: 303-OL, medium-density overlay.
2.7 SOLID SURFACING MATERIAL BENCHES
A. Fabrication: Fabricate benches in one piece with shop-applied bullnose and edges, unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with solid surfacing material manufacturer's recommendations for adhesives,
sealers, fabrication, and finishing.
B. Solid Surfacing Material Thickness: 1/2 inch. Skirt only.
C. Solid Surfacing Material Thickness: 3/4 inch. Bench.
D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solid surface
material complying with the following requirements:
1. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes.
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 -5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
a. Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic. °°'a
2. Pressure-treat aboveground items with preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 lb/cu. ft.
Kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent,
respectively.
3. Solid Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with the
material and performance requirements of ANSI Z124.3, Type 5 or Type 6, without a precoated
finish.
4. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Avonite; Avonite, Inc.
b. Corian; DuPont Poylmers.
C. Surell; Formica Corp.
d. Fountainhead; Nevamar Corp.
e. Swanstone; The Swan Corporation.
f. Gibraltar; Ralph Wilson Plastics Co.
2.4 EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A. Lumber Trim: Provide finished lumber and moldings complying with the following requirements
including those of the grading agency listed with species:
1. Species: Western red cedar; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
a. Grade: Clear Heart.
2. Texture: Surfaced(smooth).
3. Lumber for Transparent Finish (Stained or Clear): Solid lumber stock.
2.5 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A. Softwood Trim: Provide finished lumber and moldings complying with the following requirements
including those of the grading agency listed with species:
1. Species: Eastern white pine; NELMA or Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine;
WWPA.
2. Species: Douglas fir; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA on hose racks only.
3. Grade: Prime Finish.
4. Grade: D Select or Quality on hose racks only.
5. Texture: Surfaced(smooth).
6. Lumber for Painted Finish: Glued-up lumber or solid lumber stock.
B. Hardwood Trim: Provide finished hardwood lumber and moldings complying with the following
requirements: Battens on hardwood plywood paneling.
1. Species and Cut: Rift-sawn, clear, kiln-dried cherry selected for compatible grain and color.
2. Texture: Surfaced (smooth). -Iwk
3. Lumber for Transparent Finish(Stained or Clear): Solid lumber stock.
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
e. Ply-Gem Manufacturing.
f. Weyerhaeuser Co.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," for lumber and
with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards
Committee Board of Review.
B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the
following:
1. NELMA-Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association.
2. NHLA-National Hardwood Lumber Association.
3. NLGA-National Lumber Grades Authority.
4. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
5. WCLIB -West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
6. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association.
C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency
evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species,
moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
1. For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece, or
omit grade stamps entirely and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection
agency.
D. Softwood Plywood: Comply with DOC PS 1, "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial
Plywood."
E. Hardwood Plywood: Comply with HPVA HP-1, "Interim Voluntary Standard for Hardwood and
Decorative Plywood."
F. Hardboard: ANSI/AHA A135.4
2.3 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Nonpressure Process: Comply with NWWDA I.S. 4 and the following for
items indicated to receive water-repellent preservative treatment.
1. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-
propynyl butyl carbamate(IPBC) as its active ingredient.
B. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: Comply with AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9
(plywood) and the following for items indicated to receive pressure preservative treatment. Mark each
treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by American
Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
1. Preservative Chemicals: Pressure-impregnate woodwork with preservative chemicals acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction. Use chemical formulations that do not bleed through or
otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants in solution to distinguish treated
material from untreated material.
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. Samples for verification of the following:
1. Lumber and panel products with nonfactory-applied finish, 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10
inches for panels for each species and cut, with one-half of exposed surface finished.
F. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
relative to compliance of fire-retardant-treated wood products with requirements indicated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed finish carpentry similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and
contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air
circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.
B. Do not deliver interior finish carpentry until environmental conditions meet requirements specified for
installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where
environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas.
low
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until building is enclosed
and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating
and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels through the remainder of
construction period.
B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installing exterior finish carpentry only when existing and
forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's
recommendations and warranty requirements and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied
without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Hardwood Veneer Plywood Paneling:
a. Abitibi-Price Corp.; Building Products Division.
b. Champion International Corp.
C. Chesapeake Hardwood Products, Inc. low
d. Georgia-Pacific Corp.
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 06200 -FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior standing and running trim.
2. Interior standing and running trim.
3. Plywood paneling.
4. Hardboard countertops.
S. Plywood soffits.
6. Solid surface material benches.
7. Lavatory countertops (plastic laminates).
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not
exposed to view.
2. Division 9 Section "Painting" for priming and back priming of finish carpentry.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of factory-fabricated product and process specified, including details of
construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, textures, and colors.
C. Wood treatment data as follows, including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling,
storing, installing, and finishing treated material:
1. For each type of preservative-treated wood product include certification by treating plant stating
type of preservative solution and process used, net amount of preservative retained, and
compliance with applicable standards.
2. For water-borne-treated products include statement that moisture content of treated materials was
reduced to levels indicated before shipment to Project site.
D. Samples for initial selection of the following in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of
actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for
each type of material indicated.
1. Each type of paneling specified.
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200- 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Install and brace trusses according to recommendations of TPI and as indicated.
E. Install trusses plumb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction.
F. Space, adjust, and align trusses in location before permanently fastening and as follows:
1. Truss Spacing: As indicated.
G. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points using metal framing anchors. Install fasteners through
each fastener hole in metal framing anchor according to manufacturer's fastening schedules and written
instructions.
H. Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses.
1. Anchor trusses to girder trusses as indicated.
I. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are applied.
Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams.
J. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances of ANSI/TPI 1.
K. Do not cut or remove truss members.
L. Return wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements to fabricator and replace with
trusses that do meet requirements.
1. Do not alter trusses in the field.
END OF SECTION 06192
METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06192-6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 1
Northampton, Massachusetts
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nu 1, where
indicated, flat washers.
2.4 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. General: Provide metal framing anchors of structural capacity, type, size, metal, and finis:_indicated
that comply with requirements specified, including the following:
1. Research or Evaluation Reports: Provide products for which model code research or e+aluation
reports exist that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that evidence compliance
of metal framing anchors for application indicated with building code in effect for this Project.
2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as pahlished by
manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be
determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis, and demonstrated by
comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G60 coating
designation; structural, commercial, or lock-forming quality, as standard with manufacturer for type of
anchor indicated.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304 or 316, chromium nickel steel sheet; 33,000-psi
minimum yield strength.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close-fitting joints.
B. Fabricate metal connector plates to size, configuration, thickness, and anchorage details required to
withstand design loadings for types of joint designs indicated.
C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated using jigs or other means to ensure
uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances of
ANSI/TPI 1. Position members to produce design camber indicated.
1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances of ANSI/TPI 1.
D. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded simultaneously into
both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Do not install wood trusses until supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured.
B. Before installing, splice trusses delivered to Project site in more than one piece.
C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, exercising care
not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes.
METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06192-5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Silver Metal Products, Inc.
d. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc.
e. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc.
f. United Steel Products Co.
2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," and with
applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review.
1. NELMA-Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association.
2. NLGA-National Lumber Grades Authority (Canadian).
3. SPIB -Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
4. WCLIB -West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
5. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association.
B. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency
evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species,
moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
C. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, manufactured to actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content
specified, to comply with requirements indicated below:
1. Provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing.
D. Grade and Species: Provide visually graded dimension lumber for truss chord and web members, of
the following grade and species:
1. Grade for Chord Members: Select Structural.
2. Grade for Chord Members: No. 1.
3. Grade for Chord Members: No. 2.
4. Grade for Web Members: No. 2.
S. Species: Southern pine graded per SPIB rules.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified below
for material and manufacture.
1. Where truss members are exposed to weather or to high relative humidities, provide fasteners
with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of stainless steel, Type 304 or 316.
B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts and Screws: ASME B18.2.1.
METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06192 -4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. Single-Source Responsibility for Connector Plates: Provide metal connector plates from one source and
by a single manufacturer.
F. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of AFPA's "National Design
Specification for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement.' ~~~
G. Single-Source Engineering Responsibility: Provide trusses engineered by metal-plate connector
manufacturer to support superimposed dead and live loads'ifidicated, with design approved and certified
by a qualified professional engineer.
H. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally authorized to practice in
the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of
the kind indicated that have resulted in installing metal-plate-connected wood trusses similar to those
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle and store trusses with care and comply with manufacturer's written instructions and TPI
recommendations to avoid damage and lateral bending.
B. Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard and
replace trusses that are damaged or defective.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying progress
of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Metal Connector Plates:
a. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc.
b. Computrus, Inc.
C. Mitek Industries, Inc.
d. Robbins Manufacturing Cougxmy.
e. Tee-Lok Corporation.
f. Truswal Systems Corporatim.
2. Metal Framing Anchors:
a. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
b. Harlen Metal Products, Inc.
METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06192-3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Shop Drawings detailing location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of
truss required; species, sizes, and stress grades of lumber to be used; lice details;eq P� g splice type, size, material,
finish, design values, and orientation and location of metal connector plates; and bearing details.
1. To the extent truss design considerations are indicated as fabricator's responsibility, include
structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
their preparation.
2. Include truss Shop Drawings with erection plans and details signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
D. Product certificates signed by officer of truss fabricating firm certifying that metal-plate-connected
wood trusses supplied for Project comply with specified requirements and Shop Drawings.
E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,
names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
F. Material certificates for dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses.
Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the American Lumber
Standards Committee(ALSC) Board of Review.
G. Research or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction that evidence the following products' compliance with building code in effect for Project.
1. Metal-plate connectors.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed wood truss installation
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful
in-service performance.
B. Fabricator's Qualifications: Engage a firm that complies with the following requirements for quality
control and is experienced in fabricating metal-plate-connected wood trusses similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance:
1. Fabricator participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that involves inspection by
SPIB; Timber Products Inspection, Inc.; Truss Plate Institute (TPI); or other independent
inspecting and testing agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following publications:
1. ANSI/TP1 1, "National Design Standard for Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Truss Construction."
2. TPI HIB "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling Installing & Bracing Metal Plate
Connected Wood Trusses."
3. TPI DSB "Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate Connected
Wood Trusses.'
D. Metal-Plate Connector Manufacturer's Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI and that
complies with TPI quality-control procedures for manufacture of connector plates published in
ANSI/TPI 1.
METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06192 -2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 06192-METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Triangular-pitched roof trusses.
2. Truss accessories.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for rough hardware anchoring trusses to concrete or
masonry structures.
2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for roof and floor sheathing of structural-use panels and
dimension lumber for supplementary framing and permanent bracing.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Metal-plate-connected wood trusses include planar structural units consisting of metal-plate-connected
members fabricated from dimension lumber and cut and assembled before delivery to Project site.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and erect metal-plate-connected wood trusses to withstand
design loads within limits and under conditions required.
1. Design Loads: As indicated.
B. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a fabricator who uses a qualified professional engineer to prepare
calculations, Shop Drawings, and other structural data for metal-plate-connected wood trusses.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for lumber. metal-plate connectors, metal framing connectors, bolts, and fasteners.
METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06192- 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Install framing members of size and at spacing indicated.
C. Do not splice structural members between supports.
D. Firestop concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level and at ceiling line of
top story. Where firestopping is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted wood
blocks of 2-inch nominal-thickness lumber of same width as framing members.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30, "APA
Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and
applications indicated.
1. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions of above-referenced guide.
B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1. Sheathing: Nail to framing.
a. Space panels 1/8 inch at edges and ends.
b. Block or use clips at cross joints. laftk
2. Plywood Backing Panels: Nail or screw to supports.
END OF SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100- 8
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-
propynyl butyl carbonate(IPBC)as its active ingredient.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry and that are too small to
use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted.
C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate
location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other
construction.
D. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and
plywood.
E. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying
with the following:
1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven staples, P-nails, and allied fasteners.
2. "Recommended Nailing Schedule" of referenced framing standard and with AFPA's "National
Design Specifications for Wood Construction."
3. "Table 2305.2--Fastening Schedule" of the BOCA National Building Code.
F. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select
fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or
will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting wood; predrill as required.
G. Use hot-dip galvanized or stainless-steel nails where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground
contact, or in area of high relative humidity.
3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS
A. Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required for screeding or
attaching other work. Form to shapes shown and cut as required for true line and level of attached
work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.
B. Attach to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless
otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor
to formwork before concrete placement.
C. Install permanent grounds of dressed, preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2
inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material.
Remove temporary grounds when no longer n+oquired.
3.3 WOOD FRAMING, GENERAL
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-7
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Exposure Durability Classification: Exterior.
2. Span Rating: 40/20 but not less than 19/32 inches thick.
2.10 STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS FOR BACKING
A. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire-retardant-
treated plywood panels with grade, C-D Plugged Exposure 1, in thickness indicated or, if not otherwise
indicated, not less than 15/32 inch thick.
2.11 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this
Article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative
humidity, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of Type 304
stainless steel.
B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where
indicated, flat washers.
2.12 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. General: Provide galvanized steel framing anchors of structural capacity, type, and size indicated and
as follows:
1. Research or Evaluation Reports: Provide products for which model code research or evaluation
reports exist that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that evidence compliance
of metal framing anchors for application indicated with building code in effect for Project.
2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by
manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be
determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis, and demonstrated by
comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
B. Truss Tie-Downs (Hurricane Ties): Bent strap tie for fastening rafters or roof trusses to wall studs
below, 1-5/8 inches wide by 0.052 inch thick.
2.13 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION. December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
OWN, values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis, and
demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
B. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Lumber manufactured by laminating wood veneers in a continuous press
using an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 25519—to produce members with grain of
veneers parallel to their lengths and complying with the following requirements:
1. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending: 2800 psi for 12-Wich n6mmal-depth members.
2. Modulus of Elasticity: 2,000,000 psi.
3. Tension Parallel to Grain: 1850 psi.
4. Compression Parallel to Grain: 2700 psi.
5. Compression Perpendicular to Grain: 500 psi perpendicular to and 500 psi and parallel to glue
line.
6. Horizontal Shear: 285 psi perpendicular to and 190 psi parallel to glue line.
C. Prefabricated Wood I-Joists: Units manufactured by bonding stress-graded lumber flanges to wood-
based structural-use panel webs with exterior-type adhesives complying with ASTM D 2559, to
produce I-shaped joists complying with the following requirements:
1. Flange Material: Laminated-veneer lumber.
2. Flange Material: Southern pine dimension lumber.
3. Flange Material: Spruce-pine-fir dimension lumber.
4. Flange Material: Any material indicated above, as standard with joist manufacturer.
5. Web Material: Oriented-strand board(OSB) complying with DOC PS 2.
6. Web Material: PIN-wood complying with DOC PS 2.
7. Web Material: Either material indicated above, as standard with joist manufacturer.
8. Structural Capacities: Establish and monitor structural capacities according to ASTM D 5055
based on truss joist.
9. Sizes: Depths and widths as indicated, with flanges not less than 1-1/2 inches in actual width.
2.8 WOOD-BASED STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS, GENERAL
A. Structural-Use Panel Standards: Provide either all-veneer, mat-formed, or composite panels complying
with DOC PS 2, "Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels," unless otherwise
indicated. Provide plywood panels complying with DOC PS 1, "U.S. Product Standard for
Construction and Industrial Plywood," where plywood is indicated.
B. Structural-Use Panel Standard: Provide plywood panels complying with DOC PS 1, "U.S. Product
Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood."
C. Trademark: Factory maxi:structural-use panels with A PA trademark evidencing compliance with grade
requirements.
2.9 CONCEALED, PERFORMANCE-RATED S-MUCTURAL-USE PANELS
A. General: Where structural-use panels am indicated for the following concealed types of applications,
provide APA-performance-rated panels complying whb requirements designated under each application
for grade, span rating, exposure durability classification, and edge.detail (where applicable).
1. Thickness: Provide panels not loss duo 15M inch thick unless indicated.
B. Roof Sheathing: APA-rated sheathing.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Complete fabrication of treated items before treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, apply
field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood
after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.
2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER AND UTILITY SHELVING
A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the ALSC National Grading Rule
(NGR)provisions of the inspection agency indicated.
B. Framing Other than Non-Load-Bearing Partitions: Provide framing of the following grade and species:
1. Grade: No. 2.
2. Species: Southern pine; SPIB
2.5 BOARDS
A. Concealed Boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide lumber with 19 percent
maximum moisture content and of following species and grade:
1. Species and Grade: Eastern softwoods, No. 3 Common per NELMA rules.
2. Species and Grade: Northern species, No. 3 Common or Standard per NLGA rules.
3. Species and Grade: Mixed southern pine, No. 2 per SPIB rules.
4. Species and Grade: Western woods, Standard per WCLIB rules or No. 3 Common per WWPA
rules.
5. Species and Grade: Any species above.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including bucks, nailers,
blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar members.
B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown.
C. Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative
treatment.
D. Grade: For dimension lumber sizes, provide No. 3 or Standard grade lumber per ALSC's NGRs of any
species. For board-size lumber, provide No. 3 Common grade per NELMA, NLGA, or WWPA;
No. 2 grade per SPIB; or Standard grade per NLGA, WCLIB or WWPA of any species.
2.7 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS
A. General: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which
current model code research or evaluation reports exist that evidence compliance with building code in
effect for Project.
1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses,
as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published '
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Trus Joist MacMillan.
4. Metal Framing Anchors:
a. Silver Metal Products, Inc.
b. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc.
C. Kant-Say United Steel Products Co.
2.2 LUMBER, GENERAL
A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," and with
applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review.
B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the
following:
1. NELMA-Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association.
2. NLGA -National Lumber Grades Authority (Canadian).
3. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
4. WCLIB -West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
5. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association.
C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency
evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species,
moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
1. For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece, or
omit grade stamps and provide grade-compliance certificates issued by inspection agency.
D. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content
specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.
1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch
nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative treated or is specified to be treated,
comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood). Mark each
treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board
of Review.
1. Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic.
B. Pressure treat aboveground items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 lb/cu.
ft.. After treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
Treat indicated items and the following:
1. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact
with masonry or concrete.
2. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade.
3. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. For each type of preservative-treated wood product, include certification by treating plant stating
type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and
compliance with applicable standards.
2. For waterborne-treated products, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was
reduced to levels indicated before shipment to Project site.
3. For fire-retardant-treated wood products, include certification by treating plant that treated
materials comply with specified standard and other requirements as well as data relative to
bending strength, stiffness, and fastener-holding capacities of treated materials.
E. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
relative to compliance of fire-retardant-treated wood products with requirements indicated.
F. Warranty of chemical treatment manufacturer for each type of treatment.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces.
Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and
under temporary coverings.
1. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each
bundle to provide air circulation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Wood-Preservative-Treated Materials:
a. Baxter: J. H. Baxter Co.
b. Chemical Specialties, Inc.
C. Continental Wood Preservers, Inc.
d. Hickson Corp.
e. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc.
f. Osmose Wood Preserving, Inc.
2. Laminated-Veneer Lumber:
a. Georgia-Pacific Corp.
b. Louisiana-Pacific Corp.
C. Trus Joist MacMillan.
3. Prefabricated Wood I-Joists:
a. Georgia-Pacific Corp. Aow
b. Louisiana-Pacific Corp.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 06100-ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Framing with dimension lumber.
2. Framing with engineered wood products.
3. Wood furring, grounds, nailers, and blocking.
4. Sheathing.
5. Utility shelving.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 6 Section "Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses."
2. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to view and not
specified in another Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless otherwise
specified.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for the following products:
1. Engineered wood products.
2. Metal framing anchors.
3. Construction adhesives.
C. Material certificates for dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses.
Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the American Lumber
Standards Committee's (ALSC)Board of Review.
Ow D. Wood treatment data as follows, including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling,
storing, installing, and finishing treated materials:
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100- 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After bollards have
been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between bollard and sleeve solidly with nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's directions.
B. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
B. For galvanized surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing
repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-9
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for
concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors
as required.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation;
with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete masonry
or similar construction.
D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be
left as exposed joints but cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld,
cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are
intended for bolted or screwed field connections.
E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no
roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.
F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout,
concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
3.3 SETTING LOOSE PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond
to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates.
B. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges or other adjustable devices. After the bearing members
have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if
protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout.
1. Use nonshrink, metallic grout in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use
nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
3.4 INSTALLING SUPPORTS FOR TOILET PARTITIONS
A. Anchor supports securely to and rigidly brace from overhead building structure.
3.5 INSTALLING PIPE BOLLARDS
Aowk
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500- 8
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe with 1/4-inch-thick steel plate welded to bottom
of sleeve.
2.12 HOSE RACK BRACKETS
A. Locktite or equal. Pipe supports custom fabricated as shown.
2.13 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and
designing finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.14 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process
complying with the following requirements:
1. ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.
2. ASTM A 123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and steel products made of
uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, and strip 0.0299 inch thick or thicker.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum
requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure
conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1. Exteriors(SSPC Zone 113): SSPC-SP 6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning."
C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes or
to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply
with requirements of SSPC-PA 1 "Paint Application Specification No. 1" for shop painting.
1. Stripe paint comers, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions
for installing anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items
having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate
delivery of such items to Project site.
B. Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations. Protect sleeves from water and
concrete entry.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 -7
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Furnish bent, or otherwise custom-fabricated, bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other
miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for
anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough
hardware items are specified in Division 6 Sections.
B. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required. Furnish malleable-iron washers for heads
and nuts that bear on wood structural connections, and furnish steel washers elsewhere.
2.8 STEEL LADDERS
A. General: Fabricate ladders for the locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details, and anchorages
as indicated. Comply with requirements of ANSI A14.3.
B. Siderails: Continuous, steel, 1/2-by-2-1/2-inch flat bars, with eased edges, spaced 18 inches apart.
C. Bar Rungs: 3/4-inch-diameter steel bars, spaced 12 inches o.c.
D. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
E. Support each ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points spaced not more than 60 inches o.c.
with welded or bolted steel brackets.
1. Size brackets to support design dead and live loads indicated and to hold centerline of ladder
rungs clear of the wall surface by not less than 7 inches.
2. Extend side rails 42 inches above top rung, and return rails to wall or structure unless other w
secure handholds are provided. If the adjacent structure does not extend above the top rung,
goose-neck the extended rails back to the structure to provide secure ladder access.
2.9 SHIP'S LADDERS
A. Provide ship's ladders where indicated. Fabricate of open type construction with structural steel
channel or steel plate stringers, steel pipe handrails, and open steel grating treads, unless otherwise
indicated. Provide brackets and fittings for installation.
1. Comply with applicable requirements of Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for steel
pipe railings.
2. Interior locations where indicated.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles
shown with continuously welded joints, and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed
field splices wherever possible.
2.11 PIPE BOLLARDS
A. Fabricate pipe bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch minimum steel plate.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but not less than that
needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted
on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or
specified for various components of each metal fabrication.
B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges.
C. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient
temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of installed metal assemblies to prevent
buckling, opening up of joints, and overstressing of welds and fasteners. Base design calculations on
actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change(Range): 100 deg F.
D. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
E. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-
metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.
F. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
G. Weld comers and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no
roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.
H. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever
possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk)
screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space
anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
J. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections
that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated
installation.
K. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and
similar items.
L. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes
where water may accumulate.
2.7 ROUGH HARDWARE
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.3 FASTENERS *■■w
A. General: Provide plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited
zinc coating, for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade,
and class required.
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A, with hex nuts, ASTM A 563,
and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Machine Screws: ANSI B 18.6.3.
D. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1.
E. Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel, ANSI B18.6.I.
F. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ANSI B 18.22.1.
G. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ANSI B 18.21.1.
H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to
sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and
equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Material: Carbon steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.
2. Material: Group 1 alloy 304 or 316 stainless-steel bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593
and ASTM F 594.
I. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as required.
2.4 GROUT
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior
and exterior applications.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grouts:
a. Sure-grip High Performance Grout; Dayton Superior Corp.
b. Euco N-S Grout; Euclid Chemical Co.
C. Five Star Grout; Five Star Products.
d. Masterflow 928 and 713; Master Builders Technologies, Inc.
e. Sealtight 588 Grout; W. R. Meadows, Inc.
2.5 CONCRETE FILL
A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements of Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive Am**
strength of 3000 psi, unless higher strengths are indicated.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 FERROUS METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide
materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not
use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.
C. Rolled Steel Floor Plates: ASTM A 786.
D. Steel Tubing: Product type(manufacturing method) and as follows:
1. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500.
2. Hot-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.
a. For exterior installations and where indicated, provide tubing with hot-dip galvanized
coating per ASTM A 53.
E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated, or another weight
required by structural loads.
1. Black finish, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
F. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-
resistant materials capable of-sustaining, without failure, the load imposed within a safety factor of 4,
as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Threaded or wedge npe; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 malleable iron or
ASTM A 27 cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized per
ASTM A 153.
G. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for the metal alloy to be
welded.
2.2 PAINT
A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-664, selected for good resistance to normal
atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide a
sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel,
with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-
21035 or SSPC-Paint 20.
C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no
asbestos fibers.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500- 3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Division 5 Section "Gratings" for galvanized metal gratings.
4. Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for metal pipe and tube handrails and railing
systems.
5. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for hose rack and wood members.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for nonslip aggregates and nonslip aggregate surface finishes, prefabricated building
columns, cast nosings, treads and thresholds, steel floor plate, paint products, and grout.
C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans,
elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and
accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
D. Samples representative of materials and finished products as may be requested by Architect.
E. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified
under the "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include a list of completed projects with project name, addresses,
names of architects and owners, and other information specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated
for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance, and with sufficient production
capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work.
B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS DIA "Structural Welding Code--
Steel," AWS D1.2 "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum," and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code--
Sheet Steel."
1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal
fabrications must fit by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements
on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying
the Work.
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions
and proceed with fabricating products without field measurements. Coordinate construction to
ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. Allow for trimming and
fitting. 100%L
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 05500-METAL FABRICATIONS
(FILED SUB-BID)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Metal Fabrication is stipulated as a Filed Sub-Bid under Paragraph D, Item 2 of the Form for General
Bid.
B. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the Form For Sub-Bid furnished by the Awarding Authority, as
required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. The time and place for
submission of Filed Sub-Bids are set forth in the Invitation to Bid.
C. The work to be done under this section is shown on Drawings numbered: Tl, Ll-L5, S1-S8, Al-A16,
FP1-FP4, P1-P4, H1-146, SE1, E1-E6
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following metal fabrications:
1. Rough hardware.
2. Ladders (including elevator pit ladders).
3. Ship's ladders.
4. Metal stairs
5. Miscellaneous framing and supports for the following:
a. Overhead doors.
b. Suspended toilet partitions.
C. Suspended operable partitions.
d. Elevator hoisting machines and sheaves-supplied and installed by elevator manufacturer
6. Miscellaneous steel trim, including the following:
a. Hose Rack pipe and bracket components
7. Pipe bollards.
8. Anchors for wood to masonry and steel
9. Elevator subsill.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for structural steel framing system components.
2. Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for metal framed stairs with metal pan, metal plate, or grating
treads.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
ON" B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.
C. Shear connector welds will be inspected and tested according to the requirements of AWS D1.1 for stud
welding and as follows:
1. Shear connector welds will be visually inspected.
2. Bend tests will be performed when visual inspections reveal either less than a continuous 360
degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.
3. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors when weld fracture occurs on shear
connectors already tested, according to the requirements of AWS D1.1.
D. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
E. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.
F. Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified
requirements and paid by contractor.
3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces with galvanized
repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and the manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure steel decking is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05310
STEEL DECK 05310 -5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Place deck panels on supporting framing and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and
bearing on supporting framing before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side lap
interlocks.
D. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting framing without warp or deflection.
E. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or
adjacent to the decking.
F. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of
decking, and support of other work.
G. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
H. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and
install according to deck manufacturer's instructions.
3.4 FLOOR DECK INSTALLATION
A. Fasten floor deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot(puddle)welds of the surface diameter
indicated and as follows:
1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal.
2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panels at each support. Space additional welds an average of
12 inches apart, but not more than 18 inches apart.
B. Side Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between
supports, or at intervals not exceeding 36 inches, using one of the following methods:
1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling No. 10-diameter or larger carbon steel screws.
C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting framing with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches,
with end joints as follows:
1. End Joints: Butted.
D. Shear Connectors: Weld shear connectors through deck to support framing according to AWS D1.1
and manufacturer's instructions. Butt end joints of deck panels; do not overlap.
E. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure
according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Install piercing hanger tabs not more than 14 inches apart in both directions, within 9 inches of walls at
ends, and not more than 12 inches from walls at sides, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: A qualified independent testing agency employed and paid by Owner will perform
field quality-control testing. Awk
STEEL DECK 05310-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. General: Provide accessory materials for steel deck that comply with requirements indicated and
recommendations of the steel deck manufacturer.
B. Mechanical Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, powder-actuated or
pneumatically driven carbon steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.
C. Side Lap Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling,
carbon steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.
D. Rib Closure Strips: Manufacturer's standard vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.
E. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, of same material as deck panels, and of thickness and
profile indicated.
F. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material and
thickness as deck panels, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Hanger Tabs: Manufacturer's standard piercing steel sheet hanger attachment devices for floor deck
panels.
H. Weld Washers: Manufacturer's standard uncoated-steel sheet weld washers, shaped to fit deck rib,
0.0598 inch thick with 3/8-inch minimum diameter prepunched hole.
I. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grade 1010 through 1020 headed stud type, cold-finished carbon
steel, AWS D1.1, Type B.
J. Steel Sheet Accessories: ASTM A 653SQ, G 90 coating class, galvanized according to ASTM A 525.
K. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035, with dry film containing a minimum of
94 percent zinc dust by weight.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting framing and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of steel deck.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Do not place deck panels on concrete supporting structure until concrete has cured and is dry.
B. Locate decking bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary of SDI
AM, Publication No. 28, manufacturer's recommendations, and requirements of this Section.
B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels when required to meet deflection limitations.
STEEL DECK 05310-3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing agency must
demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria conforming to
ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated
without delaying the Work.
C. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS DLL "Structural Welding Code--
Steel" and AWS D1.3 'Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and
handling.
B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof
covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Bowman Metal Deck Armco, Inc.
2. Epic Metals Corp.
3. Robertson A United Dominion Co.
4. United Steel Deck, Inc.
5. Vulcraft Div. of Nucor Corp.
6. Wheeling Corrugating Co., Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corp.
2.2 FLOOR DECK
A. Composite Steel Floor Deck: Fabricate panels with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs and
interlocking side laps, conforming to SDI Publication No. 28 "Specifications and Commentary for
Composite Steel Floor Deck," the minimum section properties indicated, and the following:
1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653SQ, Grade 33, G 90 zinc coated according to
ASTM A 525.
2. Profile Depth: As indicated.
3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: as indicated.
4. Span Condition: As indicated.
5. Deck Type: Composite.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
STEEL DECK
05310-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 05310-STEEL DECK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Composite steel floor deck.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill and reinforcing steel.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of deck, accessory, and product specified.
C. Shop drawings showing layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans,
deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.
D. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of steel deck certifying that their products comply with
specified requirements.
E. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified
under the "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Product test reports from qualified independent testing agencies evidencing compliance with
requirements of the following based on comprehensive testing:
1. Mechanical fasteners.
G. Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction that evidence steel deck's compliance with the building code in effect for the Project.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed steel deck similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance.
STEEL DECK 05310- 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports indicate
do not comply with specified requirements.
C. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected
Work with specified requirements.
D. Field-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
E. In addition to visual inspection, field-welded connections will be inspected and tested according to
AWS D1.1 and the inspection procedures listed below, at testing agency's option.
1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld.
Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.
3. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum quality level "2-2T."
4. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
F. In addition to visual inspection, field-welded shear connectors will be inspected and tested according to
requirements of AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows:
1. Bend tests will be performed when visual inspections reveal either less than a continuous 360-
degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for shop painting.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing
repair paint according to ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-9
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently
fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact.
Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.
2. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating temperature of
structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean
temperature at which structure will be when completed and in service.
E. Splice members only where indicated.
F. Remove erection bolts on welded, architecturally exposed structural steel; fill holes with plug welds;
and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.
G. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.
H. Finish sections thermally cut during erection equal to a sheared appearance.
I. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins. Ream holes that must be
enlarged to admit bolts.
3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS
A. Install and tighten nonhigh-strength bolts, except where high-strength bolts are indicated.
B. Install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using .w,.
ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
1. Bolts: ASTM A 325 high-strength bolts, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Connection Type: Snug tightened, unless indicated as slip-critical, direct-tension, or tensioned
shear/bearing connections.
C. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and
methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Comply with AISC specifications referenced in this Section for bearing, adequacy of temporary
connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes
without warp.
3. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed
structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent surface bleeding of back-
side welding on exposed steel surfaces. Grind smooth exposed fillet welds 1/2 inch and larger.
Grind flush butt welds. Dress exposed welds.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field inspections and tests
and to prepare test reports.
1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested Work
complies with or deviates from requirements.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120- 8
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be inspected and tested according to
AWS D1.1 and the inspection procedures listed below, at testing agency's option.
1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld.
Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.
3. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum quality level "2-2T."
4. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Before erection proceeds, and with the steel erector present, verify elevations of concrete and masonry
bearing surfaces and locations of anchorages for compliance with requirements.
B. Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel
secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to
design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing
are in place, unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC
specifications referenced in this Section.
B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and
roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing
plates.
1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
2. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not
remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior
to packing with grout.
3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Finish exposed
surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure.
a. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for proprietary grout materials.
C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges."
1. Maintain erection tolerances of architecturally exposed structural steel within AISC's "Code of
Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 -7
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.5 SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces, except the following:
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a
depth of 2 inches.
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Galvanized surfaces.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter,
slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to SSPC specifications as follows:
1. SSPC-SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning."
C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's instructions
and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use
priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, comers, edges, and exposed surfaces.
1. Stripe paint comers, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
2. Apply 2 coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. Change color of
second coat to distinguish it from first.
D. Painting: Apply a 1-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC's "Painting System Guide
No. 7.00" to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils.
2.6 GALVANIZING
A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel indicated for
galvanizing according to ASTM A 123.
2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop inspections and tests
and to prepare test reports.
1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether test specimens
comply with or deviate from requirements.
2. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural steel Work is being fabricated or
produced so required inspection and testing can be accomplished.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports indicate
do not comply with specified requirements.
C. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected
Work with specified requirements.
D. Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
1. Direct-tension indicator gaps will be verified to comply with ASTM F 959, Table 2. A"
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Camber structural steel members where indicated.
2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6 and maintain markings until steel
has been erected.
3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.
4. Fabricate for delivery a sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of
structural steel.
5. Complete structural steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming
operations.
6. Comply with fabrication tolerance limits of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel.
B. Fabricate architecturally exposed structural steel with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of
surface blemishes, including pitting, rust and scale seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and
roughness.
1. Remove blemishes by filling, grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating,
and shop priming.
2. Comply with fabrication requirements, including tolerance limits, of AISC's "Code of Standard
Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for architecturally exposed structural steel.
C. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.
1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded.
D. Finishing: Accurately mill ends of columns and other members transmitting loads in bearing.
E. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use
automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's
printed instructions.
F. Welded Door Frames: Build up welded door frames attached to structural steel framing. Weld
exposed joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug-weld fixed steel bar stops to frames. Secure
removable stops to frames with countersunk, cross-recessed head machine screws, uniformly spaced not
more than 10 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing and for passage of
other work through steel framing members, as shown on Shop Drawings.
1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame-cut holes or enlarge
holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.
2. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items as indicated to receive other work.
H. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and
methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes
without warp.
2. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed
structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent surface bleeding of back-
side welding on exposed steel surfaces. Grind smooth exposed fillet welds 112 inch and larger.
Grind flush butt welds. Dress exposed welds.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Carbon Steel: ASTM A 36.
B. Cold-Formed Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B.
C. Hot-Formed Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B.
1. Headed Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A; carbon-steel, hex-head bolts; and carbon-steel nuts.
2. Headed Bolts: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts and heavy hex carbon-
steel nuts.
3. Headed Bolts: ASTM A 490, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts and heavy hex carbon-
steel nuts.
4. Washers: ASTM A 36.
E. Nonhigh-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A; carbon-steel, hex-head bolts;
carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers.
1. Finish: Plain, uncoated.
F. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts,
heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.
1. Finish: Plain, uncoated.
G. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts,
heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers, uncoated.
H. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
2.2 PRIMER
A. Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer with good resistance to
normal atmospheric corrosion, complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-664.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds and repair painting
galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 93 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying
with DOD-P-21035A or SSPC-Paint 20.
2.3 GROUT
A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout
containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and
water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, of consistency suitable for application, and a
30-minute working time.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and assemble structural steel in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate structural steel AM
according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section and in Shop Drawings.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. Mockups: Prior to installing architecturally exposed structural steel, construct mockups for each form
of construction and finish required to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and
execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for
final unit of Work.
1. Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed
by Architect.
2. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship of steel surfaces and
welded and bolted connections.
a. Coordinate finish painting requirements of mockups with Division 9 Section "Painting."
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before start of final unit of Work.
5. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
a. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site.
b. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion
may become part of the completed Work.
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of
Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver structural steel to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure continuity of
installation.
B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground
by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from
erosion and deterioration.
1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or
rusty before use.
2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to
members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as
directed.
1.7 SEQUENCING
A. Supply anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work.
Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for installation.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: As follows:
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120- 3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,
names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
E. Mill test reports signed by manufacturers certifying that their products, including the following,
comply with requirements.
1. Structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.
2. Bolts, nuts, and washers, including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.
3. Direct-tension indicators.
4. Shear stud connectors.
S. Shop primers.
6. Nonshrink grout.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed structural steel work
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful
in-service performance.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in fabricating structural steel similar to that
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to fabricate structural steel without delaying the Work.
1. Fabricator must participate in the AISC Quality Certification Program and be designated an
AISC-Certified Plant as follows:
a. Category: Category I, conventional steel structures.
b. Fabricator shall be registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
1. AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic
Design."
2. AISC's "Load and Resistance Factor Design (LFRD) Specification for Structural Steel
Buildings."
3. AISC's "Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single-Angle Members."
4. AISC's "Specification for Load and Resistance Factor Design of Single-Angle Members."
5. AISC's "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings."
6. ASTM A 6 "Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet
Piling, and Bars for Structural Use."
7. Research Council on Structural Connections' (RCSC) "Specification for Structural Joints Using
ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
8. Research Council on Structural Connections' (RCSC) "Load and Resistance Factor Design
Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
D. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS Dl.I "Structural Welding Code--
Steel."
1. Present evidence that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 05120-STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes structural steel.
B. This Section includes structural steel and architecturally exposed structural steel, lintels and relieving
angles supporting masonry, masonry protecting plates, grating, bearing plates, framing and supports
not speciried in other sections.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Quality Control" for independent testing agency procedures and
administrative requirements.
2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for installation of lintels and supporting angles.
3. Division 5 Section "Steel Deck" for field installation of shear connectors.
4. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for loose steel bearing plates and miscellaneous steel
framing.
5. Division 9 Section "Painting" for surface preparation and priming requirements.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Engineer structural steel connections required by the Contract Documents to
be selected or completed by the fabricator to withstand design loadings indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for u.ch iyp:of p.-oduci speciried.
C. Shop Drawings detailing fabrication of structural steel components.
1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
2. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and
show size, length, and type of each weld.
3. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify
00k high-strength bolted slip-critical, direct-tension, or tensioned shear/bearing connections.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure unit masonry is without
damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.15 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Recycling: Undamaged, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property and shall be removed from
the Project site for his use.
B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess and other masonry waste and legally dispose of off Owner's
property.
END OF SECTION 04200
UNIT MASONRY 04200-21
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2-1/2 inches or for minimum grout space of
hollow unit cells of 2-1/2 by 3 inches, pour height of 12 feet.
d. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 3 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow
unit cells of 3 by 3 inches, pour height of 24 feet.
2. Do not exceed the following pour heights for coarse grout:
a. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 1-1/2 inches or for minimum grout space of
hollow unit cells of 1-1/2 by 3 inches, pour height of 12 inches.
b. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow
unit cells of 2-1/2 by 3 inches, pour height of 60 inches.
C. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2-1/2 inches or for minimum grout space of
hollow unit cells of 3 by 3 inches, pour height of 12 feet.
d. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 3 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow
unit cells of 3 by 4 inches, pour height of 24 feet .
3. Provide cleanout holes at least 3 inches in least dimension for grout pours over 60 inches in
height.
a. Provide cleanout holes at each vertical reinforcing bar.
b. At solid grouted masonry, provide cleanout holes at not more than 32 inches o.c.
3.14 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if
units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar or Amok
grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill
with mortar. Point-up joints, including comers, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat,
uniform appearance. Prepare joints for application of sealants.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins
and smears prior to tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or
chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison
purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of
masonry.
3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with
liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape.
4. Clean brick by bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Note No. 20
Revised, using the following masonry cleaner:
a. Job-mixed detergent solution.
5. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to type of
stain present on exposed surfaces.
UNIT MASONRY 04200 -20
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December I.
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels other
` obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall, and where indicated.
B. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could pun, :shing.
Place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal ons in
flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer before g with
mortar.
C. Install flashing as follows:
1. At composite masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing from exterior face of outer
wythe of masonry, through the outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 4 inches, and through the
inner wythe to within 1/2 inch of the interior face of the wall in exposed masonry.
2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches into masonry at each end. At
heads and sills, extend flashing 4 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form a pan.
3. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet-metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/.7. inches
or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric sealant complying
with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.
4. Extend sheet-metal flashing 1/2 inch beyond face of masonry at exterior and turn down to form
a drip.
5. Cut off flashing flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed.
D. Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry immediately
above embedded flashing and as follows:
1. Form weep holes with product specified in Part 2 of this Section.
2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c.
3. Place cavity drainage material Mortar Net immediately above flashing in cavities.
E. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where shown to be built into
masonry.
3.13 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry
elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight
to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and
shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently
to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during
construction.
B. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient
strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Do not exceed the following pour heights for fine grout:
a. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 3/4 inch or for minimum grout space of hollow
unit cells of 1-1/2 by 2 inches, pour height of 12 inches.
b. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2 inchesor for minimum grout space of hollow
unit cells of 2 by 3 inches, pour height of 60 inches.
UNIT MASONRY 04200- 19
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Provide reinforcement in mortar joint 1 block course above and below wall openings and
extending 12 inches beyond opening. '"WO%
B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide continuity at comers and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut
and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column
fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.
3.10 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build-in related items
as the masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions
are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement.
B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:
1. Install preformed control joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
C. Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows:
1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches in direction of
water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints, if any.
2. Build-in joint fillers where indicated.
3. Form open joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant and
backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." Maintain joint free and clear of
mortar.
D. Build-in horizontal pressure-relieving joints where indicated; construct joints by either leaving an air
space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified
in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
1. Locate horizontal pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry veneer and
attached to structure behind masonry veneer.
3.11 LINTELS
A. Install steel lintels where indicated.
B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches for brick size units
and 24 inches for block size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.
1. Provide prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels. Use specially formed bond beam units
with reinforcement bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels
before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.
C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
3.12 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND VENTS -00^1
UNIT MASONRY 04200- 18
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
soiled, clean bedding and exposed surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with
clear water.
E. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness,
unless otherwise indicated.
3.6 STRUCTURAL BONDING OF MULTIWYTHE MASONRY
A. Use continuous horizontal joint reinforcement installed in horizontal mortar joints for bond tie between
wythes.
B. Comers: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each course at corners, unless otherwise shown.
1. Provide continuity with horizontal joint reinforcement at comers by using prefabricated "L"
units in addition to masonry bonding.
C. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture,
provide same type of bonding specified for structural bonding between wythes and space as follows:
1. Provide continuity with horizontal joint reinforcement by using prefabricated "T" units.
3.7 CAVITIES
A. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strike joints facing
cavities flush.
1. Use wood strips temporarily placed in cavity to collect mortar droppings. As work progresses,
remove strips, clean off mortar droppings, and replace in cavity.
B. Tie exterior wythe to back-up with continuous horizontal joint reinforcing.
3.8 CAVITY-WALL AND MASONRY-CELL INSULATION
A. On units of plastic board insulation, place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 12 inches o.c.,
both ways on inside face or attach to inside face with plastic fasteners designed for this purpose. Fit
courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in cavity, with edges butted
tightly both ways. Press units fimily against inside wythe of masonry or other construction as shown.
1. Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and
masonry.
3.9 HORIZONTAL-JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length of
longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch
elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches.
.#Vok
1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.
UNIT MASONRY 04200- 17
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back 1/2-unit length for one-half running bond or
1/3-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry,
clay masonry �'�
y my units lightly if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh
masonry.
F. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build-in items specified under this and other Sections of the
Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
G. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
1. At exterior frames, insert extruded polystyrene board insulation around perimeter of frame in
thickness indicated, but not less than 3/4 inch to act as a thermal break between frame and
masonry.
H. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath
in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
I. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels,
posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows:
1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.
2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and .. w*^
pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout.
3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed,
including areas under cells.
4. Maintain joint widths indicated, except for minor variations required to maintain bond
alignment. If not indicated, lay walls with 3/8-inch joints.
B. Lay solid brick-size masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with
sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not furrow bed joints or slush head joints.
1. At cavity walls, slope beds toward cavity to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. As work
progresses, trowel mortar fins protruding into cavity flat against cavity face of brick.
C. Lay hollow brick as follows:
1. Lay vertical-cell units with full head joints, unless otherwise indicated. Provide bed joints with
full mortar coverage on face shells and webs.
2. Lay horizontal-cell units with full bed joints, unless otherwise indicated. Keep drainage
channels, if any, free of mortar. Form head joints with sufficient mortar so excess will be
squeezed out as units are placed in position. Butter both sides of units to be placed, or butter
one side of unit in place and one side of unit to be placed.
3. Maintain joint widths indicated, except for minor variations required to maintain bond
alignment. If not indicated, lay walls with 1/4- to 3/8-inch joints.
4. Where epoxy-mortar pointed joints are indicated, rake out setting mortar to a uniform depth of
1/4 inch and point with epoxy mortar to comply with epoxy-mortar manufacturer's directions.
D. Set precast concrete units in full bed of mortar with vertical joints slushed full. Fill dowel, anchor, and AOW
similar holes solid. Wet stone joint surface thoroughly before setting; for stone surfaces that are
UNIT MASONRY
04200- 16
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. Mix units for exposed unit masonry from several pallets or cubes as they are placed to produce uniform
blend of colors and textures.
F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick prior to laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per
minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb the water so they are damp but not wet at
the time of laying.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls, and arrises, do not exceed
1/4 inch in 10 feet, nor 3/8 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For external comers,
expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2
inch in 40 feet or more. For vertical alignment of head joints, do not exceed plus or minus 1/4 inch in
10 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum.
B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves,
and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For
top surface of bearing walls, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, nor 1/16 inch within width of a single
unit.
C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of columns, walls,
and partitions, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet, nor 3/4 inch in 40 feet or more.
D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions
shown, do not exceed minus 1/4 inch nor plus 1/2 inch.
E. Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from bed joint thickness indicated by more than plus
or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary bed joint thickness
from bed joint thickness of adjacent course by more than 1/8 inch. Do not vary from head joint
thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary head joint thickness from
adjacent head joint thickness by more than 1/8 inch. Do not vary from collar joint thickness indicated
by more than minus 1/4 inch or plus 3/8 inch.
3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and
for accurate locating of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use of less-
than-half-size units at corners,jambs, and where possible at other locations.
B. Lay walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and
coordinated with other construction.
C. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use
units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
I. One-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and
below.
D. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2
inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at comers. Do not use units with less than
nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at comers or jambs.
UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 15
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and nonload-bearing walls and parapet walls; for
interior load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions, and for other applications
where another type is not indicated, use type indicated below:
a. Type: N.
E. Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required.
1. Limit pigments to the following percentages of cement content by weight:
a. For mineral oxide pigments and portland cement-lime mortar, not more than 10 percent.
F. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. Use grout of consistency indicated or, if not
otherwise indicated, of consistency (fine or coarse)at time of placement that will completely fill spaces
intended to receive grout.
1. Use fine grout in grout spaces less than 2 inches in horizontal dimension, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Use coarse grout in grout spaces 2 inches or more in least horizontal dimension, unless
otherwise indicated.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of unit masonry. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to
installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness
shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of thickness
indicated.
B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections of the
Specifications.
C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening.
D. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as
required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full-size units without
cutting, where possible. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting
of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
Aomohk
UNIT MASONRY
04200- 14
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
a. Plastic Weep Hole/Vent:
1) Cell Vent; Dur-O-Wal, Inc.
E. Cavity Drainage Material: 1-inch-thick, reticulated, nonabsorbent mesh, made from polyethylene
strands and shaped to maintain drainage at weep holes without being clogged by mortar droppings.
a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Mortar Net" by Mortar Net USA,
Ltd.
2.13 INSULATION
A. PoIyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Glass-fiber-reinforced, rigid, closed-cell foam board; produced by
expanding polyisocyanurate resin without using chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs); with aluminum foil
facings laminated to both sides; complying with FS HH-I-1972/1, Class 2; with a thermal resistance
(R-value) for 1-inch thickness of 6.2 deg F x sq. ft. x h/Btu at 75 deg F; in manufacturer's standard
lengths and widths; and in thicknesses indicated.
B. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation board manufacturer for application indicated.
2.14 MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and 1/2-
cup dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. of water.
2.15 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders,
water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at the same rate for all mortar, regardless of weather
conditions, in order to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar
indicated below:
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for job-mixed
mortar; and ASTM C 1142 for ready-mixed mortar, of types indicated below:
D. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with BIA M1, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar
indicated below:
1. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portiand cement and lime.
2. For masonry below grade, in contact with earth, and where indicated, use type indicated below:
a. Type: S.
3. For reinforced masonry and where indicated, use type indicated below:
a. Type: S.
UNIT MASONRY 04200- 13
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet-Metal Flashings: As specified in Division 7 Section "Copper Roofing"
or "Asphalt Shingle Roofing". ,
D. Adhesive for Flashings: Of type recommended by manufacturer of flashing material for use indicated.
E. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
F. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Metal Flashing:
a. Cheney Flashing(Dovetail); Cheney Flashing Company, Inc.
b. Cheney Flashing(Sawtooth); Cheney Flashing Company, Inc.
C. Keystone 3-Way Interlocking Thruwall Flashing; Keystone Flashing Co.
2. Copper-Fabric Laminate Flashing:
a. Copper Fabric; AFCO Products, Inc.
b. Type FCC-Fabric Covered Copper; Phoenix Building Products.
C. Copper Fabric Flashing; Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. York Copper Fabric Flashing; York Manufacturing, Inc.
2.12 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A,
Grade l; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from the
following material:
1. Neoprene.
B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash block and
to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
1. Styrene-Butadiene Rubber Compound: ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805.
C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I
(No. 15 asphalt felt).
D. Weep Holes: Provide the following:
1. Aluminum Weep Hole/Vent: One-piece, L-shaped units made from sheet aluminum to fit in a
vertical mortar joint and consisting of a vertical channel with louvers stamped in web and a flat
horizontal; painted to comply with Division 9 Section "Painting," prior to installation, in color
approved by Architect to match that of mortar.
2. Plastic Weep Hole/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion manufactured from ultraviolet-resistant
polypropylene copolymer, designed to weep moisture in masonry cavity to exterior, sized to fill
head joints with outside face held back 1/8 inch from exterior face of masonry, in color selected
from manufacturer's standard.
3. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, weep hole/ventilators that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 00*6,
UNIT MASONRY
04200- 12
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.9 ADJUSTABLE ANCHORS FOR CONNECTING TO STRUCTURAL FRAME
A. General: Provide 2-piece assemblies as described below, allowing vertical or horizontal differential
movement between wall and frame parallel to plane of wall but resisting tension and compression forces
perpendicular to it.
1. For anchorage to concrete, provide manufacturer's standard anchors with dovetail anchor section
formed from sheet metal and triangular-shaped wire tie section sized to extend within 1 inch (25
mm)of masonry face and as follows:
a. Wire Diameter: as indicated
2. For anchorage to steel framing, provide manufacturer's standard anchors with crimped 1/4-inch-
(6.4-mm-) diameter wire anchor section for welding to steel and triangular-shaped wire tie
section sized to extend within 1 inch(25 mm)of masonry face and as follows:
a. Wire Diameter: as indicated
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS
A. Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron inserts of type and size indicated.
B. Dovetail Slots: Furnish dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size indicated, fabricated from 0.0336-
inch, galvanized steel sheet.
C. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and,
where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C; of diameter
and length indicated and in the following configurations:
1. Headed bolts.
2.11 EMBEDDED FLASHLtiG MATERIALS
A. Sheet-Metal Flashing: Fabricate from the following metal complying with requirements specified in
Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" and below:
1. Copper: 16-oz./sq. ft. weight or 0.0216 inch thick.
a. With ribs formed in sawtooth pattern at 3-inch intervals along length of flashing to
provide a 3-way integral mortar bond and weep-hole drainage.
2. Application: Use where flashing is partly concealed in masonry wall.
B. Laminated Flashing: Manufacturer's standard laminated flashing of type indicated below:
1. Copper-Fabric Laminate: Copper sheet of weight indicated below, bonded with asphalt between
2 layers of glass-fiber cloth.
a. Weight: 5 oz./sq. ft.
2. Application: Use where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.
04200 - 11
UNIT MASONRY
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Description: Welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods
into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units, and com I m
with requirements indicated below: p y g
1. Wire Diameter for Side Rods: 0.1483 inch.
2. Wire Diameter for Cross Rods: 0.1483 inch.
C. For single-wythe masonry, provide type as follows with single pair of side rods:
1. Ladder design with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches o.c.
D. For multi-wythe masonry, provide type as follows:
I. Tab design with single pair of side rods and rectangular box-type cross ties spaced not more than
16 inches o.c., with side rods spaced for embedment within each face shell of back-up wythe
and ties extended to engage the outer wythe by at least 1-1/2 inches.
2. Adjustable (2-piece) tab design with single pair of side rods and rectangular box-type cross ties
spaced not more than 16 inches o.c., with side rods spaced for embedment within each face shell
of back-up wythe and with separate adjustable ties engaging the cross ties and extended to
engage the outer wythe by at least 1 -1/2 inches and spaced not more than 16 inches o.c.
a. Use where horizontal joints of facing wythe do not align with those of back-up and where
indicated.
2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL
A. General: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent articles that comply with requirements for
metal and size of this Article, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Wire: As follows:
1. Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating.
2• Wire Diameter: as indicated.
2.8 BENT WIRE TIES
A. Individual units prefabricated from bent wire to comply with requirements indicated below:
1. Tie Shape for Hollow Masonry Units Laid with Cells Vertical: Rectangular with closed ends
and not less than 4 inches wide.
2. Tie Shape for Solid Masonry Unit Construction and for Hollow Masonry Units with Cells
Horizontal: Z-shaped ties with ends bent 90 degrees to provide hooks not less than 2 inches
long.
3. Type for Masonry Where Coursing Between Wythes Aligns: Unit ties bent from one piece of
wire.
4. Type for Masonry Where Coursing Between Wythes Does Not Align: Adjustable ties composed
of 2 parts; one with pintles, the other with eyes; maximum misalignment of 1-1/4 inches.
5. Type for Masonry Where Wythes Are of Different Materials: Adjustable ties composed of 2
parts; one with pintles, the other with eyes; maximum misalignment of 1-1/4 inches.
UNIT MASONRY
04200- 10
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Strength: 5000 psi, air entrained 7 1/2% +/- I% by volume.
2. Reinforcing: Not less than 2-#3 deformed steel bars.
3. Finish: Smooth
B. Form accurately to shape and dimensions indicated, with exposed faces true, beds and joints at right
angles to face; comply with PCI fabricating tolerances.
2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction. Provide natural color to produce mortar color indicated.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch, use aggregate graded with
100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve.
D. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
E. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in
mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars.
F. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with
ASTM C 494, Type C, and recommended by the manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of
composition indicated.
G. Water: Potable.
H. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Mortar Pigments:
a. True Tone Mortar Colors; Davis Colors.
b. Centurion Pigments; Lafarge Corporation.
C. SGS Mortar Colors; Solomon Grind-Chem Services, Inc.
2. Cold-Weather Admixture:
a. Accelguard 80; Euclid Chemical Co.
b. Morset; Grace: W.R. Grace&Co.
2.6 JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Provide joint reinforcement formed from the following:
1. Galvanized carbon-steel wire, coating class as follows:
a. ASTM A 153, Class B-2, for both interior and exterior walls.
UNIT MASONRY 04200-9
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Grade and Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with grade and minimum average net-area `
compressive strength indicated below:
a. Grade: SW.
b. 10,400 psi average for modular brick.
C. Not less than the unit compressive strengths required to produce clay masonry
construction of compressive strength indicated.
2. Initial Rate of Absorption: Between 5 and 20 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per
ASTM C 67.
3. Surface Coloring: Brick with surface coloring, other than flashed or sand-finished brick, shall
withstand 50 cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67 with no observable difference in
the applied finish when viewed from 10 feet.
4. Type: FBS.
5. Size: Bricks manufactured to the following actual dimensions within tolerances specified in
ASTM C 216:
a. Modular: 3-1/2 to 3-5/8 inches thick by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-1/2 to 7-5/8 inches
long.
6. Application: Use where brick is exposed, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Building(Common) Brick: ASTM C 62 and as follows:
1. Grade and Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with grade and minimum average net-area
compressive strength indicated below:
a. Grade: SW.
b. 4400 psi.
2. Size: Bricks manufactured to the following actual dimensions within tolerances specified in
ASTM C 216:
a. Match size specified for face brick.
3. Application: Use where brick is indicated for concealed locations.
E. Hollow Brick: ASTM C 652 and as follows:
1. Grade and Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with grade and minimum average net-area
compressive strength indicated below:
a. Grade: SW.
b. 8000 psi.
C. Not less than the unit compressive strengths required to produce clay masonry
construction of compressive strength indicated.
2.4 PRECAST CONCRETE SILLS AND COPING.
A. Comply with PCI MNL-117 for procedures, quality control and dimensional tolerences. 100%'
UNIT MASONRY 04200- 8
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
b. Not less than the unit compressive strengths required to produce concrete unit masonry
construction of compressive strength indicated.
2. Weight Classification: Normal weight.
3. Aggregates: Do not use aggregates made from pumice, scoria, or tuff.
4. Provide Type I, moisture-controlled units.
5. Size: Manufactured to the actual dimensions listed below (within tolerances specified in the
applicable referenced ASTM specification) for the corresponding nominal sizes indicated on
Drawings:
a. 4 inch nominal: 3-5/8 inch actual.
b. 6 inch nominal: 5-518 inch actual.
C. 8 inch nominal: 7-5/8 inch actual.
d. 10 inch nominal: 9-5/8 inch actual.
e. 12 inch nominal: 11-5/8 inch actual.
f. 16 inch nominal: 15-5/8 inch actual.
6. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Concrete Building Brick: ASTM C 55 and as follows:
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength
indicated below:
a. 3500 psi.
b. Not less than the unit compressive strengths required to produce concrete unit masonry
construction of compressive strength indicated.
2. Weight Classification: Normal weight.
3. Provide Type I, moisture-controlled units.
4. Size: Manufactured to specified dimensions within tolerances specified in the applicable
referenced ASTM specification as follows:
a. Modular: 3-5/8 inches thick by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long.
5. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 BRICK
A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of brick required.
1. Provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished for ends of sills and caps
and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces.
B. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed
surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing.
1. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special
conditions, including those at comers, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels.
2. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed
surfaces being exposed to view.
C. Face Brick: ASTM C 216 and as follows:
04200 -7
UNIT MASONRY
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Brick:
a. Brick type A: Stiles&Hart Brick, Waterstruck Darks
b. Brick type B: Stiles&Hart Brick, Waterstruck, full range with out darks
C. Brick type C: Glen Gery Glazed(Accent Brick), Brick modular(3C=8")
d. Brick type D: Glen Gery Glazed(Accent Brick), brick 8x8
2. Portland Cement and Lime:
a. Essroc Materials, Inc.
b. Glen-Gery Corporation.
C. Lafarge Corporation.
d. Lehigh Portland Cement Co.
e. Riverton Corporation(The).
3. Mortar Pigments:
a. Davis Colors.
b. Lafarge Corporation.
C. Solomon Grind-Chem Services, Inc.
4. Joint Reinforcement, Ties, and Anchors:
a. Dur-O-Wal, Inc.
b. Heckman Building Products, Inc.
C. Hohmann &Bamard, Inc.
d. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America.
e. National Wire Products Industries.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of concrete masonry unit required.
1. Provide special shapes for lintels, comers, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and
other special conditions.
2. Provide square-edged units for outside comers.
B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows:
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength
indicated below:
a. 2800 psi.
UNIT MASONRY
04200-6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on ground
and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing
mortar and dirt on completed masonry.
D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or
frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. General Contractor to provide temporary
heating and enclosure as required in Section 01500. Masonry to coordinate requirements with General
Contractor. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or freezing conditions. Comply with
the following requirements:
1. Cold-Weather Construction: When the ambient temperature is within the limits indicated, use
the following procedures:
a. 40 to 32 deg F: Heat mixing water or sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40
and 120 deg F.
b. 32 to 25 deg F: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40
and 120 deg F. Heat grout materials to produce grout temperatures between 40 and 120
deg F. Maintain mortar and grout above freezing until used in masonry.
C. 25 to 20 deg F: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40
and 120 deg F. Heat grout materials to produce grout temperatures between 40 and 120
deg F. Maintain mortar and grout above freezing until used in masonry. Heat masonry
units to 40 deg F if grouting. Use heat on both sides of walls under construction.
' d. 20 deg F and Below: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures
between 40 and 120 deg F. Heat grout materials to produce grout temperatures between
40 and 120 deg F. Maintain mortar and grout above freezing until used in masonry.
Heat masonry units to 40 deg F. Provide enclosures and use heat on both sides of walls
under construction to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F within the enclosures.
2. Cold-Weather Protection: When the mean daily temperature is within the limits indicated,
provide the following protection:
a. 40 to 25 deg F: Cover masonry with a weather-resistant membrane for 48 hours after
construction.
b. 25 to 20 deg F: Cover masonry with insulating blankets or provide enclosure and heat
for 48 hours after construction to prevent freezing. Install wind breaks when wind
velocity exceeds 15 mi./h.
C. 20 deg Fand Below: Provide enclosure and heat to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F
within the enclosure for 48 hours after construction.
3. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F
and above and will remain so until masonry has dried out, but not less than 7 days after
completion of cleaning.
E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions
produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind
breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of
100 deg F and above.
UNIT MASONRY 04200-5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Build mockups for the following types of masonry in sizes approximately 48 inches long by 48
inches high by full thickness, including face and back-up wythes as well as accessories. Include
a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in each mockup.
a. Typical exterior face brick wall.
3. Clean exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner indicated.
4. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed.
S. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.
6. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
a. Acceptance of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship
of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities
of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by
Architect in writing.
b. Acceptance of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups, unless such deviations are specifically approved by
Architect in writing.
C. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, and other
causes. If units become wet, do not install until they are in an air-dried condition.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination
avoided.
D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and
oil.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof
sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in
progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place.
2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure
cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days
after building masonry walls or columns.
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed
or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.
UNIT MASONRY 04200-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Colored-masonry mortar samples for each color required showing the full range of colors
expected in the finished construction. Make samples using the same sand and mortar ingredients
to be used on the Project. Label samples to indicate type and amount of colorant used.
3. Precast concrete trim samples not less than 12 inches in length showing the full range of colors
and textures expected in the finished construction. Provide colors available for color selection
from full range of available colors.
4. Weep holes/vents in color to match mortar color.
5. Accessories embedded in the masonry.
F. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency, employed and paid by Contractor or
manufacturer, indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of the following proposed
masonry materials with requirements indicated:
1. Mortar complying with property requirements of ASTM C 270.
2. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of grout ingredients.
3. Masonry units.
G. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,
names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of
assemblies with fire resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency,
by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Single-Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture
and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one source and
by a single manufacturer for each different product required.
C. Single-Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and
from one source or producer for each aggregate.
D. Mockup: Prior to installing unit masonry, construct sample wall panels to verify selections made under
sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects of materials and execution. Build mockups to
comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work.
E. Mockup: Prior to installing unit masonry, construct sample wall panels to verify selections made under
sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as other qualities of materials and
execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for
final unit of Work.
1. Locate mockups on site in the locations indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
a. Include exterior face brick wall showing all three types of brick with window opening
"* with precast concrete sill.
b. Include sealant-filled joint complying with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
UNIT MASONRY 04200- 3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Dovetail slots for masonry anchors installed under Division 3 Section "Cast-in Place Concrete". Ao**
2. Anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural frame installed under
Division 5 Section "Structural Steel."
D. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include the following:
1. Steel lintels and reinforcing rods for unit masonry specified in Division 5 Section "Structural
Steel."
2. Steel shelf angles for unit masonry specified in Division 5 Section "Structural Steel".
3. Wood milers and blocking built into unit masonry specified in Division 6 Section "Rough
Carpentry."
4. Hollow metal frames/anchors in unit masonry openings specified in Division 8 Section
"Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following installed compressive strengths(f m)at 28 days.
1. For Concrete Unit Masonry: As follows, based on net area:
a. f'm = 2000 psi.
2. For Brick Unit Masonry: As follows, based on gross area:
a. f'm = 2500 psi .
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product specified.
C. Shop drawings for precast concrete trim in the form of forming and setting drawings showing sizes,
profiles, and locations of each precast concrete trim unit required.
D. Samples for initial selection of the following:
1. Unit masonry samples in small-scale form showing the full range of colors and textures available
for each different exposed masonry unit required.
2. Colored-masonry mortar samples showing the full range of colors available.
E. Samples for verification of the following:
1. Full-size units for each different exposed masonry unit required showing the full range of
exposed colors, textures, and dimensions to be expected in the completed construction.
a. Include size-variation data for Type FBX and Type FBS brick, verifying that actual range
of sizes for brick falls within ASTM C 216 dimension tolerances.
UNIT MASONRY 04200-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 04200-UNIT MASONRY
(FILED SUB-BID)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Unit Masonry is stipulated as a Filed Sub-Bid under Paragraph D, Item 2 of the Form for General Bid.
B. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the Form For Sub-Bid furnished by the Awarding Authority, as
required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. The time and place for
submission of Filed Sub-Bids are set forth in the Invitation to Bid.
C. The work to be done under this section is shown on Drawings numbered: TI, Ll-L5, S1-S8, AI-A16,
FP1-FP4, P1-P4, H1-H6, SE1, E1-E6
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Concrete unit masonry.
2. Brick unit masonry.
3. Installing reinforcing steel.
4. Glazed brick unit masonry.
5. Insulation in masonry walls.
6. Precast concrete window sills and wall copings
7. Flashing built into masonry, concealed or partly concealed.
8. Masonry waste disposal.
9. Scaffolding required for masonry work.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" -for supplying reinforcing steel
2. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for supplying lintels and angle supports
3. Division 7 Sections "Asphalt Shingles and Flashing" and "Copper Roofing" for fully exposed
copper flashing.
4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing joint in mockup.
5. Division 7 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing" for dampproofmg of concrete masonry unit
cavity side.
5. Division 8 Section "Aluminum Architectural Windows" for window in mockup.
6. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for wall vents.
7. Division 7 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing".
C. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include the following:
UNIT MASONRY 04200- 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Maximum warpage of 1 corner out of plane of other 3, the greater of 1/16 inch per 12-inch -Wft
distance from nearest adjacent corner.
C. Tolerances for Location of Architectural Precast Units: Fabricate and erect architectural precast
concrete units so that joints between units do not exceed the following. Alignment for exterior units is
outside face.
1. Face Width of Joints: Plus or minus 1/4 inch.
2. Joint Taper: 1/40 inch per 12-inch length, with maximum length of taper over 10 feet of 1/4
inch.
3. Step in Face: 1/4 inch.
4. Jog in Alignment of Edges: 1/4 inch.
5. Jog in Alignment of Reveals: 1/4 inch.
6. Plumb in Any 10 Feet of Element Height: 1/4 inch.
7. Variation from Level: Plus or minus 1/2 inch in any 40-foot run.
8. Top Elevation from Nominal Top Elevation: Plus or minus 1/4 inch for exposed individual
panel; 1/4 inch exposed relative to adjacent panel.
3.4 REPAIRS
A. Repair exposed exterior surfaces of architectural precast concrete units to match color, texture, and
uniformity of surrounding concrete when permitted by Architect.
B. Remove and replace damaged architectural precast concrete units when repairs do not meet
requirements.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units after erection to remove weld marks,
other markings, dirt, and stains.
1. Wash and rinse according to architectural precast concrete fabricator's recommendations.
Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations.
2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed
architectural precast concrete finishes.
END OF SECTION 03450
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE-BOLLARDS 03450- 10
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, true
and level bearing surfaces, and other conditions affecting performance of architectural precast concrete
units. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Do not install architectural precast units until supporting concrete has attained minimum allowable
design compressive strength.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install clips, hangers, and other accessories required for connecting architectural precast concrete units
to supporting members and back-up materials.
B. Install architectural precast concrete units plumb, level, and in alignment. Provide temporary supports
and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment as units are being permanently
connected.
1. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection progresses.
2. Remove projecting hoisting devices and cement-grout fill recessed hoisting devices.
C. Anchor architectural precast concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as otherwise
indicated. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as possible after anchoring and
grouting are completed.
D. Welding: Perform welding in compliance with AWS D1.1 and AWS 131.4, with qualified welders.
1. Protect architectural precast concrete units and bearing pads from damage by field welding or
cutting operations and provide noncombustible shields as required.
2. Repair damaged steel surfaces by cleaning and applying a coat of galvanizing repair paint to
galvanized surfaces.
E. At bolted connections use lock washers or other acceptable means to prevent loosening of nuts.
F. Grouting Connections: Grout connections where required or indicated. Retain grout in place until
hard enough to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material, tamping until voids are completely
filled. Place grout to finish smooth, plumb, and level with adjacent concrete surfaces. Keep grouted
joints damp for not less than 24 hours after initial set. Promptly remove grout material from exposed
surfaces before it hardens.
3.3 ERECTION AND LOCATION TOLERANCES
A. Install architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, and true, without exceeding the
recommended erection and location tolerances of MNL-117.
B. Erection Tolerances: Install architectural precast concrete units so that each unit after erection complies
with following dimensional requirements:
1. Concave or convex bowing of any part of a flat surface not to exceed length of bow/360, with a
maximum of 1 inch and up to 30 feet.
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE- BOLLARDS 03450-9
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
4. Block Outs and Reinforcements: Within 1/4 inch of position shown on Shop Drawings, where
such positions have structural implications or affect concrete cover; otherwise within plus or " .
minus 1/2 inch.
2.11 FINISHES
A. Finish exposed-face surfaces of architectural precast concrete units as follows to match Architect's
design reference sample.
1. Smooth-surface finish free of pockets, sand streaks, and honeycombs, with uniform color and
texture.
B. Finish exposed-back surfaces of architectural precast concrete units to match face-surface finish.
C. Finish unexposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units by float finish.
2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Owner may employ an independent testing agency to evaluate architectural precast concrete
fabricator's quality control and testing methods.
1. Allow Owner's testing agency access to material storage areas, concrete production equipment,
concrete placement, and curing facilities. Cooperate with Owner's testing agency and provide
samples of materials and concrete mixes as may be requested for additional testing and
evaluation. Amok
B. Quality-Control Testing: Test and inspect architectural precast concrete according to MNL-117
requirements.
C. Strength of architectural precast concrete units will be considered deficient when they fail to comply
with ACI 318 requirements.
D. Testing: When there is evidence that the strength of architectural precast concrete units may be
deficient or may not meet ACI 318 requirements, the Owner will employ an independent testing agency
to obtain, prepare, and test cores drilled from hardened concrete to determine compressive strength
according to ASTM C 42.
1. A minimum of 3 representative cores will be taken from architectural precast concrete units of
suspect strength, from locations directed by Architect.
2. Cores will be tested in an air-dry condition.
E. Patching: Where core test results are satisfactory and architectural precast concrete units meet
requirements, solidly fill core holes with patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete
surfaces.
F. Defective Work: Discard architectural precast concrete units that do not conform to requirements,
including strength, manufacturing tolerances, and finishes. Replace with architectural precast concrete
units that meet requirements.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE -BOLLARDS 03450- 8
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. Reinforce architectural precast concrete units to resist handling, transportation, erection stresses and
design loads but shall not be less than that shown on the drawings..
F. Pretension tendons for architectural precast, prestressed concrete units either by single-strand
tensioning method or multiple-strand tensioning method. Comply with MNL-117 requirements.
G. Mix concrete according to MNL-117 and requirements of this Section. Following concrete batching,
no additional water may be added.
H. Cure concrete according to the requirements of MNL-117 by moisture retention without heat or by
accelerated heat curing, using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture.
I. Fabricate architectural precast concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed edges and
corners precise and true.
1. Edge and Corner Treatment: Uniformly chamfered.
J. Discard architectural precast concrete units that are warped, cracked, broken, spalled, stained, or
otherwise defective unless repairs are permitted by Architect and meet requirements.
2.10 FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A. Comply with the following overall height and width dimensional tolerances of finished units measured
at face adjacent to mold at time of casting:
1. 10 Feet or Less: Plus or minus 1/8 inch.
2. 10 to 20 Feet: Plus 1/8 inch, minus 3/16 inch.
3. 20 to 40 Feet: Plus or minus 1/4 inch.
4. Each Additional 10 Feet: Plus or minus 1/16 inch per 10 feet.
B. Angular Deviation of Plane of Side Mold: Plus or minus 1/32 inch per 3-inch depth or plus or minus
1/16-inch total, whichever is greater.
C. Openings Within One Unit: Plus or minus 1/4 inch, except plus or minus 1/8 inch for windows and
door frames.
D. Out of Square: Difference in length of two diagonal measurements of 1/8 inch per 72 inches or 1/2-
inch total, whichever is greater.
E. Thickness: Minus 1/8 inch, plus 1/4 inch.
F. Locations of Reveals and Architectural Features: Plus or minus 1/8 inch.
G. Other Dimensional Tolerances: Numerically the greater of plus or minus 1/16 inch per 10 feet, or plus
or minus 1/8 inch.
H. Position Tolerances: For cast-in items measured from datum line, locations as shown on Shop
Drawings as follows:
1. Inserts: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
2. Weld Plates: Plus or minus 1 inch.
3. Handling Devices: Plus or minus 3 inches.
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE -BOLLARDS 03450-7
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Design mixes may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified architectural
precast manufacturing plant personnel at architectural precast fabricator's option.
C. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to the maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by
ACI 318.
1. Compressive Strength(28-Day): 5000 psi.
2. Maximum Water-Cement Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.40.
D. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at
point of placement having an air content complying with MNL-117 requirements.
E. Water Absorption: 12 to 14 percent by volume tested according to MNL-117.
2.8 MOLDS
A. Accurately construct molds, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand pressures due to concrete-
placing operations, temperature changes, and for pretensioning and detensioning operations.
B. Maintain molds to provide completed architectural precast concrete units of shapes, lines, and
dimensions indicated, within fabrication tolerances specified.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. Accurately position cast-in anchors, inserts, plates, angles, and other anchorage hardware for
attachment of loose hardware and secure in place during precasting operations. Locate anchorage
hardware where it does not affect the position of the main reinforcement or the placing of concrete.
B. Supply loose steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels, cramps, hangers, and other
hardware shapes not provided by other trades necessary for securing architectural precast concrete units
to supporting and adjacent members.
C. Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in architectural precast concrete units to receive
windows, cramps, dowels, reglets, waterstops, flashings, and other similar work as indicated.
Coordinate with other trades for installation of cast-in items.
D. Reinforcement: Comply with the recommendations of CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for
fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.
1. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or
destroy the bond with concrete.
2. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during concrete
placement and consolidation operations. Completely conceal support devices to prevent
exposure on finished surfaces. Do not use plastic-coated or uncoated metal chair supports.
3. Place reinforcement to maintain at least 3/4-inch minimum cover after finishing. Arrange,
space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position while placing
concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from finished, exposed concrete surfaces.
4. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full
mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in
either direction.
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE - BOLLARDS 03450-6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.5 CONNECTION MATERIALS
A. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36.
B. Carbon-Steel Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B.
C. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A; carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and studs; carbon-
steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers.
D. High-Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts, heavy hex
carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.
E. Welded Headed Studs: AWS D1.1, Type B headed studs, cold-finished carbon-steel bars.
F. Deformed-Steel Wire Bar Anchors: ASTM A 496.
G. Stainless-Steel Plate: ASTM A 666, Type 304, of grade suitable for application.
H. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM F 593, alloy 304 or 316, hex-head bolts and studs; stainless-
steel nuts; and flat, stainless-steel washers.
I. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: For exterior steel items, steel in exterior walls, and items indicated for
galvanizing, apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process, complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153
as applicable.
J. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint with dry film containing not less than 94
"` percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035A or SSPC-Paint 20.
K. Shop-Primed Finish: Prepare surfaces of nongalvanized steel items, except those surfaces to be
embedded in concrete, according to requirements of SSPC-SP 3 and shop-apply primer according to
SSPC-PA 1.
1. Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, VOC-conforming, universal modified-alkyd
primer with good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, complying with SSPC-Paint 25 or
the performance requirements of FS TT-P-664.
L. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
M. Accessories: Provide clips, hangers, plastic shims, and other accessories required to install
architectural precast concrete units.
2.6 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type 1, and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix
at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement
and hydration.
2.7 CONCRETE MIXES
A. Prepare design mixes for each type of concrete required.
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE -BOLLARDS 03450-S
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.2 MOLD MATERIALS
A. Forms: Provide forms and, where required, form-facing materials of metal, plastic, wood, or another
acceptable material that is nonreactive with concrete and will produce required finish surfaces.
2.3 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.
B. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767, Class II, 2 oz./sq. ft. zinc, hot-dip galvanized.
C. Steel-Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, plain, cold drawn.
2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III.
1. Use only one brand, type, and color of cement from the same mill throughout Project.
2. Standard gray portland cement may be used for nonexposed back-up concrete.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, with coarse aggregates meeting Class 5S and MNL-117
requirements.
1. Face-Mix Coarse Aggregates: Selected, hard, and durable; free of material that reacts with
cement or causes staining.
a. Gradation: Uniformly graded.
2. Face-Mix Fine Aggregates: Selected, natural or manufactured sand of the same material as
coarse aggregate, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
C. Coloring Agent: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral oxide pigments or colored water-reducing
admixtures, color stable, nonfading, resistant to lime and other alkalis.
D. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or strength of
concrete.
E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
required admixtures.
F. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
G. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B.
H. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
I. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.
J. High-Range, Water-Reducing, and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type G.
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE -BOLLARDS 03450-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
J. Field samples, approximately 36 to 48 inches, of architectural precast concrete; in sets of 3 for each
finish, color, and texture required, demonstrating the range of variations expected in these
characteristics.
1. In presence of Architect, damage part of an exposed-face surface and demonstrate materials and
methods proposed for repair of surface blemishes.
K. Mockups: Prior to installing architectural precast concrete units, construct mockups for each form of
construction and finish required to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated
for final unit of Work.
1. Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed
by Architect.
2. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before start of final unit of Work.
5. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
a. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site.
b. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion
may become part of the completed Work.
L. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of
Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver precast concrete units to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure continuity of
installation. Store units at Project site to prevent cracking, distorting, warping, staining, or other
physical damage, and so that markings are visible.
B. Lift and support units only at designated lifting or supporting points shown on Shop Drawings.
1.7 SEQUENCING
A. Supply anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work.
Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for installation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRICATORS
A. Available Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, fabricators offering products that may
be incorporated in the Worm include, but are not limited to, the following:
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE - BOLLARDS 03450-3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
H. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance with
requirements of the following based on comprehensive testing of current materials:
1. Concrete materials.
2. Reinforcing materials.
3. Water-absorption test reports.
I. Material certificates in lieu of agency test reports, when permitted by Architect, signed by fabricator
certifying that each material item complies with requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed architectural precast
concrete work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record
of successful in-service performance.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in producing architectural precast concrete units
similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work.
1. Fabricator must participate in the Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute's (PCI) Plant
Certification Program and be designated a PCI Certified Plant for Group Al - Architectural
Concrete.
2. Fabricator shall be registered and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for approval, an independent testing agency must
demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria conforming to
ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the
testing indicated without delaying the Work.
D. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally authorized to practice in
the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of
the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of precast
concrete units that are similar to that indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
E. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to
perform the preconstruction testing indicated.
F. PCI Design Standard: Comply with recommendations of PCI's MNL-120 "PCI Design Handbook--
Precast and Prestressed Concrete" applicable to types of architectural precast concrete units indicated.
G. PCI Quality-Control Standard: Comply with requirements of PCI's MNL-117 "Manual for Quality
Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products," including
manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality-control recommendations, and dimensional
tolerances for types of units required.
H. ACI Publications: Comply with applicable provisions of the following ACI publications:
1. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete."
I. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D 1.1 "Structural Welding Code-- look
Steel" and AWS DlA 'Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE -BOLLARDS 03450 -2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 03450-ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE -BOLLARDS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes architectural precast concrete bollards
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and install architectural precast concrete units to
withstand design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data and instructions for manufactured materials and products.
C. Shop Drawings prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing
fabrication and installation of architectural precast concrete units. Indicate member locations, plans,
elevations, dimensions, shapes, cross sections, and types of reinforcement, including special
reinforcement. Include locations and details of hoisting points and lifting devices for handling and
erection.
1. Indicate separate face and back-up mix locations and thicknesses.
2. Indicate welded connections by AWS standard symbols. Detail loose, cast-in, and field
hardware, inserts, connections, and joints, including accessories.
3. Indicate locations and details of anchorage devices that are to be embedded in other construction.
D. Design reference sample for initial selection, approximately 12 by 12 by 2 inches, to illustrate quality
of finishes, colors, and textures of exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units.
E. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified
under the "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. VOC compliance certificates signed by manufacturers certifying compliance of their products with
regulations of authorities having jurisdiction over volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
G. Design mixes for each concrete mix.
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE -BOLLARDS 03450- 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of
concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if
fewer than five are used.
3. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yd., Architect may waive
strength testing if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided.
4. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured
cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and
curing the in-place concrete.
5. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive
strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual strength
test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
C. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, ready-mix producer, and
Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project
identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete
type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete
mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests
and 28-day tests.
D. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted
but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.
E. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results
indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as
directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored
cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. If such test fails, contractor
shall pay for this and other retests.
END OF SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 17
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, 144%6
popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions.
2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days.
3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to
blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment compounds may be used when
acceptable to Architect.
4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter,
by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts
and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4 inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete
surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of
same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact,
and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
E. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter by dry-pack method. Groove
top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen
cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Place dry-pack before bonding agent has
dried. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area
continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
F. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Architect for method and procedure, using specified
epoxy adhesive and mortar.
G. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect.
3.16 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION ,
A. General: The Owner will employ a testing agency to perform tests and to submit test reports.
B. Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement may include the following, as
directed by Architect.
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C
94.
a. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each type of
concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed.
b. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight
concrete; ASTM C 231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day's
pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.
C. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F
and below, when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength
specimens.
d. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for each
compressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for
laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cured test specimens are required.
e. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5 cu.
yd. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. more than the first 25 cu. yd. of each concrete
class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28
days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 16
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential compressive strength of in-place
concrete by testing field-cured specimens representative of concrete location or members.
C. Form-facing material may be removed 4 days after placement only if shores and other vertical supports
have been arranged to permit removal of form-facing material without loosening or disturbing shores
and supports.
3.14 REUSING FORMS
A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise
damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-coating
compound as specified for new formwork.
B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins
and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use
patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable to Architect.
3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after
removing forms, when acceptable to Architect.
B. Mix dry-pack mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a
No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing.
1. Cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and holes left by tie
rods and bolts down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth less than 1 inch. Make edges of
cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-
coat the area to be patched with bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has
dried.
2. For surfaces exposed to view, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so
that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Provide test areas at
inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching.
Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot
be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and
other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes and fill with dry-
pack mortar or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
1. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, containing defects that affect the concrete's
durability. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete.
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and
verify surface tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as specified.
Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using a template having
the required slope.
1. Repair finished unformed surfaces containing defects that affect the concrete's durability.
Surface defects include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to the
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 15
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply according to manufacturer's
instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling.
B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and
finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days.
C. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by curing compound, by moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover
curing, or by combining these methods, as specified.
D. Provide moisture curing by the following methods:
1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water.
2. Use continuous water-fog spray.
3. Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate cover with water,
and keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and
edges, with a 4 inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
E. Provide moisture-retaining cover curing as follows:
1. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest
practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or
adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and
waterproof tape.
F. Apply curing compound on exposed interior slabs and on exterior slabs, walks, and curbs as follows:
1. Apply curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete
(within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared). Apply uniformly in continuous
operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas
subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of
coating and repair damage during curing period.
2. Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with finish materials
applied directly to concrete.
G. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported
slabs, and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place for the full curing period or until
forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable.
H. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, including slabs, floor topping, and other flat
surfaces, by applying the appropriate curing method.
1. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive fmish flooring with a moisture-retaining cover, unless
otherwise directed.
3.13 REMOVING FORMS
A. General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and
similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24
hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form-removal
operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained.
B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural
elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days or until concrete has attained at least 75 percent of
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 14
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 6
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. After floating, begin first trowel-finish operation using a power-driven trow+: egin final
troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surfa: onsolidate
concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks, unifor, xture and
appearance, and finish surfaces to tolerances oaf F(Fyn2 -(floor flatness) and _ 17 (floor
levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Grind smooth any surface defe. Sat would
telegraph through applied floor covering system.
D. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin-s t mortar,
apply a trowel finish as specified, then immediately follow by slightly scarifying the surface %vith a fine
broom.
E. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps,
and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber-
bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with
Architect before application.
2. Cast a trial slab approximately 10 ft. square to determine actual application rate, color, and
finish, as acceptable to Architect.
3. Immediately following the first floating operation, uniformly distribute with mechanical
spreader approximately two-thirds of the required weight of the dry shake material over the
concrete surface, and embed by power floating. Follow floating operation with second shake
application, uniformly distributing remainder of dry shake material with overlapping
applications to en-sure uniform color, and embed by power floating.
4. After broadcasting and floating, apply a trowel finish as specified. Cure slab surface with a
curing compound recommended by the dry shake material manufacturer. Apply the curing
compound immediately after the final finishing.
3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades,
unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure
concrete as specified to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling
shown or required to complete Work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and
by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish wih comers, intersections, and terminations slightly
rounded.
C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machinennd equipment bases and foundations as shown on
drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying
with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.
D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steed pan sWr treads, landings, and associated items. Cast-in
safety inserts and accessories as shown on drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel-finish concrete surfaces.
3.12 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION o,.
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 13
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: Provide a rough-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces not exposed to
view in the finished Work or concealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface having
texture imparted by form-facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched,
and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off.
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: Provide a smooth-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces exposed to view
or to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied
directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofmg, veneer plaster, painting, or another similar
system. This is an as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form-facing material, arranged in an
orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with funs
and other projections completely removed and smoothed.
C. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth-rubbed finish on scheduled concrete surfaces that have
received smooth-formed finish treatment not later than 1 day after form removal.
i. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a
uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing
process.
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed
surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed
surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3.10 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES
A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or
mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded applied cementitious finish
flooring material, and where indicated.
1. After placing slabs, finish surface to tolerances of F(F) 15 (floor flatness) and F(L) 13 (floor
levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where
required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set with stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes.
B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes
as specified; slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic
roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo; and where indicated.
1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for
floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface water has
disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven
floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small
or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 18 (floor flatness) and F(L)
15 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Cut down high spots and fill low
spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a
uniform, smooth, granular texture.
C. Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces exposed to view and slab surfaces to
be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or another thin film-finish
coating system.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 12
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at
its final location.
D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches
and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers,
place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.
1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading,
rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete complying
with ACI 309.
2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically
at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Place
vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not
insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit
duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of
reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix to segregate.
E. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits
of construction joints, until completing placement of a panel or section.
1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around
reinforcement, other embedded items and into comers.
2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies
to smooth surface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning
finishing operations.
3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement.
F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work
from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
G. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and
aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not
more than 80 deg F at point of placement.
1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on
frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical
accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.
H. Hot-Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality and strength of
concrete, place concrete complying with ACI 305 and as specified.
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement to below
90 deg F. Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to control temperature,
provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid
nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature
will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade
moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas.
4. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or
other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to Architect.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 11
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete. -00*4
E. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct isolation joints in slabs-on-grade at points of contact
between slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams,
and other locations, as indicated.
1. Joint fillers and sealants are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
F. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct contraction joints in slabs-on-grade to form panels of
patterns as shown.
1. Joint fillers and sealants are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
3.6 INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. General: Set and build into formwork anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other
work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams,
instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached.
B. Install reglets to receive top edge of foundation sheet waterproofing and to receive through-wall
flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, relieving
angles, and other conditions.
C. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated on drawings.
D. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve
required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips
using strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
3.7 PREPARING FORM SURFACES
A. General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC, form-coating
compound before placing reinforcement.
B. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or come into contact with in-place
concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply according to manufacturer's
instructions.
1. Coat steel forms with a nonstaining, rust-preventative material. Rust-stained steel formwork is
not acceptable.
3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and
items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.
B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete,"
and as specified.
C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on
concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 10
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
000k
F. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other
trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing such
items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.
G. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove
chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before placing concrete. Retighten forms and bracing
before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.
3.3 VAPOR RETARDERBARRIER INSTALLATION
A. General: Place vapor retarder/barrier sheeting in position with longest dimension parallel with
direction of pour.
B. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended mastic or pressure-sensitive tape.
3.4 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing
Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as specified.
1. Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarder/barrier during reinforcement placement and
concreting operations. Repair damages before placing concrete.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy
bond with concrete.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support
reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by Architect.
D. Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverages as indicated for concrete protection. Arrange,
space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete
placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete
surfaces.
E. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh
and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either
direction.
3.5 JOINTS
A. Construction Joints: Locate and install constmain joints so they do not impair strength or appearance
of the structure, as acceptable to Architect.
B. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inches deep in cooetruction joints in walls and slabs and between walls
and footings. Bulkheads designed and accapled for this purpose may be used for slabs.
C. Place construction joints perpendicdar to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints except as indicated athcrwise. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip
placements.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -9
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture(superplasticizer) in concrete, as
required, for placement and workability.
B. Use accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 deg F.
C. Use high-range water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, parking structure slabs, concrete
required to be watertight.
D. Use air-entraining admixture in all concrete except for steel toweled finished concrete. Add air-
entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having
total air content 6% with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent.
E. Use admixtures for water reduction and set accelerating or retarding in strict compliance with
manufacturer's directions.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials, vapor retarder/barrier, and other related materials with
placement of forms and reinforcing steel.
3.2 FORMS
A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical, lateral, static, and
dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct
formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and
position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances and surface irregularities complying with the
following ACI 347 limits:
1. Provide Class A tolerances for concrete surfaces exposed to view.
2. Provide Class C tolerances for other concrete surfaces.
B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment,
location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages,
keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages
and inserts, and other features required in the Work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes.
Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints to prevent cement paste from leaking.
C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide
crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms
for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood
inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like for easy removal.
D. Provide temporary openings for clean-outs and inspections where interior area of formwork is
inaccessible before and during concrete placement. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly
to forms to prevent losing concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous
locations.
E. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips
fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 8
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
5) Hornweld, A.C. Horn, Inc.
6) Everbond, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
7) Acryl-Set, Master Builders Inc.
8) Intralok, W.R. Meadows, Inc.
9) Sonocrete, Sonneborn-Chemrex.
10) Stocdock LB2, Stonhard, Inc.
L. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces.
Provide material type, grade, and class to suit Project requirements.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Burke Epoxy M.V., The Burke Co.
b. Resi-Bond (J-58), Dayton Superior.
C. Euco Epoxy System#452 or#620, Euclid Chemical Co.
d. Epoxtite Binder 2390, A.C. Horn, Inc.
e. Epabond, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
f. Concresive Standard Liquid, Master Builders, Inc.
g. Rezi-Weld 1000, W.R. Meadows, Inc.
h. Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod, Sika Corp.
i. Stonset LV5, Stonhard, Inc.
2.5 PROPORTIONING AND! MIXES
A. Prepare design mixes fc*r each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field
experience methods as specified in ACI 301.
1. Do not use the same testing agency for field quality control testing.
2. Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 25 percent of cement content by weight.
B. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days
prior to start of Work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been
reviewed by Architect.
C. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties as indicated on drawings
and schedules:
1. 4000 psi, 28-day compressive strength; water-cement ratio, 0.44 maximum (non-air-entrained),
0.35 maximum(air-entrained).
2. 3000 psi, 28-day compressive strength; water-cement ratio, 0.50 maximum (non-air-entrained),
0.46 maximum(air-entrained).
D. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when
characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, as
accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be
submitted to and accepted by Architect before using in Work.
E. Fiber Reinforcement: Add at manufacturer's recommended rate but not less than 1.5 lb/cu. yd.
2.6 ADMIXTURES
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-7
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
H. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Liquid-type membrane-forming curing compound
complying with ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A. Moisture loss not more than 0.55 kg/sq. m when
applied at 200 sq. ft./gal.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. A-H 3 Way Sealer, Anti-Hydro Co., Inc.
b. Spartan-Cote, The Burke Co.
C. Day-Chem Cure and Seal, Dayton Superior Corp.
d. Eucocure, Euclid Chemical Co.
e. Horn Clear Seal, A.C. Horn, Inc.
f. Masterkure, Master Builders, Inc.
g. CS-309, W.R. Meadows, Inc.
h. Kure-N-Seal, Sonneborn-Chemrex.
i. Stontop CS2, Stonhard, Inc.
I. Water-Based Acrylic Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B.
1. Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound(VOC) rating of 350 g/L.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Safe Cure and Seal, Dayton Superior Corp.
b. Aqua-Cure, Euclid Chemical Co.
C. Masterkure 100W, Master Builders, Inc.
d. Vocomp-20, W.R. Meadows, Inc.
e. Stontop CSI, Stonhard, Inc.
J. Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film-forming compound applied to exposed concrete slab
surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Eucobar, Euclid Chemical Co.
b. E-Con, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
C. Confilm, Master Builders, Inc.
d. Waterhold, Metalcrete Industries.
K. Bonding Agent: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Polyvinyl Acetate(Interior Only):
1) Superior Concrete Bonder, Dayton Superior Corp.
2) Euco Weld, Euclid Chemical Co.
3) Weld-Crete, Larsen Products Corp.
4) Everweld, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
b. Acrylic or Styrene Butadiene:
1) Acrylic Bondcrete, The Burke Co.
2) Day-Chem Ad Bond, Dayton Superior Corp.
3) SBR Latex, Euclid Chemical Co.
4) Daraweld C, W.R. Grace&Co.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
�Oow
a. Lubricon NCA, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
b. Accelguard 80, Euclid Chemical Co.
C. Daraset, W.R. Grace&Co.
d. Pozzutec 20, Master Builders, Inc.
J. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Eucon Retarder 75, Euclid Chemical Co.
b. Daratard-17, W.R. Grace&Co.
C. Pozzolith R, Master Builders, Inc.
d. Plastiment, Sika Corporation.
2.4 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Reglets: Where sheet flashing or bituminous membranes are terminated in reglets, provide reglets of
not less than 0.0217- inch-thick galvanized sheet steel. Fill reglet or cover face opening to prevent
intrusion of concrete or debris.
B. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized sheet steel, not less than 0.0336 inch thick with bent tab
anchors. Fill slot with temporary filler or cover face opening to prevent intrusion of concrete or
debris.
` C. Waterstops: Provide flat, dumbbell-type or centerbulb-type waterstops at construction joints and other
joints as indicated. Size to suit joints.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following:
a. The Burke Co.
b. Greenstreak Plastic Products Co.
C. W.R. Meadows, Inc.
d. Vinylex Corp.
D. Screened Stone Cushion: MDPW-M2.05.0 Stone Screenings. Compacted to 95% density.
E. Vapor Retarder: Provide vapor retarder that is resistant to deterioration when tested according to
ASTM E 154, as follows:
1. Polyethylene sheet not less than 8 mils thick.
F. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd.,
complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2.
G. Moisture-Retaining Cover. One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171.
1. Waterproof paper.
2. Polyethylene film.
ate"* 3. Polyethylene-coated burlap.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type F.
C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as specified. Provide aggregates from a single source
for exposed concrete.
1. For exposed exterior surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain substances that
cause spalling.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Fiber Reinforcement: Polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for secondary reinforcement of
concrete slabs, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, not less than 3/4 inch long.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Fibermesh, Fibermesh Co., Div. Synthetic Industries, Inc.
b. Forta, Forta Corp.
C. Grace Fibers, W.R. Grace&Co.
d. Polystrand, Metalcrete Industries
F. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
required admixtures.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Air-Mix or Perma-Air, Euclid Chemical Co.
b. Darex AEA or Daravair, W.R. Grace&Co.
C. MB-VR or Micro-Air, Master Builders, Inc.
d. Sealtight AEA, W.R. Meadows, Inc.
e. Sika AER, Sika Corp.
G. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Chemtard, ChemMasters Corp.
b. Eucon WR-75, Euclid Chemical Co.
C. WRDA, W.R. Grace&Co.
d. Pozzolith Normal or Polyheed, Master Builders, Inc.
e. Plastocrete 161, Sika Corp.
H. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Eucon 37, Euclid Chemical Co.
b. WRDA 19 or Daracem, W.R. Grace&Co.
C. Rheobuild or Polyheed, Master Builders, Inc.
d. Sikament 300, Sika Corp.
I. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.1 FORM MATERIALS
A. Forms for Exposed Finish, Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood f< r other
acceptable panel-type materials to provide continuous, straight, siu.;otk, exposed surfac ._rnish in
largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint sy: iown on
drawings.
1. Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B (Concrete Form) P:ywood,"
Class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill-oiled and edge-sealed, with each piece bearing legible
inspection trademark.
B. Forms for Uncxposed ; 1WSi: Conc eie: Plywood, luaiuer, nie::il, or another "=eft?ble material.
Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C. Carton Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture-resistance, structurally sufficient to
support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.
D. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form release agent with a maximum of 350 g/L
volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces
and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
E. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties designed to
prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling of concrete upon removal. Provide units that will leave
no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to the plane of the exposed concrete surface.
2.2 REINFORCING MATERLALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615 Grade 60, deformed.
B. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn steel.
C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric.
D. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 497.
E. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar-type supports complying with
CRSI specifications.
1. For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will
not support chair lees.
2. For exposed-to-view-concrete surfaces where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide
supports with legs that are protected by plastic (CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel (CRSI, Class
2).
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II.
1. Use one brand of cement throughout Project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Shop drawings for formwork indicating fabrication and erection of forms for specific finished concrete
surfaces. Show form construction including jointing, special form joints or reveals, location and
pattern of form tie placement, and other items that affect exposed concrete visually.
1. Architect's review is for general architectural applications and features only. Designing
formwork for structural stability and efficiency is Contractor's responsibility.
E. Samples of materials as requested by Architect, including names, sources, and descriptions, as follows:
1. Normal weight aggregates.
2. Fiber reinforcement.
3. Reglets.
4. Waterstops.
5. Vapor retarder barrier.
6. Form liners.
F. Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test.
G. Material certificates in lieu of material laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect. Material
certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies
with or exceeds specified requirements. Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that
chloride content complies with specification requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards,
except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
1. American Concrete Institute(ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings."
2. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete."
3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute(CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice."
B. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress of Work.
Tests, including retesting of rejected materials for installed Work, shall be done at Contractor's
expense.
1. At least 35 days prior to submitting design mixes, conduct a meeting to review detailed
requirements for preparing concrete design mixes and to determine procedures for satisfactory
concrete operations. Review requirements for submittals, status of coordinating work, and
availability of materials. Establish preliminary work progress schedule and procedures for
materials inspection, testing, and certifications. Require representatives of each entity directly
concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend conference, including, but not limited to, the
following:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Agency responsible for concrete design mixes.
C. Agency responsible for field quality control.
d. Ready-mix concrete producer.
e. Concrete subcontractor.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 03300- CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design, placement
procedures, and finishes.
B. Cast-in-place concrete includes the following:
1. Foundations and footings.
2. Slabs-on-grade.
3. Fill for steel deck.
4. Foundation walls.
5. Equipment pads and bases interior and exterior.
6. Fill for steel pan stairs.
7. Flagpole footing.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 2 Section "Portland Cement Concrete Paving" for concrete paving and walks.
2. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for related materials
3. Division 3 Section "Structural Precast Concrete -Plant Cast" for structural precast concrete.
4. Division 3 Section "Architectural Precast Concrete - Plant Cast" for architectural precast
concrete.
5. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry dovetail slots upplied by mason and installed by
concrete sub.
6. Division 5 Section "Steel Deck" for steel deck construction.
7. Division 15 Section "Mechanical" for radiant heat in slab.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories,
admixtures, patching ,compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake finish
materials, and others if requested by Architect.
C. Shop drawings for reinforcement detailing fabricating, bending, and placing concrete reinforcement.
AV„„ Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures"
showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement.
Include special reinforcing required for openings through concrete structures.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 3 -EXECUTION AMW
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039.
B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition
that may potentially affect proper application.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Asphalt or Bituminous Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove foreign particles to permit
adhesion of finishing materials.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.
C. Apply each coat to uniform finish.
3.04 SCHEDULE-EXTERIOR SURFACES
A. Pavement Markings:
1. One coat of paint, white.
END OF SECTION
PAINTING 09900 -2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION D: 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface preparation and field application of painted pavement markings.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02510- Asphaltic Concrete Paving.
1.03 REFERENCE
A. Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges, Mass. Highway Department, 1988,
Construction Section 860 and Materials Section M7.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products.
1.05 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this Section.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section.
1.06 DELIVERY. STORAGE. AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
C. Container label to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand
code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and
instructions for mixing and reducing.
D. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and a
maximum of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's
instructions.
1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges
required by the paint product manufacturer.
B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the
humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Shall conform to the requirements of Section M7.01.10 of the State Specifications.
PAINTING 09900 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.09 WRAPPING
A. Trunks of deciduous trees shall be spiral wrapped to a minimum height of the third branch or two-
thirds the height of tree, whichever is higher. Wrap shall be applied from base up and securely
tied.
3.10 STAKING AND GUYING
A. Each tree shall be staked or guyed immediately following planting. Plants shall stand plumb after
staking or guying.
3.11 MULCHING
A. Mulch shall be applied as follows (entire area listed shall be mulched):
Plant Twe Mulch Area Mulch Depth (in_.)
Tree Saucer 3
Shrub Saucer or Bed 3
Ground Cover Bed 2
3.12 PRUNING
A. Each tree and shrub shall be pruned to preserve the natural character of the plant. Pruning shall be
done after delivery of plants and after plants have been inspected and approved by the Landscape
Architect/Engineer. Pruning procedures shall be reviewed with Landscape Architect/Engineer
before proceeding.
B. Pruning shall be done with clean, sharp tools. Cuts shall be made flush, leaving no stubs, but
without injuring the branch collar. No tree paint shall be used.
C. Dead wood, suckers, and broken and badly bruised branches shall be removed.
3.13 All shrubs and groundcover plantings shall receive a thorough application of antidessicant in conformance
with manufacturer's specifications and directions.
3.14 MAINTENANCE OF PLANTING
A. Maintenance shall begin immediately after each plant is planted and shall continue until Final
Acceptance.
B. Maintenance shall consist of pruning, watering, cultivating, weeding, mulching, removal of dead
material, repairing and replacing of tree stakes, tightening and repairing of guys, repairing and
replacing of damaged tree wrap material, resetting plants to proper grades and upright position, and
furnishing and applying such sprays as are necessary to keep plantings free of insects and disease,
and in a healthy growing condition.
C. Planting areas shall be kept free of weeds, grass, and other undesired vegetative growth.
END OF SECTION
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS 02950 - 13
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. Planting shall be positioned in center of planting pit, set plumb, and rigidly braced in position until
all planting soil has been tamped solidly around the ball.
F. Pits shall be backfilled with planting soil. Soil shall be worked carefully into voids and pockets,
tamping lightly every 6 inches.
1. When pit is two-thirds full, plants shall be watered thoroughly, and water left to soak in
before proceeding.
2. At this time, ropes or strings on top of ball shall be cut and shall be pulled back. Burlap
or cloth wrapping shall be left intact around ball except that portions of wrap that are
exposed at top of ball shall be turned under and buried. Non-biodegradable ball wrapping
and support wire shall be totally removed from ball and planting pit.
G. Backfilling and tamping shall then be finished and a saucer formed around plant pits as indicated on
the Drawings.
H. Saucer shall be filled with water and water left to soak in. Saucer shall then be filled with water
again.
3.07 APPLICATION OF FERTILIZER
A. Fertilizer shall be applied when planting pits are backfilled two-thirds full. Fertilizer application
shall be of the type, rate, and timing recommended by the testing agency for each plant type.
B. Slow-Release Fertilizer:
1. Fertilization schedule for trees and shrubs using slow release 4 oz. packet system shall be
as follows:
Plant Tvoe Sig No. of Packets
Trees 1 -2 in. caliper 2
2-2-1/2 in. caliper 3
2-1/2- 3 in. caliper 4
3 -4 in. caliper 5
4-5 in. caliper 6
5 -6 in. caliper 8
Shrubs 1 ft. -0 in. Height 1
2 ft. -0 in. Height 2
3 ft. -0 in. Height 3
2. Fertilizer packets shall be placed 6 to 8 inches deep below top of planting soil around root
balls of plants. Packets shall be spaced evenly depending on the number of packets
required.
3.08 FUNGICIDE SPRAYIN_Q
A. Immediately after planting, all trunks of deciduous trees shall be sprayed with fungicide, applied as
directed by chemical manufacturer.
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS 02950 - 12
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION OF SLMGRADF
A. Examine subgrade and rough grading before planting. Alert Landscape Architect/Engineer to
unacceptable rough grading or subgrade.
3.02 DRAINAGE OF SOILS
A. Test drainage of plant beds and pits at three locations chosen by the Landscape Architect/Engineer
shall be done by filling with water twice in succession. The time at which water is put into the pit
or bed for a second filling shall be noted. Landscape Architect/Engineer shall then be notified of
the time it takes for pit or bed to drain completely. Planting operations shall not proceed until
Landscape Architect/Engineer has reviewed test drainage results.
B. Notify the Landscape Architect/Engineer in writing of all soil or drainage conditions that he/she
considers detrimental to growth of plant material. Submit proposal and cost estimate for correction
of the conditions for Landscape Architect/Engineer's approval before starting work.
3.03 LAYOUT OF PLANTING ARRAS
A. Individual plant locations and outlines of shrubs and ground cover areas to be planted shall be
staked by the Contractor in ample time to allow inspection by the Landscape Architect/Engineer.
B. Digging shall not begin until locations are approved by the Landscape Architect/Engineer.
C. Location of trees shall be staked using color coded stakes. A different stake color shall be used for
each tree species.
3.04 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE
A. Subgrade of planting areas shall be loosened or scarified to a minimum depth of 3 inches prior to
spreading planting soil. Subgrade shall be brought to true and uniform grade and shall be cleared
of stones greater than 2 inches, sticks, and other extraneous material.
3.05 PLANT PIT EXCAVATION
A. Planting pits for trees and shrubs shall be excavated to the depth and dimension indicated on the
Drawings.
B. Excavation shall not begin until locations are approved by the Landscape Architect/Engineer.
3.06 PLANTING
A. Walls of plant pits shall be dug so that they are vertical and scarified.
B. Plants shall be set as indicated on Drawings. Plants shall have same relationship to finished grade
as in the nurserv.
C. Plants shall be turned to the desired orientation when required by Landscape Architect/Engineer.
Avok D. Containerized plants shall be removed from container taking care not to damage roots. The side of
the root ball shall be scarified to prevent root-bound condition and plant positioned in planting pit.
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS 02950 - 11
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.10 GUYING AND STAKING MATERIALS
A. Wood Stakes: Straight, sound, rough sawn lumber not less than 2 ' 2 inches, if square, or 2-1/2
inch diameter, if round. Stakes shall be stained green. Wire for staking shall be 12 gauge steel.
B. Pipe Stakes: 1-1/2 inch diameter Schedule 40 black steel pipe. Stakes shall receive a coating of
flat black exterior enamel paint before installation.
C. Wire for Guying: Galvanized steel 1 ' 19 preformed 3/16 inch diameter. Thimbles and nicopress
clips shall be used for connections and splices.
D. Turnbuckles: Galvanized steel with an 8 inch lengthwise opening fitted with eyebolts.
E. Deadman: Sound, rough sawn lumber 4 ' 8 inches, 3 feet long, or other material approved by the
Landscape Architect/Engineer.
F. Hose: High quality braided rubber hose, 3/4 inch diameter and suitable length, black in color.
2.11 WRAPPING MATERIAL
A. Tree wrapping material shall be equal to the following:
1. Osnaburg Cloth, 4-7/8 inches wide, unbleached, pinked on both edges, manufactured by
The Carnegie Textile Co., 1734 Ivanhoe Road, P.O. Box 10276, Cleveland, OH 44110.
2.12 FILTER FABRIC
A. Filter fabric shall be a non-woven geotextile fabric equal to Mirafi 140N, manufactured by Mirafi,
Inc., Charlotte, NC 28224, or Trevira Spunbound non-woven geotextile, Fabric Type 14,
manufactured by Hoechst Fibers Industries, Spartanburg, SC 29304.
2.13 ANTIDESSICANT
A. Antidessicant shall be an emulsion specifically manufactured for plant protection which provides a
protective film over plant surfaces which is permeable enough to permit transpiration.
Antidessicant shall be delivered in manufacturer's sealed containers and shall contain
manufacturer's printed instructions for use.
B. Antidessicant shall be equal to the following:
Product Mam f.�adorer
Wilt-Prof Wilt-Prof Products, Inc.
P.O. Box 469
Essex, CT 06426
2.14 FUNGICIDE
A. Fungicide shall be zinc ethylene disdithiocarbonate(Zineb), or equal.
Ate,
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS 02950 - 10
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.05 LIME--STO
A. Ground limestone shall be an agricultural limestone containing a minimum of 85% total carbonates,
by weight. Ground limestone shall be graded within the following limits:
Sieve Sizes % Passim by Weight
No. 10 100
No. 20 90
No. 100 60
2.06 WATER
A. Water shall be suitable for irrigation and shall be free from ingredients harmful to plant life.
2.07 ALUMINUM SULFATE
A. Aluminum sulfate shall be unadulterated and shall be delivered in containers with the name of the
material and manufacturer and net weight of contents.
2.08 COMMERCIAL F RTI I FR
A. Fertilizer content shall conform to the following:
Constituent % Present by eight
Nitrogen(N) 5
00*4 Phosphorus (P) 10
Potassium(K) 10
1. 50% of nitrogen shall be derived from natural organic source of ureaform.
2. Available phosphorus shall be derived from superphosphate, bone meal, or tankage.
3. Potassium shall be derived from muriate of potash containing 60% potash.
B. Fertilizer shall be delivered in manufacturer's standard container printed with manufacturer's
name, material weight, and guaranteed analysis.
C. Fertilizers with N-P-K analysis other than that stated above may be used provided that the
application rate per square foot of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium is equal to that specified.
D. Controlled-release fertilizer shall be equal to the following:
Product Manufacturer
Agriform 20-10-5 Sierra Chemical Co.
Planting Tablets Milpitas, CA 95035
EZY-Grow Fertilizer Packet EZY-Grow-Landscape Specialties
2.09 MULCH
A. Mulch shall be a 100% fine-shredded bark, of uniform size and free from rot, leaves, twigs,
debris, stones, or any material harmful to plant growth. Bark shall have been shredded and
stockpiled no less than two months and no more than two years before use.
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS 02950- 9
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.02 TOPSOIL
A. Topsoil shall be obtained from a previously established stockpile on the site, to the extent that
suitable material is available. Additional topsoil required shall be obtained from off-site sources.
B. Topsoil, whether stripped from site or supplied from off-site, shall be a sandy loam as defined by
the USDA Soil Conservation Service, Soils Clasification System, and shall have the following
mechanical analysis:
Textural Class % of Total Weight Average %
Sand(0.05-2.0 mm dia. range) 45 to 75 60
Silt(0.002-0.05 mm dia. range) 15 to 35 25
Clay (less than 0.002 mm dia. range) 5 to 25 15
1. 95% of topsoil shall pass a 2.0 mm sieve.
2. Topsoil shall be free of stones 1 inch in longest dimension, earth clods, plant parts, and
debris.
3. Organic matter content shall be 4 to 12% of total dry weight.
2.03 PEAT MOSS
A. Peat moss shall be a horticultural grade, sphagnum peat moss containing partially decomposed
fibrous or cellular stems and leaves of any of the many species of sphagnum mosses from fresh
water sources conforming to the following requirements:
1. Peat moss shall be a homogeneous material free of decomposed colloidal residue lumps,
roots, stones, and other foreign matter; and of such consistency that peat can pass a 1/2
inch mesh and can be readily incorporated with the topsoil.
2. The pH shall not be less than 3.5 nor greater than 6.0 at 25 degrees C.
3. Organic matter content shall not be less than 90%, by weight, on an oven-dry basis.
4. Ash content shall not be more than 10%,by weight, on an oven-dry basis.
5. Moisture absorption capacity shall not be less than 800%, by weight, on an oven-dry
basis.
2.04 PLANTING SOIL
A. Planting soil shall be a mixture of 2/3 topsoil and 1/3 peat moss, by volume.
B. Planting soil shall have pH value range of 5.5 to 7.0.
1. If planting soil mixture does not fall within the required pH range, limestone or aluminum
sulfate shall be added to bring the pH within the specified limit.
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS 02950 - 8
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
J. Container grown plants shall be well rooted and established in the container in which they are
growing. They shall have grown in the container for a sufficient length of time for the root system
to hold the planting medium when taken from the container, but not long enough to become root
bound. Container grown plants exceeding the size indicated in ANSI Z60.1 shall have containers
which are not less than 75% of the ball sizes for comparable B&B plant material. Each container
plant shall be inspected and root pruned as needed.
1. Canes or Trunk(s)and Branches:
a) Very well formed and sturdy.
b) Branching plentiful and uniformly distributed to form a well-balanced plant.
C) Scars shall be free of rot and not exceed 1/4 the diameter of the wood beneath in
greatest dimension unless completely healed(except pruning scars).
d) Pruning scars clean cut leaving little or no protrusion from the trunk or branch.
e) Graft union completely healed.
f) No mechanical or pest damage.
g) No extreme succulence.
low 2. Foliage:
a) Densely supplied with healthy, vigorous leaves of normal size, shape, color, and
texture (except shrubs moved bare-root or deciduous shrubs when dormant).
b) No holes, cavities, or depressed areas caused by broken or dead branches or
insufficient foliage.
C) No chlorosis.
d) Pest or mechanical damage barely perceptible with no more than 5% of total
foliage affected.
e) No frost or cold damage discernible.
3. Root System:
a) Sturdily established in container.
b) Shall not be excessively rootbound except plants deliberately grown rootbound to
produce a dwarf plant.
C) No large roots growing out of container.
d) Noxious weeds in container.
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS 02950 - 7
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. At the end of the guarantee period, and no less than five (5) days prior to final inspection, staking
and guying of materials, and tree wrap and ties shall be removed from the site.
1.15 FINAL.INSPECTION AND FINAL•ACCEPTANCE
A. At the end of the guarantee period, the Landscape Architect/Engineer will, upon written notice of
and of guarantee period, inspect the work for Final Acceptance. Request shall be received at least
ten(10)calendar days before the anticipated date for Final Inspection.
B. Upon completion and reinspection of full repairs or replacements necessary in the judgment of the
Landscape Architect/Engineer at that time, the Landscape Architect/Engineer will recommend to
the Owner that Final Acceptance of the Work of this Section be given.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 PLANTS
A. Except as otherwise specified, size and grade of plant materials shall conform to ANSI Z60.1. In
no case shall ball size be less than 11 inches in diameter for each inch of caliper.
B. Plants shall have outstanding form; symmetrical, heavily branched with an even branch
distribution, densely foliated and/or budded, and a strong, straight, distinct leader where this is
characteristic of species. Plants shall possess a normal balance between height and spread. The
Landscape Architect/Engineer will be the final arbiter of acceptability of plant form.
C. Plants shall be healthy and vigorous, free of disease, insect pests and their eggs, and larvae.
D. Plants shall have a well-developed fibrous root system.
E. Plant shall be free of physical damage such as scrapes, broken or split branches, scars, bark
abrasions, sunscalds, fresh limb cuts, disfiguring knots, or other defects. These defects shall not
interrupt more than 25% of the circumference of the plant cambium.
F. Plants shall meet the sizes indicated on the Plant List. Plants larger or smaller than specified may
be used only if accepted by the Landscape Architect/Engineer.
G. Where a size or caliper range is stated, at least 50% of the material shall be closer in size to the top
of the range stated.
H. Plants shall not be pruned before delivery.
I. Plants indicated as "B&B" shall be balled and burlapped.
1. Unless otherwise indicated by the Landscape Architect/Engineer, plants shall be nursery
grown.
2. Plants shall be grown for at least two years under climatic conditions similar to those in
the locality of the Project.
3. Nursery grown plants shall be freshly dug. No heeled in plants or plants from cold
storage will be accepted, unless otherwise permitted by the Landscape Architect/Engineer.
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS 02950 - 6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.12 ACCEPTANcF-
A. The Landscape Architect/Engineer will inspect all work for Substantial Completion upon written
notice of completion. The request shall be received at least ten (10) calendar days before the
anticipated date of inspection.
B. Acceptance of plant material by the Landscape Architect/Engineer will be for general conformance
to specified size, character, and quality, and shall not diminish responsibility for full conformance
to the Contract Documents.
C. Upon completion and reinspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgment of the
Landscape Architect/Engineer, the Landscape Architect/Engineer will recommend to the Owner
that acceptance of the work of this Section be given.
D. Acceptance in Pan_
1. The work may be accepted in parts when it is deemed to be in the Owner's best interest to
do so, and when permission is given to the Contractor in writing to complete the work in
parts.
2. Acceptance and use of such areas by the Owner shall not waive any other provisions of
this Contract.
1.13 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintain plant material until the completion of guarantee period and Final Acceptance of work, as
described in Part 3 of this Section.
1.14 GUARANTEE
A. Plants shall be guaranteed for a period of one year after the date of Acceptance by the Owner.
1. When the work is accepted in parts, the guarantee period shall extend from each of the
partial acceptances to the terminal date of the last guarantee period. Thus, all guarantee
periods terminate at one time.
B. Plants shall be healthy, free of pests and disease, and in flourishing condition at the end of the
guarantee period. Plants shall be free of dead and dying branches and branch tips, and shall bear
foliage of normal density, size, and color.
C. Replace dead plants and all plants not in a vigorous, thriving condition, as determined by the
Landscape Architect/Engineer during and at the end of the guarantee period, without cost to the
Owner, as soon as weather conditions permit and within the specified planting period.
1. Replacements shall closely match adjacent specimens of the same species. Replacements
shall be subject to all requirements stated in this Specification.
2. Make all necessary repairs due to plant replacements. Such repairs shall be done at no
extra cost to the Owner.
3. The guarantee of all replacement plants shall extend for an additional one year period from
the date of their acceptance after replacement. In the event that a replacement plant is not
acceptable during or at the end of the said extended guarantee period, the Owner may
elect one more replacement or credit for each item.
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS 02950 - 5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
kinds, and sizes of materials included for each shipment shall be furnished to the
Landscape Architect/Engineer.
C. Storage: Unless specific authorization is obtained from the Landscape Architect/Engineer, plants
shall not remain on the site of work longer than three(3)days prior to being planted.
1. Plants that are not planted immediately shall be protected as follows:
a) Earth balls shall be kept moist and their solidity carefully preserved.
b) Plants shall not be allowed to dry out or freeze.
2. Both the duration and method of storage of plant materials shall be subject to the approval
of the Landscape Architect/Engineer.
D. Handling of Plant Materials: Exercise care in handling plant materials to avoid damage or stress.
1.10 REJECTION OF MATERIALS
A. Evidence of inadequate protection following digging, carelessness while in transit, or improper
handling or storage, shall be cause for rejection.
B. Upon arrival at the temporary storage location or the site of the work, plants shall be inspected for
proper shipping procedures. Should the roots be dried out, large branches be broken, balls of earth
broken or loosened, or areas of bark be torn, the Landscape Architect/Engineer will reject the
injured plant.
C. When a plant has been rejected, remove it from the area of the work and replace it with one of the
required size and quality.
1.11 PLANTING SEASON
A. Spring Planting: Spring planting may commence as soon as the ground has thawed at the nursery
and at the site of planting, and weather conditions make it practicable to work both at the nursery
and at the site.
1. Planting shall occur within the following time periods:
Material Snrtng FW1
Deciduous Trees&Shrubs Thaw-May 15 Oct. 1 -Dec. 1
Evergreen Trees&Shrubs Thaw-June 1 Sept. 1 -Nov. 15
B. Regardless of the dates specified above, planting shall only be performed when weather and soil
conditions are suitable for planting the material specified in accordance with locally accepted
practice.
C. Planting season may be extended only with the written permission of the Landscape
Architect/Engineer.
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS 02950- 4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. All costs associated with testing shall be at Contractor's expense.
1.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Identification of plant names shall be as listed in "Hortus Third."
B. Selection of Plant Materials: Submit to the Landscape Architect/Engineer the names and locations
of nurseries proposed as sources of acceptable plant material. Inspect all nursery materials to
determine that the materials meet the requirements of this Section. Proposed materials shall be
flagged at the nurseries by the Contractor prior to viewing by the Landscape Architect/Engineer.
1. Schedule with the Landscape Architect/Engineer a time for viewing plant material at the
nursery. Trips to nurseries shall be efficiently arranged to allow Landscape
Architect/Engineer to maximize his/her viewing time. A minimum of six (6) weeks shall
be allowed for this viewing prior to time that plants are to be dug.
2. Landscape Architect/Engineer may choose to attach his/her seal to each plant, or
representative samples.
3. Where requested by the Landscape Architect/Engineer, photographs of plant material or
representative samples of plants shall be submitted.
4. Viewing and/or sealing of plant materials by the Landscape Architect/Engineer at the
nursery does not preclude the Landscape Architect/Engineer's right to reject material at
the site of planting.
1.08 UNAVAILABILITY OF PLANT MATERIALS
A. Before changes or substitutions can be made due to unavailability of plant material, submit
satisfactory evidence that he/she has advertised for a one (1) month period in a trade journal such as
the "Landscape Materials Information Service," with no response, or has undertaken other methods
of locating plant material acceptable to the Landscape Architect/Engineer.
1.09 DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Digging Plant Material: Plants shall not be dug at the nursery or approved source until the
Contractor is ready to transport them from their original locations to the site of the work or
acceptable storage location.
B. Transportation of Plant Material: Plants transported to the project in open vehicles shall be covered
with tarpaulins or other suitable covers securely fastened to the body of the vehicle to prevent
injury to the plants. Closed vehicles shall be adequately ventilated to prevent overheating of the
plants.
1. Plants shall be kept moist, fresh, and protected at all times. Such protection shall
encompass the entire period during which the plants are in transit, being handled, or are in
temporary storage.
2. Unless otherwise authorized by the Landscape Architect/Engineer, notify the Landscape
Architect/Engineer at least two (2) working days in advance of the anticipated delivery
date of any plant material. A legible copy of the bill of lading, showing the quantities,
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS 02950 - 3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Certificates: Labels from the manufacturer's container certifying that the product- meets the
specified requirements shall be submitted for the following materials: low
Commercial fertilizer
Limestone
C. Test Reports: Test reports from an approved testing agency indicating compliance with the
specifications shall be submitted for topsoil, peat moss, planting soil mixture, and any other
materials designated by the Landscape Architect/Engineer.
1.05 OWNER'S INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Work will be subject to inspection at all times by the Landscape Architect/Engineer. The Owner
reserves the right to engage an independent testing laboratory to analyze and test materials used in
the construction of the work. Where directed by the Landscape Architect/Engineer, the testing
laboratory will make material analyses and will report to the Landscape Architect/Engineer whether
materials conform to the requirements of this specification.
1. Cost of tests and material analyses made by the testing laboratory will be borne by the
Owner when they indicate compliance with the specification, and by the Contractor when
they indicate non-compliance.
2. Testing equipment will be provided by and tests performed by the testing laboratory.
Upon request by the Landscape Architect/Engineer, shall provide such auxiliary personnel
and services needed to accomplish the testing work.
3. Gradation of granular materials shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C 136.
Sieves for determining material gradation shall be as described in ASTM E 11.
1.06 CONTRACTOR'S INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Testing, analyses, and inspection required by the Contractor for his/her own information or
guidance shall be at his/her own expense.
B. The Contractor shall engage an independent testing agency, experienced in the testing of
agricultural soils and acceptable to the Landscape Architect/Engineer, to perform the following
tests and analyses:
Material Test and Analysis RcQuired
Topsoil Mechanical analysis of soil indicating the percent passing by
weight of the following sieve sizes: 1 in., 1/2 in., No. 4, No.
10, No. 100, and No. 200. Determination of pH, organic
content, and nutrient content. Recommendations shall be made
by the testing agency as to the type and quantity of soil
additives required to bring nutrient content and pH to
satisfactory levels for planting.
Peat Moss Determination of moisture absorption capacity, organic matter
content, and pH.
1. Materials shall not be used in construction until test results have been reviewed by the
Landscape Architect/Engineer.
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS 02950 -2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
► PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
DED
A. Provide all materials and equipment, and do all work required to complete the planting, as
indicated on the Drawings and as specified.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited to:
1. Section 02100- Site Preparation: Stripping of topsoil.
2. Section 02200- Earthwork: Establishment of subgrade elevations.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict
with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern.
1. American National Standards Institute(ANSD:
Z60.1 American Standard for Nursery Stock(Sponsor:
American Association of Nurserymen, Inc.)
2. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM):
C 136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
E 11 Wire-Cloth Sieves for Testing Purposes
3. "Hortus Third," A Concise Dictionary of Plants Cultivated in the United States and
Canada, Cornell University, L.H. Bailey Hortorium, MacMillan Publishing Co., New
York, NY.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Product Data: Manufacturer's product data shall be submitted for the following
materials:
Aluminum sulfate
Antidessicant
Fertilizer
Fungicide
Insecticide
Peat moss
Tree wrap
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS 02950 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
F. If lawn or grass is established in the fall and maintenance is required to continue into spring ,,,k
months, lawn and grass shall receive an application of lime and fertilizer in the spring. Lime and
fertilizer shall be spread in a uniform layer over the entire lawn surface, at the following rates.
Material Application Rate
Lime 100 lb./1,000 sq. ft.
Fertilizer 20 lb./1,000 sq. ft.
END OF SECTION
AWWA
SEEDING 02930 - 8
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Following seeding the area shall be lightly raked to mingle seed with top 1/8 t. of soil.
Area shall then be fine graded. Stones and other debris greater than 1 inch in any a which
are visible on surface shall be removed. Surface shall be rolled with a hand rolle i weight
of 60 to 90 lb./ft. of width, and a minimum diameter•tvf 2 &-et.
D. Entire seeded area shall be mulched at a rate of 50 lbs. per 100 s.f. and lightly rolled.
E. All slopes of 3:1 or greater after being loamed, seeded and mulched shall be sec.: with a
continuous layer of jute or biodegradable tobacco netting. Overlap all netting joints a miz..-.um of 4
inches and secure with a double row of staples.
F. Following seeding, entire area shall be watered by use of lawn sprinklers, or other approved
means. Initial watering shall continue until the equivalent of a 2 inches depth of water has been
applied to entire seeded surface, at a rate which will not dislodge the seed. Watering shall be
repeated thereafter as frequently as required to prevent drying of the surface, until the grass attains
an average height of 1/4-inch. Watering methods and apparatus which may cause erosion of the
surface shall not be permitted.
3.06 MAINTENANCE
A. Except as otherwise specified below, maintenance shall include all operations required to produce
an established lawn, including but not limited to:
Fertilizing
° Mowing
Replanting
Watering
Weeding
B. Maintenance of seeded areas shall begin upon completion of seeding and shall continue until
mowing as specified below is completed, or until average height of grass is 1-1/2 inch, whichever
occurs later.
C. After grass has sprouted, seeded areas which fail to show a uniform stand of grass shall be
replanted as often as necessary to establish an acceptable stand of grass.
1. Scattered bare spots shall not exceed 72 square inches each.
D. First mowing shall be done when average height a(grass is 2-1/2 inches, with mower set to cut at a
height of 1-1/2 inch. Subsequent mowing$ shall be made at not over two week intervals, with the
height of cut set at 1-1/2 inch. With prior permission of the Owner, mowings during periods of
slow growth or dormancy may be spaced at greater intervals.
E. Weeds and growth other than varieties of grass gamed in grass seed formula shall be removed.
Removal may be accomplished by use of suitable herbicides or by physical removal, in which case
tap growth and roots shall both be removed,,aad bare spots exceeding specified limits shall be
reseeded.
SEEDING 02930 - 7
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.03 APPLICATION OF FERTILIZER AND CONDITIONERS
A. Fertilizer and conditioners shall be applied at the following rates:
1. Peat moss- 1 inch thick.
2. Limestone- as required by test results of topsoil.
3. Fertilizer- as required by test results of topsoil.
B. Mixing with topsoil:
1. Fertilizer and conditioners shall be spread over the entire lawn areas at the application
rates indicated above.
2. Materials shall be uniformly and thoroughly mixed into the top 4 inches of topsoil by
discing, rototilling, or other approved method.
3.04 FINISH GRADING
A. Final surface of topsoil immediately before seeding shall be within ± 1/2 inch of required ele-
vation, with no ruts, mounds, ridges, or other faults, and no pockets or low spots in which water
can collect. Stones, roots, and other debris greater than 1 inch in any dimension, which are visible
at the surface, shall be removed and the resulting holes filled with topsoil, leaving a uniform planar
surface.
B. Finish grade surface with a drag or rake. Round out all breaks in grade, smooth down all lumps
and ridges, fill in all holes and crevices. Rolling with a light roller is acceptable, if the surface is
scarified afterward.
C. In the event of settlement, the Contractor shall readjust the work to required finished grade.
3.05 SEED APPLICATION
A. Seed shall be broadcast by means of an approved mechanical spreader, to give a uniform
application at the following rates:
Seed Application Rate
lb./1,000 s.f.
Seed Mixture 10.0
B. Seed shall be applied in two equal applications for uniform coverage; direction of travel of spreader
for second pass shall be perpendicular to that of the first pass. Seeding shall not be done when it is
raining or snowing, or when wind velocity exceed 5 mph.
1. At the Contractor's option, and with the permission of the Landscape Architect/Engineer,
seed may be spread by the hydroseeding method, utilizing power equipment commonly
used for that purpose. Seed, lime, fertilizer, and mulch shall be mixed and applied to
achieve application quantities specified herein for the conventional seeding method, with
mulch applied at the rate of 1,200 lb./acre. Other provisions specified above for look
conventional seeding shall apply also to hydroseeding.
SEEDING 02930- 6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION G _ 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.06 ALUMINUM SULFATE
A. Aluminum sulfate shall be unadulterated and shall be delivered in containers with une of the
material and manufacturer, and net weight of contents.
2.07 COMMERCIAL FERMI R
A. Fertilizer shall conform to the following:
1. When applied as a topsoil amendment, fertilizer shall have an analysis that will deliver
appropriate amounts of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium as required to remedy de-
ficiencies revealed by testing the topsoil.
a. _50% of nitrogen shall be derived from natural organic source of ureaiform.
b. Available phosphorus shall be derived from superphosphate, bone meal, or
tankage.
C. Potassium shall be delivered from muriate of potash containing 60%potash.
B. Fertilizer shall be delivered in manufacturer's standard container printed with manufacturer's
name, material weight, and guaranteed analysis.
C. Fertilizers with iv-P-K analysis other than that stated above may be used provided that the
application rate per square foot of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium is equal to that specified.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
T JTION
3.01 PREPARATION OF SUBC- AD
A. Subgrade shall be examined to ensure that rough grading and all other subsurface work in lawn
areas and other areas to be seeded is done prior to start of seeding.
B. Existing subgrade shall be loosened or scarified to a minimum depth of 3 inches prior to spreading
topsoil. Subgrade shall be brought to true and uniform grade, and shall be cleared of stones greater
than 3 inches, sticks, and other extraneous matetial.
3.02 SPREADING OF TOPSOIL
A. Topsoil shall not be spread until it is possible to follow immediately or within 24 hours with
seeding operations- If topsoil is spread pbor to his time, it shall be cultivated to loosen soil prior to
seeding.
B. Topsoil shall not be placed when subpade of topsoil material are frozen, excessively wet, or
excessively dry.
C. Topsoil shall be spread in a unifat'm bW, to a Thickness which will compact to the depth required
to bring final laws and grass surfam to sequined elevation. Unless otherwise indicated, minimum
depth of topsoil shall be 6 inches.
D. Surfaces shall be graded and smoodw4, eliminating all sharp breaks by rounding, scraping off
bumps and ridges, and filling in holes and cuts.
SEEDING 02930 - 5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Topsoil, whether stripped from site or supplied from off-site, shall be a sandy loam or loam soil as AW^k
defined by the USDA Soil Conservation Service, Soil Classification System, and shall have the
following mechanical analysis:
Textural Class % of Total Weight Average %
Sand(0.05-2.0 mm dia. range) 45 to 75 60
Silt(0.002-0.05 mm dia. range) 15 to 35 25
Clay(less than 0.002 mm dia. range) 5 to 25 15
1. 95% of topsoil shall pass a 2.0 mm sieve.
2. Topsoil shall be free of stones 1 inch in longest dimension, earth clods, plant parts, and
debris.
3. Organic matter content shall be 4 to 12% of total dry weight.
C. Topsoil shall have a pH value range of 6.0 to 6.5.
2.03 PEAT MOSS
A. Peat moss shall be a horticultural grade, sphagnum peat moss containing partially decomposed
fibrous or cellular stems and leaves of any of the many species of sphagnum mosses from fresh
water sources conforming to the following requirements:
1. Peat moss shall be a homogenous material free of decomposed colloidal residue lumps,
roots, stones, and other foreign matter; and of such consistency that peat can pass a 1/2-
inch mesh and can be readily incorporated with the topsoil.
2. The pH shall not be less than 3.5 nor greater than 6.0 at 25 degrees C.
3. Organic matter content shall not be less than 90%, by weight, on an oven-dry basis.
4. Ash content shall not be more than 10%, by weight, on an oven-dry basis.
5. Moisture absorption capacity shall not be less than 800%, by weight, on an oven-dry
basis.
2.04 LIMESTONE
A. Ground limestone shall be an agricultural limestone containing a minimum of 85% total carbonates,
by weight. Ground limestone shall be graded within the following limits:
Sieve Size % Passing by Weight
No. 10 100
No. 20 90
No. 100 60
2.05 WATER
A. Water shall be suitable for irrigation and free from ingredients harmful to seeded areas.
SEEDING 02930- 4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.07 ACCEPTANCE
A. Acceptance:
1. The Landscape Architect/Engineer will inspect all work for Substantial Completion upon
written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least ten calendar days
before the anticipated date of inspection.
2. Acceptance of material by the Landscape Architect/Engineer will be for general
conformance to specified requirements, and shall not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for full conformance to the Contract Documents.
3. Upon completion and reinspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgment of
the Landscape Architect/Engineer, the Landscape Architect/Engineer will recommend to
the Owner that the work of this Section be accepted.
B. Seed areas will be accepted when in compliance with all the following conditions:
1. Roots are thoroughly knit to the soil.
2. All areas show a uniform stand of specified grass in healthy condition.
3. At least 60 days have elapsed since the completion of work under this Section.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 SEED
A. Seed shall be of the previous year's crop with 0.5% or less weed seed and 1.75% or less crop seed,
by weight. Seed shall be dry and free of mold. Seed shall meet the following requirements:
SEED MIX
Name of Seed % by Weight in Minimum % Minimum %
Mixture Purity Germination
Poa pratensis 50 90 75
"Baron"
Baron Bluegrass
Festuca rubra 25 95 85
"Pennlawn"
Pennlawn Fescue
Lolium perenne 25 98 95
"Pennfine"
Pennftne Ryegrass
2.02 TOPSOIL
A. Topsoil shall be obtained from a previously established stockpile on the site, to the extent available.
Additional topsoil required shall be obtained from off-site sources.
SEEDING 02930- 3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
personnel and services needed to accomplish the testing work and to repair damage caused
thereby to the permanent work. '
3. Gradation of granular materials shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C 136.
Sieves for determining material gradation shall be as described in ASTM E 11.
B. Testing, analyses, and inspection required by the Contractor for his/her own information or
guidance shall be at his/her own expense.
C. The Contractor shall engage an independent testing agency to perform the following tests and
analyses:
Material Tests and Analysis Required
Topsoil Mechanical analysis of soil and determination of pH and
organic matter content, and nutrient content. Recommendations
shall be made by the testing agency as to the type and quantity
of soil additives required to bring nutrient content and pH to
satisfactory levels for seeding.
Peat Moss Determination of moisture absorption capacity, organic matter
content, and pH.
1. Materials shall not be used in construction until test results have been reviewed by the
Landscape Architect/Engineer.
2. All costs associated with testing shall be at the expense of the Contractor. A"k
D. Deliver seed in original sealed containers, labeled with analysis of seed mixture, percentage of pure
seed, year of production, net weight, date of packaging, location of packaging, and name of seed
grower. Damaged packages will not be accepted.
E. Deliver fertilizer in sealed waterproof bags, printed with manufacturer's name, weight, and
guaranteed analysis.
1.06 PLANTING SEASON
A. Planting season for seeding shall be as follows:
It= Planting Period
S"ing FAU
Seed Mix 4/15 to 6/15 8/15 to 10/1
B. Planting shall only be performed when weather and soil conditions are suitable for planting the
material specified in accordance with locally accepted practice.
C. Planting season may be extended with the written permission of the Landscape Architect/Engineer.
SEEDING 02930 -2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
AOO`* PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Provide all materials, and do all work necessary to complete the seeding, including mulching and
fertilizer and lime, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified.
1.02 RELATED S CTIONS
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other Specification
Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited to:
1. Section 02100- Site Preparation: Stripping topsoil.
2. Section 02200-Earthwork: Establishment of subgrade elevation.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict
with each other or with other specified requirements, the most restrictive shall govern.
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
C 136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
E 11 Wire-Cloth Sieves for Testing Purposes
1.04 SUBMITTALS
Certificates: Labels from the manufacturer's container certifying that the product meets the specified
requirements shall be submitted for the following materials:
Grass seed
Ground limestone
Commercial fertilizer
Seed mix for sod
Peat moss
1.05 INSPECTION AND TESTING,
A. Work will be subject to inspection at all times by the Landscape Architect/Engineer. The owner
reserves the right to engage an independent testing laboratory to analyze and test materials used in
the construction of the work. Where directed by the Landscape Architect/Engineer the testing
laboratory will make material analyses and will report to the Landscape Architect/Engineer whether
materials conform to the requirements of this Specification.
1. Cost of tests and material analyses made by the testing laboratory will be borne by the
Owner when they indicate compliance with the Specification, and by the Contractor when
they indicate non-compliance.
2. Testing equipment will be provided by and tests performed by the testing laboratory. Upon
request by the Landscape Architect/Engineer, the Contractor shall provide such auxiliary
SEEDING 02930 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
00&` D. Connect to building sanitary sewer outlet and municipal sewer system.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTgol.
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Division 1.
B. Request inspection prior to and immediately after placing bedding.
C. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with provisions of Section 02200.
D. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no
cost to Owner.
E. Frequency of Tests: As may be required by Architect or Owner's field representative.
F. Additional Testing: In accordance with applicable codes.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Division 1.
B. Protect pipe and aggregate cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in
progress.
3.07 SCHEDULE
All sanitary sewer pipe and fittings shall be as noted on project plans.
END OF SECTION
SITE SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEM 02732-3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Aofthk
A. Submit documents under provisions of Division 1.
B. Record location of pipe runs, connections, cleanouts, and invert elevations.
C. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable codes for materials and installation of the Work of this section.
1.07 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements and elevations are as indicated on project plans.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Division 1.
B. Coordinate the Work with termination of sanitary sewer connection outside building, connection to
municipal sewer utility service, and trenching.
PART 2— PRODUCTS
2.01 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS Awk
A. Plastic Pipe: ANSUASTM D3034-SDR35, PolyVinyl Chloride material, as indicated on the plans;
inside nominal diameter of 4 inches as indicated, bell and spigot style.
2.02 PIPE ACCESSORIES
A. Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required tee,
bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps and other configurations required.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that trench cut is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as
indicated on project drawings.
3.02 INSTALLATION— PIPE
A. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with ASTM D2321 and manufacturer's
instructions. Seal joints watertight.
B. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on project drawings.
C. Refer to Section 02200 for trenching requirements. Do not displace or damage pipe when
compacting. ,,,
SITE SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEM 02732-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART I - N . A .
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Sanitary sewerage drainage piping, fittings, accessories and bedding.
B. Connection of building sanitary drainage system to municipal sewers.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02222- Earthwork: Utility trench excavation, bedding and backfill.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM D2321 - Recommended Practice for Underground Installation of Flexible
Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe.
B. ASTM D 3034- PVC Sewer Pipe 35, 4" - 15" Dia.
C. ASTM D 3212-Joints for PVC Gravity Sewer Pipe.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating pipe and pipe accessories.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures required to install Products
specified.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
SITE SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEM 02732-1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
'#- 3.04 INSTALLATION -CATCH BASINS
A. In conformance with Massachusetts Highway Department Standard Specifications.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Division 1 and Section 02200.
B. Request inspection prior to and immediately after placing aggregate cover over pipe.
C. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with Section 02200 and the Massachusetts
Highway Department Specifications.
D. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Division 1.
B. Protect pipe and aggregate cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in
progress.
3.08 SCHEDULE
A. Storm Sewer Main: All storm sewer piping shall be as noted on the plans.
END OF SECTION
SITE STORM SEWERAGE SYSTEMS 02722-5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into work.
D. Verify excavation for structures is correct.
3.02 nr ACING MANHOLE SECTIONS
A. Form and place manhole cylinder plumb and level, to correct dimensions and elevations. Mortar all
joints between sections.
B. Grout base of shaft sections to achieve slope to exit piping. Trowel smooth. Contour as required
and as indicated on project plans.
C. Set cover frames and covers level in full mortar bed without tipping, to correct elevations.
D. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.
3.04 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. General: Piping shall be installed as indicated on the drawings. Where exact locating dimensions of
piping are not given in the Drawings, the Landscape Architect/Engineer's approval shall be
obtained for proposed locations before installation.
1. Bottom of trench excavations shall be kept dry and free of water during pipe installation.
Adequate measures shall be taken to prevent floatation of pipe in the trench.
2. Pipe shall be laid with the groove or bell end upstream. Bell shall rest over a shallow
excavation in pipe bedding to prevent pipe weight from bearing on bell.
3. Each pipe length shall be installed to form a close joint with the next adjoining length and
bring inverts to the required grade.
4. No pipe or fitting shall be permanently supported on saddles, blocking, or stones.
5. Piping shall be properly graded, free from pockets.
6. Pipe shall be thoroughly clean before installation, and shall be maintained free from
foreign matter during installation.
7. Where necessary, tight-fitting temporary wood bulkheads shall be employed to close ends
of pipeline at end of each day's work.
8. Pipe shall not be backfilled until joints have been fully inspected, and approved.
9. Entire length of pipe shall be thoroughly flushed clean following completion of backfill.
10. Pipe joints shall be made with rubber gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's
specifications.
B. Perform all trenching and backfilling necessary for this portion of the work, strictly conforming to
the requirements for trenching and backfilling described in Section 02200 of these specifications.
SITE STORM SEWERAGE SYSTEMS 02722-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION U ), 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. PVC gravity sewer fitting shall meet all requirements and intent of ASTM 1 3084 for
materials and ASTM D 342 for joints.
2.02 CATCH BASINS
A. Grate and Frame: Cast iron construction, 24" square, four flange, model R3405, as manufactured
by Neenah Foundry Co., or approved equal, as spectf Vd on-tne plans.
B. Shaft Construction and Cone Top Section: Reinforced precast sump tub, precast or cast-in-place
concrete riser sections, nominal inside shaft diameter of 48 inches, manufactured by Chase Precast,
North Brookfield, Mass., or approved equal.
2.03 MA_ NHOL ES
A. Manhole Sections: Reinforced precast concrete in accordance with Materials Section M4.02.14 of
the State Specifications.
B. Mortar and Grout: As specified in Section 04200.
C. Lid and Frame: Cast iron construction, 26" diameter, Type B, as manufactured by LaBaron
Foundry Co., Brockton, Mass., or approved equal; cover shall have 3" high lettering to read
"DRAIN" cast in the top surface.
D. Manhole Steps: Formed integral with manhole sections.
AOW*' E. Configuration
1. Shaft Construction: Concentric with eccentric cone top section; lipped male/female joints;
"V"-openings to receive pipe.
2. Shape: Cylindrical.
3. Clear Inside Dimensions: 48 inch diameter.
4. Design Depth: As indicated.
5. Clear Lid Opening: 26 inches.
6. Pipe Entry: Provide openings as bdicaNd.
7. Steps: 12 inches wide, 15 inches=cemr vertically, set into manhole wall.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that trench cut is ready to tt=ive vurk and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as
indicated on layout drawings.
B. Verify items provided by other sees of work are properly sized and located.
SITE STORM SEWERAGE SYSTEiviS 02722-3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Installers: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced lowk
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating pipe and pipe accessories, drain manholes, catch basin,
frames, grates, covers and appurtenant equipment.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures required to install Products
specified.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
B. Accurately record actual locations of pipe runs, connections, manholes, catch basins, and invert
elevations.
C. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to all applicable codes for materials and installation of the Work of this section.
1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements and elevations are as indicated.
1.09 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Division 1.
B. Coordinate the Work with termination of storm sewer and water line connections outside building,
connection to municipal sewer utility service and trenching.
PART 2— PRODUCTS
2.01 SEWER PIPE 4ATERIAL S
A. Reinforced Concrete Pipe: Shall conform to Materials Section M5.02.1 of the Massachusetts
Highway Department Standard Specifications.
B. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe
1. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe for storm drain shall be 4" & 10" PVC SDR 35 in
conformance with ASTM D 3034. PVC resin shall conform to ASTM D 1784 and rubber .
gaskets shall conform to ASTM 3212 and F 477.
SITE STORM SEWERAGE SYSTEMS 02722-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION De , 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
AM. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDFS
A. Site storm sewerage drainage piping, fittings anti' es ri—cs.
B. Connection of building storm water drainage system to existing storm system.
C. Drain manholes, catch basins and gutter inlets, frames, covers, anchorage&accessorie-
1.02 RELATED TIONS
A. Sections 02200- Earthwork: Utility trench excavation, beddings and backfill.
B. Section 02511 -Bituminous Concrete Paving.
C. Section 02555 -Water Service Construction.
D. Section 02732- Site Sanitary Sewerage System.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict
with each other or with other specified requirements, the most restrictive shall govern.
1. ANSI/ASTM C76-Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe.
2. ANSI/ASTM C443 -Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber
Gaskets.
3. Commonwealth of Massachusetts, Highway Department, Standard Specifications for
Highways and Bridges, 1988.
4. ASTM D 3034 - PVC Sewer Pipe 35, 4" - 15" Dia.
5. ASTM D 3212-Joints for PVC Gravity Sewer Pipe.
6. ASTM A48 -Gray Iron Castings.
7. ASTM C478 - Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections.
8. ASTM C923 - Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures
and Pipes.
9. International 'Masonry Industry All-Weadter Council (IMIAQ: Recommended Practices
and Guide Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
10. Standard of the City of Northampton Department of Public Works.
1.04 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in Umufac uiring products specified in this section.
SITE STORM SEWERAGE SYSTEMS 02722-1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
4.01 WATER PIPE DEPTH
A. Water service shall have a minimum cover of five and one-half(5-1/2) feet.
END OF SECTION
WATER SERVICE CONSTRUCTION 02555 - 3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Protectio n: Use all means necessary to protect water system materials before, during, and after
installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.
B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to
the approval of the Landscape Architect/Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE
Ductile iron piping shall conform to AWWA Specification C151, double cement lined on the inside and tar
coated on the outside. Pipe shall be Thickness Class 52 unless otherwise specified.
2.02 FITTINGS
1. Ductile iron fittings shall meet AWWA Specification C110 for ductile iron fittings, rated for 350
psi, double cement lined inside and tar coated outside.
2. Joints shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C111, either "push on" type, mechanical joint or restrained
mechanical joint.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection: Verify that water utilities may be installed in strict accordance with all pertinent codes
and regulations, the original design, the referenced standards, and the manufacturer's recommenda-
tions.
B. Discrepancies:
1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Landscape Architect/ Engineer at 24
hours prior to the scheduled time of resuming construction. During this time, the
Contractor shall be productive.
2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have
been fully resolved.
3.02 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Make all necessary measurements in the field to ensure precise fit of items in accordance with the
original design.
3.03 PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTING AND DISINFECTION
A. Pressure and leakage testing and disinfection of water lines shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the Northampton Water Department and other applicable codes.
PART 4- SPECIAL CONDITIONS
WATER SERVICE CONSTRUCTION 02555 - 2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete water service
construction as stipulated herein and as shown on the Contract Drawings.
1.02 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE
1. Section 02100- Site Preparation
2. Section 02200-Earthwork; Utility trench excavation, bedding and backfill.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/AWWA C104- Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water.
B. ANSI/AWWA C111 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Grey-Iron Pressure Pipe and
Fittings.
C. ANSI/AWWA C151 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds,
for Water or Other Liquids.
D. ANSI/AWWA C600- Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Appurtenances.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Work performed under this Section shall conform to the Drawings and
Specifications and shall comply with all standards, rules and regulations, Laws and Ordinances of
the City of Northampton and the Massachusetts Building Code, and all other authorities having
jurisdiction, as amended. Anything necessary to make the work comply with the above
requirements shall be provided without additional cost to the Owner.
B. Permits: The Contractor shall pay for all permits and licenses as required.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Materials List: After the award of Contract and before any water system materials are delivered to
the job site, submit to the Landscape Architect/ Engineer, a complete list of all materials proposed
to be furnished and installed.
1. Show manufacturer's name and catalog number for each item, furnish complete catalog
cuts and technical data, and furnish the manufacturers' recommendations as to method of
installation.
2. Upon approval of the Landscape Architect/ Engineer, the manufacturers' recommenda-
tions shall become the basis for acceptance or rejection of actual methods of installation
used in the work.
3. Do not permit any water system component to be brought onto the job site until it has been
approved by the Landscape Architect/Engineer.
1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING
WATER SERVICE CONSTRUCTION 02555 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 PRECAST CONCRETE CURB AND CURB INLET
A. Shall conform to construction section 501 and materials section m4 of the State Specifications.
2.03 QRANITE CURB
A. Shall conform to construction 501 and materials section M4 of the State Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of Division 1.
B. Verify that substrate is level or to correct gradient, smooth, capable of supporting curb and
imposed loads, and ready to receive work of this Section.
C. Verify gradients and elevations of substrate are correct.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Place curb units as shown on project plans.
B. The joints between curbstones (both front and back) shall be carefully filled with cement mortar
and neatly pointed on the top and front exposed portions. After pointing, the curbstones shall be
satisfactorily cleaned of all excess mortar.
END OF SECTION
Afts
PRECAST CONCRETE & GRANITE CURBS 02518 - 2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUT)FS
A. Precast concrete and granite curbs and precast concrete curb inlets.
1.02 RELATED TION
A. Section 02200-Earthwork
B. Section 02211 -Bituminous Concrete Paving
C. Section 02513 -Portlands Cement Concrete Paving
D. Section 04100 -Mortar and Masonry Grout
1.03 REFERENCES
Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards: (Where these standards conflict with each
other or with other specified requirements, the most restrictive shall govern.)
Massachusetts Highway Department, Standard Specifications of Highways and Bridges, 1988.
1.04 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section.
B. Installers: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating curbs products to be installed.
1.06 REGULATORY REQITIREMENTS
A. Conform to all applicable codes for materials and installation of the Work of this section.
1.07 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements and elevations are as indicated.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Division 1.
B. Coordinate the Work with installation of bituminous and Portland Cement Concrete pavements and
appurtenant utility structure.
PRECAST CONCRETE & GRAtiITE CURBS 02518 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.06 CONTROL JOINTS
A. Unless otherwise indicated, control joints to be tooled shall be scored into the concrete slab as
indicated on the Drawings Joint shall be made after concrete is finished and when the surface is
stiff enough to support the weight of workmen without damage to the slab, but before slab has
achieved its final set.
B. Scoring shall cut into slab surface at least 1" but in no case not less than 25% of slab depth.
3.07 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING
A. Materials for concrete shall be heated when concrete is mixed, placed, or cured when the mean
daily temperature is below 40°F or is excepted to fall to below 40°F within 72 hours, and the
concrete after placing shall be protected by covering, heat, or both.
B. Details of handling and protecting of concrete during freezing weather shall be subject to the
approval and direction of the Landscape Architect/Engineer. Procedures shall be in accordance
with provisions of ACI 306R.
3.08 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING
A. Concrete just placed shall be protected from the direct rays of the sun and the forms and
reinforcement just prior to placing shall be sprinkled with cold water. Every effort shall be made
to minimize delays which will result in excessive mixing of the concrete after arrival on the job.
B. During periods of excessively hot weather (95°F, or above), ingredients in the concrete shall be
cooled insofar as possible and cold mixing water shall be used to maintain the temperature of the
concrete at permissible levels all in accordance with the provisions of ACI 305. Any concrete
with a temperature above 95°F, when ready for placement will not be acceptable, and will be
rejected.
C. Temperature records shall be maintained throughout the period of hot weather giving air
temperature, general weather conditions (calm, windy, clear, cloudy, etc.) and relative humidity.
Records shall include checks on temperature of concrete as delivered and after placing in forms.
Data should be correlated with the progress of the work so that conditions surrounding the
construction of any part of the structure can be ascertained.
3.09 SURFACE SEALER
A. Apply to dry clear concrete surface. Apply two coats minimum at recommended coverage rates in
strict compliance with manufacturer's published application and safety instructions.
3.10 PROTECTION OF CONCRETE SURFACES
A. Concrete surfaces shall be protected from traffic or damage until surfaces have hardened
sufficiently. If necessary 1/2-inch thick plywood sheets shall be used to protect the exposed
surface.
END OF SECTION
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02513 - 7
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Arrises at edges and both sides of expansion joints shall be rounded to a 1/4-inch radius. Control look
joints to be tooled shall be scored into slab surface with scoring tool. Adjacent edges of control
joint shall at same time be finished to a 1/4-inch radius.
C. NonSlip Broom Finish: Apply nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete sidewalks, steps, and
ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. Use medium broom finish on steps and sidewalks and heavy
broom finish on ramps.
Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber bristle
broom perpendicular to main traffic route.
D. Where finishing is performed before end of curing period, concrete shall not be permitted to dry
out, and shall be kept continuously moist from time of placing until end of 6udng period, or until
curing membrane is applied.
3.04 CURING
A. It is essential that concrete be kept continuously damp from time of placement until end of specified
curing period. It is equally essential that water not be added to surface during floating and
troweling operations, and not earlier than 24 hours after concrete placement. Between finishing
operations surface shall be protected from rapid drying by a covering of waterproofing paper.
Surface shall be damp when the covering is placed over it, and shall be kept damp by means of a
fog spray of water, applied as often as necessary to prevent drying, but not sooner than 24 hours
after placing concrete. None of the water so applied shall be troweled or floated into surface.
B. Concrete surfaces shall be cured by completely covering with curing paper or application of a
curing compound.
1. Concrete cured using waterproof paper shall be completely covered with paper with seams
lapped and sealed with tape. Concrete surface shall not be allowed to become moistened
between 24 and 36 hours after placing concrete. During curing period surface shall be
checked frequently, and sprayed with water as often as necessary to prevent drying, but
not earlier than 24 hours after placing concrete.
2. If concrete is cured with a curing compound, compound shall be applied at a rate of 200
square feet per gallon, in two applications perpendicular to each other.
3. Curing period shall be seven days minimum.
3.05 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Expansion joints shall be 1/2-inch wide or as otherwise indicated and shall be as located on the
Drawings. Expansion joint shall be formed in the concrete to required width with preformed joint
filler in place. Joint filler shall extend the full depth of the slab. Joint filler shall extend the full
length of the expansion joint.
For concrete pavement, depth of joint filler shall be as required to form a 1-1/4 inch deep sealant
and backer rod recess below finished concrete surface.
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02513 - 6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, reinforcing shall extend within 2 inches of formwork
and expansion joints. Reinforcing shall continue through control joints. Adjacent sheets of fabric
reinforcing shall lap 6 inches.
D. After forms have been coated with form release agent, but before concrete is placed, reinforcing
steel anchors shall be securely wired in the exact position called for, and shall be maintained in that
position until concrete is placed and compacted. Chair bars and supports shall be provided in a
number and arrangement satisfactory to the Landscape Architect/Engineer.
3.02 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVIN
A. Paving mix, equipment, methods of mixing and placing, and precautions to be observed as to
weather, condition of base etc., shall meet the requirements of ACI 316R. Pavement shall be
constructed in accordance with the Drawings.
B. The Landscape Architect/Engineer shall be notified of concrete placement sufficiently in advance of
start of operation to allow his representative to complete preliminary inspection of the work,
including subgrade, forms, and reinforcing steel, if used.
C. Normal concrete placement procedures shall be followed. Concrete shall arrive at the job site so
that no additional water will be required to produce the desired slump. When conditions develop
that required addition of water to produce the desired slump, permission of the Landscape
Architect/Engineer must be obtained. The concrete shall be transported from the mixer to its place
of deposit by a method that will prevent segregation or loss of material.
D. Work shall not be performed during rainy weather or when temperature is less than 40°F(4.4 0C).
E. Adjacent work, etc., shall be protected from stain and damage during entire operation. Damaged
and stained areas shall be replaced or repaired to equal their original conditions.
F. Existing concrete, earth, and other water-permeable material against which new concrete is to be
placed shall thoroughly damp when concrete is placed. There shall be no free water on surface.
G. Concrete which has set or partially set before placing shall not be employed. Retempering of
concrete will not be permitted.
H. Concrete shall be thoroughly spaded and tamped to secure a solid and homogeneous mass,
thoroughly worked around reinforcement and into comers of forms.
I. When joining fresh concrete to concrete which has attained full set, latter shall be cleaned of
foreign matter, and mortar scum and laitance shall be removed by chipping and washing. Clean,
roughened base surface shall be saturated with water, but shall have no free water on surface. A
coat of 1:1 cement-sand grout, approximately 1/8-inch thick, shall be well scrubbed into thoroughly
dampened concrete base. New concrete shall be placed immediately, before grout has dried or set.
3.03 FINISHING
A. Concrete flatwork surfaces shall be screeded off and finished true to line and grade, and free of
hollows and bumps. Surface shall be dense, smooth, and at exact level and slope required.
Finished concrete surface for concrete paving shall be wood-floated and steel troweled to a smooth
surface. Surface shall not deviate more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE P.�VING 02513 - 5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Expansion joint filler shall be preformed, nonbituminous type joint filler conforming to ASTM D `
1752, Type II, similar to Sealtight Cork Expansion Joint Filler, manufactured by W.R. Meadows,
Inc., Elgin, IL 60120, or approved equal.
1. Premolded filler shall be one piece for the full depth and width of the joint leaving a
sealant recess as indicated.
2. Use of multiple pieces of lesser dimensions to make up required depth and width of joint
will not be permitted.
3. Except as otherwise noted on the Drawings,joint filler shall be 1/2-inch thick.
C. Expansion joint shall receive joint backer rod and shall be sealed with joint sealant.
2.05 CONTROL JOINTS
A. Control joints indicated to be tooled shall be made by scoring concrete slab after finishing of slab,
with scoring tool which will cut into slab at least 1 inch, but in no case less than 25% of slab depth.
B. Spacing shall be as indicated on the project plans. In no case shall joints be spaced greater then 10'
O.C.
2.06 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A. Transverse construction joints shall be placed whenever placing of concrete is suspended for more
than 30 minutes.
1. Butt joint with dowels or thickened edge joint shall be used if construction joints occurs at
location of control joint.
2. Keyed joints with tiebars shall be used if the joint occurs at any other location.
2.07 BOND BREAKER
A. Bond breaker shall be asphalt felt conforming to ASTM D 226, Type 1 or 6-mil polyethylene
sheeting.
2.08 SURFACE SEALANT
A. Surface sealant shall be Paver Seal - SB, a non-yellowing, non-tacky acrylic co-polymer sealant
manufactured by Addiment, Inc., Atlanta, GA 30362, or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 STEEL.REINFORCEMENT
A. Before being placed in position, reinforcing for reinforced concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned of
loose mill and rust scale, dirt, ice, and other foreign material which may reduce. the bond between
the concrete and reinforcing. Where there is delay in placing concrete after reinforcement is in
place, bars shall be reinspected and cleaned when necessary.
-am*,
B. Any bar showing cracks after bending shall be discarded.
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02513 - 4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
00"k A. Steel reinforcing bars shall conform to ASTM A 615.
1. Bars employed as reinforcement shall be deformed type.
2. Bars employed as dowels shall be hot-rolled plain rounds.
3. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, reinforcing bars shall be Grade 60.
B. Welded wire fabric reinforcement shall conform to the applicable requirements of ASTM A 185.
Fabric reinforcement shall be furnished in flat sheets. Fabric reinforcement in rolls will not be
permitted.
2.02 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
A. Portland cement concrete for pavements and slabs shall be air-entrained type with a maximum
water-cement ratio of 5.0 conforming to ACI 316R. Minimum compressive strength at 28 days
shall be 4000 psi.
1. Concrete shall be air-entrained type, conforming to ASTM C 94. Air content by volume
shall be 6% ± 1 %, and shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C 231.
2. Concrete slump shall be no less than 2 inches nor greater than 4 inches, determined in
accordance with ASTM C 143.
3. Cement shall be Portland cement, conforming to ASTM C 150, Type I or II. Only one
color of cement, all of the same manufacturer, shall be used for the work. Type III
cement shall be used only with the prior approval of the Landscape Architect/Engineer.
4. Fine and coarse aggregates shall conform to ASTM C 33.
5. Concrete shall contain a water reducing agent to minimize cement and water content of the
concrete mix at the specified slump. Water reducing agent shall conform to ASTM C
494.
6. No calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride shall be added to the
concrete. No admixtures other than those specified shall be used in the concrete without
the specific written permission of the Landscape Architect/Engineer in each case.
7. Concrete shall have minimum 28 day flexural strength of 600 psi.
2.03 CURING MATERIALS
A. Curing shall be by moist curing or by use of curing compound.
B. Curing paper shall be nonstaining, fiber reinforced laminated kraft bituminous product conforming
to ASTM C 171. Four mil polyethylene sheeting may be substituted for curing paper.
C. Curing compound shall be a resin-base, white pigmented compound conforming to ASTM C 309,
Type 2.
2.04 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Joints shall be as indicated on the project plans. In no case shall joints be spaced greater then 30'
O.C.
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02513 - 3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
C 309 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete
C 494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
D 226 Asphalt-Saturated Organic Roofing Felt for Use in Membrane Waterproof-
ing and Built-Up Roofing
D 1752 Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete
Paving and Structural Construction
3. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department(MHD):
Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges, 1988
3. Geotechnical Engineering Report, Proposed New Fire Station, Northampton,
Massachusetts, Prepared for the City of Northampton, June 17, 1996, McPhail
Associates, Geotechnical Engineers, Cambridge, Massachusetts.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Unless otherwise specified, work and materials for construction of the Portland cement concrete
paving shall conform to ACI 316R.
B. Paving work shall be done only after excavation and construction work which might injure them
have been completed. Damage caused during construction shall be repaired before acceptance.
C. Existing paving areas shall, if damaged or removed during course of this project, be repaired or
replaced under this section of the specification. Workmanship and materials for such repair and
replacement, except as otherwise noted, shall match as closely as possible those employed in
existing work.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Description of Methods and Sequence of Placement. For each type of specially-finished concrete
provide description of methods and sequence of placement.
B. Submit manufacturer's product data for the following:
1. Form release agent.
2. Preformed joint filler.
C. Submit samples of the following:
1. Preformed joint filler.
2. Color chart for selection of sealant color.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 STEEL REINFORCEMENT -*Wk
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02513 - 2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all equipment and materials and do all work necessary to construct the portland cement
concrete paving work, complete, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited to:
Section 02200- Eal-thwork: Establishment of subgrade elevations, placement of pavement subbase
and base courses.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict
with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern.
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings
303 Guide to Cast-In-Place Architectural Concrete Practice
305R Hot Weather Concreting
306R Cold Weather Concreting
316R Recommendations for Construction of Concrete Pavements and Concrete
Bases.
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A 185 Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement
A 615 Deformed and Plain Billet - Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
C 33 Concrete Aggregates
C 94 Ready-Mixed Concrete
C 143 Slump of Portland Cement Concrete
C 150 Portland Cement
C 171 Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
C 231 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by Pressure Method
C 260 Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02513 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
END OF SECTION
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING 02511 -4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
been completed will not be permitted. Course shall be subjected to diagonal rolling, crossing lines
of the first rolling while mixture is hot and in compactible condition. Displacement of mixture or
other fault shall be corrected at once by use of rakes and application of fresh mixture or removal of
mixture, as required. Rolling of each course shall be continued until roller marks are eliminated.
Roller shall pass over unprotected edge of course only when paving is to be discontinued for
sufficient time to permit mixture to become cold.
G. In places not accessible to roller, mixture shall be compacted with hand tampers. Hand tampers
shall weigh at least 50 lb. and shall have a tamping face less than or equal to 100 sq. in.
Mechanical tampers capable of equal compaction will be acceptable in areas in which they can be
employed effectively.
H. Portions of pavement courses which become mixed with foreign material or are in any way
defective shall be removed, replaced, replaced with fresh mixture, and compacted to density of
surrounding areas. Bituminous material spilled outside lines of finished pavement shall be
immediately and completely removed. Such material shall not be employed in the work.
I. Joints shall present same texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of the course.
Continuous bond shall be obtained between portions of existing and new pavements and between
successive placements of new pavement. New material at joints shall be thick enough to allow for
compaction when rolling. Compaction of pavement, base, and subgrade at joints shall be such that
there is no yielding of new pavement relative to existing pavement when subjected to traffic.
J. Contact surfaces of previously constructed pavement (if greater than or equal to seven days since
binder placed), existing pavement to be overlay-paved, contact surfaces of manholes, catch basins
or other appurtenant structures in pavement shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted with a thin
uniform coating of bitumen immediately before fresh mixture is placed. Tack coat shall be applied
at rate which will leave bituminous residue of 1/20 gal per sq. yd. after evaporation of vehicle.
Base surface shall be dry and clean when tack coat is applied. Bituminous paving material shall not
be placed until vehicle has completely evaporated from tack coat. Adjoining new paving shall be
placed before tack coat has dried or dusted over.
K. Earth or other approved material shall be placed along pavement edges in such quantity as will
compact to thickness of course being constructed, allowing at least 1 ft. of shoulder width to be
rolled and compacted simultaneously with rolling and compacting surface. Pavement edge shall be
trimmed neatly to line before placing earth or other approved material along edge.
L. After final rolling, traffic shall not be permitted on pavement until it has cooled and hardened, and
in no case less than six hours.
M. Variations in smoothness of finished surface shall be less than or equal to the following tolerances
when tested with a 10 ft. straightedge, applied both parallel to and at right angles to centerline of
paved area.
1. For roadway and parking pavement surface course- 1/4 in. in 10 ft.
2. At joint with existing pavement, and at other locations where an essentially flush transition
is required, pavement elevation tolerance shall not exceed 0.01 ft.
3. At other areas pavement elevation tolerance shall not exceed 0.05 ft.
4. Irregularities exceeding these amounts or which retain water on surface shall be corrected
by removing defective work and replacing with new material conforming to this Section.
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING 02511 -3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE
A. Bituminous concrete shall be a standard plant-mixed, hot-laid paving material for road work,
consisting of clean, crushed rock aggregate, mineral filler, and asphalt conforming to MHD
Specifications Section M3.11.03.
B. Complete job mix formula, listing quantities and pertinent ingredient properties, shall be submitted
to and approved by Landscape Architect/Engineer at least two weeks before work is scheduled to
begin.
2.02 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
A. Bituminous material for tack coat shall be one of the following:
1. Cut-back asphalt(rapid-curing type) conforming to AASHTO M 81, Grade RC-70 or RC-
250.
2. Emulsified asphalt rapid-setting type conforming to AASHTO M 140, Grade RS-1.
B. Bitumen shall be a rapid-setting type emulsified asphalt conforming to AASHTO M 140, Grade
RS-1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING
A. Bituminous paving mixture, equipment, methods of mixing and placing, and precautions to be
observed as to weather, condition of base, etc., shall conform to MHD Specifications Section 460
Class I Bituminous Concrete Pavement, and Section 701 Sidewalks, Wheelchair Ramps, and
Driveways.
B. Bituminous binder and wearing surface courses shall each be applied individually, in single lifts of
full thickness indicated on the Drawings.
C. Work shall not be performed during rainy weather or when temperature is less than 40°F.
D. Adjacent concrete work, etc., shall be protected from stain and damage during entire operation.
Damaged and stained areas shall be replaced or repaired to equal their original condition.
E. Deliveries shall be timed to permit spreading and rolling all material during daylight hours, unless
artificial light, satisfactory to Owner, is provided. Loads which have been wet by rain or otherwise
will not be accepted. Hauling over freshly laid or rolled material will not be permitted.
F. Placing and rolling of mixture shall be as nearly continuous as possible. Rolling shall begin as soon
after placing as mixture will bear the operation without undue displacement. Delays in rolling
freshly spread mixture will not be permitted. Rolling shall proceed longitudinally, starting at edge
of newly placed material and proceeding toward previously rolled areas. Rolling overlap on
successive strips shall be greater than or equal to 1/2 width of roller rear wheel. Alternate trips of
roller shall be of slightly different lengths. Corrections required in surface shall be made by
removing or adding materials before rolling is completed. Skin patching of areas where rolling has
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING 02511 -2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART I - N . A
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all equipment and materials, and do all work necessary to construct the bituminous
concrete paving, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Examine Contras:Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other Specification
Sections that rely directly to work of this Section include, but are not limited to:
1. Seccon 02200 - Earthwork: Establishment of subgrade elevation, placement of pavement
subbase and base courses.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict
with other specifr--d requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govem.
1. America Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
M 81 Cut-Back Asphalt(Rapid Curing Type)
M 140 Emulsified Asphalt
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
D 1557 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using
1 0-lb. (4.54-kg)Rammer and 18-in. (475-mm) Drop
3. Co=onwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department(MHD):
Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges, 1988
4. Geotechl=iical Engineering Report, Proposed New Fire Station, Northampton,
Massacbmetts, Prepared for the City of Northampton, June 17, 1996, McPhail
Associames, Geotechnical Engineers, Cambridge, Massachusetts.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Unless otherwise specifier, work and materials for construction of the bituminous concrete paving shall
conform to the applicable portions of the following:
A. MHD Specifications Section 460 for bituminous pavement for roadways and parking areas, Section
701 for bitumincFic sidewalks, and Section 405 for aggregate base course.
B. Paving work shaIl be done only after excavation and construction work which might injure them
has been comple=.w d. Damage caused during construction shall be repaired before acceptance.
C. Repair and replaze existing paving areas damaged and removed during this Project. Workmanship
and materials for such repair and replacement shall match those employed in existing work, except
as otherwise nomd.
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING 02511 - 1
- NORTBA1 P't M FIRE STATICN December 16, 1996
3ZTW;W-N UAC5 I 'r6 J� M/N..1Z,` KIALL.._livtlhlNG LlN
ALI, 67rH9:R ARr-AS A t N g"
'for br F/RSY i r1L SLAB i �Mcw AIM COW,- ZV.
i 'CIO
< d
-
V1
tt
X.
oc
Lj
N•D � N -a+/Z"
NOTE: REFER TO ARamECMTRAL DRAWINGS FOR VAPOR BARRIER,SC UMM STME aJSHICN
AND SLAB INSULATION DETAILS
PROJECT DRAWING TITLE REVISION PATE DWG. NO.
/Ya¢ AMPIaN FIRE /2 IA0.9
NoAr#AW#07'o1V, Avl A IC1-41, SCALE �If
A/ ! �l
ITSIANG ENGINEERING INC. 950 WATERTOWN ST. W. NEWTON, MASSACHUSETTS 0216voft-
EARrfrWMK EM OF SE MON
.1}2200-18
N0RTHVWTCN FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
i
$C(W -4 --OtJP5-j("'t4 8 MIN I-L
AL.y Olr[Vit ` RZA&—MIN I," .
V17
S.
i
- sT'
1\_. VIRC:IN Solt —� (��((– l �,� t
14"4 it 41211
��WlVZ-,CRAb rILL. AT
NOTE: REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR VAPOR BARRIER, SCREENED STONE AND
SLAB INSULATION DETAILS
PROJECT- DRAWING TITLE - REVISION DATE DWG. NO.
1Yoe7t1A.yR1-25N F/.YE 3 jA77oN �yvo�eK a.?.9eo
NO.?TN�M?7aN� M'R SCALE SIB
TSIANG ENGINEERING INC, GSU WATERTOWN ST. W. NEWTON, MASSACHUSETTS 0216!
EARTHWORK 02200-17
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Perform field in-place density tests according to ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method), ASTM D
2167 (rubber balloon method), or ASTM D 2937 (drive cylinder method), as applicable. Aw%
a. Field in-place density tests may also be performed by the nuclear method according to
ASTM D 2922, provided that calibration curves are periodically checked and adjusted to
correlate to tests performed using ASTM D 1556. With each density calibration check,
check the calibration curves furnished with the moisture gages according to ASTM D
3017.
b. When field in-place density tests are performed using nuclear methods, make calibration
checks of both density and moisture gages at beginning of work, on each different type of
material encountered, and at intervals as directed by the Architect.
2. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, perform at least one test of each soil stratum to verify
design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may
be based on a visual comparison of each subgrade with related tested strata when acceptable to
the Architect.
3. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer,
perform at least one field in-place density test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or
building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests.
4. Foundation Wall Backfill: In each compacted backfill layer, perform at least one field in-place
density test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests along a wall
face.
5. Trench Backfill: In each compacted initial and final backfill layer, perform at least one field in-
place density test for each 150 feet or less of trench, but no fewer than two tests.
B. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills are below specified density, scarify and
moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to the depth required, recompact and retest until required
density is obtained.
3.22 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of
trash and debris.
B. Repair and re-establish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces
become eroded, rutted, settled, or lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or
weather conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace material to depth directed by the Architect; reshape and recompact
at optimum moisture content to the required density.
C. Settling: Where settling occurs during the Project correction period, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional approved material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and
eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.
3.23 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and
debris, and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property. Aak
EARTHWORK 02200- 16
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
Ao"" 3.18 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply
with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
1. Provide a smooth transition between existing adjacent grades and new grades.
2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to conform to required surface tolerances.
B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish
subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1.2 inches.
2. Walks: Plus or minus 1.2 inches.
3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/4 inch.
C. Grading Inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10 foot
straightedge.
3.19 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
A. Under pavements and walks, place subbase course material on prepared subgrades. Place base course
material over subbases to pavements.
1. Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross
sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent of ASTM D 4254 relative density.
00W 2. Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.
3. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course is 8 inches or less, place materials in a
single layer.
4. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 8 inches, place materials in equal
layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when compacted.
B. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent lateral
movement. Construct shoulders at least 12 inches wide of acceptable soil materials and compact
simultaneously with each subbase and base layer.
3.20 DRAINAGE FILL
A. Under slabs-on-grade, place drainage fill course on prepared subgrade.
1. Compact drainage fill to required cross sections and thickness.
2. When compacted thickness of drainage fill is 6 inches or less, place materials in a single layer.
3. When compacted thickness of drainage fill exceeds 6 inches thick place materials in equal layers,
with no layer more than 6 inches thick nor less than 3 inches thick when compacted.
3.21 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency Services: Allow testing agency to inspect and test each subgrade and each fill or
backfill layer. Do not proceed until test results for previously completed work verify compliance with
requirements.
EARTHWORK 02200- 15
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
Area of structure not 85 12 90
otherwise noted
Building 95 8 95
Concrete Pad 95 8 95
Footing, foundation, 95 8 95
area drain, or similar
structure, and within
2 ft. horizontally
Pavement, including 95 8 95
3 ft, beyond edge
Pipe cover --- 6 95
E. Compaction requirements shall apply to material directly below the indicated supported item, and to all
material above the undistrubed earth beneath fill, and enclosed by the following planes:
1. Horizontal plane at the elevation of the bottom of the supported tiem, within a perimeter line
located 2 feet beyond the exterior face or edge of item.
2. Flat planes extending from the perimeter line downward and outward at 45' angle with the
horizontal, to where the planes intersect, undisturbed earth. Where zones of higher and lower
percentages of compaction overlap, that of the higher percentage shall apply.
-took.
F. Compaction of backfill in excavation shall be to a density not less than that required of the surrounding
area fill.
G. Equipment and methods employed to achieve specified compaction shall be subject to the approval of
the architect/engineer and testing laboratory, and equipment shall be replaced and methods revised as
directed until specifed compaction is obtained.
H. Compaction of each lift shall be completed before placing of the next lift is started.
I. Backfill adjacent to wall, conduit, pipe, and similar item, and in other areas where wheeled equipment
cannot safely be employed, shall be placed in 4-inch thick layers, to the specified compaction, using
mechanical tampers.
J. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations. Place backfill
and fill uniformly along the full length of each structure.
K. Percentage of Maximum Dry Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following
percentages of maximum dry density according to ASTM D 1557:
1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, compact the top 12 inches below
subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent maximum dry density.
2. Under walkways, compact the top 6 inches below subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill
material at 95 percent maximum dry density.
3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, proof roll the subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material
at 90 percent maximum dry density.
EARTHWORK 02200 - 14
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Variation of moisture content in fill and backfill materials shall be lmited to Optimum Moisture(-1% to
+2%). Moisture content shall be as uniformly distributed as practicable within each lift, and shall be
adjusted as necessary to obtain the specified compaction.
C. Material which does not contain sufficient moisture to be compacted to the specified densities shall be
moisture conditioned by sprinkling, disking, windrowing, or other method approved by the testing
laboratory.
D. Material condition by sprinkling shall have water added before compaction. Uniformly apply water to
surface of subgrade or layer of soil material to obtain sufficient moisture content. The contractor shall
maintain sufficient hoses and/or water distributing equipment at the site for this purpose.
E. Material containing excess moisture shall be dried to required Optimum Moisture Content before it is
placed and compacted. Excessively moist soils shall be removed and replaced or shall be scarified by
use of plows, discs, or other approved methods, and air-dried to meet the above requirements.
F. Materials which are within the moisture requirements specified above, but which display pronounced
elasticity or deformation under the action of earthmoving and compaction equipment, shall be reduced
to Optimum Moisture Content, or below, to secure stability.
G. In the event of sudden downpours or other inclement weather, exposed subgrades and fills which, in the
opinion of the testing laboratory, become inundated or rxcessively moistened shall have excess water
removed and soil dried as specified above.
1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry satisfactory soil material that is too wet to compact
to specified density.
a. Stockpile or spread and dry removed wet satisfactory soil material.
3.17 COMPACTION
A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 12 inches in loose depth for material compacted
by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by
hand-operated tampers.
B. Degree of compaction shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557
C. Except as otherwise noted, fill and backfill materials shall be placed in successive horizontal lifts which
do not exceed specified thickness.
D. Subgrade and backfill of indicated areas or structures shall be compacted as specified in the following
table:
COMPACTION TABLE
Area Subgrade Max. Compacted Capaction
or Compaction Thickness Per of Each Lift
Structure Minimum % Lift-in. Minimum %
Above pipe cover to 85 12 90
subgrade
EARTHWORK 02200- 13
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and
along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility
system.
H. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
I. Fill voids with approved backfill materials as shoring and bracing, and sheeting is removed.
J. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade.
K. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below
subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.14 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE BACKFILL
A. Subsurface Drain: Place a layer of filter fabric around perimeter of drainage trench or at footing, as
indicated. Place a 6 inch compacted course of filtering material on filter fabric to support drainage
pipe. After installing and testing, encase drainage pipe to subgrade level with compacted filtering
material and wrap in filter fabric, overlapping edges at least 12 inches.
B. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact drainage backfill of filtering material over subsurface drain, in
width indicated, to within 12 inches of final subgrade. Enclose bottom and earth side of excavation and
overlay drainage backfill with one layer of filter fabric, overlapping edges at least 12 inches.
3.15 FILL
A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, wet, and unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions,
and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placing fills.
1. Plow strip, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will
bond with existing surface.
B. When subgrade or existing ground surface to receive fill has a density less than that required for fill,
break up ground surface to depth required, pulverize, moisture-condition or aerate soil and recompact
to required density.
C. Place fill material in layers to required elevations for each location listed below.
1. Under grass, use satisfactory excavated or borrow soil material.
2. Under walks and pavements, use subbase or base material, or satisfactory excavated or borrow
soil material.
3. Under steps and ramps, use subbase material.
4. Under building slabs, grade beams and footings use Engineered/Structural Fill material.
S. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
6. Under slabs on grade below finish floor elevation use drainage fill material. (i.e. elevator pit).
3.16 MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to low
within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
EARTHWORK 02200- 12
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
6. Removal of temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
8. Backfilling shall be done in any area only after a representative of the testing laboratory has
inspected and approved subgrade, foundatins, or other work in excavations. Notice that the
work is ready for inspection shall be given promptly, and sufficient time shall be allowed for
making necessary examinations.
9. In order to prevent lateral movement, care shall be exercised in placing backfill adjacent to
foundation wall, grade beam, footing, utility line, and other structures. Backfill no opposite
sides of such items shall be kept at approximately the same elevation as backfilling progresses to
prevent unbalanced earth pressure. During backfilling the difference in elevatin of backfill no
opposite sides of structure shall not exceed 12 inches.
a. Shoring shall be employed as necessary to protect such items.
b. Foundation walls and footings have been designed to act with other portions of the
structure to withstand the loads they will bear in complted project; they have not been
designed to withstand construction loads ro unbalanced earth or equipment loadings.
10. Backfill adjacent to following items shall be placed carefully and shall not damage items against
which it is placed:
Dampproofing and waterproofing:
a. Backfill shall be placed only after protection board is in place
b. Backfill shall be placed only after dampproofing has dried.
3.13 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Place and compact bedding course of suitable bedding material for trenches on rock and other
unyielding bearing surfaces and to fill unauthorized excavations. Provide continuous support for bells,
joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.
B. Minimum width of bedding material shall be at least 6" wider on each side of the item to be installed
on it. Where width of bed is less than full width of trench, concrete or gravel borrow shall be placed
adjacent to bedding material to fill full width of the trench, and shall be compacted with bedding
material.
C. Where bed is damaged during excavation or whicle placing pipe, or otherwise, it shall be repaired to
specified grade, contour, and compactin before weight of pipe is placed on it.
D. Bedding material and embedment material for utilities will be furnished, placed, and compacted under
the appropriate utitlity specification section.
E. Concrete bedding and backfill trenches that carry below or pass under footings and that are excavated
within 18 inches of footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of footings.
F. Provide 4 inch thick concrete base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches below surface
of roadways. After installation and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4
inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase.
"" G. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil material or subbase material, free of particles
larger than 1 inch, to a height of 6 inches over the utility pipe or conduit.
EARTHWORK 02200- 11
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove stones and sharp
objects to avoid point loading.
1. Where encountering rock or another unyielding bearing surface, carry trench excavation 6 inches
below invert elevation to receive bedding course.
3.9 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE
A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B. When Architect determines that unforeseen unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and
replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
1. Unforeseen additional excavation and replacement material will be paid according to the
Contract provisions for changes in Work.
C. Reconstruct subgrades and concrete damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water,
or construction activities, as directed by the Architect at the contractor's expense.
3.10 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending indicated bottom
elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering required top
elevation. Lean concrete fill with unit weight not exceeding existing soil may be used to bring
elevations to proper position when acceptable to the Architect.
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction as directed by the Architect.
B. Where indicated widths of utility trenches are exceeded, provide stronger pipe, or special installation
procedures, as required by the Architect.
3.11 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backfill and fill soil materials, including acceptable borrow
materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain
surface water. Cover to prevent wind-blown dust.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
3.12 BACKFILL
A. Backfill excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:
1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing,
waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.
2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents.
3. Testing, inspecting, and approval of underground utilities.
4. Concrete formwork removal. '"
5. Removal of temporary planking, timber, forms, trash and debris from excavation.
EARTHWORK 02200- 10
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
,, less than 25,000 lb and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,700 Ib, measured according to SAE
Standard J 1179.
4. Rock-excavating equipment for open excavations shall be equivalent to Caterpillar Model No.
973, heavy-duty, track-mounted loader, rated at not less than 210 hp flywheel power and
developing minimum of 45,000 lb breakout force, measured according to SAE Standard J732c-
69.
a. Excavations more than 10 feet in width and pits more than 30 feet in either length or
width are defined as open excavations.
5. Rock excavation will be paid by unit prices included in the Contract Documents.
6. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross-sectioned by Architect.
3.5 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS
A. Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction to maintain
stable excavations.
3.6 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1.2 inches. Extend
excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork,
installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by
hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines
and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Appurtenances:
Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1.2 inches.
Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended for bearing surface.
3.7 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and grades.
3.8 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. Excavate trenches to indicated slopes, lines, depths, and invert elevations.
1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost
line.
B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit.
Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 6 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Clearance: 9 inches each side of pipe or conduit.
"* C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and place 4" minimum pipe bedding course material on trench bottoms to
provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Provide continuous support for bells,
EARTHWORK 02200-9
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Excavation material, other than topsoil, which is not required for or is unsuitable for backfill or AmAk
fill materials, shall be lawfully disposed of off-site.
G. Excavation for pipe and other items shall be carried far enough below underside of item to
accommodate bedding material.
H. Excavations which extend below indicated or specified levels ("over-excavation"), shall be filled to
those levels with concrete having a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 2,000 psi if in rock or
with compacted Engineered Fill, if in earth.
I. If bearing surface of subgrade which is to receive new construction becomes softened, disturbed, or
unstable, unsuitable material shall be removed down to a firm bearing surface and replaced with
satisfactory fill. Subgrade shall then be protected from further disturbance until construction item is
placed at contractor's expense.
J. Excavations shall not be wider than requried to set, brace, and remove forms for concrete, install
piping, or perform other necessary work. Width of trench at 12 inches above top of pipe or conduit
shall be less than the outside diameter of the pipe or the conduit plus 3 feet. Sides of trench above this
level shall be sloping, at an angle 30 degrees or less from vertical, from this level to grade. In
materials where sloping walls are not stable, trench walls shall be sheeted.
K. Below-Ground Demolition:
1. Underground construction, pipe, and similar items indicated on the drawings as to be
demolished or removed, shall be demolished and/or removed. Ohter items, not indicated on the
drawings, that impede constructionof new work indicated, shall be abandoned. demolished,
and/or removed only with the approval of the architect/engineer.
2. Pipe which is to be abandoned in place shall be suitably and permanently plugged at end. Plug
shall be stiff concrete, with a thickness, measured parallel to pipe axis of 1 pipe diameter, for
pipe less chant 18 inches in diameter. Both inner and outer faces of plug for pipe equal to or
greater than 18 inches in diameter shall be formed. Pipe less than 4 inches in diameter need not
be plugged.
L. Classified Excavation: Excavation is classified and includes excavation to required subgrade
elevations. Excavation will be classified as earth excavation or rock excavation as follows:
1. Earth excavation includes excavation of pavements and other obstructions visible on surface;
underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be demolished and removed;
together with soil and other materials encountered that are not classified as rock or unauthorized
excavation.
a. Intermittent ripping to increase production and not necessary to permit excavation of
material encountered will be classified as earth excavation.
2. Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock material and obstructions encountered
that cannot be removed by the following heavy-duty rock excavating equipment.
a. Rock material includes boulders 1 cu. yd. or more in volume and rock in beds, ledges,
unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits.
3. Rock excavating equipment for footings, trenches, and pits shall be equivalent to Caterpillar
Model No. 215D LC track-mounted hydraulic excavator, equipped with a 42 inch wide short-tip
radius rock bucket, rated at not less than 120 hp flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not
EARTHWORK 02200- 8
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. The contractor shall grade and ditch the site as necessary to direct surface runoff away from open
excavations and subgrade surfaces. Positive drainage(minimum 1.0% slope) shall be maintained at all
times.
E. Water from trenches and excavations shall be disposed of in such a manner as will not cause injury to
public health nor to public or private proerty, nor to existing work, not to the work completed or in
progress, not to the surface of roads, walks and streets, nor cause any interference with the use of the
same by the public. Methods of disposal of pumped effluent shall not cause erosion or siltation.
F. Under no circumstances place fills, pour concrete, or install piping and appurtenances in excavations
containing free water.
G. There shall be sufficient pumping equipment, in good working order, available at all times to remove
water.
H. Where, in the opionion of the architect/engineer, pumping of excavations is not effective in maintaining
a dry firm subgrade, other dewatering methods acceptable to the architect engineer, shall be employed.
3.3 FROST PROTECTION
A. Do not excavate to full indicated depth when freezing temperatures may be expected, unless slabs can
be poured immediately after the excavation has been completed. Protect the excavation from frost if
placing of concrete is delayed.
B. Frozen material shall not be placed as fill or backfill.
C. General Contractor to protect concrete surfaces to prevent soil below slabs on grade from freezing.
3.4 EXCAVATION
A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.
B. Sheeting, shoring, bracing, pumping, bailing, and other incidental work necessary to make and
maintain excavations and keep them free from water at all times during placing of concree, utility lines,
and fill backfill materials, shall be performed or supplied as required. Fill and backfill shall be placed
in dry or dewatered areas only.
C. Sheeting shall be installed where requried to maintain safe and workable conditions in excavations,
sheeting, including necessary wales and struts, shall be selected and designed by the contractor. Use of
sheeting shall equal or exceed minimum required for safety and/or conformance to law.
D. Structures, pipes, pavement, earth, and other property liable to damage from excavation operations
shall be braced, underpinned, and supported as requied to prevent damage and movement.
E. As excavation approaches underground utilities and structures, excavation shall be done by hand tools.
Such manual excavation is incidental to normal excavation and no special payment will be made.
F. Excavation shall include satisfactory disposal of excavated material not employed as backfill or fill
materials.
1. Areas to be excavated will be stripped of topsoil as specified under the work of Section 02100 -
Site Preparation
EARTHWORK 02200 -7
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking -Oak
and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a
description of the utility.
B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick minimum, continuously
inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion
protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep.
1. Tape Colors: Provide tape colors to utilities as follows:
a. Red: Electric.
b. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.
C. Orange: Telephone and other communications.
d. Blue: Water systems.
e. Green: Sewer systems.
C. Filter Fabric: Manufacturer's standard nonwoven pervious geotextile fabric of polypropylene, nylon or
polyester fibers, or a combination.
1. Provide filter fabrics that meet or exceed the listed minimum physical properties determined
according to ASTM D 4759 and the referenced standard test method in parentheses:
a. Grab Tensile Strength (ASTM D 4632): 100 lb.
b. Apparent Opening Size(ASTM D 4751): #100 U.S. Standard sieve.
C. Permeability (ASTM D 4491): 150 gallons per minute per sq. ft.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork
operations.
B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective
insulating materials as necessary.
C. Provide erosion control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-
bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
3.2 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on
prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation.
C. The contractor shall provide, at his own expense, adequate pumping and drainage facilities to keep
excavated areas sufficiently dry from groundwater and/or surface runoff so as not to adversely affect ,
construction procedures or cause excessive disturbance of underlying natural ground or subgrades.
EARTHWORK 02200-6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
b. Maximum size of stone in gravel shall be as follows:
1. Type c, 2 inches largest dimension
2. Processed Gravel for Base
a. This specificatoin covers the quality and gradation for subbase material of crusher run
gravel.
b. Grave shall consist of inert material that is hard, durable stone and coarse sand, free from
loam and clay, surface coatings and deleterious materials.
C. The coarse aggregate shall have a percentage of wear, by the Los Angeles Abrasion Test,
of not more than 50.
d. The gradation shall meet the following requirements:
Sieve Designation Percent Passing
3 in. 100
1 1/2 in. 70-100
1/4 in. 50-85
No. 4 30-60
No. 200 0-10
e. The approved source of bank-run gravel material shall be processed by mechanical
means. The equipment for producing crushed gravel shall be of adequate size and with
sufficient adjustments to produce the desired materials. the processed material shall be
stockpiled in such a manner to minimize segregation of particle sized. All processed
gravel shall come from approved stockpiles.
F. Engineered/Structural Fill: Shall be a well-graded natural sand and gravel conforming to the following
gradations:
Sieve No. Percent Passing
4 in. ----Max. 100 Min.
I in. 100 Max. 60 Min.
No. 4 85 Max. 25 Min.
No. 20 55 Max. 10 Min.
No. 40 35 Max. 8 Min.
No. 200 8 Max. -----Min.
G. Bedding Material: Subbase or base materials with 100 percent passing a 1 inch sieve and not more than
8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
H. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel,
ASTM D 448, coarse aggregate grading size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2 inch sieve and not
more than 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.
I_ Filtering Material: Evenly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel or crushed stone and natural
sand, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2 inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 50 sieve.
J. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
EARTHWORK 02200-5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed and
replace with engineered fill. Coordinate with utility companies to shutoff services if lines are active.
C. The work shall be executed in such manner as to prevent any damage to adjacent property and any
other property and existing improvements such as, but not limited to: streets, curbs, paving, utility
lines and structures, monuments, bench marks and other public and private property. Protect existing
structures and foundations from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining,
washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.
D. In case of any damage or injury caused inthe performance of the work, the contractor shall, at his own
expense, make good such damage or injury to the satisfaction of, and without cost to the owner.
Existing roads, sidewalks and curbs damaged during the project work shall be repaired or replaced to
their original condition at the completion of operations. The contractor shall replace, at his own cost,
existing bench marks, monuments, and other reference points which are disturbed or destroyed.
E. Buried structures, utility lines, etc., including those which project less than 18 inches above grade,
which are subject to damage from construction equipment shall be clearly marked to indicate the
hazard. Markers shall indicate limits of danger areas, by means which will be clearly visible to
operators of trucks and other construction equipment, and shall be maintained at all times until
completion of project.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide approved borrow soil materials from off-site when sufficient approved soil materials
are not available from excavations.
B. Satisfactory Soil Materials: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM;
free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation
and other deleterious matter.
C. Unsatisfactory Soil Materials: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH,
OL, OH, and PT.
D. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials.
E. Subbase and Base Material:
1. Gravel Borrow for subbase: Gravel Borrow shall consist of inert material that is hard, durable
stone and coarse sand, free from loam and clay, surface coatings and deleterious materials.
a. Gradation requirements for gravel shall be determined by ASSHTO-T11 and T27 and
shall conform to the following:
Sieve Desi n� ation Percent Passing
1/2 in 50-85
No. 4 40-75
No. 50 8-28
No. 200 0-10
EARTHWORK 02200-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. 10 lb samples, sealed in air-tight containers, of each proposed fill and backfill soil material from
on-site or borrow sources. Sample shall be delivered to Architect/Engineer's office or testing
laboratory for approval.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining test samples of soil materials proposed to be
used and transporting them to the site sufficiently in advance of time planned for use of these
materials for testing of materials to be completed. Use of these proposed materials by the
contractor prior to testing and approval or rejection, shall be at the contractor's risk.
3. 12 x 12 inch sample of filter fabric.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Perform earthwork complying with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Testing and Inspection Service: Owner will employ a qualified independent geotechnical engineering
testing agency to classify proposed on-site and borrow soils to verfy that soils comply with specified
requirements and to perform required field and laboratory testing.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of
Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."
1. Before commencing earthwork, meet with representatives of the governing authorities, Owner,
Architect, consultants, independent testing agency, and other concerned entities. Review
earthwork procedures and responsibilities including testing and inspection procedures and
requirements. Notify participants at least 3 working days prior to convening conference.
Record discussions and agreements and furnish a copy to each participant.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. General: The contractor shall become thoroughly familiar with the site, consult records and drawings
of adjacent structures and of existing utilities and their connections, and note all conditions which may
influence the work of this section. By submitting a bid, the contractor affirms that he has carefully
examined the site and all conditions affecting work under this section. No claim for additional costs
will be allowed becasue of lack of full knowledge of existing conditions. The contractor may, at his
own expense, conduct additional subsurface testing as required for his own information.
1. Information on the drawings and in the specifications relating to subsurface conditions, natural
phenomena, and existing utilities and structures is from the best sources presently availalbe. All
boring and test pit data is given in the boring logs, such informaiton is furnished only for the
information and convenience of the contractor,k and the accuracy of completeness of this
informaiton is not guaranteed. The Geotechnical Engineering Report, Proposed New Fire
Station, Northampton, Massachusetts, Prepared for the City of Northampton, June 17, 1996, by
McPhail Associates, Geotechnical Engineers, Cambridge, Masssachusetts is available at the
office of the architect for review. The investigations were made in order to provide data for
foundation design and logs are including solely as information to bidders. Interpretation of the
date for purposed construction is the responsibility of the contractor.
2. Plans, surveys, measurements, and dimensions under which the work is to be performed are
believed to be correct, but the contractor shall have examined them for himself during the
bidding period, as no additional compensation will be made for errors and inaccuracies that may
be found therein.
EARTHWORK 02200 -3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Unit prices for rock excavation include replacement with approved materials.
C. Unit prices for unsuitable soil excavation include excavation, removal from site, legal disposal and
replacement with approved materials.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Excavation consists of the removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations and the reuse or
disposal of materials removed.
B. Subgrade: The uppermost surface of an excavation (virgin - undisturbed soil) or the top surface of a
fill or backfill immediately below engineered/structural fill, subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
C. Borrow: Soil material obtained off-site when sufficient approved soil material is not available from
excavations.
D. Engineered/Structural Fill: Controlled compacted material conforming to ASTM D2940 placed on
subgrade to underside of slabs on grade assemblies, footings or drainage fill (Refer to pages 02200 - 17
and 02200- 18 this section)
E. Subbase Course: The layer placed between the subgrade and base course in a paving system or the
layer placed between the subgrade and surface of a pavement or walk.
F. Base Course: The layer placed between the subbase and surface pavement in a paving system.
G. Drainage Fill: Course of washed granular material supporting slab-on-grade placed to cut off upward
capillary flow of pore water at elevator pit slab.
H. Unauthorized excavation consists of removing materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or
dimensions without direction by the Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work
directed by the Architect, shall be at the Contractor's expense.
I. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and
electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below ground
surface.
J. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground
services within building lines.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for the following:
1. Each type of plastic warning tape.
2. Filter fabric.
C. Samples of the following:
EARTHWORK 02200-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 02200-EARTHWORK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Preparing and grading subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, and landscaping.
2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
3. Excavating and backfilling trenches within building lines.
4. Excavating and backfilling for underground mechanical and electrical utilities and
appurtenances.
5. Placement and compaction of engineered/structural fill.
6. Drainage and moisture-control fill course for slabs-on-grade below finish floor elevation.
7. Subbase course for walks and pavements.
8. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches.
9. Sheeting, bracing and support of excavations as necessary.
10. Drainage and dewatering as necessary to perform work in the dry.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section.
1. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices: for unsuitable soil excavation and rock excavation.
2. Division 2 Section "Preparation" for site stripping, grubbing and topsoil removal.
3. Division 2 Section 'Seeding" including placing and preparing top soil and finish grading for
lawns.
4. Division 2 Section "Trees, Plants and Ground Cover
5. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for vapor barrior and screened stone cushion
1.3 UNIT PRICES
A. Rock Measurement: Volume of rock actually removed, measured in original position, but not to
exceed the following:
1. 24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings.
2. 12 inches outside of concrete forms at footings.
3. 6 inches outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade.
4. 6 inches beneath bottom of concrete slabs on grade.
5. 6 inches beneath invert elevation of pipe in trenches, and the greater of 18 inches wider than
pipe diameter or 36 inches wide.
"* 6. 6 inches below subgrade in lawn and walk area, 12 inches below subgrade for roads and parking
areas.
EARTHWORK 02200- 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.08 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS
A. Material resulting from the site preparation work and not scheduled to be salvaged and which is
unsuitable for reuse on the project, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be legally
disposed of off-site.
B. Debris, rubbish, and other material shall be disposed of promptly and shall not be left until final
cleanup of site.
END OF SECTION
SITE PREPARATION 02100-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
appearance are significantly impaired, shall be replaced with equivalent items at the Contractors
expense.
B. Materials and equipment shall not be stored or operated under the branches of existing trees which
are to remain, except as actually required to construct the proposed work in those areas.
C. Prior to start of demolition work and clearing and grubbing operations, tree protection fencing shall
be installed in accordance with the following:
1. Fencing shall be installed at the tree protection areas indicated on the Drawings.
2. Fencing shall be installed a minimum of 15 feet beyond the drip line of trees to be
protected, unless otherwise approved by the Landscape Architect/Engineer.
3.03 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES
A. Existing structures and utilities shall be suitably protected from damage, including but not limited to
existing buildings and building foundations, utility lines and structures, sewer, drainage, water, gas
&electrical, telephone&cable TV, and existing concrete sidewalk.
3.04 LOAM AND TOPSOIL
A. Loam and topsoil shall be stripped to their full depth from areas to be excavated, filled, regraded,
or resurfaced.
Avow., B. Loam and topsoil shall be stockpiled on the property at a location indicated on the plans and
protected. No loam and topsoil shall be removed from the site without the written permission of the
Landscape Architect/Engineer and the Owner.
C. Stockpiled loam and topsoil which conforms to the specifications may be used for fill and finish
grading within landscaped areas.
3.05 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS
A. Materials indicated on the drawings or designated by the Landscape Architect/Engineer in the field
to be salvaged shall be carefully removed, protected from damage, and stockpiled on-site in an area
designated by the Owner.
Remove and stockpile existing crushed stone in an area designated by the Owner, for reuse
elsewhere on the site.
3.06 TREE PRUNING
Pruning of existing trees shall be "Class I Medium Pruning" conforming to NAA Ref. 1.
3.07 FERTILIZATION
Fertilizing existing shade trees shall conform to NAA Ref.2.
SITE PREPARATION 02100- 3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Provide, erect, and maintain barricades, lighting, and guardrails as required to protect general '"o`
public, workers, and adjoining property.
1.06 EXISTING SERVICES
A. Arrange and pay for disconnecting, removing, capping, and plugging utility services as indicated on
the Drawings. Disconnect and stub off. Notify the affected utility company in advance and obtain
approval before staring this work.
B. Place markers to indicate location of disconnected services. Identify service lines and capping
locations on Project Record Documents.
1.07 MAINTAINING TRAFFIC
A. Do not close or obstruct roadways without permits.
B. Conduct operations with minimum interference to public or private roadways.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PLANT PROTECTION FENCING
A. Plant protection fencing shall be one of the following, at the Contractors option.
1. Wire bound woodroll snow fence 4-foot high minimum, with 3/8 inch x 1-1/2 inch wide
pickets, spaced approximately 2 inches apart, bound together with at least 13 gauge
galvanized steel wire.
2. Galvanized chain link fencing, 4 feet high.
B. Stakes for fencing shall be 8-foot galvanized steel posts, driven a minimum of 3 feet into the
ground. Posts shall be spaced 8 feet o.c. maximum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Trees, shrubs, and other vegetation not indicated on the Drawings or designated in the field by the
Landscape Architect/Engineer to remain and required for execution of the Work shall be cleared
and grubbed.
B. Stumps shall be removed to their full depth. Roots 3 inches and larger shall be removed to a depth
of 2 feet below finished grade. Stumps shall be legally disposed of off-site.
3.02 PROTECTION OF EXISTING TREE
A. Existing trees and shrubs which are indicated on the Drawings to remain shall be suitably protected
during the life of the Contract. Such trees which are injured due to the Contractor's operations to
such a degree that, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect/Engineer, their usefulness or -011k
SITE PREPARATION 02100-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART I - N . AL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all equipment and do all work necessary to prepare the site, complete, as indicated on the
Drawings and as specified.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other Specification
Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited to:
Section 01568 - Erosion and Sediment Control; Erosion control
Section 02200- Earthwork; Excavation and backfill
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict
with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern.
1. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department (MHD):
Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges, 1988
2. National Arborist Association, 3537 Stratford Rd., Wantagh, NY 11793 (NAA):
Ref. 1 Pruning Standards for Shade Trees
Ref. 2 Standard for Fertilizing Shade and Ornamental Trees
3. Geotechnical Engineering Report, Proposed New Fire Station, Northampton,
Massachusetts, Prepared for the City of Northampton, June 17, 1996, McPhail
Associates, Geotechnical Engineers, Cambridge, Massachusetts.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. The following shall be submitted:
1. Certificates of severance of utility services.
2. Permit for transport and legal disposal of debris.
1.05 PROTECTION
A. Do not interfere with use of adjacent properties. Maintain free and safe passage to and from.
B. Cease operations and notify the Landscape Architect/Engineer immediately if safety of adjacent
property appears to be endangered. Take precautions to properly support structures. Do not resume
operations until safety is restored.
C. Prevent movement, settlement or collapse of adjacent services, sidewalks, driveways and trees.
Assume liability for such movement, settlement, or collapse. Promptly repair damage at no cost to
the Owner.
SITE PREPARATION 02100- 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of
Substantial Completion.
a. Remove labels that are not permanent labels.
b. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove
glazing compounds and other substances that are noticeable vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials.
C. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of
stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces.
d. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and
other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures
and lamps.
e. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter, and other
foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills, and other
foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted to a smooth, even-
textured surface.
C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid the
Project of rodents, insects, and other pests.
D. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the
Work during construction.
E. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for
cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's
property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove
waste materials from the site and dispose of lawfully.
1. Where extra materials of value remain after completion of associated Work, they become the
Owner's property. Dispose of these materials as directed by the Owner.
END OF SECTION 01700
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
4. Wiring diagrams.
5. Recommended 'turn-around" cycles.
6. Inspection procedures.
7. Shop Drawings and Product Data.
8. Fixture lamping schedule.
PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each Installer of equipment that requires regular
maintenance to meet with the Owner's personnel to provide instruction in proper operation and
maintenance. Provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives if installers are not experienced in
operation and maintenance procedures. Include a detailed review of the following items:
1. Maintenance manuals.
2. Record documents.
3. Spare parts and materials.
4. Tools.
5. Lubricants.
6. Fuels.
7. Identification systems.
8. Control sequences.
9. Hazards.
10. Cleaning.
11. Warranties and bonds.
12. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments.
B. As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures:
1. Startup.
2. Shutdown.
3. Emergency operations.
4. Noise and vibration adjustments.
5. Safety procedures.
6. Economy and efficiency adjustments.
7. Effective energy utilization.
3.2 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: The General Conditions require general cleaning during construction. Regular site cleaning
is included in Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls."
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface
or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
000%, conditions fully and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the
corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that
would be difficult to measure and record at a later date.
1. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between variations in
separate categories of the Work.
2. Mark new information that is important to the Owner but was not shown on Contract Drawings
or Shop Drawings.
3. Note related change-order numbers where applicable.
4. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets. Bind sets with durable-paper cover
sheets; print suitable titles, dates, and other identification on the cover of each set.
C. Record Specifications: Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual, including addenda. Include
with the Project Manual one copy of other written construction documents, such as Change Orders and
modifications issued in printed form during construction.
1. Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual Work performed in comparison
with the text of the Specifications and modifications.
2. Give particular attention to substitutions and selection of options and information on concealed
construction that cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation.
3. Note related record drawing information and Product Data.
4. Upon completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to the Architect for the Owner's
records.
D. Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal. Note related Change Orders
and markup of record drawings and Specifications.
1. Mark these documents to show significant variations in actual Work performed in comparison
with information submitted. Include variations in products delivered to the site and from the
manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.
2. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the Work that cannot otherwise
be readily discerned later by direct observation.
3. Upon completion of markup, submit complete set of record Product Data to the Architect for the
Owner's records.
E. Record Sample Submitted: Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall meet
with the Architect and the Owner's personnel at the Project Site to determine which Samples are to be
transmitted to the Owner for record purposes. Comply with the Owner's instructions regarding
delivery to the Owner's Sample storage area.
F. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements of
miscellaneous record keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the Work.
Immediately prior to the date or dates of Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records and
place in good order. Identify miscellaneous records properly and bind or file, ready for continued use
and reference. Submit to the Architect for the Owner's records.
G. Maintenance Manuals: Organize operation and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size.
Bind properly indexed data in individual, heavy-ditty, 2-inch, 3-ring, vinyl-covered binders, with
pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each
binder. Include the following types of information:
1. Emergency instructions.
2. Spare parts list.
3. Copies of warranties.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
9. Complete startup testing of systems and instruction of the Owner's operation and maintenance
personnel. Discontinue and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with mockups, "`
construction tools, and similar elements.
10. Complete final cleanup requirements, including touchup painting.
11. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes.
B. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will either proceed with
inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Architect will prepare the Certificate
of Substantial Completion following inspection or advise the Contractor of construction that must be
completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued.
1. The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work is substantially
complete.
2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance.
1.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and
final payment, complete the following. List exceptions in the request.
1. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously
submitted and accepted. Include insurance certificates for products and completed operations
where required.
2. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum.
3. Submit a certified copy of the Architect's final inspection list of items to be completed or
corrected, endorsed and dated by the Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that
each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance and shall be endorsed and
dated by the Architect.
4. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of
the date of Substantial Completion or when the Owner took possession of and assumed
responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
5. Submit consent of surety to final payment.
6. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.
B. Reinspection Procedure: The Architect will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work,
including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except for items whose
completion is delayed under circumstances acceptable to the Architect.
1. Upon completion of reinspection, the Architect will prepare a certificate of final acceptance. If
the Work is incomplete, the Architect will advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or
of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance.
2. If necessary, reinspection will be repeated.
1.5 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS
A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Protect record documents from
deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistant location. Provide access to record documents for the
Architect's reference during normal working hours.
B. Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of Contract
Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies IOWA,
substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark which drawing is most capable of showing
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
400W
SECTION 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout including, but
not limited to, the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Project record document submittal.
3. Operation and maintenance manual submittal.
4. Submittal of warranties.
5. Final cleaning.
B. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in
Divisions 2 through 16.
1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion,
complete the following. List exceptions in the request.
1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial
Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as
substantially complete.
a. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract
Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
b. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value
of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete.
2. Advise the Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications,
and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
5. Obtain waiver of mechanics liens from all parties entitled to file liens.
6. Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals, final project photographs, damage or settlement
surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.
7. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items.
8. Make final changeover of permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner. Advise the Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700- 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
3/4" MDO Flywood
4' XC�'
Northampton Fire Department
1 o Headquarters Budding 1 -1 1/2 Lag Solt
I I Mary Ford, Mayor (4) Fsr S i`fin
I I I I
I I Building Committee I I
Kathleen Sheehan, Chairperson I I
1 I Fire Chief Lawrence Jones I I Q C�
I Deputy Fire Chief Daniel Benedisuk I (2 ) 4 x xP FT Fo5t,5
I I I I p
Rdbert Andrews Clare Higgins I (1 I I I U W o®d
D4vid Beaudin Jon Hite
William Brandt Kimball Howes
1 Maureen Carney Charles Paquette
I ,Judith Fine Susan Well I I
1 I I I
1 I Juster Pope Frazier, Architects
9 Ashfield Street I
1 I Shelburne Falls, Mass. I 1
413.6252572 I
General Contractor's Name
G.C. Street Address
o ( G.C. Town o
1 OC. Phone No.
I j
Gr0-de
I 1 I I L ire,
I I I
I I 1 I
1 I I I
I 1 I I Ins�all sign a� !ocatpd on �iie �IGr:.
I I I I
I I I I
I I ! I
1 1 I I
I I I I
I I I
I I
I I I I
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500- 10
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and
similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid
possibility of damage.
2. Protection: Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines.
Protect from damage during excavation operations.
C. Termination and Removal: Unless the Architect requests that it be maintained longer, remove each
temporary facility when the need has ended, when replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility,
or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that
may have been delayed because of interference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the Contractor's property. The
Owner reserves the right to take possession of project identification signs.
2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving.
Where the area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not
comply with requirements for fill or subsoil in the area. Remove materials contaminated with
road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair
growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at the
temporary entrances, as required by the governing authority.
3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during the construction
period including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Replace air filters and clean inside of ductwork and housings.
b. Replace significantly worn parts and parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
C. Replace lamps burned out or noticeably dimmed by hours of use.
END OF SECTION 01500
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-9
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire
Extinguishers" and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition
Operations."
1. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose, but not less
than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell.
2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations.
3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire-protection
facilities, stairways, and other access routes for fighting fires. Prohibit smoking in hazardous
fire-exposure areas.
4. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and
similar sources of fire ignition.
C. Permanent Fire Protection: At the earliest feasible date in each area of the Project, complete
installation of the permanent fire-protection facility, including connected services, and place into
operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities.
D. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erection of
structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform
personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against. Where appropriate and needed, provide
lighting, including flashing red or amber lights.
E. Enclosure Fence: Before excavation begins, install an enclosure fence with lockable entrance gates.
Locate where indicated, or enclose the entire site or the portion determined sufficient to accommodate
construction operations. Install in a manner that will prevent people, dogs, and other animals from
easily entering the site, except by the entrance gates.
1. Provide open-mesh, cbainlink fencing with posts set in a compacted mixture of gravel and earth.
F. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure of partially completed areas of
construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar
violations of security.
1. Storage: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value or attractive for theft,
provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with the installation and release of
material to minimize the opportunity for theft and vandalism.
G. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction
in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that
air, waterways, and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted or that other undesirable effects might
result. Avoid use of tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise-making
tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site.
3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability of temporary
facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage by
freezing temperatures and similar elements.
Aftk
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - S
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Where heat is needed and the permanent building enclosure is not complete, provide temporary
enclosures where there is no other provision for containment of heat. Coordinate enclosure with
ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and
effects.
2. Install tarpaulins securely, with incombustible wood framing and other materials. Close
openings of 25 sq. ft. or less with plywood or similar materials.
3. Close openings through floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with load-bearing, wood-
framed construction.
4. Where temporary wood or plywood enclosure exceeds 100 sq. ft. in area, use UL-labeled, fire-
retardant-treated material for framing and main sheathing.
G. Temporary Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities for hoisting materials and employees. Truck cranes and
similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary
facilities.
H. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare project identification and other signs of size
indicated. Install signs where indicated to inform the public and persons seeking entrance to the
Project. Support on posts or framing of preservative-treated wood or steel. Do not permit installation
of unauthorized signs.
1. Project Identification Signs: Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics. Comply
with details indicated.
2. Temporary Signs: Prepare signs to provide directional information to construction personnel
and visitors.
+ ` I. Temporary Exterior Lighting: Install exterior yard and sign lights so signs are visible when Work is
being performed.
J. Collection and Disposal of Waste: Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere daily. Comply
with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste material and debris. Enforce
requirements strictly. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days when
the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste
materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material lawfully.
K. Rodent and Pest Control: Before deep foundation work has been completed, retain a local exterminator
or pest control company to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents,
roaches, and other pests. Employ this service to perform extermination and control procedures at
regular intervals so the Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion.
Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.
L. Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate.
Cover finished, permanent stairs with a protective covering of plywood or similar material so finishes
will be undamaged at the time of acceptance.
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Except for use of permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change over from use of
temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion, or
longer, as requested by the Architect.
B. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and
maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of the types needed to protect against reasonably
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-7
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Filter out excessive amounts of soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils, and similar
contaminants that might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge.
2. Connect temporary sewers to the municipal system, as directed by sewer department officials.
3. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition. Following
heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly.
N. Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and subgrade
construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of storm water from heavy rains.
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Locate field offices, storage sheds, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy
access.
1. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove prior to Substantial
Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use
permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to the Owner.
B. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within the construction area or
within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241.
C. Field Offices: Provide insulated, weathertight temporary offices of sufficient size to accommodate
required office personnel at the Project Site. Keep the office clean and orderly for use for small
progress meetings. Furnish and equip offices as follows:
1. Furnish with a desk and chairs, a 4-drawer file cabinet, plan table, plan rack, and a 6-shelf
bookcase.
D. Temporary Paving: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paving to support the indicated
loading adequately and to withstand exposure to traffic during the construction period. Locate
temporary paving for roads, storage areas, and parking where the same permanent facilities will be
located. Review proposed modifications to permanent paving with the Architect.
1. Paving: Comply with Division 2 Section "Hot-Mixed Asphalt Paving" for construction and
maintenance of temporary paving.
2. Coordinate temporary paving development with subgrade grading, compaction, installation and
stabilization of subbase, and installation of base and finish courses of permanent paving.
3. Install temporary paving to minimize the need to rework the installations and to result in
permanent roads and paved areas without damage or deterioration when occupied by the Owner.
4. Delay installation of the final course of permanent asphalt concrete paving until immediately
before Substantial Completion. Coordinate with weather conditions to avoid unsatisfactory
results.
S. Extend temporary paving in and around the construction area as necessary to accommodate
delivery and storage of materials, equipment usage, administration, and supervision.
E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: For temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not
directly associated with construction activities included under individual Sections, comply with
dewatering requirements of applicable Division 2 Sections. Where feasible, utilize the same facilities.
Maintain the site, excavations, and construction free of water.
F. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and
completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
F. Heating Facilities: Except where the Owner authorizes use of the permanent system, provide vented,
self-contained, LP-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open flame, or salamander heating units is prohibited.
G. Temporary Telephones: Provide temporary telephone service throughout the construction period for all
personnel engaged in construction activities. Install telephone on a separate line for each temporary
office and first-aid station.
1. Separate Telephone Lines: Provide additional telephone lines for the following:
a. Where an office has more than 2 occupants, install a telephone for each additional
occupant or pair of occupants.
b. Provide a dedicated telephone line for a fax machine in the field office.
C. Provide facsimile(fax)machine.
2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
H. Sanitary facilities include temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply with
regulations and health codes for the type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and
facilities. Install where facilities will best serve the Project's needs.
1. Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility.
Provide covered waste containers for used material.
I. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. Use of pit-type privies will
not be permitted.
1. Provide separate facilities for male and female personnel.
J. Wash Facilities: Install wash facilities supplied with potable water at convenient locations for
personnel involved in handling materials that require wash-up for a healthy and sanitary condition.
Dispose of drainage properly. Supply cleaning compounds appropriate for each condition.
1. Provide safety showers, eyewash fountains, and similar facilities for convenience, safety, and
sanitation of personnel.
K. Drinking-Water Fixtures: Provide drinking-water fountains where indicated, including paper cup
supply.
L. Drinking-Water Facilities: Provide containerized, tap-dispenser, bottled-water drinking-water units,
including paper supply.
1. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed water
temperature at 45 to 55 deg F.
M. Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove effluent that
can be discharged lawfully. If sewers are not available or cannot be used, provide drainage ditches, dry
wells, stabilization ponds, and similar facilities. If neither sewers nor drainage facilities can be
lawfully used for discharge of effluent, provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent off-site in
a lawful manner.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve
the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and
modify facilities as required.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do
not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed
permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to
existing service. Where company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with
matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with company recommendations.
1. Arrange with company and existing users for a time when service can be interrupted, if
necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Prior to temporary utility availability,
provide trucked-in services.
3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to the site where the Owner's easements cannot be
used for that purpose.
4. Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to the Owner or
Architect. Neither the Owner nor Architect will accept cost or use charges as a basis of claims
for Change Orders.
B. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping of sizes and pressures adequate for
construction until permanent water service is in use.
1. Sterilization: Sterilize temporary water piping prior to use.
C. Temporary Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and
distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period.
Include meters, transformers, overload-protected disconnects, automatic ground-fault interrupters, and
main distribution switch gear.
1. Install electric power service underground, except where overhead service must be used.
2. Power Distribution System: Install wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to
damage. Where permitted, wiring circuits not exceeding 125 Volts, ac 20 Ampere rating, and
lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable where overhead and exposed for
surveillance.
D. Temporary Lighting: When overhead floor or roof deck has been installed, provide temporary lighting
with local switching.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that will fulfill security and protection requirements
without operating the entire system. Provide temporary lighting that will provide adequate
illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions.
E. Temporary Heat: Provide temporary heat required by construction activities for curing or drying of
completed installations or for protection of installed construction from adverse effects of low
temperatures or high humidity. Select safe equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed
installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce the ambient
condition required and minimize consumption of energy. look
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
F. Open-Mesh Fencing: Provide 0.120-inch-thick, galvanized 2-inch chainlink fabric fencing 6 feet high
with galvanized barbed-wire top strand and galvanized steel pipe posts, 1-1/2 inches I.D. for line posts
and 2-1/2 inches I.D. for coiner posts.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide new equipment. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged,
previously used equipment in serviceable condition. Provide equipment suitable for use intended.
B. Water Hoses: Provide 3/4-inch, heavy-duty, abrasion-resistant, flexible rubber hoses 100 feet long,
with pressure rating greater than the maximum pressure of the water distribution system. Provide
adjustable shutoff nozzles at hose discharge.
C. Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110-
to 120-Volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with ground-fault
circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light for connection of power tools and equipment.
D. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords. Use hard-service cords where exposed to
abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords if
single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe
length-voltage ratio.
E. Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattage required for
adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered-glass enclosures where exposed to breakage.
Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture.
F. Heating Units: Provide temporary heating units that have been tested and labeled by UL, FM, or
another recognized trade association related to the type of fuel being consumed.
G. Temporary Offices: Provide prefabricated or mobile units or similar job-built construction with
lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes. Provide heated and air-conditioned
units on foundations adequate for normal loading.
H. Temporary Toilet Units: Provide self-contained, single-occupant toilet units of the chemical, aerated
recirculation, or combustion type. Provide units properly vented and fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-
reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material.
I. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class A fire extinguishers for temporary
offices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class ABC,
dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for the
exposures.
1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required
by location and class of fire exposure.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Health and safety regulations.
3. Utility company regulations.
4. Police, fire department, and rescue squad rules.
S. Environmental protection regulations.
B. Standards: Comply with NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and
Demolition Operations," ANSI A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and
Demolition," and NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities."
1. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for
temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with NFPA 70 "National Electric
Code."
C. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility
before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule indicating dates for implementation and termination of each
temporary utility. At the earliest feasible time, when acceptable to the Owner, change over from use of
temporary service to use of permanent service.
B. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a
safe and efficient manner. Relocate temporary services and facilities as the Work progresses. Do not
overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress. Take necessary fire-prevention measures.
Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist Aftk
on-site.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide new materials. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged,
previously used materials in serviceable condition. Provide materials suitable for use intended.
B. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry."
1. For signs and directory boards, provide exterior-type, Grade B-B high-density concrete form
overlay plywood of sizes and thicknesses indicated.
C. Paint: Comply with requirements of Division 9 Section "Painting."
1. For sign panels and applying graphics, provide exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior
primer.
D. Tarpaulins: Provide waterproof, fire-resistant, UL-labeled tarpaulins with flame-spread rating of 15 or
less. For temporary enclosures, provide translucent, nylon-reinforced, laminated polyethylene or
polyvinyl chloride, fire-retardant tarpaulins.
E. Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities. `"""%
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01500-CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for construction facilities and temporary controls, including
temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection.
B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Water service and distribution.
2. Temporary electric power and light.
3. Temporary heat.
4. Ventilation.
5. Telephone service.
6. Sanitary facilities, including drinking water.
*+ 7. Storm and sanitary sewer.
C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Field offices and storage sheds.
2. Temporary roads and paving.
3. Dewatering facilities and drains.
4. Temporary enclosures.
5. Hoists.
6. Temporary project identification signs and bulletin boards.
7. Waste disposal services.
8. Rodent and pest control.
9. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.
D. Security and protection facilities include, but arevot limited to, the following:
1. Temporary fire protection.
2. Barricades, warning signs, and lights.
3. Enclosure fence for the site.
4. Environmental protection.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Building code requirements.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES .AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500- 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Certifications: Where other Sections of the Specifications require certification that a product, material,
or installation complies with specified requirements, submit a notarized certification from the
manufacturer certifying compliance with specified requirements.
1. Signature: Certification shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer or other individual
authorized to sign documents on behalf of the company.
1.11 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. Except for submittals for the record or information, where action and return is required, the Architect
will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly.
1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility.
B. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform, action stamp. The Architect
will mark the stamp appropriately to indicate the action taken, as follows:
1. Final Unrestricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "Approved," the Work
covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract
Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance.
2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "Approved as Noted," the
Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections
on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that
compliance.
3. Returned for Resubmittal: When the Architect marks a submittal "Disapproved, Revise and
Resubmit," do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing,
fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the
notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark.
a. Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked "Disapproved, Revise and
Resubmit" at the Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress.
4. Other Action: Where a submittal is for information or record purposes or special processing or
other activity, the Architect will return the submittal marked "Action Not Required."
C. Unsolicited Submittals: The Architect will return unsolicited submittals to the sender without action.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS 01300-7
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
d. Product name or name of the manufacturer.
e. Compliance with recognized standards.
f. Availability and delivery time.
2. Submit Samples for review of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture. Submit Samples for a final
check of these characteristics with other elements and a comparison of these characteristics
between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed.
a. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the .
material or product represented, submit at least 3 multiple units that show approximate
limits of the variations.
b. Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate
workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and
similar construction characteristics.
C. Refer to other Sections for Samples to be returned to the Contractor for incorporation in
the Work. Such Samples must be undamaged at time of use. On the transmittal, indicate
special requests regarding disposition of Sample submittals.
d. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as the Owner's
property, are the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site prior to
Substantial Completion.
3. Preliminary Submittals: Submit a full set of choices where Samples are submitted for selection
of color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices.
a. The Architect will review and return preliminary submittals with the Architect's notation,
indicating selection and other action.
4. Submittals: Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication
techniques, connections, operation, and similar characteristics, submit 3 sets. The Architect will
return one set marked with the action taken.
5. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project Site, for quality comparisons throughout
the course of construction.
a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may
serve as the fmal submittal.
b. Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the construction associated with
each set.
B. Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets to subcontractors, manufacturers,
fabricators, suppliers, installers, and others as required for performance of the Work. Show
distribution on transmittal forms.
1. Field samples are full-size examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or finish
materials and to establish the Project standard.
a. Comply with submittal requirements to the fullest extent possible. Process transmittal
forms to provide a record of activity.
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE SUBMITTALS
A. Submit quality-control submittals, including design data, certifications, manufacturer's instructions,
manufacturer's field reports, and other quality-control submittals as required under other Sections of
the Specifications.
SUBMITTALS 01300-6
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
9. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken.
1.8 PRODUCT DATA
A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data
includes printed information, such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard
color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams, and performance curves.
1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes
information on several products that are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable
information. Include the following information:
a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations.
b. Compliance with trade association standards.
C. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
d. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
e. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement.
f. Notation of coordination requirements.
2. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has
been confirmed.
3. Preliminary Submittal: Submit a preliminary single copy of Product Data where selection of
options is required.
4. Submittals: Submit 3 copies of each required submittal; submit copies where required for
maintenance manuals. The Architect will retain 2 and will return the other marked with action
taken and corrections or modifications required.
a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may
serve as the final submittal.
5. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers,
manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance of construction activities. Show
distribution on transmittal forms.
a. Do not proceed with installation until a copy of Product Data is in the Installer's
possession.
b. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with construction.
1.9 SAMPLES
A. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with
the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated
components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and
pattern.
1. Mount or display Samples in the manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare
Samples to match the Architect's sample. Include the following:
a. Specification Section number and reference.
b. Generic description of the Sample.
C. Sample source.
SUBMITTALS 01300-5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.6 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. After development and acceptance of the Contractor's Construction Schedule, prepare a complete
schedule of submittals. Submit the schedule within 10 days of the date required for submittal of the
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
1. Coordinate Submittal Schedule with the list of subcontracts, Schedule of Values, and the list of
products as well as the Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Prepare the schedule in chronological order. Provide the following information:
a. Scheduled date for the first submittal.
b. Related Section number.
C. Submittal category(Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples).
d. Name of the subcontractor.
e. Description of the part of the Work covered.
f. Scheduled date for resubmittal.
g. Scheduled date for the Architect's final release or approval.
B. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect,
Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. Post
copies in the Project meeting room and field office.
1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete
parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are
no longer involved in construction activities.
C. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity where revisions have been
recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise
indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy
standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific
reference to the Project is not a Shop Drawing.
B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns,
templates and similar Drawings. Include the following information:
1. Dimensions.
2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number.
3. Compliance with specified standards.
4. Notation of coordination requirements.
5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
6. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 36 by 48 inches.
7. Initial Submittal: Submit one correctable, translucent, reproducible print and one blue- or
black-line print for the Architect's review. The Architect will return the reproducible print.
8. Final Submittal: Submit 4 blue- or black-line prints; submit 6 prints where required for
maintenance manuals. The Architect will retain 3 prints and return the remainder.
a. One of the prints returned shall be marked up and maintained as a "Record Document."
SUBMITTALS 01300-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. On the transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. On the form, or separate
sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including variations and
limitations. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract
Document requirements and has been coordinated with related work.
2. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810.
1.5 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar-chart-type, contractor's construction
schedule. Submit within 30 days after the date established for "Commencement of the Work."
1. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a continuous
vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same breakdown of units of
the Work as indicated in the "Schedule of Values."
2. Within each time bar, indicate estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments. As
Work progresses, place a contrasting mark in each bar to indicate Actual Completion.
3. Prepare the schedule on a sheet, or series of sheets, of stable transparency, or other reproducible
media, of sufficient width to show data for the entire construction period.
4. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved.
Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities; include minor
elements involved in the sequence of the Work. Show each activity in proper sequence.
Indicate graphically the sequences necessary for completion of related portions of the Work.
5. Coordinate the Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of
subcontracts, Submittal Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other schedules.
6. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion. Indicate
Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Architect's procedures necessary
for certification of Substantial Completion.
B. Phasing: On the schedule. show how requirements for phased completion to permit Work by separate
Contractors and partial occupancy by the Owner affect the sequence of Work.
C. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including
submittal review, testing, and installation.
D. Cost Correlation: At the head of the schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned and
actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of Work performed as of the dates used for preparation
of payment requests.
1. Refer to Division 1 Section "Applications for Payment" for cost reporting and payment
procedures.
E. Distribution: Following rzsponse to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect,
Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates. Post copies in the
Project meeting room and temporary field office.
1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete
parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are
no longer involved in construction activities.
F. Schedule Updating: Revi-se the schedule after each meeting, event, or activity where revisions have
.,, been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
SUBMITTALS 01300- 3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Field samples are full-size physical examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or finish
materials. Field samples are used to establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
C. Mockups are full-size assemblies for review of construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they
are not Samples.
1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction
activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction
activities to avoid delay.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and
related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so
processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.
a. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination
with other submittals until all related submittals are received.
b. Submit all Division 9 submittals at one time.
3. Processing: To avoid the need to delay installation as a result of the time required to process
submittals, allow sufficient time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals.
a. Allow 2 weeks for initial review. Allow additional time if the Architect must delay
processing to permit coordination with subsequent submittals.
b. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial submittal.
C. Allow 2 weeks for reprocessing each submittal.
d. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit
submittals to the Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing.
B. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block.
1. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on the label or beside the title block on Shop
Drawings to record the Contractor's review and approval markings and the action taken.
2. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken.
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Name and address of the Architect.
d. Name and address of the Contractor.
e. Name and address of the subcontractor.
f. Name and address of the supplier.
g. Name of the manufacturer.
h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
C. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit
each submittal from the Contractor to the Architect using a transmittal form. The Architect will not
accept submittals received from sources other than the Contractor.
SUBMITTALS 01300-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01300-SUBMITTALS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for
performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Submittal schedule.
3. Daily construction reports.
4. Shop Drawings.
5. Product Data.
6. Samples.
7. Quality assurance submittals.
B. Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division 1 Sections and other Contract Documents for
requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Permits.
2. Applications for Payment.
3. Performance and payment bonds.
4. Insurance certificates.
5. List of subcontractors.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Conditions to the Contract-Article 9.2".
2. Division 1 Section 'Coordination" specifies requirements governing preparation and submittal of
required Coordination Drawings.
3. Division 1 Section 'Contract Closeout" specifies requirements for submittal of Project Record
Documents and warranties at project closeout.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Coordination Drawings show the relationship and integration of different construction elements that
require careful coordination during fabrication or installation to fit in the space provided or to function
as intended.
., 1. Preparation of Coordination Drawings is specified in Division 1 Section "Coordination" and
may include components previously shown in detail on Shop Drawings or Product Data.
SUBMITTALS 01300 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with 2 or more standards is specified and the standards
establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with
the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different but apparently
equal to the Architect for a decision before proceeding.
1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of the requirements. Refer uncertainties to the Architect for a
decision before proceeding.
D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project must be familiar with industry
standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the
Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, the Contractor
shall obtain copies directly from the publication source and make them available on request.
E. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently
abbreviated. Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in the Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards-generating organization,
authorities having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context of the text provision. Refer to
Gale Research Inc.'s "Encyclopedia of Associations," which is available in most libraries.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases,jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments,
judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards
and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01095
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 -3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
.carpenter.* It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople
of the corresponding generic name. "
3. Assigning Specialists: Certain Sections of the Specifications require that specific construction
activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts in those operations. The
specialists must be engaged for those activities, and their assignments are requirements over
which the Contractor has no option. However, the ultimate responsibility for fulfilling contract
requirements remains with the Contractor.
a. This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcing building codes and
similar regulations governing the Work. It is also not intended to interfere with local
trade-union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions.
J. "Project site" is the space available to the Contractor for performing construction activities, either
exclusively or in conjunction with others performing work as part of the Project. The extent of the
Project site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land
on which the Project is to be built.
K. "Testing Agencies": A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections
or tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of
those inspections or tests.
1.3 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION
A. Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the
Construction Specifications Institute's 16-division format and "MasterFormat" numbering system.
B. Specification Content: These Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the
intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These
conventions are as follows:
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is
abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not
stated, shall be interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural
and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract
Documents indicates.
2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. At
certain locations in the Text, subjective language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities
that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor or by others when so noted.
a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are
implied where a colon(:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
1.4 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements,
applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly
into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract
Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with the standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents.
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 -2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01095 -REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Indicated": The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the
Drawings; or to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and similar requirements in the
Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used to help
the user locate the reference. Location is not limited.
C. "Directed": Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required,"
and "permitted" mean directed by the Architect, requested by the Architect, and similar phrases.
D. "Approved": The term "approved," when used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the
Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Architect's duties and
responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.
E. "Regulations": The term "regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by
authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction
industry that control performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish": The term "furnish" means to supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading,
unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.
G. "Install": The term "install" describes operations at the Project site including the actual unloading,
temporary storage, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to
dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H. "Provide": The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I. "Installer": An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an
employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, who performs a particular construction activity
including installation, erection, application, or similar operations. Installers are required to be
experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform.
1. The term "experienced," when used with the term "installer," means having successfully
completed a minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being
familiar with the special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
"+ 2. Trades: Using terms such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must
be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place, during handling and
installation. Apply protective covering where required to assure protection from damage or
deterioration at Substantial Completion.
B. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the
remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to assure operability
without damaging effects.
C. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction,
completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious
exposure during the construction period. Where applicable, such exposures include, but are not limited
to, the following:
1. Excessive static or dynamic loading.
2. Excessive internal or external pressures.
3. Excessively high or low temperatures.
4. Thermal shock.
5. Excessively high or low humidity.
6. Air contamination or pollution.
7. Water or ice.
8. Solvents.
9. Chemicals.
10. Light.
11. Radiation.
12. Puncture.
13. Abrasion.
14. Heavy traffic.
15. Soiling, staining, and corrosion.
16. Bacteria.
17. Rodent and insect infestation.
18. Combustion.
19. Electrical current.
20. High-speed operation.
21. Improper lubrication.
22. Unusual wear or other misuse.
23. Contact between incompatible materials.
24. Destructive testing.
25. Misalignment.
26. Excessive weathering.
27. Unprotected storage.
28. Improper shipping or handling.
29. Theft.
30. Vandalism.
END OF SECTION 01040
COORDINATION 01040-3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Preparation of schedules.
2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities.
3. Delivery and processing of submittals.
4. Progress meetings.
S. Project closeout activities.
D. Conservation: Coordinate construction operations to assure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated in,
the Work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings where careful coordination is needed for
installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. Prepare coordination drawings
where limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of
different components.
1. Show the relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.
2. Indicate required installation sequences.
3. Comply with requirements contained in Section "Submittals."
B. Staff Names: Within 15 days of commencement of construction operations, submit a list of the
Contractor's principal staff assignments, including the superintendent and other personnel in attendance
at the Project Site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities. List their addresses and
telephone numbers.
1. Post copies of the list in the Project meeting room, the temporary field office, and each
temporary telephone.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS
A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate
and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected in an acceptable manner.
B. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests to minimize the necessity of
uncovering completed construction for that purpose.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
COORDINATION 01040-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01040-COORDINATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordinating
construction operations including, but not necessarily limited to, the following:
1. General project coordination procedures.
2. Conservation.
3. Coordination Drawings.
4. Administrative and supervisory personnel.
5. Cleaning and protection.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section 'Submittals" for preparing and submitting the Contractor's Construction
Schedule.
2. Division I Section "Contract Closeout" for coordinating contract closeout.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of these Specifications to assure
efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included
under different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after
its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required
maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
B. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special
procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at
meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate contractors where coordination of their
work is required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures
with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and assure orderly progress of the Work. Such
administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
COORDINATION 01040- 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 3 -EXECUTION AWftt
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. Alternate No. 1: Install asphalt shingles in lieu of standing seam copper roof. Delete snowguards and
rosin paper underlayment. See A4 for modified details.
B. Alternate No. 2: Delete radiant heating system. Add unit heaters as per mechanical drawings.
C. Alternate No. 3: Install fluid applied flooring in lieu of staining concrete at apparatus room, hose
tower and maintenance bay.
END OF SECTION 01030
ALTERNATES 01030-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01030- ALTERNATES
PART I -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing Alternates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definition: An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work
defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if the
Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed,
or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract
Documents.
1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to
incorporate the Alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.
1.4 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent Work as necessary to completely and fully integrate
that Work into the Project.
1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items
incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the
Alternate.
B. Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing,
of the status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for
later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates.
C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other Work of this Contract.
D. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections
referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the Work described
under each alternate.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
ALTERNATES 01030 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Description: Rock excavation according to Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
2. Unit of Measurement: Cu. yard of rock excavated.
3. Estimated quantity of rock to be excavated: none
B. Unit Price No. 2-Unsuitable Soils:
1. Description: Test borings indicate unsuitable soils at varying depths across the site. Boring No.
1 identified unsuitable material to elevation 144', the remaining borings imply an average depth
of two feet in other locations. Unsuitable material to be removed from below slabs, grade
beams and footings as shown on page 02200-5. Section 02202 Earthwork is included under the
work of the contract.
2. Unit of Measurement: Cu. yard of unsuitable soil excavated
3. Estimated quantity of unsuitable soils: none.
END OF SECTION 01026
UNIT PRICES 01026 -2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01026 -UNIT PRICES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for procedures for measurement and payment for rock
excavation.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, stated on the Bid Form, as a price per unit of
measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate
modification, if the estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or
decreased.
1.4 PROCEDURES
A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, overhead,
profit, and applicable taxes.
B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires
establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in
those Sections.
C. The Owner reserves the right to reject the Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use
of established unit prices, and to have this work measured, at the Owner's expense, by an independent
surveyor acceptable to the Contractor.
D. Schedule: A "Unit Price Schedule" is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections
referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.
PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 UNIT PRICE SCHEDULE
A. Unit Price No. 1 -Rock Excavation:
UNIT PRICES 01026 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northamtpon, Massachusetts
PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northamtpon, Massachusetts
® SECTION 01010-SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The Project consists of the constrution of a new fire station for the City of Northampton,
Massachusetts.
1. Project Location: King Street, Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Owner: City of.orthampton
B. Contract Documents, dated December 16, 1996 were prepared for the Project by Juster Pope Frazier, 9
Ashfield Street, Shelburne Falls, MA 01370
C. The Work will be constructed under a single prime contract.
1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
A. Separate Contract: The Owner has awarded a separate contract for performance of certain construction
operations at the site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this
Contract. That Contract includes the following:
I. Construction of new street and utilities within new street
2. Demolition of an existing building on the site
3. Installation of communications consules and related equipment of joint communications.
B. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so that work under those contracts may be carried out
smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract.
1.4 WORK SEQUENCE
A. The Work will be conducted in a single phase.
1.5 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A. General: During the construction period the Contractor shall have full use of the premises for
construction operations, including use of the site within contract limit lines shown on drawings. The
Contractor's use of the premises is limited only by the Owner's right to perform work or to retain other
contractors on portions of the Project.
SUMMARY OF WORK 01010- 1
NOON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996 look
Northampton, Massachusetts
(c) evidence showing efforts by the Contractor to supplement its
own and SOMBA lists of minority business sources by contacting the
Small Business Administration, trade organizations, the Services
Administration (US Government) , minority contractors'
organizations, community organizations and other likely sources of
names of additional minority or woman-owned business firms capable
of performing the Work; and
(d) evidence showing other efforts to comply with this Article 17 .
The City may then determine that no such substitute minority
Contractors exist.
17 . 6 Hearinas and Appeals
17 . 6. 1 The Awarding Authority shall not impose any
sanctions under Paragraph 17 . 5 unless the Contractor, SOMBA and any
interested party shall have been given an opportunity to present
testimony at an administrative conference held by the Department,
and the Department determines in its sole discretion that the
sanctions are justified by the supporting circumstances presented
at the Administration Conference.
17 . 6.2 A Contractor shall have the right to request the
City to suspend any or all sanctions imposed under Paragraph 17 . 5
upon showing that he/she is in compliance with this Article 17 .
Conditions to the Contract 00700 64
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
proposed revisions to the Participation Schedule stating how
conditions of this Article 17 are to be met.
17 . 4 . 9 Failure to comply with any provisions of Article
17 shall constitute a substantial violation and breach the Owner-
Contractor agreement.
17 . 5 Sanctions
17 . 5 . 1 If the Contractor fails to comply with the terms
of these conditions, the City may
(a) suspend any payment for the Work that
should have been but was not performed by an
MBE pursuant to the Participation Schedule; or
(b) require specific performance of the
Contractor' s obligation under this Article 17
by requiring the Contractor to contract with
an MBE selected by the Contractor and agreed
to by the City for any Work remaining, at no
additional cost to the owner.
17 . 5. 2 To the extent that the Contractor has not
complied with the terms of these conditions, the City may withhold
from any periodic payment monies equivalent to the product of the
percentage of completion times the MBE dollar amount, minus the
amount already paid to MBE's for Work performed under the contract,
minus any payments already withheld.
17 . 5. 3 In addition to the remedies provided under 17 . 5. 1
and 17 . 5. 2 the City may suspend or terminate this contract in whole
or in part, or may call upon the Contractors' surety to perform all
terms and conditions in the contract.
17 . 5. 4 In any proceedings involving the imposition of
sanctions, the City may not impose sanctions if it finds that the
Contractor has taken every possible measure to comply with this
Article 17 , and that good cause exist for some other justifiable
reason for waiving this Article in whole or in part.
To demonstrate every possible measure, the Contractor will furnish
(a) the name of each firm solicited for quotations on each
Subcontract, the price quoted by each, and whether or not the firm
solicited was a minority;
(b) the reason for not Subcontracting with a minority firm when
applicable;
Conditions to the Contract 00700 63
NOWHAMPTON FIRE SIMCN December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
applicable.
17 . 4 . 2 If the Awarding Authority finds that the amount
of MBE participation submitted by the bidder on his/her schedule
does not meet the 5% goal, it will reject the bidder's proposal and
find such bidder ineligible for award of this contract.
17 . 4 . 3 A General bidder shall not change the MBE's
listed in his/her Schedule or make any other such MBE substitutions
without the written approval of the City as to certification and
notification to SOMBA.
17 . 4 . 4 Prior to and as a condition of signing the Owner-
Contractor Agreement, the Contractor shall furnish the City and
SOMBA with signed copies of Subcontracts and approved purchase
orders executed between him/her and each of the MBE' s listed on the
Participation Schedule. If a listed MBE Contractor fails to obtain
a performance or payment bond when requested by the bidder to do
so, said failure shall not entitle the bidder to avoid the
requirements of this Article 17 .
17 . 4 . 5 The Contractor shall not terminate any sub-
contract for, nor perform with his/her own organization, nor assign
to any other contractor or Subcontractor, work designated to an MBE
on the Participation Schedule without the written approval of the
City and notification to SOMBA. Such approval shall be withheld
until the Contractor demonstrates that the Participation Amount is
still met for any substituted MBE, provided however,that compliance
with this paragraph shall not limit the terms of M.G.L. Chapter
149 , Section 44F.
17 . 4 . 6 Any changes or substitutions of the officers or
stockholders in an MBE that reduces the minority or woman ownership
or control to less than the requisite percentage will result in the
automatic revocation of that MBE's or WBE's certified status.
If an MBE listed on the Schedule has its certified status revoked,
the Contractor shall consider his/her compliance with this Article
17 terminated and must proceed as outlined in the following
paragraph.
17 . 4 . 7 Any bidder or Contractor must provide information
as its is necessary in the judgement of the City or SOMBA to
ascertain compliance with the terms of this Article 17 .
17 . 4 . 8 If the Contractor desires to comply with this
Article 17 , but for reasons beyond his/her control cannot do so in
accordance with the Participation Schedule, the Contractor must
submit to the City the reason for his/her inability to comply and
Conditions to the Contract 00700 62
NORTHAMPTON YM STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
17 . 3 . 3 Submission of an application to SOMBA does not
constitute certification by SOMBA. SOMBA requires a minimum of
thirty (30) days from the receipt of a completed application to
make its decision regarding the certification of an MBE applicant.
17 . 3 . 4 Joint Ventures
(a) In the case of a joint venture between an
MBE and a non-certified business, the joint
venture shall be certified by SOMBA if the
certified MBE shall have at least 51% control
over the management and receipt of profits of
the project bid upon.
(b) In the case of a joint venture between an
MBE and a non-certified business in which the
MBE does not exercise more than 51% control
over management and profits, the joint venture
shall be entitled to a credit as an MBE for
that proportion of the joint venture's
contract equal to the MBE participation in the
joint venture, except in the case of (c)
* below.
(c) Whenever a bid is filed by a joint
venture with an MBE participant in the joint
venture that does not exercise more than 51%
control over management and profits, that
joint venture shall be entitled to credit as
an MBE for the lesser of the following
amounts: (1) that proportion of the joint
venture's item 1 price equal to the MBE
participation in the joint venture, or (2) 250
of the Amount of Participation.
(d) Whenever a joint venture with an MBE
participant files a bid or sub-bid, and
requests a credit as an MBE, that bid must be
accompanied by the joint venture agreement for
that joint venture.
17 .4 Compliance
17 .4 . 1 If the Participation Schedule is materially
incomplete, the City may consider the bid informal as to substance
and reject the bid. If the schedule is incomplete in other
respects, the City may consider the bid informal as to form and may
waive the informalities upon the satisfactory completion of the
required information by the bidder and the minority Contractor as
Conditions to the Contract 00700 61
NOON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts `'
(d) the business is an on-going concern, not
created solely for the purpose of taking
advantage of set-aside programs.
17 . 1. 5 "Amount of Participation" means the actual dollar
amount to be paid to MBE's for Work performed on this Contract in
accordance with this program.
17 . 2 Conditions: All Contractors, Subcontractors, Sub-
subcontractors, and the like agree to be bound by the commitments
and obligations outlined in the sections below, as applicable.
17 . 2 . 1 The apparent low general bidder must submit a
Letter of Intent within five days of the bid opening, as required
by the Instructions to Bidders. All Bidders must submit a MBE
Participation Schedule with their bids. This schedule shall list
those MBE's with whom the Contractor intends to directly
subcontract, and also any MBE's listed by filed sub-bidders. Said
schedule shall state the amount to be paid each MBE.
The amount of participation of MBE's listed in this schedule must
total at least 5% . MBE's listed on this schedule must be on the
SOMBA list of approved MBE's at the time of the receipt of bids.
17 . 2 . 2 Subcontractors are encouraged, but not required
to Subcontract portions of their work to MBE's. Participation
forms, available with the bidding documents, shall be used to list
those MBE's with whom they wish to sub-subcontract and the dollar
amount of those proposed sub-subcontracts.
17 . 2 . 3 Material suppliers will be considered for
compliance under paragraphs 17 . 2 . 1 and 17 . 2 . 2 .
17 . 3 Determination of MBE Status
17 . 3 . 1 Any Contractor, Subcontractor or Sub-
Subcontractor may apply to SOMBA for MBE status. Applications must
be made on the application form prepared by SOMBA and available
from SOMBA. Applicants can be certified only by SOMBA, and
certification as a "Minority Business" by other agencies does not
fulfill the requirements of this Article 17 .
17 . 3 .2 SOMBA will be responsible for preparing,
publishing, and updating a list of certified minority-owned
contracting and Subcontracting businesses. The list that is most
current at the time the Work is advertised shall govern, and
bidders are expected to use it as a reference source in meeting the
requirements of this Article 17 .
Conditions to the Contract 00700 60
NORTBAMPTCN FIRE STmCN 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts December
17. 1. 1 "Minority" means a person who is a citizen of
permanent resident of the United States and who is either
(a) Black (persons having origins in any of
the Black racial groups of Africa. )
(b) Hispanic (persons of Mexican, Puerto
Rican, Cuban, Central or South American
origin) ;
(c) Native American (persons having origins
in any of the original peoples of North
America, and who are recognized as native
Americans by a tribal organization) ;
(d) Eskimo & Aleut (persons having origins in
any of the original peoples of Northern
Canada, Greenland, Alaska, and Eastern
Siberia) ;
(e) Asian (persons having origins in any of
the original peoples of the Far East,
Southeast Asia, the Indian Subcontinent or the
Pacific Islands, for example-China, Japan,
Korea, the Phillipine Islands, Samoa) ; or
(f) Cape Verdean (persons having origins in
any of the original peoples of Cape Verde
Islands who are of Black African origin) .
17. 1. 2 "SOMBA" means the State Office of Minority
Business Assistance, 100 Cambridge Street, Room 1300, Boston,
Massachusetts 02202 .
17. 1. 3 "Department" means the Department of Community
Affairs as defined in the Supplementary Conditions.
17 . 1. 4 "Minority Business Enterprise" (MBE) means a
business organization, certified by SOMBA, which can demonstrate
that:
(a) minority persons beneficially own and
control at least 51% of the business:
(b) minority persons have dominant control in
the management and operation of the business;
(c) minority persons have made a substantial
investment in the business; and
Conditions to the Ccntract 00700 59
in
NORrBAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996 AWOK
Northampton, Massachusetts
contract;
C. The termination or cancellation of the Contract, in whole
or in part, unless the Contractor is able to demonstrate
within a specified time his compliance with the terms of
the Contract;
d. The denial to the Contractor of the right to participate
in any future contracts awarded by the Department for a
period of up to three years.
16. 6 . 3 . If at any time after the imposition of one or
more of the above sanctions a Contractor is able to demonstrate
that he is in compliance with these regulations he may request the
Department in consultation with the City, to suspend the sanctions
conditionally, pending a final determination by the Department as
to whether the Contractor is in compliance. After receiving a
final report, the Department shall either lift the sanctions or
reimpose them.
16 . 7 . Certification
16 . 7 . 1. The Contractor's Certification Form must be
signed by all successful low bidders prior to award by the City.
16 . 7 . 2 . The Contractor receiving the award of the
contract shall be required to obtain from each of its
Subcontractors filed or nonfiled and submit to the City prior to
the performance of any Work under said Subcontract, a certification
by said Subcontractor, regardless of tier, that it will comply with
the minority manpower ratio and specific affirmative action steps.
The form for this certificate shall be as shown under the "Form of
Subcontract" , in the "Contract Forms" section of this document.
16.7. 3 . In order to ensure that the said Subcontractors'
certification becomes a part of all Subcontracts under the prime
contract, no Subcontract shall be executed until an authorized
representative of the City administering this project has
determined, in writing, that the said certification has been
incorporated in such Subcontract, regardless of tier. Any
Subcontract executed without such written approval shall be void.
17 . ARTICLE 17
NORTHAMPTON MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PROGRAM
17 . 1 Definitions: For purposes of this program, the
following definitions shall prevail:
Conditions to the Contract 00700 58
NOR1HAMPTON FM STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
which may be determined by the City or the Department to affect the
employment of personnel. This provision shall apply only to
information pertinent to the Commonwealth's affirmative action
contract requirements. Where information required is in the
exclusive possession of another who fails or refuses to furnish
this information, the Contractor shall so certify to the City or
the Department as appropriate and shall set forth what efforts he
has made to obtain the information.
16 . 6. 2 . Whenever the City' s EEO Officer, the MCAD, the
Department or the Liaison Committee believes the Contractor may not
be operating in compliance with the terms of these requirements,
the Department shall conduct an investigation, and may confer with
the parties, to determine if such Contractor is operating in
compliance with the terms of this section. No investigation by the
Department shall be initiated without prior notice to the
Contractor. If the Department finds the Contractor not in
compliance, it shall make a preliminary report on non-compliance,
and notify such Contractor in writing of such steps as will in the
judgement of the Department bring such Contractor into compliance.
A copy of such report shall be sent to the Department's Affirmative
Action Officer. In the event that such Contractor fails or refuses
to fully perform such steps, the Department shall make a report of
non-compliance to the Department which will then conduct an
investigation and should it find such Contractor to be in non-
compliance, it will recommend, in a final report, the imposition of
one or more of the sanctions listed below. If, however, the
Department believes the Contractor has taken or is taking every
possible measure to achieve compliance, it shall not make a final
report of non-compliance. within fourteen days of a final report
the Department shall after due notice and an opportunity to be
heard, move to impose one or more the following sanctions to attain
full and effective compliance:
a. For each week that the Contractor fails or refuses to
comply, the Department may recover from the Contractor,
1/100 of 1% of the contract award price or $1000
whichever sum is greater, in the nature of liquidated
damages or if a Subcontractor is in non-compliance, the
Department may recover from the Contractor, 1/10 of 1% of
the Subcontract price, or $400 whichever sum is greater,
in the nature of liquidated damages, to be assessed by
the Contractor as a back charge against the subcontractor
for each week that such party fails or refuses to comply.
b. The suspension of any payment or part thereof due under
the contract until such time as the Contractor is able to
demonstrate his compliance with the terms of the
Conditions to the Contract 00700 57
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts `
Contractor shall rely on referrals from a multiemployer affirmative
action program approved by the Department or The Commission; three
agencies designated by the Liaison Committee: and traditional
referral methods utilized by the construction industry, where such
referrals are need to meet minority hiring requirements. The
Contractor shall keep accurate records of such requests for
referrals.
16. 3 . 3 . Records of employment referral orders, prepared
by the Contractor, shall be made available to the City and to the
Liaison Committee on request.
16. 3 . 4 . The Commission, or designee of the City, and a
designee of the Liaison Committee shall each have right of access
to the construction site.
16. 4 . Work Force Tables
16 . 4 . 1 . Quarterly Projected Work Force: The Contractor
shall prepare projected work force tables on a quarterly basis.
These shall be broken down into projections by week of workers
required in each trade. Updated copies shall be furnished to the
City' s EEO Officer and the Liaison Committee, one week in advance
of the commencement of work and of each quarter thereafter.
Quarters shall begin on January 1, April 1, July 1 and October 1.
No work shall begin until projected work force tables are received
by the City's EEO Officer.
16 . 4 . 2 . Weekly Actual Work Force Table: The Contractor
shall prepare a report due after each week of activity, reflecting
the actual working hours of all personnel identified as minority or
non-minority. It shall be received by the City and the Liaison
Committee no later than Friday following the week reported.
16. 5. Liaison Committee
16. 5. 1. The Contractor (or his agent, if any, designated
by him as the on-site Equal Employment Opportunity Officer) shall
recognize the Liaison Committee as an affirmative action body, and
shall establish a continuing working relationship with the Liaison
Committee, consulting with the Liaison Committee on all matters
related to minority recruitment, referral, employment and training.
16. 6. Compliance - Information, Reports and Sanctions
16. 6. 1. The Contractor will provide all information and
reports required by the City or the Department on instructions
issued by either of them and will permit access to its facilities
and any books, records, accounts and other sources of information
Conditions to the Contract 00700 56
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
of employment of the grounds of race, color, religious creed,
national origin, age, handicap, or sex, and to eliminate and remedy
any effects of such discrimination in the past. Such affirmative
action shall entail positive and aggressive measures to ensure
equal opportunity in the areas of hiring, upgrading, demotion or
transfer, recruitment, layoff or termination, rate of compensation,
and in-service or apprenticeship training programs . This
affirmative action shall include all action required to guarantee
equal employment oppertunity for all persons, regardless of race,
color, religious creed, national origin, age or sex. A purpose of
this provision is to ensure to the fullest extent possible an
adequate supply of skilled tradesmen on this public construction
project.
16 . 2 . 3 . Fcr Work under this Contract a Contractor will
not discriminate on grounds of race, color, religious creed,
national origin, age or sex in employment practices, in the
selection or retention of Subcontractors, or in the procurement of
materials and rentals of equipment.
16 . 2 . 4 . If a Contractor shall use any Subcontractor on
any work under this contract, he shall take affirmative action to
negotiate with qualif ied minority Subcontractors. This affirmative
action shall cover both pre-bid and post-bid periods. It shall
include notification to the State Office for Minority Business
Assistance (SOMBA) or its designees, while bids are in preparation,
of all products, Work, or services for which the Contractor intends
to negotiate bids .
16 . 2 . 5 . In solicitations either by competitive bidding
or negotiation wade by a Contractor either for Work under a
Subcontractor or for the procurement of materials or equipment,
each potential Subcontractor or supplier shall be notified in
writing of the Contractor's obligations under this Contract
relative to nondiscrimination and affirmative action.
16. 3 . Minority Goal
16 . 3 . 1 . As part of his obligation of remedial action
under the foregoing section, the Contractor shall maintain on this
project a percent ratio of minority employee man-hours in each job
category not less than Five (5) percent. Such job categories shall
include but not be limited to bricklayers, carpenters, cement
masons, electricians, ironworkers, operating engineers, and those
"classes of Work" enumerated in Section 44C of Chapter 149 of the
Massachusetts General Laws.
16. 3 . 2 . Referrals: In the hiring of minority
= journeymen, apprentices, trainees and advanced trainees, the
Conditions to the Contract 00700 55
N0RIE9*%YTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996 Aawk
Northamptcn, Massachusetts
16. ARTICLE 16
NORTHAMPTON CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM
16. 1. Definitions: For purposes of this program, the
following additional definitions shall prevail:
16 . 1. 1. "Minority" refers to Asian-Americans, Blacks,
Spanish Surnamed Americans, North American Indians, and Cape
Verdeans.
16 . 1. 2 . "Commission" or "MCAD" refers to the
Massachusetts Commission Against Discrimination.
16. 1. 3 . "Contractor" refers to the Contractor and all
Subcontractors, Filed, and Unfiled.
16. 1. 4 . "Liaison Committee" refers to a body established
for the life of this Contract at the discretion of the Commission,
composed of one representative each from the agency or agencies
administering this project, the Commission, and such other
representatives as may be designated by the Commission in
conjunction with the administering agency or agencies.
16. 1. 5. "E. E.O. Officer" refers to Equal Employment
Opportunity Officer, those person designated by the Contractor, the
City, or any other agency or party having jurisdiction in this
contract, that serve in a capacity to implement this Article.
16. 2 . Conditions: During the performance of this Contract,
the Contractor for himself, his assignees, and successors in
interest, agrees as follows:
16. 2 . 1. For Work under this Contract, a Contractor shall
not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment
because of race, color, religious creed, national origin, age,
handicap, or sex. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not
be limited to, the following: employment upgrading, demotion or
transfer; recruitment advertising; recruitment layoff; termination;
rates of pay or other forms of compensation; conditions or
privileges of employment; and selection for apprenticeship. The
Contractor shall post in conspicuous places, available for
employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided by
the Commission setting forth the provisions of the Fair Employment
Practices Law of the Commonwealth.
16. 2 . 2 . For Work under this Contract, a Contractor shall
undertake in good faith affirmative action measures designed to
eliminate any discriminatory barriers in the terms and conditions
Conditions to the Contract 00700 54
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 2 - ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS
Articles set forth under Part 2 of this section are additional
conditions not covered in the A. I.A. General Conditions.
15. ARTICLE 15
LABOR REQUIREMENTS OF THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS
15. 1. Labor Laws
15 . 1. 1. The Contractor and the Subcontractors shall
conform to applicable provisions of M.G.L. Chapter 149 , as amended.
15 . 1. 2 . No laborer, workman, mechanic, foreman or
inspector working in the employment of the Contractor,
Subcontractor or other person doing or contracting to do the whole
or part of the Work contemplated by this Contract, shall be
required or permitted to work any more than eight hours in any one
day, or more than 48 hours in any one week, or more than six days
in any one week, except in cases of emergency.
15 . 1. 3 . Every employee on the Work shall lodge, board,
and trade where and with whom he elects, and the Contractor and any
Subcontractor shall not directly or indirectly require, as a
condition of employment in said Work, that an employee lodge,
board, or trade at a particular place or with a particular person.
15 . 1. 4 . The Contractor and each Subcontractor shall give
preference in employment of mechanics, apprentices, teamsters,
chauffeurs and laborers, first to citizens of the Commonwealth who
have been residents of the Commonwealth for at least six months at
the commencement of their employment and who are veterans as
defined in clause 43 of Section 7 of Chapter 4 of the General Laws,
and who are qualified to perform the Work to which the employment
relates; and secondly, to citizens of the Commonwealth generally,
and if they cannot be obtained in sufficient numbers, then to
citizens of the United States.
15 . 2 . Executive Orders
15.2 . 1. The Contractor shall comply with the provisions
of M.G.L. Chapter 151B; Executive Order No. 227, Governor's Code of
Fair Practices, amending and Revising Executive Orders No. 116 and
117 ; Executive Order No. 237 pertaining to minority and women
business development; Executive Order No. 246 pertaining to the
handicapped and all regulations promulgated pursuant thereto. The
aforementioned law, Executive Orders, and regulations are
incorporated herein by reference and made a part of this Contract.
Conditions to the Contract 00700 53
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION der 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
14 . 1. 1. If the Work is stopped for a period of 30 days
under any order of any court or other public Authority having
jurisdiction or as a result of an act of government, such as a
declaration of a national emergency make materials unavailable,
through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, or
their Designers or employees, or any other person performing any of
the Work under a contract with the Contractor, then the Contractor
may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and
Designer, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment
for all Work executed and for any proven loss sustained upon any
materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery,
including reasonable profit and damages.
14 . 2 . Termination By The Owner
14 . 2 . 1 . If the Contractor is adjudged a bankrupt, or if
he makes a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors, or
if a receiver is appointed on account of his insolvency, or if he
persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails, except in cases for
which extension of time is provided, to supply enough properly
skilled workmen or proper materials, or if he fails to make prompt
payment to Subcontractors or for materials or labor, or
persistently disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or
orders of any public authority having jurisdiction, or otherwise is
guilty of a substantial violation of a provision of the Contract
Documents, then the Owner, upon certification by the Designer that
sufficient cause exists to justify such action may, without
prejudice to any right or remedy and after giving the Contractor
and his surety, if any, seven days' written notice, terminate the
employment of the Contractor and take possession of the site and of
all materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and
machinery thereon owned by the Contractor and may finish the Work
by whatever method he may deem expedient. In such case the
Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment
until the Work is finished.
14 . 2 . 2 . If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum
exceeds the costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for
the Designer' s additional services made necessary thereby, such
excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed the
unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the
Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or to the Owner, as
the case may be, shall be certified by the Designer, upon
application, in the manner provided in Paragraph 9 . 4 , and this
obligation for payment shall survive the termination of the
Contract.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Conditions to the Contract 00700 52
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
13 . 2 . 7 . Nothing contained in this Paragraph 13 . 2 shall
be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to
any other obligation which the Contractor might have under the
Contract Documents, including Paragraph 4 . 5 hereof. The
establishment of the time period of one year after the Date of
Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be
prescribed by law or by the terms of any warranty required by the
Contract Documents relates only to the specific obligation of the
Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time
within which his obligation to comply with the Contract Documents
may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which
proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's
liability with respect to his obligations other than specifically
to correct the Work.
13 . 3 . Acceptance of Defective or Non-Conforming Work
13 . 3 . 1 . If the Owner prefers to accept defective or
nonconforming Work, he may do so instead of requiring its removal
and correction, in which case a Change Order will be issued to
reflect a reduction in the Contract Sum where appropriate and
equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final
payment has been made.
13 . 4 . Special Guarantees And Warranties
13 . 4 . 1 . All guarantees and warranties required in the
various Sections of the Specifications which originate with a
Subcontractor or manufacturer must be delivered to the Designer
before final payment to the Contractor may be made for the amount
of that subtrade or for the phase of Work to which the guarantee or
warranty relates.
13 . 4 . 2 . The failure to deliver a required guarantee or
warranty shall be held to constitute a failure of the Subcontractor
to fully complete his Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
13 . 4 . 3 . The Contractor's obligation to correct Work as
set forth in Paragraph 13 . 2 is in addition to, and not in
substitution of, such guarantees or warranties as may be required
in the various Sections of the Specifications.
14. ARTICLE 14
TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT
14 . 1. Termination By the Contractor
Conditions to the Contract 00700 51
NORTH FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
the Contract Documents whether observed before or after Substantial
Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed.
The Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such rejected
Work, including compensation for the Designer's additional services
made necessary thereby.
13 . 2 . 2 . If, within one year after the Date of
Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or
within one year after acceptance by the Owner of designated
equipment or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed
by law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required
by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be defective
or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor
shall correct it promptly after receipt of a written notice from
the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the
Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. This obligation
shall survive termination of the Contract. The Owner shall give
such notice promptly after discovery of the condition.
13 . 2 . 3 . The Contractor shall remove from the site all
portions of the Work which are defective or non-conforming and
which have not been corrected under Subparagraphs 4 . 5 . 1, 13 . 2 . 1 and
13 . 2 . 2 , unless removal is waived by the Owner.
13 . 2 . 4 . If the Contractor fails to correct defective or
nonconforming Work as provided in Subparagraphs 4 . 5 . 1, 13 . 2 . 1 and
13 . 2 . 2 , the Owner may correct it in accordance with Paragraph 3 . 4 .
13 . 2 . 5 . If the Contractor does not proceed with the
correction of such defective or non-conforming Work within a
reasonable time fixed by written notice from the Designer, the
Owner may remove it and may store the materials or equipment at the
expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the cost
of such removal and storage within ten days thereafter, the Owner
may upon ten additional days' written notice sell such Work at
auction or at private sale and shall account for the net proceeds
thereof, after deducting all the costs that should have been borne
by the Contractor, including compensation for the Designer's
additional services made necessary thereby. If such proceeds of
sale do not cover all costs which the Contractor should have borne,
the difference shall be charged to the Contractor and an
appropriate Change Order shall be issued. If the payments then or
thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such
amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.
13 . 2 . 6 . The Contractor shall bear the cost of making
good all work of the Owner or separate contractors destroyed or
damaged by such correction or removal.
Conditions to the Contract 00700 50
N0TEMUUqY1ON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
12 . 3 . 2 . If the Contractor claims that additional cost is
involved because of, but not limited to, (1) any written
interpretation pursuant to Subparagraph 2 . 2 . 8 , (2) any order by the
Owner to stop the Work pursuant to Paragraph 3 . 3 where the
Contractor was not at fault, (3) any written order for a minor
change in the Work issued pursuant to Paragraph 12 . 4 , or (4)
failure of payment by the Owner pursuant to Paragraph 9 . 7, the
Contractor shall make such claims as provided in Subparagraph
12 . 3 . 1, except as set forth in Subparagraph 3 . 3 . 2 of the
Supplementary Conditions.
12 .4 . Minor Changes in the Work
12 . 4 . 1 . The Designer will have authority to order minor
changes in the Work not involving an adjustment in the Contract Sum
or an extension of the Contract Time and not consistent with the
intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by
written order, and shall be binding on the Owner and the
Contractor. The Ccntractor shall carry out such written orders
promptly.
13 . ARTICLE 13
UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
13 . 1. Uncovering of Work
13 . 1. 1 . If any portion of the Work should be covered
contrary to the request of the Designer or to requirements
specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if
required in writing by the Designer, be uncovered for his
observation and shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense.
13 . 1. 2 . If any other portion of the Work has been
covered which the Designer has not specifically requested to
observe prior to being covered, the Designer may request to see
such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such
Work be found in accordance with the Contract Documents, the cost
of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order,
be charged to the Owner. If such Work be found not in accordance
with the Contract Cocuments, the Contractor shall pay such costs
unless it be found what this condition was caused by the Owner or
a separate contractor as provided in Article 6, in which event the
Owner shall be responsible for the payment of such costs.
13 . 2 . Correction of Work
13 . 2 . 1. The Contractor shall promptly correct all Work
rejected by the Designer as defective or as failing to conform to
Conditions to the Contract 00700 49
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton,. Massachusetts
for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of the net
increase, if any, with respect to that change.
12 . 1. 5 . If unit prices are stated in the Contract
Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if the quantities
originally contemplated are so changed in a proposed Change Order
that application of the agreed unit prices to the quantities of
Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or the
Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted.
12 . 2 . Concealed Conditions
12 . 2 . 1. Pursuant to Section 39N of Chapter 30 of the
Laws, the following shall apply to differing concealed conditions:
If, during the progress of the Work, the Contractor or the City
discovers that the actual subsurface or latent physical conditions
encountered at the site differ substantially or materially from
those shown on the plans or indicated in the Contract Documents
either the Contractor or the City may request an equitable
adjustment in the Contract Price applying to Work affected by the
differing site conditions. A request for such an adjustment shall
be in writing and shall be delivered by the party making such claim
to the other party as soon as possible after such conditions are
discovered. Upon receipt of such a claim from the Contractor, or
upon its own initiative, the City shall make an investigation of
such physical conditions, and, if they differ substantially or
materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or from
those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent
in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents and
are of such a nature as to cause an increase or decrease in the
cost of the Work, the contracting Authority shall make an equitable
adjustment in the Contract Price and the Contract shall be modified
in writing accordingly.
12 . 3 . Claims for Additional Cost
12 . 3 . 1. If the Contractor wishes to make a claim for an
increase in the Contract Sum, he shall give the Designer written
notice thereof within twenty days after the occurrence of the event
giving rise to such claim. This notice shall be given by the
Contractor before proceeding to execute the Work, except in an
emergency endangering life or property in which case the Contractor
shall proceed in accordance with Paragraph 10 . 3 . No such claim
shall be valid unless so made. If the Owner and the Contractor
cannot agree on the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum,
it shall be determined by the Designer. Any change in the Contract
Sum resulting from such claim shall be authorized by Change Order. ,
Conditions to the Contract 00700 48
NOR`i'HAH?TON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
12 . 1. 4 . If none of the methods set forth in Clauses
12 . 1. 3 . 1, 12 . 1. 3 . 2 or 12 . 1. 3 . 3 is agreed upon, the Contractor,
provided he receives a written order signed by the Owner, shall
promptly proceed with the Work involved. The cost of such Work
shall then be determined by the Designer on the basis of the
reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work
attributable to the change, including, in the case of an increase
in the Contract Sum, a reasonable allowance for overhead and
profit. In such case, and also under Clauses 12 . 1. 3 . 3 and 12 . 1. 3 . 4
above, the Contrac-or shall keep and present, in such form as the
Designer may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with
appropriate suppor-ing data for inclusion in a Change Order.
1. Cost of materials entering permanently in the Work,
including cost of delivery:
2 . Cost of labor at the rates found elsewhere in this document
including foremen:
3 . Rental value at fair market rental rates of equipment and
machinery employed directly on the Work (hand tools and minor
equipment excluded) :
4 . A percentage amount of 25% of item 2 above to cover
Workman's Compensa=ion, F. I .C.A. , and unemployment
contributions.
For Work performer by the Contractor with his own forces there
shall be added a percentage fee for the Contractor equal to 15% of
the total of Items 1, 2 , 3 hereinabove.
For Work performed by a filed or non-filed Subcontractor there
shall be added a percentage fee for the Subcontractor equal to 15%
of the total of Items 1, 2 , 3 hereinabove. To this total amount of
the Subcontractor's price there may be added an additional
percentage fee of 10% for the Contractor.
The percentage fee shall be compensation to cover the cost of
supervision, laycut, overhead, bonds, profit, and all other
expenses which are not included in the cost of the Work as defined
above.
Pending final determination of cost to the Owner, payments on
account shall be made on the Designer' s Certificate for Payment.
The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner
for any deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the
Contract Sum will be the amount of the actual net cost as confirmed.
by the Designer. -Then both additions and credits covering related
Work or substitutions are involved in any one change, the allowance
Conditions to the Contract 00700 47
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
be unreasonably withheld.
11. 4 . Loss of Use Insurance
11. 4 . 1. The Owner, at his option, may purchase and
maintain such insurance as will insure him against loss of use of
his property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The
Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss
of use of his property, including consequential losses due to fire
or other hazards however caused, to the extent covered by insurance
under this Paragraph 11. 4 .
12 . ARTICLE 12
CHANGES IN THE WORK
12 . 1. Change Orders
12 . 1 . 1. A Change Order is a written order to the
Contractor signed by the Owner and the Designer, issued after
execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work or an
adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. The Contract
Sum and the Contract Time may be changed only by Change Order. A
Change Order signed by the Contractor indicates his agreement
therewith, including the adjustment in the Contract Sum or the
Contract Time. All Change Orders must be countersigned by the
Administrator in accordance with Paragraph 3 . 1 as supplemented.
12 . 1. 2 . The Owner, without invalidating the Contract,
may order changes in the Work within the general scope of the
Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the
Contract Sum and the Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. All
such changes in the Work shall be authorized by Change Order, and
shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract
Documents.
12 . 1. 3 . The cost or credit to the Owner resulting from
a change in the Work shall be determined in one or more of the
following ways:
. 1 by mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and
supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit
evaluation;
. 2 by unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or
subsequently agreed upon;
. 3 by cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the
parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage
fee, or
. 4 by the method provided in Subparagraph 12 . 1. 4 .
Conditions to the Contract 00700 46
NORTHAMPTON = STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
11. 3 . 5 . (intentionally deleted)
11 . 3 . 6 . The Owner and Contractor waive all rights
against (1) each other and the Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors,
Designers and employees each of the other, and (2) the Designer and
separate contractors, if any, and their subcontractors, sub-
subcontractors, Designers and employees, for damages caused by fire
or other perils to the extent covered by insurance obtained
pursuant to this Paragraph 11 . 3 or any other property insurance
applicable to the Work, except such rights as they may have to the
proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as trustee. The
foregoing waiver afforded the Designer, his Designers and employees
shall not extend to the liability imposed by Subparagraph 4 . 18 . 3 .
The Owner or the Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the
Designer, separate contractors, Subcontractors and Sub-
subcontractors by appropriate agreements, written where legally
required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of all other
parties enumerated in this Subparagraph 11. 3 . 6 .
11 . 3 . 7 . If required in writing by any party in interest,
the Owner as trustee shall, upon the occurrence of an insured loss,
give bond for the proper performance of his duties. He shall
deposit in a separate account any money so received, and he shall
distribute it in accordance with such agreement as the parties in
interest may reach, or in accordance with an award by arbitration
in which case the procedure shall be as provided in Paragraph 7 . 9 .
If after such loss no other special agreement is made, replacement
of damaged work shall be covered by an appropriate Change Order.
11. 3 . 8 . The Owner as trustee shall have power to adjust
and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the parties in
interest shall object in writing within five days after the
occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this power, and if
such objection be made, arbitrators shall be chosen as provided in
Paragraph 7 . 9. The Owner as trustee shall, in that case, make
settlement with the insurers in accordance with the directions of
such arbitrators. If distribution of the insurance proceeds by
arbitration is required, the arbitrators will direct such
distribution.
11 . 3 . 9 . If the O::rer finds it necessary to occupy or use
a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion
thereof, such occupancy or use shall not commence prior to a time
mutually agreed to by the Owner and Contractor and to which the
insurance company or companies providing the property insurance
have consented by endorsement to the policy or policies. This
insurance shall not be cancelled or lapsed on account of such
partial occupancy or use. Consent of the Contractor and of the
insurance company or companies to such occupancy or use shall not
Conditions to the Contract 00700 45
NORTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
that the insurance company will notify the Owner by registered mail
at least 30 days in advance of any cancellation, change, or
expiration of the policies.
11. 2 . Owner' s Liability Insurance
11. 2 . 1 . The Owner shall be named as an additional
insured on the Contractor' s Liability Insurance Policies .
11 . 3 . Propertv Insurance
11. 3 . 1 . The Contractor shall purchase and maintain
property insurance upon the entire Work at the site to the full
insurable value thereof. This insurance shall be taken out in a
company or companies against which the Owner has no reasonable
objection and shall include the interests of the Owner, the
Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub Subcontractors and shall insure
against the perils of fire and extended coverage and shall include
"all risks" insurance for physical loss or damage including,
without duplication, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief. The
insurance shall also cover portions of the Work stored off the site
or in transit which are included in an Application for Payment
under Subparagraph 9 . 3 . 2 . If this insurance is written with
stipulated amounts deductible, the Owner shall not be responsible
for any difference between the payments made by the insurance
carrier and the claim.
11. 3 . 2 . The Contractor shall purchase and maintain such
boiler and machinery insurance as may be required by the Contract
Documents or by law. This insurance shall include the interests of
the Owner, the Contract, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in
the Work.
11. 3 . 3 . Any loss insured under Subparagraph 11. 3 . 1 is to
be adjusted with the Owner and made payable to the Owner as trustee
for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the
requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Subparagraph
11. 3 . 8 . The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor a just share
of any insurance moneys received by the Contractor, and by
appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity,
shall require each Subcontractor to make payments to his Sub-
subcontractors in similar manner.
11. 3 . 4 . The Contractor shall file the original and one
certified copy of all policies with the Owner before exposure to
loss may occur. If the Owner is damaged by the failure of the
Contractor to maintain such insurance and to so notify the Owner,
then the Contractor shall bear all reasonable costs properly
attributable thereto.
Conditions to the Contract 00700 44
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
person or property damage arising out of the ownership,
maintenance or use of any motor vehicle.
11. 1. 2 . The insurance required by Subparagraph 11. 1. 1
shall be taken out in a company or companies authorized to do such
business in the Com."monwealth of Massachusetts and satisfactory to
the Owner and Department and shall be written for not less than any
limits of liability specified herein below, or required by law,
whichever is greater.
1. Workmen' s Compensation and other benefits as required under
Chapter 152 of the Laws, as amended, and Section 34A of Chapter 149
of the General Laws .
2 . Employer's liabilitv with a limit of at least $300, 000 each
accident.
3 . Comprehensive Public Liability including Contractor's Liability
as applicable to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 4 . 18 ;
Elevators (if any on the Work) : Completed Operations and Products
Liability: all on the occurrence basis with Personal Injury
coverage and Broad Form Property Damage. Remove the XCU exclusions
relating to Explosion, Collapse, and Underground Property Damage.
Completed Operations Liability shall be kept in force for at least
two years after the date of final completion.
Personal Injury and Accidental Death
Each person $300, 000
$1, 000 , 000
Property Damage
Each Occurrence $300, 000
Aggregate per 12 months $1, 000, 000
Property Damage
Each Person $100, 000
11. 1. 3 . The insurance required by Subparagraph 11. 1. 1
shall include contractual liability insurance applicable to the
Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 4 . 18 . 4
11. 1. 4. Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the
Owner shall be submitted to the Owner simultaneously with the
execution of the Contract. Certificates shall indicate that
Contractual Liability coverage is in force, as well as deletions of
the XCU exclusions. These Certificates shall contain a provision
Conditions to the Contract 00700 43
NORTBAMP7ON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are
in addition to his obligations under Paragraph 4 . 18 .
10 . 2 . 6 . The Contractor shall designate a responsible
member of his organization at the site whose duty shall be the
prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's
superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in
writing to the Owner and the Designer.
10 . 2 . 7 . The Contractor shall not load or permit any part
of the Work to be loaded so as to endanger its safety.
10 . 3 . Emergencies
10. 3 . 1. In any emergency affecting the safety of persons
or property, the Contractor shall act, at his discretion, to
prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Any additional
compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on
account of emergency work shall be determined as provided in
Article 12 for Changes in the Work.
11. ARTICLE 11
INSURANCE
11. 1 . Contractor' s Liability Insurance
11. 1 . 1. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain such
insurance as will protect him from claims set forth below which may
arise out of or result from the Contractor' s operations under the
Contract, whether such operations be by himself or by any
Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any
of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:
. 1 claims under workers' or workmen's compensation, disability
benefit and other similar employee benefit acts;
. 2 claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational
sickness or disease, or death of his employees;
. 3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or
disease, or death of any person other than his
employees;
. 4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury
liability coverage which are sustained (1) by any person
as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to
the employment of such person by the Contractor, or (2) by
any other person;
. 5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because
of injury to or destruction of tangible property,
including loss of use resulting therefrom; and
. 6 claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any
Conditions to the Contract 00700 42
NORTHkMPICN FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Norton, Massachusetts
10 . 1. 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for
initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and
programs in connection with the Work.
10 . 2 . Safetv of Persons and Property
10 . 2 . 1. The Contractor shall take all reasonable
precautions for the safety of, and shall provide all reasonable
protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to:
. 1 all employees on the Work and all other persons who may be
affected thereby;
. 2 all the Work and all materials and equipment to be
incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site,
under the care, custody or control of the Contractor or any of
his Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors; and
. 3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including
trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures
and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or
replacement in the course of construction.
10 . 2 . 2 . The Contractor shall give all notices and comply
with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful
orders of any public authority bearing on the safety of persons or
property or their protection from damage, injury or loss.
10 . 2 . 3 . The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as
required by existing conditions and progress of the Work, all
reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting
danger signs and other warnings against hazards , promulgating
safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent
utilities.
10 . 2. 4 . When the use or storage of explosives or other
hazardous materials or equipment is necessary for the execution of
the Work, the Contractor shall exercise the utmost care and shall
carry on such activities under the supervision of properly
qualified personnel.
10 . 2 . 5 . The Contractor shall promptly remedy all damage
or loss (other than damage or loss insured under Paragraph 11. 3) to
any property referred to in Clauses 10. 2 . 1. 2 and 10 . 2 . 1. 3 caused in
whole or in part by the Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Sub-
subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of
them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable and for
which the Contractor is responsible under Clauses 10 . 2 . 1.2 and
10. 2 . 1. 3 except damage or loss attributable to the acts or
omissions of the Owner or Designer or anyone directly or indirectly
employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of
them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence
Conditions to the Contract 00700 41
NORTHAMPI-ON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may
be designated by the Owner. If any Subcontractor refuses to
furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor
may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner -to indemnify him
against any such lien. If any such lien remains unsatisfied after
all payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all
moneys that the latter may be compelled to pay in discharging such
lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees. The
affidavit and consent of surety shall be submitted on AIA forms
G706 "Contractor' s Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims" and
G707 "Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment" .
9 . 9 . 3 . If, after Substantial Completion of the Work,
final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of
the Contractor or by the issuance of Change Orders affecting final
completion, and the Designer so confirms, the Owner shall, upon
application by the Contractor and certification by the Designer,
and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance
due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If
the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is
less than the retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and
if bonds have been furnished as provided in Paragraph 7 . 5, the
written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for
that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be
submitted by the Contractor to the Designer prior to certification
of such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and
conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not
constitute a waiver of claims.
9 . 9 . 4 . The making of final payment shall constitute a
waiver of all claims by the Owner except those arising from:
. 1 unsettled liens,
. 2 faulty or defective Work appearing after Substantial
Completion,
. 3 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the
Contract Documents, or
. 4 terms of any special warranties required by the Contract
Documents.
9 . 9 . 5. The acceptance of final payment shall constitute
a waiver of all claims by the Contractor except those previously
made in writing and identified by the Contractor as unsettled at
the time of the final Application for Payment.
10. ARTICLE 10
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10. 1. Safety Precautions and Programs
Conditions to the Contract 00700 40
NUS FIRE STATIM Decer d 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
Substantial Completion which shall establish t. ;ate of
Substantial Completion, shall state the responsibil], of the
Owner and the Contractor for security, mainten, heat,
utilities, damage to the Work, and insurance, and shy fix the
time within which the Contractor shall complete the itc s listed
therein. Warranties required by the Contract Documec.:s shall
commence on the Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or
designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the
Certificate of Substantial Completion. The Certificate of
Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and the
Contractor for their written acceptance of the responsibilities
assigned to them in such Certificate.
9 . 8 .2 . Upon substantial Completion of the Work or
designated portion thereof and upon application by the Contractor
and certification by the Designer, the Owner shall make payment,
reflecting adjustment in retainage, if any, for such Work or
portion thereof, as provided in the Contract Documents.
9 . 9 . Final Completion and Final Pavment
9 . 9 . 1. Upon receipt of written notice that the work is
ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a
final Application for Payment, the Designer will promptly make such
inspection and, when he finds the Work acceptable under the
Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, he will
promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the
best of his knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of
his observations and inspections, the Work has been completed in
accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents
and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor, and
noted in said final Certificate, is due and payable. The
Designer' s final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further
representation that the conditions precedent to the Contractor's
being entitled to final payment as set forth in Subparagraph 9 .9 . 2
have been fulfilled. Final payment shall be made in accordance
with section 39K of Chapter 30, quoted in Subparagraph 9 . 5. 6
hereinabove, which Section takes precedence over any contradictory
provisions of Paragraph 9 . 9 .
9 . 9 .2 . Neither the final payment nor the remaining
retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits
to the Designer (1) an affidavit that all payrolls, bills for
materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the
Work for which the Owner or his property might in any way be
responsible, have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) consent of
surety, if any, to final payment and (3) , if required by the Owner,
other data establishing payment or satisfaction of all such
obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens
Conditions to the Contract 00700 39
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
Owner. Subject to the provisions of Subparagraph 9 . 6. 3 herein
below, the Designer may also decline to certify payment or, because
of subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent observations, he
may nullify the whole or any part of any Certificate for, Payment
previously issued to such extent as may be necessary in his opinion
to protect the Owner from loss because of:
. 1 defective Work not remedied
. 2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating
probable filing of such claims,
. 3 failure of the contractor to make payments properly to
Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment,
. 4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for
the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum,
. 5 damage to the Owner or another contractor,
. 6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed
within the Contract Time, or
. 7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with
the Contract Documents.
9 . 6 . 2 . When the above grounds in Subparagraph 9 . 6 . 1 are
removed, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of
them.
9 . 6. 3 . The City may make changes in any periodic
estimate submitted by the Contractor in accordance with Section 39K
of Chapter 30 of the General Laws, and the payment due on said
periodic estimate shall be computed in accordance with the changes
so made. The provisions of said Section 39K shall govern payments
pursuant to periodic estimates on which the City has made changes.
The Designer shall mark the date of receipt on the estimate.
9 .7 . Failure of Payment
9 . 7 . 1. If the Owner fails to make payments as set forth
in Section 39K of Chapter 30, the Contractor shall be compensated
as set forth in said Section.
9 . 8 . Substantial Completion
9 . 8 . 1. When the Contractor considers that the Work, or
a designated portion thereof which is acceptable to the Owner, is
substantially complete as defined in Subparagraph 8 . 1. 3 , the
Contractor shall prepare for submission to the Designer a list of
items to be completed or corrected. The failure to include any
items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the
Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents. When the Designer on the basis of an inspection
determines that the Work or designated portion therefor is
substantially complete, he will then prepare a Certificate of
Conditions to the Contract 00700 38
NORTON FM STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
receipt of such demands from Subcontractors . All direct payments
shall discharge the obligation of the City to the Contractor to the
extent of such payment.
(h) The City shall deduct from payments to the Contractor amounts
which, together with the deposits in interest-bearing accounts
pursuant to subparagraph (f) , are sufficient to satisfy all unpaid
balances of demands for direct payment received from
Subcontractors. All such amounts shall be earmarked for such
direct payments, and the Subcontractors shall have a right to such
deductions prior to any claims against such amounts by creditors of
the Contractor.
(i) If the Subcontractor does not receive payment as provided in
subparagraph (a) or if the Contractor does not submit a periodic
estimate for the value of the labor and materials performed or
furnished by the Subcontractor and the Subcontractor does not
receive payment for same when due less the deductions provided for
in subparagraph (a) , the Subcontractor may demand direct payment by
following the procedure in subparagraph (d) and the Contractor may
file a sworn reply as provided in that same subparagraph. A demand
made after the first day of the month following that for which the
Subcontractor performed or furnished the labor and materials for
which the Subcontractor seeks payment shall be valid even if
delivered or mailed prior to the time payment was due on a periodic
estimate from the Contractor. Thereafter the City shall proceed as
provided in subparagraph (e) , (f) , (g) , and (h) .
9 . 5 .8 . Pursuant to section 39F of Chapter 30 of the
Laws, the term "Subcontractor" as used in preceding Subparagraph
9. 5. 7 shall mean a person who files a sub-bid and receives a
Subcontract as a result of that filed sub-bid or who is approved by
the City in writing as a person performing labor or both performing
labor and furnishing materials pursuant to a contract with the
Contractor.
9 . 6 . Payments Withheld
9 . 6. 1. The Designer may decline to certify payment and
may withhold his Certificate in whole or in part, to the extent
necessary reasonably to protect the Owner, if in his opinion he is
unable to make representations to the Owner as provided in
Subparagraph 9 .4 . 2 . If the Designer is unable to make
representations to the Owner as provided in Subparagraph 9 . 4. 2 and
to certify payment in the amount of the Application, he will notify
the Contractor as provided in Subparagraph 9 . 4 . 1. If the
Contractor and the Designer cannot agree on a revised amount, the
Designer will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the
amount for which he is able to make such representations to the
Conditions to the Contract 00700 37
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
if delivered or mailed prior to the seventieth day after the
Subcontractor has substantially completed the Subcontract Work.
Within ten days after the Subcontractor has delivered or so mailed
a copy to the Contractor, the Contractor may reply to the demand.
The reply shall be by a sworn statement delivered to or sent by
certified mail to the City and a copy shall be delivered to or sent
by certified mail to the Subcontractor at the same time. The reply
shall contain a detailed breakdown of the balance due under the
Subcontract including any amount due for extra labor and materials
furnished to the Contractor and of the amount due for extra labor
and materials furnished to the Contractor and of the amount due for
each claim made by the Contractor against the Subcontractor.
(e) Within 15 days after receipt of the demand by the City, but in
no event prior to the 70th day after substantial completion of the
Subcontract Work, the City shall make direct payment to the
Subcontractor of the balance due under the Subcontract including
any amount due for extra labor and materials furnished to the
Contractor, less any amount (i) retained by the City as the
estimated cost of completing the incomplete or unsatisfactory items
of Work, (ii) specified in any court proceedings barring such
payment, or (iii) disputed by the Contractor in the sworn reply;
provided, that the City shall not deduct from a direct payment any
amount as provided in part (iii) if the reply is not sworn to, or
for which the sworn reply does not contain the detailed breakdown
required by subparagraph (d) .
The City shall make further direct payments to the Subcontractor
forthwith after the removal of the basis for deductions from direct
payments made as provided in part (i) and (ii) of this
subparagraph.
(f) The City shall forthwith deposit the amount deducted from a
direct payment as provided in part (iii) of subparagraph (e) in an
interest-bearing joint account in the names of the Contractor and
the Subcontractor in a bank in Massachusetts selected by the City
or agreed upon by the contractor and the Subcontractor and shall
notify the Contractor and the Subcontractor of the date of the
deposit and the bank receiving the deposit. The bank shall pay the
amount in the account, including accrued interest, as provided in
an agreement between the Contractor and the Subcontractor or as
determined by decree of a court of competent jurisdiction.
(g) All direct payments and all deductions from demands for direct
payments deposited in an interest-bearing account or accounts in a
bank pursuant to subparagraph (f) shall be made out of amounts
payable to the general Contractor at the time of receipt of a
demand for direct payment from a Subcontractor and out of amounts
which later become payable to the Contractor and in order of
Conditions to the Contract 00700 36
ms's` NORTHAMPIICN FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
if such a place is so designated. The Contractor agrees to pay to
each Subcontractor a portion of any such interest paid in
accordance with the amount due each Subcontractor.
9 . 5 .7 . The Contractor shall make payments to filed
Subcontractors and to other Subcontractors as defined in following
Subparagraph 9 . 5 . 8 in accordance with Section 39F of Chapter 30 of
the General Laws which provides as follows:
(a) Forthwith after the Contractor receives payment on account of
a periodic estimate, the Contractor shall pay to each Subcontractor
the amount paid for the labor performed and the materials furnished
by the Subcontractor, less any amount specified in any court
proceedings barring such payment and also less any amount claimed
due from the Subcontractor by the Contractor.
(b) Not later than the 65th day after each Subcontractor
substantially completes his Work in accordance with the plans and
specifications, the entire balance due under the subcontract less
amounts retained by the City as the estimated costs of completing
the incomplete and unsatisfactory items of Work, shall be due the
Subcontractor; and ::he City shall pay that amount to the
Contractor. The Contractor shall forthwith pay to the
Subcontractor the full amount received from the City less any
amount specified in any court proceedings barring such payment and
also less any amount claimed due from the Subcontractor by the
Contractor.
(c) Each payment made by the City to the Contractor pursuant to
subparagraphs (a) and (b) of this paragraph for the labor performed
and the materials furnished by a subcontractor shall be made to the
Contractor for the account of that Subcontractor; and the City
shall take reasonable steps to compel the Contractor to make each
such payment to each such Subcontractor. If the City has received
a demand for direct payment from a Subcontractor for any amount
which has already been included in a payment to the Contractor or
which is to be included in a payment to the Contractor for payment
to the Subcontractor as provided in subparagraphs (a) and (b) , the
City shall act upon the demand as provided in this section.
(d) If, within 70 days after the Subcontractor has substantially
completed the Subcontract Work, the Subcontractor has not received
from the Contractor the balance due under the Subcontract including
any amount due for extra labor and materials furnished to the
Contractor, less any amount retained by the City as the estimated
costs of completing the incomplete and unsatisfactory items of
Work, the Subcontractor may demand direct payment of that balance
from the City. The demand shall be by a sworn statement delivered
to or sent by certified mail to the City, and a copy be valid even
Conditions to the Contract 00700 35
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts ""
progress payment, nor any partial or entire use or occupancy of the
Project by the Owner, shall constitute an acceptance of any Work
not in accordance with the Contract Documents.
9 . 5. 6. After the Designer has issued a Certificate for
Payment the Owner shall make payment to the Contractor in
accordance with Section 39K of Chapter 30 of the General Laws which
provides as follows:
Within 15 days after receipt from the Contractor, at the place
designated by the awarding authority if such a place is so
designated, of a periodic estimate requesting payment of the amount
due for the preceding month, the City will make a periodic payment
to the Contractor for the Work performed during the preceding month
and for the materials not incorporated in the Work but delivered
and suitably stored at the site (or at some location agreed upon in
writing) to which the Contractor has title or to which a
subcontractor has title and has authorized the Contractor to
transfer title to the awarding Authority, less (1) a retention
based on its estimate of the fair value of its claims against the
Contractor and less (2) a retention for direct payments to
Subcontractors based on demands for same in accordance with the
provisions of Section 39 F. and less (3) a retention not exceeding
five percent (5%) of the approved amount of the periodic payment.
After the receipt of a periodic estimate requesting final payment
and within 65 days after (a) the Contractor fully completes the
Work or substantially completes the work so that the value of the
work remaining to be done is, in the estimate of the City, less
than one percent (1%) of the original Contract price, or (b) the
Contractor substantially completes the Work and the City takes
possession for occupancy, whichever occurs first, the City shall
pay the Contractor the entire balance due on the Contract less, (1)
a retention based on its estimate of the fair value of its claims
against the Contractor and of the cost of completing the incomplete
and unsatisfactory items of Work less (2) a retention for direct
payments to Subcontractors based on demands for same in accordance
with the provisions of Section 39 F, or based on the record of
payments by the Contractor to the Subcontractors under this
Contract if such record of payment indicates that the Contractor
has not paid Subcontractors as provided in Section 39 F. If the
City fails to make payment as herein provided, there shall be added
to each such payment daily interest at the rate of three percentage
points above the rediscount rate than charged by the Federal
Reserve Bank of Boston commencing on the first day after said
payment is due and continuing until the payment is delivered or
mailed to the Contractor; provided, that no interest shall be due,
in any event, on the amount due on a periodic estimate for final
payment until fifteen days after receipt of such a periodic
estimate from the Contractor, at the place designated by the City
Conditions to the Contract 00700 34
NOFaSAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
9 . 4 . 2 . The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will
constitute a representation by the Designer to the Owner, based on
his observations at the site as provided in Sub-paragraph 2 . 2 . 3 and
the data comprising the Application for Payment, that the Work has
progressed to the point indicated; that, to the best of his
knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the Work is in
accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of
the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon
Substantial Completion, to the results of any subsequent tests
required by or performed under the Contract Documents, to minor
deviations from the Contract Documents, correctable prior to
completion, and to any specific qualifications stated in his
Certificate) ; and that the contractor is entitled to payment in the
amount certified. However, by issuing a Certificate for Payment,
the Designer shall not thereby; be deemed to represent that he has
made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the
quality or quantity of the Work or that he has reviewed the
construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures,
or that he has made any examination to ascertain how or for what
purpose the Contractor has used the moneys previously paid on
account of the Contract Sum.
9 . 5. Progress Payments
9 . 5. 1 . After the Designer has issued a Certificate for
Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the
time provided in the Contract Documents .
9 . 5. 2 . The Contractor shall promptly pay each
Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the
amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor' s
Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled,
reflecting the percentage actually retained, if any, from payments
to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's Work. The
Contractor shall, by an appropriate agreement with each
Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to his
Sub-subcontractors in similar manner.
9 . 5. 3 . The Designer may, on request and at his
discretion, furnish to any Subcontractor, if practicable,
information regarding the percentages of completion or the amounts
applied for by the Contractor and the action taken thereon by the
Designer on account of Work done by such Subcontractor.
9 . 5.4 . Neither the Owner nor the Designer shall have
any obligation to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys to any
Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law.
9 .5. 5 . No Certificate for a progress payment, nor any
Conditions to the Contract 00700 33
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION fiber 16, 1996
Northamptan,__Massachusetts
as supplemented. Such Application for Payment shall be submitted
on a form supplied by the Designer. The form shall show
separately:
(1) The value of Labor and materials incorporated in the Work.
(2) The value, kind, and quantity of each item of material or
equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably
stored at some other location agreed upon in writing.
(3) The value, kind, and quantity of each item of material or
equipment not incorporated in the Work but suitably stored at some
other location agreed upon in writing.
(4) All Change Orders approved up to the date of the Application
for Payment.
9 . 3 . 2 . (intentionally deleted)
9 . 3 . 3 . (intentionally deleted)
9 . 3 . 4 . In no event may materials or equipment be deemed
delivered and suitably stored at the site (or at some other
location agreed upon in writing) , unless the following requirements
are met:
( 1) The materials or equipment are actually ready for prompt use,
as so-called stockpiling is expressly forbidden, except as
otherwise specified or permitted by the Designer.
(2) The materials or equipment meet the requirements of the
Contract Documents and required submittals have been approved by
the Designer.
(3) The Contractor can and will adequately protect the materials
or equipment until they are incorporated in the Work.
(4) The Contractor will pay storage charges and related expenses
if materials or equipment are stored at some other location agreed
upon in writing.
9. 4 . Certificates For Payment
9 . 4 . 1. The Designer will, within seven days after the
receipts of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue
a Certificate for Payment to the Owner, with a copy to the
Contractor, for such amount as the Designer determines is properly
due, or notify the Contractor in writing his reasons for
ho
withlding a Certificate as provided in Subparagraph 9 . 6. 1.
Conditions to the Contract 00700 32
N0F HAMPTONi FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
performed after the time stipulated in the Owner-Contractor
Agreement for Substantial Completion. Such inspection costs shall
include fees paid to the Designer as extra services at the rate
stipulated in the Contract for Designerural Services between the
Owner and the Designer, the costs of the Project Representative at
the current salary rate and any other direct expenses due to
inspection. In no case, however, shall the total amount of
inspection costs exceed an aggregate total computed at the rate of
two hundred dollars per day. The Owner may retain from monies
otherwise due the Contractor whatever sums accrue to the Owner
pursuant to this provision. The Contractor shall not be liable for
inspection costs for delay in performance as provided hereunder for
any period for which an extension of the Contract Time has been
granted pursuant to the provisions of Subparagraph 8 . 3 . 1.
9 . ARTICLE 9
PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9 . 1. Contract Sum
9 . 1. 1. The Contract Sum is stated in the Owner-Contract
Agreement and, including authorized adjustments thereto, is the
total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for the
performance of the Work under the Contract Documents.
9 . 2 . Schedule of Values
9 . 2 . 1. Before the first Application for Payment, the
Contractor shall submit to the Designer a schedule of values
allocated to the various portions of the Work, prepared in such
form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the
Designer may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the
Designer, shall be used only as a basis for the Contractor's
Applications for Payment.
9 . 2 .2 . The Schedule of Values shall contain a separate
item for each Section of these Specifications broken down in such
form as the Designer may require. Each item in the schedule of
values shall include its proper share of overhead and profit.
9 . 3 . Application for Payment
9. 3 . 1. Once each month, on a date established at the
beginning of the Work, the Contractor shall deliver to the Designer
by hand or by registered or certified mail with return receipt an
itemized Application for Payment, supported by such data
substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Designer
may require, and reflecting retainage as provided in Paragraph 9 . 5
Conditions to the Contract 00700 31
NOON FIRE STATION Decenber 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
8 . 1. 4 . The term day as used in the Contract Documents
shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically designated.
8 . 2 . Progress and Completion
8 . 2 . 1. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents
are of the essence of the Contract.
8 . 2 . 2 . The Contractor shall begin the Work on the date
of commencement as defined in Subparagraph 8 . 1. 2 . He shall carry
the Work forward expeditiously with adequate forces and shall
achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time.
8 . 3 . Delays and Extension of Time
8 . 3 . 1. If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the
progress of the Work by any act or neglect of the Owner or the
Designer, or by any employee of either, or by any separate
contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the
Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in transportation,
adverse weather conditions not reasonably anticipatable,
unavoidable casualties, or any causes beyond the Contractor's
control, or by delay authorized by the Owner pending appeal to and
decision by the Administrator" , or by any other cause which the
Designer determines may justify the delay, then the Contract Time
shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the
Designer may determine.
8 . 3 . 2 . Any claim for extension of time shall be made in
writing to the Designer not more than twenty days after the
commencement of the delay; otherwise it shall be waived. In the
case of a continuing delay only one claim is necessary. The
Contractor shall provide an estimate of the probable effect of such
delay on the progress of the Work.
8 . 3 . 3 . If no agreement is made stating the dates upon
which interpretations as provided in Subparagraph 2 . 2 . 8 shall be
furnished, then no claim for delay shall be allowed on account of
failure to furnish such interpretations until fifteen days after
written request is made for them, and not then unless such claim is
reasonable.
8 . 3 . 4 . This Paragraph 8 . 3 does not exclude the recovery
of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the
Contract Documents.
8 . 3 .5. The Contractor and the Surety of the
Contractor's performance bond shall be jointly and severally liable
for, and shall pay to the Owner the expenses for inspection of Work
Conditions to the Contract 00700 30
NOR E AMPT ON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
the requirements of M. G. L. Chapter 30, Section 39R (a) (6) stating:
1. the scope of the audit made by the CPA and
2 . the CPA's opinion of the financial statement as a whole and
exceptions and qualifications to that opinion or
3 . The CPA's statement, with reasons, that an overall opinion
cannot be expressed.
The accountant' s report shall include a signed statement by the
responsible corporate officer attesting that all material facts
were disclosed to the CPA and that the financial statement is a
true and complete statement of financial condition.
7 . 10. 6 . Changes in the method of record keeping which
materially affect any of the statements required by Subparagraph
7 . 10 . 3 through 7 . 10 . 5 shall be reported to the Owner. State the
change, the reason for it, and the date of the change. Include a
statement from the CPA approving or commenting on the change in
conformance with M.G.L. Chapter 30, Section 39R (b) (3) .
7 . 10 . 7 . Subparagraph 7 . 10 . 3 through 7 . 10. 6 shall apply
only to filed subcontractors and general contractors whose
contracts exceed $100 , 000 .
8 . ARTICLE 8
TIME
8 . 1. Definitions
8 . 1. 1. Unless otherwise provided, the Contract Time is
the period of time allotted in the Contract Documents for
Substantial Completion of the Work as defined in Subparagraph
8 . 1. 3 . 1 including authorized adjustments thereto.
8 . 1. 2 . The date of commencement of the Work is the date
established in a notice to proceed. If there is no notice to
proceed, it shall be the date of the Owner-Contractor Agreement or
such other date as may be established therein.
8 . 1. 3 . The Date of Substantial Completion of the Work
or designated portion thereof is the Date certified by the Designer
when construction is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the
Contract Documents, so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or
designated portion thereof for the use for which it is intended.
Conditions to the Contract 00700 29
NOON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
7 . 10 . 2 . These records and the subcontractor' s records
pertaining to this Contract shall be available for examination by
the Owner, Department, Division of Capital Planning and Operations,
and Inspector General for six years after final payment.
7 . 10. 3 . Prior to execution of the Contract the
Contractor shall submit a statement of management on internal
accounting controls to the Owner in conformance with M.G.L. Chapter
30, Section 39R (c) . The system of controls must reasonably assure
that:
(a) transactions are executed in accordance with management's
general and specific authorization:
(b) the transactions are recorded as necessary to permit
preparation of financial statements in conformity with generally ,
accepted accounting principles and to maintain accountability for
asset:
(c) access to assets is permitted only in accordance with
management's authorization: and
(d) the recorded accountability for assets is compared with
existing assets at reasonable intervals and appropriate action was
taken with respect to any difference.
7 . 10 . 4 . The statement of management on internal
accounting controls must have been reviewed by an independent
certified public accountant (CPA) , and that CPA shall file a
statement with the Owner in conformance with the requirements of
M.G.L. Chapter 30 , Section 39R (c) . The CPA's statements must:
(a) state that the internal accounting controls statement was
examined:
(b) express an opinion as to whether management's statement of
internal accounting controls is consistent with management's
evaluation of the system of internal accounting controls; and
(c) express an opinion as to whether the statement is reasonable
with respect to transactions and assets of material amounts in the
context of the firm's overall financial picture.
7 . 10. 5. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner
annually during the term of the Contract a financial statement
prepared by an independent CPA. This statement shall be based on
an audit of the firm's records in accordance with the requirements
of M.G.L. Chapter 30, Section 39R (a) (5) . The financial statement
shall be accompanied by an accountant's report in accordance with
Conditions to the Contract 00700 28
NORTBAM TON FIRE STATION December 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
official, the aggrieved party may file an action dir= :y in a
court of competent jurisdiction and shall serve copies th Hof upon
all other parties in the form and manner prescribed by .-ie rules
governing the conduct of adjudicatory proceedings of the division
of hearing officers. The appeal shall be referred to i hearing
officer experienced in construction law and shall be pros :cuted in
accordance with the formal rules of procedure for the conduct of
adjudicatory hearings of the division of hearing officer::, except
as provided below. The hearing officer shall issue a final
decision as expeditiously as possible, but in no event more than
one hundred and twenty calendar days after conclusion. of the
adjudicatory hearings, unless the decision is delayed by a request
for extension of time for filing post-hearing briefs or other
submissions assented to by all parties. Whenever, because an
extension of time has been granted, the hearing officer is unable
to issue a decision within one hundred and twenty days, s/he shall
notify all parties of the reasons for the delay and the date when
the decision will issue. Failure to issue a decision with in the
one hundred and twenty-day period or within the additional period
specified in such written notice shall give the petitioner the
right to pursue any legal remedies available to him/her without
further delay.
(d) When the amount in dispute is less than ten thousand dollars,
a contractor who is party to the dispute may elect to submit the
appeal to a hearing officer experienced in construction law for
expedited hearing in accordance with the informal rules of practice
and procedure of the division of hearing officers . An expedited
hearing under this subparagraph shall be available at the sole
option of the contractor. The hearing officer shall issue a
decision no later than sixty days following the conclusion of any
hearing conducted pursuant to this subparagraph. The hearing
officer' s decision shall be final and conclusive, and shall not be
set aside except in cases of fraud.
7 . 9 . 3 . The Contractor shall proceed with the disputed
Work as directed by the Designer. Notice must be given to the
Project Representative by the Contractor's superintendent every day
that disputed Work is to be performed. Accurate records of the
nature and extent of the disputed Work and of the time spent and
equipment used on the disputed Work shall be maintained by the
superintendent and verified daily by the Project Representative.
_7 . 10. Record Keeping and Management Controls
7. 10 . 1 . The Contractor shall make and retain for at
least six years after final payment records which reflect the
transactions and dispositions of the firm in accordance with the
requirements of M.G.L. Chapter 30, Section 39R (b) .
Conditions to the Contract 00700 27
NORrMVW N FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
either party may request a written decision from the Administrator.
7 . 9 . 2 . Appeal of an Designer's decision must be made
directly to the Department by certified mail (copy to the Designer
and Owner) within twenty-one calendar days after the date on which
the party making the appeal receives the Designer' s written
decision. Failure to appeal within this period will result in the
Designer' s decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and
the Contractor.
Appeal procedures shall be in conformance with M.G. L. Chapter 30,
Section 39Q which provides as follows:
(a) Dispute regarding changes in and interpretations of the terms
or scope of the Contract and denials of or failures to act upon
claims for payment for extra work or materials shall be resolved
according to the following procedures, which shall constitute the
exclusive method for resolving such disputes. Written notice of
the matter in dispute shall be submitted promptly by the claimant
to the chief executive official of the state agency which awarded
the contract or his/her designee. No person or business entity
having a contract with a state agency shall delay, suspend, or
curtail performance under that contract as a result of any dispute
subject to this section. Any disputed order, decision, or action
by the agency or its authorized representative shall be fully
performed or complied with pending resolution of the dispute.
(b) Within thirty days of submission of the dispute to the chief
executive official of the state agency or his/her designee, s/he
shall issue a written decision stating the reasons therefor, and
shall notify the parties of their right of appeal under this
section. If the official or his/her designee is unable to issue a
decision within thirty days, s/he shall notify the parties to the
dispute in writing of the reasons why a decision cannot be issued
within thirty days and of the date by which the decision shall
issue. Failure to issue a decision within the thirty-day period or
within the additional time period specified in such written notice
shall be deemed to constitute a denial of the claim and shall
authorize resort to the appeal procedure described below. The
decision of the chief executive official or his/her designee shall
be final and conclusive unless an appeal is taken as provided
below.
(c) Within twenty-one calendar days of the receipt of- a written
decision or of the failure to issue a decision as stated in the
preceding subparagraph, any aggrieved party may file a notice of
claim for an adjudicatory hearing with the division of hearing
officers or if the amount in controversy exceeds ten thousand
dollars in lieu of appealing the decision of the chief executive
Conditions to the Contract 00700 26
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having
jurisdiction require any portion of the Work to be inspected,
tested, or approved, the Contractor shall give the Designer timely
notice of its readiness so the Designer may observe such
inspection, testing or approval. The Contractor shall bear all
costs of such inspections, tests or approvals conducted by public
authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall bear all
costs of other inspections, tests or approvals.
7 . 7 . 2 . If the Designer determines that any Work
requires special inspection, testing or approval which Subparagraph
7. 7 . 1 does not include, he will, upon written authorization from
the Owner, instruct the Contractor to order such special
inspection, testing or approval, and the Contractor shall give
notice as provided in Subparagraph 7 . 7 . 1 . If such special
inspection or testing reveals a failure. of the Work to comply with
the requirements of the Contract Documents , the Contractor shall
bear all costs thereof, including compensation for the Designer's
additional services made necessary by such failure; otherwise the
Owner shall bear such costs, and an appropriate Change Order shall
be issued.
7 . 7 . 3 . Required certificates of inspection, testing or
approval shall be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered
by him to the Designer.
7 . 7 . 4 . If the Designer is to observe the inspections,
tests or approvals required by the Contract Documents, he will do
so promptly and, where practicable, at the source of supply.
7 .8 . Interest
7 . 8 . 1. Payments due and unpaid under the Contract
Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such
rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence
thereof, at the legal rate prevailing at the place of the Project.
7 .9 . Disputes
7 .9 . 1. Claims, disputes, and other matters in question
between the Contractor and the Owner arising out of, or relating
to, the Contract Documents or the breach thereof, except as
provided in Subparagraph 2 . 2 . 11 with respect to the Designer's
decisions on matters relating to artistic effect, and except for
claims which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final
payment as provided by Subparagraph 9. 9 . 4 and 9 . 9 . 5 . shall be
decided by the Designer subject to the right of appeal to the
Administrator. If the Designer fails to render a decision within
thirty calendar days after receiving written notice of claim,
Conditions to the Contract 00700 25
NORTHAMPTON EMM STATION December 16, 1996 ,,N%�
Northampton,_Massachusetts
Documents. Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract
or sublet it as a whole without the written consent of the other,
nor shall the Contractor assign any moneys due or to become due to
him hereunder, without the previous written consent of the Owner.
7 . 3 . Written Notice
7 . 3 . 1. Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly
served if delivered in person to the individual or member of the
firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for whom it was
intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified
mail to the last business address known to him who gives the
notice.
7 . 4 . Claims For Damages
7 . 4 . 1. Should either party to the Contract suffer
injury or damage to person or property because of any act or
omission of the other party or of any of his employees, Designers
or others for whose acts he is legally liable, claim shall be made
in writing to such other party within a reasonable time after the
first observance of such injury or damage.
7 . 5 . Performance Bond and Labor And Material Payment Bond
7 . 5. 1. The Owner shall have the right to require the
Contractor to furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of
the Contract and the payment of all obligations arising thereunder
if and as required in the Bidding Documents or in the Contract
Documents.
7 . 6 . Rights And Remedies
7 . 6. 1. The duties and obligations imposed by the
Contract Documents and the rights and remedies available thereunder
shall be in addition to and not a limitation of any duties,
obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by
law.
7 . 6 . 2 . No action or failure to act by the Owner,
Designer or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of any right or
duty afforded any of them under the Contract, nor shall any such
action or failure to act constitute an approval of or acquiescence
in any breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in
writing.
7 .7 . Tests
7 .7 . 1. If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances,
Conditions to the Contract 00700 24
N0Fd-dAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
the work or property of the Owner, or to other work on the site,
the contractor shall promptly remedy such damage as provided in
Subparagraph 10. 2 . 5.
6. 2 . 5 . Should the Contractor wrongfully cause damage to
the work or property of any separate contractor, the Contractor
shall upon due notice promptly attempt to settle with such other
contractor by agreement, or otherwise to resolve the dispute. If
such separate contractor sues the Owner on account of any damage
alleged to have been caused by the Contractor, the Owner shall
notify the Contractor who shall defend such proceedings at the
Owner's expense, and if any judgment or award against the Owner
arises therefrom the Contractor shall pay or satisfy it and shall
reimburse the Owner for all attorney's fees and court which the
Owner has incurred.
6. 2 . 6 . Should the Contractor sustain damage through an
act or omission of a subcontractor of any such separate contractor,
the Contractor shall have no claim against the Owner for such
damage.
6 . 2 . 7 . The settlement of any claim set forth in the
preceding subparagraphs 6. 2 . 5 and 6 . 2 . 6 shall in no case be a cause
for delays in the Work.
6. 3 . Owner's Right to Clean Uo
6. 3 . 1. If a dispute arises between the Contractor and
separate contractors as to their responsibility for cleaning up as
required by Paragraph 4 . 15 , the Owner may clean up and charge the
cost thereof to the contractors responsible therefor as the
Designer shall determine to be just.
7 . ARTICLE 7
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
7 . 1. Governing Law
7 . 1. 1. The Contract shall be governed by the law of the
place where the Project is located.
7 .2 . Successors and Assigns
7 . 2 . 1. The Owner and the Contractor each binds himself,
his partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the
other party hereto and to the partners, successors, assigns and
legal representatives of such other party in respect to all
covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract
Conditions to the Contract 00700 23
N FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
North��tont_ Massachusetts_
6 . ARTICLE 6
WORK BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTOR
6 . 1. Owner's Right to Perform Work and To Award Separate
Contracts
6. 1. 1. The Owner reserves the right to perform work
related to the Project with his own forces, and to award separate
contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other
work on the site under these or similar Conditions of the Contract.
If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved
because of such action by the Owner, he shall make such claim as
provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
6. 1. 2 . When separate contracts are awarded for
different portions of the Project or other work on the site, the
term Contractor in the contract Documents in each case shall mean
the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor
Agreement.
6. 1. 3 . The Owner will provide for the coordination of
the work of his own forces and of each separate contractor with the
Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate therewith as provided
in Paragraph 6. 2 .
6 . 2 . Mutual Responsibility
6. 2 . 1. The Contractor shall afford the Owner and
separate contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction
and storage of their materials, and equipment and the execution of
their work, and shall connect and coordinate his Work with theirs
as required by the Contract Documents.
6.2 .2 . If any part of the Contractor's Work depends for
proper execution or results upon the 'work of the Owner or any
separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with
the Work, promptly report to the Designer any apparent
discrepancies or defects in such other work that render it
unsuitable for such proper execution and results, Failure of the
Contractor so to report shall constitute an acceptance of the
Owner's or separate contractor's work as fit and proper to receive
his Work, except as to defects which may subsequently become
apparent in such work by others.
6 . 2 . 3 . Any costs cause by defective or ill-timed work
shall be borne by the party responsible therefor.
6. 2 . 4 . Should the Contractor wrongfully cause damage to
Conditions to the Contract 00700 22
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
increase in the Contract Sum shall be allowed for any such
substitution unless the Contractor has acted promptly and
responsively in submitting names as required by Subparagraph 5.2 . 1.
5. 2 .4 . The Contractor shall make no substitution for
any Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the
Owner or Designer makes reasonable objection to such substitution.
5 . 2 .5 . Paragraphs 5.2 . 1. through 5. 2 . 4 apply to any
sub-trade included in Item 1 of the Form for General Bid.
5 . 2 . 6 . The award of subcontracts for any sub-trade
included in Item 2 of the Form for General Bid shall be in
accordance with Chapter 149 , Sections 44A to 44H, M.G.L.
5 . 3 . Subcontractural Relations
5 . 3 . 1 . By an appropriate agreement, written where
legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each
Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the
Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by the terms of the
Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the
obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these
Documents, assumes toward the Owner and the Designer. Said
agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and
the Designer under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work
to be performed by the Subcontractor so that the subcontracting
thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the
Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the
Contractor-Subcontractor agreement, the benefit of all rights,
remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by
these Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the
Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar
agreements with his Subsubcontractors. The Contractor shall make
available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of
the Subcontract, copies of the Contract Documents to which the
Subcontractor will be bound by this Paragraph 5 . 3 , and identify to
the Subcontractor any terms and conditions of the proposed
Subcontract which may be at variance with the Contract Documents.
Each Subcontractor shall similarly make copies of such documents
available to his Sub-subcontractors.
5. 3 .2 . Paragraph 5 . 3 . 1 applies to Subcontractors for
sub-trades included in Item 1 of the Form for General Bid.
5. 3 . 3 . The Contractor and each Subcontractor for a sub-
trade listed in Item 2 of the form for General Bid shall execute a
Subcontract in accordance with M.G.L. Chapter 149 , Section 44F.
Conditions to the Contract 00700 21
RTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
5. ARTICLE 5
SUBCONTRACTORS
5. 1. Definition
5. 1. 1. A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a
direct contract with the Contractor to perform any of the Work at
the site. The term Subcontractor is referred to throughout the
Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine in gender
and means a Subcontractor or his authorized representative. The
term Subcontractor does not include any separate contractor or his
subcontractors.
5 . 1. 2 . A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who
has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform
any of the Work at the site. The term Sub-subcontractor is
referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in
number and masculine in gender and means a Sub-subcontractor or an
authorized representative thereof.
5. 2 . Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts For
Portions of the Work
5 . 2 . 1. Unless otherwise required by the Contract
Documents or the Bidding Documents, the Contractor, as soon as
practicable after the award of the Contract, shall furnish to the
Owner and the Designer in writing the names of the persons or
entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment
fabricated to a special design) proposed for each of the principal
portions of the Work. The Designer will promptly reply to the
Contractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the
Designer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any
such proposed person or entity. Failure of the Owner or Designer
to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable
objection.
5. 2 . 2 . The Contractor shall not contract with any such
proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or the Designer has
made reasonable objection under the provisions of Subparagraph
5 . 2 . 1. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with
anyone to whom he has a reasonable objection.
5. 2 . 3 . If the Owner or the Designer has reasonable
objection to any such proposed person or entity, the Contractor
shall submit a substitute to whom the Owner or the Designer has no
reasonable objection, and the Contract Sum shall be increased or
decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution
and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued; however, no
Conditions to the Contract 00700 20
'.N0RT&V4Y1ON FIRE STATION fiber 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
of any patent rights and shall save the Owner harmless from loss on
account thereof, except that the Owner shall be responsible for all
such loss when a particular design, process or the product of a
particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified, but if the
Contractor has reason to believe that the design, process or
product specified is an infringement of a patent, he shall be
responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives such information
to the Designer.
4 . 18 . Indemnification
4 . 18 . 1. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the
Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the
Designer and their Designers and employees from and against all
claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to
attorneys' fees , arising out of or resulting from the performance
of the Work, provided that any such claim, damage, loss or expense
(1) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death,
or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the
Work itself) including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (2)
is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of
the Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be
liable, regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by a
party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be
construed to negate, abridge, or otherwise reduce any other right
or obligation of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to any
party or person described in this Paragraph 4 . 18 .
4 . 18 . 2 . In any and all claims against the Owner or the
Designer or any of their Designers or employees by any employee of
the Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be
liable, the indemnification obligation under this Paragraph 4 . 18
shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or
type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or or for the
Contractor or any Subcontractor under worker's or workmen's
compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee
benefit acts.
4. 18 . 3 . The obligations of the Contractor under this
Paragraph 4 . 18 shall not extend to the liability of the Designer,
his Designers or employees arising out of (1) the preparation or
approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, change
orders, designs or specifications, or (2) the giving of or the
failure to give directions or instructions by the Designer, his
Designers or employees provided such giving or failure to give is
the primary cause of the injury or damage.
Conditions to the Contract 00700 19
M)RTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996 AO"
-Northampton, Massachusetts
4 . 14 . Cutting and Patching of Work
4 . 14 . 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for all
cutting, fitting or patching that may be required to complete the
Work or to make its several parts fit together properly.
4 . 14 . 2 . The Contractor shall not damage or endanger any
portion of the Work or the work of the Owner or any separate
contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering any work, or
by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter the
work of the Owner or any separate contractor except with the
written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor. The
Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or any
separate contractor his consent to cutting or otherwise altering
the Work.
4 . 15 . Cleaning Up
4 . 15. 1. The Contractor at all times shall keep the
premises free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish
caused by his operations. At the completion of the Work he shall
remove all his waste materials and rubbish from and about the
Project as well as all his tools, construction equipment, machinery
and surplus materials.
4 . 15 . 2 . If the Contractor fails to clean up at the
completion of the Work, the Owner may do so as provided in
Paragraph 3 . 4 and the cost thereof shall be charged to the
Contractor.
4 . 16. Communications
4 . 16. 1. The Contractor shall forward all communications
to the Owner through the Designer except however a request for an
appeal or notification of Work under protest must be sent to the
Administrator, copy to Owner and Designer, by certified mail,
return receipt requested.
4. 16.2 . Any such communications shall be in writing,
addressed to the City and be considered given (1) if delivered to
the office of the Designer: or (2) if in a sealed, postage prepaid
envelope, addressed to the City c/o the Designer, deposited in the
United State mail: or (3) if delivered prepaid to telegraph office
for transmission to the Designer's office.
4 . 17 . Royalties and Patents
4 . 17 . 1. The Contractor shall pay all royalties and
license fees. He shall defend all suits or claims for infringement
Conditions to the Contract 00700 18
.NOS FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
mrthampton, Massachusetts
material, product or system for some portion of the Work.
4 . 12 . 3 . Samples are physical examples which illustrate
materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by
which the Work will be judged.
4 . 12 .4 . The Contractor shall review, approve and submit,
with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no
delay in the Work or in the work of the Owner or any separate
contractor, all Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples required by
the Contract Documents.
4 . 12 . 5. By approving and submitting Shop Drawings,
Product Data and Samples, the Contractor represents that he has
determined and verified all materials, field measurements and field
construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and that he
has checked and coordinated the information contained within such
submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract
Documents.
4 . 12 . 6 . The Contractor shall not be relieved of
responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the
Contract Documents by the Designer's approval of Shop Drawings,
Product Data or Samples under Subparagraph 2 . 2 . 14 unless the
Contractor has specifically informed the Designer in writing of
such deviation at the time of submission and the Designer has given
written approval to the specific deviation. The Contractor shall
not be relieved from responsibility for errors or omissions in the
Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples by the Designer's approval
thereof.
4. 12 . 7 . The Contractor shall direct specific attention,
in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data or
Samples, to revisions other than those requested by the Designer on
previous submittals.
4 . 12.8 . No portion of the Work requiring submission of
a- Shop Drawing, Product Data or Sample shall be commenced until the
submittal has been approved by the Designer as provided in
Subparagraph 2 . 2 . 14 . All such portions of the Work shall be in
accordance with approved submittals.
4 . 13 . Use of Site
4 . 13 . 1. The Contractor shall confine operations at the
site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the
Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site
with any materials or equipment.
Conditions to the Contract 00700 17
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
at the Project site during the progress of the Work. The
superintendent shall represent the Contractor and all
communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as
if given to the Contractor. Important communications shall be
confirmed in writing. Other communications shall be so
confirmed on written request in each case.
4 . 10. Progress Schedule
4 . 10 . 1. The Contractor, immediately after being awarded
the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner' s and
Designer's information an estimated progress schedule for the Work.
The progress schedule shall be related to the entire Project to the
extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall provide for
expeditious and practicable execution of the Work.
4 . 10 . 2 . The progress schedule shall show by bar graph or
critical path method, as acceptable to the Designer, in sufficient
detail, clearly the interrelationships between the various
construction operations and the percentage of completion and the
dollar value on the first day of each month for the Work in each
Section of the Specifications and also for the entire work. The
graph shall also show the date that the Work in each Section ,
commenced.
4 . 10 . 3 . A copy of the progress schedule shall be kept in
the Contractor' s field office and be brought up to date each month
to show the actual progress of the Work.
4 . 11. Documents and Samples at the Site
4 . 11. 1. The Contractor shall maintain at the site for
the Owner one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda,
Change Orders and other Modifications,. in good order and marked
currently to record all changes made during construction, and
approved Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. These shall be
available to the Designer and shall be delivered to him for the
Owner upon completion of the Work.
4 . 12 . Shop Drawings , Product Data and Samples
4 . 12 . 1. Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules
and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or
any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or Distributor to
illustrate some portion of the Work.
4 . 12 . 2 . Product Data are illustrations, standard
schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams -W*,,
and other information furnished by the contractor to illustrate a
Conditions to the Contract 00700 16
NORTHAMPr()N FIRE STATION
Northampton, Massachusetts Decenber 16, 1996
approved and authorized, may be considered defective. If required
by the Designer, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence
as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. This
warranty is not limited by the provisions of Paragraph 13 . 2 .
4 . 6 . Taxes
4 . 6. 1. The Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use
and other similar taxes for the Work or portions thereof provided
by the Contractor which are legally enacted at the time bids are
received, whether or not yet effective.
4 . 6 . 2 . The Owner is exempt from payment of the
Commonwealth of Massachusetts Sales Tax.
4 . 7 . Permits , Fees and Notices
4 . 7 . 1. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building
permit and for all other permits and governmental fees, licenses
and inspections necessary for the proper execution and completion
of the Work, which are customarily secured after execution of the
Contract and which are legally required at the time the bids are
received.
4 . 7 .2 . The Contractor shall give all notices and comply
with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of
any public authority bearing on the performance of the Work.
4 . 7 . 3 . It is not the responsibility of the Contractor to
make certain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with
applicable laws, statutes, building codes and regulations. If the
Contractor observes that any of the Contract Documents are at
variance therewith in any respect, he shall promptly notify the
Designer in writing, and any necessary changes shall be
accomplished by appropriate Modification.
4 . 7.4 . If the Contractor performs any Work knowing it to
be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and
without such notice to the Designer, he shall assume full
responsibility therefor and shall bear all costs attributable
thereto.
4 . 8 . Allowances (intentionally deleted)
4 . 9 . Superintendent
4 . 9. 1. The Contractor shall employ a competent
superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance
Conditions to the Contract 00700 15
NORTON FIRE STATION December 1 ;96 "
Northampton, Massachusetts
it conforms substantially, even with deviations, to t ?etailed
requirements for the item in the said specifications" .
However, the Contractor and the Subcontractors are required to
submit to the Designer for consideration as to its equality, a
written notice containing the name and full particulars pertaining
to any items other than the specific or specifics named or
described in the Contract Documents. Such submittal shall in no
event be made later than 120 calendar days prior to the
incorporation of the item into the Work, except in any case in
which (1) the period of time specified in the Contract Documents
for Substantial completion of the Work is less than 120 calendar
days from the time of execution of the Contract. The aforesaid
written notice shall be submitted to the Da signer hamediately
following the execution of the Contract.
Upon receipt of such written notice, the. Designer shall investigate
whether the item in question shall be considered equal to the item
named or described in the Contract Documents . Upon conclusion of
the investigation, the Designer shall, in writing, promptly advise
the Contractor that the item in question is, or is not, considered
the equal of the item named or described as aforesaid, and that
said item may, or may not, be furnished on the Work accordingly. AOW
Such notice must have the concurrence of the Department to be
valid.
In no case may an item be furnished on the Work other than the item
named or described, unless the Designer shall consider the item
equal to the item so named or described, as provided by law.
4 . 4 . 4 . The equality of items offered as "equal" to the
items named or described shall be proved to the satisfaction of the
Designer at the expense of the Contractor or Subcontractor
submitting the substitution.
4 . 4 .5. The Contractor or Subcontractor, as the case may
be, shall assume full responsibility for the prior performance of
any item submitted as "equal" to the specific or specifics named
and assume the costs of any changes in his own Work or in the Work
of other trades which may be due to such substitution.
4 . 5 . Warranty
4 . 5 . 1. The Contractor warrants to the Owner and the
Designer that all materials and equipment furnished under this
Contract will be new unless otherwise specified, and that all Work
will be of good quality, free from faults and defects and in
conformance with the Contract Documents. All Work not conforming
to these requirements, including substitutions not properly
Conditions to the Contract 00700 14
NoFaTR MPTON FIRE STATION December 1.6, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
4 . 3 . 4 . The Contractor, at his own expense, shall do all
engineering required for establishing grades, lines, levels,
dimensions, layouts, and reference points for all trades; shall be
responsible for maintaining bench marks and other survey marks; and
shall replace as directed any bench marks or survey marks which
have been disturbed or destroyed.
4 . 3 . 5 . Unless otherwise required under the Contract
Documents, or directed in writing by the Designer, all Work shall
be done during regular working hours. However, if the Contractor
desires to carry on the Work outside of regular working hours or
Saturdays, Sundays, or Massachusetts holidays he shall allow ample
time to enable satisfactory arrangements to be made for inspecting
work in progress and shall bear all cost with respect thereto. The
owner shall bill the Contractor directly for such costs.
Work done outside of regular working hours without the consent or
knowledge of the Designer shall be subject to additional inspection
and testing directed by the Designer. The cost of this testing
shall be paid by the Contractor whether the Work is found to be
acceptable or not.
4 . 4 . Labor and Materials
4 . 4 . 1. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor,
materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery,
water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and
services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the
Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not
incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work.
4 . 4 . 2 . The Contractor shall at all times enforce strict
discipline and good order among his employees and shall not employ
on the Work any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the task
assigned to him.
4 . 4 . 3 . Except where otherwise specifically provided to
the contrary, the words "or equal" are hereby inserted immediately
following the naming or describing of each article, assembly,
system, or any component part thereof, in any of the Contract
Documents.
In accordance with Section 39M of Chapter 30 of the General Laws
"an item shall be considered equal to the item so named or
described if (1) it is at least equal in quality, durability,
appearance, strength, and design, (2) it will perform at least
equally the function imposed by the general design for the public
work being contracted for or the material being purchased, and (3)
Conditions to the Contract 00700 13
NORTBAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
CONTRACTOR
4 . 1. Definition
4 . 1. 1. The "Contractor" sometimes referred to as the
"General Contractor" , is the person or entity identified as such in
the Owner-Contractor Agreement and is referred to throughout the
Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine in
gender. The term Contractor means the Contractor or his authorized
representative.
4 . 2 . Review of Contract Documents
4 . 2 . 1. The Contractor shall carefully study and compare
the Contract Documents and shall at once report to the Designer any
error, inconsistency or omission he may discover. The Contractor
shall not be liable to the Owner or the Designer for any damage
resulting from any such errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the
Contract Documents . The Contractor shall perform no portion of the
Work at any time without Contract Documents or, where required,
approved Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples for such portion of
the Work.
4 . 2 . 2 . The Contractor shall compare all grades, lines,
levels, and dimensions shown on the Drawings with actual site
conditions, and before commencing work he shall promptly report to,
and await for the reply from the Designer, any inconsistencies he
may discover. The Designer shall reply within five working days.
4 . 3 . Supervision and Construction Procedures
4 . 3 . 1. The Contractor shall supervise and direct the
Work, using his best skill and attention. To this end, he shall
employ a superintendent who shall be on the site all times work is
in progress. He shall be solely responsible for all construction
means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for
coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract.
4 . 3 . 2 . The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner
for the acts and omissions of his employees, Subcontractors and
their Designers and employees, and other persons performing any of
the Work under a contract with the Contractor.
4 . 3 . 3 . The Contractor shall not be relieved from his
obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents either by the activities or duties of the Designer in his
administration of the Contract, or by inspections, tests or
approvals required or performed under Paragraph 7 . 7 by persons
other than the Contractor.
Conditions to the Contract 00700 12
NDRTHAMPTON F,M STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
have the right, from time to time, to occupy and use any portion of
the Project as the Work in connection therewith is substantially
completed, provided such occupancy and use do not unduly interfere
with the Contractor's operations.
3 . 5. 2 . The Designer will, prior to any such occupancy
and use, give written notice to the Contractor, indicating the
areas intended to be occupied and used, and the intended
commencement date of such occupancy and use. Occupancy and use
shall not commence prior to a time mutually agreed to by the Owner
and the Contractor.
3 . 5 . 3 . Upon receipt of such notice of intent, the
Contractor shall promptly secure and submit to the Designer
endorsement from the insurance carrier and written consent from the
surety, permitting occupancy and use of the Work, or any designated
portion thereof, by the Owner prior to Substantial Completion of
the entire Project. The Contractor shall be permitted to cancel
his building risk insurance for building occupied by the Owner.
3 . 5 . 4 . Partial occupancy by the Owner shall not
constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the
Contract Documents nor relieve the Contractor from the obligation
of performing any Work required by the Contract but not completed
at the time of occupancy. Before such occupancy, the Designer will
give the Contractor a list of items to be completed prior to Final
Completion occurring in the areas to be occupied.
3 . 5 .5 . The Contractor shall be relieved of all
maintenance costs of the portion of the Project occupied under this
agreement.
3 . 5. 6. The Contractor shall not be responsible for wear
and tear or damage resulting solely from such occupancy.
3 . 5.7 . The Contract Sum will be adjusted by mutually
acceptable arrangements between the Owner and the Contractor with
respect to heat, electricity, and water furnished by the Contractor
to the portion of the Work so occupied.
3. 5.8 . When any portion of the building is in condition
to receive fittings, appliances, furniture or other property
furnished, or furnished and installed, by the Owner under separate
contracts, the Contractor shall allow the Owner to bring such items
into the building and shall provide all reasonable facilities and
protection therefor.
4 . ARTICLE 4
Conditions to the Contract 00700 11
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION ,
Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1996
(a) The Awarding Authority may order the General Contractor
in writing to suspend, delay, or interrupt all or any part of the
Work for such period of time as it may determine to be appropriate
for the convenience of the Awarding Authority; provided, however,
that if there is a suspension, delay or interruption for fifteen
days or more due to a failure of the -Awarding Authority to act
within the time specified in this contract, the Awarding Authority
shall make an adjustment in the Contract price for any increase in
the cost of performance of this Contract, but shall not include any
profit to the General Contractor on such increase; and provided
further, that the Awarding Authority shall not make any adjustment
in the Contract Price under this provision for any suspension,
delays, interruption or failure to act to the extent that such is
due to any cause for which this Contract provides for an equitable
adjustment of the Contract Price under any other provisions.
(b) The general contractor must submit the amount of a claim
under provision (a) to the awarding authority in writing as soon as
practicable after the end of the suspension, delay, interruption or
failure to act and, in any event, not later than the date of final
payment under this contract and, except for costs due to a
suspension order, the awarding authority shall not approve any
costs in the claim incurred more than twenty days before the
general contractor notified the awarding authority in writing of
the act or failure to act involved in the claim.
3 . 4 . Owner' s Right To Carry Out the Work
3 . 4 . 1. If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry
out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails
within seven days after receipt of written notice from the Owner to
commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with
diligence and promptness, the Owner may, after seven days following
receipt by the Contractor of an additional written notice and
without prejudice to any other remedy he may have, make good such
deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be
issued deducting from the payments then or thereafter due the
Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies, including
compensation for the Designer's additional services made necessary
by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and
the amount charged to th:a Cc ntractor are both subject to the prior
approval of the Designer. If the payments then or thereafter due
the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the
Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.
3 . 5 . Partial Occupancy
3 . 5. 1. Prior to the date of Substantial Completion of
the entire Project stipulated in the agreement, the Owner shall
Conditions to the Contract 00700 10
NDRTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
3 . 2 . 6. The Owner shall forward all instructions to the
Contractor through the Designer. Communications shall be in
writing and be considered given if delivered at the office of the
Contractor; or if in a sealed, postage-prepaid envelope addressed
to the Contractor's office and deposited in the United States mail;
or if delivered prepaid to a telegraph office for transmission to
the Contractor's office.
3 . 2 . 7 . The foregoing are in addition to other duties and
responsibilities of the Owner enumerated herein and especially
those in respect to Work by Owner or by Separate Contractors,
Payments and Completion, and insurance in Articles 6, 9 and 1.1
respectively.
3 . 2 . 8 . Pursuant to Chapter 30 of the General Laws, the
following Section 39 P is included herein in its entirety.
Every contract subject to Section 39 M of this Chapter or Section
44 A of Chapter 149 which requires the City, any official, its
Designer or engineer to make a decision on interpretation of the
specifications, approval of equipment, material or any other
approval, or progress of the work, shall require that the decision
be made promptly and, in any event, no later than thirty days after
the written submission for decision: but if such decision requires
extended investigation and study, the awarding authority, the
official, Designer or engineer shall, within thirty days after the
receipt of the submission, give the party making the submission
written notice of the reasons why the decision cannot be made
within the thirty-day period and the date by which the decision
will be made.
3 . 3 . Owner's Right To Stoo The Work
3 . 3 . 1. If the Contractor fails to correct defective Work
as required by Paragraph 13 . 2 or persistently fails to carry out
the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents , the Owner, by
a written order signed personally or by an Designer specifically so
empowered by the Owner in writing, may order the Contractor to stop
the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order
has been eliminated; however, this right of the Owner to stop the
Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of the Owner to
exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other
person or entity, except to the extent required by Subparagraph
6 . 1. 3 .
3 . 3 . 2 . Pursuant to Chapter 30 of the General Laws, the
following provisions (a) and (b) of Section 39 0 are included
herein in their entirety:
Conditions to the Contract 00700 9
NORTfPAMPION FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
(7) Termination of Contract.
3 . 1.8 . In any instance needing clarification as to whose
signature is required, the Contractor shall seek clarification in
writing from the Designer.
3 . 1. 9 . Work undertaken by the Contractor or a
Subcontractor at the Owner's or any other person's order without
the Administrator's countersignature prior to the start of such
work shall be considered unauthorized work shall not be considered
cause for any extra payment on account of the Contract, and the
Contractor or Subcontractor shall be responsible for performing, at
their own expense any corrective measures required by the
Administrator.
3 . 2 . Information and Services Required of the Owner
3 . 2 . 1. The Owner shall, at the request of the
Contractor, at the time of execution of the Owner-Contractor
Agreement, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that he
has made financial arrangements to fulfill his obligations under
the Contract. Unless such reasonable evidence is furnished, the
Contractor is not required to execute the Owner-Contractor
Agreement or to commence the Work.
3 . 2 .2 . The Owner shall furnish all surveys describing
the physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility
locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of
the site.
3 . 2 . 3 . Except as provided in Subparagraph 4 . 7 . 1, the
Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements,
assessments and charges required for . the construction, use or
occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in
existing facilities.
3 . 2 .4 . Information or services under the Owner's control
shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness to avoid
delay in the orderly progress of the Work.
3 . 2 . 5 . The Owner will furnish to the Contractor, free of
charge, all copies of Contract Documents reasonably necessary for
the execution of the Work, including one set for record purposes.
In addition, the Owner, through the Designer, will furnish to the
Contractor a reproducible transparency and one black line print of
details and clarification drawings issued after the Contract has
been awarded. The Contractor, at his own expense, shall provide
and distribute such number of prints of these transparencies as
required for his own and his Subcontractors' use.
Conditions to the Contract 00700 8
NOS EIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
3 . 1. 2 . The term "Administrator" means the Designer as
defined in Article 2 . 0.
3 . 1. 3 . The term "Construction Advisor" means the
Designer as defined in Article 2 . 0.
3 . 1.4 . The City and its authorized representatives and
Designers shall at all times have access to, and be permitted to
observe and review all Work, materials, payrolls, records of
personnel, conditions of employment, invoices of materials, and
other relevant data and records.
3 . 1. 5 . All communications, except for protests or
disputes, of the Contractor to the Department and its
representatives and Designers must be forwarded through the
Designer. They shall be in writing, addressed to the Department
and be considered given if delivered to the office of Designer
either by hand or if in a sealed, postage prepaid envelope,
addressed to the Department c/o the Designer: or if delivered
prepaid to a telegraph office for transmission to the Designer's
office.
3 . 1. 6 . Items requiring the Administrator's
countersignature as per sub-paragraph 3 . 1. 7 shall be valid only
with the signature of the Administrator or with the signature of
those designated to act in his/her stead. The Construction
Advisor's signature is not sufficient on items requiring the
Administrator's signature.
3 . 1. 7 . Items requiring the Administrator's
countersignature to be valid shall include but not be limited to
the following:
(1) Approval, substitutions, and final selection of Sub-
Bidders pursuant to M.G.L. Section 44F of Chapter 149.
(2) Change Orders, whether or not they affect a change in the
Contract Sum or in the Contract Time.
(3) Written orders, notices, and approvals given by the Owner
pursuant to the Contract Documents or pursuant to any Laws
applicable to this Contract.
(4) Stop Work order.
(5) Certificate of Substantial Completion.
(6) Final payment.
Conditions to the Contract 00700 7
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
the design concept of the Work and with the information given in
the Contract Documents. Such action shall be taken with reasonable
promptness so as to cause no delay. The Designer's approval of a
specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which
the item is a component.
2 . 2 . 15. The Designer will prepare Change Orders in
accordance with Article 12 , and will have authority to order minor
changes in the Work as provided in Subparagraph 12 . 4 . 1 .
2 . 2 . 16 . The Designer will conduct inspections to
determine the dates of Substantial Completion and final completion,
will receive and forward to the Owner for the Owner's review
written warranties and related documents required by the Contract
and assembled by the Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate
for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 9. 9 .
2 . 2 . 17 . If the Owner and Designer agree, the Designer
will provide one or more Project Representatives to assist the
Designer in carrying out his responsibilities at the site. The
duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of any such
Project Representative shall be as explained by the Designer at a
pre-construction meeting.
2 . 2 . 18 . The duties, responsibilities and limitations of
authority of the Designer as the Owner's representative during
construction as set forth in the Contract Documents will not be
modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, the
Contractor and the Designer.
2 . 2 . 19 . In case of the termination of the employment of
the Designer, the Owner shall appoint a Designer whose status under
the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Designer.
3 . ARTICLE 3
OWNER
3 . 1. Definition
3 . 1. 1. The term "Owner" , sometimes also referred to as
the "Awarding Authority" or "Authority" means the City of
Northampton identified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement, a public
body, politic and corporate, organized and existing under the laws
of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts. No member of the City shall
in any way, directly or indirectly be personally liable under any a
of the provisions of this Contract.
Conditions to the Contract 00700 6
NORMAMPTON FIRE STATION 16, 1996
December
Northampton, Massachusetts
performance thereunder by both the Owner and Contractor.
2 .2. 8 . The Designer will render interpretations
necessary for the proper execution or progress of the Work, with
reasonable promptness and within thirty (30) days of request for
interpretation, in accordance with Subparagraph 3 :2 .8 . Either
party to the Contract may make written request to the Designer for
such interpretations.
2 . 2 .9 . Claims, disputes and other matters in question
between the Contractor and the Owner relating to the execution or
progress of the Work or the interpretation of the Contract
Documents shall be referred initially to the Designer for decision
which will render in writing within thirty (30) days.
2 . 2 . 10. All interpretations and decisions of the
Designer shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably
inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in
the form of drawings. In his capacity as interpreter and judge, he
will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both the Owner and
the Contractor, will not show partiality to either, and will not be
liable for the result of any interpretation or decision rendered in
good faith in such capacity.
2 . 2 . 11. The Designer's decisions in matters relating to
artistic effect will be final if consistent with the intent of the
Contract Documents.
2 . 2 . 12 . The Designer's decision shall be subject to the
Contractor's right of appeal to the Administrator, as set forth in
Subparagraph 7 . 9 .
2 .2 . 13 . The Designer will have authority to reject Work
which does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever, in his
opinion, he considers it necessary or advisable for the
implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, he will
have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work
in accordance with Subparagraph 7 .7 . 2 whether or not such Work be
then fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither the
Designer's authority to act under this Subparagraph 2 . 2 . 13 , nor any
decision made by him in good faith either to exercise or not to
exercise such authority, shall give rise to any duty or
responsibility of the Designer to the Contractor, any
Subcontractor, any of their Designers or employees, or any other
person performing any of the Work.
2 .2. 14 . The Designer will review and approve or take
other appropriate action upon Contractor's submittals such as Shop
Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for conformance with
Conditions to the Contract 00700 5
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION fiber 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
2 . 2 . Administration of the Contract
2 . 2 . 1. The Designer will provide administration of the
Contract as hereinafter described.
2 . 2 . 2 . The Designer will be the Owner's representative
during construction and until final payment is due. The Designer
will advise and consult with the Owner. The Owner's instructions
to the Contractor shall be forwarded through the Designer. The
Designer will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to
the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise
modified by written instrument in accordance with Subparagraph
2 . 2 . 18 .
2 . 2 . 3 . The Designer will visit the site at intervals
appropriate to the stage of construction to familiarize himself
generally with the progress and quality of the Work and to
determine in general if the Work is proceeding in accordance with
the Contract Documents . However, the Designer will not be required
to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the
quality or quantity of the Work. On the basis of his on-site
observations as an Designer, he will keep the Owner informed of the
progress of the work, and will endeavor to guard the Owner against
defects and deficiencies in the Work of the Contractor. Aft
2 . 2 . 4 . The Designer will not be responsible for and will
not have control or charge of construction means , methods,
techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions and
programs in connection with the Work, and he will not be
responsible for the Contractor's failure to carry out the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents. The Designer will not be
responsible for or have control or charge over the acts or
omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or any of their
Designers or employees, or any other persons performing any of the
Work.
2 . 2 . 5. The Designer shall at all times have access to
the Work wherever it is in preparation and progress. The
Contractor shall provide facilities for such access so the Designer
may perform his functions under the Contract Documents.
2 . 2 . 6. Based on the Designers observations and an
evaluation of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the
Designer will determine the amounts owing to the Contractor and
will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts, as provided in
Paragraph 9 . 4 .
2 . 2 .7 . The Designer will be the interpreter of the
requirements of the Contract Documents and the judge of the
Conditions to the Contract 00700 4
NpgTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampt-M, Massachusetts
mean "as shown (indicated, etc. ) on drawings or any other
diagrammatic or written reference on the Drawings. "
(2) "Provide" shall mean "furnish and install, complete and ready
for intended use. "
(3) "Directed, " "required, " "permitted, " "ordered, "
"designed, " "prescribed, " and similar words shall mean the
"direction (requirement, permission, order, designation, or
prescription) of the Designer. "
(4) "Approved, " "acceptable, " "satisfactory, " and similar words
shall mean "approved by (acceptable or satisfactory to) the
Designer" .
(5) "Necessary, " "responsible, " "proper, " "correct, " and
similar words shall mean "necessary (reasonable, proper, or
correct) in the judgment of the Designer. "
1 . 2 . 8 . Words in the singular shall also mean and include
the plural, wherever the context so indicates, and words in the
plural shall mean the singular, wherever the context so indicates.
1. 3 . Ownership and Use of Documents
1. 3 . 1. All Drawings, Specifications and copies thereof
furnished by the Designer are and shall remain the property of the
City. They are to be used only with respect to this project and
are not to be used any other project. With the exception of one
contract set for each party to the Contract, such documents are to
be returned or suitably accounted for to the City on request at the
completion of the Work. Submission or distribution to meet
official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in
connection with the Project is not to be construed as publication
in derogation of the City's rights.
2 . ARTICLE 2
Designer
2 . 1. Definition
2 . 1. 1. The duly authorized representative of the Owner
that is responsible for the satisfactory completion of the project.
Juster Pope Frazier of 9 Ashfield St. , Shelburne Falls MA 01370 is
the Designer for this project.
Conditions to the Contract 00700 3
NORTF7MTTON F` RE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
less than triplicate by the Owner and Contractor. If either the
Owner or the Contractor or both do not sign the Conditions of the
Contract, Drawings, Specifications, or any of the other Contract
Documents, the Designer shall identify such Documents.
1. 2 . 2 . By executing the Contract, the Contractor
represents that he has visited the site, familiarized himself with
the local conditions unde-- which the work is to be performed, and
correlated his observations with the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1. 2 . 3 . The intent of the Contract Documents is to
include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion
of the Work. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is
required by any one shall be as binding as if required by all.
Work not covered in the Contract Documents will not be required
unless it is consistent therewith and is reasonably inferable
therefrom as being necessary to produce the intended results.
Words and abbreviations which have well-known technical or trade
meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such
recognized meanings. In case of inconsistent requirements in the
Contract Documents the requirements for the greater quantity or
higher quality shall take precedence and shall be the Contract
requirement.
1. 2 . 4 . The organization of the specifications into
divisions, sections and articles, and the arrangement of Drawings
shall not control the Contractor in dividing the work among
Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be
performed by any trade.
1. 2 . 5 . Where used in conjunction with the Designer's or
Engineer's response to submittals, requests, applications,
inquiries, reports and claims by the Contractor, the meaning of the
term "approved" will be held to the limitations of the Designer`s
responsibilities and duties as specified in the General and
Supplementary Conditions. In no case will "approval" by the
Designer be interpreted as an assurance to the Contractor that the
requirements of the Contract Documents have been fulfilled.
1. 2 . 6. Where reference is made to standards or trade
association publications, it shall mean to refer to the latest
edition and revision thereof, if any, in effect on the date of the
contract Documents.
1. 2 . 7 . Except as otherwise defined in context, the
following words, terms, and phrases shall mean as follows:
(1) "as shown, " "as indicated, " "as detailed, " or "as noted" shall
Conditions to the Contract 00700 2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
1, ARTICLE 1
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1. 1. Definitions
1. 1. 1. The Contract Documents
The Contract documents consist of the Owner-Contractor
Agreement, Advertisement, Bidding Documents, Contract Forms,
Conditions of the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, and all
addenda issued prior to and all Modifications issued after
execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written
amendment to the contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change
Order, (3) a written interpretation issued by the Designer pursuant
to Subparagraph 2 . 2 . 8 , or (4) a written order for a minor change in
the work issued by the Designer pursuant to Paragraph 12 . 4 .
1. 1. 2 . The Contract
The Contract Documents form the Contract for
Construction. This Contract represents the entire and integrated
agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes all prior
negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or
oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a
Modification as defined in Subparagraph 1. 1. 1. The Contract
Documents shall not be construed to create any contractual
relationship of any kind between the Designer and the Contractor,
but the Designer shall be entitled to performance of obligations
intended for his benefit, and to enforcement thereof. Nothing
contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual
relationship between the Owner or the Designer and any
Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor.
1. 1.3 . The Work
The Work comprises the completed construction required by
the Contract Documents and includes all labor necessary to produce
such construction, and all materials and equipment incorporated or
to be incorporated in such construction.
1. 1.4 . The Protect
The project is the total construction of which the Work
performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part.
1. 2 . Execution, Correlation and Intent
1. 2 . 1. The Contract Documents shall be signed in not
Conditions to the Contract 00700 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton,Massachusetts
LABOR REQUIREMENTS OF THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS
15 . 1. Labor Laws
15. 2 . Executive Orders
16. ARTICLE 16
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY REQUIREMENTS
16 . 1. Definitions
16. 2 . Conditions
16 . 3 . Minority Goal
16. 4 . Work Force Tables
16 . 5. Liaison Committee
16. 6. Compliance - Information Reports and Sanctions
16 . 7. Certification
17. ARTICLE 17
MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE
REQUIREMENTS
17 . 1. Definitions
17 . 2 . Conditions
17 . 3 . Determination of MBE Status
17 . 4 . Compliance ,,,"Vok
17 . 5. Sanctions
17 . 6. Hearings and Appeals
CONDITIONS TO THE CONTRACT 00700-TOC 4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton,Massachusetts
9. 1. Contract Sum
9.2 . Schedule of Values
9. 3 . Application for Payment
9 . 4 . Certificates For Payment
9. 5. Progress Payments
9. 6. Payments Withheld
9.7 . Failure of Payment
9.8. Substantial Completion
9. 9 . Final Completion and Final Payment
10. ARTICLE 10
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10. 1. Safety Precautions and Programs
10. 2 . Safety of Persons and Property
10. 3 . Emergencies
11. ARTICLE 11
INSURANCE
11. 1. Contractor ' s Liability Insurance
11. 2 . Owner' s Liability Insurance
11. 3 . Property Insurance
11.4 . Loss of Use Insurance
12 . ARTICLE 12
CHANGES IN THE WORK
12 . 1. Change Orders
12 . 2 . Concealed Conditions
12 . 3 . Claims for Additional Cost
12 . 4. Minor Changes in the Work
13 . ARTICLE 13
UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
13 . 1. Uncovering of Work
13 . 2. Correction of Work
13 . 3 . Acceptance of Defective or Non-Conforming Work
13 . 4. Special Guarantees And Warranties
14 . ARTICLE 14
TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT
14 . 1. Termination By the Contractor
14 . 2 . Termination By The Owner
15. ARTICLE 15
CONDITIONS TO THE CONTRACT 00700-TOC3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton,Massachusetts
4 . 13 . Use of Site
4. 14 . Cuttina and Patching of Work
4 . 15. Cleaning Up
4 . 16. Communications
4. 17 . Royalties and Patents
4 . 18 . Indemnification
5. ARTICLE 5
SUBCONTRACTORS
5. 1. Definition
5.2 . Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts For
Portions of the Work
5. 3 . Subcontractural Relations
6. ARTICLE 6
WORK BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTOR
6. 1. Owner's Right to Perform Work and To Award Separate
Contracts
6. 2 . Mutual Responsibility
6. 3 . Owner' s Right to Clean Up
7. ARTICLE 7
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
7 . 1. Governing Law
7 . 2 . Successors and Assigns
7. 3 . Written Notice
7 . 4 . Claims For Damages
7 . 5 . Performance Bond and Labor And Material Payment
Bond
7 . 6 . Rights And Remedies
7. 7 . Tests
7 . 8 . Interest
7 . 9 . Disputes
7. 10. Record Keeping and Management Controls
8 . ARTICLE 8
TIME
8. 1. Definitions
8 . 2 . Progress and Completion
8 . 3 . Delays and Extension of Time
9. ARTICLE 9
PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION A"*^
CONDITIONS TO THE CONTRACT 00700-TOC 2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton,Massachusetts
CONDITIONS TO THE CONTRACT
Table of Contents
1. ARTICLE 1
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1. 1. Definitions
1. 1. 1. The Contract Documents
1. 1. 2 . The Contract
1. 1. 3 . The Work
1. 1.4. The Project
1. 2 . Execution. Correlation and Intent
1. 3 . Ownership and Use of Documents
2 . ARTICLE 2
DESIGNER
2 . 1. Definition
2 . 2 . Administration of the Contract
3 . ARTICLE 3
OWNER
3 . 1. Definition
3 . 2 . Information and Services Reuuired of the Owner
3 . 3 . Owner's Right To Stop The Work
3 . 4 . Owner' s Right To Carry Out the Work
3 . 5. Partial Occupancy
4 . ARTICLE 4
CONTRACTOR
4 . 1. Definition
4 . 2 . Review of Contract Documents
4 . 3 . Supervision and Construction Procedures
4 .4 . Labor and Materials
4 . 5. Warranty
4 . 6 . Taxes
4 . 7 . Permits. Fees and Notices_
4 . 8 . Allowances (intentionally deleted)
4 . 9 . Superintendent
4 . 10. Progress Schedule
4 . 11. Documents and Samples at the Site
4 . 12 . Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples
CONDITIONS TO THE CONTRACT 00700-TOCI
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton,Massachusetts
MBE Participation Schedule
Project Number:
Project Description:
The Contractor must indicate the MBE it intends to use in the contract, as follows:
Name & Address Nature of Dollar Value of
of MBE Participation Participation
1.
2.
3.
Total MBE Commitment:
Contractor Company Name
Address
Signature, Contractor
This form must be completed and submitted with your bid.
MBE PARTICIPATION SCHEDULE
00420-1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have hereunto set their hands and
seals, and such of them are corporations have caused their corporate seals to be hereto affixed
and these presents to be signed by their proper officers, the day and year first set forth above.
(L.S.)
(Principal)
By
(Surety)
Seal By
BID BOND FORM 00410-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
BID BOND FORM
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the undersigned
as Principal, and
as Surety, are hereby held
and firmly bound unto the City of Northampton, Massachusetts, as Owner, in the penal sum
of
for the payment for
which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs,
executors, administrators, successors and assigns. Signed this day of
19
The Condition of the above obligation is such that whereas the Principal has submitted to the
City of Northampton, a certain Bid, attached hereto and hereby made a part hereof, to enter
into a Contract in writing for the Northampton Fire Station, King Street,in Northampton,
Massachusetts.
NOW, THEREFORE,
(a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or in the alternate,
(b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a Contract in
the Form of Contract attached (properly completed in accordance with said Bid) and
shall furnish a bond for his faithful performance of said Contract, and for the
payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection
therewith, and shall in all respects perform the Agreement created by acceptance of
said Bid.
This this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect; it being
expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims
hereunder shall in no event, exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated.
The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations,of said Surety
and its bond shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which
the Owner may accept such; and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such extension.
BID BOND FORM 00410-1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
undersigned further certifies under penalty of perjury that the said undersigned is not
presently debarred from doing public construction work in the Commonwealth under
the provisions of Section Twenty-Nine F of Chapter Twenty-Nine, or any other
applicable debarment provisions of any other chapter of the General Laws or any
rule or regulation promulgated thereunder.
Date:
(Name of Sub-Bidder)
By:
(Title and Name of Person Signing Bid)
(Business Address)
(City, State and Zip Code)
FORM FOR SUB-BID 00310-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
F. The undersigned agrees that the above list of bids to the undersigned represents bona
r fide bids based on hereinbefore described plans, specifications and addenda
and that, if the undersigned is awarded the contract, they will be used for the work
indicated at the amounts stated, if satisfactory to the awarding authority.
G. The undersigned further agrees to be bound to the general contractor by the terms of
the hereinbefore described plans, specifications, including all general conditions
stated therein, and addenda, and to assume toward him all the obligations and
responsibilities that he, by those documents, assumes toward the Owner.
H. The undersigned offers the following information as evidence of his qualifications to
perform the work as bid upon according to all the requirements of the plans and
specifications:
1. Have been in business under present business name years.
2. Ever failed to complete any work awarded?
3. List one or more recent buildings with names of the general contractor and
architect on which you served as a subcontractor for work of similar character
as required for the above named building.
rw. General Amount of
Building Architect Contractor Contract
4. Bank Reference
I. The undersigned hereby certifies that he is able to furnish labor that can work in
harmony with all other elements of labor employed or to be employed on the work
and that he will comply fully with all laws and regulations applicable to awards of
subcontracts subject to Chapter 149, Section 44F of the General Laws of
Massachusetts.
The undersigned further certifies under the penalties of perjury that this sub-bid is in
all respects bona-fide, fair and made without collusion or fraud with any other
person. As used in this subsection the word "person" shall mean any natural person,
joint venture, partnership, corporation or other business or legal entity. The
FORM FOR SUB-BID 00310-3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
[ ] may only be used by the following general bidders: AW61k
(To exclude general bidders, insert "X" in one box only and fill in blank following
that box. Do not answer C if no general bidders are excluded.)
D. The undersigned agrees that, if he is selected as a sub-bidder, he will, within five
days, Saturdays, Sundays and legal holidays excluded, after presentation of a
subcontract by the general bidder selected as the general contractor, execute with
such general bidder a subcontract in accordance with the terms of this sub-bid, and
contingent upon the execution of the general contract, and, if requested so to do in
the general bid by such general bidder, who shall pay the premiums therefore,
furnish a performance and payment bond of a surety company qualified to do
business under the laws of the Commonwealth and satisfactory to the awarding
authority, in the sum of the subcontract price.
E. The names of all persons, firms and corporations furnishing to the undersigned labor
or labor and materials for the class or classes or part thereof of work for which the
provisions of the section of the specifications for this sub-trade require a listing in
this paragraph, including the undersigned if customarily furnished by persons on his
own payroll and in the absence of a contrary provision in the specifications, the
name of each such class of work or part thereto and the bid price for such class of
work or part thereof are:
Name Class of Work Bid Price
(Do not give bid price for any class or part thereof furnished by undersigned.)
FORM FOR SUB-BID 00310-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
A
FORM FOR SUB-BID
From
(Name of Sub-Bidder)
To all General Bidders Except those Excluded:
A. The Undersigned proposes to furnish all labor and materials required for completing,
in accordance with the hereinafter described plans, specifications and addenda, all
the work specified in Section No. of the specifications and in any plans
specified in such section, prepared by luster Pope Frazier, Architects, 9 Ashfield
Street, Shelburne Falls, Massachusetts, for Northampton Fire Station, King Street,
Northampton, Massachusetts, for the contract sum of
dollars
For alternate No. 1: Add $ Subtract $
For alternate No. 2: Add $ Subtract $
For alternate No. 3: Add $ Subtract $
B. This sub-bid includes addenda numbered
C. This sub-bid
[ ] may be used by any general bidder except:
FORM FOR SUB-BID 00310-1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
The undersigned further certified under penalties of perjury that the said undersigned
is not presently debarred from doing public construction work in the Commonwealth
under the provisions of Section Twenty-Nine F of Chapter Twenty-Nine, or any
other applicable debarment provisions of any other chapter of the General Laws or
any rule or regulation promulgated thereunder.
Date:
(Name of General Bidder)
By:
(Name of Person Signing Bid and Title)
(Business Address)
(City, State and Zip Code)
FORM FOR GENERAL BID 00300-4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
Section 16000 - Electrical
Sub-Bidder $
Total of Item 2: $
The undersigned agrees that each of the above named sub-bidders will be used
for the work indicated at the amount stated, unless a substitution is made. The
undersigned further agrees to pay the premium for the performance and payment
bonds furnished by the sub-bidders as requested herein and that all of the cost of all
such premiums is included in the amount set forth in Item 1 of this bid.
The undersigned agrees that if he is selected as general contractor, he will
promptly confer with the awarding authority on the question of sub-bidders; and that
the awarding authority may substitute for any sub-bid listed above a sub-bid filed
with the awarding authority by another sub-bidder for the sub-trade against whose
standing and ability the undersigned makes no objection; and that the undersigned
will use all such finally selected sub-bidders at the amounts named in their respective
sub-bids and be in every way as responsible for them and their work as if they had
been originally named in this general bid, the total contract price being adjusted to
conform thereto.
G. The undersigned agrees that, if he is selected as General Contractor, he will within
five days, Saturdays and Sundays and legal holidays excluded, after presentation
thereof by the awarding authority, execute a contract in accordance with the terms of
this bid and furnish a performance bond and also a labor and materials or payment
bond, each of a surety company qualified to do business under the laws of the
Commonwealth and satisfactory to the awarding authority and each in the sum of the
contract price, the premiums for which are to be paid by the general contractor and
are included in the contract price.
The undersigned hereby certifies that he is able to furnish labor that can work in
harmony with all other elements of labor employed or to be employed on the work
and that he will comply fully with all laws and regulations applicable to awards made
subject to Chapter 149, Section 44A of the General Laws of Massachusetts.
The undersigned hereby certifies under the penalties of perjury that this bid is in
all respects bona fide, fair and made without collusion or fraud with any other
person.
'"" "` As used in this subsection the word "person" shall mean any natural person, joint
venture, partnership, corporation or other business or legal entity.
FORM FOR GENERAL BID 00300-3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
Section 05500 - Metal Fabrication low
Sub-Bidder $
Section 7610 - Copper Roofing
Sub-Bidder $
Section 8520- Aluminum Windows
Sub-Bidder $
Section 9310 - Ceramic file
Sub-Bidder $
Section 09511 - Acoustic Panel Ceilings
Sub-Bidder $
Section 09651 - Resilient Tile Flooring
Sub-Bidder $
Section 9900 - Painting
Sub-Bidder $
Section 14240 - Hydralic Elevators
Sub-Bidder $
Section 15000 - Fire Protection
Sub-Bidder $
Section 15400 - Plumbing
Sub-Bidder $
Section 15600 - Heating and Ventilation
Sub-Bidder $
FORM FOR GENERAL BID 00300-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
FORM FOR GENERAL BID
From:
(Name of General Bidder)
To the Awarding Authority:
A. The undersigned proposes to furnish all labor and materials required for
Northampton Fire Station in Northampton, Massachusetts, in accordance with the
accompanying plans and specifications prepared by Juster Pope Frazier, Architects,
9 Ashfield Street, Shelburne Falls, Massachusetts for the contract price specified
below, subject to additions and deductions according to the terms of the
specifications.
B. This bid includes addenda numbered
C. The proposed contract price is
dollars
For alternate No. 1: Add $ Subtract $
For alternate No. 2: Add $ Subtract $
For alternate No. 3: Add $ Subtract $
D. The subdivision of the proposed contract price is as follows:
Item 1: The work of the general contractor, being all
work other than that covered by Item 2. $
Item 2: Sub-Bids as follows:
Bonds Required
Indicated by
Sub-Trade and Name of Sub-Bidder Amount "Yes" or "No"
Section 04200 - Unit Masonry
Sub-Bidder $
FORM FOR GENERAL BID 00300-1
ORS f Z
ELEC
ry E
UP P-9 4 A 7"
'
147,22
Pov--
F;p E ------
"CONDU;f' 1 4.8.:�- TER
36
rIN V7
STORY
VETAL
r- '!'J'—!- -U","��,K,'",5� P�,A I
WAREHOu<z
-N 17 t 1 N
?a CW3.c=ems,
pMp
G9AVEL
PROPOSED
STRUCTURE
I-:Vi
Z
t;12kw
FMCE 41
77-7\\\\7,77,
INC
m(r-f--
F-T-1
CLIENT: MCPHAIL ASSOCIATES NEW ENGLAND BORING CONTRACTORS OF CT., INC. BORING No. B-6
129 KRIEGER LANE SHEET 1 OF 1
PROJECT NAME: 306 KING STREET GLASTONBURY,CT 06033
r
(2031633-4649 - (413)733-1232 ARCHITECT/
LOCATION: NORTHAMPTON, MA FAX(203)657.8046 ENGINEER
DRILLER: S. Graves FILE NO. MCPHKING
Casing Sampler Core Barrel
INSPECTOR: T. Cormican TYPE HSA SS SURFACE ELEV.
SIZE I.D. 4-114" 1-3 18"
DATE START: 6-10-96 HAMMER WT. 140 LINE&STATION
HAMMER FALL 30"
DATE FINISH: 6-10-96 OFFSET
I SAMPLE CASING
i BLOWS/
DEPTH
BLOWS PER 6" CORING FIELD CLASS(F(CATION AND REMARKS Well Installation
No. RANGE ON SAMPLER REC. TIMES Cons. Details
IN FEET 0-6 6-12 12-18 18-24 PER FT.
S1 0'-2' 3 3 6 7 18" Brown Fine - Crs. Sand and Gravel, Trace of
Silt
4
S2 5'-7' 4 5 5 5 24" Cray Fine Sand and Silt
a
Gray Clay and Silt
S': 10'-12' 4 5 7 9 16"
S 15'-17' 2 2 3 6"
,,7
End of Boring 17'
;Dater
r
i
l
i
`:OYES: 1)The utntili—oni,—ereseetthe 21 •vatetfe.el fea4�tgetuvc0emtro4e I PVAARKS;
evp OSitMte b—.d.Y Gel——i ih the t"hdef of t.—erM�nCrl
eves. rtenstiotn—Y Le 9'W4 f. ranatoon+stated on the hohN lops.
1 Fl-t—t—in the level of yournl-
,.e•er mer xe,u die to Ixtas ot!t.+
Ilan'USt p-.nt.t the Ime nee ti
etne"ts wde me0e.
JAlrE Il
ICLIENT: MCPHAIL ASSOCIATES NEW ENGLAND BORING CONTRACTORS OF CT., INC. BORING No. B-5
PROJECT NAME: 306 KING STREET 129 KRIEGER LANE SHEET 1 OF 1 GLASTONBURY,CT 06033 _
I (203)633-4649 -- (413)733-1232 ARCHITECT/
LOCATION: NORTHAMPTON, MA FAX(203)657-8046 ENGINEER
DRILLER: S. Graves FILE NO. MCPHKING
Casing Sampler Core Barrel
INSPECTOR: T. COrmican TYPE HSA SS SURFACE ELEV.
SIZE I.D. 4.114" 1.318"
DATE START: 6-10-96 HAMMER WT. 140 LINE&STATION
DATE FINISH: 6-10-96 HAMMER FALL 30" OFFSET
SAMPLE CASING
DEPTH BLOWS PER 6" BLOWS/
Igo. RANGE ON SAMPLER CORING FIELD CLASSIFICATiCN AND REMARKS Well Installation
REC. TIMES Cons. Details
IN FEET 0.6 6-12 12-18 18-24 PER FT.
S1 6"-2'6" 4 9 5 3 13" Blacktop
... .2
Brown Fine - Crs. Sand and Gravel, Trace of
Silt
S2 5'-7' 5 3 13 16 20" Dark Gray Sand, _�,me S'!-L
crown Fine Sard and S:a
I
i
S3 i0' lG' ? 3 7 2-:- i
_ I
Gray C!ay SJt
i
I
S1 15'-17' 2 3 3 2.1"
i
..- 20'-22' 1 0 1 i L4"
Bnd of Bori:-.g `J 22'
,Tatar � 3'
i
I
77� I nre:u.a r.:. . .n..t rearesent u,c 21 „au"�e•:+ reaarn;:we hcen mme REMARKS: --�
.snornsn e'r n..t.rry Lct w..tn rnl rn the MrA hoief at t:met eM nnles
r'/i`cs ans...-rs tv a��i al �nMrlroni t[ated-e hMrny lobs.
f lu C:uatt^.ns in •'te .eve1 of 7rounl-
wnt�rnaY(KCUr Lue t0 Iac.......r
;hnse pefent a1!ne lane nens
f CLIENT: MCPHAIL ASSOCIATES NEW ENGLAND BORING CONTRACTORS OF CT., INC. BORING No. B-4 129 KRIEGER LANE SHEET 1 OF 1
PROJECT NAME: 306 KING STREET GLASTONBURY,CT 06033
(203)633.4649 - (413) 733.1232 ARCHITECT/
LOCATION: NORTHAMPTON, MA FAX(2031657-8046 ENGINEER
DRILLER: S. Graves FILE NO. MCPHKING
Casing Sampler Core Barrel
INSPECTOR: T. Cormican TYPE HSA SS SURFACE ELEV.
SIZE I.D. 4-1 14" 1-3/8"
DATE START: 6-10-96 HAMMER WT. 140 LINE&STATION
HAMMER FALL 30"
DATE FINISH: 6-10-96 OFFSET
SAMPLE CASING
LOWS PER 6" BLOWS/ Well Installation
DEPTH B
No. RANGE LO SAMPLER REC. CTIMES FIELD CLASSIFICATION AND REMARKS Cons. Details
IN FEET 0-6 1 3-12 Ll 2-13 18-24 PER FT.
S', 5"-2'6" 3 4 4 4 13" Blacktop
t
Brown =?ne Crs. Sand and Gravel, Trace of
Silt
5
52 5'-7' 3 5 3 18" 2rov n 'Fine Send and Silt
10'-12' 3 4 5 7 24"
t.5
Gray --iay ar,:: ..:a
S4 15'-77' 3 5 0 3 -
2G'-22' 1 1 i 1 24"
22
End of^Bcrrna 22'
I1y
1
I
I
;a-_;. j it<:naot ca;wn i rs ep ese t c^/atn iGVd t e ocm maoe
REMARKS:
approximate b—ddy between—1 n the dnq hi—i S:ur-- GM undo
types Tl anLllon rtuy tK;s:�al. CorvlM1ions stereo on 1ne Dwmq logs.
fl�cwatiom m :M lG.d M gtwrW
wet et—y nGruf die to ta<tMi Jinn
"pan ttaasG Te:ent at:^e time me_s
.NMnI S wd a rtNle.
PA&E %5
CLIENT: MCPHAIL ASSOCIATES NEW ENGLAND BORING CONTRACTORS OF CT., INC. BORING No. B-3
PROJECT NAME: 306 KING STREET 129 KRIEGER LANE SHEET 1 OF 1
GLASTONBURY,CT 06033
I (203) 633-4649 -- (413)733-1232 - ARCHITECT/
LOCATION: NORTHAMPTON, MA FAX(203)657-8046 ENGINEER
DRILLER: S. Graves FILE NO. MCPHKING
Casing Sampler Core Barrel
INSPECTOR: T. COrmican TYPE HSA SS SURFACE ELEV.
SIZE I.O. 4-1/4" 1-3/8"
DATE START: 6-10-96 HAMMER WT. 140 LINE&STATION
DATE FINISH: 6-10-96 HAMMER FALL 30" OFFSET
SAMPLE CASING
DEPTH BLOWS PER 6" BLOWS/ Well Installation
No. RANGE ON SAMPLER REC. CORING FIELD CLASSIFICATION AND REMARKS
IN FEET TIMES Cons. Details
0.6 6-12 12-18 18-24 PER FT.
......................... .............
S1 6"-2'6" 8 3 8 5 113" Blacktop
.2
Brovm Fine - Crs. Sand and Crave[, Trace of
Silt
S2 5'-7* 3 4 8 11 24" Gray Fine Sand and Silt, Trace of Organics
e
Gray Fine Sand, Some Silt
i
I
I
4 4 4 7 21'
Gra. _; [ a ..d Clay
t
1
5'-717' 1 1 1 2 24"
- cf Ecr.ng @ 17'
I
I
i
i
I
i
':C'E S: 71 :ne rueCCOrnn�nr: •.ne:<"r:. �I '.vnt�ie.., •e ,n.re even nv;e nE%IARKS:
+one.,m,te courw>r�^:,roen: .n the dra:.yea.M:r„cs eno „nca
rroe+ uacons r.ur oe;aeo.r u,rwnlom r..:ea en vie bo.,nQ to::.
Nuctuet,cra 'ne iercl 01 7rourq.
r. n,ar—t die+o t.tore otne
.�.n nuae neon m•.ne G.x mee:-
,.,>.,c'.t:..�e made.
-- ?A &E- 14
CLIENT: MCPHAIL ASSOCIATES NEW ENGLAND BORING CONTRACTORS OF CT., INC. BORING No. B-2 j
129 KRIEGER LANE SHEET 2 OF 2
PROJECT NAME: 306 KING STREET GLASTONBURY,CT 06033 1
(203)633-4649 - (413)733-1232 ARCHITECT/
LOCATION: NORTHAMPTON, MA FAX(203)657.8046 ENGINEER
DRILLER: S. Graves' FILE NO. MCPHKING
Casing Sampler Core Barrel
INSPECTOR: T. Cormioan TYPE HSA SS SURFACE ELEV.
SIZE LD. 4-114" 1-3/8"
DATE START: 6-7-96 HAMMER WT. 140 LINE&STATION
HAMMER FALL 30"
DATE FINISH: 6-7-9 6 1 OFFSET
SAMPLE CASING
DEPTH BLOWS PER 6" BLOWS/ Well Installation
D
No. RANGE EPTH LO SAMPLER REC. CORING FIELD CLASSIFICATION AND REMARKS Cons. Details
TIMES
IN FEET
cc 0-6 6-12 12-18 18-24 PER FT.
r I
S13 E0'-62' A'CR 3 3 6 24"
I
I
w
S14 65'-67' 5 u 7 7 20"
i
i
13 i 7G'-72' 1 i 13 i 6 20" I Red brown Fine (vied. Sand, Some Crs. Sand,
Trace of Gravel rd Siit, Scme Till
! j i Top of Pcssib!e Eedrorl:
End of oorina @ 75', Roller Zit R--fusai
11 ION
� L
Vrater -.
ii
I
! i i
cuENT: MCPHAIL ASSOCIATES NEW ENGLAND BORING CONTRACTORS OF CT., INC. BORING No. B-2
129 KRIEGER LANE SHEET 1 OF 2
PROJECT NAME: 306 KING STREET GLASTONBURY,CT 06033 - _
(203)633-4649 — (413) 733.1232 ARCHITECT/
LOCATION: NORTHAMPTON, MA FAX(2031 657-8046 ENGINEER
DRILLER: S. Graves FILE NO. MCPHKING
Casing Sampler Core Barrel
INSPECTOR: T. Cormican TYPE HSA SS SURFACE ELEV.
SIZE I.D. 4.1/4" 1.318"
DATE START: 6-7-96 HAMMER WT. 140 LINE&STATION
HAMMER FALL 30"
DATE FINISH: 6-7-96 OFFSET
SAMPLE CASING
DEPTH BLOWS PER 6 BLOWS!
" CORING FIELD CLASSIFICATION AND REMARKS Well Installation
No RANGE ON SAMPLER REC. TIMES Cons. Details
IN FEET 1 0-6 1 6.12 12-18 18-24 PER FT.
r
6"-216- 7 7 3 4 181' Blar_ktop
i
I.Brown Fine - Crs. Sand and Gravel, Trace of
Silt
2.5
I
S2 7' -� 7 24" Cark Gray Siit and Fine Said, Tras of C'ay
4 I
Gray Fine Sand and Silt f
0' 2 3 T _ 0 24" I
Grad Slit ar-d -;ay
1
I(
l 1 i 7 3 1 24" I
I I
I
1
i
S 20' 1 1 1 2 24"
S:: -27' :OR ,VCR 2 24" 4
I
I
S: 20' 3-- "CR ,VCR ..C„ :VCR 24"
i I I
I
35' ':OR :VCR .,CR :"OR 24"
I
S3 40'-42' `:dOP, •rCR :;GR WOR 24" ;
t
S,--, �' ;OR .:CR .;CR ,IVOR 24"
' ;3.5
Red Brown Fire Sand and Silt and Clay
S1 0'-52' ,VOR I.VOR .:'OR 1 24"
S'..- 55'-57' '.VCR 1 2 24"
'•t- .,r, ... nr ,eYCfent:r. <r IevN esd.n7s love Deco mBdr: RE',1ARKS:
W! •.'e;.rAerY'e'w een s'rl n�ne doll hdes at limef and uMn
'rP.'s Jr...is Tdy' . .'::1 'AMtlOnl States on ttx poring i.11
r-i�c[uationf .n [M level of ptwtJ-
nyY oo Cn due[O lact�,f of him
r1 „��M=eVC sent et th!!rtv rt.ces
e mode.
VA&e ».
CLIENT: MCPHAIL ASSOCIATES NEW ENGLAND BORING CONTRACTORS OF CT., INC. BORING No. B-1
129 KRIEGER LANE SHEET 1 OF 1
PROJECT NAME: 306 KING STREET GLASTONBURY,CT 06033
(203)633-4649 -- (413) 733.1232 ARCHITECT/
LOCATION: NORTHAMPTON, MA FAX(203)657-8046 ENGINEER
DRILLER: S. Graves FILE NO. MCPHKING
Casing Sampler Core Barrel
INSPECTOR: T. Cormican TYPE HSA SS SURFACE ELEV. !
SIZE I.D. 4-114" 1-3/8" !I
DATE START: 6-10-96 HAMMER WT. 140 LINE&STATION
HAMMER FALL 30" '
GATE FINISH: 6-10-96
1 1 OFFSET
SAMPLE CASING
DEPTH BLOWS PER 6 BLOWS/
" Well Installation
RANGE ON SAMPLER REC, CORING FIELD CLASSIFICATION AND REMARKS Cons. Details j
+o. TIMES f
IN FEET 0.0 5.12 12-18 18-24 PER FT. I
S1 0'-2' 3 6 6 6 1A" Brovm Fine - Crs. Sand and Gravel, Trace of ��, 1 Roadway Box
Silt _.19'6" of 2" PVC;
j \,Riser
' ..I 2' Bentonite
5' 2 Gray Silt and Fine - Crs. Sand i Chip Seal
S_ 7'-?' !VOR 2 2 5 16" Brown Fine Sand and Sit'
10' of .010
s Slot 2" PVC
Gra; Clay and Silt — Screen
tiJ K2 Sand
i
20'-22' `.VOR .:CR VOR 1 24' Bottom C., .,
22
End of^Bring 22'
`.aler `u7 -�-
I! I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
':C'. _.i .c.,o"nenrs:osri••t:oe 21wam REMARKS.
+nt"c.�-mr� .. .n ct.c m:a oar.x umei aaa t,rnn
'vres .."stnns My? �a, conn:t:ons st afea en the noting lops.
FI',.Ct uanont in tb 'evN I qound
wn(r1 cuV(hCV�uC 14�;Ill( i ntl".t
:�,n itvtiC i er.t at;-.c me ir�ai
i ,:etnc,.i ere mi.Ie
Pf�c>r� it
ASSOCIATES,INC.
Geotechnical Engineers
APPENDIY, B
BORING LOGS PREPARED BY NE':N ENGLAND 'EORIi NG CONTRACTORS OF CT., INC.
M&F- Io
PROJECT NO.-_9_n____ (I
RECORD OF BOREHOLE_ r5-(D
' LOCATION SEE FIG.2 "DATUM DATE (spy/?(o _
SAMPLER WINNER WT.11.0 LB, DROP 30 IN. BORING MET MOD GCS%DW/4R"It4Ca
SOIL PROFILE SAMPLES = J= I
O <_ PIEZOMETER
O
OR
w ON
6
i a w LL <y i 2t.w. STANDPIPE
ELEVN DESCRIPTION r ; �,� om INSTALLATION
DEPTH a o w O<
_ <J
N m
i
i
-�-GtJtJD �jliRi rG'=
0.2
/
C PILL
IJ.l7
I1
I
i I
I I
1
1
I
1
REMARKS
VERTICAL SCALE Pfd_ McPHAIL ASSMATES, INC. DRAW N,��tY/R___
I IN.TO o FT. - ® 1� Consulting Gcoteehnieal Engineers CHECKED_A�` i
I z a j
?AbE 9
-'
PROJECT NO.--- i2
II
1
RECORD OF BOREHOLE - I
LOCATION SEE FIG.2 DATUM DATE
SAMPLER NAMMER WT.140 L& DROP 30 IN. BORING MET H00 WA- �1�4 li e�lp
SOIL PROFILE SAMPLES (l
J
Q= PIEZOMETER
W LL W O N OR
DEPTH DESCRIPTION JN ,.� STANDPIPE
Q O W O m
INSTALLATION it
L i
I�
I I
µ�
I I 1
i
7 G^ _ — /_
I � ! I
i
1
1
i l I j
' 1
j j I i i
1
REMARKS
vERTICAL $C___ � �
t IH.TO A4 F '� `� Consulting ASSOC;AT' S, :NC.
J 1 2 Ceotech„ical :n;ineers
PR bE 8
PROJECT NO.__' `
RECORD OF BOREHOLE -G
LOCATION SEE FtG.2 DATUM DATE
SAMPLER KAMMER WT.IRO LB. DROP 30 IN. BORING METHOD�z�1t1�SH?oINV::2
SOIL PROFILE SAMPLES
F v
o i z PIEZOMEiER �
O W 4 J O N OR
ELEVN a m w N "a �.w- STANOP(PE
DEPTH DESCRIPTION a # j u
¢_ O w O m INSTALLATION
J Q
U1 m Q J
_ I
T
7�`I/vJ"Vi r"r^Li
0.2
L=---:z;-Q-co llrtl C>Al O a'ti✓a
7
✓�
'ii(7
II i
I
I
l
I (
f
REMARK5
il`GR ✓iVil✓ iYvZ'�G / AT
YERTICAL SC-LE McPHAIL ASSWATES, INC. ;PAWN
t v.t0 4 Ft. Consulting Gectechrical Engineers
J I 2 3 4
�A Ire 1
I
PQOJECT NO._^_��2•__
RECORD OF BOREHOLE_ �-3
LOCATION SEE FIG.2 DATUM DATE X0/9(0
SAMPLER HAMMER WT. I40 L& DROP 301N. BORING METH0045E-DWASR LIN*,
SOIL PROFILE SAMPLES
u
«: o <= PIEZOMETER j
I ELEVN DESCRIPTION STANDPIPE
DEPTH a` 2 3 o m INSTALLATION
I I
1
i
9.o A-s
G.z I-A. 7 cr NAY P,4 ID
i
i t I
I
I
I
I
i
!
I ,
j i l I I
i
:Z E.64 KS
"I',A: t{ .ill'v'!i i GJ{it�li� �(7T�i v'.�:-i;J
�£R71C4L 5C-L=
I N.ro < - ".ScPH;,lL :+SEGCIATES. If�C. oRAwN
2 3 4 COnsultin; '3 rc!echnicai Engineers
�... PAGE b
. PROJCCT
RECORD OF BOREHOLE-
LOCATION SEE FIG.Z DATUM DATE Coll
SAMPLER HAMMER WT.140 LB. DROP 30 IK BORING METHOD GaSF_-p WASR P
f SOIL PROFILE SAMPLES
o
4E PIEZOMETER I
t O a w p N OR
E ,� ` w STANOPIPE
LEVN
DESCRIPTION '
# j N c m INSTALLATION
DEPTH
_ as
of m
41
All
1 I
I
I I
1
I I
i �
� I f
I
•O.O l_.Cii.1P�=CT <� ?r'%J"^!�. iI�?.� O�,p' I�
rl i'i,�.f StiNC;� �?�J�it �fl a'• �
� I
;EMARAS
vE4TIC?L SCALE �+, ,,,,,° ,� ',!CP;iiui. ;SSCC:AT:S, G!C. aawN
1 TO a FT. 2 3 a Csnsuiting G:�c;cr,:n'cai Engi.ecrs CHECKED_
PROJECT NO.-
S'r,�cT ► c;F 2
RECORD OF BOREHOLE 'r-5-2
LOCATION SEE FIG.2 DATUM DATE
SAMPLER HAMMER WT.140 Le. DROP 70 IN. BORING METHOOCA44-p W4Sif gZ LF �
SOIL PROFILE SAMPLES
M F z u
o'z-^ PIEZOR ETER
OR ELEVN DESCRIPTION ° a '� 'u STANOPIPE
DEPTH a o W'^ n m INSTALLATION
oa
-f, S�.LT
I � i
i
,EPT;C,%L SCALE C ' I
4 z7. '"" f•'_' rf.CPN:,IL ;S-QCIAT"S. INC. DRAWN
L,. 2 a �ons..'•inP _.._chnlcal Enginecrs CHECAEJ_
PR&E y
LVVLClrltil•ir 1VLV L.a.a�u ......��..._.
Northampton, Massachusetts I'WD%CLI Nu---------- -
RECORD OF BOREHOLE -! Co.w.>
LOCATION SEE FIG.2 DATUM DATE J'IU•O,:e
+ SAMPLER HAMMER WT. 140 LB. DROP 30 IK BORING METHOD WA5R *1�4(J
�s t
SOIL PROFILE SAMPLES i
" II
1 r o .4=_ PIE20METER
OR
ELEVN DESCRIPTION STANDPIPE
DEPTH a ; w+ti p` INSTALLATION
VI = m K J
�x1I
C
1.
.,yf7: 7'✓fY's l;"L::.�''F .!i!-2r;;/_ ..1 I I — '1 6' ` �l
/ L L
� I
! j i
I
1
1
REMARKS
iT ,:V.
'E-7T:C4' nn McPHAIL ASSCCIATES, INC. -kAWN_:,.•_1 R,---
I IN.TO a FT- c ConsuWn; Geotechnicat Enyinccrs
z A
MA 3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION I
'
i Northampton, Massachusetts December 16, 1-996
I
i .
ASSOCIATES,INC.
Geotechnical Engineers
APPENDIX A
BORING LOGS PREPARED BY MCPHAIL ASSOCIATES. !NC.
mss,
Sub-Surface Soil Investigation
Page 2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton,Massachusetts
SUB-SURFACE FOIL INVESTIGATION
SUB-SURFACE DATA
Sub-surface soil investigations were performed by McPhail Associates, Inc., Consulting Geotechnical Engineers
and New England Boring Contractors of CT, Inc. A copy of the boring logs are attached herewith. Boring
locations are indicated on the next page.
These logs were obtained only for the owner's use in design and are not part of the Contract Documents;the boring
logs are available for contractor's information but are not a warrant of sub-surface conditions.
The Geotechnical Engineering report prepared by McPhail Associates, Inc. for the City of Northampton is
available for review at the office of Juster Pope Frazier, 9 Ashfield Street, Shelburne Falls,MA 01370 and are also
not a part of the contract documents.
SUB-SURFACE SOIL INVESTIGATION PAGE 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION September 15, 1996
Northampton,Massachusetts
1.08 EXECUTION OF CONTRACTS
t
A. The General Bidder who is selected as General Contractor shall promptly confer with
the Owner on the question of Sub-Bidders; shall execute the Agreement with the Owner
within five(5) days, Saturdays, Sundays and legal holidays excluded, after presentation
thereof in accordance with his General Bid; and shall furnish with the executed
Agreement, a Performance Bond and also a Payment Bond, each of which shall be in
the sum of 100 percent of the Contract Price, and premiums for which are to be paid by
the General Contractor and are included in the Contract Price. The forms for the bonds
are contained herein. The Surety company must be qualified to do business under the
laws of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts and must be satisfactory to the Awarding
Authority. Attorneys-in-fact who sign bonds must file with each bond a certified and
effectively dated copy of their power-of-attorney.
B. In addition to the above, the following items are required to be furnished prior to the
execution of the contract:
1. Certificate by Corporation to Sign Contract
2. Tax Compliance Certification
3. Contractor's Certification
4. Letter of Intent
5. Subcontractor's Certification
6. Foreign Corporation Certification
1.09 SALES TAX
k A. Bidders shall not include in their Bid any tax imposed upon the sales or rentals or
tangible personal property in this Commonwealth, such as any and all building
materials, supplies, services and equipment required to construct and complete the
Work of this Contract.
1.10 PROPRIETARY MATERIALS
A. Attention is direct to the provisions of G.L. Chapter 30, Sec. 39M, which requires full
competition of each item of material to be furnished under contracts for public work,
excepting those items recorded in the public record of the Awarding Authority, deemed
to be in the public interest.
END OF SECTION 00100
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
00100-3
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION September 15, 1996
Northampton,Massachusetts
2. He has visited the site, has familiarized himself with the local conditions under .
which the Work is to be performed and has correlated his observations with the
requirements of the proposed Contract Documents.
3. His Bid is based upon the materials, systems, and equipment required by the
Bidding Documents without exception.
1.04 INTERPRETATION AND CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS.
A. Bidders and Sub-Bidders shall promptly notify the Architect of any ambiguity,
inconsistency or error which they may discover upon examination of the Bidding
Documents or the site and local conditions.
B. Bidders and Sub-Bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding
Documents shall make a written request which shall reach the architect at least seven
days prior to the date for receipt of Bids.
C. Any interpretations, corrections or change of the Bidding Documents will be made by
Addendum. Interpretations, corrections or changes of the Bidding Documents made in
any other manner will not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon such
interpretations, corrections and changes.
1.05 ADDENDA
A. Addenda will be sent by certified mail return receipt requested to all Bidders of record,
at the respective addresses furnished by the Bidders for such purposes.
B. Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents
are on file for that purpose.
C. No Addenda will be issued later than four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids
except any Addenda which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids.
D. Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting his Bid that he has received all Addenda
issued, and he shall acknowledge their receipt in his Bid.
1.06 GENERAL BIDS AND SUB-BIDS
A. All bids for this Project are subject to the provisions of either or both the Massachusetts
General Laws (Ter. Ed.), Chapter 30, Section 39M as amended and Chapter 149,
Sections 44A through 44L inclusive and Chapter 149, Sections 26 through 27D
inclusive.
B. All General Bids must include the following completed forms:
1. DCPO Certification and Update Statement
2. MBE Participation Schedule
1.07 RIGHT TO REJECT BIDS
A. The Awarding Authority reserves the right to reject any or all Bids if it be in the public
interest so to do. (C.149, Sec. 44E)
Aftk
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
00100-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton,Massachusetts
DOCUMENT 00100
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1.01 DEFINITIONS
A. All definitions set forth in the Conditions to the Contract for Construction, or in other
Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents.
B. Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the
execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by
additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections.
C. A Bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the work or designated portion
thereof for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the Bidding
Documents.
D. The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the
work described in the Bidding Documents as the base, to which work may be added or
from which work may be deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids.
E. An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or
deducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the work, as
described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted.
1.02 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
A. Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the issuing office
designated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid in the number and for the deposit
sum stated therein. The deposit will be returned to Bidders who return the Bidding
Documents in good condition within ten days after receipt of General Bids. The cost of
replacement of missing or damaged documents will be deducted from the deposit. A
Bidder receiving a Contract award may retain the Bidding Documents and his deposit
will be refunded.
B. Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids; neither the
Owner nor the Architect assume any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations
resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.
C. The Owner or the Architect in making copies of the Bidding Documents available on
the above terms do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not
confer a license or grant for any other use.
1.03 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS
A. Each Bidder by making his Bid represents that:
1. He has read and understands the bidding Documents and his Bid is made in
accordance therewith.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
00100-1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton, Massachusetts
Filed Sub-Bids are required for the following units of work:
1. Section 04200-Unit Masonry
2. Section 05500-Metal Fabrications
3. Section 07610-Copper Roofing
4. Section 08520-Aluminum Windows
5. Section 09310-Ceramic Tile
6. Section 09511 -Acoustical Panel Ceilings
7. Section 09651 -Resilient Tile flooring
8. Section 09900-Painting
9. Section 14240-Hydraulic Elevators
10. Section 15000-Fire Protection
11. Section 15400-Plumbing
12. Section 15600-Heating&Ventilation]
13. Section 16000-Electrical
Every General Bid and every Filed Sub-Bid shall be accompanied by a Bid Security equal to 5 percent of the Bid
amount in the form of a Bid Bond, Cash or a Certified, Treasurer's or Cashier's Check issued by a responsible US
bank or Trust Company,payable to the City of Northampton. Each Bidder shall attach the required Bid Bond or
Check to his Bid form.
The Bid Securities of all General Bidders,except those of the three lowest responsible and eligible General
Bidders, will be returned within five days, Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays excluded, after the opening of
General Bids.
The Bid Securities of all Filed Sub-Bidders, except those of the Sub-Bidders named in the General Bid of the three
lowest responsible and eligible General Bidders,and those of the three lowest responsible and eligible Sub-bidders
for each sub-trade, will be returned within five days, Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays excluded,after the
opening of General Bids.
The Awarding Authority reserves the right to reject any or all General Bids, if it be in the public interest so to do.
The Awarding Authority reserves the right to reject any or all Filed Sub-bids, if it is determined that such Sub-
Bid(s) does not represent the Sub-Bid of a person competent to perform the Work as specified(C149, Sec. 44E)
The successful General Bidder will be required to furnish a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond as required by
the Contract Documents.
All bids for this project are subject to the provisions of either or both the Massachusetts General Laws(Ter. Ed),
chapter 30, Section 39M as amended,Mass. G.L. Chapter 149, Sections 44A through 44L inclusive and Chapter
149, Section 26 through 27D inclusive. Attention is directed to the minimum wage rates to be paid for work on
this project, and to the minority Enterprise Goals set forth in the specifications.
All bids shall remain in effect for thirty(30)days, Saturdays, Sundays and legal holidays excluded, after the
opening of General Bids.
A pre-bid conference and tour of the site will be held on
Hall,Room , Northampton,Massachusetts at the Northampton City
Per order of
Mrs. Mary Ford
Mayor of Northampton
INVITATION TO BID
00020-2
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton,Massachusetts
INVITATION TO BID
The City of Northampton,the Awarding Authority,acting through the Fire Station Building Committee and The
Director of Buildings and Grounds, invites sealed bids for construction of a New Fire Station at King Street,
Northampton,Massachusetts,in accordance with the Contract Documents prepared by Juster Pope Frazier, 9
Ashfield Street, Shelburne Falls,MA 01370. The general scope of work for this Contract consists of construction
of a new 25,800 square foot fire station on a two acre site.
The estimated cost of the project is$3,100,000.00
The Work of this Contract is scheduled to be substantially completed on or before
Every General Bidder must be certified by the Department of Capital Planning and Operations(DCPO),and to be
considered, must submit with his or her bid, his or her DCPO Certification and Update Statement indicating
additional work or contracts performed or executed after the Certification Date.
Sealed bids for General Contract will be received at the office of the Director of Building and Grounds, City,Hall,
210 Main Street,Northampton,Massachusetts,01060,until EST, , 1996. All bids will
be publicly opened and read aloud immediately thereafter.
Sealed bids for Filed Sub-Bid Contract will be received at the office of the Director of Building and Grounds, City,
Hall, 210 Main Street,Northampton,Massachusetts,01060, until EST, , 1996. All bids
will be publicly opened and read aloud immediately thereafter.
Each General Bidder may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents, including Bid Forms,and each
Sub-Bidder may obtain complete set of the Bidding Documents, including Sub-Bid forms,after
EST, , 1996, at the office of the Architect, Juster Pope Frazier,9 Ashfield Street, Shelburne Falls,
MA 01370,upon deposit of$100.00 in the form of cash or a check made payable to the City of Northampton,for
each complete set of bidding documents. Additional sets may be purchased at cost and are not refundable. No
handling charges will be made for sets picked up at the Architect's office. Contract documents will be sent by
United Parcel service upon request,at a $50.00 per set shipping and handling charge. (Checks payable to Juster
Pope Frazier). Copies of Addenda will be mailed or delivered to registered Bidders without charge.
The full amount of each deposit for Bidding Documents will be refunded to each Bidder returning complete
Bidding Documents(including Addenda, if issued)to the office of Juster Pope Frazier, 9 Ashfield Street,
Shelburne Falls,MA 01370,in good condition,within ten days after the date of the General Bid opening. Deposits
for Bidding Documents will be forfeited if Bidding Documents are not returned within the specified time limit.
The Bidding Documents may be examined at the following places during normal business hours after issuance of
the Bidding Documents:
Justcr Pope Frazier Construction Industry Association of Western, MA, Inc.
9 Ashfield St. 96A Industry Ave.
Shelburne Falls,MA 01370 Springfield,MA 01104
413-625-2572
FW Dodge Corporation City of Northampton
181 Park Avenue Office of the Director of Building and Grounds
West Springfield,MA 01089 210 Main St.
413-788-8255 Northampton,MA 01060
413-586-6950
INVITATION TO BID 00020 - 1
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton,Massachusetts
*15300 Fire Protection 17
*15400 Plumbing
*15600 Heating, Ventilation & Air Conditioning 25 25
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
*16100 Electrical
27
*Denotes Filed Sub-Bid Required
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton,Massachusetts
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110 Steel Doors and Frames 6
08351 Folding Doors 3
08360 Sectional Overhead Doors 4
*08520 Aluminum Windows 8
08710 Door Hardware 19
08920 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls 8
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09255 Gypsum Board Assembly 9
*09310 Ceramic Tile 9
*09511 Acoustic Panel Ceilings 8
09670 Fluid Applied Flooring 3
*09651 Resilient Tile Flooring 8
*09900 Painting 15
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10100 Visual Display Boards 5
4
10155 Toilet Compartments 8
10270 Access Flooring 4
10350 Flagpoles 5
10505 Metal Lockers 3
10522 Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets, and Accessories 5
10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11452 Residential Appliances 6
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12372 Kitchen Casework 5
12511 Horizontal Louver Blinds 4
12900 Building Accessories 4
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (N/A)
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS
*14240 Hydraulic Elevators
8
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
NORTHAMPTON FIRE STATION Ucember 16, 1996
Northampton,Massachusetts
01700 Contract Closeout 5
DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK
02100 Site Preparation
02200 Earthwork 18
02511 Bituminous Concrete Paving
02513 Portland Cement Concrete Paving
02555 Water Service Construction
02722 Site Storm Sewerage System
02732 Site Sanitary Sewage System
02930 Seeding
02950 Trees, Plants & Ground Covers
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete 17
03450 Architectrual Precast Concrete -Bollards 10
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
*04200 Unit Masonry 21
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05120 Structural Steel 9
05310 Steel Deck 5
*05500 Metal Fabrications 9
DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTICS
06100 Rough Carpentry 8
06192 Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses 6
06200 Finish Carpentry 8
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
07111 Composite Sheet Waterproofing 6
07160 Bituminous Damppr000fing 4
07210 Building Insulation 5
07311 Asphalt Shingles 6
*07610 Copper Roofing 5
07901 Joint Sealants 7
TABLE OF CONTENTS 2
NORTHAMP'T'ON FIRE STATION December 16, 1996
Northampton,Massachusetts
ova*-, TABLE OF CONTENTS
BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
00020 Invitation to Bid 2
00100 Instructions to Bidders 3
Sub-Surface Soil Investigation 18
BIDDING FORMS
00300 Form for General Bid 4
00310 Form for Sub-Bid 4
00410 Bid Bond Form 2
00420 MBE Participation 1
CONTRACT FORMS
00500 Agreement Between Contractor and Owner 2
00510 Certification by Corporation Authorizing Execution of Contract 1
00520 Form for Subcontract Between Contractor and Subcontractor 3
00600 Tax Compliance Certification 1
OOW 00610 Performance Bond 2
00620 Payment Bond 2
00640 Letter of Intent 1
00650 Subcontractor's Certificatoin 1
00660 Foreign Corporation Certification 1
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00700 TOC- Table of Contents for Conditions to the Contract 4
00700 Conditions to the Contract 64
00800 Wage Rates
00810 Statement of Compliance
00820 Contractor Quarterly Projected Workforce Table
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01010 Summary of Work 2
01026 Unit Prices 2
01030 Alternates 2
01040 Coordination 3
01095 Reference Standards and Definitions 3
01300 Submittals 7
. 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 10
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1
^ < �% :
. 2� �
� � .
\ \ ��
. ��
. ��\ .
\ \ `�� .
. \\��
� \��\
« w`
. . .��
�\)
. §�\